JP7464344B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Slot machines have been known as one type of gaming machine for some time (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2015-016110 A

The problem this invention aims to solve is to improve the performance of the gaming machine.

The present invention solves the above-mentioned problems by the following means (the configurations of the corresponding embodiments are shown in parentheses).
The present invention ( eleventh embodiment) is
A main control means (main control board 50) is provided.
A sub-control means (sub-control board 80) is provided.
The main control means is capable of executing a main process (FIG. 97) and a timer interrupt process (interrupt process (FIG. 98));
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on), a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed is enabled;
The sub-control means is capable of storing information regarding the number of game media awarded between setting changes (in FIG. 196(a) , “c) Number of Outs”) for multiple times,
The sub-control means is capable of storing information regarding the number of times of play between setting changes (in FIG. 196(a) , “a) Number of times of play”) for a plurality of times,
Even if the setting change mode is executed by satisfying the predetermined conditions, the information on the number of game media awarded between multiple setting changes stored in the sub-control means is not cleared (FIG. 197).
Even if the setting change mode is executed by satisfying a predetermined condition, the information on the number of games played between multiple setting changes stored in the sub-control means is not cleared (FIG. 197).
It is characterized by:

This invention can improve the performance of the gaming machine.

1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine, which is an example of a gaming machine in a first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on a reel 31 in the first embodiment. 3A to 3C are diagrams showing a display window, effective lines, etc. in the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram (1) showing the types of roles, pattern combinations, payout amounts, etc. in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 shows the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, payout amounts, etc. in the first embodiment. FIG. 3 shows the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, payout amounts, etc. in the first embodiment. FIG. 4 shows the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, payout amounts, etc. in the first embodiment. FIG. 5 shows the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, payout amounts, etc. in the first embodiment. FIG. 6 shows the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, payout amounts, etc. in the first embodiment. FIG. 7 shows the types of roles, symbol combinations, payout amounts, etc. in the first embodiment. FIG. 8 shows the types of roles, symbol combinations, payout amounts, etc. in the first embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing pattern design combinations in the first embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram (1) showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning roles, etc. in the first embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram (2) showing the condition device numbers, the condition devices, and winning roles in the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the condition device numbers, the condition devices, and winning roles in the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the condition device numbers, the condition devices, and winning roles in the first embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the condition device numbers, the condition devices, and winning combinations in the first embodiment. FIG. 6 shows the condition device numbers, the condition devices, and winning combinations in the first embodiment. FIG. 7 shows the condition device numbers, the condition devices, and winning combinations in the first embodiment. FIG. 8 shows the condition device numbers, the condition devices, and winning combinations in the first embodiment. FIG. 9 shows the condition device numbers, the condition devices, and winning combinations in the first embodiment. FIG. 10 shows the condition device numbers, the condition devices, and winning combinations in the first embodiment. FIG. 11 shows the condition device numbers, the condition devices, and winning combinations in the first embodiment. FIG. 1 shows a number table (probability of winning for each winning number) in the first embodiment, and is a diagram (1) showing a non-RT and non-internal state. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the number table (probability of winning for each winning number) in the first embodiment, and is a diagram (2) showing non-RT and non-internal. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a number table (probability of winning for each winning number) in the first embodiment, and is a diagram (1) showing RT1 and non-inner. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the number table (the winning probability for each winning number) in the first embodiment, and is a diagram (2) showing RT1 and non-inner. FIG. 1 shows a number table (probability of winning for each winning number) in the first embodiment, and is a diagram (1) showing non-RT and inside 1BB. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the number setting table (the winning probability for each winning number) in the first embodiment, and is a diagram (2) showing non-RT and inside 1BB. FIG. 1 shows a number table (probability of winning for each winning number) in the first embodiment, and is a diagram (1) showing RT1 and the inside of 1BB. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the number setting table (the winning probability for each winning number) in the first embodiment, and FIG. 14 is a diagram showing RT1 and the inside of 1BB (2). FIG. 1 shows a number table (probability of winning for each winning number) in the first embodiment, and is a diagram (1) showing 1BB in operation and not inside RB. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the number setting table (the winning probability for each winning number) in the first embodiment, and is a diagram (2) showing 1BB in operation and not inside RB. FIG. 1 shows a number table (probability of winning for each winning number) in the first embodiment, and FIG. 2 shows RT2 (1BB in operation and inside RB). FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a number setting table (probability of winning for each winning number) in the first embodiment, and FIG. 14 is a diagram showing RT2 (1BB in operation and inside RB). FIG. 1 shows a number table (probability of winning for each winning number) in the first embodiment, and is a diagram (1) showing 1BB and RB in operation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the number setting table (the winning probability for each winning number) in the first embodiment, and is a diagram (2) showing 1BB and RB in operation. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing RT transition in the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an instruction function in the first embodiment. This figure shows an example of an image display when, in the first embodiment, it is decided to execute an AT during non-RT and 1BB internal play, and an attempt is made to win 1BB. FIG. 11 is an RT transition diagram in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, this is a time chart showing the relationship between RT transition, the start and end of the advantageous zone, and whether or not the AT is won. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the winning symbol combinations and payout numbers in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram (2) showing winning symbol combinations and payout numbers in the third embodiment. FIG. 3 shows the winning symbol combinations and payout numbers in the third embodiment. FIG. 4 shows the winning symbol combinations and payout numbers in the third embodiment. FIG. 5 shows the winning symbol combinations and payout numbers in the third embodiment. FIG. 6 shows the winning symbol combinations and payout numbers in the third embodiment. FIG. 7 shows the winning symbol combinations and payout numbers in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram (1) showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning roles, etc. in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram (2) showing the condition device numbers, the condition devices, and winning roles in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram (3) showing the condition device numbers, the condition devices, and winning roles in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram (4) showing the condition device numbers, the condition devices, and winning roles in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram (5) showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning roles, etc. in the third embodiment. FIG. 6 shows the condition device numbers, the condition devices, and winning combinations in the third embodiment. FIG. 7 shows the condition device numbers, the condition devices, and winning combinations in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a number table (probability of winning for each winning number) in the third embodiment, and is a diagram (1) showing the prescribed number "2" during non-RT and non-internal periods. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a number table (probability of winning for each winning number) in the third embodiment, and is a diagram (2) showing the prescribed number "2" during non-RT and non-internal periods. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a number table (probability of winning for each winning number) in the third embodiment, and is a diagram (1) showing the prescribed number "3" during non-RT and non-internal periods. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a number table (probability of winning for each winning number) in the third embodiment, and is a diagram (2) showing the prescribed number "3" during non-RT and non-internal periods. This is a figure showing a number setting table (probability of winning for each winning number) in the third embodiment, and is a figure (1) showing the specified number "3" within RT1 and 1BBB. This is a figure showing a number setting table (probability of winning for each winning number) in the third embodiment, and is a figure (2) showing the specified number "3" within RT1 and 1BBB. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a number table (probability of winning for each winning number) in the third embodiment, and is a diagram (1) showing the prescribed number "3" within non-RT and 1BBA. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a number table (probability of winning for each winning number) in the third embodiment, and is a diagram (2) showing the prescribed number "3" within non-RT and 1BBA. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a number table (probability of winning for each winning number) in the third embodiment, and is a diagram (1) showing the prescribed number "2" within non-RT and 1BBA. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a number table (probability of winning for each winning number) in the third embodiment, and is a diagram (2) showing the prescribed number "2" within non-RT and 1BBA. This is a figure showing a number setting table (probability of winning for each winning number) in the third embodiment, and is a figure (1) showing the specified number "2" within RT1 and 1BBB. This is a figure showing a number setting table (probability of winning for each winning number) in the third embodiment, and is a figure (2) showing the specified number "2" within RT1 and 1BBB. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a number setting table (probability of winning for each winning number) in the third embodiment, and is a diagram (1) showing the set number "3" during RBA operation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a number setting table (probability of winning for each winning number) in the third embodiment, and is a diagram (2) showing the set number "3" during RBA operation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a number setting table (probability of winning for each winning number) in the third embodiment, and is a diagram (1) showing the prescribed number "3" during RBB operation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a number setting table (probability of winning for each winning number) in the third embodiment, and is a diagram (2) showing the prescribed number "3" during RBB operation. A diagram showing RT transition in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing start-time processing for each main game state in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the processing at the time of full stop according to the main game state in the third embodiment. A flowchart showing the favorable zone clear counter management processing in step S2615 of Figure 75. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a slot machine in which push button activation management is performed by a timer in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a slot machine in which push button activation management is performed by feedback commands in the fourth embodiment. 1 is a time chart (example 1) showing push button activation management when the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a time chart (example 2) showing push button activation management when the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a time chart (example 3) showing push button validity management when the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a time chart (example 4) showing push button activation management when the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of a main CPU, a ROM, and an RWM in a fifth embodiment. A figure showing the address, label name, number of bytes, and name of data stored in the used area of the RWM in the fifth embodiment. A figure showing the address, label name, number of bytes, and name of data stored outside the used area of the RWM in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing the address, label name, number of bytes, and name of data stored outside the used area of the RWM in the fifth embodiment, and is a continuation of FIG. 85. 13A is a diagram showing various LEDs on a display board in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a management information display LED in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits 1 to 9 and segments A to G and P in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing signals output from output ports 2 to 7 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits and segments in the fifth embodiment. 13A is a diagram showing the relationship between LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) in the fifth embodiment and the signal output from output port 3, (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) in the fifth embodiment and the signal output from output port 6, and (C) is a diagram showing the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP) in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a program start process (M_PRG_START) in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a power return process (M_POWER_ON) in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an initialization process (M_INI_SET) according to the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a main process (M_MAIN) in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process (I_INTR) in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a blinking request flag generating process (S_LED_FLASH) in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a blinking/non-corresponding item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH) in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a rate display timer update process (S_RATE_TIME) in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a blinking bit check count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK) in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in a modified example of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing signals output from output ports 2 to 5 in a modified example of the fifth embodiment. A diagram showing the relationship between the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) and the signals output from the output ports 3 and 6 in a modified example of the fifth embodiment. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing the internal memory of a main CPU 55 in a sixth embodiment, in which (A) shows an overview of the internal memory and (B) shows an internal register area. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a detailed configuration of an F register. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a stack area in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing main instructions in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing aspects of an LDF instruction and an LD instruction. FIG. 2 illustrates aspects of a CALEX instruction. FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating an example of a conventional CALL instruction and a RET instruction. 13 is a flowchart showing a program start (M_PRG_SET) in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example in which a CALC instruction and a jump instruction are used. FIG. 23 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to a seventh embodiment. A diagram showing the ratio of operation button effects in the seventh embodiment. A diagram showing the ratio of operation button effects in the seventh embodiment. 23 is a diagram illustrating the flow of operation button presentation in the seventh embodiment. This is a continuation of Figure 124. This is a diagram explaining the flow of the first half performance (common to examples 1 to 4) in the eighth embodiment. A diagram explaining the flow of the second half performance (example 1) in the eighth embodiment. A diagram explaining the flow of the second half performance (example 2) in the eighth embodiment. A diagram explaining the flow of the second half performance (example 3) in the eighth embodiment. A diagram explaining the flow of the second half performance (example 4) in the eighth embodiment. This figure shows example 1 of a push order image when the push order is correct and when the push order is incorrect in the ninth embodiment. This figure shows example 2 of a push order image when the push order is correct and when the push order is incorrect in the ninth embodiment. This figure shows example 3 of a push order image when the push order is correct in the ninth embodiment. A diagram showing the arrangement of reels in a tenth embodiment. A diagram showing a display window, valid lines, etc. in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram (1) showing the winning symbol combinations and payout numbers in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 2 shows the winning symbol combinations and payout numbers in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 shows the winning symbol combinations and payout numbers in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 4 shows the winning symbol combinations and payout numbers in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram (1) showing the condition devices and winning roles in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the condition devices and winning roles in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the condition devices and winning roles in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram (4) showing the condition devices and winning roles in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 19 is a diagram (5) showing the condition devices and winning roles in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 19 is a diagram (6) showing the condition devices and winning roles in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram (7) showing the condition devices and winning roles in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a numerical representation table (non-RT(1)) in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a numerical representation table (non-RT(2)) in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a number table (RT1(1)) in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a number table (RT1(2)) in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a number table (RT2(1)) in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a number table (RT2(2)) in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a numerical representation table (RT3(1)) in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a number table (RT3(2)) in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a numerical representation table (RT4(1)) in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a number table (RT4(2)) in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a numerical setting table in the tenth embodiment (when 1BB-C or RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not in operation when 1BB-C is in operation (1)). A figure showing a number setting table in the tenth embodiment (when 1BB-C or RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not in operation when 1BB-C is in operation (2)). FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a number table (RT5(1)) in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a number table (RT5(2)) in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a number setting table in the tenth embodiment (when 1BB-E is in operation and RB-C and RB-D condition devices are not in operation (1)). FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a number setting table in the tenth embodiment (when 1BB-E is in operation and RB-C and RB-D condition devices are not in operation (2)). FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a number setting table in the tenth embodiment (RB-C or RB-D condition device in operation (1) when 1BB-E is in operation). FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a number setting table in the tenth embodiment (when RB-C or RB-D condition device is in operation (2) when 1BB-E is in operation). FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a number setting table in the tenth embodiment (when RB-A or RB-B is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated, or when RB-C or RB-D is activated when 1BB-E is activated (1). FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a number setting table in the tenth embodiment (when RB-A or RB-B is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated, or when RB-C or RB-D is activated when 1BB-E is activated (2). A figure showing a number setting table in the 10th embodiment (when SB is activated during non-RT (1)). A figure showing a number setting table in the 10th embodiment (when SB is activated during non-RT (2)). A figure showing a number setting table (when SB is activated during RT1 (1)) in the tenth embodiment. A figure showing a number setting table in the tenth embodiment (when SB is activated during RT1 (2)). FIG. 23 is an RT transition diagram in the tenth embodiment. A diagram showing RT variation conditions in the tenth embodiment. In the tenth embodiment, (1) is a diagram showing the payout rate in each game state, and (2) is a diagram showing the characteristics of each game state during non-AT. A time chart showing the performance pattern (1) at the end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation in the tenth embodiment. A time chart showing the performance pattern (2) at the end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation in the tenth embodiment. A time chart showing the performance pattern (3) at the end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation in the tenth embodiment. A time chart showing the performance pattern (4) at the end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation in the tenth embodiment. A time chart showing the performance pattern (5) at the end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation in the tenth embodiment. A time chart showing the performance pattern (6) at the end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation in the tenth embodiment. A time chart showing the performance pattern (7) at the end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation in the tenth embodiment. A figure showing the operational mode when the ``Aim for blue 7!'' effect is output in the tenth embodiment. A figure showing the output mode of an image indicating the type (pattern combination) of an activated 1BB condition device in the tenth embodiment. A figure showing the output form of an image display indicating the number of medals paid out in the tenth embodiment. A figure showing the output form of an image display indicating the number of medals paid out in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating control during freezing in the tenth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing the output pattern (1) of an external signal when transitioning to a chance zone in the tenth embodiment. 23 is a time chart showing the output pattern (2) of the external signal when transitioning to the chance zone in the tenth embodiment. 23 is a time chart showing the output pattern (3) of the external signal when transitioning to the chance zone in the tenth embodiment. 23 is a time chart showing the output pattern (4) of the external signal when transitioning to the chance zone in the tenth embodiment. A diagram showing items of logs stored for each game in the eleventh embodiment. A diagram showing the ball payout information between setting changes in the eleventh embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing information related to settings, and (b) is a diagram showing information related to power interruption. In the eleventh embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing information related to devices, and (b) is a diagram showing event information. A diagram showing the allocation of stored bits in the log stored for each game in the eleventh embodiment (for three reels). A diagram showing the allocation of stored bits in the log stored for each game in the eleventh embodiment (for 4 reels). In the eleventh embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing an example of the storage mode of ball payout information and information regarding settings between setting changes, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the storage mode of information regarding power outages. A diagram showing the stored contents of the RWM of the sub-control board and the clearing conditions in the eleventh embodiment. A diagram showing the arrangement of reels in a twelfth embodiment. A diagram showing a display window, valid lines, etc. in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 15 is a diagram (1) showing the winning symbol combinations and payout numbers in the 12th embodiment. FIG. 2 shows the winning symbol combinations and payout numbers in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 3 shows the winning symbol combinations and payout numbers in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 4 shows the winning symbol combinations and payout numbers in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 5 shows the winning symbol combinations and payout numbers in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 6 shows the winning symbol combinations and payout numbers in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram (1) showing the condition devices and winning roles in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the condition devices and winning roles in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the condition devices and winning roles in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram (4) showing the condition devices and winning roles in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 15 is a diagram (5) showing the condition devices and winning roles in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 16 is a diagram (6) showing the condition devices and winning roles in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram (7) showing the condition devices and winning roles in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 19 is a diagram (8) showing the condition devices and winning roles in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 19 is a diagram (9) showing the condition devices and winning roles in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 10 shows the condition devices and winning combinations in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 11 shows the condition devices and winning combinations in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 12 shows the condition devices and winning combinations in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 13 shows the condition devices and winning combinations in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a numeric table (non-RT and non-inner middle (1)) in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a numerical entry table (non-RT and non-internal middle (2)) in the twelfth embodiment. A figure showing a numerical entry table (non-RT and inside MB (1)) in the twelfth embodiment. A figure showing a numerical entry table (non-RT and inside MB (2)) in the twelfth embodiment. A figure showing the number placement table (MB play (1)) in the 12th embodiment. A figure showing the number placement table (MB play (2)) in the 12th embodiment. FIG. 23 is an RT transition diagram in the twelfth embodiment. A diagram showing RT variation conditions in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing a timer circuit and the like for executing an interrupt process in the thirteenth embodiment. 13 shows examples of programs for explaining interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission in the thirteenth embodiment, in which (A) and (B) show main processing programs, and (C) shows an interrupt processing program. 23 is a flowchart showing a program start (M_PRG_START) in the thirteenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a power return process (M_POWER_ON) in the thirteenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing an initialization process (M_INI_SET) in the thirteenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process (I_INTR) in the thirteenth embodiment. 23 is a time chart showing the relationship between an 8-bit counter and interrupt processing in the thirteenth embodiment, showing an example in which there is no interrupt inhibition period in the main processing. 23 is a time chart showing the relationship between an 8-bit counter and interrupt processing in the thirteenth embodiment, showing an example in which there is an interrupt disabled period in the main processing. 23 is a time chart showing an example (example 1) in which the 8-bit counter times out multiple times in the relationship between the 8-bit counter and interrupt processing in the thirteenth embodiment. 23 is a time chart showing an example (example 2) in which the 8-bit counter times out multiple times in the relationship between the 8-bit counter and interrupt processing in the thirteenth embodiment. 23 is a time chart showing an interrupt period when there is no interrupt inhibition period in the main process in the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example in which an interrupt prohibited period in the main process is set between interrupt process 1 and interrupt process 2 in the thirteenth embodiment. 23 is a time chart showing an example (example 1) in which the timing at which an interrupt process is scheduled to be executed is during an interrupt prohibited period in the thirteenth embodiment. 23 is a time chart showing an example (example 2) in which the timing at which an interrupt process is scheduled to be executed is during an interrupt prohibited period in the thirteenth embodiment. 23 is a time chart showing an example (example 3) in which the timing at which an interrupt process is scheduled to be executed is during an interrupt prohibited period in the thirteenth embodiment.

In this specification, the meanings of the terms are as follows:
A "bet" refers to placing a bet on medals (game media) to play a game. To bet medals, actual medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 47, or the bet switch 40 is operated to bet credited (stored) medals.
On the other hand, "credits (also called "reserves")" are different from the above-mentioned "bet" and refer to the storing of medals inside the slot machine 10. In this specification, the term "credits" is used in a sense that does not include "bet".
Furthermore, "inserting" refers to betting or crediting medals.
In addition, the "prescribed number" refers to the number of bets that can be placed to start (execute) the game in question. For example, in a game with a prescribed number of "2" or "3", the game can be started with either the bet number of "2" or "3", and the game cannot be played with the bet number of "1".
For ease of explanation, the "specified number" may also be referred to as the "number of bets."
On the other hand, the term "number of bets" may refer to something other than the "prescribed number." For example, in a game with a prescribed number of "2" or "3," when one medal is inserted (before the game starts), the number of bets is "1" (the number bet at that time).

"Maintenance" refers to the player inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 47 (described below).
A “care bet” refers to a player betting medals by care of the medals through the medal insertion slot 47 .
The term "care credit" refers to a player crediting medals (adding credits) by care of medals through the medal insertion slot 47.

"Bet Medals" refers to medals that have been bet on.
"Stored medals" refers to medals that have been credited (stored).
A "reserved bet" refers to a player operating a bet switch 40 (described below) to bet some or all of his/her credited medals to play a game, within the range that can be bet for that game.
The "automatic bet" refers to a process in which, when a replay wins, the slot machine 10 automatically bets the number of medals that was bet in the previous game through the control process.
Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to a small win is displayed stopped (meaning that it stops on a winning line; the same applies below), this is called a "winning small win."
On the other hand, the "Rules Concerning the Certification and Model Inspection of Gaming Machines (hereinafter simply referred to as the "Rules")" interprets that when a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed, this is the activation of a condition device related to replay, and not a "winning move."
However, in this application (this specification etc.), a replay is also treated as one of the roles (replay role), and the stopped display of a pattern combination corresponding to a replay may be referred to as a "winning replay."
The term "settlement" refers to paying out bet medals and/or accumulated medals to a player. In this embodiment, the settlement process is executed when a settlement switch 43 (described later) is operated.

"Payout" refers to the payment of medals to a player based on the winning combination, or the payment of medals through the above settlement. When medals are paid out to a player based on the winning combination, this includes both storing the medals as credits (adding stored medals, in other words, updating electronic data stored in the RWM 53 (described below)) and actually paying out medals from a payout port (not shown). For example, "50" medals are credited as the limit number, and any medals that exceed "50" are controlled to actually be paid out to the player.
In addition, "payout" may be referred to as "grantment." Therefore, the "number of payouts" may be referred to as the "number of grants."

In this embodiment, the "game medium" is a medal, but in the case of an enclosed (ECO) game machine, for example, electronic information (electronic medals, electronic data) is used as the game medium. Note that, for example, when money (banknotes) is inserted into a lending machine, the "electronic information" is converted into electronic information corresponding to the amount of money, and part or all of the electronic information can be credited to the game machine as game media for playing games on the game machine.
In addition, "gaming media" may also be referred to as "gaming value."

In addition, when the gaming medium is electronic information, "paying out medals" means crediting (adding) the medals to a gaming medium credit device installed in the gaming machine. Therefore, "paying out medals" does not only mean actually paying out medals from a hopper 35 (described below), but also includes the process of crediting (adding) electronic information of the payout amount corresponding to the winning combination to the gaming medium credit device.

When a game progresses from the "N-1" game, to the "N" game, to the "N+1" game, ... (where "N" is an integer of 2 or more), and the current game is the "N" game, the "N" game is referred to as the "current game." The "N-1" game is referred to as the "previous game." Furthermore, the "N+1" game is referred to as the "next game."

In this specification, a number with "(B)" added to the end (especially 8-bit) means a binary number. Similarly, a number with "(H)", "H" or "h" added to the end means a hexadecimal number. Specifically, for example, a number showing "16" in decimal is written as "00010000(B)" in binary, and as "10(H)", "10H" or "10h" in hexadecimal. Furthermore, a number showing a decimal number is written as "16(D)" as necessary.
However, when it is clear whether the number is binary, decimal, or hexadecimal, the final symbol "(B)", "(D)", "(H)", "H" or "h" may be omitted.

In addition, the probability that a desired symbol to be displayed on a pay line can be stopped on the pay line during the period from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated to the moment the reel 31 stops (maximum number of moving frames) is called the "pull-in rate (PB)."
Furthermore, unless the stop switch 42 is operated at an appropriate position on the reel 31 (at a timing at which the target symbol can be stopped on a winning line within the range of the maximum number of moving frames), the target symbol cannot be stopped on a winning line (pulled in to the winning line), which is referred to as "PB≠1."
In contrast, the ability to always stop (pull in) the target symbol on a valid line regardless of the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of the timing of operation of the stop switch 42) is called "PB=1."

Further, the "operation mode" of the stop switch 42 means the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed and/or the operation timing (the timing at which the stop switch is pressed to stop the target symbol on an active line).
Furthermore, the "advantageous operation mode" of the stop switch 42 refers to an operation mode that stops a symbol combination that has a payout or has a large payout amount, an operation mode that stops a symbol combination that transitions (promotes) to an advantageous RT, or an operation mode that stops a symbol combination that does not transition (fall) to an unfavorable RT, in a game in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 produces an advantageous/disadvantageous game result (symbol combination that stops on a winning line). The "advantageous operation mode" is also called the correct operation mode or the correct push order.

"Games in which the game outcome is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42" corresponds, for example, to a game in which multiple types of small prizes (bells) with different payout amounts are won (a game in which the so-called "push order bell" is won), and the type of small prize (bell) that is won differs (the number of payouts differs) depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42. It also corresponds, for example, to a game in which multiple types of replays are won (when multiple replays are won, a game in which the so-called "push order replay" is won), and the RT shifts depending on the type of replay that is won.

The "instruction function" refers to a function of instructing the player on the operation mode of the stop switch 42. In principle, the instruction function is a function of instructing the player on the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42.
In other words, the "indicating feature" refers to a device that facilitates winning.
In addition, "display" refers to visibly showing the contents of an "instruction," and "notification" refers to informing the player of the contents of the instruction. Therefore, the "instruction function" is both a "display function" and an "notification function."

Furthermore, the notification of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 may not be limited to the most advantageous operation mode. The notification of the most advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 may be the "activation of the instruction function", but the notification of any operation mode including the most advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 may be the "activation of the instruction function".
For example, if the push order bell has six options, the payout when the push order bell is won will be one, three, four, ten, or no prize (no win), depending on the push order.
Here, notifying the user of the order in which to press buttons to win a 10-coin winning combination is, of course, a notification of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42, and corresponds to the "operation of an instruction function."
On the other hand, notifying the button press sequence to win a 1-coin, 3-coin, or 4-coin prize may be considered as "notification of an advantageous operation mode (activation of the instruction function)" or not as "notification of an advantageous operation mode."

The push order for winning a 4-coin combination is not the most advantageous operation mode because it does not allow a 10-coin combination to be won. However, since the payout amount is "4" for the bet amount "3" and the difference in the number of coins for the game is "+1", it is an operation mode that increases the difference in the number of coins, and is not necessarily an unfavorable operation mode.
Similarly, the push order for winning a 3-coin combination is not the most advantageous operation mode because it does not allow a 10-coin combination to be won. However, since the payout amount is "3" for the bet amount "3" and the difference in the number of coins is maintained as it is (the difference in the number of coins is not decreased), it is not necessarily an unfavorable operation mode.

Similarly, the push order for winning a 1-coin combination is not the most advantageous operation mode because it does not result in a 10-coin combination. Furthermore, the payout amount is "1" for a bet amount of "3," which reduces the difference in the number of coins. However, this can also be said to be an operation mode that does not miss out on a combination, so it may not be an unfavorable operation mode.

In this embodiment, when the push order bell is won, the instruction function is activated to notify the player of the operation mode (correct push order) that will result in the winning combination with the highest payout amount.
However, for example, when the difference counter value (described later) during the advantageous zone approaches the upper limit value ("2400 (D)") but there is still room for the number of remaining plays in the advantageous zone (the advantageous zone clear counter value described later), when the push order bell is won, it is possible to announce the push order that will result in, for example, a three-coin or four-coin role, as described above, and to control the difference counter value so that it remains at its current state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the activation of the instruction function is limited to one specified number. For example, assume that the specified number for activating the instruction function is set to "3." In this case, in a game during the AT with a specified number of "2" or "3," if the game is started with a bet number of "3" and the push order bell is won, the instruction function can be activated. In contrast, when the game is started with a bet number of "2," the instruction function cannot be activated even if the push order bell is won.

The "game zone" includes a "normal zone (non-advantageous zone)" and a "advantageous zone". Note that the 5.9 machine had a "waiting zone" (a game zone where the player has won the advantageous zone lottery but has not yet moved to the advantageous zone), but the current rules for the 6 machine do not provide a "waiting zone". However, this is not limited to this, and game zones other than the normal zone and the advantageous zone may be provided.
The "normal section" refers to a play section in which signals related to the instruction function, specifically the push order instruction number and winning and replay condition device number (information that can determine the correct push order) described below, are prohibited from being sent to a peripheral board (e.g., sub-control board 80), and which does not affect the performance related to the instruction function at all (no processing related to the instruction function is executed). In other words, the normal section is a play section in which the operation mode cannot be notified. However, in addition to drawing lots for roles, a decision can be made (by drawing lots, etc.) as to whether or not to move to an advantageous section.

In the normal section, the instruction function must not be activated, so push order instruction information cannot be displayed on a specified display device (such as an LED) electrically connected to the main control board 60, and since signals related to the instruction function are not transmitted to the peripheral boards, advantageous operation modes cannot be displayed (notified) by the image display device 23 electrically connected to the sub-control board 80.

On the other hand, the "advantageous zone" is a play zone that has the capability related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be activated), and specifically refers to a play zone in which, when the instruction function is activated, a signal related to the instruction function can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 only when push order instruction information is displayed so that the instruction content (the operation mode of the stop switch 42) can be identified on the main control board 60. In other words, the advantageous zone is a play zone in which the instruction function can be activated (the instruction function may be activated), that is, a play zone in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 can be displayed (may be displayed).
However, the sub-control board 80 cannot output effects that contradict the instructions given by the main control board 60 or the signals related to the instruction functions that it has received.

Furthermore, even in a game in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 results in an advantage/disadvantage in the advantageous zone, the indication function does not have to be activated.
On the other hand, during a favorable zone, in a game in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 determines an advantage/disadvantage in the game result, the indication function may be constantly activated to display the operation mode of the stop switch 42.
The AT (notification game state) is a game state that notifies the operation mode of the stop switch 42 in a game in which an advantage/disadvantage occurs in the game result depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42. Therefore, the AT is always in an advantageous zone, and is not executed in a non-advantageous zone.

In addition, the AT may always (100%) report the operation mode of the stop switch 42 in a game in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 has an advantageous/disadvantageous effect on the game outcome; however, it is also possible that the AT may not report the operation mode of the stop switch 42 even in a game in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 has an advantageous/disadvantageous effect on the game outcome, for example, in order to keep the ball payout rate in a specified period within a range specified by the rules.
For example, if the upper limit value of the difference counter is approached during the AT but there are still AT games remaining, it may be possible to temporarily not notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42 (not activate the instruction function) from the standpoint of extending the life of the AT.

The relationship between the advantageous zone and the AT can be set in various ways. For example, the first setting is "advantageous zone = AT". In this case, winning the advantageous zone and winning the AT are equivalent. The AT starts from the first play in the advantageous zone. The AT ends when the advantageous zone ends.

Secondly, the AT can be set to "AT ≠ advantageous zone."
In this case, the condition for starting (executing) the AT is not satisfied simply by moving to the advantageous zone, and whether or not to execute the AT is determined by a lottery or the like, provided that the player is in the advantageous zone, and when it is decided to execute the AT, the AT is executed until the predetermined end condition of the AT is satisfied. In addition, when the player is not in the AT upon moving to the advantageous zone, the main game state may be set to, for example, the normal zone, premonition, CZ (chance zone (period in which it is easy to win the AT)), etc.

When transitioning to a premonition after transitioning to an advantageous zone, the game may always transition to the real premonition, and transition to the AT after a predetermined number of plays of the real premonition is completed. Alternatively, at the time of transition to an advantageous zone or after transitioning to an advantageous zone, whether the premonition is real or a false premonition may be determined by lottery or the like, and when the real premonition is determined, transition to the AT may be made after the end of the real premonition. Also, when the false premonition is determined, the advantageous zone may be maintained or transition to the normal zone may be made after the end of the false premonition.
Furthermore, when the AT termination condition is met, both the AT and the advantageous zone may be terminated. Alternatively, the AT may be terminated, but when the advantageous zone termination condition is not met, the advantageous zone may be continued (non-AT and advantageous zone). The same applies when the AT is started at the same time as the advantageous zone.

In addition, the number of plays in the advantageous zone is determined when the advantageous zone starts, and lotteries or the like related to the advantageous zone are not conducted during the advantageous zone.
Furthermore, when the advantageous zone starts, the initial number of plays in the advantageous zone is determined, and during the advantageous zone, a decision is made (by lottery, etc.) as to whether or not to add (add) to the (remaining) number of plays in the advantageous zone.
Furthermore, a specified end condition can be set for the advantageous zone, and when the specified end condition for the advantageous zone is met, the advantageous zone can be ended at that point, even if there are remaining number of plays in the advantageous zone (or remaining number of plays in the AT).

Here, the "predetermined end condition" of the advantageous zone is when the difference counter value described below exceeds "2400 (D)" or when the advantageous zone clear counter described below (number of plays during the advantageous zone) reaches "1500 (D)". When either of these conditions is met, it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous zone is met, and the next play will transition to the normal zone (non-advantageous zone). In this case, even if the final play is an AT, the AT will also end at the same time as the advantageous zone ends.

In the advantageous zone, a later-described advantageous zone display LED (also referred to as a "zone indicator") 77 is turned on. The advantageous zone display LED 77 may be turned on at all times during the advantageous zone, but may also be turned on when a predetermined lighting condition is met after transition to the advantageous zone.
Here, the "predetermined lighting condition" refers to, for example, when the indication function is activated in a game state in which the zone Sim payout rate exceeds "1." Note that once the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on, it remains turned on during the advantageous zone.

In addition, the "interval Sim (simulation) payout rate" is the payout rate when it is assumed that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is always stopped (even when the role of "PB ≠ 1" is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the role is stopped), and when there are multiple symbol combinations corresponding to the winning role, the symbol combination that is most advantageous to the player (when the push order bell is won, the high-eye bell that will pay out the maximum) is stopped. The calculation of the interval Sim payout rate does not include the payout (number of payouts) due to the operation of the role (1BB operation, etc.). In addition, in a game in which a replay is won, when the number of bets is "3", the number of payouts is counted as "0", and in a replay based on the winning of a replay (the next game after the game in which a replay is won), the number of bets is calculated as "0" and the number of payouts is "x"("x" is the number of payouts in the game). Alternatively, the number of payouts in a game in which a replay is won and the number of bets in the next game may not be counted.
Furthermore, the "game state in which the interval Sim payout rate exceeds "1"" includes an RT or main game state in which the interval Sim payout rate is set to exceed "1".
Here, an example of an RT in which the interval Sim payout rate exceeds "1" is an RT in which the probability of winning a replay is set high.
In addition, assuming that normal, CZ (chance zone), AT, pull-back zone, etc. are provided as main gaming states, the AT is an example of a main gaming state in which the zone Sim ball payout rate exceeds "1".

When the advantageous zone ends, more specifically, in the final play of the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned off, for example, during the play end check process described below, or during the play start set process for the next play of the final play of the advantageous zone. When the advantageous zone end condition is met, the advantageous zone display LED flag initialization process described below is executed, and the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned off in the subsequent interrupt process.

Examples of "processing related to favorable zones" include the following processing.
1) Drawing lots for (transition to) advantageous zones 2) Updating (subtracting, clearing) the advantageous zone clear counter
3) Update the difference counter (calculate, clear)
4) Updating the advantageous zone type flag 5) Controlling the advantageous zone display LED 77 (updating the advantageous zone display LED flag)

In addition, the "processing related to the instruction function" includes, for example, the following processing.
1) Display of push order instruction information (operation of instruction function)
2) AT lottery 3) In the case of a game number management type AT (a specification that ends the AT when the remaining number of games becomes "0"), the AT game number counter is updated (subtracted, added, cleared)
4) In the case of a difference number management type AT (a specification that ends the AT when the remaining difference number becomes "0"), update the AT difference number counter (subtract, add, clear)

And, the current rules stipulate that both the processing related to the advantageous zone and the processing related to the instruction function can be executed in one specified number in one game state (RT), except for the following: Therefore, in this embodiment, the specified number of "3" makes it possible to execute the processing related to the advantageous zone and the processing related to the instruction function, and the specified number of "2" makes it impossible to execute the processing related to the advantageous zone and the processing related to the instruction function.
However, during the favorable zone, updating of the favorable zone clear counter and updating of the difference counter must be performed regardless of which specified number.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the result of the lottery is not a winning combination (for example, when the winning number in FIG. 26 described later is "0"), in other words, when the condition device is not in operation, the process related to the advantageous zone (lottery for transition to the advantageous zone) is not executed. However, without being limited to this, the process related to the advantageous zone may be executed even if the result of the lottery is not a winning combination.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, even if the result of the role lottery is a non-winning result, if the probability of non-winning is a predetermined value or higher (when the probability is not extremely low, for example, 1/17,500 or higher), processing related to the instruction function (AT lottery processing) can be executed.

Furthermore, if the result of executing the advantageous zone transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous zone) is that the advantageous zone transition lottery is won, the advantageous zone will be entered from the next game. Therefore, in a game in which the advantageous zone transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous zone) is executed and the advantageous zone is won, the notification of the correct button press order (processing related to the instruction function) cannot be executed.
However, it is acceptable to perform the advantageous zone transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous zone) and the AT lottery (processing related to the instruction function) in one game. Furthermore, for example, when a specific role lottery result is obtained, it may be determined to be an advantageous zone and an AT (without executing the lottery).

The management information display LED (also called the "role ratio monitor" or "ratio display") 74 is, for example, made up of four LEDs, and is composed of a two-digit identification segment (an LED that displays which of the five items below it is, using a specified symbol or the like) and a two-digit ratio segment (an LED for displaying the calculated ratio).

The management information display LED 74 repeatedly displays the ratios of the following five items 1) to 5) at predetermined time intervals.
1) Either the advantageous zone ratio (cumulative) (7U.) or the instruction-included role ratio (cumulative) (7P.) 2) Continuous role ratio (6000 games) (6y.)
3) Ratio of special features (6000 games) (7y.)
4) Ratio of consecutive features (cumulative) (6A.)
5) Role Ratio (Cumulative) (7A.)

For example, when displaying the reel ratio (cumulative), if the ratio is "50"%, the symbol "7A." indicating the reel ratio (cumulative) is displayed in the identification segment, and "50" is displayed in the ratio segment.
Here, "cumulative" refers to the sum of the values that have been counted up to that point, and in this embodiment, counting continues until it reaches at least "175,000" games played. When the cumulative total is less than "175,000" games played, the ratio is displayed, for example, by blinking, and when it is "175,000" games played or more, the ratio is displayed, for example, by lighting up. Even after the cumulative total reaches "175,000" games played or more, it continues to be added until it reaches a value that can be stored in a specified address of RWM 53 (upper limit value).
In addition, "6000 games" refers to the total number of games played over 15 sets, each set consisting of "400" games.

The "profitable zone ratio" refers to the ratio (proportion) of time spent in the profitable zone to the total play zone (non-profitable zone + profitable zone). Specifically, for example, if the number of plays in the total play zone is "1000" and the number of plays in the profitable zone during that time is "700," the profitable zone ratio is "70%."
The "ratio of special features with instructions" is the sum of the payout number when the special feature is activated and the payout number in the game with the instruction function activated, divided by the total payout number. In slot machines without special features, the "ratio of special features with instructions" is the sum of the payout number in the game with the instruction function activated, divided by the total payout number.
The sum of the number of payouts when the device is activated and the number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated is counted by an instruction-included device counter.

Furthermore, the "number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated" is determined based on the operation of the stop switch 42 in the push order displayed by the activation of the instruction function; for example, when 10 bells are won, "10" is added to the instruction-included feature counter.
On the other hand, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a different pressing order from that displayed, and, for example, one bell is won, "1" is added to the instruction-included role counter.
Similarly, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is pressed in a different order from the displayed order and a winning combination is missed (when the combination is not won), the instruction-included combination counter is not incremented. In other words, the count value from the previous game remains the same.

When the common bell is won during the AT, the instruction function is activated in the same way as when the push order bell is won, and push order instruction information (dummy) is displayed on the winning number display LED 78, or the instruction function is not activated. And, if the instruction function is activated when the common bell is won, the number of payouts for that game is added to the instruction-included feature counter.

On the other hand, if the common bell is won and the instruction function is not activated, the payout number for that game will not be added to the instruction feature counter. However, the total payout number will be added to the counter. In this case, the sub-control board 80 may notify the correct button press order by image or sound.

Special roles (roles) include BB (first type of role continuous operation device; first type big bonus), RB (first type of special role; regular bonus), and MB (second type of role continuous operation device; second type big bonus).
Here, BB is a device that can operate RB continuously. That is, RB games are executed continuously during BB games. Furthermore, during RB games, the probability of winning a small prize increases. Furthermore, when the number of medals paid out during RB games exceeds a predetermined number, the RB game ends. Furthermore, when the number of medals paid out during BB games exceeds a predetermined number, the BB game ends.

The MB is a device that can continuously operate the CB (second type special role). In other words, the CB game is executed continuously during the MB game. Furthermore, during the CB game, regardless of the lottery result by the role selection means 61, all minor roles are won in duplicate, and for a specific reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31), the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated to the time the reel 31 stops is within 75 ms (the maximum number of moving frames is 1 frame). Furthermore, the CB game ends after one game, and when the number of medals paid out during the MB game exceeds a predetermined number, the MB game ends.

When a special combination is won, the winning information of the special combination is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the won special combination stops on an effective line.
A game in which a special role is not won is called a "non-internal game," and a game in which a special role is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the special role that has been won does not stop on an active line, i.e., a game in which the winning information of the special role is carried over, is called an "internal game."

In addition, if BB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB stops on a winning line (BB wins), no medals will be paid out in the current game, but BB game will start from the next game. During BB game, RB game is executed continuously, increasing the probability of winning a small prize. Then, when the number of medals paid out during BB game exceeds a predetermined number, BB game ends, and from the next game, the game returns to the game state before switching to BB game.

Furthermore, if the BB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the BB does not stop on an active line, the winning information of the BB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the BB stops on an active line. The game state in which the winning information of the BB is carried over is called "inside the BB".
The timing of the transition into the BB can be set appropriately. For example, the transition into the BB may be made after all the reels 31 have stopped in the game in which the BB has been won, or the transition into the BB may not be made in the game in which the BB has been won, but may be made in the next game.

In addition, if RB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to RB stops on a winning line (RB wins), no medals will be paid out in the current game, but RB game will start from the next game. During RB game, the probability of winning a small prize increases. Then, if the number of medals paid out during RB game exceeds a specified number, RB game ends, and from the next game, the game state before switching to RB game will be restored.

Furthermore, if the RB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the RB does not stop on a winning line, the winning information of the RB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the RB stops on a winning line. The game state in which the winning information of the RB is carried over is called "inside RB".
The timing of the transition into the RB can be set appropriately, similar to the timing of the transition into the BB. For example, the transition into the RB may be made after all the reels 31 have stopped in the game in which the RB has been won, or the transition into the RB may not be made in the game in which the RB has been won, but may be made in the next game.

Also, when MB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to MB stops on a winning line (MB wins), no medals are paid out in the current game, but MB game starts from the next game. During MB game, CB game is executed continuously. Then, when the number of medals paid out during MB game exceeds a predetermined number, MB game ends, and from the next game, the game returns to the game state before the transition to MB game.
Furthermore, if the MB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the MB does not stop on a winning line, the winning information of the MB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the MB stops on a winning line. The game state in which the winning information of the MB is carried over is called "inside MB".

"RT" means that the type (number) of roles to be selected and their winning probabilities are in a unique selection state, and "RT transition" means that the winning probability of at least one replay to be selected changes by transitioning from one RT to another RT.
Therefore, the type of replay and its winning probability in one RT are values specific to that RT, and the types of replays and their winning probabilities will not all be the same in one RT and another RT. However, it is acceptable for the total value of the winning probability of replays to be the same in one RT and another RT.
Note that "non-RT" does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but is equivalent to "RT0." Therefore, when "RT" is mentioned in this specification, it includes non-RT.

The "continuous feature ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts when the first type special feature (RB) is activated to the total number of payouts. Therefore, in this embodiment, it refers to the "number of payouts during 1BB activation to the total number of payouts."
For example, if the total number of payouts in 6000 games is 2000 coins, and of that, the number of payouts when the first type special feature (RB) is activated is 500 coins, then the "consecutive feature ratio (6000 games)" will be 25(%).

In addition, the "role ratio" refers to the ratio of the payout number when the role is activated to the total payout number. Here, "role" includes the above-mentioned first-class special role, as well as the second-class special role (CB), MB (also called 2BB. Second-class role continuous operation device. CB operates continuously.), and SB (single bonus).
In addition, in gaming machines that do not have the functions corresponding to the above five items, the ratio segment will be displayed as "--".
For example, if the reel is not equipped with an "RB (first type special reel)," there is no continuous reel ratio, so when the ratio display numbers "2" and "4" are displayed, the ratio segment is displayed as "--."
As described above, the management information display LED 74 displays five types of ratios, but displays a test pattern at a predetermined timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In addition, the rules stipulate that the ratio of advantageous zones and the ratio of instructed features must be 70% or less. It also states that the ratio of features must be 70% or less, and the ratio of consecutive features must be 60% or less.
Therefore, by looking at the information displayed on the management information display LED 74, it is possible to confirm whether or not the information falls within the range stipulated by the regulations.

In addition, gaming machines with specifications that set the advantageous zone ratio to 70% or less are called "7U" type, and gaming machines with specifications that set the instruction-included feature ratio to 70% or less are called "7P" type. Gaming machines with advantageous zones are either "7U" type or "7P" type. In the case of the "7U" type, the advantageous zone ratio (cumulative) is displayed on the management information display LED 74, and in the case of the "7P" type, the instruction-included feature ratio (cumulative) is displayed.
In the "7U" type, the ratio of the advantageous zone to the entire play period must be "70"% or less, but in the "7P" type, the number of payouts paid out by the operation of the instruction function and the operation of the device may be 70% or less of the total number of payouts, and for example, the entire period or most of the play period may be the advantageous zone.

For example, when moving to a non-favorable zone, it is possible to set it so that there is a 100% probability of winning the favorable zone lottery, or to set it so that there is an almost 100% (for example, about 98%) probability of winning the favorable zone lottery, or to set it so that there is a high probability (for example, 70%) of winning the favorable zone lottery.
The "7U" type cannot perform processing related to instruction functions (such as AT lottery) by referring to the set value itself, but the "7P" type can perform processing related to instruction functions by referring to the set value itself.

In addition, the management information display LED 74 can also be applied to pachinko gaming machines as a performance display monitor.
In this case, the management information display LED 74 (performance display monitor) is composed of a two-digit identification segment and a two-digit ratio segment, similar to the case of a slot machine (a reel-type gaming machine). It then displays the real-time (during measurement) base value (the "base value" indicates the number of safe balls per 100 out balls) for each "60,000" out balls, and the base values one time before, two times before, and three times before for each "60,000" balls in sequence. For example, the identification segment of the real-time base value is displayed as "bL.", the identification segment of the base value one time before is displayed as "b1.", the identification segment of the base value two times before is displayed as "b2.", and the identification segment of the base value three times before is displayed as "b3.".
In this way, the management information display LED 74 is not limited to slot machines, but is also applicable to pachinko machines.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, the first embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings.
The first embodiment is a slot machine that allows players to avoid winning a special role (1BB) that has been carried over from the previous win by changing the button press sequence.
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine 10 which is an example of a gaming machine according to the first embodiment.
Representative control boards provided in the slot machine 10 include a main control board 50 and a sub-control board 80.
The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and is equipped with an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, etc. (this does not mean that it is equipped with only those shown in FIG. 1).

1 , a main control board 50 and peripheral devices for game progress, including operation switches such as the bet switch 40, are electrically connected via an input port 51 or an output port 52. The input port 51 is a connection part to which signals from the operation switches and the like are input, and the output port 52 is a connection part to which signals are transmitted to peripheral devices such as the motor 32.
In FIG. 1, input peripheral devices are represented by arrows pointing from the signals from the peripheral devices to the main control board 50, and output peripheral devices are represented by arrows pointing from the main control board 50 to the peripheral devices (the same applies to the sub-control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium capable of storing (updating) various data (variables) based on the progress of the game, etc.
The ROM 54 is a storage medium for storing programs and various data (for example, data tables) necessary for the progress of the game.
The main CPU 55 refers to a CPU (an IC with calculation functions) provided on the main control board 50, which executes programs and performs calculations necessary for the progress of the game, and more specifically, performs the drawing of winning roles, drive control of the reels 31, and payouts when a prize is won.

Furthermore, an MPU including an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and a register is mounted on the main control board 50. The RWM 53 and the ROM 54 may be mounted inside the MPU or may be provided externally.
Incidentally, an MPU including an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub-CPU 85 is also mounted on a sub-control board 80, which will be described later. Incidentally, the RWM 83 and the ROM 84 may be provided externally instead of being mounted inside the MPU.

In FIG. 1, a medal inserted through a medal insertion port 47 is sent to the inside of a medal selector.
As shown in Figure 1, the medal selector is provided with a passage sensor 46, a blocker 45, and a deposit sensor 44 (a pair of deposit sensors 44a and 44b) (but is not limited to these), which are electrically connected to the main control board 50.
A medal inserted through the medal insertion port 47 is configured to be detected first by the passage sensor 46 .

Furthermore, a blocker 45 is provided downstream of the passage sensor 46. The blocker 45 is used to permit/prohibit the insertion of medals, and when the insertion of medals is not permitted, it forms a medal passage for returning medals inserted through the medal insertion port 47 from the payout port. In contrast, when the insertion of medals is permitted, it forms a medal passage for guiding medals inserted through the medal insertion port 47 to the hopper 35. The blocker 45 is composed of, for example, a switching member that blocks an opening (the opening leading to the medal return port) formed in part of the medal passage in the medal selector to form a medal passage for guiding medals to the hopper 35 side, and an actuator for driving the switching member, etc.

The blocker 45 does not permit the insertion of medals during play (from the time the reels 31 start to spin, until all reels 31 stop, and until the end of the payout corresponding to the winning combination, if a winning combination is achieved). In other words, the blocker 45 permits the insertion of medals at least when play is not being performed.

Inside the medal selector, a throw-in sensor (optical sensor) 44 is provided further downstream of the blocker 45. In this embodiment, the throw-in sensor 44 is made up of a pair of throw-in sensors 44a and 44b arranged at a predetermined distance apart, and is configured so that a medal is detected by one throw-in sensor 44a and then detected by the other throw-in sensor 44b a predetermined time later. Then, based on the timing at which the pair of throw-in sensors 44 turn on/off, it is determined whether the correct medal has been inserted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 is electrically connected to operation switches operated by the player, such as a bet switch 40 (40a or 40b), a start switch 41, a stop switch 42 (left, center, right), and a settlement switch 43.
Here, an "operation switch (or simply, "switch")" refers to a device (including an electrical circuit and/or electrical components) that switches an electrical signal on/off based on (receiving external force) the operation of an operating object by a player (operator), and does not limit the shape of the operating object operated by the player.

When the operation switch is in the OFF state, for example, light from the light-emitting element continues to be incident on the light-receiving element (when the light-receiving element continues to detect light, the operation switch is in the OFF state). Then, when the operation switch (the operating object) is operated by a player or the like, the light from the light-emitting element is no longer incident on the light-receiving element. When this state is detected, an electrical signal indicating that the operation switch has been turned ON is sent to the main control board 50. Note that, conversely to the above, the operation switch may be configured so that when the operation switch is in the OFF state, light from the light-emitting element does not enter the light-receiving element, and when light from the light-emitting element enters the light-receiving element, the switch is turned ON.

In this embodiment, the operating body of the start switch 41 is in the shape of a lever (rod) (hence, it is also referred to as the "start lever (switch) 41"), and the operating bodies of the bet switch 40, the stop switch 42, and the settlement switch 43 are in the shape of push buttons (hence, they are also referred to as the "bet button (switch) 40", the "stop button (switch) 42", and the "settlement button (switch) 43").

Although not shown in FIG. 1, an LED (light emitting means) is provided on the operating body of the operation switch and/or around or near it. When the operation of the operation switch is permitted, the LED corresponding to the operation switch emits blue light, for example, and when the operation of the operation switch is not permitted, the LED of the operation switch emits red light, for example, to indicate to the player the permitted/not permitted state of the operation switch.

Specifically, for example, when all reels 31 are spinning and the operation of the stop switches 42 is acceptable, the LEDs of all stop switches 42 are illuminated in blue to indicate to the player that they are operable. Then, when one stop switch 42 is operated, the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is controlled to stop. The remaining stop switches 42 are then operable after the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the stopped reel 31 ends and the detection sensor 42e of the operated stop switch 42 turns off. Therefore, during that time, the LEDs of all stop switches 42 are illuminated in red. Then, when the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 ends and the detection sensor 42e corresponding to that stop switch 42 turns off, the LED of the stop switch 42 that has already been operated continues to emit red light, but the LED of the stop switch 42 that has not yet been operated is illuminated in blue light.

The bet switch 40 is an operation switch operated by a player when betting the stored medals for the current game. In this embodiment, the bet switch 40 includes a 1 bet switch 40a for inserting one medal, and a 3 bet switch 40b for inserting three medals (the maximum number, the specified number).
However, this is not limiting, and a bet switch for betting two coins may be provided.

The specified number is determined in advance depending on, for example, when the reel is inactive/active. Specifically, it is set to three medals when the reel is inactive, when SB is active, and when 1BB is active, and two medals when 2BB is active. Operating the 1-bet switch 40a twice allows two medals to be inserted, and operating it three times allows three medals to be inserted. Also, when the specified number is three medals, operating the 3-bet switch 40b allows three medals to be inserted at once, and when the specified number is two medals, operating the 3-bet switch 40b allows two medals to be inserted at once. If the 3-bet switch 40b is operated when less than the specified number has already been bet, bet processing is performed so that the number of medals bet is three.

The start switch 41 is an operating switch that is operated by the player when starting all of the reels 31 (left, center, and right).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three reels 31 (left, center, and right), and are operation switches that are operated by the player when stopping the corresponding reel 31.
Furthermore, the settlement switch 43 is an operating switch that is operated by the player when paying out medals bet and/or accumulated (credited) inside the slot machine 10 .

As shown in Fig. 1, a display board 75 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. In reality, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected to each other, but the relay board is not shown in Fig. 1. In this way, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, or another board may be interposed between them.
Furthermore, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected to each other by a harness or the like, but may be connected via another board (relay board or the like). For example, one or more other boards (relay board or the like) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80.

The display board 75 is equipped with a credit number display LED 76 and an acquisition number display LED 78 .
The credit number display LED 76 is an LED that displays the number of medals stored (credited) inside the slot machine 10, and is composed of two digits, an upper digit and a lower digit.

The winning number display LED 78 is an LED that displays the payout number (the number of winnings won by the player) when a winning combination is achieved, and, like the credit number display LED 76, is composed of two digits, an upper digit and a lower digit.
The acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled to be turned off when there are no medals to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digit may be turned off and only the lower digit may display "0".

The acquisition number display LED 78 normally displays the acquisition number, but when an error occurs, it also functions as an LED that displays the content (type) of the error.
Furthermore, the acquisition number display LED 78 functions as an LED that displays push order instruction information (indicates advantageous push order) in a game in which the push order is notified during the AT. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 78 in this embodiment is an LED that also displays the acquisition number, error content, and push order instruction information. However, it is not limited to this, and it is of course possible to provide a dedicated LED for displaying push order instruction information.
During the AT, notification of advantageous button pressing sequences is also performed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80.

In FIG. 1, a main control board 50 is electrically connected to a motor (a stepping motor in this embodiment) 32 of the symbol display device and the like.
The symbol display device includes reels 31 (three in this embodiment) that display symbols, motors 32 that drive each of the reels 31 , and a reel sensor 33 that detects the position of the reels 31 .

The motor 32 serves as a driving means for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the rotation center of each reel 31, and is controlled by a reel control means 65 which will be described later.
Here, the reels 31 consist of a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31, and the stop switch 42 operated to stop the left reel 31 is the left stop switch 42, the stop switch 42 operated to stop the middle reel 31 is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 operated to stop the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.
The left reel 31 may be referred to as the first reel 31, the center reel 31 may be referred to as the second reel 31, and the right reel 31 may be referred to as the third reel 31.

The reel 31 is ring-shaped, and has a reel tape attached to its outer periphery on which a number of types of symbols (symbols constituting symbol combinations corresponding to winning combinations) are printed.
Each reel 31 is provided with one index (it may be two or more). The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the peripheral side of the reel 31, and is used to detect whether the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether it has made one rotation, etc. Each index is detected by a reel sensor 33. A signal from the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. When an index detects (breaks) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

The symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in advance in the ROM 54. This makes it possible to detect the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the index is detected. Furthermore, it becomes possible to identify how many pulses the (stepping) motor 32 needs to be driven from the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 in order to stop the symbol on the pay line, counting from the symbol on the reference position.

The main control board 50 is also electrically connected to a medal payout device. The medal payout device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 that is driven when medals in the hopper 35 are paid out from a payout port, and a payout sensor 37 for detecting medals paid out from the hopper motor 36.

The medals that are received through the medal insertion port 47 and accepted (determined to be normal) are configured to be stored in the hopper 35 .
In this embodiment, the payout sensor (optical sensor) 37 is made up of a pair of payout sensors 37a and 37b arranged at a predetermined distance apart. When a medal is paid out, a predetermined moving member is moved by the medal. The payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on/off by the movement of the predetermined moving member. Whether or not the medals have been paid out correctly is determined based on whether or not the payout sensors 37a and 37b have been turned on/off within a predetermined time range.

For example, when the pair of payout sensors 37 are not detected as being on even though the hopper motor 36 is being driven, it is determined that no medals have been paid out, and a hopper error (no medals) is detected.
On the other hand, when at least one of the payout sensors 37 continues to output an ON signal, it is detected that a medal jam has occurred.

When a player starts a game, he or she inserts medals that have been credited in advance by operating the bet switch 40 (accumulated bet) or inserts medals manually through the medal insertion slot 47 (maintenance bet). When the start switch 41 is operated with the specified number of medals for that game bet, a signal is generated at that time and input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 described below) receives this signal, it performs a lottery using the role selection means 61 and controls the drive of all motors 32 to rotate all reels 31. In this way, the reels 31 are rotated by the motors 32, and the symbols on the reels 31 are displayed moving up and down within the display window at a predetermined speed.

Then, the player presses a stop switch 42 to stop the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to that stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, the signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 described later) receives this signal, it drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to that stop switch 42, and controls the stop of the reel 31 related to that motor 32 so as to correspond to the lottery result of the role selection means 61 (the result determined by the internal selection means).

The game result of the current game is displayed based on the symbol combination when all reels 31 stop. Furthermore, when a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination stops on an active line (when that winning combination is won), the medals corresponding to the winning combination are paid out, etc.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described.
1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the following role selection means 61, etc. The following means in this embodiment are merely examples, and are not limited to the means shown in this embodiment.

The role selection means 61 selects (determines, selects) the winning number. Here, the "selection of the winning number by the role selection means 61" is the same as the "internal lottery" in the Entertainment and Amusement Act Regulations (regulations on the certification of gaming machines and the inspection of models, etc., hereinafter simply referred to as the "Regulations"). The result of the selection by the role selection means 61 is the same as the "result determined by the internal lottery" in the Regulations. Therefore, the role selection means 61 is also referred to as the "internal lottery means 61" in accordance with the Regulations.
When the winning number is determined by the role selection means 61, the winning and replay condition device number and the role condition device number are determined based on the winning number, and the winning and replay condition devices and the role condition devices that are operable in the game are determined. For this reason, the role selection means 61 is also called a condition device number determination (lottery or selection) means, a winning role determination (lottery or selection) means, etc.

The winning lottery means 61 includes, for example, a random number generating means for the lottery (such as a hardware random number generator), a random number extracting means for extracting the random numbers generated by the random number generating means, and a winning number determining means for determining the winning number based on the random number value extracted by the random number extracting means.

The random number generating means generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, "0" to "65535" in decimal). The random numbers are generated by a counter that performs one count every 200 n (nano) seconds, and continues to count the range of "0" to "65535" as one cycle, and continues to count random numbers while the slot machine 10 is powered on.

The random number extraction means extracts the random number generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, which in this embodiment is when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. The determination means compares the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means with a lottery table described later, and determines the winning number corresponding to the area to which the random number value belongs.

The winning flag control means 62 controls the on/off of the winning flag corresponding to each role based on the lottery results by the role selection means 61. In this embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each role for all roles. When any role is selected as a winning role in the lottery by the role selection means 61, the winning flag for that role is turned on (the winning flag is set). Note that winning roles can occur when there is one winning role (single win) or when there are multiple winning roles (multiple wins).

The push order instruction number selection means 63 selects (determines) a push order instruction number (a number corresponding to the correct push order) based on the result of the winning number selection by the role selection means 61 (when the push order bell or push order replay is won).
The "push order" of the push order instruction number selected here means the push order that is advantageous to the player (the correct push order). For example, when the push order bell is won, it refers to the push order that will result in a high bell (the correct push order). Also, when a replay is won multiple times, it refers to the push order that will promote the player to an advantageous RT or will not cause the player to fall into an unfavorable RT.

In this embodiment, each winning number is provided with its own unique push order instruction number.
Then, when the push order bell or push order replay is won during the AT, the main control board 50 displays push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number, specifically information such as "=*"("*" = 1, 2, ...), on the above-mentioned winning number display LED 78. In this way, the function of displaying push order instruction information when a condition device having an advantageous push order is activated is also called an instruction function.
In addition, when the push order bell or push order replay is won during the AT, the main control board 50 sends a command corresponding to the push order instruction number to the sub-control board 80 at the start of the game (after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning number is determined).
When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it displays an image of the correct button press sequence on the image display device 23.

Note that the push order instruction number selected by the main control board 50 can only be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 during the advantageous period (AT). Therefore, even if a push order instruction number is selected by the push order instruction number selection means 63 during the normal period, that push order instruction number will not be transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Note that it is not necessary to select a push order instruction number during the normal period.

The performance group number selection means 64 selects a performance group number corresponding to the winning number and is to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 .
Here, the effect group number corresponding to the winning number is determined in advance. Then, when the start switch 41 is operated to determine the winning number, the effect group number selection means 64 selects the effect group number corresponding to the winning number of the game, and the main control board 50 transmits the selected effect group number to the sub-control board 80. The sub-control board 80 outputs an effect related to the winning role based on the received effect group number. Unlike the push order instruction number, the effect group number is selected for each game and transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80.

In addition, the main control board 50 does not transmit the winning number of the game to the sub-control board 80. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 cannot know the winning number of the game. However, since the sub-control board 80 receives the effect group number for each game, it is possible to output an effect based on the received effect group number. However, even when the push order bell or push order replay is won, the correct push order cannot be determined from the effect group number, so the sub-control board 80 does not notify the correct push order based on the effect group number. In contrast, during the AT, when the push order bell or push order replay is won, the main control board 50 transmits a push order instruction number to the sub-control board 80. This allows the sub-control board 80 to notify the correct push order based on the received push order instruction number.

When the reel control means 65 receives a command to start rotating the reels 31, particularly when it detects operation of the start switch 41 in this embodiment, it controls all (three) reels 31 to start rotating.
Furthermore, after the winning number is determined by the role selection means 61, the reel control means 65 refers to the on/off state of the winning flag for the current game and selects a stop position determination table corresponding to the on/off state of the winning flag, and when the stop switch 42 is operated, determines the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 based on the timing when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, and drives and controls the motor 32 to stop the reel 31 at the determined position.

For example, in a game in which at least one winning flag is on, the reel control means 65 controls the reel 31 to stop within the range of the reel 31 stop control so that a symbol combination corresponding to a winning role (a role for which the winning flag is on) can be stopped on an active line, and controls the reel 31 to stop so that a symbol combination corresponding to a role other than the winning role (a role for which the winning flag is off) is not stopped on an active line.

Here, "within the range of the stopping control of the reel 31" means within the range of the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated to the moment the reel 31 actually stops or the amount of rotation of the reel 31 (the number of moving symbols (frames)).
In this embodiment, the reel 31 rotates at a constant speed of approximately 80 rotations per minute.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated to the moment the reel 31 is stopped is set to within 190 ms, except for a specific reel 31 during MB operation (for example, the center reel 31). As a result, in this embodiment, the maximum number of moving symbols from the symbol at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated to the moment the reel 31 is stopped is set to four symbols, except for a specific reel 31 during MB operation.

On the other hand, for a specific reel 31 during MB operation, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set to within 75 ms. As a result, for a specific reel 31 during MB operation, the maximum number of moving symbols from the symbol at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to one symbol.

Then, at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, if any of the symbols within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 is a symbol that should be stopped on a predetermined effective line, the symbol is controlled to stop on the predetermined effective line when the stop switch 42 is operated.
In other words, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated and the symbol of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number does not stop on the specified pay line, the reel 31 is controlled to rotate and move within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 until the reel 31 is stopped, so that the symbol of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number is stopped on the specified pay line as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

Conversely, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, and a symbol combination of a winning combination not corresponding to the winning number stops on an active line, the reel 31 is controlled to rotate and move within the range of the reel 31 stop control when the reel 31 stops, so that the symbol combination of a winning combination not corresponding to the winning number does not stop on an active line (kick-off stop control).
Furthermore, in a game in which multiple winning combinations are achieved (for example, when the push order bell is achieved), the priority of the winning combinations is predetermined according to the order of pushing the stop switch 42 and the timing of operating the stop switch 42, and the pulling-in stop control of the symbol associated with the most prioritized combination is performed according to the predetermined priority order.

The winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination on the reel 31 that has stopped on the pay line corresponds to any winning combination when the reel 31 stops.
Here, the winning determination means 66 does not actually detect whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has stopped on an active line. Specifically, based on the condition device operated in the game and the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and/or the operation timing of the stop switch 42, the winning determination means 66 determines in advance the symbol combination that will stop on an active line before the reel 31 actually stops, or determines in advance the symbol combination that will stop on an active line after the reel 31 stops.

The control command transmitting means 71 transmits to the sub-control board 80 information (control commands) required for the performance to be output by the sub-control board 80 .
Control commands include, for example, information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, push order instruction number (only during AT and when a winning number with the correct push order is won), performance group number, RT (game status) information, information when the stop switch 42 is operated, information on the winning role, etc.

In FIG. 1, a sub-control board 80 controls the selection and output of effects (information) during play and during game standby.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmitting means 71) transmits information (control commands) necessary for outputting the performance unidirectionally to the sub-control board 80 via parallel communication.
The main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, but may be connected using optical communication means. Furthermore, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, but may be serial communication, or serial communication and parallel communication may be used in combination.

Similar to the main control board 50, the sub-control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub-CPU 85.
The sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to the following performance peripheral devices such as the performance lamps 21 as shown in Fig. 1 via an input port 81 or an output port 82. However, the performance peripheral devices are not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium capable of temporarily storing data etc. that is acquired when the sub-CPU 85 controls the performance.
The ROM 84 is a storage medium that stores programs and various data, such as those used when conducting lotteries related to performance, as performance data.

The performance lamps 21 are, for example, LEDs, and light up in a predetermined pattern when a predetermined condition is met. The performance lamps 21 include back lamps that are arranged on the inner circumference of each reel 31 and illuminate the symbols displayed on the reels 31 (three consecutive symbols visible from above and below through the display window) from behind, fluorescent lamps that illuminate the symbols on the reels 31 from above the reels 31, and frame lamps that are arranged in front of the front door of the slot machine 10 and flash when a winning combination is achieved, etc.

The speaker 22 also outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to provide various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 consists of an LCD display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc., and displays various presentation images during play (such as correct button presses, presentations corresponding to the conditional devices activated in the game), game information (such as the number of plays and number of coins won when the reels are activated or during the advantageous zone (AT)), etc.

In the first embodiment, the special games (operation states of the role object) include a 1BB game (1BB operation state) and an RB game (RB operation state). Although the 1BB game (1BB operation state) and the RB game (RB operation state) are not strictly included in the RT, they may be considered as one of the RTs.
Furthermore, the RB in the first embodiment is a role drawn during a general game of the 1BB game (meaning a game other than the RB game in the 1BB game), and when the RB is won during the general game of the 1BB game and the RB is awarded, the game shifts from the general game to the RB game during the 1BB game. For this reason, the RB drawn during the general game of the 1BB game is also called an "SRB (shift RB)."

In the first embodiment, "when the device is not in operation" includes a state where the device has won but has not yet been activated. For example, when the device has not won 1BB, or when the device has won 1BB and is in 1BB but is not playing 1BB, it is called "when 1BB is not in operation", and when the device is playing 1BB, it is called "when 1BB is in operation". The same applies to RB.
In addition, the indication function can be activated and the push order suggestion effect can only be executed during the advantageous zone, and the indication function can not be activated and the push order suggestion effect cannot be executed in the non-advantageous zone (normal zone). Therefore, in the following, when the indication function is activated and the push order suggestion effect is executed, it is considered to be an advantageous zone.

In the first embodiment, the winning lottery means 61 executes a lottery for a "winning number". Therefore, the winning lottery means 61 is also called a "winning number lottery (determination, selection) means". Then, when the winning number is determined, a "condition device number" corresponding to the winning number is generated.
The "condition device number" (also called "winning information") includes a "game condition device number" and a "winning and replay condition device number." When the winning number is determined and the condition device number is generated, the condition device corresponding to the condition device number is activated, and the symbol combination of the winning combination corresponding to the activated condition device can be displayed on the winning line.

The winning numbers in the first embodiment include winning numbers "0" to "100"("0" corresponds to a non-winning number (a so-called loss)) as shown in, for example, FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 described later.
When the winning number is determined, a "condition device number" corresponding to the winning number is generated. For example, in FIG. 24, when the winning number "4" is determined, the bonus condition device number "1" (FIG. 13) and the winning and replay condition device number "2" (FIG. 14) are generated.

Fig. 2 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on the reel 31 in the first embodiment. As shown in Fig. 2, in the first embodiment, each reel 31 has 20 frames. In Fig. 2, symbol numbers are also shown.
In the first embodiment, the maximum number of moving symbols from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to "4".

Therefore, for example, if four specific symbols are arranged on one reel 31 at intervals of five symbols, the specific symbols can always be stopped on an active line, regardless of the position at which the stop switch 42 is operated. Specifically, on the left reel 31, "replays" are arranged at numbers 5, 10, 15, and 0. In other words, four "replays" are arranged at intervals of five symbols on the left reel 31. Therefore, for the left reel 31, "replays" can always be stopped on an active line, regardless of the timing at which the left stop switch 42 is operated. This type of symbol arrangement is sometimes referred to as a "PB = 1" arrangement. On the other hand, when the symbol arrangement is not like this, it is sometimes referred to as a "PB ≠ 1" arrangement.

On the left reel 31, "Replay" and "Bell A" are each arranged as "PB=1".
Additionally, on the center reel 31, "Replay", "Bell A", and "Bell B" are each arranged as "PB=1".
Furthermore, on the right reel 31, "Replay", "Bell A", and "Bell B" are each in the "PB=1" configuration.
Furthermore, on the center reel 31, the four symbols "blank" at No. 1, "black BAR" at No. 6, "red 7" at No. 11, and "cherry" at No. 16 are arranged as "PB=1" in total. Therefore, no matter when the center stop switch 42 is operated, any of "blank", "black BAR", "red 7" or "cherry" can be stopped on an active line. The same applies to the right reel 31.

Furthermore, on the center reel 31, the combination of the two symbols "watermelon A" or "watermelon B" forms a "PB=1" arrangement.
Furthermore, on the right reel 31, the combination of the three symbols "Blue BAR", "Watermelon A" or "Watermelon B" forms a "PB=1" arrangement.

FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the display window (transparent window) 18, the relative positions of the reels 31, and the pay lines (display lines that display symbol combinations).
The reels 31 arranged inside can be seen through the display window 18.
In this embodiment, three reels 31 (left reel 31, center reel 31, and right reel 31) are provided in parallel in the horizontal direction. Furthermore, each reel 31 is arranged so that three consecutive symbols can be seen from the display window 18. Therefore, a total of nine symbols (frames) can be seen from the display window 17 of the slot machine 10.

Figure 3 also illustrates the names of the symbol positions in this specification. In this specification, the symbol positions when the reels stop and can be seen through the display window 18 for each reel 31 are referred to as the "top row," "middle row," and "bottom row" from top to bottom, and for the left reel 31, they are referred to as the "top left row," "middle left row," and "bottom left row," respectively.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 3, pay lines are set for the nine symbols visible through the display window 18.
Here, the "active line" refers to a line of symbols arranged when the reel 31 stops, which is a symbol combination line (display line) that forms a symbol combination, and which is a line that wins a role when a symbol combination corresponding to a role stops on that line. In this embodiment, the specified number is three in any game state, and the active line is set to be the same in any game state.

In this embodiment, the effective line is a straight line that slopes downward to the right ("upper left" - "middle middle" - "lower right"). Any other lines are invalid.
The prescribed number may be different for each game state (for example, the prescribed number during 1BB operation may be set to "2 coins"). Furthermore, the position or number of active lines may be different for each game state or prescribed number (for example, multiple active lines may be provided for a specific prescribed number).

4 to 11 are diagrams showing types of winning combinations (such as winning combinations corresponding to winning numbers drawn by the winning combination drawing means 61), symbol combinations, payout numbers, etc. in the first embodiment.
First, as shown in FIG. 4, the game states in the first embodiment include when the reel is not activated, when 1BB is activated but RB (reel) is not activated, and when RB is activated, and the specified number of coins for each of these game states is set to "3".
In Figures 4 to 12, "3 coins (1)" corresponds to a state where the reel is not activated, and in the first embodiment in particular, corresponds to a game other than the 1BB game.

In addition, "3 coins (2)" corresponds to the time when 1BB is in operation (1BB game is in progress) but RB is not in operation. Furthermore, "3 coins (3)" corresponds to the time when 1BB is in operation (1BB game is in progress) and RB is in operation (RB game is in progress).
For example, in FIG. 4, 1BB with the role number "001" is eligible for the lottery when the specified number is 3 (1) (when the role is not activated), but is not eligible for the lottery when the specified number is 3 (2) or 3 (3).

In Fig. 4, the role numbers "001" to "003" correspond to special roles (roles). In this embodiment, one type of 1BB and two types of RB (RBA and RBB) are provided as special roles.
When 1BB is won when the device is not in operation, if 1BB is won, no medals are paid out in the current game, but from the next game, the game will move to 1BB operation (1BB game), which corresponds to a special game.
In addition, during 1BB operation (1BB game), RB is drawn by lottery. If RB is won during 1BB operation and RB is awarded, no medals are paid out in the current game, but the game will move to RB operation (RB game) during 1BB operation (1BB game) from the next game.

In addition, the state in which 1BB is in operation and RB is not in operation may be referred to as "general 1BB game." In the general 1BB game, the state in which RB is not won may be referred to as 1BB in operation and RB is not inside, and the state in which RB is won may be referred to as 1BB in operation and RB inside.
When the RB operation end condition is met, if the 1BB operation end condition is met, the 1BB operation ends and the game moves to when the gambling device is not in operation (normal game). On the other hand, when the RB operation end condition is met, if the 1BB operation end condition is not met, the game moves to when the 1BB operation is in operation (and the RB is not in operation).

The role number "004" shown in FIG. 4 to the role number "149" shown in FIG. 7 all correspond to replays (replay roles). In the first embodiment, replay types include replays 01 to 15. As shown in FIG. 4 to FIG. 7, when the role is not activated (3 coins (1)), and when RB is not activated while 1BB is activated (3 coins (2)), any of replays 01 to 15 are eligible for selection. In contrast, when RB is activated while 1BB is activated (3 coins (3)), no replay is selected.
In addition, the symbol combination of each replay is set to "PB=1." For example, the symbol combination of replay 03 is "Cherry"-"Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry"-"Bell A," but the "Cherry" on the left reel 31 and the "Bell A" on the right reel 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement. In addition, the "Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry" on the center reel 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement for these four symbols combined.

8 to 11 show the small prizes of the first embodiment. As the small prizes of the first embodiment, small prizes 001 to 118 are provided.
The payout amount for small prizes 001 to 008 is set to 7 coins when winning, which is the maximum payout amount for small prizes. Small prizes 001 to 008 are roles that become high-ranking bells when the so-called push order bell is won (described later).
In addition, the number of coins to be paid out when small prizes 009 to 117 are set to one coin, and these prizes result in a low-numbered bell when the so-called push order bell is won.
Furthermore, the small prize 118 is a special prize that is drawn only when 1BB and RB are activated, and the number of coins to be paid out when the prize is won is set to 1 coin.

For each of the above roles, there are roles that can be carried over to the next game and roles that cannot be carried over. 1BB and RB are roles that can be carried over to the next game, while small roles and replays are roles that cannot be carried over to the next game.

FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a pattern symbol combination in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, when the push order bell is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in an incorrect push order, the above-mentioned 1-piece role may be won, or the role may not be won (a miss). If the role is not won, one of the pattern symbol combinations shown in FIG. 12 is displayed. The pattern symbol combination is also called a miss. The details will be described later, but the pattern symbol combination is set as one of the RT transition conditions.
In FIG. 12, although the pattern symbol combination is not a winning combination itself, for convenience of explanation, a winning combination number is also given to the pattern symbol combination as a serial number of FIG. 4 to FIG.

13 to 23 are diagrams showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, etc.
First, the winning number is drawn by the role drawing means 61. The winning numbers include winning numbers "0" to "100", for example, as shown in Fig. 24 and Fig. 25 described later. For example, when the winning number "4" in Fig. 24 is won, the condition device "1BB" corresponding to the role condition device number "1" (Fig. 13) and the condition device "Replay B" corresponding to the winning and replay condition device number "2" (Fig. 14) become operable.

FIG. 13 shows a reel (particularly 1BB and RB in the first embodiment) condition device.
The 1BB condition device corresponding to the role condition device number "1" is a role condition device that can be operated when 1BB is won. When this 1BB condition device is activated, the winning role of 1BB can be won.
The remarks column in Fig. 13 shows the operation end condition of the bonus condition device. The 1BB condition device continues until the number of medals acquired exceeds 218, and when the number of medals acquired exceeds 218, the operation end condition of the 1BB condition device is satisfied and the operation of the 1BB condition device is ended.
Similarly, the RBA condition device and the RBB condition device both end upon eight winning combinations or twelve games being played, or upon the completion of the operation of the 1BB condition device.

14 to 23 show the winning and replay condition devices. Among the winning and replay condition device numbers, "1" to "19" are the condition device numbers related to replay, and "20" to "98" are the condition device numbers related to small winnings.
For example, the winning combination of the replay A condition device corresponding to the winning and replay condition device number "1" includes replays 01 to 07 (seven types of replays). In this way, when one condition device includes multiple winning combinations, when the condition device is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to all of the winning combinations may be made stoppable, or the symbol combinations corresponding to a part (at least one) of the winning combinations may be made stoppable.
In this embodiment, even if multiple types of replays are won in a duplicated manner, only one of the replays will win. Similarly, as described later, multiple types of small roles may be won in a duplicated manner, but in this case, in this embodiment, the small roles do not win in a duplicated manner, and only one of the small roles can win.

In the replay A condition device to the replay K condition device, the remarks column also shows the relationship between the push order and the stop pattern combination (type of replay). For example, "left 1st" in the remarks column means the first stop on the left.
In the first embodiment, a replay will win regardless of the pressing order (first stop on the left, first stop on the middle, first stop on the right).
Also, in the remarks column of the Replay A condition device to the Replay I condition device, while the first reel is stopped on the right, "?" and "O" indicate whether the "Blue BAR" can stop in the middle row or not ("O" indicates that the "Blue BAR" can stop in the middle row, and "?" indicates that the "Blue BAR" cannot stop in the middle row). A detailed explanation will be omitted, but in the first embodiment, during 1BB operation, when the Replay A to Replay I condition devices are activated, an effect is output that pushes the right (stops first on the right) and aims the "Blue BAR" at the middle row, and an effect suggesting an advantage is output according to the reel 31 and number of the "Blue BAR" stopped in the middle row.

The Replay A condition device includes Replays 01 to 07 as winning roles, and when the Replay A condition device is activated, in this embodiment, Replay 01 or Replay 02 is stopped when the first left or center stop occurs, and Replay 01 is stopped when the first right stop occurs.
The symbol combinations of Replay 01 are the combination numbers "004" to "007" in FIG. 4. Therefore, when Replay 01 wins, "Replay" - "Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry" - "Bell A" stop on the active line. When the center reel 31 stops and "Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry" stops on the active line (middle middle row), "Replay" stops on the middle upper row. Also, when the right reel 31 stops and "Bell A" stops on the active line (lower right row), "Replay" stops on the upper right row. Therefore, when the symbol combination of Replay 01 stops on the active line (Replay 01 wins), "Replay" - "Replay" - "Replay" (upper row replay) stops on the upper row line (invalid line).
On the other hand, when Replay 02 wins, "Replay"-"Replay"-"Replay" stops on the winning line.

Note that since both Replay 01 and Replay 02 are "PB=1", either one can be stopped. Therefore, when the Replay A condition device is activated, when the left or center first stop occurs, Replay 01 or Replay 02 is stopped depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed and the timing of its operation, diversifying the stop results. This also applies to the left or center first stop occurs when the Replay B to Replay K condition devices are activated, as explained below.

In addition, when the replay A condition device is activated, the "blue BAR" does not stop in the middle of any of the reels 31 when the right first stop occurs. When the right reel 31 stops, if the right stop switch 42 is operated to aim for the No. 4 "blue BAR" in the middle, the No. 3 "bell B" does not stop in the lower right row, and the No. 5 "bell A" stops in the lower right row. Similarly, when the center reel 31 stops, if the center stop switch 42 is operated to aim for the No. 19 "blue BAR" in the middle row, the No. 19 "blue BAR" does not stop in the middle-middle row, and the No. 1 "blank" stops in the middle-middle row.
Similarly, when the left reel 31 stops, if the left stop switch 42 is operated to aim for the No. 16 "Blue BAR" in the middle row, the No. 17 "Cherry" does not stop in the upper left row, and the No. 0 "Replay" stops in the upper left row. This causes Replay 01 to stop.

The Replay B condition device includes Replay 01 to Replay 08 as winning combinations, and the stop control is the same as when the Replay A condition device is activated. Also, when the replay is reversed, the "Blue BAR" does not stop in the middle row, as when the Replay A condition device is activated.
The Replay C condition device includes Replay 01 to Replay 07 and Replay 09 as winning roles, and when the Replay C condition device is activated, Replay 01 or Replay 02 can be stopped when the left or center first stops, and Replay 04 can be stopped when the right first stops.

When the Replay C condition device is activated, as shown in Figure 14, on the first right stop, only the right reel 31 will stop with the "Blue BAR" in the middle row. When the right reel 31 stops, if the right stop switch 42 is operated aiming for the No. 4 "Blue BAR" in the middle row, the right reel 31 will stop at that position and the No. 3 "Bell B" will stop in the lower right row (active line). In addition, the "Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry" will stop in the middle row, but the "Blue BAR" will not stop. Furthermore, the "Cherry/Bell A" will stop in the upper left row, and the "Blue BAR" will not stop in the middle left row.

The Replay D condition device includes Replay 01 to Replay 07 and Replay 10 as winning roles, and when the Replay D condition device is activated, Replay 01 or Replay 02 can be stopped when the first left or center stop occurs, and Replay 05 with role number "021" can be stopped when the first right stop occurs.
When the Replay D condition device is activated and the first right reel stops, only the center reel 31 can stop the "Blue BAR" in the middle row. On the other hand, if the right reel 31 stops and the "Blue BAR" number 4 is aimed at the middle row, it will not stop at this position (the "Bell B" number 3 will not stop on the lower right row), and the "Bell A" will stop on the lower right row. Also, the "Replay" will stop on the upper left row, and the "Blue BAR" will not stop on the middle left row. This causes Replay 05 with the role number "021" to stop.

The Replay E condition device includes Replay 01 to Replay 07 and Replay 11 as winning roles, and when the Replay E condition device is activated, Replay 01 or Replay 02 can be stopped when the first left or center stop occurs, and Replay 03 can be stopped when the first right stop occurs.
When the replay E condition device is activated and the first right stop occurs, only the left reel 31 can have a "Blue BAR" stop in the middle left row. When the "Blue BAR" stops in the middle left row, a "Cherry" stops in the upper left row (active line). In addition, a "Bell A" stops on the active line on the right reel 31, and a "Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry" stop on the active line on the center reel 31.
The Replay F condition device includes Replay 01 to Replay 07 and Replay 12 as winning roles, and when the Replay F condition device is activated, Replay 01 or Replay 02 can be stopped when the first left or center stop occurs, and Replay 05 with role number "022" can be stopped when the first right stop occurs.

When the first right reel stops while the Replay F condition device is activated, a "Blue BAR" can stop in the middle of the right and middle reels 31. When a "Blue BAR" stops in the middle of the right reel 31, a "Bell B" stops in the lower right row. When the middle reel 31 stops, a "Blue BAR" stops in the middle row. Furthermore, when the left reel 31 stops, a "Replay" stops in the upper left row, but a "Blue BAR" does not stop in the middle left row. This causes Replay 05 with role number "022" to stop.

The Replay G condition device includes Replay 01 to Replay 07 and Replay 13 as winning roles, and when the Replay G condition device is activated, Replay 01 or Replay 02 can be stopped when the first left or center stop occurs, and Replay 04 can be stopped when the first right stop occurs.
When the replay G condition device is activated and the right reel stops first, the "Blue BAR" can be stopped in the middle of the right and left reels 31. If the "Blue BAR" stops in the right middle row when the right reel 31 stops, the "Bell B" will stop in the lower right row. Also, if you aim for the "Blue BAR" in the middle row when the middle reel 31 stops, the "Blue BAR" will not stop, but "Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry" will stop. Furthermore, if the "Blue BAR" stops in the left middle row when the left reel 31 stops, the "Cherry" will stop in the upper left row.

The Replay H condition device includes Replay 01 to Replay 07 and Replay 14 as winning roles, and when the Replay H condition device is activated, Replay 01 or Replay 02 can be stopped when the first left or center stop occurs, and Replay 05 can be stopped when the first right stop occurs.
When the replay H condition device is activated and the right first reel stops, the "Blue BAR" can be stopped in the middle row of the center and left reels 31. When the right reel 31 stops, the "Bell A" stops in the lower right row, and the "Blue BAR" does not stop in the middle right row.
Also, if you aim for "Blue BAR" in the middle middle row when the center reel 31 stops, it will stop at that position. Furthermore, if you aim for "Blue BAR" in the left middle row when the left reel 31 stops, it will stop at that position, and "Cherry" will stop in the upper left row. This causes Replay 05 with the role number "023" to stop.

The Replay I condition device includes Replay 01 to Replay 07 and Replay 15 as winning roles, and when the Replay I condition device is activated, Replay 01 or Replay 02 can be stopped when the first left or center stop occurs, and Replay 05 can be stopped when the first right stop occurs.
When the replay I condition device is activated and the right first stop occurs, the "Blue BAR" can be stopped in the middle of the right, center, and left reels 31. When the right reel 31 stops, if you aim for the "Blue BAR" in the middle right row, it will stop in that position, and the "Bell B" will stop in the lower right row.
Also, if you aim for a "Blue BAR" in the middle middle row when the center reel 31 stops, it will stop in that position. Furthermore, if you aim for a "Blue BAR" in the left middle row when the left reel 31 stops, it will stop in that position, and a "Cherry" will stop in the upper left row. This will result in a "Blue BAR" line on the middle row, and Replay 05 with the role number "024" will stop.

The Replay J condition device includes Replay 01, Replay 02, and Replay 15 as winning roles, and when the Replay J condition device is activated, Replay 01 or Replay 02 can be stopped when the first left or center stop occurs, and Replay 15 can be stopped when the first right stop occurs.
Furthermore, when the right reel stops first, a "red 7" can stop in the middle of the right, middle and left reels 31. When a "red 7" stops in the middle of the right reel 31, a "bell A" stops in the lower right row. Also, if you aim for a "red 7" in the middle of the middle reel 31, it will stop in that position. Furthermore, if you aim for a "red 7" in the middle of the left reel 31, it will stop in that position, and a "bell B" will stop in the upper left row. As a result, a replay 15 with the winning combination number "147" will stop, and a "red 7" set will stop in the middle row.
For example, when a condition advantageous to the player is met, such as winning a lottery related to the AT (adding to the number of AT plays, etc.), when the replay J condition device is activated, an effect is outputted to the player to press the "red 7" and a line of "red 7" is shown.

The Replay K condition device includes Replay 01 and Replay 02 as winning roles, and when the Replay K condition device is activated, Replay 01 or Replay 02 can be stopped when the first left or center stop occurs, and Replay 01 can be stopped when the first right stop occurs.
Furthermore, when the right reel stops first, "Red 7" can be stopped in the middle of the right and middle reels 31, but "Red 7" does not stop in the middle of the left reel 31. When "Red 7" stops in the middle of the right reel 31, "Bell A" stops in the lower right. Also, "Red 7" can be stopped in the middle of the middle reel 31. Furthermore, when aiming for "Red 7" in the middle of the left reel 31, "Replay" No. 15 stops in the upper left, and "Red 7" does not stop in the middle left. As a result, Replay 01 with role number "005" stops.
When the replay K condition device is activated, similarly to when the replay J condition device is activated, an effect is outputted to prompt the player to press the "red 7" to prevent the "red 7" from being lined up.

When the replay L condition device is activated, the replay 08 is stopped on the active line. When the replay 08 is stopped on the active line, "Watermelon A/Watermelon B"-"Watermelon A/Watermelon B"-"Watermelon A/Watermelon B" can be stopped on the active line.
In addition, when the Replay M condition device is activated, Replay 09 is stopped on the active line. Here, when Replay 09 is stopped on the active line, the watermelon symbols do not line up on the active line, but "Watermelon A/Watermelon B"-"Watermelon A/Watermelon B"-"Watermelon A/Watermelon B" can be stopped on the "upper left row"-"middle middle row"-"upper right row".

When the Replay N condition device is activated, Replay 06 can be stopped, and a chance combination consisting of "Replay"-"Bell A/Bell B"-"Bell A/Bell B" is stopped on the activated line.
When the replay O condition device is activated, replay 07 can be stopped, and similarly to when the replay N condition device is activated, a chance eye consisting of "replay"-"Bell A/Bell B"-"Bell A/Bell B" is stopped on the active line.
When the replay P condition device is activated, the replay 10 can be stopped, and the chance combination consisting of "replay"-"watermelon A/watermelon B"-"watermelon A/watermelon B" is stopped on the active line.
The reliability of the chance symbol is "Strong chance symbol>Chance symbol A ≒ Chance symbol B". In FIG. 24 described later, when the winning numbers "16" to "18" are won, the chance symbol appears and the AT lottery is executed. Therefore, the AT winning expectation is "Winning number "18"> Winning number "16" ≒ "17".

The Replay Q condition device includes Replay 11 and Replay 12 as winning combinations, and when the Replay Q condition device is activated, Replay 11 or Replay 12 is stopped. When the left reel 31 stops, if a "Cherry" is aimed at the upper left row (Replay 11), it stops at that position. Also, when the left reel 31 stops, if a "Bell A" is aimed at the upper left row (Replay 12), it stops at that position, and a "Cherry" stops at the lower left row. The stopped shape of the "Cherry" at the upper left row or lower left row (corner cherry) represents a weak cherry.
The Replay R condition device includes Replay 11 to Replay 13 as winning combinations, and when the Replay R condition device is activated, it stops either Replay 11 or Replay 13. When the left reel 31 stops, it can stop the number 8 or 18 "blank" (Replay 13) or the number 3 "black BAR" (Replay 13) in the upper left row, and it can stop "cherry" in the middle left row. This stopping pattern (middle row cherry) represents a strong cherry.
The Replay S condition device includes Replay 11 to Replay 14 as winning combinations, and when the Replay S condition device is activated, it stops either Replay 11, Replay 13 or Replay 14. As with the Replay R condition device, it allows "cherry" (strong cherry) to be stopped in the middle left row.

In the above replay condition device, as shown in FIG. 24, Replay A wins alone and does not win together with 1BB.
In contrast, Replay B to Replay S always win together with 1BB in non-internal play. In a game in which the 1BB condition device and the Replay B to Replay S condition devices are simultaneously activated, the reel stop control based on the Replay B to Replay S condition devices takes priority, and one of the Replays always wins, and there is no case in which 1BB wins.
On the other hand, in the internal game after winning 1BB (Figures 28 and 30), in the game when the Replay A to Replay S condition devices are activated, the 1BB condition device is also activated, but the winning of a replay is given priority, so that a replay always wins and there is no case in which 1BB wins.

As shown in FIG. 34, when 1BB is in operation and inside RB, when the Replay A to Replay S condition devices are activated, the replay condition devices will not be activated at the same time (Replay A to Replay S will win individually), and the replay will always win.
When 1BB is in operation and inside RB, and the Replay A to Replay S condition devices are in operation, the RBA or RBB condition device will also operate at the same time, but the winning of a replay is given priority, so the replay always wins and there is no case in which the RBA or RBB wins.

The so-called push order bell condition device consists of the following types.
Small prize A group condition device: Small prize A01 condition device to small prize A24 condition device Small prize B group condition device: Small prize B01 condition device to small prize B24 condition device Small prize C group condition device: Small prize C01 condition device to small prize C24 condition device For example, in the game in Figure 24 described below, in which the winning number "22" is won, the game will be one in which the small prize A01 condition device is activated.
First, the relationship between the small prize A01 condition device to the small prize A24 condition device and the correct button press order is as follows.
Small role A01 condition device ~ Small role A04 condition device: Correct push order 123 (left, middle, right)
Small role A05 condition device ~ Small role A08 condition device: Correct push order 132 (left, right, center)
Small role A09 condition device ~ Small role A12 condition device: Correct push order 213 (middle left and right)
Small role A13 condition device ~ Small role A16 condition device: Correct push order 231 (middle right left)
Small role A17 condition device ~ Small role A20 condition device: Correct push order 312 (right left center)
Small role A21 condition device ~ Small role A24 condition device: Correct answer push order 321 (right center left)
Below, some of the condition devices will be selected and the reel stop control when the condition devices are activated will be explained.

In FIG. 15 (the same applies to the figures from FIG. 16 onward), for example, in the remarks column of the small win A01 condition device, "123" indicates the push order 123 (left, center, right). Also, for example, "2--" indicates that the first stop is "2 (center)" and the second and third stops are optional.
In FIG. 15, the small prize A01 condition device includes the winning prizes of small prizes 001, 009 to 016, 025, 026, 041, 042, 065, and 066 (a total of 15 prizes), and is a condition device that makes it possible to win a predetermined small prize depending on the order in which the buttons are pressed.
When the small win A01 condition device is activated, the small win 001 is won with "PB = 1 (1/1)" at the time of pressing order 123. On the other hand, at the time of pressing order 132, the small win 009 to small win 016 can be won at a rate of "1/2". In other words, at the time of pressing order 132, the role will not be won at a rate of "1/2", and the above-mentioned pattern symbol combination will appear.
When the minor win A01 condition device is activated, the left reel symbol of minor win 001, "Replay", is stopped in the upper left row at the first left stop. Next, at the second middle stop, "Bell A" is stopped in the middle middle row. Furthermore, at the third right stop, "Watermelon A/Watermelon B/Blue BAR" are stopped in the lower right row. This results in minor win 001 winning with "PB=1".
When the small win 001 is won, the effective line will be "Replay"-"Bell A"-"Watermelon A/Watermelon B/Blue BAR", but the middle line will be "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A".

On the other hand, after "Replay" is stopped in the upper left row at the first left stop, when it is the second right stop, "Red 7/Black BAR/Blank/Cherry" are stopped in the lower right row to allow any of the small prizes 009 to 016 to be won. Since the sum of these four symbols is a "PB=1" arrangement, any of these symbols are always stopped in the lower right row at the second right stop.
Next, at the time of the middle third stop, "Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry" is stopped in the middle middle row to enable any of the small prizes 009 to 016 to be won. Then, when the symbol corresponding to the small prize cannot be stopped, the symbol corresponding to the pattern symbol combination is stopped.

For example, first, when the status is "Replay"-"Spinning"-"Black BAR", if the "Black BAR/Red 7" can be stopped in the middle row, the small win 010 or small win 012 will be won, but if the "Black BAR/Red 7" cannot be stopped in the middle row, no winning combination will be won.
In addition, in the case where the status is "REPLAY"-"Spinning"-"BLACK BAR", the probability that "BLACK BAR/RED 7" will stop when the center reel 31 stops is "1/2".
When the stopping pattern becomes "Replay"-"Black BAR/Red 7"-"Black BAR", the small win 010 or small win 012 will be won.
On the other hand, in the case of "Replay"-"Spinning"-"Black BAR", if the "Black BAR/Red 7" cannot be stopped when the center reel 31 stops, the "Bell B" is stopped. As a result, the stopping pattern becomes "Replay"-"Bell B"-"Black BAR", which is pattern 02 (combination number "301").

Secondly, when the status is "Replay"-"Spinning"-"Red 7", if the "Black BAR/Red 7" can be stopped in the middle row, the small prize 009 or small prize 011 will be won, but if the "Black BAR/Red 7" cannot be stopped in the middle row, the prize will not be won.
In addition, in the case where "REPLAY"-"Spinning"-"RED 7" is displayed, the probability that "BLACK BAR/RED 7" will stop when the center reel 31 stops is "1/2".
When the stopping pattern is "Replay" - "Black BAR/Red 7" - "Red 7", the small win 009 or small win 011 will be won.
On the other hand, in the case of "Replay"-"Spinning"-"Red 7", if the "Black BAR/Red 7" cannot be stopped when the center reel 31 stops, the "Bell B" is stopped. As a result, the stopping pattern becomes "Replay"-"Bell B"-"Red 7", which is pattern 02 (role number "300").

Thirdly, when the status is "Replay"-"Spinning"-"Blank", if the "Blank/Cherry" can be stopped in the middle row, the small win 013 or small win 015 will be won, but if the "Blank/Cherry" cannot be stopped in the middle row, no winning combination will be won.
In addition, in the case where the status is "REPLAY"-"Spinning"-"Blank", the probability that "Blank/Cherry" will stop when the center reel 31 stops is "1/2".
When the stopping pattern becomes "Replay"-"Blank/Cherry"-"Blank", the small win 013 or small win 015 will be won.
On the other hand, in the case of "Replay"-"Spinning"-"Blank", if "Blank/Cherry" cannot be stopped when the center reel 31 stops, "Bell B" is stopped. As a result, the stopping pattern becomes "Replay"-"Bell B"-"Blank", which is pattern 02 (combination number "302").

Fourthly, when the status is "Replay"-"Spinning"-"Cherry", if a "Blank/Cherry" can be stopped in the middle row, a small win 014 or a small win 016 will be won, but if a "Blank/Cherry" cannot be stopped in the middle row, no winning combination will be won.
In addition, in the case where the status is "Replay"-"Spinning"-"Cherry", the probability that "Blank/Cherry" will stop when the center reel 31 stops is "1/2".
When the stopping pattern becomes "Replay"-"Blank/Cherry"-"Cherry", the small win 014 or the small win 016 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "Replay"-"Spinning"-"Cherry", if "Blank/Cherry" cannot be stopped when the center reel 31 stops, "Bell B" is stopped. As a result, the stopping pattern becomes "Replay"-"Bell B"-"Cherry", which is pattern 02 (combination number "303").
As described above, when the small win A01 condition device is activated and the press sequence is 132, there is a 1/2 chance that small wins 009 to 016 will be awarded, and there is a 1/2 chance that pattern 02 will stop (resulting in a non-winning role).

In addition, when the small win A01 condition device is activated, at the time of the first stop in the middle, as shown in FIG. 15, there is a 1/8 chance that the small win 025 to small win 026 will be won, and there is a 7/8 chance that the win will not be won (the pattern symbol combination will stop).
Specifically, when the first center stop occurs, a "Bell B" is stopped in the center middle row (PB=1). Also, when the left stop occurs after the first center stop, a "Red 7" is drawn into the upper left row. Since the "Red 7" is provided in only one place on the left reel 31, the draw rate, i.e., the stop rate, is "1/4".
Furthermore, when the reel stops on the right side after the first stop in the middle, the "Red 7/Black BAR" is drawn into the lower right section. Since the "Red 7/Black BAR" on the right reel 31 is provided at one location every five symbols, the draw rate, i.e., the stop rate, is "1/2".
On the other hand, in the case where the situation is "Spinning" - "Bell B" - "Red 7/Black BAR", if the "Red 7" cannot be stopped when the reel stops on the left, "Replay" (PB=1) is stopped.

Also, in the case of "Red 7" - "Bell B" - "Spinning", if "Red 7/Black BAR" cannot be stopped at the time of right stop, "Bell A" (PB=1) will be stopped.
From the above, the probability of "Red 7" - "Bell B" - "Red 7/Black BAR" stopping at the first stop in the middle is "1/8".
In addition, the stopping pattern when small prize 025 to small prize 026 are not won is as follows:
"Replay" - "Bell B" - "Red 7/Black BAR" (Pattern 02)
"Red 7" - "Bell B" - "Bell A" (Pattern 03)
Either:

Furthermore, when the small win A01 condition device is activated, at the first stop on the right, as shown in FIG. 15, there is a 1/8 chance that the small win 041 to small win 042 will be won, and a 7/8 chance that the win will not be won (the pattern symbol combination will stop).
Specifically, when the ball stops on the first right, the "Bell B" is stopped on the lower right (PB=1). Also, when the ball stops on the left after the first right stop, the "Red 7" is drawn into the upper left. As mentioned above, the drawing rate of the "Red 7" is "1/4".
Furthermore, when the ball stops in the middle after the first stop on the right, the ball is drawn into the middle middle row. As described above, the drawing rate of the ball is 1/2.
On the other hand, in the case where the situation is "Spinning" - "Red 7/Black BAR" - "Bell B", if the "Red 7" cannot be stopped when the reel stops on the left, "Replay" (PB=1) is stopped.

In addition, in the case of "Red 7" - "Spinning" - "Bell B", if it is not possible to stop "Red 7/Black BAR" at the time of the middle stop, "Replay" (PB=1) is stopped.
From the above, the probability of "red 7"-"red 7/black BAR"-"bell B" stopping at the first stop on the right is "1/8".
In addition, the stopping pattern when small prize 041 to small prize 042 are not won is as follows:
"Replay" - "Red 7/Black BAR" - "Bell B" (Pattern 05)
"Red 7" - "Replay" - "Bell B" (Pattern 04)
Either:

Next, when the small win A01 condition device is activated, during RB during 1BB play (during general play), the stop control is performed so that the small win 001 is won regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. The stop control when the small win 001 is won is the same as when the correct pressing order is 123.
On the other hand, when the small role A01 condition device is activated, during normal play (not inside RB) during 1BB play, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, the small role 065 or small role 066 is stopped to win. The small role 065 and the small role 066 do not stop during normal play (when the role is not activated), but since they are winning roles included in the small role A01 condition device, the small role 065 or the small role 066 can be stopped only during 1BB play. This is because it is necessary to make it possible for the winning role of the small role included in the condition device to appear in any game state. This is also true for the small role 067 to the small role 112 of the small role A02 to small role A24 condition devices.
In addition, the winning combinations during general play (not inside RB) in 1BB play, such as small combination 065 or small combination 066, are "PB≠1" (the "red 7" on the left reel 31 stops at "1/4", and the patterns on the middle and right reels 31 are "PB=1". Therefore, the winning ratio is "1/4".).

When the minor prize A02 to minor prize A04 condition device is activated, similarly to the above, when the correct push order is 123, minor prize 001 (high bell (7 coin prize)) is awarded. Also, when the first stop push order is correct (left) and the second stop push order is incorrect (right), there is a 1/2 chance of a 1 coin prize being awarded, and a 1/2 chance of a missed prize (pattern symbol combination display).
In addition, if the first stop button press sequence is incorrect (middle or right), there is a 1/8 chance of winning a 1-coin role, and a 7/8 chance of losing (a pattern symbol combination display).

When the minor win A05 condition device is activated, the minor win 002 is awarded with "PB = 1" when the correct push order is 132. When the minor win 002 is awarded, "Replay"-"Bell A"-"Replay" stops on the effective line, but "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" stops on the middle line.
On the other hand, when the push order is 123, there is a 1/2 chance that small prizes 009 to 016 will be awarded, and a 1/2 chance that the prize will not be awarded (the pattern symbol combination will stop).
When the small win A05 condition device is activated, the left reel symbol of small win 002, "Replay", is stopped in the upper left row at the first left stop. Next, at the second right stop, "Replay" is stopped in the lower right row. Furthermore, at the third middle stop, "Bell A" is stopped in the middle middle row. This results in "PB=1" and small win 002 winning.

On the other hand, after "Replay" is stopped in the upper left row when the first left stop occurs, if it is stopped in the second middle row, "Red 7/Black BAR/Blank/Cherry" are stopped in the middle middle row (totaling "PB=1") to make it possible to win any of the small symbols 009 to 016.
Next, at the time of the third stop on the right, a symbol corresponding to a small winning combination that has been completed is stopped on the lower right row, and when the symbol corresponding to the small winning combination that has been completed cannot be stopped, a symbol corresponding to a pattern symbol combination is stopped.
In this case, even if any of the symbols "Red 7/Black BAR/Blank/Cherry" stops in the middle row, the probability that the small winning combination that is in a state of tenpai can be stopped is "1/2". For example, if "Replay"-"Red 7"-"Spinning", there is a probability of "1/2" that "Red 7/Black BAR" can be stopped and the small winning combination 011 or small winning combination 012 can be won.
Therefore, when the small prize A05 condition device is activated and the pressing sequence is 123, there is a 1/2 chance that small prize 009 to small prize 016 will be awarded, and there is a 1/2 chance that the pattern symbol combination will stop (resulting in a non-winning role).

In addition, when the small win A05 condition device is activated, at the time of the first stop in the middle, as shown in FIG. 15, there is a 1/8 chance that the small win 033 to small win 034 will be won, and there is a 7/8 chance that the win will not be won (the pattern symbol combination will stop).
Specifically, when the first center stop occurs, "Bell B" is stopped in the middle middle row (PB = 1). Also, when the left stop occurs after the first center stop, "Red 7" is drawn in to the upper left row (ratio "1/4").
Furthermore, when the reel stops on the right after the first stop in the middle, "red 7/black BAR" is drawn into the lower right row (proportion "1/2").
On the other hand, the stopping pattern when small prize 033 to small prize 034 are not won is as follows:
"Replay" - "Bell B" - "Red 7/Black BAR" (Pattern 02)
"Red 7" - "Bell B" - "Bell A" (Pattern 03)
Either:

Furthermore, when the small win A05 condition device is activated, when the first right stop occurs, as shown in FIG. 15, there is a 1/8 chance that small win 049 to small win 050 will be won, and there is a 7/8 chance that no win will occur (the pattern symbol combination will stop).
Specifically, when the ball stops on the first right, the "Bell B" is stopped on the lower right (PB=1). Also, when the ball stops on the left after the first right stop, the "Red 7" is drawn into the upper left. As mentioned above, the drawing rate of the "Red 7" is "1/4".
Furthermore, when the ball stops in the middle after the first stop on the right, the "Blank/Cherry" is drawn into the middle middle row. The drawing rate of the "Blank/Cherry" becomes "1/2".
From the above, the probability of "red 7"-"red 7/black BAR"-"bell B" stopping at the first stop on the right is "1/8".
On the other hand, the stopping pattern when small symbols 049 to 050 do not win is as follows:
"Replay" - "Red 7/Black BAR" - "Bell B" (Pattern 05)
"Red 7" - "Replay" - "Bell B" (Pattern 04)
Either:

Furthermore, when the small win A05 condition device is activated, during RB during 1BB play (during regular play), the stop control is performed so that the small win 002 is won regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. The stop control in this case is the same as when the correct pressing order is 123.
On the other hand, when the small win A05 condition device is activated, during a general game (not inside RB) in 1BB play, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, the stop control is performed so that the small win 075 or the small win 076 is won.

When the minor prize A06 to minor prize A08 condition device is activated, similarly to the above, if the correct push order is 132, minor prize 002 (high bell (7 coin prize)) will be awarded. Also, if the first stop push order is correct (left) and the second stop push order is incorrect (center), there is a 1/2 chance of a 1 coin prize being awarded, and a 1/2 chance of a missed prize (pattern symbol combination display).
Also, if the first stop button press sequence is incorrect (middle or right), there is a 1/8 chance of winning a 1-coin role, and a 7/8 chance of losing (a pattern symbol combination is displayed).

When the small win A09 condition device is activated, in the correct push order 213, "PB = 1" will win small win 003 or small win 004. On the other hand, in the push order 231, small wins 025 to 032 will win at a rate of "1/2", and the role will not win at a rate of "1/2" (stop of the pattern symbol combination).
When the minor win A09 condition device is activated, at the first stop in the middle, the "Bell B" which is the middle reel symbol of the minor win 003 is stopped in the middle middle row (PB = 1). Next, at the second stop on the left, if it is possible to stop the "Blue BAR" or "Bell B" (both "PB ≠ 1"), then the "Blue BAR" or "Bell B" is stopped. If it is not possible to stop the "Blue BAR" or "Bell B", then the "Bell A" (PB = 1) is stopped.
Next, when the third stop on the right is "Bell A/Blue BAR"-"Bell B"-"Spinning", "Bell B" is stopped on the lower right (PB=1). This results in the small win 003.

Also, when the reel stops on the third row on the right, if the reel is in the "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Spinning" state, the "Bell A" is stopped on the bottom right row (PB=1). This results in the small prize 004 being awarded.

When the small win 003 is won, "Bell A/Blue BAR"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" stops on the active line.
In addition, when the small win 004 is won, "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (a bell combination) stops on the active line.
In addition to when the above-mentioned small prize A09 condition device is activated, there are cases where there are two types of small prizes that can be won, such as when the correct button press sequence 312 is reached when the small prize A17 condition device described below is activated, and only one of the small prizes is "PB = 1". In order to diversify the stopping results, if a small prize with "PB ≠ 1" can be stopped, that small prize may be stopped.

On the other hand, when "Bell B" is stopped in the middle middle row at the first stop in the middle and then the second stop on the right, "Red 7/Black BAR/Blank/Cherry" are stopped in the lower right row (totaling "PB=1") to make it possible to win any of the small symbols 025 to 032.
Next, at the time of the third left stop, a symbol corresponding to a small winning combination that has been completed is stopped in the upper left row, and when the symbol corresponding to the small winning combination that has been completed cannot be stopped, a symbol corresponding to a pattern symbol combination is stopped.
In this case, even if any of the symbols "Red 7/Black BAR/Blank/Cherry" stops in the lower right row, the probability of stopping the small winning combination that is already completed is "1/2". For example, if "Spinning" - "Bell B" - "Red 7" occurs, there is a "1/2" probability that "Red 7/Blue BAR" will stop and the small winning combination 025 or small winning combination 027 will be won.
Therefore, when the small prize A09 condition device is activated and the pressing sequence is 231, there is a 1/2 chance that small prize 025 to small prize 032 will be awarded, and there is a 1/2 chance that the pattern symbol combination will stop (resulting in a non-winning combination).

In addition, when the small win A09 condition device is activated, when the first left stop occurs, as shown in FIG. 16, there is a 1/8 chance that the small win 009 to small win 010 will be won, and there is a 7/8 chance that the win will not be won (the pattern symbol combination will stop).
Specifically, when the first left stop occurs, "Replay" is stopped in the upper left row (PB=1). Also, when the middle stop occurs after the first left stop, "Black BAR" is drawn into the middle middle row (ratio "1/4").
Furthermore, when stopping on the right after the first stop on the left, "red 7/black BAR" is drawn into the lower right row (ratio "1/2").
On the other hand, the stopping patterns for non-winning small symbols 009 to 010 are as follows:
"Replay" - "Bell B" - "Red 7/Black BAR" (Pattern 02)
"Replay" - "Bell B" - "Bell A" (Pattern 03)
Either:

Furthermore, when the small win A09 condition device is activated, when the first right stop occurs, as shown in FIG. 16, there is a 1/8 chance that the small win 057 will be won, and there is a 7/8 chance that the win will not be won (the pattern symbol combination will stop).
Specifically, when the first stop is made on the right, "Replay" is stopped in the lower right row (PB=1). Also, when the first stop is made on the left after the first stop on the right, "Watermelon A/Watermelon B" are drawn into the upper left row. The draw rate of "Watermelon A/Watermelon B" is "1/2".
Furthermore, when the ball stops in the middle after the first right stop, the "black BAR" is drawn into the middle middle section. The drawing rate of the "black BAR" becomes "1/4".
From the above, the probability of "Watermelon A/Watermelon B"-"Black BAR"-"Replay" stopping at the first stop on the right is "1/8".
On the other hand, the stopping pattern for the non-winning small role 057 is as follows:
"Watermelon A/Watermelon B/Red 7/Blue BAR" - "Replay" - "Replay" (Pattern 04)
"Replay" - "Black BAR / Red 7 / Blank / Cherry" - "Replay" (Pattern 01)
Either:

Next, when the small win A09 condition device is activated, during RB during 1BB play (during regular play), the stop control is performed so that the small win 003 or the small win 004 is won regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. The stop control in this case is the same as that in the correct pressing order 213.
On the other hand, when the small win A09 condition device is activated, during a general game (not inside RB) in 1BB play, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, the stop control is performed so that the small win 081 or the small win 082 is won.

When the small prize A10 to small prize A12 condition device is activated, similarly to the above, when the correct push sequence 213 is selected, small prize 003 or small prize 004 (high bell (7 coin role)) is awarded, and when the first stop push sequence is correct (middle) and the second stop push sequence is incorrect (right), there is a 1 coin role that is awarded at a rate of 1/2, and a pattern symbol combination is stopped at a rate of 1/2.
Also, if the first stop button press is incorrect (left or right), there is a 1/8 chance that a 1-coin combination will be awarded, and a 7/8 chance that a pattern symbol combination will be stopped.
Furthermore, similarly to the above, when the small prize A13 to small prize A16 condition device is activated, if the correct push sequence 231 is entered, small prize 005 (high bell (7 coin prize)) is awarded, and if the first stop push sequence is correct (middle) and the second stop push sequence is incorrect (left), there is a 1 coin prize at a rate of 1/2, and a pattern symbol combination is stopped at a rate of 1/2.
Also, if the first stop button press is incorrect (left or right), there is a 1/8 chance that a 1-coin combination will be awarded, and a 7/8 chance that a pattern symbol combination will be stopped.

When the small win A17 condition device is activated, in the correct push order 312, "PB = 1" will win the small win 006 or small win 007. On the other hand, in the push order 321, there is a "1/2" chance that the small win 041 to small win 048 will win, and there is a "1/2" chance that the role will not win (the pattern symbol combination will stop).
When the small win A17 condition device is activated, at the first right stop, the right reel pattern "Bell B" of small win 006 and small win 007 is stopped at the lower right. Next, at the second left stop, if "Blue BAR" or "Bell B" (both "PB ≠ 1") can be stopped, "Blue BAR" or "Bell B" is stopped at the upper left, and if "Blue BAR" or "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Bell A" (PB = 1) is stopped at the upper left.
Furthermore, when the third stop occurs in the middle row, if the combination is "Blue BAR/Bell A"-"Spinning"-"Bell B", "Bell A" is stopped in the middle row. This results in the small win 006.
On the other hand, when the third stop in the middle row is "Bell B"-"Spinning"-"Bell B", "Replay" is stopped in the middle row. As a result, the small prize 007 is won.

On the other hand, after "Bell B" is stopped in the lower right row at the first stop on the right, when it is stopped in the middle second row, "Red 7/Black BAR/Blank/Cherry" are stopped in the middle middle row to make it possible to win any of the small symbols 041 to 048 (total of "PB=1").
Next, at the time of the third left stop, a symbol corresponding to a small winning combination that has been completed is stopped in the upper left row, and when the symbol corresponding to the small winning combination that has been completed cannot be stopped, a symbol corresponding to a pattern symbol combination is stopped.
In this case, even if any of the symbols "Red 7/Black BAR/Blank/Cherry" stops in the middle middle row, the probability that the small winning combination that is in the tenpai can be stopped is "1/2". For example, if "Spinning"-"Red 7"-"Bell B" occurs, there is a probability of "1/2" that "Red 7/Blue BAR" can be stopped and the small winning combination 042 or small winning combination 044 can be won.
Therefore, when the small win A17 condition device is activated and the pressing sequence is 321, there is a 1/2 chance that small wins 041 to 048 will be awarded, and there is a 1/2 chance that the pattern symbol combination will stop (resulting in a non-winning combination).

In addition, when the small win A17 condition device is activated, when the first left stop occurs, as shown in FIG. 17, there is a 1/8 chance of winning the small win 009 or the small win 011, and a 7/8 chance of not winning the role (stopping of the pattern symbol combination).
Specifically, when the first left stop occurs, "Replay" is stopped in the upper left row (PB=1). Also, when the middle stop occurs after the first left stop, "Black BAR/Red 7" is drawn into the middle middle row (ratio "1/2").
Furthermore, when the ball stops on the right after the first stop on the left, the red 7 is drawn into the bottom right row (probability 1/4).
On the other hand, the stopping pattern when the small prize 009 or small prize 011 is not won is as follows:
"Replay" - "Black BAR / Red 7 / Blank / Cherry" - "Replay" (Pattern 01)
"Replay" - "Bell B" - "Black BAR / Red 7 / Blank / Cherry" (Pattern 02)
Either:

Furthermore, when the small win A17 condition device is activated, at the time of the first stop in the middle, as shown in FIG. 17, there is a 1/8 chance of winning the small win 037 or the small win 039, and a 7/8 chance of not winning the win (stopping of the pattern symbol combination).
Specifically, when the first stop is made in the middle, "Bell B" is stopped in the lower right row (PB=1). Also, when the first stop is made in the middle, "Watermelon A/Watermelon B" is pulled into the upper left row (pulling rate "1/2").
Furthermore, when the reel stops on the right after the first stop in the middle, the red 7 is drawn into the lower right row (draw-in rate: 1/4).
On the other hand, the stopping pattern when the small prize 037 or small prize 039 is not won is as follows:
"Watermelon A/Watermelon B/Red 7/Blue BAR" - "Bell B" - "Bell A" (Pattern 03)
"Replay" - "Bell B" - "Red 7/Black BAR/Blank/Cherry" (Pattern 02)
Either:

Next, when the small win A17 condition device is activated, during RB during 1BB play (during regular play), the stop control is performed so that the small win 006 or the small win 007 is won regardless of the push order of the stop switch 42. The stop control in this case is the same as when the push order is correct 312.
On the other hand, when the small prize A01 condition device is activated, during general play (not inside RB) in 1BB play, the stop control is performed so that small prize 097 or small prize 098 (winning rate "1/4") is won, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed.

When the small prize A18 to small prize A20 condition device is activated, similarly to the above, when the correct push sequence 312 is entered, small prize 006 or small prize 007 (high bell (7 coin role)) is awarded, and when the first stop push sequence is correct (right) and the second stop push sequence is incorrect (middle), there is a 1/2 chance that a 1 coin role will be awarded, and there is a 1/2 chance that a pattern symbol combination will stop.
Also, if the first stop button press is incorrect (left or center), there is a 1/8 chance that a 1-coin winning combination will be awarded, and a 7/8 chance that a pattern symbol combination will be stopped.
In addition, when the small prize A21 to small prize A24 condition device is activated, if the correct push order is 321, the small prize 008 (high bell (7 coin prize)) will be awarded, and if the first stop push order is correct (right) and the second stop push order is incorrect (left), there is a 1 coin prize at a rate of 1/2, and a pattern symbol combination will stop at a rate of 1/2.
Also, if the first stop button press is incorrect (left or center), there is a 1/8 chance that a 1-coin winning combination will be awarded, and a 7/8 chance that a pattern symbol combination will be stopped.

The small prize B01 to small prize B24 condition devices are condition devices similar to the small prize A01 to small prize A24 condition devices, and like the small prize A01 to small prize A24 condition devices, a 7-coin prize will be awarded if the button press sequence is correct, and if the first stop button press sequence is correct and the second stop button press sequence is incorrect, there is a 1/2 chance that a 1-coin prize will be awarded, and there is a 1/2 chance that a pattern symbol combination will stop.
In addition, if the first stop button press sequence is incorrect, there is a 1/8 chance that a 1-coin role will be won, and a 7/8 chance that a pattern symbol combination will stop.
The small prize B01 to small prize B24 condition devices are the same as the small prize A01 to small prize A24 condition devices except that the small prize 116 has been added as a winning combination to the small prize A01 to small prize A24 condition devices.
In addition, the small prize B01 to small prize B24 condition devices have the same correct push order and incorrect push order when the role is not activated as the small prize A01 to small prize A24 condition devices. Furthermore, the small prize B01 to small prize B24 condition devices have the same winning role when the role is not activated as the small prize A01 to small prize A24 condition devices, and the winning role and winning rate when the role is not activated as the small prize A01 to small prize A24 condition devices.

For example, the small win B01 condition device is the same as the small win A01 condition device in that in the correct button press sequence 123, "PB=1" will result in the small win 001 being awarded.
In addition, the small win B01 condition device is the same as the small win A01 condition device in that in the incorrect button press sequence 132, there is a 1/2 chance of winning small wins 009 to 016.
Furthermore, the small prize B01 condition device is the same as the small prize A01 condition device in that the first stop during an incorrect button press makes it possible to win small prizes 025 to 026 at a rate of 1/8.
Furthermore, the small prize B01 condition device is the same as the small prize A01 condition device in that the first stop to the right of the incorrect button press makes it possible to win small prizes 041 to 042 at a rate of 1/8.

On the other hand, the small prize B01 condition device to the small prize B24 condition device have different winning combinations when the role is activated compared to the small prize A01 to small prize A24 condition devices.
In the small prize B01 to small prize B04 condition device, when 1BB is in operation, when the first left stop occurs, "PB=1" will result in the small prize 001 being won.
In addition, in the small prize B05 to small prize B08 condition device, when 1BB is in operation, when the first left stop occurs, "PB = 1" will result in the small prize 002 being awarded.
Furthermore, in the small prize B09 to small prize B12 condition device, when 1BB is in operation, at the first stop in the middle, "PB=1" will result in the small prize 003 or small prize 004 being awarded.
Furthermore, in the small prize B13 to small prize B16 condition device, when 1BB is in operation, the small prize 005 is won with "PB=1" when the first stop occurs in the middle.
In addition, in the small prize B17 to small prize B20 condition device, when 1BB is in operation, when the first right stop occurs, "PB = 1" will result in the small prize 006 or small prize 007 being awarded.
Furthermore, in the small prize B21 to small prize B24 condition device, when 1BB is in operation, when the first right stop occurs, "PB=1" will result in the small prize 008 being won.

The small prize C01 to small prize C24 condition devices are condition devices similar to the small prize B01 to small prize B24 condition devices, and like the small prize B01 to small prize B24 condition devices, when the reel is not activated, a 7-coin prize will be awarded if the button presses are pressed in the correct order, and a 1-coin prize or a miss will result if the button presses are pressed in the incorrect order.
The small prize C01 to small prize C24 condition devices are the same as the small prize A01 to small prize A24 condition devices except that the small prize 117 has been added as a winning combination to the small prize A01 to small prize A24 condition devices.
Furthermore, the small win C01 to small win C24 condition devices are condition devices in which the same stop control as the small win B01 to small win B24 condition devices is executed, respectively.

As shown in Figures 25 and 27, in non-internal 1BB play, the small prize D01 to small prize D04 condition devices may operate simultaneously with the 1BB condition device (1BB and one of the small prizes D1 to D4 may be won in duplicate).
In addition, as shown in Figures 29 and 31, the small prize D01 to small prize D04 condition devices may operate during a game inside 1BB (a game in which the 1BB condition device is operating) (inside 1BB, any one of the small prizes D1 to D4 may win alone).
Furthermore, the small win D01 to small win D04 condition devices may operate during 1BB operation, as shown in Figures 33 and 35.

When 1BB is not activated (not inside or inside), the small prize D1 condition device stops small prizes 025 to 040 with "PB=1" at the first left stop.
In contrast, when 1BB is not activated, 1BB is displayed at maximum when the reel stops first on the center or right reel. Here, "1BB is displayed at maximum" refers to a stop control that stops the 1BB symbol combination on an active line as much as possible. For example, when the reel stops first on the center reel, "watermelon B" is stopped in the center middle row. After that, when the reel stops on the left, "bell B" is stopped in the upper left row, and when the reel stops on the right, "bell A" is stopped in the lower right row. Here, "bell B" on the left reel 31 and "watermelon B" on the center reel 31 are "PB ≠ 1". On the other hand, "bell A" on the right reel 31 is "PB = 1". Therefore, the symbol combination of 1BB is "PB ≠ 1".

For example, in the case of "Spinning"-"Spinning"-"Bell A", if it is not possible to stop "Watermelon B" when the center reel 31 stops, then "Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry" (totaling "PB=1") are stopped, and further, when the left reel 31 stops, "Red 7/Blue BAR/Watermelon A/Watermelon B" (totaling "PB=1") are stopped, and a small win 115 is won.
On the other hand, in the case where "Bell B"-"Spinning"-"Bell A" occurs, if "Watermelon B" cannot be stopped when the center reel 31 stops, "Blue BAR/Watermelon A" is stopped ("Watermelon B/Blue BAR/Watermelon A" = "PB=1"), and the small prize 113 is awarded.
Similarly, in the case where "Spinning"-"Watermelon B"-"Bell A" occurs, if "Bell B" cannot be stopped when the left reel 31 stops, "Cherry" is stopped ("Cherry/Bell B" = "PB=1"), and a small prize 114 is awarded.
Therefore, when 1BB cannot be stopped, any of the small winning symbols 113 to 115 can be stopped, so that there is no loss of winning symbol (no winning symbol).

In addition, when the small win D1 condition device is activated, it will win a 1-coin win with "PB=1" regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. In this case, it will stop small wins 025 to 040, "Red 7/Blue BAR/Watermelon A/Watermelon B" - "Bell B" - "Red 7/Black BAR/Blank/Cherry" (total of "PB=1").

When 1BB is not activated, the small prize D2 condition device stops small prizes 025 to 040 with "PB=1" at the time of the first stop in the middle.
On the other hand, when the 1BB is not activated, the 1BB is displayed at maximum when the left or right first stops. When the 1BB cannot be stopped, the small prizes 113 to 116 are awarded (there is no missed prize).
In addition, when the small win D2 condition device is in 1BB operation, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the small win D2 condition device wins a 1-coin win with "PB=1". In this case, the small wins 025 to 040 are stopped.

When 1BB is not activated, the small prize D3 condition device will award the small prize 115 with "PB = 1" in the push order 312. On the other hand, when 1BB is not activated, in the case of other than the push order 312, 1BB will be displayed at maximum. When 1BB cannot be stopped, the small prize 113 to small prize 115 or small prize 117 will be awarded (no missed prizes will occur).
In addition, when the small prize D3 condition device is in 1BB operation, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the small prize D3 condition device wins a 1-piece prize with "PB=1". In this case, the small prize 025 to the small prize 040 are stopped.

When 1BB is not activated, the small prize D4 condition device will win the small prize 115 with "PB = 1" in the push order 321. On the other hand, when 1BB is not activated, in the case of other than the push order 321, 1BB will be displayed at maximum. When 1BB cannot be stopped, small prizes 113 to 117 will be won (no missed prizes will occur).
In addition, when the small win D4 condition device is in 1BB operation, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the small win D4 condition device wins a 1-piece win with "PB=1". In this case, the small wins 025 to 040 are stopped.

The small win E condition device includes small wins 009-023, 025-039, and 041-055 as winning combinations, but even if the symbol combinations of all these roles are added together, the symbol arrangement is "PB ≠ 1". Therefore, when the small win E condition device is activated, a push is required, resulting in a "PB ≠ 1" combination.
The small prize F condition device includes all small prizes 001 to 117 except for small prize 118 as winning prizes, and any of the 7-piece prizes (small prize 001 to small prize 008) is awarded (PB=1) regardless of the order of pressing the stop switch 42. Also, depending on the order of pressing the stop switch 42, for example, when the order is 123, small prize 001 is awarded, when the order is 132, small prize 002 is awarded, and so on.
The small prize G condition device includes the small prize 001 to small prize 117 as winning prizes, and the small prize 118 that is drawn only during 1BB operation. Since the small prize 118 is drawn only during 1BB operation, the small prize 118 is sometimes called an "increasing prize." When the small prize G condition device is activated, the small prize 118 (1 coin prize) is awarded with "PB=1."

24 to 37 are diagrams showing the number setting table (the winning probability for each winning number) in the first embodiment. The number setting table shows the number to be set for each RT (game state) and each setting value. The winning probability is calculated by dividing the numerical values shown in Figs. 24 to 37 by "65536". For example, in Fig. 24, the number to be set for the winning number "4" is "1524" for all settings, and the winning probability is "1524/65536".
Of the winning numbers "0" to "100," the winning number "0" corresponds to a non-winning combination, and the winning numbers "1" to "100" correspond to a winning combination.

In addition, the "setting value" is related to the degree of advantage of the player, and in the first embodiment, six levels are provided, from "setting 1" to "setting 6." The higher the setting value, the higher the degree of advantage of the player.
In Figures 24 to 37, for example, when the winning number "4" is won in Figure 24, the 1BB condition device (Figure 13) with the reel condition device number "1" and the Replay B condition device (Figure 14) with the prize and replay condition device number "2" become operable, and Replay 01 or Replay 02 can be stopped.

Additionally, each number placement table also indicates whether or not a lottery for the advantageous zone (lottery for transition to the advantageous zone) will be held. "○" means that a lottery for the advantageous zone will be held when the winning number is selected, and "?" means that a lottery for the advantageous zone will not be held when the winning number is selected. "-" means that the number is not subject to the lottery (because the number placed is "0") and therefore will not be subject to the lottery for the advantageous zone. Furthermore, in the first embodiment, when a lottery for the advantageous zone is held, it is set to have a probability of "1/1" for winning the advantageous zone.
In the first embodiment, the drawing of the favorable zone is not performed when there is no winning, or when RBA, RBB, Replay A, 1BB, Replay B, or small win G is won.

Here, for winning numbers that have different winning probabilities during non-internal and internal periods, the lottery for the advantageous zone is set not to be performed. For this reason, for example, when the winning number "3" (Replay A), which has different winning probabilities during non-RT non-internal and non-RT internal periods, is won, the lottery for moving to the advantageous zone is not performed.
In addition, since the probability of winning the winning number "4" differs when the gimmick is in operation (1BB in operation) and not inside the RB (see Figures 32 and 34), when the winning number "4" is won, the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone is not executed.

Similarly, since the probability of winning the winning numbers "1" and "2" differs when the gimmick is in operation (1BB in operation) and not inside the RB, the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone is not executed when the winning numbers "1" and "2" are won.
Furthermore, since the probability of winning the winning number "100" differs when 1BB and RB are in operation (Figure 37) and in other game states, no lottery for transition to the advantageous zone is executed when the winning number "100" is won.
Furthermore, in the number table for each game state, the last part shows the total value of 1BB, replay, and small winning combination.

First, Figures 24 and 25 are diagrams showing the number of winning numbers "1" to "100" placed during non-RT and non-internal times (non-internal times of 1BB). During non-internal times, 1BB is drawn for the role (winning numbers "4" to "21" and "94" to "97"), but RB (winning numbers "1" and "2") is not drawn. RB is drawn during non-internal times of 1BB operation, which will be described later.
Also, in non-RT, unlike RT1 described later, the winning number "3" (Replay A) is not drawn. Replay B to Replay S other than Replay A are set to be double-winning with 1BB.
In addition, the winning numbers "22" to "93" corresponding to the push order bell are all drawn. In addition, the small prize D01 to small prize D04 as rare small prizes are set to overlap with 1BB (winning numbers "94" to "97").
Furthermore, the winning numbers "98" and "99" are drawn as rare minor winning numbers, but the winning number "100" is not drawn. The winning number "100" is drawn only during the 1BB operation and the RT operation, which will be described later.

26 and 27 are diagrams showing the number of places during RT1 and non-internal. The difference between RT1 and non-internal and non-RT and non-internal is that the winning number "3" (Replay A) is drawn. In addition, the number of places "3638" corresponding to the non-winning probability during non-RT and non-internal is the winning number of the winning number "3", so the non-winning probability during RT1 and non-internal is "0".
28 and 29 are diagrams showing the number of places when not in RT and inside 1BB. When it is inside 1BB, 1BB is not drawn, so winning numbers "4" to "21" are the only winning replays. Similarly, winning numbers "94" to "97" are the only winning small wins D. The number of places for winning numbers "4" to "21" and "94" to "97" is the same when not in RT and inside 1BB.
In addition, when the winning number "4" to "21" or "94" to "97" is won inside, the condition device corresponding to that winning number is activated while the 1BB condition device is activated. Therefore, the combination of the condition device that activates when the winning number "4" to "21" or "94" to "97" is won outside the inside is the same as the combination of the condition device that activates when the winning number is won inside.

30 and 31 are diagrams showing the number of places during RT1 and inside 1BB. As above, winning numbers "4" to "21" are the only winning replays, and winning numbers "94" to "97" are the only winning small wins D. The number of places for winning numbers "4" to "21" and "94" to "97" is the same during non-RT1 and inside 1BB.
32 and 33 are diagrams showing the number of places when 1BB is in operation and RB is not inside. When 1BB is in operation, 1BB and replay are not drawn, so the number of places for winning numbers "3" to "21" is all "0". Furthermore, when RB is not inside, RBA and RBB are drawn. Furthermore, the number of places for winning numbers "22" to "100", which correspond to winning of a small role, is the same as when 1BB is in operation and 1BB is not in operation. Furthermore, the probability of not winning is "0".

34 and 35 are diagrams showing the number of places during 1BB operation and RB (RT2). When RB is in, RB is not drawn, so the number of places for winning numbers "1" and "2" is "0". Also, unlike when not in RB, all replays (single wins) are drawn (winning numbers "3" to "21"). Here, the number of places for winning numbers "3" and "4" differs by "1" from when RT1 and 1BB is in. Furthermore, the number of places for winning numbers "22" to "100", which correspond to the win of a small role, is the same as when 1BB is in operation and not in RB. Furthermore, the probability of not winning is "0".
36 and 37 are diagrams showing the numbers placed when 1BB and RB are in operation. In this gaming state, only the winning numbers "99" and "100" are drawn. The probability of not winning is "17291/65536".

Next, the RT transition in the first embodiment will be described.
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing RT transition in the first embodiment. First, when the RWM 53 is initialized, it transitions to non-RT. Here, "RWM initialization" refers to the initialization of the entire range of the RWM 53, including information on winning 1BB and the RT state. When the data in the RT state is initialized, it becomes "0", but when the data in the RT state is "0", it corresponds to non-RT.
The first non-RT is when it is not RT and not inside 1BB. When it is not RT and not inside 1BB, it is maintained until the push order bell is won and the pattern symbol combination stops, or until 1BB is won. When it is not RT and not inside 1BB, if 1BB is won before the pattern symbol combination stops, it becomes non-RT and inside 1BB, and even if a pattern symbol combination appears during this non-RT and inside 1BB, it does not move to RT1.

On the other hand, when a pattern symbol combination appears before winning 1BB during non-RT and non-1BB, the game moves to RT1 and non-1BB. When the game moves to RT1, it will not move to non-RT unless you play 1BB. And when the game wins 1BB during RT1 and non-1BB, the game moves to RT1 and 1BB.
When not in RT and within 1BB, and when in RT1 and within 1BB, this is maintained until 1BB is won.

Here, during non-RT and non-1BB internal play, the probability of winning 1BB is "16682" as described above (see Figure 25), so the win occurs relatively early.
On the other hand, the total number of winning numbers of the push order bell (winning numbers "22" to "93" is "45216", and the rate at which pattern combinations appear is as follows:
0 x 1/6 + 1/6 x 1/2 + 1/3 x 7/8 + 1/3 x 7/8
≒ 0.667
It is.
Therefore,
The probability of winning the push order bell and appearing a pattern combination (equivalent to the number of symbols placed) is
45216 x 0.667
≒30159
It becomes.

Therefore, the probability of a pattern combination appearing is calculated by dividing the probability of a pattern combination appearing by the probability of winning 1BB.
= 30159 / (30159 + 16682)
≒ 0.644
It becomes.
Therefore, in the case of non-RT and non-inside 1BB, the probability is approximately 64% that it is RT1 and not inside 1BB, and the probability is approximately 36% that it is non-RT and inside 1BB.

If 1BB is won while not in RT and inside 1BB, or while in RT1 and inside 1BB, the game transitions to 1BB operation. When 1BB is in operation, initially, 1BB is in operation and RB is not in operation. When 1BB is in operation and RB is not in operation, RB is drawn. Then, when RB is won, 1BB is in operation and RB is in operation, and this game state becomes RT2. Then, when RB is won in RT2, 1BB is in operation and RB is in operation.
As shown in Fig. 13, 1BB operation ends when more than 218 medals are paid out. Also, during 1BB operation and RB operation, the game ends when 8 or 12 wins have been made. When the end conditions for 1BB operation and RB operation are met, but the end conditions for 1BB operation are not met, the game transitions again to 1BB operation and not inside RB.
When the termination condition for 1BB operation is met during 1BB operation, the 1BB operation is terminated and transition is made to non-RT.

39 is a diagram showing the indication function in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, the indication monitor uses one 7-segment display. Therefore, the indication monitor may use the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78, or may be a dedicated display provided separately.
The instruction function is activated (the instruction monitor is turned on) when the start switch 41 is operated. More specifically, it is activated when the start switch 41 is operated, a lottery for a winning combination is executed, a winning number is determined, and it is determined that the activation condition for the instruction function is satisfied in the game.
Furthermore, the operation of the instruction function ends (the instruction monitor goes off) after a complete stop (which corresponds here to the time when all stop switches 42 are released from the player's fingers).

The push order instruction numbers are "A1" to "A7". "A1" to "A6" correspond to the six-choice push order of "123 (left, center, right)" to "321 (right, center, left)". For example, when the small win A01 condition device is activated, the push order instruction number "A1" is selected, and the push order instruction information "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor.
Also, for example, when the push order instruction number "A1" is selected and the push order instruction information "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor, the sub-display content (the content displayed on the image display device 23) is "1, 2, 3" or "left, center, right", etc.

In addition, the push order instruction number "A7" is the push order instruction number for winning 1BB in a game in which the minor role D1 to D4 condition device is activated when the AT is being executed within the 1BB and the game is not RT, and "7" is displayed on the instruction monitor.
As shown in FIG. 23, when the small win D1 condition device is activated, 1BB will be the maximum display except for the first left stop. Also, when the small win D2 condition device is activated, 1BB will be the maximum display except for the first center stop. Furthermore, when the small win D3 condition device is activated, 1BB will be the maximum display except for the push order 312. Furthermore, when the small win D4 condition device is activated, 1BB will be the maximum display except for the push order 321.
Therefore, in the case of winning 1BB when the small win D condition device is activated, when the small win D1 condition device is activated, "7" is displayed on the indication monitor, and the sub-display content suggests (notifies) a reverse push (displaying "←"). On the other hand, when the small win D2 to small win D4 condition devices are activated, "7" is displayed on the indication monitor, and the sub-display content suggests (notifies) a forward push (displaying "→"). Furthermore, in addition to the above display, a suggestion (notification) may be made by voice and/or display such as "Aim!".

FIG. 40 shows an example of an image display when the small win D condition device is activated during the execution of the AT in a non-RT (when 1BB is not activated) and an attempt is made to win 1BB.
In the example of FIG. 40, first, the symbol combination for the 1BB winning prize, "Bell B (upper left)"-"Watermelon B (middle middle)"-"Bell A (lower right)", is displayed.
Furthermore, on the left side, the arrangement of symbols on the reels 31 of the gaming machine is displayed as an image, and the position of the symbol to be aimed for on each reel 31 is displayed as an image. In this example, it is shown that the number 12 (bell B) should be aimed for on the left reel 31, either number 4 or number 14 (watermelon B) on the center reel 31, and either number 5, 10, 15, or number 0 (bell A) on the right reel 31. Note that although the symbols on the arrangement of symbols on the reels 31 are shown only as numbers in Fig. 40, the symbols are actually displayed.
Furthermore, when a notification is executed to encourage a 1BB win, when the small win D1 condition device is activated, a reverse push arrow is displayed along with the words "Please aim." On the other hand, when the small win D2 to small win D4 condition devices are activated, a forward push arrow is displayed along with the words "Please aim."

In the first embodiment, both non-RT and RT1 execute the AT lottery, and when the AT lottery is won, the AT is executed after a premonition of a predetermined number of games. When the AT is won or when the AT starts, the initial number of games of the AT is determined, and the number of AT games is added during the AT. Details of the AT lottery method, etc. are omitted in the first embodiment.
During the AT, when the small role A01 to small role C24 condition device is activated, the correct push order for winning the 7-coin role is notified. The push order notification is performed by activating the instruction function on the main control board 50 side to display the push order instruction information shown in Fig. 39 on the instruction monitor. Also, on the sub-control board 80 side, the correct push order (such as "1, 2, 3" or "left, center, right") is displayed as an image on the image display device 23.

When it is not RT and not 1BB internal, 1BB can be won when the winning numbers "4" to "21" in Figures 24 and 25 are won (when 1BB and replay are both won), and when the winning numbers "94" to "97" are won (when 1BB and small win D are both won).
In a game in which the winning numbers "4" to "21" are won during a non-RT and non-1BB internal game (a game in which 1BB and a replay are both won), the replay always wins, and there is no case in which 1BB wins. Also, in this game, there is no case in which the instruction function is activated or a specific push order is suggested on the image display device 23.

In non-RT and 1BB internal play, when the role is not won (when the winning number is "0"), the only condition device that is in operation is 1BB, so 1BB can be won in that game. However, since the symbol combination of 1BB is "PB ≠ 1", 1BB will not be won unless you press the button carefully. Also, in non-RT and 1BB internal play, when the role is not won, if you aim for the symbol combination of 1BB, you can win 1BB, regardless of the order in which you press the stop switch 42.
In a non-RT and 1BB internal game, when 1BB is won when no winning combination is obtained, the game shifts to 1BB operation, and when 1BB is not won, the non-RT and 1BB internal game continues even after the next game.
In non-RT and 1BB internal play, when the combination is not a winning combination, the operation information of the stop switch 42 to avoid the winning of 1BB, etc. is not notified. However, in non-RT and 1BB internal play when the combination is not a winning combination (a game in which 1BB can be won), a performance (for example, a reel flash, etc.) suggesting that 1BB can be won may be executed.

Also, in non-RT (non-internal or internal), when the small win D condition device is activated (when the winning number "94" to "97" is won), 1BB may be won. As shown in FIG. 23, for example, first, when the small win D1 condition device is activated, if it is the first left stop, "PB = 1" will win any of the small wins 025 to 040 (1 piece role), but when it is the first center or right stop, 1BB will be displayed at maximum.
In this case, the notification content differs depending on whether the game is in AT or not.

In non-RT, when the small win D condition device is activated when the AT is not in progress, the push order for winning a 1-coin win is announced in order to avoid winning 1BB. For example, when the small win D1 condition device is activated, the left first stop is announced. Specifically, the main control board 50 selects either push order instruction number "A1" or "A2" in FIG. 39. One method of selection is to select "A1" or "A2" by lottery, with a 50% probability for each. Then, push order instruction information corresponding to the selected push order instruction number is displayed on the instruction monitor (operation of the instruction function).
In addition, the sub-control board 80 displays an image of the push order corresponding to the push order instruction number. For example, when the selected push order instruction number is "A1", the sub-control board 80 displays an image of the push order (such as "1, 2, 3" or "left, center, right") on the image display device 23.

In addition, in non-RT, when the AT is not being executed and the minor role D2 condition device is activated, a middle first stop is notified to avoid winning 1BB. Specifically, the main control board 50 selects either the push order instruction number "A3" or "A4" in FIG. 39. As a method of selection, it is possible to select by lottery as described above. Then, push order instruction information corresponding to the selected push order instruction number is displayed on the instruction monitor (operation of the instruction function), and the image display device 23 displays an image of the push order corresponding to the push order instruction number.

Furthermore, in non-RT, when the AT is not being executed and the minor D3 condition device is activated, the push order "312" is notified in order to avoid winning 1BB. Specifically, the main control board 50 selects the push order instruction number "A5" in FIG. 39. Then, the push order instruction information "5" corresponding to the selected push order instruction number "A5" is displayed on the instruction monitor (operation of the instruction function), and the image display device 23 displays an image of the push order "312" corresponding to the push order instruction number.

Furthermore, in non-RT, when the AT is not being executed, when the small role D4 condition device is activated, the push order "321" is notified to avoid winning 1BB. Specifically, the main control board 50 selects the push order instruction number "A6" in FIG. 39. Then, the push order instruction information "6" corresponding to the selected push order instruction number "A6" is displayed on the instruction monitor (operation of the instruction function), and the image display device 23 displays the push order "321" corresponding to the push order instruction number.
In this way, in a non-RT situation where the AT is not being executed, when the small win D condition device is activated, the instruction function is activated to notify the player of the sequence of buttons to be pressed to win a 1-coin win, and if the stop switch 42 is operated in accordance with that sequence of buttons, the 1BB that holds the winning combination will not be won in that game.

On the other hand, in non-RT, when the AT is being executed and the small win D condition device is activated, a presentation suggesting the order of pressing buttons to win 1 BB (a presentation that allows the player to understand the operation mode to win 1 BB) is executed in order to win 1 BB.
Here, in non-RT, after winning the AT, when the small role D condition device is activated before the AT is executed (during the AT premonition), it is optional whether or not to execute the effect suggesting the push order to win 1BB. If the effect suggesting the push order to win 1BB is executed during the AT premonition, the player can know that the AT has been won (the AT is about to be executed). Therefore, if it is desired to prevent the player from knowing that the AT has been won, after the start of the AT, in a game in which the small role D condition device is activated, the effect suggesting the push order to win 1BB may be executed. Alternatively, if the effect suggesting the push order to win 1BB is executed during the AT premonition, and the effect is used as the AT winning confirmation effect, the effect may be output during the AT premonition.

As a method for executing an effect suggesting the push order to win 1BB when the small win D condition device is activated, the content shown in Figure 40 described above is displayed as an image.
In this case, the push order instruction number "A7" is selected, and "7" is displayed on the instruction monitor in FIG.
In non-RT, when an AT is being executed, if 1BB is won when the small win D condition device is activated, 1BB will be activated and the AT will start from the next game.

In addition, since the total number of winning numbers "94" to "97" is "7360" (the winning probability is about "11.2"), in most cases, one of the winning numbers "94" to "97" will be won during the AT, and the opportunity to win 1BB will be given. However, if the winning numbers "94" to "97" are not won during the AT, the AT will be executed without RT.
Furthermore, even if the AT is being executed without RT, the number of non-winning combinations is "3638", so when the game becomes a non-winning combination, there is a possibility that 1BB will be won. Even during the AT, in a game where the combination is not won, no performance is executed that suggests that 1BB will be won, but if 1BB is won, the game will proceed in the same manner as above, with 1BB in operation and in the AT state.
However, in a game in which the winning combination during the AT is not won, a performance suggesting that 1BB will be won (such as the reel flash described above) may be executed. This is because the earlier the transition from non-RT to RT1 (via 1BB game) is made, the more advantageous it will be for the player in the long run.

Regardless of whether AT is in progress or not, when the operation of 1BB ends, it transitions to non-RT and non-internal 1BB. If the pattern symbol combination stops before winning 1BB, it transitions to RT1 and non-internal 1BB, and if 1BB is won after that, it transitions to RT1 and internal 1BB.
In contrast, if 1BB is won before the pattern symbol combination stops, the state becomes non-RT and inside 1BB, and thereafter, the state becomes non-RT and inside 1BB until the AT is won and 1BB is won based on the execution of the AT.

As mentioned above, the ball output rate differs between non-RT and 1BB and RT1 and 1BB. Therefore, after the 1BB operation ends and the game moves to non-RT, the ball output rate is favorable/disadvantageous depending on whether the game moves to non-RT and 1BB or to RT1 and 1BB. Specifically, the ball output rate is lower in non-RT than in RT1.
Therefore, in the first embodiment, when the state transitions to non-RT and within 1BB, in order to approach the ball payout rate during RT1 and within 1BB, the correct push order is announced (the instruction function is activated) at a predetermined rate when the push order bell is won (when the small prize A01 to small prize C24 condition device is activated).
In addition, in non-RT, there is a non-winning combination, and in non-RT and non-AT, the player needs to press the button to avoid winning 1BB when the combination is not won. For this reason, in order to promote the transition from non-RT to RT1, when the AT is started in non-RT, the player is instructed to win 1BB in a game in which 1BB can be won.
In addition, the number of balls placed during 1BB operation and inside RB is approximately the same as the number of balls placed during RT1 and inside 1BB. Therefore, if the AT is executed during 1BB operation and inside RB, the same number of balls can be obtained as if the AT was executed during RT1 and inside 1BB.

Here, the payout rate and the like in non-RT and RT1 will be explained.
In non-RT, as described above, the non-winning probability is "3638/65536". In contrast, the non-winning probability in RT1 is "0". In addition, the winning probability of a small prize is the same in non-RT and RT1. Therefore, the payout rate is higher in RT1 than in non-RT.
Here, the "ball payout rate" is defined as "number of out coins/number of in coins." The "number of in coins" refers to the number of coins bet (prescribed number), and is "3" coins when no special device is activated.

The "number of coins out" refers to the expected number of coins paid out. For example, when the push order bell is won, there is a 1/6 chance that the correct push order will result in a 7-coin winning combination. If the first stop is correct and the second stop is incorrect (probability 1/6), there is a 1/2 chance that a 1-coin winning combination will occur, and a 1/2 chance that a miss will occur. Furthermore, if the first stop is incorrect (probability 2/3), there is a 1/8 chance that a 1-coin winning combination will occur, and a 7/8 chance that a miss will occur.

Furthermore, when a replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the first method is to set the number of out coins in the current game to "0" and the number of in coins in the next game to "0". The second method is to set the number of out coins in the current game to "3" and the number of in coins in the next game to "3". In the following example, the latter method is used for calculation.
Furthermore, the payout rate differs depending on the settings 1 to 6, but the above calculation of the payout rate has been done using setting 1 as an example.

The expected payout numbers for non-RT are as follows:
(a) Expected payout value based on replay: 8978/65536
(b) Expected payout value based on push order bell: 45216/65536 x (7 x 1/6 + 1 x 1/2 x 1/6 + 1 x 1/3 x 1/8 + 1 x 1/3 x 1/8)
(c) Expected payout value based on minor win D: 1840/65536 x 1 x 4
When the small prize D condition device is activated, the 1-coin prize is awarded with "PB=1".
(d) Expected payout value based on small win E and small win F 340/65536×1+4/65536×7
When the small prize E condition device is activated, the 1-coin prize is awarded with "PB=1".
From the above, the expected number of coins paid out in a non-RT is approximately "1.4488".
Therefore, the payout rate is
1.4488/3 ≒ 0.4829 (48.29%)
It becomes.

On the other hand, in RT1, only the probability of winning a replay is different.
In RT1, the expected payout value based on replay is:
12616/65536
It is.
Therefore, the expected number of coins paid out in RT1 is approximately 1.6153.
Therefore, the payout rate is
1.6153/3 ≒ 0.5384 (53.84%)
It becomes.

In addition, the difference in expected payout value between RT1 and non-RT is,
1.6153-1.4488=0.1665
It becomes.
Therefore, when the push order bell is won, in order to increase the expected payout value by "0.1665", if the correct push order is announced once every x times,
45216/65536×7×1/x=0.1665
It is sufficient to satisfy the above.

In addition, the above calculation formula cannot calculate an exact value to make the non-RT ball payout rate and the RT1 ball payout rate the same (if the probability of the correct button press sequence is high, the probability of the incorrect button press sequence will be low accordingly, so this amount must be subtracted from the probability of the incorrect button press sequence), but in order to simplify the calculation formula, an approximate value will be calculated.
Therefore,
x ≒ 29
It becomes.
In other words, if the correct button press sequence is announced once in 29 times (approximately 3.45%) when the button press bell is won, it is possible to make the expected number of payout coins (ball payout rate) approximately the same in non-RT and RT1.

For this reason, in the first embodiment, in RT1 and not inside 1BB, the correct push order is not announced (the instruction function is not activated) when the push order bell is won unless it is in AT. In contrast, in non-RT and not inside 1BB, the correct push order is announced (the instruction function is activated) at a rate of about 3.45%.
In order to achieve this control, for example, when the push order bell is won, a lottery is held that has a winning probability of approximately 3.45%, and when the lottery is won, the correct push order is announced.

Secondly, since the total number of push order bells is "45216" as mentioned above, it is possible to set it in advance to notify the correct push order for a number equivalent to "1560", which is approximately 3.45% of that.
For example, since the combined value of the number of small wins B24, "1520", and the total value of small wins C15 to C24, "10 x 4", is "1560", it is possible to set it in advance so that the correct button press order is notified when small win B24 and small wins C15 to C24 are won.

In the first embodiment, when the game reaches RT1 and the player is within the 1BB, the game is assumed to be played without winning the 1BB and while the player is within the 1BB.
Also, in RT1 and 1BB, the probability of non-winning is "0" as described above, so there is no case where 1BB wins based on the non-winning of the role. In RT1 and 1BB, there is a possibility of 1BB winning when the small role D condition device is activated. Therefore, when the small role D condition device is activated, the push order to prevent 1BB from winning is announced, and the push order to win 1 piece role (PB = 1) is announced. This point is the same as during non-RT.

In addition, when a pattern symbol combination stops while not in RT and not inside 1BB, after it becomes RT1 and not inside 1BB, the following occurs.
First, in a game in which the winning numbers "4" to "21" are won during RT1 and not within 1BB (a game in which 1BB and replay are both won), the replay always wins and there is no case in which the 1BB wins. Also, in this game, there is no case in which the instruction function is activated or a specific pressing order is suggested on the image display device 23. Therefore, in this game, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the replay always wins and there is no case in which the 1BB wins. Then, from the next game, it will be RT1 and within 1BB.
In addition, in a game in which the winning numbers "94" to "97" are won during RT1 and not inside 1BB (a game in which 1BB and small win D are both won), a button press sequence is instructed to avoid winning 1BB, so if the button press sequence is followed, there is no chance of winning 1BB.

From the above, in the first embodiment, the following is executed as the activation of the instruction function and the suggestion of the push order. Note that the activation of the instruction function and the suggestion of the push order can only be executed during advantageous zones, and the activation of the instruction function and the suggestion of the push order cannot be executed in non-advantageous zones (normal zones). In the following, it is assumed that the activation of the instruction function and the suggestion of the push order are executed in advantageous zones.
(1) During non-RT a) During non-AT When the small role D condition device is activated, an instruction function is activated to win a 1-coin role (not win 1BB), and the pressing sequence to win a 1-coin role is announced.
In addition, when the small prize A1 to small prize C24 condition device is activated, in order to approach the payout rate of RT1, the instruction function is activated at a predetermined rate (1 in 29 times in the above example) to notify the push order to win the 7-coin prize. However, as described later, there may be cases where the instruction function is not activated.
b) During AT, when the small role A1 to small role C24 condition device is activated, the instruction function is activated and the push order for winning the 7-piece role is announced. However, as described later, there may be cases where the instruction function is not activated.
In addition, when the small win D condition device is activated, a push order suggestion effect for winning 1BB is executed (may be executed during the AT premonition). In this case, "7" is displayed on the indication monitor.

(2) During RT1 a) Non-AT When the small role D condition device is activated, an instruction function is activated to win a 1-coin role (not to win 1BB), and the pressing sequence to win a 1-coin role is announced.
b) During AT, when the small role A1 to small role C24 condition device is activated, the instruction function is activated and the push order for winning the 7-piece role is announced. However, as described later, there may be cases where the instruction function is not activated.
In addition, when the small prize D condition device is activated, an instruction function is activated to win a 1-coin prize (not to win 1BB), and the pressing order to win the 1-coin prize is notified.

The ratio of the instruction-included feature must be less than 70% in 175,000 plays. For this reason, if the ratio of the instruction-included feature in 175,000 plays is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 68% or more), the instruction function at the time of winning the push order bell may not be executed until the ratio of the instruction-included feature becomes a predetermined percentage (for example, less than 65%).
Alternatively, a condition device may be provided such that when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing sequence, a 1-coin or 3-coin small win is awarded, and if the ratio of the role with instruction is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, equal to or greater than 68%), the instruction function is not activated for the 7-coin role, but the instruction function may be activated when the condition device that allows the 1-coin or 3-coin small win is activated.
Also, when the ratio of the role with instruction is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, equal to or higher than 68%), the instruction function is not activated, but, for example, when the small role A1 condition device is activated, an image "1???" is displayed, and a notification is executed which increases the probability of winning a 7-coin role compared to when the instruction function is not activated.

If the specifications are set as in the first embodiment, the winning probability of the replay can be set low even within 1BB. This makes it possible to increase the winning probability of the push order bell, resulting in a gaming machine with a high instantaneous firing rate.
In addition, when the small role D condition device is activated, the instruction function can be activated to avoid winning 1BB, so compared to the specification that avoids winning 1BB by pressing the button, it is easier to avoid winning 1BB. However, compared to the second embodiment described later, the possibility of erroneous winning of 1BB is higher than in the second embodiment.

As is clear from the first embodiment, there are cases where the instruction function is activated even during non-AT, whereas there may be cases where the instruction function is not activated even during AT.
Therefore, "non-AT" does not necessarily mean a gaming state in which the instruction function is not activated. Similarly, "AT" does not necessarily mean a gaming state in which the instruction function is activated.
However, during non-AT, when a winning number that can activate the instruction function is won, it is clear that the rate at which the instruction function is not activated is higher than the rate at which the instruction function is activated.
Similarly, during the AT, when a winning number that can activate the instruction function is won, it is clear that the rate at which the instruction function is activated is higher than the rate at which the instruction function is not activated.
Here, the above-mentioned "proportion of activating (not activating) the instruction function" specifically refers to the proportion when the small prize A to small prize C condition devices are activated (when the push order bell is won).
In other words, the percentage (100%) of activating the instruction function to avoid winning 1BB when the small win D condition device is activated in non-AT is the same as the percentage (100%) of activating the instruction function when the small win D condition device is activated in AT. Here, in AT and RT1, when the small win D condition device is activated, the instruction function is activated to avoid winning 1BB. On the other hand, in non-RT and AT, when the small win D condition device is activated, the instruction function is activated to encourage winning 1BB.

In addition, the rate at which the indication function is activated in non-AT is not always constant, and in the first embodiment, the rate at which the indication function is activated is higher in non-RT than in RT1. Specifically, in RT1, the rate at which the indication function is activated when the small role A to small role C condition device is activated in non-AT is "0" as a rule. On the other hand, in non-RT and non-AT, the indication function is activated at a predetermined rate (in the above example, about once in 29 times) when the small role A to small role C condition device is activated.
It should be noted that the above interpretation does not include extremely rare cases in which the ratio of instruction-containing devices over 175,000 plays has always been at a predetermined value (for example, 68% or more), and therefore the instruction function can hardly be activated even during the AT.

The non-AT state of the first embodiment described above (a state in which the rate at which the instruction function is not activated is higher than the rate at which the instruction function is activated when a winning number that can activate the instruction function is won) may be referred to as the ``first notification control state.''
In addition, the AT in the first embodiment (a state in which, when a winning number that can activate the instruction function is won, the rate at which the instruction function is activated is higher than the rate at which the instruction function is not activated) may be referred to as the ``second notification control state.''
In any case, in the first embodiment, "non-AT" is a game state having both a case where the instruction function is not activated and a case where the instruction function is activated. Similarly, "AT" is a game state having both a case where the instruction function is not activated and a case where the instruction function is activated.

Second Embodiment
In the second embodiment, the current RT is confirmed in the first play of the advantageous zone, and a decision regarding the AT (preferential, unfavorable, etc.) is made according to the RT. In the following example, the "decision regarding the AT (preferential, unfavorable, etc.)" is about the number of plays of the AT ceiling.
In the second embodiment, an AT ceiling number of times of play is provided. Here, the "AT ceiling number of times of play" refers to the maximum (upper limit) number of times of play that can be reached in a non-AT in a favorable zone without winning the AT. When the AT ceiling number of times of play is reached in a non-AT, it is decided to execute the AT (here, this means the "first stage AT" described later), and the (first stage) AT is activated. Note that when the AT ceiling number of times of play is reached, the (first stage) AT may be activated immediately, or the (first stage) AT may be activated via a premonition of a predetermined number of times of play.
In the second embodiment, the AT has a first stage AT and a second stage AT. The first stage AT is an AT that is drawn when 1BB is not activated. When the first stage AT is won and a transition to 1BB play is made, the first stage AT is executed during 1BB play, while the second stage AT is drawn during 1BB play. The first stage AT ends with the end of 1BB play. When the second stage AT is won, the second stage AT is executed when 1BB is not activated after the end of 1BB play.

FIG. 41 is an RT transition diagram in the second embodiment.
Here, in the first embodiment, 1 BB is awarded after the AT is executed only when the gaming state is non-RT, but 1 BB is not awarded when the gaming state is in RT1.
In contrast, in the second embodiment, in the inside of 1BB (RT2 in FIG. 41), when it is an advantageous zone and the first stage AT is not won, 1BB is not allowed to win. For example, as in the first embodiment, when the small win D condition device is activated, the push order that does not allow 1BB to win is notified.
On the other hand, when the first stage AT is won within 1BB (RT2 in FIG. 41), 1BB is won regardless of which RT the player is in, and the first stage AT is executed during 1BB play. Furthermore, during AT and 1BB play (particularly RT3, which is within RB, described later), a lottery or the like is used to determine whether the second stage AT is executed. Then, when the lottery is won, the second stage AT is executed in RT1 or RT2 after the 1BB play ends. On the other hand, when the lottery is not won, the first stage AT ends at the end of the 1BB play. In other words, in this case, the second stage AT is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 41, the RTs when 1BB is not in operation (during normal play) include non-RT, RT1, and RT2. Non-RT is a play state (a type of RT) to which the player transitions after RWM initialization, and RT1 is an RT not inside 1BB to which the player transitions after 1BB play ends. RT2 is an RT inside 1BB to which the player transitions when 1BB is won in non-RT or RT1.

When 1BB is won in RT2, the system shifts to 1BB operation and RB is not inside. In the 1BB game of the second embodiment, the general game is played first, and the RB lottery is played in this general game. When the RB is won, the system shifts to RT3 (1BB operation and RB inside). Then, when the RB with the winning RB is won, the system shifts to 1BB operation and RB operation.
1BB operation is set when the number of coins won in 1BB game reaches a predetermined number. Also, RB operation ends when two games are played or two wins are won, and if the end condition of 1BB operation is not met at the end of RB operation, 1BB operation will be activated again and the state will shift to non-RB inside.
When the conditions for terminating the 1BB operation are met, the 1BB operation ends and the game moves to RT1 (RT after 1BB). When 1BB is won in RT1, the game moves to RT2.

Although a description of the type and number of condition devices in the second embodiment will be omitted, it is possible to use, for example, the same condition devices and number of settings as those described in the first embodiment.
For example, in Fig. 41, the number of non-RT (RT after RWM initialization) can be set as shown in Fig. 24 and Fig. 25. Also, in Fig. 41, the number of RT1 (RT after 1BB) can be set as shown in Fig. 26 and Fig. 27. Furthermore, in Fig. 41, the number of RT2 (RT within 1BB) can be set as shown in Fig. 30 and Fig. 31.

Furthermore, in FIG. 41, the setting numbers when 1BB is in operation and not inside the RB may be the setting numbers shown in FIG. 32 and FIG.
In addition, in FIG. 41, the setting number for RT3 (1BB operation and inside RB) can be set to the numbers shown in FIG. 34 and FIG.
Furthermore, in FIG. 41, the numbers of 1BB operation and RB operation can be set to the numbers shown in FIG. 36 and FIG.

In the second embodiment, when the AT is won in non-RT or RT1, the player waits until 1BB is won.
Also, in RT2, when the first stage AT is not won, when the small prize D condition device is activated, an instruction function is activated to avoid winning 1BB, as in the first embodiment.
When the first stage AT is won, a presentation suggesting the winning of 1 BB (a presentation that allows the player to understand the operation mode for winning 1 BB) is executed when the small win D condition device is activated.
The same applies when you win AT in non-RT or RT1 and then win 1BB.

In addition, when 1BB is activated and the second stage AT is won while inside RB (RT3), 1BB play ends and transitions to RT1, and the second stage AT is executed in this RT1, even if 1BB is won during execution of the second stage AT and transitions to RT2, the effect for winning 1BB will not be output when the small win D condition device is activated, and the instruction function will be activated to avoid winning 1BB, just as when the first stage AT is not won.

In the second embodiment, even if the power is turned on/off or the settings are changed, the winning information of 1BB is not erased. Therefore, even if the power is turned on/off or the settings are changed, the game does not transition to non-RT. After the factory settings, the game transitions to non-RT only when the entire range of the memory area of the RWM 53 is initialized when an unintended event occurs, such as when the RWM 53 is inserted or removed. When the RWM 53 is inserted or removed, the entire range of the memory area of the RWM 53, including the setting value information, is initialized as a countermeasure against cheating.
1, the main CPU 55, the RWM 53, and the ROM 54 are configured on one chip, and when the chip is removed and inserted, the entire range of the memory area of the RWM 53 is initialized (all data is erased). Therefore, when the entire range of the memory area of the RWM 53 is initialized, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act such as cheating has been performed.

Figure 42 is a time chart showing the relationship between RT transition, the start and end of the advantageous period, and whether or not the AT is won in the second embodiment.
In the example of the RT transition diagram shown in Figure 41, when 1BB is activated and RB is inside (RT3), it is shown that the process transitions to 1BB activation and RB activation, but in reality, the RB is not won inside RB and the game continues with 1BB activation and inside RB.

As described above, the first stage AT lottery is executed in the advantageous zone and when 1BB is not activated (non-RT, RT1, or RT2), and if the first stage AT lottery is won, 1BB is won and the game moves to 1BB play, and the second stage AT lottery is executed within the RB of 1BB play. If this second stage AT lottery is won, the second stage AT starts in RT1 after the end of 1BB play. On the other hand, if the second stage AT lottery is not won within the RB of 1BB play, the first stage AT ends when 1BB play (1BB activated) ends, and the second stage AT is not executed.

In FIG. 42, "non-advantageous" refers to a non-advantageous zone (normal zone). Similarly, "advantageous" refers to an advantageous zone. In the example of FIG. 42, for the sake of simplicity, if the player wins the advantageous zone transition lottery in the first game in the non-advantageous zone and transition to the advantageous zone is determined, the next game will be the advantageous zone. However, in reality, the advantageous zone transition lottery is held in the non-advantageous zone based on the winning combination in the game, so the player does not necessarily win the advantageous zone transition lottery in the first game in the non-advantageous zone.
In the normal route, the only time it becomes a non-RT is when it is first shipped from the factory. The first game of a non-RT is a non-advantageous zone, but if the favorable zone transition lottery is won in the first game and a transition to the favorable zone is decided, the second game will transition to the favorable zone. Also, if 1BB is won in a non-RT, the next game will transition to RT2 (RT within 1BB). Then, if the first stage AT lottery is won in RT2, 1BB will be won. If 1BB is won, the game will transition to a non-RB within 1BB game. In a non-RB within 1BB game, the second stage AT lottery is not executed in this example. If RB is won and the game transitions to the RB within 1BB game, the second stage AT lottery is executed.
Within the RB in a 1BB game, FIG. 42 illustrates four types of routes: route A, route B, route C, and route E.

Route A shows an example in which the second stage AT is won during RB in 1BB play. In this case, when 1BB play ends and a transition to RT1 occurs, the second stage AT begins. In this example, 1BB is won during the second stage AT, a transition to RT2 occurs, and then the second stage AT ends in RT2. When the second stage AT ends in RT2, the advantageous zone ends at the same time. Then, in the next play, a favorable zone transition lottery is executed again, and when the favorable zone transition lottery is won and a transition to the advantageous zone is determined, a transition to the advantageous zone occurs.
In the second embodiment, when the advantageous zone is intentionally ended, preparation for the end of the advantageous zone (M_ADVEND_STBY) is executed in the game end processing in the main game state, and "1" is stored in the advantageous zone clear counter. As a result, in the advantageous zone clear counter management, the advantageous zone clear counter value after subtraction becomes "0", and the advantageous zone end processing (initialization of the RWM area related to the instruction function (for example, the memory area for the main game state, the difference number counter, etc.)) is executed.
In the case of route A, the first game in the advantageous zone is an example in which RT2 is selected. When the first game in the advantageous zone is RT2, the number of AT ceiling games is set high (for example, to "777" games).

Route B shows an example (1) when the second stage AT is not won during the RB of the 1BB game. In this case, even if the 1BB game ends and the game moves to RT1, the second stage AT does not start. Then, when the second stage AT is not won during the RB of the 1BB game, a lottery for the end of the advantageous zone is executed. Route B is an example where the lottery for the end of the advantageous zone is not won. In this case, as shown in route B, the advantageous zone ends when 1BB is won in RT1 (at the end of RT1). Then, the lottery for the transition to the advantageous zone is executed in the first play of RT2 of the next play, and when the lottery for the transition to the advantageous zone is won and the transition to the advantageous zone is determined, the game moves to the advantageous zone. In this case, as with route A, since the first play of the advantageous zone is RT2, the number of AT ceiling plays is the same as route A (for example, "777" plays).

Route C shows an example (2) of when the second stage AT is not won within the RB of a 1BB game.
Both Route B and Route C show examples of not winning the second stage AT during RB in 1BB play, but Route C is an example where, for example, the main character wins a lottery to see whether or not to execute a special losing performance, and the performance is executed. In such a case, the AT ceiling number of times of play is set to be favored. Here, there is a flag (AT ceiling favorable flag) for determining whether or not to favor the AT ceiling number of times of play, and in the case of Route C where the second stage AT was not won but the special performance as described above was executed, the AT ceiling favorable flag is turned on.

In route C, as in route B, the AT does not start even if the 1BB game ends and the game moves to RT1. However, in route C, since the AT ceiling preferential flag is on, the advantageous zone is set to end when the 1BB game ends. In other words, when the AT ceiling preferential flag is off, the advantageous zone is set to be maintained when the 1BB game ends.
After the 1BB play ends, the game moves to RT1. In the first play of this RT1, a lottery for moving to the advantageous zone is executed, and if the lottery for moving to the advantageous zone is won and the move to the advantageous zone is decided, the game moves to the advantageous zone. In this case, unlike route B, the first play of the advantageous zone is RT1, so the AT ceiling play count is set low (for example, to "333" play).

Route E shows an example of an irregular bonus. As mentioned above, when the first stage AT lottery is won in RT2, 1BB is awarded, but Route E is an example of what happens when 1BB is (mistakenly) awarded despite not winning the first stage AT lottery in RT2. In this case, the second stage AT lottery is not executed or is neglected within the RB of the 1BB game, and the lottery for the end of the advantageous zone is not executed either. Therefore, after the end of the 1BB game, even if it moves to RT1 and then to RT2, it remains in the advantageous zone.

Route D represents a special route that is different from the normal route described above.
As described above, when the setting change is executed, the RT information and the 1BB winning carryover information are maintained. However, the information related to the advantageous zone is erased by the setting change, so it transitions to a non-advantageous zone. Therefore, as shown in the first RT2 of the normal route, when the setting change is performed during RT2 and an advantageous zone, the first game is in a non-advantageous zone, but when the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed in this first game, the advantageous zone transition lottery is won, and the transition to the advantageous zone is determined, the next game will transition to the advantageous zone.
Therefore, when the machine becomes non-RT after being installed in the hall, there is a high possibility of cheating (cheating). Therefore, when the lottery for moving to the advantageous zone is executed in the non-RT and the machine moves to the advantageous zone, the number of AT ceiling plays is set high (for example, to "777" plays) like in route A.

Furthermore, when there is a transition from a non-advantageous zone to an advantageous zone in a non-RT, the RT information of the first game in the advantageous zone is stored, and when there is a transition to 1BB game first and a transition to the RB of 1BB game (RT3), the second stage AT is not won (AT not won (3)). Furthermore, after the advantageous zone ends during the RB of 1BB game and becomes a non-advantageous zone, a lottery for transition to an advantageous zone is executed in the non-advantageous zone, and when the lottery for transition to an advantageous zone is won and a transition to the advantageous zone is determined, the player transitions to the advantageous zone from the next game. When there is a transition to an advantageous zone during the RB of 1BB game, the AT ceiling number of games is set high.
By setting it in this manner, it is possible to prevent balls from being easily and unintentionally won through fraudulent conduct.
Furthermore, even if a special route is selected, if the player wins 1BB and is inside 1BB, and then a setting change is executed, the player can transition to RT2 (normal route).

As described above, in the example of Figure 42, the number of AT ceiling games is varied depending on which RT the first game in the advantageous zone is.
in particular,
When the first game in the advantageous zone is non-RT (special route): AT ceiling high When the first game in the advantageous zone is RT1 (route C): AT ceiling low When the first game in the advantageous zone is RT2 (routes A, B): AT ceiling high When the first game in the advantageous zone is 1BB play (route D): AT ceiling high It is set as follows.
By setting it in this manner, the expected value until the AT is won can be varied depending on which RT the first play in the advantageous zone is.

Therefore, for example, a lottery is held to see whether or not to favor decisions regarding the AT, and if the lottery is won, a specified flag is turned on. When the specified flag is on, the advantageous zone ends at a specified RT (inside the RB of 1BB play in the above example). Then, if it is set up so that the advantageous zone transition lottery is won immediately after the advantageous zone ends, it is possible to transition to the advantageous zone at the desired RT. This makes it possible to arbitrarily execute preferential decisions regarding the AT.

In the above example, the AT ceiling is lowered when the first game in the advantageous zone is RT1, and is raised when the first game in the advantageous zone is an RT other than RT1, but this is not limited to this, and it may be divided more finely, for example, the AT ceiling is lowered when the first game in the advantageous zone is RT1, the AT ceiling is set to normal when the first game in the advantageous zone is RT2, and the AT ceiling is raised when the first game in the advantageous zone is an RT other than RT1 and RT2. Also, without being limited to the AT ceiling, it is also possible to set the AT winning probability to high when the first game in the advantageous zone is RT1, set the AT winning probability to normal when the first game in the advantageous zone is RT2, and set the AT winning probability to low when the first game in the advantageous zone is an RT other than RT1 and RT2.
In the second embodiment, an example is shown in which a decision regarding the AT (favorable, unfavorable, etc.) is made depending on the RT of the first game in the favorable zone, but this is not limited to this, and a decision regarding the AT may be made depending on the RT or condition device operating in a game that has won the favorable zone.
In addition, RT information at the time of transition to the advantageous zone may be retained, and a decision regarding the AT (favorable treatment, poor treatment, etc.) may be made based on the RT information during the first game in the advantageous zone.

Third Embodiment
In the first embodiment described above, the specified number when the device is not in operation is "3" regardless of the game state (RT) (see FIG. 4, etc.).
In contrast, in the third embodiment, it is assumed that the game is played with the specified number "2" until 1BB is won, and after 1BB is won (while inside 1BB), the game is played with the specified number "3".
When 1 BB is won with the specified number of "2", 1 BB can be won only in a game with the specified number of "2". In other words, after winning 1 BB with the specified number of "2", when playing with the specified number of "3", the 1 BB cannot be won even in a game without a winning combination.
Therefore, in the third embodiment, after winning 1BB with the specified number "2", the game is executed with the specified number "3". In the game within 1BB with the specified number "3", 1BB does not win, and non-AT and AT are repeated while remaining within 1BB.

The arrangement of symbols on the reel 31 in the third embodiment is the same as that in the first embodiment (FIG. 2).
In addition, in the third embodiment, the winning combination is different from that in the first embodiment.
43 to 49 are diagrams showing winning symbol combinations and payout numbers in the third embodiment.
In the third embodiment, two types of 1BB are provided: 1BBA and 1BBB. As shown in Fig. 43, when the role is not activated, 1BBA is 1BB drawn by a game with a specified number of "3", and 1BBB is 1BB drawn by a game with a specified number of "2".
In addition, in the third embodiment, since the RB is continuously operated (without stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the RB) during the operation of 1BB, a symbol combination corresponding to the RB is not provided.

In the third embodiment, replays are provided as Replay 01 to Replay 12.
Here, Replay 01 with role number "003" to Replay 07 with role number "027" have the same pattern combinations as Replay 01 with role number "004" to Replay 07 with role number "028" in the first embodiment.
In addition, Replay 08 with role number "028" to Replay 12 with role number "091" have the same pattern combinations as Replay 11 with role number "086" to Replay 15 with role number "149" in the first embodiment.

The small prize includes small prize 001 to small prize 117. Small prize 001 to small prize 008 are different from the first embodiment in that they are 15-piece prizes.
In addition, the small win 001 of the winning combination number "092" to the small win 112 of the winning combination number "215" are the same pattern combination as the small win 001 of the winning combination number "150" to the small win 112 of the winning combination number "273" in the first embodiment.
Furthermore, the small prize 113 with the prize number "216" to the small prize 117 with the prize number "262" are small prizes unique to the third embodiment.

50 to 56 are diagrams showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, etc. in the third embodiment.
First, FIG. 50 shows a reel (particularly, in the third embodiment, 1BBA and 1BBB) condition device.
The 1BBA condition device corresponding to the role condition device number "1" is a role condition device that can be operated when 1BBA is won. When this 1BBA condition device is activated, 1BBA, which is the winning role, can be won.
Similarly, the 1BBB condition device corresponding to the reel condition device number "2" is a reel condition device which becomes operable when 1BBB is won, and when the 1BBB condition device is activated, 1BBB can be won.

When the 1BBA condition device is activated, the RBA is activated continuously, and the end condition is met when the payout exceeds 33 coins. Therefore, there is no special device number associated with the RBA.
Similarly, when the 1BBB condition device is activated, the RBB is activated continuously, and the end condition is met with a payout of more than 7 coins. Therefore, there is no special device number associated with the RBB.
In addition, both RBA and RBB end when two games or two winnings have been played, or when the operation of 1BB has ended.
When the operation of RBA or RBB is completed and the condition for completing the operation of 1BB is not satisfied, RBA or RBB is operated again.

51 to 56 show the winning and replay condition devices. Among the winning and replay condition device numbers, "1" to "16" are the condition device numbers related to replay, and "17" to "70" are the condition device numbers related to small winnings.
The condition device numbers "1" to "9" related to the replay have some different winning combinations included compared to the condition device numbers "1" to "9" related to the replay in the first embodiment, but the types of replays that can be stopped according to the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed are the same as in the first embodiment. Also, the reel 31 on which the "blue BAR" can be stopped when the rightmost reel stops is also the same.

The condition device number "10" for replays differs from the condition device number "10" for replays in the first embodiment in that the replay that stops when the first stop on the right results in a "red" line is replay 12.
The condition device number "11" for the replay is the same as the condition device number "11" for the replay in the first embodiment.

The condition device number "12" for replay includes different winning combinations than the condition device number "14" for replay in the first embodiment, but the chance combinations that can appear are the same as those of the condition device number "14" for replay in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the condition device number "13" for replay includes different winning roles than the condition device number "15" for replay in the first embodiment, but the chance eyes that can appear are the same as those of the condition device number "15" for replay in the first embodiment.
The condition device numbers "14" to "16" related to replays are different from the condition device numbers "17" to "19" related to replays in the first embodiment in terms of the winning combinations included, but the stopping patterns that can appear (cherry in the upper left row or cherry in the middle left row) are the same as the condition device numbers "17" to "19" related to replays in the first embodiment.

In the third embodiment, the condition device related to the push order bell is provided with a small win A01 to small win A24 condition device and a small win B01 to small win B24 condition device, but the small win C01 to small win C24 condition device in the first embodiment is not provided.
The small prize A01 to small prize A24 condition devices are set to have the same winning combinations and winning combinations corresponding to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 as those of the small prize A01 to small prize A24 condition devices in the first embodiment. However, in the third embodiment, there is no case where the small prize A01 to small prize A24 condition devices are operated during 1BB operation (during RBA operation and RBB operation) (as shown in Figures 69 to 72 described later, the winning numbers "19" to "42" are not drawn during 1BB operation). This is different from the first embodiment.

The small prize B01 to small prize B24 condition devices are different from the first embodiment in that the winning combinations include the small prize 113 and do not include the small prize 116, as compared to the small prize B01 to small prize B24 condition devices in the first embodiment. However, the small prize B01 to small prize B24 condition devices are set to the same winning combinations corresponding to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 as the small prize B01 to small prize B24 condition devices in the first embodiment. The third embodiment is also different from the first embodiment in that the small prize B01 to small prize B24 condition devices do not operate during 1BB operation (during RBA operation and RBB operation) (as shown in Figures 69 to 72 described later, the winning numbers "43" to "66" are not drawn during 1BB operation).

The small win C condition device is a condition device that includes small wins 113 and 114 as winning combinations and is "PB ≠ 1". When the small win C condition device is activated, "watermelon A/B"-"watermelon A/B"-"watermelon A/B" (watermelon combination) can be stopped by pressing the button.
The small win D condition device is a condition device that includes the small win 115 as a winning combination and can stop the strong chance A "watermelon A/B"-"watermelon A/B"-"replay" (watermelon match break). The strong chance A corresponds to the small win 115 (3-piece combination).
The small win E condition device is a condition device that includes the small win 116 as a winning combination and can stop the strong chance B "Replay"-"Watermelon A/B"-"Watermelon A/B" (watermelon match break). The strong chance B corresponds to the small win 116 (3-piece combination).

The small win F condition device includes small wins 009 to 056 (1-piece wins) as winning combinations, but even if the symbol combinations of all these roles are added together, the symbol arrangement is "PB ≠ 1". Therefore, when the small win F condition device is activated, a push is required, resulting in a "PB ≠ 1" role.
The small prize G condition device includes all small prizes 001 to 116 except for small prize 117 as winning prizes, and regardless of the order of pressing the stop switch 42, any of the 15-coin prizes (small prize 001 to small prize 008) is awarded (PB = 1). In addition, depending on the order of pressing the stop switch 42, for example, when the pressing order is 123, small prize 001 is awarded, when the pressing order is 132, small prize 002 is awarded, and so on.
The small prize H condition device includes the small prize 009 to 114 and the small prize 117 that is drawn only during 1BB operation as winning prizes. Since the small prize 117 is drawn only during 1BB operation, the small prize 117 is sometimes called an "increasing prize." When the small prize H condition device is activated, the small prize 117 (1 coin prize) is awarded with "PB=1."

57 to 72 are diagrams showing number setting tables (probability of winning for each winning number) in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, when the role is not activated, it is possible to play with either the specified number "2" or the specified number "3". Therefore, in the third embodiment, in the game state when the role is not activated, the number setting tables for both the specified number "2" and the specified number "3" are shown.
In the third embodiment, in a non-RT and non-internal game, a game is executed with a prescribed number of "2", and when 1 BBB is won, the next game shifts to RT1. Then, in RT1, a game is executed with a prescribed number of "3".

First, FIG. 57 and FIG. 58 are diagrams showing the number placement when the specified number is "2" and the number is not RT and not inside.
In FIG. 57, when it is not RT and not internal and the specified number is "2", only 1BBB is drawn as 1BB (1BBA is not drawn). Also, as for replays, only Replay A is drawn. When it is not RT and not internal and the specified number is "2", the probability of winning 1BBB is "16384/65536", so 1BBB is won early.
In addition, in a game in which 1BBB is won during a non-RT and non-internal game and a game with a prescribed number of "2", 1BBB may be won in the game in which 1BBB is won. If 1BBB is not won in the game in which 1BBB is won, the game will move to RT1 and 1BBB from the next game, and 1BBB will not be won thereafter (however, this is not limited to this, and 1BBB may be allowed to be won.). In contrast, when 1BBB is won in the game in which 1BBB is won, the game will return to a non-RT and non-internal game again via the 1BB game.
59 and 60 are diagrams showing the number of set numbers when the game is not RT and not inside and the specified number is "3". As described above, when the game is not RT and not inside, it is desired to play with the specified number "2", but it is also possible to play with the specified number "3". Therefore, when a game is played with the specified number "3" when the game is not RT and not inside, the winning probability is as shown in FIG. 59 and FIG. 60.

In addition, in the number table, when the specified number is not intended in that gaming state, it is written as "irregular."
In the case of non-RT and non-internal and the specified number "3", 1BBB is not drawn and 1BBA is drawn instead. Since the probability of winning 1BBA is "17065/65536", 1BBA is won early. Details will be described later, but if 1BBA is won in the case of non-RT and non-internal and the winning of 1BBA is carried over, the transition to the next game will remain non-RT and will not transition to RT1.

61 and 62 are diagrams showing the number of positions when RT1 and inside 1BBB are set and the specified number is "3".
Here, the 1BBB prize won when the specified number is "2" is set to be awarded only when the specified number is "2." Similarly, the 1BBA prize won when the specified number is "3" is set to be awarded only when the specified number is "3."
Therefore, if 1BBB is won when it is not RT and not inside and the specified number is "2", and then RT1 occurs and 1BBB is inside, if the game is played with the specified number being "3", 1BBB will not be won.

As shown in FIG. 61, in RT1, within 1BBB, and the specified number of "3", the probability of a non-winning play is "17065/65536". However, since the specified number is "3" even in a non-winning play, 1BBB is not awarded.
In the third embodiment, it is assumed that the game will continue to be played during RT1 and 1BBB and the specified number "3", and in this game state, an AT lottery is executed, and if the AT is won, the AT is executed until its end condition is met. In other words, it is assumed that non-AT and AT are repeated during RT1 and 1BBB and the specified number "3".

63 and 64 are diagrams showing the number of places when the 1BBA is in a non-RT state and the stipulated number is 3. When the 1BBA is in a non-RT state and the stipulated number is 3, the 1BBA is won in a game with the stipulated number of 3, so when the 1BBA is in a non-RT state and the stipulated number is 3, the 1BBA can be won when the combination is not won.
65 and 66 are diagrams showing the number of places in non-RT and inside 1BBA and when the specified number is 2. As described above, 1BBA is a special role that is won when the specified number is 3, so in the game state of this specified number of 2, 1BBA will not win even in a game where the role is not won.

67 and 68 are diagrams showing the number of places during RT1 and within 1BBB and when the specified number is "2". As described above, in the third embodiment, it is assumed that the game is played during RT1 and within 1BBB and when the specified number is "3". However, during RT1 and within 1BBB, the game is also possible with the specified number "2", so the number of places corresponding to this specified number "2" is also determined.
In RT1 and within 1BBB and the specified number "2", the probability of not winning the role is set to "0". Therefore, even if the specified number is "2", there is no case where 1BBB that has carried over the winning will win.

Here, the payout rate during RT1 and within 1BBB and the specified number "3" (Figures 61 and 62) is as follows.
(a) Expected payout value based on replay: 8978/65536 x 3 (≒ 0.411)
(b) Expected payout value based on push order bell 38472/65536 x (15 x 1/6 + 1 x 1/2 x 1/6 + 1 x 1/3 x 1/8 + 1 x 1/3 x 1/8) (≒ 1.565)
(c) Expected payout value based on small win C 656/65536×1 (≒0.01)
When the small prize C condition device is activated, the 1-coin prize is awarded with "PB=1".
(d) Expected payout value based on small win D and small win E 164/65536 x 3 x 2 (≒ 0.015)
(e) Expected payout value based on small win G 37/65536×15 (≒0.00847)
From the above, the expected number of payout coins during RT1, within 1BBB, and when the specified number is "3" is approximately "2".
Therefore, the payout rate is
2/3 ≒ 0.67
It becomes.

On the other hand, the payout rate during RT1 and within 1BBB and the specified number of "2" (Figures 67 and 68) is as follows.
(a) Expected payout value based on replay: 25632/65536×3 (≒1.173)
(b) Expected payout value based on push order bell: 9600/65536 x (15 x 1/6 + 1 x 1/2 x 1/6 + 1 x 1/3 x 1/8 + 1 x 1/3 x 1/8) (≒ 0.391)
(c) Expected payout value based on small win F 30754/65536×1 (≒0.4693)
When the small prize F condition device is activated, the 1-coin prize is awarded with "PB=1".
From the above, the expected number of payout coins during RT1, within 1BBB, and when the specified number is "2", is approximately "2".

Therefore, the payout rate is
2/3 ≒ 0.67
It becomes.
As a result, during RT1 and 1BBB, whether the specified number is "2" or the specified number is "3", the ball payout rate is approximately the same, so there is no advantage/disadvantage in terms of ball payout rate.
However, the advantageous zone shift lottery and the AT lottery are only executed in a game with the specified number of "3." Therefore, there is no benefit to the player if the game is executed with the specified number of "2."

69 and 70 are diagrams showing the number of positions when the RBA is in operation and the specified number is "3". Note that, during the RBA operation, only the specified number "3" can be played.
When playing a game with the specified number "3" in non-RT and inside 1BBA, if you press the symbol combination of 1BBA when the role is not a winning combination, you can win 1BBA. When 1BBA wins, 1BBA will be in operation from the next game. When 1BBA is in operation, RBA will be in continuous operation.
The payout rate during RBA operation is as follows:
(a) Expected payout value based on replay: 1571/65536 x 3 (≒ 0.0719)
(b) Expected payout value based on small win G 6450/65536×15 (≒1.476)
(c) Expected payout value based on small win H 33045/65536×1 (≒0.504)
From the above, the expected number of coins paid out while the RBA is in operation is approximately "2".
Therefore, the payout rate is
2/3 ≒ 0.67
It becomes.

As a result, even if a player intentionally plays a game with the specified number "3" in a non-RT and wins 1BBA, and wins 1BBA in a non-RT and inside 1BBA, and plays a 1BBA game, the ball payout rate does not exceed "1", so there is no benefit to the player.
Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the AT lottery is not executed during non-RT and non-internal play, non-RT and 1BBA internal play, and 1BBA operation. As a result, the player cannot receive the merit of winning the AT in these game states, so there is no merit in playing in these irregular states.

However, during RT1 and 1BBB, if the player intends to insert three medals but due to an operational error, inserts only two medals and operates the start switch 42, or if the player operates the start switch 42 after operating the 1 bet switch 40a only twice, the game may be played with the specified number of "2". However, this game has the disadvantage that the AT lottery is not executed. In this case, the player is notified that he or she has played with the specified number of "2" by a presentation described below.

Figures 71 and 72 are diagrams showing the number of symbols placed when the RBB is in operation and the specified number is "3". As mentioned above, 1BBB will not be won in RT1 and inside 1BBB. However, in a game that is not RT and not inside and with the specified number of "2", 1BBB will be won alone, as shown in Figure 57. Therefore, in a game where 1BBB is won alone, if you press the symbol combination of 1BBB, you can win 1BBB. When 1BBB is won, the game moves to 1BB game. In a 1BB game based on the winning of 1BBB, the RBB will be in continuous operation as mentioned above. During RBB operation, a lottery is held according to the number of symbols shown in Figures 71 and 72.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing RT transition in the third embodiment.
When RWM initialization is executed, the system transitions to non-RT (and not in internal). Note that "RWM initialization" in Fig. 73 refers to RWM initialization that is performed during setting change processing when power failure recovery cannot be performed normally (when an unrecoverable error occurs).
In other words, the RWM initialization shown in Fig. 73 is performed when the entire range of the RWM 53 is initialized due to the insertion and removal of the RWM 53 (cheating) or the occurrence of an unrecoverable error. In other cases, such as when the power is turned on/off or when a normal setting change process is performed, the 1BB winning carryover information is maintained without being erased. However, when a setting change process is performed, the 1BB winning carryover information may be erased.

When the RWM initialization shown in FIG. 73 is executed, the RT information is also erased, and the state becomes non-RT and non-internal.
As described above, in a non-RT and non-internal state, it is assumed that the game is played with the specified number "2". When a game is played with the specified number "2" in a non-RT and non-internal state, the non-RT and non-internal state is maintained until 1BBB is won. When 1BBB is won, the game moves to RT1 (inside 1BBB) from the next game. When 1BBB is won in a game in which 1BBB is won, 1BB operation (RBB operation) will start from the next game. As described above, in a non-RT and non-internal game and a game with the specified number "2", there are cases in which 1BBB is won in a game in which 1BBB is won, so FIG. 73 illustrates a case in which 1BBB is won and the game moves to 1BB operation. When 1BBB is won and the game moves to 1BBB operation, RBB is continuously operated. When the termination conditions for 1BBB operation are met, the transition occurs to non-RT and non-internal.

On the other hand, if 1BBB is won in a game that is not RT and not inside and the specified number is "2", and 1BBB is not won in that game, and the game moves to RT1 and inside 1BBB, as mentioned above, the symbol combination of 1BBB will not be displayed in either the specified number "2" or the specified number "3". Therefore, RT1 and inside 1BBB will be maintained unless the RWM is initialized. In the market, RT1 and inside 1BBB will continue indefinitely.

In contrast, if a player plays with an unintended prescribed number of "3" during a non-RT and non-internal period and wins 1BBA, the period remains non-RT and transitions to non-RT and 1BBA from the next game. When the player is in a non-RT and 1BBA period, the period will not transition to RT1 unless the player wins 1BBA and goes through a 1BBA game.
The non-RT and 1BBA state continues until the 1BBA symbol combination stops (wins). When the 1BBA symbol combination stops, the 1BBA is in operation. During the 1BBA operation, the RBA is in continuous operation. When the end conditions for the 1BBA operation are met, the state transitions to non-RT and non-internal.

Next, a control process in the third embodiment will be described. The control process described below shows the difference between the specified number "2" and the specified number "3".
74 is a flowchart showing the start-time process for each main game state in the third embodiment. Note that it is assumed that the role selection process is executed before the process in FIG.
In FIG. 74, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not 1BB has been won in the current game. As described above, 1BB is won in non-RT and non-internal play. If it is determined that 1BB has been won in the current game, the process according to this flowchart is terminated, and if it is determined that 1BB has not been won, the process proceeds to step S2602. Note that in step S2601, if 1BB has been won before the current game and the game is already in 1BB, the determination is "No."

In step S2602, it is determined whether or not the current game is in 1BB operation. If it is determined that the 1BB is in operation, the process according to this flowchart is terminated, and if it is determined that the 1BB is not in operation, the process proceeds to step S2603.
In step S2603, it is determined whether the prescribed number for the current game is 3. If it is determined that the prescribed number is 3, the process proceeds to step S2604, and if it is determined that the prescribed number is not 3 (in other words, it is 2), the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S2604, it is determined whether the main gaming state of the current game is "0". In the third embodiment, the main gaming state is "0" when it is in a non-advantageous zone (normal zone), and the main gaming state is "1" or more when it is in an advantageous zone. Therefore, in step S2604, it is determined whether the current game is in an advantageous zone. If it is determined in step S2064 that the main gaming state is "0", the process proceeds to step S2606, and if it is determined that the main gaming state is not "0", the process proceeds to step S2605.

As shown in Fig. 57 and Fig. 58, the lottery for the favorable zone is not executed in the game of non-RT and non-internal and the specified number "2", so for example, when it becomes non-RT and non-internal based on RWM initialization, it is a non-favorable zone (normal zone). Then, when 1BBB is won and the game moves to RT1 and 1BBB and the specified number "3" from the next game, the lottery for the favorable zone is executed except when the role is not won and when replay A and B are won, as shown in Fig. 61 and Fig. 62. Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the number of pieces is set so that the probability of winning the lottery for the favorable zone transition is "9000/16384" when replay C to P are won, and "12000/16384" when small roles A to G are won. Therefore, it is set so that the favorable zone is won if 1 to 2 games are played.

In Fig. 74, in step S2605, an instruction process is executed. Here, it is determined whether or not the current game corresponds to a game that activates an instruction function, and if it is a game that activates an instruction function, a process related to the instruction function is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S2606.
In step S2606, start-time processing according to the main game state is executed. For example, when the current game is in the main game state "0" (non-advantageous zone), a lottery for moving to an advantageous zone is executed, when the current game is in an advantageous zone and not an AT, an AT lottery is executed, and when the current game is in an advantageous zone and an AT, an AT addition lottery is executed. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

As is clear from the processing in FIG. 74, when the specified number is "3", start-up processing according to the main game state is executed, but when the specified number is not "3" (when the number is "2"), start-up processing according to the main game state is not executed.
Specifically, when the specified number is "2", firstly, even if it is a non-advantageous zone, the lottery for moving to the advantageous zone is not executed. This is also clear from Figures 57 to 68. Secondly, regardless of whether it is an advantageous zone or not, the lottery for the AT is not executed. And thirdly, even during the AT, the lottery for the AT (such as the lottery for adding the number of plays during the AT) is not executed.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the processing at the time of full stop according to the main game state in the third embodiment.
75, in step S2611, it is determined whether or not 1BB has been won in the current game. This process is the same as step S2601. If it is determined that 1BB has been won in the current game, the process proceeds to step S2615, and if it is determined that 1BB has not been won, the process proceeds to step S2612. Note that in step S2611, if 1BB has been won before the current game and the player is already inside 1BB, the determination is "No."

In step S2612, it is determined whether or not the current game is in 1BB operation. This process is the same as that in step S2602. If it is determined that the 1BB is in operation, the process proceeds to step S2615, and if it is determined that the 1BB is not in operation, the process proceeds to step S2613.
In step S2613, it is determined whether the prescribed number for the current game is 3. This process is the same as that in step S2603. If it is determined that the prescribed number is 3, the process proceeds to step S2614, and if it is determined that the prescribed number is not 3 (in other words, it is 2), the process proceeds to step S2615.

In step S2614, a full stop process according to the main game state is executed. This process includes, for example, updating the main game state, and updating the AT-related processes (updating the AT game count counter, updating the AT flag, updating the pullback game count counter, updating the CZ game count counter, etc.). Then, the process proceeds to step S2615.
In step S2615, advantageous zone clear counter processing is executed. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In the above process, the full stop process according to the main game state is executed only when the specified number is "3", and is not executed when the specified number is "2". Therefore, for example, when a game is executed with the specified number "2" during the AT, the AT game count counter is not updated. However, as described later, the number of AT acquisitions (a value based on the difference counter described later) is updated.
On the other hand, regardless of whether the specified number is "2" or "3", the favorable zone clear counter management process is executed in step S2615, and the favorable zone clear counter and difference number counter described below are updated.

Figure 76 is a flowchart showing the favorable zone clear counter management processing in step S2615 of Figure 75.
In step S2621, "1" is subtracted from the favorable zone clear counter. Next, proceed to step S2622, and determine whether the favorable zone clear counter value before subtracting "1" in step S2621 is "0". If it is determined that it is "0", proceed to step S2623, and if it is determined that it is not "0", proceed to step S2625.

In step S2623, it is determined whether the main gaming state is "0". As described above, when the main gaming state is "0", it means that the game is in a non-advantageous zone (normal zone). Even if the main gaming state is "0" at the start of the current game, if the player wins the lottery for transitioning to the advantageous zone, the main gaming state will be a value other than "0" at the time of step S2623.
If it is determined that the main game state is "0", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the main game state is not "0", the process proceeds to step S2624. In step S2624, the upper limit (initial value) of the number of plays in the advantageous zone, "1500 (D)", is saved (set) in the advantageous zone clear counter. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. If the advantageous zone clear counter value before subtraction is "0" and the main game state is not "0", this means that the advantageous zone transition lottery has been won in the current play.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2622 that the value before the subtraction is not "0", and the program proceeds to step S2625, where it is determined whether the subtraction result (the favorable zone clear counter value after subtracting "1") is "0". If it is determined that it is "0", the favorable zone end condition (number of plays "1500") is met, and the program proceeds to step S2629. On the other hand, if it is determined that the subtraction result is not "0", the program proceeds to step S2626.
In step S2626, it is determined whether or not a replay has been displayed in the current game. This is because the difference counter is not updated when a replay has been displayed. If it is determined that a replay has been displayed, the process proceeds to step S2628, and if it is determined that a replay has not been displayed, the process proceeds to step S2627.

In step S2627, the difference counter is updated by adding "the number of payouts - the specified number". If the difference counter value after the addition is negative, it is corrected to "0". In other words, the lower limit of the difference counter is "0". Then, the process proceeds to step S2628.
In step S2628, it is determined whether the difference counter has exceeded "2400 (D)". Note that when the replay is displayed, the difference counter has not been updated in the current game, so step S2628 may be skipped, but for confirmation, a determination is made as to the upper limit value of the difference counter.

When it is determined that the difference counter value exceeds "2400", the end condition of the advantageous period is satisfied, so the process proceeds to step S2629. On the other hand, when it is determined that the difference counter value does not exceed "2400", the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S2629, all parameters relating to the instruction function are set to "0." Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, the advantageous zone clear counter management process is executed regardless of whether the specified number is "2" or "3", so the advantageous zone clear counter and the difference counter are always updated. Here, the number of coins acquired during the AT is counted based on the difference counter. For example, the difference counter value (usually "0") of the first game of the AT is calculated as the acquisition number "0". As a result, the number of coins acquired displayed on the image display device 23 during the AT is a value based on the difference counter value. And, the difference counter is updated regardless of whether the specified number is "2" or "3", so the number of coins acquired during the AT is updated regardless of whether the specified number is "2" or "3". In contrast, as described above, when a game is played with the specified number "3" during the AT, the number of AT games is updated, but when a game is played with the specified number "2" during the AT, the number of AT games is not updated. However, even in this case, the number of AT games is displayed on the image display device 23, even though it is not updated.
In addition, when playing with the specified number "2" during the AT, the number of times played during the AT is not updated, so the AT termination condition based on the number of times the AT is played is not met, but the favorable zone clear counter and the difference number counter are updated, so the AT and favorable zone may end by meeting the favorable zone termination condition based on the favorable zone clear counter or the difference number counter.

Next, a specific control when a game is executed with the specified number "2" will be described.
(1) Display of a unique image in play at the specified number "2" When play is started at the specified number "2", an effect unique to the specified number "2" (for example, a still image or a unique image similar to a still image may be displayed with no sound or a unique sound. Hereinafter, the image unique to the specified number "2" may be referred to as a "unique image") may be switched to. Furthermore, in this case, an image of text such as "Playing with 2 coins" may be displayed. If the unique effect is executed only when the specified number is "2", the player can immediately know that he or she has mistakenly played at the specified number "2". Furthermore, by outputting a unique image, it is possible to suggest to the player that the AT lottery will not be executed.
In this embodiment, the "unique image" may be referred to as a "single image" or the like, but is not limited to a completely still image and includes an image in which part of the image is moving. For example, when a character is displayed as a unique image, the character's hair may be blown by the wind, or the character may blink periodically.

When a game is played with the specified number "2", the main control board 50 may not send a presentation command to the sub-control board 80. In this way, the presentation of the previous game continues to be output as is when a game with the specified number "2" is played. Alternatively, when a presentation corresponding to the specified number "2" is output, a specific command may be sent indicating that a game has been played with the specified number "2".

Here, in a game with the specified number "2" in RT1 (non-AT), a unique image is displayed, but in a game with the specified number "2" in a non-RT (non-internal) time, a normal presentation (the same presentation as when a game is played with the specified number "3" when inside 1BB) is output. In this embodiment, since it is assumed (normal) that a game is played with the specified number "2" in a non-RT time to win 1BBB, during a non-RT time, it is possible to determine whether or not a game is in a normal gaming state based on the presentation executed when a game is played with the specified number "2" during a non-RT time.
Also, when the AT ends or when 1BB play ends, the addiction prevention display may be output. When a game is played with the specified number "2" during the addiction prevention display, the addiction prevention display is output in front of the special image (the addiction prevention display layer is placed in front of the special image and the addiction prevention display). This ensures that the addiction prevention display is not hidden by the special image, so that the addiction prevention display can be displayed reliably.

When a game is played with the specified number of "2", the specified number is confirmed by operating the start switch 41, and the unique image is displayed simultaneously with the operation of the start switch 41 (simultaneous with the start of the game). This unique image continues at least until the third stop switch 42 is operated (when the reels are completely stopped), and the display of the unique image is terminated when the payout process is completed or when the betting process for the next game is executed.

(2) Image display during non-AT One or more points are awarded for each game (the number of points awarded varies depending on the winning combination, etc.), and an AT lottery is held according to the number of points accumulated. In this case, points are awarded for a game with a specified number of three, but not for a game with a specified number of two. Therefore, the number of points is not updated for a game with a specified number of two.

(3) AT ceiling play count counter In cases where the number of plays during non-AT play is counted and a ceiling function is provided to activate the AT when the number of plays reaches a predetermined value, the AT ceiling play count counter, which counts the number of plays up to the ceiling, is updated when the specified number is "3" but is not updated when the specified number is "2".

(4) Premonition Counter During false premonitions and real premonitions, the number of remaining plays until the AT is scheduled to be activated may be displayed as an image. This number of plays is managed by the premonition counter. When the specified number is "3", the premonition counter is updated and the remaining number of plays (image) is updated, but when the specified number is "2", the premonition counter is not updated and the remaining number of plays (image) is not updated.
(5) Drawing lottery for AT During non-AT, as described above, a drawing lottery for AT can be executed when the specified number is "3", but a drawing lottery for AT is not executed when the specified number is "2".

(6) Effects when the start switch 41 is operated When the start switch 41 is operated, a role lottery is executed and an effect corresponding to the role lottery result is executed. When the game is started with the specified number "3", an effect corresponding to the role lottery result is executed, but when the game is started with the specified number "2", an effect corresponding to the role lottery result is not executed. However, when the game is started with the specified number "2", a special effect (such as the display of the special image described above) corresponding to the game being started with the specified number "2" may be executed.
Also, if the continuous performance is set to proceed (develop) when the start switch 41 is operated, the continuous performance will proceed if the game is started with the specified number of "3", but will not proceed if the game is started with the specified number of "2". In this case, the previous performance (at the end of the previous game) will be maintained, or a unique performance corresponding to the start of the game with the specified number of "2" will be executed.

Furthermore, during execution of the continuous performance, if a game is played with the specified number "2" and then the next game is played with the specified number "3", the continuous performance is executed in the next game.
Specifically, in a case where consecutive effects between three games can be executed, when the first game is played with the specified number of "3", the consecutive effects for the first game are executed. Next, when the second game is played with the specified number of "2", the consecutive effects for the second game are not executed, and a unique effect is executed. Then, when the third game is played with the specified number of "3", the consecutive effects for the third game are executed.

(7) Presentation during AT If a game is played with the specified number "2" during the AT, as described above, the number of AT games is not updated. In other words, the AT game number counter is not updated. As a result, the remaining number of games in the AT is not subtracted, so that even if a player accidentally plays with the specified number "2", the number of AT games will not be lost. Note that, although the AT game number counter is not updated, the number of AT games is still displayed during the AT.
During the AT, the number of coins won continues to be displayed, and the number of coins won during the AT is updated at the start and end of the game. The number of coins won during the AT is updated based on the difference counter value as described above. However, this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to provide an acquired coin counter on the sub-control board 80 and update the number of coins won during the AT based on the acquired coin counter of the sub-control board 80 (independently on the sub-control board 80 side).

(8) When displaying images of milestones in the number of coins won during AT (for example, "Get 1000 coins!"), when 1000 coins are won at the specified number of "3", an image of "Get 1000 coins!" is displayed, but when 1000 coins are won at the specified number of "2", an image of "Get 1000 coins!" is not displayed.
In this case, the image "Get 1000 coins!" is displayed in the game with the specified number "3" thereafter. For example, a flag is provided to indicate whether the number of coins acquired has reached 1000 coins. Then, when the number of coins acquired reaches 1000 coins in the specified number "3", the flag is turned on, but when the number of coins acquired reaches 1000 coins in the specified number "2", the flag is not turned on. After that, the game with the specified number "3" is played, the image "Get 1000 coins!" is displayed, and the flag is turned on. In the game with the specified number "3" after the number of coins acquired reaches 1000 coins in the game with the specified number "2", the image "Get 1000 coins!" may be displayed even when a replay is displayed or when a combination does not win. Of course, the image "Get 1000 coins!" may be displayed after waiting for a combination to win in the game with the specified number "3" thereafter.

(9) In the case of having an ending flag Based on the advantageous zone clear counter, for example, when the number of times of play in the advantageous zone reaches about "1400" to "1450", the ending flag is set, and in the case of an AT, the player may be notified that the AT will end soon or that the next set of AT will not be moved to. Here, when the number of times of play for which the ending flag should be set is reached as a result of playing with the specified number "2", the ending flag may or may not be set. When the ending flag is set, the presentation can be switched to the ending one, so that even if the player plays with the specified number "2", the player can be notified that the end of the advantageous zone is approaching. On the other hand, when the ending flag is not set, the presentation will not be switched to the ending one. However, when the player plays with the specified number "3" after that, the ending flag is set. In this case, the number of times of play from when the presentation is switched to the ending one to when the AT ends will be less than when the player plays with the specified number "3" all the time.

In addition, based on the advantageous zone clear counter, a countdown display may be executed when the upper limit of the number of plays in the advantageous zone (1,500 plays) is approaching. This countdown may also be executed at the specified number of "2". However, it is possible to display different images for the countdown at the specified number of "2" and the countdown at the specified number of "3". For example, the countdown at the specified number of "2" may display the unique image described above.

(10) Presentation at the End of the Advantageous Zone When the final play in the advantageous zone is the specified number "2", an image of the end screen of the advantageous zone may be displayed, or may not be displayed.
(11) Presentation after end of advantageous zone When the first game in the non-advantageous zone is played with the specified number of "2" after the advantageous zone has ended, a presentation (image display) is executed to indicate a transition to the non-advantageous zone. Furthermore, when the second game in the non-advantageous zone is also played with the specified number of "2", the presentation of the first game in the non-advantageous zone is maintained. In this way, when transitioning from the advantageous zone to the non-advantageous zone, the player can be notified of this even if the game was played with the specified number of "2".

(12) If 1BB is won in a non-RT and 1BB is won in that game, a unique image indicating that 1BB play is in progress and the number of coins won are displayed as an image until the 1BB game ends. The number of coins won is also updated. In addition, during 1BB play in this case, even if the game is played with the specified number of "3" (the 1BB game in the third embodiment is limited to the specified number of "3"), the effects that are normally performed during 1BB play are not executed. As in this case, there are cases where the normal effects are not executed even when the specified number is "3". By controlling in this way, it is possible to inform the player that the 1BB game is an irregular game.

Fourth Embodiment
The fourth embodiment relates to the validity management of push buttons (also called "effect switches,""effectbuttons,""sub-buttons," etc.).
1 (first embodiment), the push button is omitted from the illustration, but in reality, the push button is electrically connected to the sub-control board 80. In addition, the sub-control board 80 and the push button are configured to be capable of two-way communication.
The push button is used when, for example, a presentation is advanced (developed) based on the operation of the push button. When a presentation is advanced based on the operation of the push button, the image of the push button is displayed and the presentation at that time is maintained. When the push button is operated, the image of the push button is erased and the presentation is advanced. Hereinafter, such a presentation is referred to as a "push button presentation" as necessary. Note that the push button presentation may be executed once per game or multiple times per game.

In addition, in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 communicate in one direction, from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 .
Here, the sub-control board 80 is illustrated as a single board in FIG. 1, but it may be a single board or may be divided into a sub-main board (first sub-control board) and a sub-sub board (second sub-control board). On the other hand, the sub-control board 80 may be a single board including a sub-main board (first sub-control board) and a sub-sub board (second sub-control board). When the sub-control board 80 is divided into a sub-main board (first sub-control board) and a sub-sub board (second sub-control board), the sub-main board (first sub-control board) and the sub-sub board (second sub-control board) are configured to be capable of two-way communication.
The main control board 50 is also referred to as main control means 50, main control board 50, or main control means 50.
In addition, the sub-control board 80 is also referred to as the sub-control means 80, the sub-control board 80, or the sub-control means 80.
Furthermore, the sub-main board is also referred to as the first sub-control board, the first sub-control means, the performance control board, and the performance control means.
Furthermore, the sub-sub board is also referred to as the second sub-control board, the second sub-control means, the image control board, and the image control means.

Furthermore, when a sub-main CPU and a sub-sub CPU are mounted on a single sub-control board 80, the sub-main CPU and the sub-sub CPU are naturally configured to be able to communicate bidirectionally.
Hereinafter, the "sub-main board (first sub-control board) or sub-main CPU" will be referred to simply as "sub-main", and the sub-sub board (second sub-control board) or sub-sub CPU will be referred to simply as "sub-sub".
The sub-main is a board (CPU) that manages and controls the entire production. The sub-sub is a board (CPU) that belongs to a lower level of the sub-main and is specialized for controlling the video of the production.

The sub-main executes a performance lottery, and when it has determined a performance, it sends to the sub-sub a performance designation command (a command that can specify the performance to be executed by the sub-sub) corresponding to the determined performance. When the sub-sub receives the performance designation command, it selects a video in accordance with the performance designation command and displays the video as an image. Here, there is a delay (time lag) between the time the sub-main sends the performance designation command and the time the sub-sub starts to display the video as an image. This is because a certain amount of time is required for the video output processing, etc.
The sub-main does not always enable the push button, but enables it within a certain time range. The push button detects whether it is always on or off, like the stop switch 42, but when it is not enabled, its operation is ignored even if it is turned on.

Here, if the sub-main enables the push button when it sends an effect designation command to the sub-sub, and the sub-sub displays an image of the push button (this image notifies the player that the push button is enabled and encourages them to operate the push button), a discrepancy will occur between the timing when the sub-main enables the push button and the timing when the sub-sub starts displaying the image of the image related to the push button. Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, the following method is adopted to eliminate this discrepancy.

The first method is to enable the push button based on the timer value of the sub-main (timer management). Specifically, a memory area for storing the timer value is provided in the RWM 53, and a timer value (initial value) is set in the memory area when a performance specification command is transmitted (before, during, or after transmission). The timer value is subtracted at regular intervals (for example, at each interrupt process), and when the timer value reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0"), it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, and the push button is enabled. On the other hand, if the sub-sub displays an image at a timing when the predetermined time has elapsed since the reception of the performance specification command, the timing of displaying the image and the timing of enabling the push button can be approximately the same. The timing of enabling the push button may be slightly earlier than the timing of starting to display the image.
In the case of timer management, push button effects may be executed multiple times in one game.

Depending on the presentation, the push button may be enabled when N1 seconds (e.g., "3" seconds) have elapsed in one game, and then enabled when N2 seconds (e.g., "10" seconds) have elapsed. In this case, a timer value corresponding to N2 seconds is stored in the memory area, and the push button is enabled when the timer value reaches a value corresponding to the passage of N1 seconds, and then enabled when the timer value reaches a value corresponding to the passage of N2 seconds (e.g., "0").
Furthermore, there are cases where the push button is enabled when N1 seconds (e.g., 3 seconds) have elapsed, and cases where the push button is enabled when N2 seconds (e.g., 10 seconds) have elapsed. In this way, when the timer value differs depending on the performance designation command, a value corresponding to the passage of N1 seconds and a value corresponding to the passage of N2 seconds are stored in the above memory area, but in this case the memory area is the same.

In the case of timer management, if a power outage occurs during timer timing,
(1) A method of restarting the timer measurement after recovery from a power outage (in this case, the timer value at the time of power outage is held, and the timer value is held even when the power is restored from the power outage),
(2) A method of resetting the initial value of the timer when the power is restored from a power outage (the initial value of the timer determined by the performance designation command selected before the power was restored) and starting the timer after the power is restored from the power outage;
(3) A method in which the timer value is cleared when the power is restored from a power outage, and the timer value is not counted after the power is restored from the power outage (in this case, the push button effect is not executed).
Here, in the case of (2) above, when the initial value of the timer value is set, the performance designation command is retransmitted to the sub-sub.
In the case of (3) above, there are cases where the game returns assuming that the push button was not operated, and cases where the game returns assuming that the push button was operated. When the game returns assuming that the push button was operated, a performance corresponding to the operation of the push button is executed.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during timing by the timer, and the game state at the time of the power outage is a specific game state advantageous to the player (such as CZ or the final game of a premonition), a specific image (such as the above-mentioned "single image") is displayed when the power is restored from the power outage. To control in this way, for example, when the power is restored from the power outage, the data of the main game state and the premonition counter value are referenced to make the determination.
The above-mentioned storage area of the main game state and the storage area of the premonition counter are provided in both the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 and the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80. The main control board 50 transmits information on the main game state and the premonition counter value to the sub-control board 80 every time a game is played, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated. When the sub-control board 80 receives this information, it stores it in the RWM 83 on the sub-control board 80 side. Therefore, if the sub-control board 80 side holds the information on the main game state and the premonition counter value when the power is restored from a power cut, the sub-control board 80 side can determine the main game state and the premonition counter value before the power cut. Therefore, in this case, the main control board 50 does not re-transmit information on the main game state and the premonition counter value to the sub-control board 80 when the power is restored from a power cut.

Also, if a power outage occurs after the start switch 41 is operated and the correct button press sequence is notified by the operation of the indication function, but before the first stop switch 42 is operated (while all reels 31 are spinning), when the power is restored, all reels 31 will return to spinning again. In this case, the indication function is operated again, and the sub-control board 80 displays an image of the correct button press sequence. Therefore, in this case, no specific image is displayed.
On the other hand, if a power outage occurs after all the reels 31 have stopped but before a bet is made for the next game, the specific image is displayed when the power is restored from the power outage. A command to stop the reels 31 is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, and the sub-control board 80 stores information based on the stop command. Therefore, when the power is restored from the power outage, the sub-control board 80 can determine, based on the information based on the stop command (information stored in the sub-control board 80), whether to return to a state in which all the reels 31 are spinning or to a state in which all the reels 31 are stopped.

The display of the specific image does not have to be limited to when the timer is timing. If the specific image is displayed when the power is restored from a power outage (which corresponds to the case where the power is restored after a power outage occurs when all reels 31 have stopped and before a bet has been placed, as described above), the hall manager and the player can see at a glance that the game state at the time of the power outage was a specific game state advantageous to the player. Also, if a power outage occurs unintended by the player in a specific advantageous game state, displaying the normal screen when the power is restored from this power outage can prevent the player from misunderstanding that a reset has been applied due to the power outage and the specific advantageous game state has been cleared (the game has transitioned to the normal game state).

In the second method, the sub-main does not have the timer and uses a feedback command. Specifically, when the sub-main selects an image (before, at, or after the start of the image output process), it sends a feedback command (a command indicating that the generation of the image related to the push button has been completed) to the sub-main. The sub-main then activates the push button when it receives this feedback command. In particular, the first method requires a memory area in the RWM 53 to store the timer value, but the method of sending feedback commands has the advantage that there is no need to provide such a memory area. In addition, the method using timer management requires a timer value to be set for each performance specification command, but the method of sending feedback commands eliminates the need to manage individual timer values even if the number of performance specification commands increases, making it possible to reduce capacity.

The second method described above makes it easier to synchronize not only the push button effect but also the timing at which the image display starts with the timing at which the lamp lighting state is changed and with the timing at which the volume is changed.
Here, when displaying images, the sub-main transmits to the sub-sub a command related to background (stage screen) presentation (also referred to as 2-system presentation) and a command related to character presentation (also referred to as 4-system presentation). When the sub-sub receives a command related to background presentation, it executes image generation related to the background, and when it receives a command related to character presentation, it executes image generation related to the character.

Then, when generation of both the background and character images is complete, the sub-sub sends a feedback command (image completion command) to the sub-main. When the sub-main receives this feedback command, it changes the effects corresponding to the start of displaying the image, such as changing the lighting state of the lamps or changing the volume. This makes it possible to more accurately synchronize the image with the lamps and sound.

In addition, some push button effects include a fade effect. Whether or not to execute a fade effect is determined by an effect designation command. A push button fade effect is an effect in which the push button is displayed in an image other than the final display mode during the introductory effect (initial effect), and the push button is not yet enabled at the time of this image display. In this introductory effect, for example, an effect is executed that suggests that a push button effect will occur soon.
After executing the fade effect, when the final push button image is to be displayed (before, during, or after display), the sub-sub transmits a feedback command to the sub-main. Upon receiving this feedback command, the sub-main enables the push button.

When the sub-main determines that a push button has been operated, it sends a command to the sub-sub indicating that the push button has been operated. Furthermore, when the sub-main detects that the push button has been operated, it disables the push button. Here, there are cases where the sub-main determines that the push button has been operated once and disables the push button, and cases where the push button operation remains valid no matter how many times it is operated for a specified period of time from when the push button is enabled until it is disabled. In the latter case, the presentation may change each time the push button is operated.

Then, when the push button is disabled, during the subsequent period during which the push button is disabled, no push button operation command is transmitted to the sub-sub even if the player operates the push button.
In addition, when the push button effect is executed, if the player does not operate the push button, the push button remains active until the transition to the next game. Here, "until the transition to the next game" corresponds to "until a bet is placed for the next game" if the replay did not stop in the current game, and corresponds to "until the start switch 41 is operated in the next game" if the replay stopped in the current game.
The timing of "until the transition to the next game" may be the same whether the replay is not stopped in the current game or when the replay is stopped in the current game. For example, both timings may be "until the start switch 41 is operated in the next game."

Figure 77 is a time chart showing an example of a slot machine in the fourth embodiment where push button activation management is performed by a timer. In the figure, two two-dot chain lines indicate the division between the main side and the sub-main side, and the division between the sub-main side and the sub-sub side, respectively (the same applies to Figures 78 to 82 described later).

In FIG. 77, when the start switch 41 is operated by the player, the main (main control board 50) detects the signal and executes a role lottery. It then sends a lottery result command to the sub-main. The sub-main executes a performance lottery according to the lottery result command (the role lottery result for the current game). In this example, it is assumed that a performance with a push button performance has been determined (the same applies to the following examples). The sub-main sends a performance designation command corresponding to the determined performance to the sub-sub. Also, at the same time as sending the performance designation command, it starts a timer value corresponding to the determined performance (measurement of the time until the push button is enabled). The measured time is determined by the determined performance, and in this example is time T01.

When the sub-main determines that the timer has measured time T01, it enables the push button.
On the other hand, when the sub-sub receives the performance specification command, it starts the performance (image processing). The performance specification command received by the sub-sub specifies that the display of the push buttons will start after the time T01 has elapsed from the start of the performance. Therefore, in accordance with this performance specification command, the sub-sub starts displaying the push buttons after the time T01 has elapsed from the start of the performance. This makes it possible to make the timing at which the push buttons become enabled and the timing at which the display of the push buttons starts approximately the same from the start of the performance.
When a player operates a push button, the signal is sent to the sub-main. Upon receiving this signal, the sub-main disables the push button. Furthermore, the sub-main sends a push button operation command to the sub-sub. Upon receiving the push button operation command, the sub-sub develops the presentation (executes the presentation corresponding to the operation of the push button). Furthermore, it ends the display of the push button.

The timing of transmitting the effect specification command is not limited to the operation of the start switch 41, but may be the operation of the stop switch 42 (at the first stop time, the second stop time, or the third stop time) as long as it is prior to the effect execution timing determined by the effect specification command. This also applies to the following examples.
It is also conceivable that the player may perform other operations (operations other than the push button operation), such as operating the stop switch 42, between the operation of the start switch 41 and the operation of the push button. In this case, the performance will develop by operating the push button even after the other operation by the player. In other words, the development of the performance by operating the push button is not affected by the other operation by the player. The same applies to the following examples.

Fig. 78 is a time chart showing an example of a slot machine in which push button activation management is performed by feedback commands in the fourth embodiment. In the example of Fig. 78, unlike the example of Fig. 77, the sub-main does not have a timer for measuring the time for which the push button is activated.
In Fig. 78, when the start switch 41 is operated by the player, the main detects the signal and executes a role selection. Then, it transmits a selection result command to the sub-main. The sub-main executes a performance selection according to the selection result command (the role selection result of the game). The sub-main transmits a performance designation command corresponding to the determined performance to the sub-sub.

When the sub-sub receives the performance specification command, it starts the performance (video processing). The performance specification command received by the sub-sub also specifies that the display of the push buttons will start after time T01 has elapsed from the start of the performance. Therefore, in accordance with this performance specification command, the sub-sub starts displaying the push buttons after time T01 has elapsed from the start of the performance. Once the sub-sub starts displaying the push buttons, it sends a feedback command (a command indicating that the display of the push buttons has been completed, or that the display of the push buttons has started) to the sub-main. When the sub-main receives this feedback command, it enables the push buttons. This makes it possible to make the timing at which the display of the push buttons starts and the timing at which the push buttons are enabled approximately the same.

When a player operates a push button, the signal is sent to the sub-main. Upon receiving this signal, the sub-main disables the push button. The sub-main then sends a push button operation command to the sub-sub. Upon receiving the push button operation command, the sub-sub develops the presentation (executes the presentation corresponding to the push button operation). Furthermore, it ends the display of the push button.

Figures 79 to 82 are time charts showing push button activation management when the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Like the slot machine 10, a pachinko gaming machine also has a main, sub-main, and sub-sub. The sub-main controls the output of the performance lamp 541 and speaker 542, and the sub-sub controls the output of the image display device 543.

Fig. 79 is a time chart showing Example 1 of push button activation management in a pachinko gaming machine in the fourth embodiment, and is an example of activating a push button by timer management. Therefore, Fig. 79 corresponds to Fig. 77 of the slot machine 10. Fig. 79 and Fig. 80 described later show an example of activating a push button twice during one game.
79, when a game ball enters a start hole 532 and a start hole switch 533 is turned on, the main starts the fluctuation of the special symbol display device 531 and executes a big win lottery and a fluctuation pattern lottery. When the main determines a fluctuation pattern, it transmits a fluctuation pattern command to the sub-main.

The sub-main performs a lottery for effects based on the received variation pattern, determines the effect, and sends an effect specification command corresponding to the determined effect to the sub-sub. In this example, the specified effects are output in the order of notice A to D → normal reach → super reach. Note that a "notice" is an effect that suggests the frequency of subsequent appearances of normal reaches and super reaches, and the expected probability of winning, depending on the type. Also, a "normal reach" is an effect that suggests a low to medium expected probability of winning, depending on the type. Furthermore, a "super reach" is an effect that suggests a medium to high expected probability of winning, depending on the type. While each of these effects is being executed, the effect patterns are varied. Also, the sub-main uses a timer to measure the time from the time the effect specification command was sent. Then, after time T11 has elapsed, the push button is enabled.

When the sub-sub receives a performance designation command, it executes the performances (images) in the following order: preview A, B → preview C, D → normal reach → super reach.
Furthermore, when the sub-sub determines, based on the performance designation command, that time T11 has passed since the start of the performance, it starts displaying the push buttons. In this example, the push button display starts halfway through previews C and D. The performance designation command sent from the sub-main to the sub-sub stipulates that the push button display should start after time T11 has passed since the start of the performance. This makes it possible to roughly match the timing at which the push button is enabled on the sub-main with the timing at which the push button display starts on the sub-sub, at time T11 from the start of the performance.

This example also shows an example where the player does not operate the push button during the first push button effect (the same applies to FIG. 80 described later). When the push button is enabled, the sub-main uses a timer to measure time from the time the push button is enabled. In this example, the effective time of the push button is time T13, and if the push button is operated before time T13 has elapsed since the push button was enabled, an effect corresponding to the push button operation is executed, and if the push button is not operated even after time T13 has elapsed since the push button was enabled, the push button is disabled.
Since the push button has not been operated even though the time T13 has elapsed since the push button was enabled, the sub-main disables the push button. Then, a push button disable command is sent to the sub-sub. This causes the sub-sub to stop displaying the push button.

Although not shown in FIG. 79, if the push button is operated before time T13 has elapsed since the push button was enabled, the sub-main disables the push button and sends a push button operation command to the sub-sub. When the sub-sub receives this command, it develops the performance (executes the performance corresponding to the push button operation) and ends the display of the push button.

The sub-main also continues to measure the time from the time the effect designation command was sent using a timer, and enables the push button after time T12 has elapsed from the time the effect designation command was sent. When the sub-main enables the push button, it uses a timer to measure time from the time the push button was enabled. In this example, the effective time of the push button is time T14, and if the push button is operated before time T14 has elapsed from when the push button was enabled, the effect corresponding to the push button operation is executed, but if the push button has not been operated even after time T14 has elapsed from when the push button was enabled, the push button is disabled.

On the other hand, when the sub-sub determines, based on the performance designation command, that time T12 has passed since the start of the performance, it starts displaying the push button. In this example, the push button starts displaying in the middle of a super reach. The performance designation command sent from the sub-main to the sub-sub stipulates that the push button starts displaying after time T12 has passed from the start of the performance. As a result, similar to the above, it becomes possible to roughly match the timing at which the push button starts displaying on the sub-sub with the timing at which the push button is enabled on the sub-main at time T12.
In this example, the push button is operated by the player before time T14 has elapsed since the push button was enabled.
In Fig. 79, if the push button is operated within time T14 (valid time), the timer for time T14 ends. Fig. 79 illustrates the valid time range of time T14 for the sake of convenience (this also applies to time T14 in Fig. 80, time T14 in Fig. 81, and time T43 in Fig. 82).

When a player operates a push button, the signal is sent to the sub-main. Upon receiving this signal, the sub-main disables the push button. Furthermore, the sub-main sends a push button operation command to the sub-sub. Upon receiving the push button operation command, the sub-sub switches the presentation (executes the presentation corresponding to the push button operation). Furthermore, it ends the display of the push button.
Thereafter, the sub-sub continues to execute the performance based on the performance designation command received from the sub-main, and ends the performance in accordance with the performance designation command.
On the other hand, when the main stops the fluctuation of the special symbol display device 531, it transmits a fluctuation stop command to the sub-main. Furthermore, this fluctuation stop command is also transmitted from the sub-main to the sub-sub. This allows the sub-main and the sub-sub to know that the fluctuation on the main side has ended.

Fig. 80 is a time chart showing Example 2 of push button activation management in a pachinko game machine in the fourth embodiment. This example differs from Fig. 79 in that it is an example in which the push button is activated by a feedback command without using a timer to activate the push button. Other than that, it is the same as Fig. 79.
80, the main starts the variation of the special symbols and executes the lottery for the big win and the lottery for the variation pattern. When the main determines the variation pattern, it transmits a variation pattern command to the sub-main.
The sub-main executes a performance lottery based on the received variation pattern, specifies a performance, and transmits a performance specification command to the sub-sub.

When the sub-sub determines, based on the performance specification command, that time T11 has elapsed since the start of the performance, it begins displaying the push buttons. Then, once it has begun displaying the push buttons, it sends a feedback command to the sub-main (a command indicating that the display of the push buttons has been completed, or that the display of the push buttons has begun). Upon receiving this feedback command, the sub-main enables the push buttons. This makes it possible to roughly match the timing at which the sub-main enables the push buttons and the timing at which the sub-sub begins displaying the push buttons, at time T11 from the start of the performance, without relying on a timer.

When the sub-main enables the push button, it uses a timer to measure time from the moment the push button is enabled. After time T13 has elapsed, the sub-main disables the push button. It then sends a push button disable command to the sub-sub. This causes the sub-sub to stop displaying the push button.

Similarly, when the sub-sub determines, based on the performance designation command, that time T12 has elapsed since the start of the performance, it begins displaying the push button. Then, when it has displayed the push button, it sends a feedback command to the sub-main. When the sub-main receives this feedback command, it enables the push button. The processing thereafter is the same as that described above in Figure 79, so a description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 81 is a time chart showing an example 3 of push button activation management in a pachinko gaming machine in the fourth embodiment. This example is an example of activating a push button by a feedback command, similar to FIG. 80.
81, the main starts the variation of the special symbols and executes the lottery for the big win and the lottery for the variation pattern. When the main determines the variation pattern, it transmits a variation pattern command to the sub-main.

The sub-main executes a performance lottery based on the received variation pattern, specifies a performance, and transmits a performance specification command to the sub-sub. In the example of Fig. 81, unlike the example of Fig. 80, the performance specification command is divided and transmitted. The first performance specification command is for outputting notices A and B. Upon receiving this performance specification command, the sub-sub executes the performances related to notices A and B. In addition, the sub-main starts timing using a timer at the same time as transmitting the first performance specification command.
Next, when the sub-main determines that time T31 has elapsed, it transmits to the sub-sub a performance designation command for outputting previews C and D. Upon receiving this performance designation command, the sub-sub executes the performances related to previews C and D.
Furthermore, when the sub-main judges that the time T32 has elapsed since the transmission of the first effect specification command, it transmits an effect specification command for outputting a normal reach to the sub-sub. Upon receiving this effect specification command, the sub-sub executes an effect related to the normal reach.

Furthermore, when the sub-main judges that the time T33 has elapsed since the transmission of the first effect specification command, it transmits an effect specification command for outputting a super reach to the sub-sub. Upon receiving this effect specification command, the sub-sub executes an effect related to the super reach.
In this way, the sub-main transmits the performance designation command to the sub-sub four times, and the sub-sub switches the performance sequentially each time it receives a performance designation command.
Furthermore, when the sub-sub determines that the time T12 has elapsed from the start of the effect based on the effect specification command, it starts displaying the push button. The subsequent processing is the same as the example in Figure 80, so a description thereof will be omitted.

82 is a time chart showing Example 4 of push button validity management in a pachinko gaming machine in the fourth embodiment. In this example, the push button has a function of popping out toward the ceiling. This push button can be pushed in the same way as a normal push button. Furthermore, the push button pops out toward the ceiling and is transformed into a lever so that the player can operate the lever.
In Fig. 82, the main starts the variation, executes various lotteries, and transmits a variation pattern command to the sub-main. When the sub-main receives the variation pattern command, it determines the performance by lottery and transmits a performance designation command to the sub-sub. The outline of the performance designation command is the same as that in Fig. 79.

The sub-sub transmits a feedback command to the sub-main when time T41 has elapsed since the start of the performance, based on the performance designation command. This feedback command requests the sub-main to transform the push button into a lever. When the sub-main receives this feedback command, it starts transforming the push button into a lever. When the sub-main has completed transforming the push button into a lever, it transmits a performance designation command to the sub-sub. This performance designation command is a command indicating that the transformation of the push button into a lever has been completed. Furthermore, based on the performance designation command, the sub-sub begins displaying the lever when time T42 has elapsed since the start of the performance. Furthermore, the sub-sub transmits a feedback command to the sub-main, provided that it has received the above-mentioned performance designation command (a command indicating that the transformation of the push button into a lever has been completed) from the sub-main. This feedback command is a command to activate the lever.

When the sub-main receives the feedback command, it activates the lever. Furthermore, from the moment the lever is activated, it starts measuring the effective time of the lever. In this example, the effective time of the lever is set to time T43.
In this example, the lever is operated by the player before time T43 has elapsed since the lever was enabled.
When the player operates the lever, the signal is sent to the sub-main. Upon receiving this signal, the sub-main disables the lever. Furthermore, the sub-main sends a lever operation command to the sub-sub. Upon receiving the lever operation command, the sub-sub develops the presentation (executes the presentation corresponding to the lever operation). Furthermore, it ends the display of the lever.
Thereafter, the sub-sub continues to execute the performance based on the performance designation command received from the sub-main, and ends the performance in accordance with the performance designation command.

On the other hand, when the main stops the fluctuation of the special symbol display device 531, it transmits a fluctuation stop command to the sub-main. Furthermore, this fluctuation stop command is also transmitted to the sub-sub. This allows the sub-main and the sub-sub to know that the fluctuation on the main side has ended.
Also, although not shown in FIG. 82, after invalidating the lever, the sub-main executes a process of returning the deformation of the lever to its original form as a push button by the end of the game.

Although the first to fourth embodiments have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described contents, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
A. First embodiment (1) In the first embodiment, in the non-RT and RT1 in the non-AT, the correct push order is notified at a predetermined rate when the push order bell is won in the non-RT, and the correct push order is not notified at the time of the push order bell being won in the RT1. However, this is not limited to this, and the correct push order may be notified at a specific rate when the push order bell is won in the non-AT and RT1. If the correct push order is notified at the time of the push order bell being won in both the non-RT and RT1 during the non-AT, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the current RT is non-RT or RT1. In this case, when the rate at which the correct push order is notified at the time of the push order bell being won in the non-AT and RT1 is "x", and the rate at which the correct push order is notified at the time of the push order bell being won in the non-AT and non-RT is "y", "y = x + the predetermined rate (about 3.45% in the embodiment)" may be used.

(2) During the AT, if the ratio of instruction-included features in 175,000 plays is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (e.g., 68% or greater), the instruction function need not be activated when the push order bell is won until the ratio of instruction-included features becomes a predetermined ratio (e.g., less than 65%). However, in such cases, rather than not activating the instruction function at all, the activation ratio of the instruction function may be reduced. For example, whether or not to activate the instruction function may be determined by lottery. In other words, during the AT, when the ratio of instruction-included features in 175,000 plays is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (e.g., 68% or greater), the activation ratio of the instruction function may be set to less than "100%" rather than "0%."

(3) In AT and non-RT, when the small win D condition device is activated, an effect suggesting the winning of 1BB is executed, and when the role is not a winning combination (when the winning number for the game is "0"), an effect suggesting the winning of 1BB is not executed. However, without being limited to this, when the role is not a winning combination in AT and non-RT, an effect may be executed that allows the player to understand that it is possible to win 1BB (1BB may be won) within the limits that do not conflict with the rules. In this way, in AT and non-RT, it is possible to win 1BB without waiting for the operation of the small win D condition device.

(4) In the case of AT and non-RT, after 1BB is won, the performance during the AT will continue during the execution of the 1BB game unless the AT end condition is met. Therefore, when the push order bell is won during the AT and 1BB game, the correct push order is notified by the operation of the instruction function.
On the other hand, if the AT end condition is met during 1BB play, the next play will be non-AT and 1BB play. In this case, even if the push order bell is won, the instruction function will not be activated. Therefore, the correct push order will not be announced.
In addition, during AT and 1BB play, in a game in which RB is won, a performance may be executed suggesting that RB should be avoided. This is because when RB is won and the game shifts to RB play, the payout rate decreases.

(5) In the AT and RT1, if the player accidentally wins 1 BB when the small prize D condition device is activated, the AT may be continued as is, or the AT may be terminated as a penalty.
In the former case, as in the above-mentioned AT and 1BB game, when the push order bell is won, the correct push order is notified by the operation of the instruction function unless the AT end condition is met. On the other hand, when the AT end condition is met during 1BB game, the next game will be a non-AT and 1BB game. In this case, even if the push order bell is won, the instruction function is not activated. Therefore, the correct push order is not notified.
In the latter case, the game is non-AT and 1BB. In non-AT and 1BB games, even if the push order bell is selected, the instruction function is not activated. Therefore, the correct push order is not announced.

(6) In the first embodiment, 1BB can be won when the small role D condition device is activated. For this reason, during non-RT and non-AT or RT1, the instruction function is activated so as not to win 1BB when the small role D condition device is activated, and during non-RT and AT, the instruction function is activated so as to encourage the winning of 1BB when the small role D condition device is activated. However, it is not limited to this, and during non-RT and non-AT or RT1, the instruction function for preventing the winning of 1BB when the small role D condition device is activated is not activated, and it is also possible not to activate the instruction function for encouraging the winning of 1BB when the small role D condition device is activated during non-RT and non-AT. Furthermore, it is possible to execute a performance that suggests avoiding the winning of 1BB or a suggestion performance (performance by reel flash, sound, etc.) that encourages the winning of 1BB without activating the instruction function.
In this case, the indication function is not activated when the small win D condition device is activated, and the indication function is activated only when the small win A to C condition device is activated. Therefore, in this case, during non-RT and non-AT, the indication function is activated at a predetermined rate (about once in 29 times in the above example) when the small win A to C condition device is activated, but during RT1 and non-AT, the rate at which the indication function is activated can be set to "0".

(7) In the first embodiment, in order to make the ratio of instruction-included features in 175,000 plays less than 70%, when the ratio of instruction-included features in 175,000 plays becomes, for example, 68% or more, the operation of the instruction function may be restricted even during the AT. However, such restrictions are arbitrary, and the ratio of the instruction function being operated during the AT may be set to "100"%.
In view of the above, the "proportion of activating the instruction function" may be "0" or it may be "100"%.

B. Second embodiment (1) In the second embodiment, FIG. 41 is shown as an example of RT transition, but this is not limited thereto. When there are at least a plurality of RTs as RTs when the reels are not activated, it is possible to change the favorability of the lottery for the AT depending on which RT transitions from a non-favorable zone to a favorable zone.
In the second embodiment, the AT lottery is executed during the RB of the 1BB game, but it is not limited to this, and it is also possible to execute the AT lottery during a non-RB or RB operation. Furthermore, it is also possible to arbitrarily set how the advantage degree regarding the AT is changed when certain conditions are met in which game state.
For example, when a special role is drawn during a 1BB game, and the special role is won, the lottery for the AT may be favored. Also, if it is predetermined that the lottery for the AT is favored when the specific game state is shifted from a non-advantageous zone to an advantageous zone, when the special role is won during a 1BB game, the non-advantageous zone may be shifted to the advantageous zone when the specific game state is subsequently shifted to.

C. Third embodiment (1) In the third embodiment, when the specified number of non-RT is "2", the same presentation as that of the specified number of RT1 is "3" is executed to inform the player that the specified number is the intended specified number. Here, in a game with the specified number of "3" in a non-RT, the player may be informed that the specified number is not the intended number by displaying a unique image, etc.
(2) When playing in non-AT and RT1 with the specified number "2", the AT lottery is not executed. However, it is not limited to this, and it is also possible to execute the AT lottery itself but to treat the AT winning probability poorly (the winning probability exceeds "0", but is set to a probability that almost no winning occurs).
In addition, when a lottery is executed to add to the number of plays during the AT, if the specified number of plays is "2", there are cases where the lottery for adding to the number of plays is not executed, and cases where the lottery for adding to the number of plays is executed but the probability of winning the lottery is low.

D. Fourth Embodiment (1) In the fourth embodiment, the start of displaying a push button image is given as an example of a case in which a feedback command is transmitted from a sub-sub to a sub-main.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, first, a feedback command can be sent at the timing when the display of the above-mentioned 4-series performance is completed. This makes it possible to change the lighting state of the lamp and the volume in accordance with the start timing of the 4-series performance.
Secondly, a feedback command can be sent at the start timing of the fade effect of the push button described above, which makes it possible to change the lighting state of the lamp and the volume in accordance with the start timing of the fade effect.

Thirdly, in a pachinko game machine, an image corresponding to a reserved ball may be displayed on the image display device 23, and the image corresponding to the reserved ball may be changed (for example, by changing the color) to execute a reserved ball promotion effect that indicates that the reserved ball has a high chance of winning. In this case, a feedback command may be sent at the start timing of the reserved ball promotion effect. This makes it possible to change the lighting state of the lamp and the volume in accordance with the start timing of the reserved ball promotion effect.
Fourthly, in a pachinko game machine, a V display effect that indicates a jackpot may be executed. In this case, a feedback command may be sent at the start timing of the V display effect. This allows the lighting state of the lamp and the volume to be changed in accordance with the start timing of the V display effect.

E. Others (1) The first to fourth embodiments and the modified examples of each of these embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in appropriate combinations.
(2) In the first to fourth embodiments, a slot machine 10 and a pachinko gaming machine are given as examples of gaming machines, but the present invention can also be applied to, for example, casino machines and enclosed gaming machines (medalless gaming machines) that do not use medals used for gaming as gaming media.

Fifth Embodiment
In the fifth embodiment, a power switch 11 , a door switch 17 , a setting key insertion port 151 , a setting key switch 152 , and a setting change (reset) switch 153 are provided.
In addition, the door switch 17 , the setting key switch 152 , and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51 .

The power switch 11 is a switch that is operated to turn the power on and off.
In the following description, turning on the power switch 11 may be referred to as "powering on,""turning on the power," or "resume power supply."
Furthermore, turning off the power switch 11 may be referred to as "turning off the power" or "cutting off the power supply."

The door switch 17 is a switch that detects the opening of the front door 12 , and is attached to the cabinet 13 or the front door 12 .
The front door 12 is normally closed, but is opened, for example, when the power is turned on, when settings are changed, when settings are checked, when an error occurs, when medals are replenished, etc.

The door switch 17 is set to be turned off when the front door 12 is closed, and to be turned on when the front door 12 is open, thereby making it possible to detect the opening of the front door 12.
In addition, the opening of the front door 12 may be detected by setting the door switch 17 to be on when the front door 12 is closed and to be off when the front door 12 is open.

The setting key switch 152 is a switch used to transition to a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed (also referred to as a "setting change mode" or "setting change in progress"), or to a setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed but can be confirmed (also referred to as a "setting confirmation mode" or "setting confirmation in progress").
By inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion port 151 and rotating the setting key 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 152 is turned on (also referred to as the "first mode"), and by rotating the setting key 90 degrees counterclockwise from this state, the setting key switch 152 is turned off (also referred to as the "second mode").

The setting change (reset) switch 153 serves as a setting change switch 153 , a reset switch 153 , and an RWM clear switch 153 .
The setting change switch 153 is a switch that is operated when changing a setting value in the setting change state.
The reset switch 153 is a switch that is operated to restore the state before the error occurred (to release the error state) after the error that occurred has been removed.
Furthermore, the RWM clear switch 153 is a switch that is operated when initializing (clearing) a predetermined storage area in the RWM 53 .

In the following description, it will be referred to as the "setting change (reset) switch 153," as the "setting change switch 153," as the "reset switch 153," and as the "RWM clear switch 153."
In addition, various switches such as the setting key switch 152 and the setting change switch (reset switch/RWM clear switch) 153 may be referred to as being "operated" when they are on, and as being "not operated" when they are off.
In this embodiment, the setting change switch 153, the reset switch 153, and the RWM clear switch 153 are integrated, but this is not limiting, and the setting change switch 153, the reset switch 153, and the RWM clear switch 153 may be provided separately.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the "game area" has a "normal area" and a "favourable area".
The "normal section" is a game section in which signals related to the instruction function are prohibited from being sent to a peripheral board (e.g., the sub-control board 80), and which has no effect whatsoever on the performance related to the instruction function (the instruction function is not activated). In other words, the normal section is a game section in which advantageous operation modes of the stop switch 42 are not notified. Note that the normal section may also be referred to as a "non-advantageous section."
The "advantageous zone" is a game zone that has a function related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be activated). In other words, the advantageous zone is a game zone in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 (for example, the correct pressing order) can be notified.

Furthermore, the fifth embodiment is provided with an advantageous zone display LED 77 that can display to the player that the zone is advantageous. In the normal zone, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned off, and in the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on. In other words, when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned off, it indicates that the zone is a normal zone, and when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on, it indicates that the zone is advantageous. Thus, in the fifth embodiment, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the display mode (off or on) of the advantageous zone display LED 77 and the game zone (normal zone or advantageous zone).
31, a segment P of digit 4a of the acquisition number display LED 78 can be used as the advantageous zone display LED 77. Also, the advantageous zone display LED 77 can be provided separately from the acquisition number display LED 78.

In addition, the advantageous zone display LED 77 may not be lit immediately after transition from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, but may be lit when a certain condition is met after transition to the advantageous zone (for example, when notification of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 begins). In this case, when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit, it indicates that it is an advantageous zone, but when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is off, it may be either a normal zone or an advantageous zone.

FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the main CPU 55, the ROM 54, and the RWM 53 in the fifth embodiment.
The main control board 50 is provided with a main CPU 55, a RWM 53, and a ROM 54.
83, a one-chip microprocessor (hereinafter simply referred to as "chip") is mounted on the main control board 50, and this chip contains a main CPU 55. Furthermore, the main CPU 55 has a built-in memory, and this built-in memory has a (built-in) ROM 54 and a (built-in) RWM 53. Furthermore, the addresses of the ROM 54 and the RWM 53 are consecutive.

The storage area of the ROM 54 includes a used area and an outside used area, and each of the used area and the outside used area includes a control area and a data area.
Here, the "usage area" is a memory area in which information related to the progress of the game is stored.
The "control area" is a storage area in which various programs executed by the main control means 50 are stored, and is also called the "program area."
Furthermore, a "data area" is a storage area in which information other than programs is stored, and in which data used when a program is executed is stored.

Furthermore, the "outside use area" is a memory area in which information unrelated to the progress of the game is stored, such as a memory area in which a program for controlling the lighting of the management information display LED 74 described below, a program used during testing, and a program for preventing cheating are stored.
Similarly to the usage area, the "outside the usage area" has a control area and a data area. The control area of the usage area is sometimes called the "first control area" or the "first program area," and the control area outside the usage area is sometimes called the "second control area" or the "second program area."
Furthermore, a program stored in a control area (first control area, first program area) of the area of use may be referred to as the "first program," and a program stored in a control area outside the area of use (second control area, second program area) may be referred to as the "second program."

During execution of a program (first program) stored in the control area of the use area of ROM 54, reference (access) to data stored in the data area of the use area of ROM 54 is permitted, but reference to data stored in a data area outside the use area of ROM 54 is prohibited.
Similarly, during execution of a program (second program) stored in a control area outside the used area of ROM 54, reference to data stored in a data area outside the used area of ROM 54 is permitted, but reference to data stored in the data area of the used area of ROM 54 is prohibited.

The storage area of the RWM 53, like the ROM 54, has a used area and an outside used area, and each of the used area and the outside used area has a work area and a stack area.
As shown in FIG. 83, addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" are used areas, addresses "F200(H)" to "F20F(H)" are unused areas, and addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" are outside the used area.

During execution of a program (first program) stored in the control area of the usage area of ROM 54, reference (access) and rewriting (overwriting) of data stored in the usage area of RWM 53 are permitted, but reference to data stored outside the usage area of RWM 53 is permitted but rewriting is prohibited.
Similarly, during execution of a program (second program) stored in a control area outside the use area of ROM 54, reference and rewriting of data stored outside the use area of RWM 53 is permitted, but reference to data in the use area of RWM 53 is permitted but rewriting is prohibited, in order to prevent processing from becoming complicated.

In addition, in order to prevent data in the used area of RWM 53 from being rewritten (overwritten) due to a program going out of control or the like while a program outside the used area (second program) is being executed, an unused area is provided between the used area of RWM 53 and outside the used area.
Furthermore, if an interrupt process occurs during the execution of a program outside the area of use (the second program), there is a possibility that the interrupt process may cause the data in the area of use of RWM 53 to be rewritten (overwritten), so interrupt process is prohibited during the execution of a program outside the area of use (the second program).

As shown in FIG. 83, the ROM 54 has a program management area and the like as other areas in addition to the used area and the non-used area.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 83, the RWM 53 has an unused area and the like as other areas in addition to the used area and the non-used area.

Furthermore, the entire storage area of the built-in memory includes an internal register area, an unused area, and the like, other than the ROM 54 and the RWM 53 .
The internal register area includes, for example, A register to L register, a transmission register, and the like.

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing the address, label name, number of bytes, and name of data stored in the used area of the RWM 53 in the fifth embodiment.
The addresses of the used area are set in the range of "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" as shown in FIG.
It should be noted that the data shown in FIG. 84 is used for explaining the fifth embodiment, and the data stored in the use area of the RWM 53 is not limited to this.

Address "F000(H)" is a storage area for setting value data (_NB_RANK). When the setting value is "N", "N-1" is stored as the setting value data. In this embodiment, the setting values are "1" to "6". Therefore, any value from "0(H)" to "5(H)" is stored as the setting value data.
Then, the set value display LED 73 displays "N" which is the set value data plus "1" as the set value.

Address "F001(H)" is a 1-byte storage area where the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) is stored. When the setting value is "N", "N-1" is stored in address "F000(H)" as the setting value data (_NB_RANK). Then, "N", which is the setting value data (_NB_RANK) plus "1", is stored in address "F001(H)" as the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP).

In this embodiment, the setting values are "1" to "6", and address "F000(H)" stores one of the values "0(D)" to "5(D)" as setting value data (_NB_RANK), and address "F001(H)" stores one of the values "1(D)" to "6(D)" as setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP).The value of the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) is then displayed on the setting value display LED 73 as the setting value.

Address "F010(H)" is a storage area for credit number data (_NB_CREDIT). The credit number data is data to be displayed on the credit number display LED 76. In this embodiment, any value from "0" to "50(D)" is stored as the credit number data.
In this embodiment, the credit number data is stored as a value obtained by converting the credit number into a decimal number. For example, when the credit number to be displayed is "29", the value "29(H)" is stored. In other words, "00101001(B)" is stored in the address "F010(H)". As a result, the lower four bits D0 to D3 of the address "F010(H)" are data for displaying the lower digits of the credit number ("9" in this example), and the upper four bits D4 to D7 are data for displaying the upper digits of the credit number ("2" in this example). In this embodiment, the upper limit of the credit number is "50(D)", so the stored data value is in the range of "0" to "50".
In this embodiment, the address of the RWM 53 for storing the credit number data itself is not provided, but the credit number data is provided as display data for the credit number display LED 76 .

Address "F011(H)" is a storage area for acquired number data (_NB_PAYOUT). The acquired number data is data to be displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. In the acquired number data, similar to the above-mentioned credit number data, the lowest 4 bits D0 to D3 are data for displaying the lower digit, and the highest 4 bits D4 to D7 are data for displaying the upper digit.
In this embodiment, when a small win occurs, the payout number corresponding to the winning small win is displayed on the winning number display LED 78, so the payout number data corresponding to the winning small win is stored as the winning number data. Specifically, when a small win occurs and medals are paid out, the winning number data is added together with the medals being paid out, and the display on the winning number display LED 78 is updated. For example, when "1 (H)" is stored as the winning number data, "01" is displayed on the winning number display LED 78.

In this case, the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) at address "F040(H)" described later stores, for example, "8(H)" when an 8-coin combination is won, and the payout number data is decremented by "1" according to the payout number when medals are paid out (including addition to credits), such as "8" → "7" → ... → "0".
In contrast, the winning number data stored in address "F011(H)" is incremented by "1" each time one medal is paid out, for example, when an 8-coin combination is won, from "0" → "1" → "2" → ... → "8". Therefore, the display of the winning number display LED 78 also counts up, from "0" → "1" → "2" → ... → "8".

Also, in this embodiment, while the setting is being changed, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays "88". Therefore, while the setting is being changed, setting change in progress display data for displaying "88" is stored as acquisition number data. By displaying "88" on the acquisition number display LED 78, it is possible to identify from the front side of the gaming machine that the setting is being changed. Furthermore, by lighting up all segments and displaying "88", it is possible to confirm that there are no segment defects (that there are no segments that cannot be lit).
In addition, since the upper limit of the number of medals that can be paid out is 15 medals, when the acquired number display LED 78 displays "88," it can be understood that this is not a display of the number of medals to be paid out.

Furthermore, when the conditions for indicating the specified number (the number of medals to be bet in the current game) are met, the specified number is indicated (displayed, notified) on the winning number display LED 78 before the game begins (before betting becomes possible or before the start switch 41 is operated).
In this embodiment, in order to indicate the specified number "2", "0A" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. Therefore, when indicating the specified number, the specified number display data for displaying "0A" is stored as the acquisition number data.

Furthermore, when a push order bell or the like is won during the AT, push order instruction information is displayed on the winning number display LED 78. Therefore, when the push order instruction information is displayed on the winning number display LED 78, the push order instruction number is stored as the winning number data.
For example, when the push order instruction information is displayed in a game in which the winning number "3" is won, the push order instruction number "A1(H)" is stored as the winning number data. As a result, the push order instruction information "=1" corresponding to the push order instruction number "A1(H)" is displayed on the winning number display LED 78.

Furthermore, when a specific error occurs, an error number is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. Therefore, when a specific error occurs, error number display data for displaying the error number is stored as acquisition number data.
For example, when the error number to be displayed is "HP", the error number display data for displaying "HP" is stored as the acquired number data.

Address "F030(H)" is a storage area for the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION). The operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) is a flag for determining whether or not replay and reel operations are performed.
For example, when 1BB is activated, the D2 bit of the activation status flag is set to "1." Also, when it is determined that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is stopped and displayed, the D0 bit of the activation status flag is set to "1."

Address "F040(H)" is a storage area for payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL). When a small win is won in the game and the payout number is determined, the payout number data becomes data indicating a value corresponding to that payout number. When a small win is won, the payout number data corresponding to the won small win is stored and the medal payout process is executed. Here, each time one medal is paid out (adding "1" to the credit amount, or paying out one actual medal (from the hopper 35)), the payout number data is decremented by "1". In other words, it serves as the number of times the payout process is executed. As a result, when the medal payout process is completed, the payout number data becomes "0".

Address "F041(H)" is the storage area for the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL). Like the payout number data, the payout number data buffer becomes data that indicates a value corresponding to the payout number when a small combination is won in the game and the payout number is determined. Unlike the payout number data, the payout number data buffer is not decremented each time a medal is paid out, but rather the initially stored value is maintained. This value is then maintained until the medal payout number update process is performed for the next game. For example, if a small combination that pays out 8 medals is won in the game, "8(H)" is stored as the payout number data buffer, and if no combination is won in the next game, "0" is overwritten as the payout number data buffer.

Address "F042(H)" is a storage area for automatic bet number data (_NB_REP_MEDAL). The automatic bet number data indicates the number of medals to be automatically bet when a replay is won, and in this embodiment, "2" or "3" is stored.
Address "F043(H)" is a storage area for bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL). The bet number data indicates the number of bets in the current game, and in this embodiment, any one of "0" to "3" is stored.

Address "F044(H)" is a 1-byte storage area in which status display LED lighting data is stored.
As shown in FIG. 87(A) described later, in the fifth embodiment, a display board 75 is provided with six status display LEDs 79, including a 1 bet display LED 79a, a 2 bet display LED 79b, a 3 bet display LED 79c, a start of game display LED 79d, a deposit display LED 79e, and a replay display LED 79f.
The status display LED lighting data is data indicating whether or not three of the six LEDs mentioned above, the game start display LED 79d, the coin insertion display LED 79e, and the replay display LED 79f, are to be turned on.

As shown in Fig. 84, the D0 bit of the status display LED lighting data is assigned to the game start display LED 79d, the D1 bit is assigned to the insert display LED 79e, and the D2 bit is assigned to the replay display LED 79f. Each bit of this status display LED lighting data corresponds to each bit of the LED display counter 1 in Fig. 91(A) described later.
Then, a "1" is set to the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned on, and a "0" is set to the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned off.
For example, in a case where the game start display LED 79d is turned on and the coin insertion display LED 79e and the replay display LED 79f are turned off, "00000001(B)" is stored as the status display LED lighting data.

Address “F051(H)” is a 1-byte storage area in which LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is stored.
The LED display counter 1 is a counter for determining which of the digits 1 to 5 should be lit, and is continuously updated with each interrupt.
Here, "digit" refers to a display unit (display), and in this embodiment, it is configured with one 7-segment display. Among the digits in this embodiment, digit 1 corresponds to the upper digit of the credit number (accumulated number) display LED 76, digit 2 corresponds to the lower digit of the credit number display LED 76, digit 3 corresponds to the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78, digit 4 corresponds to the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78, and digit 5 corresponds to the set value display LED 73.
Furthermore, each bit of the LED display counter 1 is assigned such that bit D0 is the digit 1 signal, bit D1 is the digit 2 signal, ..., bit D4 is the digit 5 signal. In one interrupt process, dynamic lighting of digits 1 to 5 is performed so that the digit corresponding to the bit set to "1" in the LED display counter 1 is turned on.

In the fifth embodiment, the LED display counter 1 has a value of "00010000 (B)" as an initial value. Then, as the interrupt progresses from "1" to "2" to ... (for each interrupt), the LED display counter 1 updates by shifting the bit "1" of the LED display counter 1 to the right by one digit. In addition, in the interrupt following interrupt "5", the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000000 (B)" by shifting one digit to the right, but at the time of the interrupt, the LED display counter 1 is initialized to "00010000 (B)". As a result, the LED display counter 1 repeats the values of "5" → "4" → ... → "1" → "5" → "4" → ... for each interrupt process. In other words, five interrupts make up one cycle.

From the above, the value of LED display counter 1 is
"N" Interruption: 00010000 (B)
"N+1" interruption: 00001000 (B)
"N+2" interruption: 00000100 (B)
"N+3" interruption: 00000010 (B)
"N+4" interruption: 00000001 (B)
"N+5" interruption: 00000000(B) → 00010000(B) (initialization; same value as "N" interruption)
"N+6" interruption: 00001000 (B)
:
It becomes.

In the fifth embodiment, five interrupts constitute one cycle, and digits 1 to 5 are dynamically lit. Specifically, when the value of LED display counter 1 is "00010000 (B)", a digit 5 signal is output. Then, the output of the digit 5 signal enables digit 5 (setting value display LED 73) to light (digits 1 to 4 are turned off). At the time of the next interrupt process, the LED display counter becomes "00001000 (B)", the digit 4 signal is output, and digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED D78) can be turned on (digits 1 to 3 and 5 are turned off).

Address "F052(H)" is a storage area for an LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). The LED display request flag takes a value according to whether the device is in normal mode, in setting change mode, or in setting confirmation mode.
In the fifth embodiment, during normal operation, digits 1 to 4 are lit and digit 5 is not lit, so the value is "00001111(B)". During setting change and setting confirmation, digit 5 is lit and digits 1 to 4 are not lit, so the value is "00010000(B)".

Address "F061 (H)" is a storage area for a favorable zone type flag (_NB_ADV_KND). The favorable zone type flag is a flag that indicates whether the current game zone is a normal zone or a favorable zone.
The favorable zone type flag stores "00000000 (B)" when in a normal zone, and when transitioning from a normal zone to a favorable zone, the D0 bit becomes "1".
The timing at which the advantageous zone type flag is updated will be described later.

Address "F062(H)" is a storage area for the advantageous zone display LED flag (_FL_ADV_LED). The advantageous zone display LED flag is a flag that indicates whether the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit or not. When the advantageous zone display LED 77 is off, the advantageous zone display LED flag is "0", and when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit, the advantageous zone display LED flag is "1".
In addition, the advantageous zone display LED 77 may be turned on at any time after the transition to the advantageous zone (for example, the advantageous zone display LED 77 may be turned on at the same time as the transition to the advantageous zone).

On the other hand, even after entering the favorable zone, the favorable zone display LED 77 does not have to be turned on.
Specifically, first, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is not turned on when transitioning to the advantageous zone, but may be turned on subsequently (during the advantageous zone).
Secondly, the advantageous zone display LED 77 may not be turned on when transitioning to the advantageous zone, and if the conditions for ending the advantageous zone are met before the conditions for turning on the advantageous zone display LED 77 are met, the advantageous zone may end without ever turning on the advantageous zone display LED 77.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the game state is in a favorable zone and the zone Sim ball payout rate exceeds "1", when the instruction function is activated (when the correct button press sequence is notified), the favorable zone display LED 77 is lit up.
Furthermore, once the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on, it remains lit during the advantageous zone.
In addition, during the game end check process in the final game of the advantageous zone, a process is executed to turn off the advantageous zone display LED 77. Specifically, when the end condition of the advantageous zone is satisfied, an initialization process of the advantageous zone display LED flag storage area (clearing the advantageous zone display LED flag) is executed. As a result, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned off in the subsequent interrupt process.

Furthermore, when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on in a game that activates the indication function, the timing of lighting is, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated (more specifically, after the reel 31 starts to rotate, until the rotation of the reel 31 reaches a constant speed state).
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other lighting timings are possible, for example:
1) Before the start switch 41 is operated. 2) After the start switch 41 is operated, when all the reels 31 are in a constant speed state and the operation of the stop switch 42 is available,
3) When at least one reel 31 is stopped and at least one other reel 31 is spinning,
4) When all reels 31 have stopped,
5) After all the reels 31 have stopped (the game has ended) and before the settlement switch 43 can be operated before the start of the next game.

However, in order to light up the advantageous zone display LED 77 in a game that activates the instruction function, the winning role for that game must have been determined, so this does not apply before the start switch 41 is operated (before the role is drawn).
When the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on in a game in which the indication function is activated, this is done after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning combination is selected, so the shortest possible time for turning on the advantageous zone display LED 77 after the reel 31 starts to rotate and before the reel 31 reaches a constant speed state is achieved.

Address "F063 (H)" is the storage area for the favorable zone clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR). The favorable zone clear counter is a decrement counter for counting the number of plays during the favorable zone. The favorable zone clear counter is "0" during the normal zone, and when moving to the favorable zone, the initial value "1500 (D)" is set. The favorable zone clear counter is set to decrement "1" per play during the favorable zone as well as during the normal zone. However, the minimum value is "0". For this reason, when the favorable zone clear counter (before decrement) is "0" during the normal zone, even if "1" is decremented, the counter used will have a value of "0" after decrement. Therefore, during the normal zone, "0" is maintained, although "1" is decremented for each play. In other words, when "0" is stored in the favorable zone clear counter, it is a normal zone (non-favorable zone).

Furthermore, when the player moves into the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone clear counter is set to an initial value of "1500 (D)", so that the advantageous zone clear counter will become "1499 (D)" in the next game.
The favorable zone clear counter is configured with 2 bytes since it stores a maximum initial value of "1500 (D)". In other words, when a value other than "0" is stored in the favorable zone clear counter, it is a favorable zone.

Address "F065 (H)" is a storage area for a difference counter (_SC_24HGAME). The difference counter is a counter that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference in the number of coins during the advantageous period, and is also called an "MY counter."
The difference counter does not simply store the cumulative value of the difference number itself, but stores a "value corresponding to" the cumulative value of the difference number. For example, when the difference number becomes a value corresponding to a negative number, the value is corrected to "0 (H)". Therefore, the "cumulative value of the difference number ≠ the difference counter value".
The difference counter is an increment counter for determining whether or not the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference in number of coins during the advantageous period exceeds "2400 (D)". For this reason, the difference counter is configured with a storage area of 2 bytes.

The difference number counter is required to count the cumulative value of the difference number of coins at least during the advantageous period, and does not need to count during the non-advantageous period (normal period).
Here, when updating the difference counter value on the condition that it is in an advantageous zone, a process is required to determine whether or not the game is in an advantageous zone for each game. For this reason, in this embodiment, the difference counter value is updated even during a non-advantageous zone (normal zone). In this way, the difference counter value can be updated without determining whether or not the game is in an advantageous zone for each game, simplifying the process.

Furthermore, even if the difference in number becomes negative in the current game and the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference in number becomes carry-down data, the difference counter value is updated. However, if the result of the calculation is that the difference counter is carry-down data, a correction is made to set the difference counter value to "0."

To give a specific example (assuming that the difference counter value at the start of the first game is "0 (H)"),
First game: When the bet amount is "3" and the payout amount is "0", the difference counter after calculation is "FFFD (H)" and the difference counter after correction is "0 (H)".
Second game: bet number "3", payout number "9", difference counter after calculation "0006 (H)" (no correction)
3rd game: bet number "3", payout number "0", difference counter after calculation "0003 (H)" (no correction)
4th game: bet number "3", payout number "1", difference counter after calculation "0001 (H)" (no correction)
5th game: bet number "3", payout number "0", difference counter after calculation "FFFE (H)", difference counter after correction "0 (H)"
It will be updated as follows.
In addition, even if the difference number counter for the previous game was "0 (H)" and the difference number counter for the current game is "0 (H)", this is the result of a recalculation of the difference number counter value reflecting the difference number for that game, so this also corresponds to an "update" of the difference number counter.

As described above, when the difference counter value after the calculation is a value in which a carry-over has occurred, the difference counter value is corrected to "0" (the initial value is set to "0"). Note that the method of determining whether or not a carry-over has occurred will be described later.
By updating the difference counter value in this way, for example, when the payout number is large compared to the bet number, that is, when the difference number is increasing, the difference counter value increases as the game progresses. On the other hand, when the payout number is less than the bet number, for example, during a game in a normal section, the difference counter value increases by the payout number when a payout is made based on the winning of a small combination, but after that, if the payout number falls below the bet number, it will eventually become "0".

Address "F067(H)" is the storage area for the AT flag (_FL_AT_KND). The AT flag is a flag for determining whether or not an AT is in progress, and is set to "0" during non-AT and "1" during AT. The AT flag is set to "1" when the AT lottery is won, and is executed in step S364 of FIG. 46 described below. The AT flag is also turned off when the final game of the AT ends, and is executed, for example, in the game end check process (step S415 of FIG. 50) described below. The AT flag is also included in the data that is cleared (initialized) at the end of the advantageous period.

Address "F068 (H)" is the storage area of the AT play count counter (_CT_ART). The AT play count counter is a decrement counter that counts the number of plays during the AT (including ART). Unlike the favorable zone clear counter, when the AT play count counter becomes "0", it stops counting (subtracting) thereafter.
The AT game count counter is updated (decremented) during the AT after the start switch 41 is operated (step S281 in FIG. 97) during the main processing (M_MAIN) (FIG. 97).

In this embodiment, the initial value of the number of AT games may exceed "255 (D)", so the AT game counter is configured as a 2-byte counter. When the number of AT games is a maximum of "255 (D)" or less, the AT game counter may be configured as a 1-byte counter.
When the AT is started (or when the state transitions to AT preparation), an initial value is set in the AT play count counter. The initial value may be a fixed value, or may be determined by lottery or the like when the AT is won. Also, after the initial value is determined, the number of AT plays may be updated to "0" without being changed thereafter. Alternatively, when a predetermined condition is met during the AT, the number of AT plays may be increased, and when a lottery for adding the number of AT plays is won, the number of AT plays may be increased. In this case, the increase is added to the AT play count counter.
This AT game count counter is also included in the data that is cleared at the end of the advantageous period.

In this embodiment, since a game number management type AT is exemplified, an AT play count counter is provided. Therefore, in the case of a difference number management type AT, an AT difference number counter is provided instead of an AT play count counter. Then, when the AT starts, an initial value of the difference number of coins that can be obtained is set. Also, when an additional coin is won, the additional difference number is added. Then, each time a payout is made, the difference number of coins for that play is subtracted, and when the AT difference number counter becomes "0", the AT ends.

The 48-byte memory area from addresses "F1D0(H)" to "F1FF(H)" is the stack area for the used area.

Here, the management information display LED 74 is also called a "role ratio monitor" or "ratio display" and is composed of four LEDs (digits 6 to 9 from the left).
Furthermore, of the four LEDs that make up the management information display LED 74, the two LEDs on the left (digits 6 and 7) are also called "identification segments" and display the type of information, and the two LEDs on the right (digits 8 and 9) are also called "ratio segments" and display the calculated ratio.

Furthermore,
Digit 6: upper digit of identification segment, Digit 7: lower digit of identification segment, Digit 8: upper digit of ratio segment, Digit 9: lower digit of ratio segment.

In the fifth embodiment, the management information display LED 74 repeatedly displays the following six items of information 1) to 6) as management information at predetermined time intervals.
1) Ratio of indicative features (cumulative) (7 pages)
2) Continuous feature ratio (6000 games) (6y.)
3) Ratio of special features (6000 games) (7y.)
4) Ratio of consecutive features (cumulative) (6A.)
5) Role Ratio (Cumulative) (7A.)
6) Ratio of features and other conditions (cumulative) (5H.)

For example, when displaying the reel ratio (cumulative), if the ratio is "50"%, the symbol "7A." indicating the reel ratio (cumulative) is displayed in the identification segment, and "50" is displayed in the ratio segment.
Here, "cumulative" refers to the sum of the values that have been counted up to that point, and in this embodiment, the count continues until the number of games reaches at least "175,000."
When the cumulative total is less than "175,000" plays, the ratio is displayed in the ratio segment, for example, by blinking, and when the cumulative total is equal to or greater than "175,000" plays, the ratio is displayed in the ratio segment, for example, by lighting.
Even after the cumulative total exceeds 175,000 games played, it continues to be added until it reaches a value (upper limit) that can be stored in a specified address of the RWM 53.
In addition, "6000 games" refers to the total number of games played over 15 sets, each set consisting of "400" games.

The "ratio of devices with instructions" is the sum of the number of payouts when the device is activated and the number of payouts in games in which the instruction function is activated, divided by the total number of payouts.
In addition, in slot machines that are not equipped with special features, the "special feature ratio" is calculated by dividing the number of payouts in a game in which the special feature is activated by the total number of payouts.
In addition, the total number of payouts when the reel is activated and the total number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated are counted by an instruction-included reel counter.

Regarding the "number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated," when the stop switch 42 is operated in the displayed push order in a game in which the instruction function is activated, for example, when a 15-coin winning combination is achieved, the number of payouts, "15," is added to the instruction-included role counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter.
For example, in a game in which the small prize condition devices A1 to A6 condition devices are activated during 1BB play and the instruction function is activated (displaying the correct push order (the push order that will win a 15-coin prize)), when the stop switch 42 is operated in the displayed push order (the correct push order) and a 15-coin prize (any of small prizes 01 to 06) is won, the number of payouts "15" is added to the instruction-included prize counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter.

On the other hand, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a different pressing order from that displayed, resulting in, for example, a three-coin winning combination, the number of coins paid out, "3", is added to the instruction-included combination counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter.
For example, during a 1BB game, when the small prize condition devices A1 to A6 condition devices are activated and the instruction function is activated (the correct push order is displayed), if the stop switch 42 is operated in a push order different from the displayed push order (incorrect push order) and a 3-coin prize (any of small prizes 13 to 24) is won, the number of payouts "3" is added to the instruction-included role counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter.

In addition, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a different pressing order from that displayed and a winning combination is missed (when no winning combination is achieved), the instruction-included combination counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter will have the same values as in the previous game.
For example, when the stop switch 42 is operated in an incorrect push order, the combination will not win (no combination will win). Then, in a game in which the minor combination condition device A1 to minor combination condition device A6 are activated during a 1BB game and the instruction function is activated (the correct push order is displayed), if the stop switch 42 is operated in a push order different from the displayed push order (incorrect push order) and a winning combination is missed (when no combination wins), the values of the instruction combination counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter will be the same as those of the previous game.

In this embodiment, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a different pressing sequence from that displayed and a winning combination is missed, a process is executed to add the number of payout coins "0" to the instruction-included combination counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter, so that the values of both counters become the same as in the previous game.
It is possible to configure the program so that, when a winning combination is missed, the process of adding up the number of coins to be paid out is skipped. In this case, however, it is necessary to include a process for determining whether or not the winning combination has been missed before the process of adding up the number of coins to be paid out, and to configure the program so that, when it is determined that the winning combination has been missed, the process of adding up the number of coins to be paid out is skipped. This increases the amount of ROM 54 used and the processing burden on the main CPU 55.
Therefore, in this embodiment, when a winning combination is missed, a process is executed to add the payout number "0" to both counters. This makes it possible to set the values of both counters to the same values as in the previous game without the need for a process to determine whether or not a winning combination has been missed, thereby reducing the amount of ROM 54 used and the processing load on the main CPU 55.

"Continuous feature ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts when a first-class special feature (RB) is activated to the total number of payouts.
For example, if the total number of payouts in 6000 games is 2000 coins, and of that, the number of payouts when the first type special feature (RB) is activated is 500 coins, then the "consecutive feature ratio (6000 games)" will be 25(%).

"Feature ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts when a feature is activated to the total number of payouts.
Here, the "reel" includes the above-mentioned first type special reel (RB), as well as the second type special reel (CB), MB (also called 2BB. Second type reel continuous operation device. CB operates continuously.), and SB (single bonus).

The "ratio of the state of the reels, etc." is the sum of the number of times played when the reels are activated and the number of times played when the reels continuous activation device is activated, divided by the total number of times played.
In addition, the sum of the number of games played when the reel is in operation and the number of games played when the reel continuous operation device is in operation is counted by a reel etc. state counter.
In addition, in gaming machines that do not have the functions corresponding to the above six items, the ratio segment will be displayed as "--".
For example, if the reel is not equipped with an "RB (first type special reel)," there is no continuous reel ratio, so when the ratio display numbers "2" and "4" are displayed, the ratio segment is displayed as "--."

According to the rules, the ratio of instructed roles should be set to less than 70%, the role ratio should also be set to less than 70%, the continuous role ratio should be set to less than 60%, and the role etc. state ratio should be set to less than 50%.
By looking at the information displayed on the management information display LED 74, it is possible to confirm whether or not the value falls within the range stipulated by the regulations.

In addition, in order to enable various pieces of ratio information to be grasped by devices external to the slot machine 10, such as the hall computer 200, the various pieces of ratio information may be configured to be output as external signals.
For example, the control information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) may be configured to output the indicated role ratio data, continuous role ratio (cumulative) data, role ratio (cumulative) data, role etc. state ratio data, etc., as an external signal. In this case, if a predetermined number of plays (for example, "17500 times" for continuous role ratio (cumulative) data and role ratio (cumulative) data, and "175000 times" for indicated role ratio data and role etc. state ratio data) is not met, predetermined information different from the current ratio information (for example, "FF (H)") may be output as an external signal, and if the predetermined number of plays is met, various ratio information may be output as an external signal.
Furthermore, advantageous zone ratio data that is not displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) may be configured to be output as an external signal. In this case, a storage area for an advantageous zone play count counter that counts the number of plays in the advantageous zone and advantageous zone ratio data that indicates the ratio of the number of plays in the advantageous zone to the total number of plays may be provided outside the usage area of the RWM 53.

85 and 86 are diagrams showing the address, label name, number of bytes, and name of data stored outside the used area of the RWM 53 in the fifth embodiment.
Addresses outside the used area are set in the range of "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" as shown in FIG.
It should be noted that the data shown in Figures 85 and 86 is used for explaining the fifth embodiment, and the data stored outside the used area of the RWM 53 is not limited to these.

The 400 game counter at address "F210(H)" increments the number of games played, with 400 games as the denominator. This 400 game counter cycles from "0" to "399(D)" and increments by "1" for each game played. If "1" is added when the 400 game counter's value is "399(D)," the value of the 400 game counter will become "0."

Note that, conversely to the above, the 400 game counter may be set to an initial value of "399 (D)" and decremented by "1" for each game. In this case, when the value of the 400 game counter becomes "0", it is determined that 400 games have been played. Then, when the value of the 400 game counter is "0" and "1" is decremented, the 400 game counter is set to the initial value "399 (D)".

The ring buffer number at address "F212(H)" is used to specify which ring buffer the number of medals paid out in a given game should be added to.
Specifically, at address "F212(H)", one of "0" to "14(D)" is stored as the ring buffer number.

Addresses "F213(H)" to "F230(H)" are the storage areas for total payout ring buffers 0 to 14. Total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 are made up of 15 ring buffers. Each total payout ring buffer is made up of 2 bytes. For example, total payout ring buffer 0 is made up of addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)", with address "F213(H)" being the lower digit and address "F214(H)" being the upper digit. In Figures 85 and 86, for storage areas with a byte count of 2 or more, the lowest address number is displayed.

The total number of payouts over 400 games is stored in one ring buffer. For example, the payouts for the first to 400th games are stored in addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)," and the payouts for the next games, 401st to 800th games, are stored in addresses "F215(H)" and "F216(H)."
Here, whether or not the 400th game has been played is determined by referring to the 400 game counter at the address "F210(H)" described above. Also, which ring buffer value the number of medals paid out in that game should be added to (the value should be updated) is determined by referring to the ring buffer number at the address "F212(H)".

Then, when the total payout numbers for the first through 400th games are stored in total payout ring buffer 0 at addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)", the total payout numbers for the 5601st through 6000th games are stored in total payout ring buffer 14 at addresses "F22F(H)" and "F230(H)". Next, when the 6000th game ends, the data stored in total payout ring buffer 0 at addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)" is cleared, and the payout numbers for the 6001st through 6400th games are stored in total payout ring buffer 0 at addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)".

Each of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 is made up of 2 bytes. If the maximum payout number in one game is 15, the maximum number of coins that can be paid out over 400 games is 6,000 coins, so this can be stored in a memory capacity of 2 bytes.
This also applies to the continuous payout ring buffers 0 to 14 and the payout ring buffers 0 to 14 described later.

In addition, addresses "F231(H)" to "F24E(H)" are storage areas for continuous reel payout ring buffers 0 to 14.
Furthermore, addresses "F24F(H)" to "F26C(H)" are memory areas for reel payout ring buffers 0 to 14.

The total number of games counter at addresses "F26D(H)" to "F26F(H)" is a counter that stores the number of games (cumulative), and is composed of 3 bytes. The total number of games counter is composed of 3 bytes because it is necessary to count "175000(D)" games as the cumulative number of games.
The total number of plays counter continues counting even if the number of plays exceeds "175,000 (D)" plays, and stops counting when it reaches 3 bytes full ("FFFFFF (H)").

The instruction-included reel counter at addresses "F270(H)" to "F272(H)" is a counter that counts the number of payouts when the reel is activated and the number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated, and is composed of 3 bytes.
The total payout (6000 times) counter at addresses "F273(H)" to "F275(H)" is a counter that counts the total number of medals paid out during 6000 games. Even if 15 medals are paid out per game in 6000 games, the total comes to 90,000 medals, so it can be counted in 3 bytes (the same applies to the continuous payout (6000 times) counter and the payout (6000 times) counter described later).

The consecutive feature payout (6000 times) counter at addresses "F276(H)" to "F278(H)" is a counter that counts the number of payouts when consecutive features are activated during 6000 games.
The payout (6000 times) counters at addresses "F279(H)" to "F27B(H)" are counters that count the number of payouts when the reel is operated during 6000 games.

When a payout occurs when the consecutive reels are not in operation and when the reels are not in operation, only the total payout (6000 times) counter is updated (incremented), and the consecutive reels payout (6000 times) counter and the reels payout (6000 times) counter are not updated.
In addition, when a payout occurs when the continuous reel is not in operation and the reel is in operation, the total payout (6000 times) counter and the reel payout (6000 times) counter are updated, but the continuous reel payout (6000 times) counter is not updated.
Furthermore, when a payout occurs during the operation of a continuous reel, the total payout (6000 times) counter, the reel payout (6000 times) counter, and the continuous reel payout (6000 times) counter are all updated.

The values of the total payout (6000 times) counter, the continuous feature payout (6000 times) counter, and the feature payout (6000 times) counter are updated every 400 games.
First, when medals are paid out from the first game through the 6000th game, they are stored (added) to the total payout (6000 times) counter, the continuous feature payout (6000 times) counter, and the feature payout (6000 times) counter depending on whether the continuous feature is activated/not activated and whether the feature is activated/not activated, respectively.
At the end of the 6000th game, the consecutive feature ratio (6000 times) and the feature ratio (6000 times) are calculated. After this calculation, the payout numbers during the 400 games from the game to the game before "400 x 15 - 1" (5999 games) to the game before "400 x 15 - 400" (5600 games) are subtracted from the total payout (6000 times) counter value, the consecutive feature payout (6000 times) counter value, and the feature payout (6000 times) counter value, respectively.

For example, when the 6000th game is played, the value of total payout ring buffer 0 (F213(H) to F214(H)) is subtracted from the total payout (6000 times) counter value. Then, the value of total payout ring buffer 0 (F213(H) to F214(H)) is cleared. Furthermore, the payout numbers from the 6001st game to the 6400th game are added to total payout ring buffer 0 and the total payout (6000 times) counter.

Similarly, when the 6000th game is played, the value of the continuous feature payout ring buffer 0 (F231(H) to F232(H)) is subtracted from the continuous feature payout (6000 times) counter value. The value of the continuous feature payout ring buffer 0 is then cleared. Furthermore, the number of payouts during continuous feature operation from the 6001st game to the 6400th game is added to the continuous feature payout ring buffer 0 and the continuous feature payout (6000 times) counter.

Furthermore, similarly, when the 6000th play is reached, the value of the reel payout ring buffer 0 (F24F(H) to F250(H)) is subtracted from the reel payout (6000 times) counter value. The value of the reel payout ring buffer 0 is then cleared. Furthermore, the number of payouts when the reel is activated from the 6001st play to the 6400th play is added to the reel payout ring buffer 0 and the reel payout (6000 times) counter.

More specifically, for example, the total payout ring buffer stores the payout numbers for the following number of games:
Total payout ring buffer 0: "1" game time to "400" game time Total payout ring buffer 1: "401" game time to "800" game time Total payout ring buffer 2: "801" game time to "1200" game time Total payout ring buffer 3: "1201" game time to "1600" game time Total payout ring buffer 4: "1601" game time to "2000" game time Total payout ring buffer 5: "2001" game time to "2400" game time Total payout ring buffer 6: "2401" game time to "2800" game time Total payout ring buffer 7: "2801" game time to "3200" game time Total payout ring buffer 8: "3201" game time to "3600" game time Total payout ring buffer 9: "3601" game time to "4000" game time Total payout ring buffer 10: "4001" game time to "4400" game time Total payout ring buffer 11: "4401" game time to "4800" game time Total payout ring buffer 12: "4801" game time to "5200" game time Total payout ring buffer 13: "5201" game time to "5600" game time Total payout ring buffer 14: "5601" game time to "6000" game time Total payout (6000 times) counter: "1" game time to "6000" game time

Assuming that the 6000th game has been played, all of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 store the payout amounts for each game.
In addition, the value of the total payout (6000 times) counter and the sum of the values stored in the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 match.
Let the value stored in the total payout (6000 times) counter at this point be Σ1, and the value stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 be Z1.
Total payout (6000 times) counter = Σ1 - Z1
Perform the operation.
Also,
Total payout ring buffer 0 = 0 (clear)
Perform the operation.
In other words, the process executes a process of subtracting the value "Z1" of the total payout ring buffer 0, which stores the number of payouts during the 400 game plays from 5999 (400 x 15 - 1) games ago to 5600 (400 x 15 - 400) games ago, from the value "Σ1" stored in the total payout (6000 times) counter.

Next, the CPU 1 executes a process of clearing the value "Z1" of the total payout ring buffer 0 that stores the payout numbers during the 400 games from 5999 (400 x 15 - 1) games ago to 5600 (400 x 15 - 400) games ago.
After this calculation, the 6001st game is started. If there is a payout from the 6001st game to the 6400th game (here, it is assumed that no accessory was activated from the 6001st game to the 6400th game), it is added to the total payout ring buffer 0 and is also added to the total payout (6000 times) counter.

Next, assuming that the 6,400th game has been completed, the total payout ring buffer stores the payout numbers for the following number of games:
Total payout ring buffer 0: "6001" game number to "6400" game number Total payout ring buffer 1: "401" game number to "800" game number:
Total payout ring buffer 14: "5601" game number to "6000" game number Total payout (6000 times) counter: "401" game number to "6000" game number, and "6001" game number to "6400" game number

Then, as in the above, if the value stored in the total payout (6000 times) counter at this point is Σ2 and the value stored in the total payout ring buffer 1 is Z2, then
Total payout (6000 times) counter = Σ2 - Z2
Let us assume that.
and,
Total payout ring buffer 1 = 0
Let us assume that.
After this calculation, the 6401st game is started. If there is a payout from the 6401st game to the 6800th game (here, it is assumed that no accessory was activated from the 6401st game to the 6800th game), it is added to the total payout ring buffer 1 and also added to the total payout (6000 times) counter. The above process is repeated.

Also, the total payout ring buffer and the total payout (6000 times) counter have been explained, but the same processing as above is performed when a special feature is in operation or when a continuous special feature is in operation.
Specifically, when the reel is in operation, the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 are replaced with the reel payout ring buffers 0 to 14, and the total payout (6000 times) counter is replaced with the reel payout (6000 times) counter. When the reel is in operation, as described above, any of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 and the total payout (6000 times) counter are also updated.

Similarly, when continuous reels are in operation, the total payout ring buffers 0-14 are replaced with continuous reels payout ring buffers 0-14, and the total payout (6000 times) counter is replaced with the continuous reels payout (6000 times) counter. When continuous reels are in operation, any of the total payout ring buffers 0-14, any of the reels payout ring buffers 0-14, the total payout (6000 times) counter, and the reels payout (6000 times) counter are also updated.

The total payout (accumulation) counter at addresses "F27C(H)" to "F27E(H)" is a counter that counts the cumulative number of payouts, and counts the total number of payouts during at least "175,000(D)" games.
Similarly, the consecutive feature payout (cumulative) counter at addresses "F27F(H)" to "F281(H)" is a counter that counts the cumulative number of payouts when consecutive features are activated, and similarly to the above, it counts the number of payouts when consecutive features are activated during at least "175,000 (D)" plays.

Similarly, the reel payout (cumulative) counters at addresses "F282(H)" to "F284(H)" are counters that count the cumulative number of payouts when the reel is activated, and similarly to the above, count the number of payouts when the reel is activated during at least "175,000 (D)" games.
It should be noted that the three types of payout (6,000 times) counters mentioned above subtract the number of payouts from 5,999 games to 5,600 games every 400 games, but these three types of payout (cumulative) counters do not subtract values.

The three types of payout (cumulative) counters are each made up of 3 bytes. For example, if we assume that 15 coins are paid out per game for 175,000 games, then the value becomes "175,000 x 15 = 2,625,000", which is smaller than the value that can be stored in 3 bytes. Therefore, it can be stored in a memory capacity of 3 bytes.

The reel status counter at addresses "F285(H)" to "F287(H)" is a counter that counts the total number of plays when the reel is activated and the total number of plays when the reel continuous activation device is activated, and is composed of 3 bytes.
The instruction-inclusive feature ratio data at address "F288 (H)" is a memory area which stores the instruction-inclusive feature ratio, which is the ratio of the sum of the number of payouts when the feature is activated and the number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated to the total number of payouts.

The consecutive feature ratio (6000 times) data at address "F289 (H)" is a memory area that stores the ratio of the number of payouts when consecutive features are activated to the total number of payouts during 6000 game plays.
The bonus feature ratio (6000 times) data at address "F28A(H)" is a memory area that stores the ratio of the number of payouts when the bonus feature is activated to the total number of payouts during 6000 game plays.

The consecutive feature ratio (cumulative) data at address "F28B(H)" is a memory area for storing the ratio of the number of payouts when consecutive features are activated to the total number of payouts in the total number of games played.
The bonus feature ratio (cumulative) data at address "F28C(H)" is a memory area that stores the ratio of the number of payouts when a bonus feature is activated to the total number of payouts over the total number of games played.

The reel state ratio data at address "F28D (H)" is a memory area that stores the reel state ratio, which is the ratio of the sum of the number of games played when the reel is activated and the number of games played when the reel continuous operating device is activated to the total number of games played.
The calculation result buffer at address "F28E(H)" is a storage area that temporarily stores the calculation results during ratio calculation processing.

The count upper limit flag at address "F28F(H)" is a flag which is turned on when the memory capacity of the total number of games played counter (addresses "F26D(H)" to "F26F(H)") or the total number of payouts (cumulative) counter (addresses "F27C(H)" to "F27E(H)") reaches the upper limit (3 bytes full, i.e., "FFFFFF(H)").
Of the 1-byte (8-bit) data, the "D0" bit is assigned to the upper limit flag for the number of games played, and the "D1" bit is assigned to the upper limit flag for the number of coins paid out. The "D2" to "D7" bits are unused in the fifth embodiment.
For example, when the total number of games counter reaches the count upper limit value, the value of the count upper limit flag becomes "00000001 (B)."

The payout number upper limit buffer at address "F290 (H)" is a memory area which stores a value so that the value after addition becomes 3 bytes full when the number of payouts in the game is added to the total payout (cumulative) counter and exceeds 3 bytes full.
For example, if the total payout (cumulative) counter value before payout in the game is "FFFFFE (H)" and the payout number in the game is "8 (H)", adding "8 (H)" to the counter value will cause an overflow. Therefore, in order to prevent the total payout (cumulative) counter value from overflowing, a value that will make it 3 bytes full is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the payout number upper limit buffer.
In the above example, "FFFFFE(H)" + "1(H)" = "FFFFFF(H)", so "1(H)" is stored in the payout number upper limit buffer.

The blinking request flag at address "F291(H)" is a flag for identifying an object that satisfies the blinking display condition when displaying the discrimination segment and ratio segment.
Regarding the instructed feature ratio, continuous feature ratio (cumulative), feature ratio (cumulative), and feature etc. state ratio, when the total number of plays (the value stored in the total number of plays counter) is less than "175,000", the identification segment is controlled to flash.
For the consecutive feature ratio (6000 times) and the feature ratio (6000 times), when the total number of plays (the value stored in the total number of plays counter) is less than "6000", the identification segment is controlled to flash.

The instructed feature ratio, continuous feature ratio (cumulative), feature ratio (cumulative), and feature etc. state ratio should ideally be ratios over 175,000 games (to reduce variation), but if the ratios are calculated based on the number of games played over less than 175,000 games, the identification segment will flash to indicate this.
Similarly, the consecutive feature ratio (6000 times) and the feature ratio (6000 times) are originally ratios over 6000 times, but when they are ratios calculated based on the number of plays less than 6000 times, the identification segment is displayed flashing to indicate this.

In addition, for the instructed feature ratio, feature ratio (cumulative), and feature ratio (6000 times), when the displayed value is "70" or more, the ratio segment is controlled to flash.
Furthermore, for the consecutive feature ratio (cumulative) and the consecutive feature ratio (6000 times), when the displayed value is "60" or more, the ratio segment is controlled to flash.
Furthermore, for the reel state ratio, when the displayed value is "50" or more, the ratio segment is controlled to flash.

The above settings are made because in the slot machine of this embodiment, the instructed feature ratio and feature ratio are designed to be less than 70%, the continuous feature ratio is designed to be less than 60%, and the feature etc. state ratio is designed to be less than 50%, and when the actual measured values are not within the range of the designed values, the ratio segment is flashed to notify the user.

In addition, in the blinking request flag, the D0 bit corresponds to the instruction-included role ratio blinking flag, the D1 bit corresponds to the continuous role ratio (6000 times) blinking flag, ..., the D7 bit corresponds to the 175000 times blinking flag.
For example, when the calculated ratio of instructed features is less than "70", the D0 bit of the blinking request flag is set to "0", and when the ratio is "70" or greater, the D0 bit of the blinking request flag is set to "1".
Similarly, when the calculated continuous feature ratio (6000 times) is less than "70", the D1 bit of the blinking request flag becomes "0", and when it is "70" or more, the D1 bit of the blinking request flag becomes "1".

In addition, when the calculated reels etc. status ratio is less than "50", the D5 bit of the blinking request flag becomes "0", and when it is "50" or more, the D5 bit of the blinking request flag becomes "1".
Furthermore, when the total number of games counter value is less than "6000", the D6 bit of the blinking request flag is "1", and when the total number of games counter value is "6000" or more, the D6 bit of the blinking request flag is "0".
Furthermore, when the total number of games counter value is less than "175,000", the D7 bit of the blinking request flag is set to "1", and when the total number of games counter value is "175,000" or more, the D7 bit of the blinking request flag is set to "0".

The ratio display number at address "F292(H)" is a storage area for storing a number corresponding to the ratio to be displayed in the interrupt process.
When the ratio displayed in the interrupt process is the indicated role ratio, the ratio display number of the address "F292 (H)" stores "1". Similarly, when it is the continuous role ratio (6000 times), it stores "2", when it is the role ratio (6000 times), it stores "3", when it is the continuous role ratio (cumulative), it stores "4", when it is the role ratio (cumulative), it stores "5", and when it is the role etc. state ratio, it stores "6".

The blinking switch flag at address "F293(H)" is a flag for determining whether the identification segment or ratio segment is to be turned on or off when blinking during the interrupt process.
In this embodiment, when the indicator flashes, it is set to alternate between turning on and off approximately every 0.3 seconds. The flash switch flag is set to "0" (a value indicating that the indicator is on) for approximately 0.3 seconds while the indicator is on, and to "1" (a value indicating that the indicator is off) for approximately 0.3 seconds while the indicator is off.

The display switching time at address "F294(H)" is a counter that counts the time required to display one ratio, approximately 5 seconds, and is updated by "1" each time an interrupt process is performed.
In this embodiment, the following is repeatedly displayed: display of the reel ratio with instructions (for about 5 seconds) → display of the reel consecutive ratio (6000 times) (for about 5 seconds) → ... → display of the reel ratio (cumulative) (for about 5 seconds) → display of the reel etc. status ratio (for about 5 seconds) → display of the reel ratio with instructions (for about 5 seconds) → ...
For this reason, the display switching time is stored in order to determine whether or not about 5 seconds have elapsed, that is, whether or not the switching time for the display ratio has been reached.

The blinking switching time at address "F296(H)" is a counter that counts approximately 0.3 seconds when the identification segment or ratio segment is blinking, as described above, and is updated by "1" each time an interrupt process is performed.

Address "F297(H)" is a 1-byte storage area in which LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) is stored.
The LED display counter 2 is a counter for determining which of digits 6 to 9 should be lit, and is continually updated for each interrupt. The bits of the LED display counter 2 are assigned as follows: bit D0 is the digit 6 signal, bit D1 is the digit 7 signal, bit D2 is the digit 8 signal, and bit D3 is the digit 4 signal. Then, in one interrupt process, dynamic lighting of digits 6 to 9 is performed so that the digit corresponding to the bit set to "1" in the LED display counter 2 is lit.

In the fifth embodiment, the LED display counter 2 has a value of "00001000 (B)" as an initial value. Then, as the interrupt progresses from "1" to "2" to ... (for each interrupt), the LED display counter 2 updates by shifting the bit "1" of the LED display counter 2 to the right by one digit. In addition, in the interrupt following interrupt "4", the LED display counter 2 becomes "00000000 (B)" by shifting one digit to the right, but at the time of this interrupt, the LED display counter 2 is initialized to "00001000 (B)". As a result, the LED display counter 2 repeats the values of "4" → "3" → "2" → "1" → "4" → ... for each interrupt process. In other words, four interrupts make up one cycle.

From the above, the value of LED display counter 2 is
"N" Interruption: 00001000 (B)
"N+1" interruption: 00000100 (B)
"N+2" interruption: 00000010 (B)
"N+3" interruption: 00000001 (B)
"N+4" interrupt: 00000000(B) → 00001000(B) (initialization; same value as "N" interrupt)
"N+5" interruption: 00000100 (B)
:
It becomes.

In the fifth embodiment, four interrupts constitute one cycle, and digits 6 to 9 are dynamically lit. Specifically, when the value of the LED display counter 2 is "00001000 (B)", the digit 9 signal is output. The output of the digit 9 signal enables digit 9 (the lower digit of the ratio segment) to be lit. At the time of the next interrupt process, the LED display counter becomes "00000100 (B)", the digit 8 signal is output, and digit 8 (the upper digit of the ratio segment) can be lit. Also, when the LED display counter is "00000010 (B)", the digit 7 signal is output, and digit 7 (the lower digit of the identification segment) can be lit, and when the LED display counter is "00000001 (B)", the digit 6 signal is output, and digit 6 (the upper digit of the identification segment) can be lit.

The RWM checksum data (_SW_SUM_CHK) at address "F2A0(H)" is a storage area in which the RWM checksum data calculated in the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) at the time of power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is stored.
Here, the "RWM checksum data" is also referred to as "complement data,""error detection data," or "error detection information," and is a value that becomes "0" when added to the sum of the data at addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM 53 and the data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" (excluding "F2A0(H)") outside the used area.
That is, when the "RWM checksum data (complement data)" of "F2A0(H)" is added to the sum of the data at addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM 53 and the data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" (excluding "F2A0(H)") outside the used area, the result is "0". In other words, the sum of the data at addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" and the data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" is "0".

The power-off processing completion flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) at address "F2A1(H)" is a flag for determining whether or not the power-off processing has been executed normally, and is stored at the time of the power-off processing.
When the power-off processing is executed normally, the power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is stored as "55 (H)," and when the power-off processing is not executed normally, a value other than "55 (H)" is stored as the power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF).

The power failure recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) at address "F2A2(H)" is a flag for determining whether the result of the checksum calculation of RWM53 and the power failure processing completion flag are normal or not, and is stored during the program start processing.
When the calculation result of the checksum of RWM 53 is normal (the result of adding the sum of the data in the used area of RWM 35 and outside the used area (excluding "F2A0(H)") to the RWM checksum data (complement data) of "F2A0(H)" is "0") and the power-off processing completion flag is a normal value ("55(H)"), "55(H)" is stored as the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON).
On the other hand, when at least one of the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 and the power-off processing completion flag is abnormal (abnormal), "00(H)" is stored as the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON).

The stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (_SB_STACK2) at address "F2A3(H)" is a memory area (buffer) in which the stack pointer of the used area is stored (saved) when a program (second program) outside the used area is executed.
Here, the "stack area" refers to a storage area of the RWM 53 in which data such as various registers and program return addresses can be temporarily saved (stored).
Also, the "stack pointer" is used to hold an address indicating the destination of data to be saved (stored) in the stack area.

Then, when a program outside the used area (second program) is executed, the stack pointer of the used area is stored in stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2, and when the program outside the used area (second program) is terminated and the program in the used area (first program) is returned to, the stack pointer of the used area is restored from stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2.

The 24-byte memory area from addresses "F3E8(H)" to "F3FF(H)" is a stack area outside the used area.

Next, the initialization of data in the used area of the RWM 53 and data outside the used area will be described.
The data in the used area and outside the used area of the RWM 53 is maintained without being initialized simply by cutting off/restarting the power supply (turning the power on/off, turning the power switch 11 on/off).
Even when recovering from a recoverable error state, the data in the used area of the RWM 53 and outside the used area are maintained without being initialized.

Furthermore, suppose that an operation for transitioning to the setting change state (turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 turned on) is performed, and it is determined that a power interruption recovery abnormality has occurred. In this case, step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 92 described later becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S2711, where the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of the setting change in the event of a power interruption recovery abnormality is set. Also, since a power interruption recovery abnormality has occurred, step S2712 in FIG. 92 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731.
For this reason, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 95 described later, initialization process is executed for the entire range including the set value data (_NB_RANK) in the usage area of RWM 53 (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)") and the entire range outside the usage area (addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)").
When recovering from an unrecoverable error state, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed to the same extent as when an operation for transitioning to a setting change state is performed and a power interruption recovery abnormality is determined.

Also, assume that an operation for transitioning to the setting change state is performed and it is determined that the power failure recovery is normal. In this case, the result is "Yes" in step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Fig. 92, and the result is "No" in step S2712, and the process proceeds to step S2713, where the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of the setting change when the power failure recovery is normal is set.
For this reason, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 95, initialization process is performed for addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM 53, and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area.

Therefore, when an operation is performed to transition to the setting change state and it is determined that the power recovery is normal, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of RWM 53 and the data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F291(H)" outside the used area are maintained without being initialized.
In other words, the address "F292 (H)" (ratio display number) of the RWM 53 is initialized. For this reason, for example, when the control information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) displays the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), the power is turned off, and then an operation is performed to transition to the setting change state. When it is determined that the power supply is restored normally, the control information display LED 74 starts displaying the role ratio data with instructions (ratio display number "1"), which is the first display item of various ratio information.

Also, assume that the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and it is determined that the power recovery is normal. In this case, step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Fig. 92 becomes "No", and step S2710 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S2713, where the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of setting changes when the power recovery is normal is set.
For this reason, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 95, initialization process is performed for addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM 53, and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area.

In other words, the address "F292 (H)" (ratio display number) of the RWM 53 is initialized. For this reason, for example, when the power is turned off while the control information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) displays the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), and then the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, if it is determined that the power has returned to normal, the control information display LED 74 will start displaying the role ratio data with instructions (ratio display number "1"), which is the first display item of various ratio information.

Therefore, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on and it is determined that the power recovery is normal, the initialization process of RWM 53 is executed to the same extent as when the operation to transition to the setting change state is performed and it is determined that the power recovery is normal.
Therefore, even if the setting key is not held and even if the setting change state is not entered, the RWM 53 can be initialized to the same extent as when the power recovery from power failure is judged to be normal by performing an operation to enter the setting change state.

In addition, at the end of the favorable zone, an initialization process is executed for a predetermined range of the usage area of RWM53 (for example, addresses "F061(H)" to "F068(H)" in Figure 84) in which data related to the favorable zone is stored.
In addition, even if the advantageous period ends, the address "F292 (H)" of the RWM 53 is not initialized. For this reason, even if the advantageous period ends when the control information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) displays the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), and an initialization process is performed for a predetermined range (for example, addresses "F061 (H)" to "F068 (H)" in FIG. 84) of the use area of the RWM 53 in which the data related to the advantageous period is stored, the display item displayed on the control information display LED 74 will be the role ratio (cumulative) data followed by the role etc. state ratio data (ratio display number "6").

Also, assume that the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 in the off state, and it is determined that the power recovery is normal. In other words, assume that normal power on/off is performed. In this case, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is not executed, so that the data in the used area and outside the used area of the RWM 53 at the time of power off is maintained.
For this reason, for example, when the power is turned off while the reel ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5") is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (reel ratio monitor), the power is then turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 in the off state, and if it is determined that the power recovery is normal, the state at the time of power off will be restored, so that the management information display LED 74 will first display the reel ratio (cumulative) data, and then display the reel etc. status ratio data (ratio display number "6"), which is the next display item after the reel ratio (cumulative) data.

Also, suppose that the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 in the OFF state, and it is determined that a power interruption recovery abnormality has occurred. In this case, the result in step S2708 in FIG. 92 is "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S2801, where the irrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) is executed (the system enters an irrecoverable error state), and therefore the initialization process of the RWM 53 is not executed. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the irrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801 is executed, the interrupt process is prohibited (step S1490 in FIG. 94), and the output of the output ports 0 to 7 is turned off (step S1495 in FIG. 94).
For this reason, for example, when the power is turned off while the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5") is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor), and then the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 in the off state, if it is determined that a power interruption recovery abnormality has occurred, interrupt processing is prohibited and the output of output ports 0 to 7 is turned off, so that the management information display LED 74 remains off.

For example, in the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) of step S2801, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 may each display "8." In this case, the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 in the off state. If it is determined that a power failure recovery abnormality has occurred, "8888" is displayed on the management information display LED 74.

Also, for example, even if the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) of step S2801, the interrupt process may not be prohibited, and the output of output ports 0 to 7 may be maintained without being turned off. In this case, for example, when the power is turned off while the control information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) displays the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), and then the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 in the off state, even if it is determined that there is a power interruption recovery abnormality, the control information display LED 74 will first display the role ratio (cumulative) data, and then display the role etc. status ratio data (ratio display number "6"), which is the next display item of the role ratio (cumulative) data.

FIG. 87A is a diagram showing various LEDs on a display board 75 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 87B is a diagram showing a management information display LED 74 in the fifth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 87A, in the fifth embodiment, a display board 75 is provided with a credit number display LED 76, an acquired number display LED 78, and a status display LED 79.
The credit number display LED 76 is composed of Digit 1 (higher digit) and Digit 2 (lower digit), and the acquired number display LED 78 is composed of Digit 3 (higher digit) and Digit 4 (lower digit). Digits 1 to 4 use 7-segment displays that do not have dot segments.
Digits 1 to 4 may be configured using a seven-segment display with dot segments, but the dot segments may not be illuminated.

The status display LEDs 79 include a 1 bet display LED 79a, a 2 bet display LED 79b, a 3 bet display LED 79c, a game start display LED 79d, a deposit display LED 79e, and a replay display LED 79f, which are made up of six LEDs.
Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 87, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is constructed using a segment P of digit 4, as shown in FIG.
Furthermore, although not shown in Fig. 87, the set value display LED 73 is provided on the main control board 50 as shown in Fig. 1, and is composed of digit 5. Also, digit 5 uses a 7-segment display that does not have dot segments.
Digit 5 may be constructed using a seven-segment display with dot segments, but the dot segments may not be illuminated.

As shown in FIG. 87(B), the management information display LED 74 is composed of digit 6 (higher digit of identification segment), digit 7 (lower digit of identification segment), digit 8 (higher digit of ratio segment), and digit 9 (lower digit of ratio segment).
Digits 6 to 9 use a seven-segment display equipped with a dot segment (segment P).
Furthermore, the segment P of digit 7 (the lower digit of the discrimination segment) functions as a digit separator LED. The digit separator LED is used to clearly indicate the separator between the information type (discrimination segment) and the ratio (ratio segment).

FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining details of digits and segments in the fifth embodiment.
In the fifth embodiment, the seven-segment display of digits 1 to 5 itself is composed of segments A to G, and does not include a dot segment (segment P).
However, the segment P of digit 1 constitutes the game start indication LED 79d, the segment P of digit 2 constitutes the insertion indication LED 79e, the segment P of digit 3 constitutes the replay indication LED 79f, and the segment P of digit 4 constitutes the advantageous zone indication LED 77.

FIG. 89 is a diagram showing output ports 2 to 7 in the fifth embodiment.
The fifth embodiment is characterized in that two output ports (output ports 3 and 6) are provided for outputting digit signals, and two output ports (output ports 4 and 7) are provided for outputting segment signals.
In the fifth embodiment, digits 1 to 9 are provided.
Moreover, the segments of digits 1 to 5 are called segment 1 (segments 1A to 1P), and the segments of digits 6 to 9 are called segment 2 (segments 2A to 2P).

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, output port 3 is an output port that outputs digit signals for digits 1 to 5 (digits 1 to 5 signals), and output port 6 is an output port that outputs digit signals for digits 6 to 9 (digits 6 to 9 signals).
Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, output port 4 is an output port that outputs segment signals for digits 1 to 5 (segment 1A to 1P signals), and output port 7 is an output port that outputs segment signals for digits 6 to 9 (segment 2A to 2P signals).
When digits 1 to 5 are to be illuminated, a digit signal is output from output port 3 and a segment 1 signal is output from output port 4 .
When digits 6 to 9 are to be illuminated, a digit signal is output from output port 6 and a segment 2 signal is output from output port 7 .

Next, an external signal will be described. An "external signal" is a signal that is outputted to the outside of the slot machine 10 (such as the hall computer 200 or a data counter installed in the hall) via the external terminal board 100.
As shown in Fig. 89, in the fifth embodiment, external signals 1 to 6 are output from output port 5. Specifically, a "setting change signal" is assigned to bit D0 (external signal 1) of output port 5, and a "setting confirmation signal" is assigned to bit D1 (external signal 2). The signals shown in Fig. 89 are also assigned to bits D2 to D5.

The "setting change signal" is an external signal that indicates that a setting change is in progress and that a setting change has been made. The setting change signal is output continuously during the setting change and until the end of one game after the setting change (when all reels 31 have stopped and the medal payout process (step S294 in FIG. 97)). This is to ensure that the outside world is informed that a setting change has been made. When the D0 bit of the output port 5 is "1", this indicates that the setting change signal is on (the setting is being changed or one game after the setting has been changed has not yet ended). When the D0 bit is "0", this indicates that the setting change signal is off (the setting is not being changed and one game after the setting has not yet ended).

The "settings checking signal" is an external signal that indicates that settings are being checked. The settings checking signal is output while settings are being checked. When the D1 bit of output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the settings checking signal is on (settings are being checked), and when the D1 bit is "0", it indicates that the settings checking signal is off (settings are not being checked).

"Fraud detection signal 1" is an external signal that indicates the possibility of fraud. For example, when door switch 17 is on (when opening of front door 12 is detected), fraud detection signal 1 is output. When the D2 bit of output port 5 is "1", it indicates that fraud detection signal 1 is on (door switch 17 is on, front door 12 is open), and when the D2 bit is "0", it indicates that fraud detection signal 1 is off (door switch 17 is off, front door 12 is closed).

Like fraud detection signal 1, "fraud detection signal 2" is an external signal that indicates the possibility of fraud. For example, when a recoverable error state occurs, fraud detection signal 2 is output. When the D3 bit of output port 5 is "1", it indicates that fraud detection signal 2 is on (a recoverable error state), and when the D3 bit is "0", it indicates that fraud detection signal 2 is off (not a recoverable error state).

"Fraud detection signal 3", like fraud detection signals 1 and 2, is an external signal that indicates the possibility of fraud. For example, when an irrecoverable error state occurs, the fraud detection signal 3 is output. When the D4 bit of output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the fraud detection signal 3 is on (an irrecoverable error state exists), and when the D4 bit is "0", it indicates that the fraud detection signal 3 is off (not an irrecoverable error state).

The "security signal" is an external signal that indicates that the setting changing signal, setting checking signal, or any of the fraud detection signals 1 to 3 are on. When the setting changing signal, setting checking signal, or any of the fraud detection signals 1 to 3 are being output, the security signal is also output at the same time. When the D5 bit of output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the security signal is on (the setting changing signal, setting checking signal, or any of the fraud detection signals 1 to 3 are being output), and when the D5 bit is "0", it indicates that the security signal is off (none of the setting changing signal, setting checking signal, or any of the fraud detection signals 1 to 3 are being output).

As described above, the setting change signal continues to be output until the end of one game after the setting change. Therefore, if the setting confirmation state is entered before the end of the first game after the setting change, both the setting change signal and the setting confirmation signal are output. Specifically, for example, assume that the setting change state is ended and a situation has arisen in which medals (gaming media, gaming value) can be bet. At this time, when the number of bets is "0", if the setting key switch 152 is turned on, both the setting change signal and the setting confirmation signal are output.
Furthermore, when any of the setting change signal, setting confirmation signal, and fraud detection signals 1 to 3 is being output, a security signal is also output. Therefore, if the setting confirmation state is entered before the end of the first game after the setting change, the D0 bit, D1 bit, and D5 bit of output port 5 are turned on ("1"). If the setting confirmation state is then ended before the end of the first game after the setting change, the D0 bit and D5 bit of output port 5 remain on ("1"), while the D1 bit is turned off ("0"). Then, when the first game after the setting change is ended, the D0 bit and D5 bit of output port 5 are also turned off ("0").

Next, the lighting control of digits 1 to 9 will be described.
The illumination of digits 1 to 5 (credit number display LED 76, acquisition number display LED 78, and setting value display LED 73) is controlled by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in Fig. 101, which will be described later. The LED display control process (I_LED_OUT) is a process performed by the program in the usage area (first program).

On the other hand, the lighting of digits 6 to 9 (control information display LED 74) is controlled by a ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) shown in Fig. 103, which will be described later. The ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is a process performed by a program (second program) outside the usage area.
In the fifth embodiment, the output ports used are different for digits 1 to 5, whose lighting is controlled by a program in the usage area (first program), and digits 6 to 9, whose lighting is controlled by a program outside the usage area (second program).

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits and segments in the fifth embodiment.
In the fifth embodiment, there are digits 1 to 9, the segments of digits 1 to 5 are segment 1 (segments 1A to 1P), and the segments of digits 6 to 9 are segment 2 (segments 2A to 2P).
Segments 1A to 1G of Digit 1 constitute the upper digits of the credit number display LED 76, and segment 1P of Digit 1 constitutes the game start display LED 79d.
Further, the segments 1A to 1G of digit 2 constitute the lower digits of the credit number display LED 76, and the segment 1P of digit 2 constitutes the insertion display LED 79e.

Furthermore, segments 1A to 1G of digit 3 form the upper digits of the acquisition number display LED 78, and segment 1P of digit 3 forms the replay display LED 79f.
Furthermore, segments 1A to 1G of digit 4 constitute the lower digits of the winning number display LED 78, and segment 1P of digit 4 constitutes the advantageous zone display LED 77.
Moreover, the segments 1A to 1G of digit 5 constitute a setting value display LED 73.
Furthermore, the segments 2A to 2G of the digit 6 form the upper digits of the identification segment of the management information display LED 74.

Furthermore, the segments 2A to 2G of the digit 7 form the lower digits of the identification segment of the management information display LED 74, and the segment 2P of the digit 7 forms the digit division display LED.
The segments 2A to 2G of digit 8 form the upper digits of the ratio segment of the management information display LED 74.
Furthermore, the segments 2A to 2G of digit 9 form the lower digits of the identification segment of the management information display LED 74.

91A is a diagram showing the relationship between LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) in the fifth embodiment and the signal output from output port 3. Also, FIG. 91B is a diagram showing the relationship between LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) in the fifth embodiment and the signal output from output port 6. Furthermore, FIG. 91C is a diagram showing the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP) in the fifth embodiment.
In this example, an LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) (address "F051(H)" in FIG. 84) is provided in the usage area of RWM 53, and an LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) (address "F297(H)" in FIG. 86) is provided outside the usage area of RWM 53.

LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is a counter for outputting digit 1 signal to digit 5 signal at each interrupt, and is a counter with 5 interrupts per cycle.
Furthermore, LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) is a counter for outputting the digit 6 signal to the digit 9 signal at each interruption, and is a counter with 4 interruptions per cycle.
In this manner, in the fifth embodiment, an LED display counter for lighting up digits 1 to 5 and an LED display counter for lighting up digits 6 to 9 are provided separately and independently.
In addition, since the cycles of the two LED display counters are different, the timing at which digits 1 to 5 are lit differs from the timing at which digits 6 to 9 are lit.

The LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP) is data indicating the digits that are permitted to be lit, and is stored at address "F052 (H)" in the usage area of the RWM 53 (see FIG. 84).
91C, the LED display request flag is 8-bit data in which bit D0 corresponds to the digit 1 signal, bit D1 corresponds to the digit 2 signal, ..., bit D4 corresponds to the digit 5 signal. Each bit of the LED display request flag corresponds to a bit of output port 3 shown in FIG.
Also, as shown in Fig. 91(C), during normal operation, digits 1 to 4 can be lit (digit 5 is off), and during setting change and setting confirmation, digit 5 can be lit (digits 1 to 4 are off). Note that "normal operation" refers to waiting for a game and during a game.

In the interrupt process, the value of the LED display counter 1 in the usage area is ANDed with the value of the LED display request flag, and the digit corresponding to the bit that becomes "1" becomes the digit that will be lit in the current interrupt process.
For example, if the value of LED display counter 1 in the used area is "00001000 (B)" and the value of the LED display request flag is "00001111 (B) (normal)", then ANDing the two will result in "00001000 (B)" and only the digit 4 signal will be "1".
In addition, while the settings are being changed or confirmed, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 5 signal is turned on (LED display counter 1 in the used area is "00010000 (B)"), a segment signal is output from output port 4, making it possible to light up the setting value display LED 73 (digit 5).

Next, recoverable errors and unrecoverable errors will be described.
A "recoverable error" is an error that can be recovered from without turning the power on and off. Examples of recoverable errors include:
Errors include "HP" error: medal jam (stagnation) error in hopper 35, "HE" error: empty medal error in hopper 35, "H0" error: abnormality in payout sensor 37 of hopper 35, "CE" error: medal stack error in medal selector, "CP" error: illegal medal passage error in medal selector, "CH" error: abnormality in passage sensor 46 located in medal selector, "C0" error: abnormality in insertion sensor 44 located in medal selector, "C1" error: abnormal medal insertion error, "FE" error: subtank full, "dE" error: front door 12 open, etc.
Incidentally, recoverable errors are not limited to those mentioned above.

In step S457 of the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. 98 described later, a read process of the input port 51 is executed, and input signals of various switches (start switch 41, etc.) and various sensors (insertion sensor 44, etc.) are read. Then, based on the input signals that have been read, various data (level data, rising edge data, falling edge data) are generated and stored at a specified address in the RWM 53. Then, in step S463 of the interrupt process (I_INTR), an input error check process is executed, and when any recoverable error is detected by referring to the various data, an error detection flag indicating the detected recoverable error is stored at a specified address in the RWM 53.

In addition, in the main processing (M_MAIN) (Figure 97), the error detection flag is checked before the operation of the start switch 41 is detected and after all the reels 31 have stopped. If any bit of the error detection flag is "1", it is determined that a recoverable error has occurred, the progress of the game is stopped, and a recoverable error state is entered.
In addition, if a recoverable error occurs between the operation of the start switch 41 when a specified number of medals have been bet and the time when all the reels 31 have stopped, game progress may be continued until all the reels 31 have stopped, and after all the reels 31 have stopped, game progress may be stopped and a recoverable error state may be entered before the medal payout process is executed.
Furthermore, when it is determined that a recoverable error has occurred, error information about the occurred recoverable error is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. This display of error information (error display) is performed by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) during the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG.

When a recoverable error occurs, the cause of the recoverable error is removed by an administrator (hall attendant) and the reset switch 153 is operated, which clears the recoverable error state and resumes game progress.
In this way, when a recoverable error occurs, the cause of the recoverable error can be removed and the reset switch 153 can be operated without turning the power on/off or operating the setting key switch 152, thereby canceling the recoverable error state and restoring the game to a state in which it is possible to continue playing.

In contrast, an "irrecoverable error" is a serious error that cannot be recovered from unless the power is turned off and an operation for moving to a setting change state is performed (turning the power on with the setting key switch 152 turned on).
"E1" error: When recovery from power failure is not normal (when there is a power failure recovery abnormality) (when "Yes" is determined in step S2712 in FIG. 92 described later)
"E5" error: When the stopped symbol is not normal when the reel 31 stops (when a display error occurs)
“E6” error: When the setting value is not within the normal range (when a setting value error occurs) (when “No” is returned in step S458 of FIG. 98)
“E7” error: When a random number error occurs (when “Yes” is determined in step S460 of FIG. 98)
etc.
Incidentally, the unrecoverable errors are not limited to those mentioned above.

When any irrecoverable error occurs, the error information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. For example, when an "E1" error occurs, "E" is displayed in digit 3 and "1" is displayed in digit 4. The same display is also displayed when other irrecoverable errors occur.
In addition, it is the processing of step S2715 (processing by the program in the used area (first program)) during the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 92 that determines that the recovery from the power outage is not normal (power outage recovery abnormality) and judges it to be an "E1" error.
Furthermore, it is the processing in the main processing (M_MAIN) (Figure 97) (processing by the program in the used area (first program)) that determines that the stopped pattern when the reel 31 stops is abnormal (a display error has occurred) and judges it to be an "E5" error.

In contrast, it is the processing of step S458 in the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 98 (processing by a program outside the area of use (second program)) that determines that the set value is not within the normal range (that is, that a set value error has occurred) and judges it to be an "E6" error.
Similarly, it is the processing of step S460 during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in Figure 98 (processing by a program outside the area of use (second program)) that determines that the random number value is abnormal (a random number error has occurred) and judges it to be an "E7" error.
If it is determined that an unrecoverable error has occurred in the program in the used area (first program), the unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 94, which will be described later, is executed.
On the other hand, if it is determined that an unrecoverable error has occurred in a program (second program) outside the used area, an unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 102, which will be described later, is executed.

When an irrecoverable error occurs, the power supply is cut off (power supply is turned off, power switch 11 is turned off), and then, with the setting key switch 152 turned on, the power supply is resumed (power supply is turned on, power switch 11 is turned on). As a result, step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 92 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S2711. Also, when an irrecoverable error occurs, the power cut process (I_POWER_DOWN) in FIG. 99 described later is not executed, so step S2712 in FIG. 92 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731.

Furthermore, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 95 described later, initialization process is performed for the entire range (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)") including the setting value data (_NB_RANK) in the used area of RWM 53, and the entire range outside the used area (addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)". Thereafter, the process proceeds to a setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 in FIG. 95. If the setting value is reset here, the unrecoverable error state is released, and the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) in step S248 (FIG. 97).
In this way, when an irrecoverable error occurs, the power can be turned off once, and then turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on, thereby canceling the irrecoverable error state and restoring the state in which game progress can be resumed.

Furthermore, when a recoverable error occurs, the error is displayed by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in Fig. 101, but when an irrecoverable error occurs, the interrupt process (I_INTR) in Fig. 98 is not executed, and therefore the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is not executed either. When an irrecoverable error occurs, the error is displayed by the irrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in Fig. 94 or the irrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in Fig. 102.
Furthermore, when recovering from a recoverable error state, the data in the used area of RWM 53 and outside the used area is maintained without being initialized, but when recovering from an unrecoverable error state, the entire range of data in the used area of RWM 53 and outside the used area is initialized.
When recovering from a recoverable error state, data such as the error detection flag stored in a specified address of the RWM 53 may be initialized.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a program start process (M_PRG_START) by the main control board 50 in the fifth embodiment.
When the power is turned on (the power switch 11 is turned on and the power supply is resumed), the program starts from the program start process in FIG.
In FIG. 92, when the program is started in step S2701, the main control board 50 saves the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) in the stack area of the usage area of the RWM 53 in the next step S2702.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2703, where the main control board 50 executes a checksum calculation process for the RWM 53.
Specifically, in step S2703, the data in addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM 53 and the data in addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area are added together.
That is, the data in the addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of the RWM 53 and the addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area are added together.
If the result is "0", it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum of RWM 53 is normal, and if the result is not "0", it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum of RWM 53 is not normal (abnormal).

Also, in step S2703, it is determined whether the power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) of address "F2A1(H)" of RWM 53 is "55(H)" or not. If it is "55(H)", it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is normal, and if it is not "55(H)", it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is abnormal (abnormal).
In this embodiment, when the power-off process is performed, a power-off process completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is set to address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53 (step S2784 of RWM checksum set (S_SUM_SET) in FIG. 100). Then, in step S2703, it is determined whether the power-off process completed flag set during the power-off process is a normal value ("55(H)").

Also, in step S2703, if the calculation result of the checksum of RWM 53 is normal (the result of adding the data in the used area of RWM 35 and outside the used area is "0") and the power off processing completion flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is the normal value ("55(H)"), "55(H)" is stored as the power off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) at address "F2A2(H)" of RWM 53.
On the other hand, in step S2703, if at least one of the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 and the power-off processing completion flag is abnormal (abnormal), "00(H)" is stored as power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) at address "F2A2(H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2704.

When the process proceeds to step S2704, the main control board 50 restores the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) that were saved in step S2702. The process then proceeds to the next step, S2705.

Here, the program for the program start process is stored in the control area (first control area, first program area) of the usage area of the ROM 54. That is, the program for the program start process is the first program.
On the other hand, the program for the checksum calculation process of the RWM 53 in step S2703 is stored in a control area (second control area, second program area) outside the usage area of the ROM 54. That is, the program for the checksum calculation process in step S2703 is the second program.

Therefore, in FIG. 92, in the program start processing which is processing by a program in the used area (first program), when proceeding to step S2703, a checksum calculation processing of RWM53 which is processing by a program outside the used area (second program) is executed, and when this checksum calculation processing is completed, the processing returns to the program start processing which is processing by the program in the used area (first program).
In addition, when transitioning from processing by a program in the used area (first program) to processing by a program outside the used area (second program), the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is saved to the stack area of the used area of RWM 53, and when processing by the program outside the used area (second program) is terminated and processing returns to the program in the used area (first program), the AF register is restored.

In step S2705, the main control board 50 obtains the power interruption recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) from address "F2A2(H)" of the RWM 53 and stores this in the A register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step, S2706.

In step S2706, the main control board 50 determines whether the door switch signal is on. As described above, when the front door 12 is open, the door switch 17 is on and the door switch signal is on. If it is determined that the door switch signal is on (the front door 12 is open), the process proceeds to the next step S2707. On the other hand, if it is determined that the door switch signal is off (the front door 12 is closed), the process proceeds to step S2715.

In step S2707, the main control board 50 determines whether the setting key switch signal is on. As described above, when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion port 151 and rotated 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 152 is turned on and the setting key switch signal is turned on. If it is determined that the setting key switch signal is on, the process proceeds to step S2711. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key switch signal is off, the process proceeds to step S2708.

In step S2708, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a power failure recovery abnormality has occurred. Specifically, if the value of the A register (the power failure recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) acquired in step S2705) is "55 (H)", it is determined that there is no power failure recovery abnormality, and the process proceeds to the next step S2709. In contrast, if the value of the A register is "00 (H)", it is determined that there is a power failure recovery abnormality, and the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801. The specific contents of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) will be described later.

In step S2709, the main control board 50 sets the reset determination data. Specifically, the main control board 50 stores "7" in the D register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2710.
When the process proceeds to step S2710, the main control board 50 judges whether or not the reset switch signal is on. As described above, in this embodiment, the setting change switch 153, the reset switch 153, and the RWM clear switch 153 are configured as an integrated switch. When the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the reset switch signal is turned on, and the process proceeds to step S2713. On the other hand, when the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the reset switch signal is turned off, and the process proceeds to the power recovery process (M_POWER_ON) of step S2721. The specific contents of the power recovery process (M_POWER_ON) will be described later.

When proceeding to step S2711, the main control board 50 sets the initialization range of the RWM 53 for when the power recovery is abnormal. In this embodiment, when the power recovery is abnormal (the power recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) is "00(H)"), the entire range of the used area and outside the used area (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" and "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)"), including the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53, is set as the initialization range. The initialization range is specified by the start address and number of bytes of the initialization range. Then, proceed to the next step S2712.

In step S2712, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a power failure recovery abnormality has occurred. Specifically, this is the same as step S2708. If it is determined that there is no power failure recovery abnormality, the data "7" for determining that the setting has been changed is stored in the D register and the process proceeds to the next step S2713. If there is a power failure recovery abnormality, the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. The specific contents of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) will be described later.

In step S2713, the main control board 50 sets the initialization range of the RWM 53 for normal power recovery. In this embodiment, when the power recovery is normal (power recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) is "55(H)"), the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 and addresses "F210(H)" to "F291(H)" outside the used area are not initialized (cleared) and are maintained. For this reason, in step S2713, the addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of the RWM 53 and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area are set as the initialization range. As described above, the initialization range is specified by the start address and number of bytes of the initialization range. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2714.

In step S2714, the main control board 50 judges whether the setting can be changed. In this embodiment, the setting is set to be unchangeable during the start switch reception process (step S279 in FIG. 97) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 97), including during the rotation of the reel 31, and during this period, the setting unchangeable flag is turned on. Then, in step S2714, by judging whether the setting unchangeable flag is on, it is judged whether the setting can be changed. Then, when it is judged that the setting cannot be changed (the setting cannot be changed), the process proceeds to the next step S2715, and when it is judged that the setting can be changed, the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731. The specific contents of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) will be described later.
It is also possible to allow the settings to be changed at all times without providing a period during which the settings cannot be changed and therefore without providing a setting change prohibition flag.

In step S2715, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a power failure recovery abnormality has occurred. Specifically, this is the same as in step S2708. If it is determined that a power failure recovery abnormality has occurred, the process proceeds to step S2801, which is an unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP), and if it is determined that a power failure recovery abnormality has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S2721, which is a power recovery process (M_POWER_ON). The specific contents of the power recovery process (M_POWER_ON) and the unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) will be described later. The process according to this flowchart then ends.

FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing the power return process (M_POWER_ON) of step S2721 in FIG.
First, in step S2722, the main control board 50 restores the stack pointer. In this embodiment, the stack pointer is saved during power-off processing (step S2774 of the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in FIG. 99). Then, in step S2722, the stack pointer saved during power-off processing is restored.

Proceeding to the next step S2723, the main control board 50 executes a read process of the input port 51. As a result, each data in the input port 51 is updated to the latest data.
In the next step S2724, the main control board 50 clears the power-off processing completion flag, and then proceeds to the main processing (M_MAIN) of step S248 (FIG. 97), where the processing of this flowchart ends.
In this embodiment, after the process of step S2724 is executed, the interrupt process (I_INTR) of FIG. 98 is started before proceeding to the main process (M_MAIN) of step S248 (FIG. 97).

FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP).
The program for unrecoverable error handling (C_ERROR_STOP) is stored within a used area of the ROM 54, and the program for unrecoverable error handling 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is stored outside the used area of the ROM 54. In other words, the program for unrecoverable error handling (C_ERROR_STOP) is the first program, and the program for unrecoverable error handling 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is the second program.

Furthermore, in the unrecoverable error processing, interrupt processing is prohibited.
An unrecoverable error is a serious error that does not normally occur, and in order to prevent the execution of processes based on abnormal data (such as updating the data of RWM 53 based on an input signal from input port 51, sending a control command to the sub-control board 80, and control based on a signal output from an output port based on data from RWM 53), interrupt processing is prohibited in the unrecoverable error processing.

Here, the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is processing by the first program, and when the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is started, first, execution of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited by interrupt prohibition processing in step S1490.
In contrast, the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is a process performed by the second program, and since execution of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited while the second program is being executed, no interrupt prohibition processing is provided after the start of the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP).

94, in step S1491, the main control board 50 sets error display data for the lower digits of the unrecoverable error. This process stores data for lighting digit 4 (data in which only the digit 4 signal is set to "1") ("00001000(B)") in the H register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1492, where the main control board 50 sets error display data for the upper digits of the unrecoverable error. This process is to store data for lighting digit 3 (data in which only the digit 3 signal is set to "1") ("00000100(B)") in the D register.

Furthermore, in step S1492, the main control board 50 stores in the E register segment data ("01111001B") for displaying an "E" in the most significant digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error.
Before the process for the unrecoverable error is started, segment data for displaying the lower digit of the unrecoverable error is stored in the L register. For example, when the unrecoverable error is an "E1" error, the lower digit (digit 4) is "1", so segment data for displaying "1"("00000110B") is stored in the L register.
In the following example, it is assumed that the current unrecoverable error 1 is an "E1" error.

From the above, the D, E, H, and L register values at this point are as follows:
D register value: Data for lighting the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 3 signal set to "1") ("00000100(B)")
E register value: Segment data for displaying "E" in the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error ("01111001(B)")
H register value: Data for lighting the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 4 signal set to "1") ("00001000 (B)")
L register value: Segment data for displaying "1" in the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error ("00000110(B)")
It becomes.

In the next step S1493, the main control board 50 sets the address of the output port to be cleared and the number of output ports. In this embodiment, the output ports to be cleared in the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) are output ports 0 to 7, and since an address is set for each output port, the address and the number of output ports (8) are set.
In the next step S1494, the main control board 50 sequentially turns off the output of the output ports 0 to 7. Specifically, for the output ports 0 to 7, the output is turned off ("00000000(B)") one by one.

In the next step S1495, the main control board 50 sets the address of the next output port. That is, the address indicating the output port is incremented by "1." For example, when the address of output port 0 is "00F1(H)," the address of output port 1, "00F2(H)," is set as the next address.
Next, proceeding to step S1496, the main control board 50 determines whether or not turning off the output of all output ports has been completed, i.e., whether or not the output has been turned off up to output port 7. If it determines that it has not been completed, the process returns to step S1494, and if it determines that it has been completed, the process proceeds to step S1497. In this manner, the process of steps S1494 to S1496 is repeated until the output of all output ports has been turned off, and if it determines that the output of all output ports has been turned off, the process proceeds to step S1497.

In this way, by turning off all output ports, all active signals that were being output before this process was executed are turned off. This turns off all LEDs, including digits 1 to 9 (credit number display LED 76, acquisition number display LED 78, setting value display LED 73, and management information display LED 74), preventing the LEDs from burning in.

In addition, if an irrecoverable error occurs while an excitation signal for motor 32 is being output, unless the output port is turned off, the excitation signal for motor 32 will continue to be output until the irrecoverable error is cleared. However, by turning off all output ports, the excitation signal for motor 32 is turned off, thereby preventing motor 32 from burning out.
Furthermore, if an unrecoverable error occurs while a blocker signal is being output, unless the output port is turned off, the blocker 45 will remain on (guiding the medal to the hopper 35) even though the medal detection process is not being executed, causing the medal to be swallowed; however, by turning off all output ports, the blocker 45 will be turned off and the inserted medal will be returned, thereby preventing the medal from being swallowed.

In the next step S1497, the main control board 50 outputs error display data from output ports 3 and 4 to display an error in the upper digits. From output port 3, it outputs the data stored in the D register, and from output port 4, it outputs the data stored in the E register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1498, where the main control board 50 executes a wait process to prevent the LED from flickering. The length of the wait period depends on the performance of the LED, but can be set to about 0.1 ms, for example. Here, for example, a predetermined value (for example, 255) is stored in the B register, and this value is subtracted, for example, by the internal system clock. When the B register value becomes 0, it is determined that the wait time has elapsed, and the process proceeds to the next step S1499.

In step S1499, the main control board 50 turns off ("0") the outputs of the output ports 3 and 4. This process is for preventing image retention.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1500, where the main control board 50 executes a wait process to prevent the LEDs from flickering. This process ensures that the LEDs are turned off after the outputs of the output ports 3 and 4 are turned off ("0").

Next, the process proceeds to step S1501, where the main control board 50 switches between the upper and lower digits.
Specifically, the DE register value and the HL register value are swapped.
<Before replacement>
D register value: Data for lighting the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 3 signal set to "1") ("00000100(B)")
E register value: Segment data for displaying "E" in the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error ("01111001(B)")
H register value: Data for lighting the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 4 signal set to "1") ("00001000 (B)")
L register value: Segment data for displaying "1" in the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error ("00000110(B)")
<After replacement>
D register value: Data for lighting the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 4 signal set to "1") ("00001000(B)")
E register value: Segment data for displaying "1" in the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error ("00000110(B)")
H register value: Data for lighting the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 3 signal set to "1") ("00000100 (B)")
L register value: Segment data for displaying "E" in the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error ("01111001(B)")
It becomes.

Then, proceeding to step S1502, the main control board 50 outputs error display data from output ports 3 and 4 to display an error in the lower digits. As in step S1497, the D register value is output from output port 3, and the E register value is output from output port 4. As a result, "00001000(B)" (data in which only the digit 4 signal is "1"), which lights up digit 4, is output from output port 3, and segment data "00000110(B)" to display "1" is output from output port 4.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1503, where the main control board 50 executes a standby process for preventing flickering. This process is similar to step S1498.
Next, proceeding to step S1504, the main control board 50 turns off the output of output ports 3 and 4 ("0"), similar to step S1499.
In the next step S1505, the main control board 50 executes a standby process for preventing flickering. This process is similar to that in step S1500. Then, the process returns to step S1497.

By the above process, when an "E1" error occurs, for example, the display of "E" by digit 3 and the display of "1" by digit 4 are alternately and repeatedly displayed at a predetermined time interval.
Incidentally, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is executed by the interrupt processing (I_INTR). However, as described above, in the event of an irrecoverable error, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not executed (prohibited), and instead, as shown in FIG. 94, the display of the irrecoverable error is performed by calculation processing using registers and a hardware configuration.

FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731 in FIG.
The main control board 50 first executes initialization of the specified address of the RWM 53 in step S2732, and in the next step S2733 sets (specifies) the next address in the initialization range of the RWM 53, and proceeds to the next step S2734 to determine whether initialization has been completed for the entire initialization range of the RWM 53. If it determines that initialization has not been completed, the process returns to step S2732, and if it determines that initialization has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2735. Thus, the processes of steps S2732 to S2734 are repeated until initialization has been completed for the entire initialization range of the RWM 53.

As described above, in step S2711 or S2713 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 92, the initialization range of the RWM 53 (the start address and the number of bytes of the initialization range) is set.
In steps S2732 to S2734 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET), initialization is executed for the initialization range of the used area out of the initialization range of the RWM 53 set in step S2711 or S2713.
The processing of steps S2732 to S2734 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) is executed by the program in the area of use (first program). Therefore, in steps S2732 to S2734 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET), initialization is executed only for the initialization range of the area of use out of the initialization range of RWM 53.

Then, if it is determined in step S2734 that the initialization is completed, the process proceeds to the next step S2735, where the main control board 50 saves the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) in the stack area of the usage area of the RWM 53.
In the next step S2736, the main control board 50 executes initialization of the initialization range outside the usage area of the RWM 53 that was set in step S2711 or S2713 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG.

As described above, in steps S2732 to S2734, the used area of the initialization range of RWM 53 is initialized, but in step S2736, the area outside the used area of the initialization range of RWM 53 is initialized.
The process of step S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) is executed by a program (second program) outside the area of use. Therefore, in step S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET), initialization is executed only for the initialization range outside the area of use of the RWM 53.
Then, when the initialization of the initialization range outside the used area is completed in step S2736, the process proceeds to the next step S2737, where the main control board 50 restores the AF register (the A register and the F register (flag register)) that were evacuated in step S2735. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2738.

In step S2738, the main control board 50 determines whether it is time to reset. Specifically, it determines whether step S2710 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 92 is "Yes". In this embodiment, in step S2709 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 92, "7" is stored in the D register as reset determination data. Furthermore, if step S2710 in FIG. 92 is "Yes", the "7" in the D register is maintained, and if step S2710 in FIG. 92 is "No", the D register is cleared ("0" is stored). Then, in step S2738 in FIG. 95, it determines whether the D register is "7", and if the D register is "7", it determines that it is time to reset ("Yes" in step S2710 in FIG. 92), and proceeds to step S2739. On the other hand, if the D register is "0", it is determined that it is not reset ("No" in step S2710 of FIG. 92), and step S2739 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2740.

When the process proceeds to step S2739, the main control board 50 sets the display at the time of reset. Specifically, "70(H)" is stored in the acquisition count data (_NB_PAYOUT) at address "F011(H)" of the RWM 53. This allows the acquisition count display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) to display "70" through the interrupt process executed after the process of step S2739, thereby informing the manager (hall staff) that it is time to reset.

Proceeding to the next step S2740, the main control board 50 sets the setting command in the control command buffer of the RWM 53. The setting command set in step S2740 indicates whether it is a reset or a setting change. As a result, the setting command set in the control command buffer is sent to the sub-control board 80 by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S2740, making it possible for the sub-control board 80 to determine whether it is a reset or a setting change.

In this embodiment, the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. 98 is started after the process of step S2740 is executed and before proceeding to the process of step S2741. In other words, the process of initializing the initialization range of RWM 53 (the processes of steps S2732 to S2734 and S2736 in FIG. 95) is completed before the interrupt process (I_INTR) starts. This configuration prevents the interrupt process (I_INTR) from being executed while RWM 53 is being initialized. This makes it possible to prevent the contents of RWM 53 from being changed (rewritten or overwritten) by the interrupt process (I_INTR) while RWM 53 is being initialized.

In the next step S2741, the main control board 50 judges whether or not it is time to reset. Specifically, this is the same as in step S2738. If it is determined that it is not time to reset, the process proceeds to step S2742, and if it is determined that it is time to reset, the process skips step S2742 and proceeds to step S2743.
When the process proceeds to step S2742, the main control board 50 executes a setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL). The specific contents of this process will be described later. Then, when the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) ends, the process proceeds to the next step S2743.

In step S2743, the main control board 50 determines whether the wait time has elapsed. This wait time is for waiting for the transmission of the setting command. If it is determined that the wait time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step S2744, where the main control board 50 sets the initialization wait time, and in the next step S2745, executes a 2-byte time wait process (wait process). The processes in steps S2744 and S2745 are for waiting for the initialization of the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80 to finish.

Then, when the 2-byte time wait process is completed, the process proceeds to the next step S2746, where the main control board 50 sets the setting command in the control command buffer of the RWM 53. The setting command set in step S2746 indicates that the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) has ended and the setting value. As a result, the setting command set in the control command buffer is sent to the sub-control board 80 by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S2746, making it possible for the sub-control board 80 to determine that the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) has ended and the setting value.

In the next step S2747, the main control board 50 clears (stores "0") the acquisition number data (_NB_PAYOUT) at address "F011(H)" of the RWM 53. As a result, "00" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S2747.
Then, when the clearing of the acquisition number data in step S2747 is completed, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) in step S248 (FIG. 97), and the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) of step S2742 in FIG.
When the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 is started, first in step S2751, the main control board 50 obtains the setting value data (_NB_RANK) from the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 and stores this in the A register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2752.

In step S2752, the main control board 50 generates setting value display data. Specifically, in step S2752, the A register value is stored in the C register, and then "1" is added to the A register value. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2753.
As described above, in this embodiment, the setting values are "1" to "6", the setting value data is managed as "0" to "5", and when the setting value is "N", "N-1" is stored as the setting value data. Therefore, "N", which is the setting value data "N-1" plus "1", is used as the setting value display data.

In step S2753, the main control board 50 saves the generated setting value display data. Specifically, in step S2753, the A register value is stored in the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at address "F001 (H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2754.
In step S2754, the main control board 50 executes an interrupt wait process. This process waits until one interrupt time (2.235 ms) has elapsed. This is because by waiting for the interrupt process (I_INTR) to be executed once, the rising edge data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 to become OFF ("0").

In other words, when the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 is operated (turned on), the rising edge data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 becomes on ("1"). If the interrupt process (I_INTR) is executed even once after that, the rising edge data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 becomes off ("0").
However, if the processing of steps S2752 to S2758 loops multiple times after the rising edge data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 turns on ("1") and before the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is executed, the processing of adding "1" to the setting value data will be executed repeatedly.
Therefore, by waiting for the interrupt processing (I_INTR) to be executed once in step S2754, the processing of steps S2752 to S2758 is prevented from being looped multiple times and the processing of adding "1" to the setting value data is prevented from being repeatedly executed.
Then, in step S2754, the process waits until one interrupt time has elapsed, and then proceeds to the next step S2755.

In addition, if the level data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 was "0" during the previous interrupt processing, and the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "1" during the current interrupt processing, the rising edge data of the signal of the reset switch 153 will become "1".
In addition, if the level data of the signal of reset switch 153 was "1" during the previous interrupt processing, and the level data of the signal of reset switch 153 is "1" during the current interrupt processing, the rising edge data of the signal of reset switch 153 becomes "0".

Similarly, if the level data of the signal of reset switch 153 was "0" during the previous interrupt processing, and the level data of the signal of reset switch 153 is "0" during the current interrupt processing, the rising edge data of the signal of reset switch 153 becomes "0".
In addition, if the level data of the signal of reset switch 153 was "1" during the previous interrupt processing and the level data of the signal of reset switch 153 is "0" during the current interrupt processing, the falling data of the signal of reset switch 153 becomes "1".
The other switches such as the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, the setting key switch 152, and the like are similar to the reset switch (setting change switch) 153.

In step S2755, the main control board 50 judges whether it is the time to start the setting confirmation. This process is a process for judging whether it is the time to confirm the setting or the time to change the setting. In this embodiment, when the number of bets before the start of the game is "0" and the setting key switch 152 is turned on, "1" is stored in the D register. Then, in step S2755, first, the D register value is stored in the A register, and then it is judged whether the A register value is "1". Then, when the A register value is "1", it is judged that it is the time to confirm the setting, and the process proceeds to step S2760, and when the A register value is not "1" (when the D register value is "0" or "7"), it is judged that it is not the time to confirm the setting (it is the time to change the setting), and the process proceeds to step S2756. Then, after judging whether the A register value is "1" or not, the C register value is stored in the A register. As described above, since the A register value is stored in the C register in step S2752, the setting value data is stored in the C register. Therefore, when the C register value is stored in the A register, the A register value becomes the set value data.
When the power is restored (when the power is turned on and the program start process (M_PRG_START) begins), the A register through the L register are set to their initial values ("0").

When the process proceeds to step S2756, the main control board 50 refers to the rising edge data of the start switch 41 signal stored in a specific address of the RWM 53. Then, when the rising edge data of the start switch 41 signal is "1", that is, when it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S2759. On the other hand, when the rising edge data of the start switch 41 signal is "0", that is, when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S2757.

In step S2757, the main control board 50 refers to the rising edge data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 stored in a specific address of the RWM 53. Then, when the rising edge data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "1", that is, when it is determined that the reset switch 153 has been operated, it proceeds to step S2758. On the other hand, when the rising edge data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "0", that is, when it is determined that the reset switch 153 has not been operated, it returns to step S2752.

When the process proceeds to step S2758, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the set value data. Specifically, it adds "1" to the A register value. As described above, at the end of step S2755, the A register value is the set value data. Then, if step S2757 returns "Yes", that is, if it is determined that the setting change (reset) switch 153 has been operated, it adds "1" to the set value data. Note that if the A register value becomes "6" as a result of the addition, it rewrites the A register value to "0". Then, it returns to step S2752.

Furthermore, when the process proceeds to step S2759, the main control board 50 saves the setting value data. Specifically, the A register value is stored in the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53. As described above, at the end of step S2755, the A register value is the setting value data. Then, when step S2756 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S2759, the A register value remains the setting value data. Then, in step S2759, the A register value is stored in address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53. This allows the setting value data to be saved in the RWM 53.

When the process proceeds to the next step S2760, the main control board 50 refers to the falling edge data of the signal of the setting key switch 152 stored in a specific address of the RWM 53. Then, the process of step S2760 is repeated until the falling edge data of the signal of the setting key switch 152 becomes "1", i.e., until the setting key switch 152 is turned off, and when the falling edge data of the signal of the setting key switch 152 becomes "1", i.e., when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the process proceeds to step S2761.

In step S2761, the main control board 50 clears (to "0") the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at address "F001 (H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
Also, when the settings are changed, when the processing according to this flowchart ends, the process proceeds to step S2743 in FIG.

Here, the transition to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation in progress) will be described.
In this embodiment, when the power is turned on, the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open), and the number of bets is "0", if the setting key switch 152 is turned on, "1" is stored in the D register and the state transitions to the setting confirmation state. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed (the setting value does not change even if the setting change switch 153 is operated), but the current setting value can be confirmed. The current setting value is also displayed on the setting value display LED 73. Then, when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting confirmation state ends and the state returns to a state in which medals can be bet.

More specifically, in the main process (M_MAIN) (Figure 97), the main control board 50 determines whether the setting key switch 152 is on or not before detecting the operation of the start switch 41. Then, when it determines that the setting key switch 152 is on while the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open) and the number of bets is "0", the process proceeds to the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in Figure 96. Steps S2751 to S2754 of the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in Figure 96 are as described above.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, when the number of bets before the start of a game is "0", when the setting key switch 152 is turned on, "1" is stored in the D register. Then, when the process proceeds to step S2755 of the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in FIG. 96, the main control board 50 determines whether it is time to start checking the settings. Specifically, first, the D register value is stored in the A register, and then it is determined whether the A register value is "1". Then, when the A register value is "1", it is determined that it is time to start checking the settings ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2760.

Thereafter, the process of step S2760 is repeated until the setting key switch 152 is turned off. During that time, the current setting value continues to be displayed on the setting value display LED 73. Then, if it is determined in step S2760 that the setting key switch 152 is off, the process proceeds to step S2761, where the main control board 50 clears (to "0") the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at address "F001 (H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the process of this flowchart ends.
Also, when the processing according to this flowchart is terminated during setting confirmation, the process proceeds to the next step in the main processing (M_MAIN) (FIG. 97) which is the process of determining whether or not the setting key switch 152 is on (whether or not to transition to the setting confirmation state).

In this way, in the fifth embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process can be executed by the same module. That is, the setting change state and the setting confirmation state are created by the same module. Then, based on the information stored in the D register, it is determined whether to enter the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.
In addition, the determination as to whether to enter the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be made based on information stored in another register rather than the D register, and the determination as to whether to enter the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be made based on information stored in RWM53.

97 is a flowchart showing the main process (M_MAIN) in the fifth embodiment. The main process is a process for one game. During the progress of a game, the main process is repeated for each game.
First, in step S271, a stack pointer is set. The stack pointer refers to an area of the RWM 53 that stores data at the time of power failure (e.g., register values, instruction processing of the main processing before the interrupt processing, etc.) when a power failure occurs, and setting the stack pointer is a process of setting register values to initial values in the area of the RWM 53.

In the next step S272, a game start setting process is carried out, which includes generating, updating, storing, etc. of an operating state flag.
In the next step S273, the bet medals are read in. This is a process for reading the number of medals currently bet, and the bet number data or the automatic bet number data is read.
In the next step S274, it is determined whether or not there are any bet medals based on the number of bets read in step S273.

If it is determined in step S274 that there are bet medals, the process proceeds to step S276, and if it is determined that there are no bet medals, the process proceeds to step S275 to wait for medal insertion, and then proceeds to step S276. The medal insertion waiting process in step S275 determines whether or not the setting key switch is on, and if it is on, processes such as transitioning to a setting confirmation mode are performed.
In step S276, a management process for the inserted medals is carried out. This process includes determining whether the medals have been handled and whether the settlement switch 43 has been operated.

In the next step S277, a software random number update process is performed. This process updates (for example, adds "1" at a time) the random number for processing (calculation process) to a random number (hard random number or built-in random number) used by the role selection means 61. The software random number is a 16-bit random number with a range of "0" to "65535 (D)". As an update method, a process of adding an interrupt count value (a count value (variable) that is incremented at the time of an interrupt) to the value before the update may be executed.

In the next step S278, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. If it determines that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S279, and if it determines that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S273. Note that even if the start switch 41 has been operated, if the number of bets has not reached the specified number for the game, the determination in step S278 is "No."

In step S279, the process for when the start switch is accepted is executed, which includes setting a setting change unchangeable flag, setting an output request at the start of rotation of the reels 31, and setting the number of outputs for outputting a medal insertion signal as an external signal to the hall computer or the like.
In the next step S280, the acquisition number data is cleared, causing the acquisition number display LED 78 to display "00" (or to be turned off).

Next, the process proceeds to step S281, and the main control board 50 executes an update process of the number of AT games. This process is a process of subtracting the number of AT games when the AT is in progress and a predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, this process is not executed during a non-AT.
In addition, whether or not to add to the AT game count during the AT is determined based on the result of the role lottery process in step S282. For example, when a rare role is won, the number of additional AT games is determined. Therefore, when the number of AT games is added and the additional amount is added to the AT game count counter, it is executed after the processing of step S282 (not shown in FIG. 97).
After the start switch is accepted (step S279), the AT game count counter is updated in step S281. However, this is not limited to the above, and the AT game count counter may be updated after the role selection process in step S282 or after all reels 31 have stopped (after step S290).
In addition, in the specifications of the difference number management type AT, if it has an AT difference number counter, the AT difference number counter is updated after all reels 31 have stopped and the medal payout process due to a winning combination has been completed (after step S300).

In step S282, the role selection means 61 executes a role selection when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when an operation signal of the start switch 41 is received. The random number value at the time of role selection is acquired in step S279. Then, in step S282, a process is performed to determine whether the acquired random number value is a random number value corresponding to any of the winning roles using the role selection table.

In the next step S283, the main control board 50 executes a favorable zone transition lottery process. In this embodiment, an AT lottery is also executed when the favorable zone transition lottery is executed.
Next, the process proceeds to step S284, where the push order instruction number is set. This process is a process for generating the push order instruction number and displaying the push order instruction information when the instruction function is activated in the game during the AT (displaying the push order instruction number on the acquisition number display LED 78).

In the next step S285, a reel spin start preparation process is executed, which includes a process of determining whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed, and if the minimum game time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step S286.
Here, the RWM 53 is provided with an area for storing the timer value of the minimum play time, and the initial value is "1834 (D) (2.235 ms x 1834 ≈ 4099 ms)." If it is determined in step S279 that the minimum play time is "0," the initial value "1834 (D)" is set as the minimum play time (timer value). Then, the minimum play time is decremented by "1" for each interrupt process. When the process proceeds to step S285 for the next game, it is determined whether the minimum play time is "0," and if it is determined that the minimum play time is "0," the process proceeds to step S286.

In step S286, the reel control means 65 controls the driving of the motor 32 to start the rotation of the reel 31. Then, when the reel 31 reaches a constant speed state, the operation of the stop switch 42 is permitted to be accepted, and the process proceeds to step S287.
In step S287, the acceptance of stopping the reel 31 is checked. Here, it is detected whether or not an operation signal of the stop switch 42 has been received, and when an operation signal has been received, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the lottery result of the winning combination and the position of the reel 31, and the reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.

In the next step S288, the reel control means 65 checks whether all the reels 31 have stopped and proceeds to step S289. In step S289, it is determined whether all the reels 31 have stopped, and if it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, it proceeds to step S290, and if it is determined that all the reels 31 have not stopped, it returns to step S287.

In step S290, the acquisition number data is cleared (set to "0"). For example, during AT, the instruction function may be activated, causing the acquisition number display LED 78 to display push order instruction information (e.g., "=1"). In this case, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes "00" due to the interrupt process executed after the process of step S290.
It is also possible to turn off the acquisition number display LED 78. Specifically, "00010011(B)" may be stored in the LED display request flag, or data for turning off the LED 78 may be provided as segment data and the data may be output.

In step S291, a symbol display determination is performed. Here, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has stopped on an active line.
In the next step S292, it is determined whether or not a display error has occurred in the pattern. If it is determined that a display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S304, and if it is determined that a display error has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S293.
Here, the reel 31 is stopped based on the stop position determination table, so that the reel 31 does not normally stop at a position other than that determined by the stop position determination table. However, if a symbol that should not be displayed (a kick symbol) is displayed on an active line as a result of the symbol display determination, it is determined to be abnormal, and an unrecoverable error process is executed.

If it is determined in step S292 that no display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S293, where an update process for the payout number is executed. This process is a process for storing the payout number for the game as the payout number data and the payout number data buffer.
In the next step S294, the payout means 67 pays out medals corresponding to the winning combination. Next, the process proceeds to step S295, where an interrupt waiting process is performed. In the next step S296, the interrupt process is prohibited. By the processes of steps S295 and S296, the interrupt is prohibited immediately after the interrupt.

In the next step S297, the AF register is saved. Next, the process proceeds to step S298, where the ratio set process is executed. This "ratio set process" is a process that updates various counter values and performs ratio calculations, etc., in order to display five types of ratios on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor). Then, when the process proceeds to step S299, the AF register saved in step S297 is restored, and interrupts are permitted (resumed) in the next step S300. In this way, when the ratio set process is executed, the AF register is saved and interrupt processes are prohibited before it is executed.

Interrupt processing is prohibited while the ratio set processing is being executed because the ratio set processing is a process that uses a program stored outside the usage area, and if an interrupt processing occurs while the main processing is executing a program outside the usage area, the program inside the usage area and the program outside the usage area will be mixed, complicating the processing.

Next, the process proceeds to step S301, where a game end check process is performed. This process is a process for clearing the condition device (winning combination) flag, etc. Then, the process proceeds to step S302, where an output request is set at the end of the game, and in the next step S303, a control command set 1 is performed. These processes are processes for setting control command data for transmitting the fact that one game has ended to the sub-control board 80.
When the process of step S303 ends, the process returns to the beginning of the main process (step S248).

FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the interrupt processing (I_INTR) by the main control board 50 in the fifth embodiment.
In the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in Fig. 98, after step S452, the process proceeds to step S2770, where the main control board 50 determines whether or not a power outage has occurred. If it is determined that a power outage has occurred, the process proceeds to step S2771, where the main control board 50 executes a power outage process (I_POWER_DOWN). On the other hand, if it is determined that a power outage has not occurred, the process skips step S2771 and proceeds to step S454.

In this way, the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed in the interrupt process (I_INTR). For this reason, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is not executed due to interrupt prohibition, or when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is not executed because a program outside the usage area (second program) is being executed, the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is also not executed. The specific contents of the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) will be described later. Then, when the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is terminated, the process proceeds to step S454.

In the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in Fig. 98, the process proceeds from step S455 to step S2821, where the main control board 50 executes the LED display control (I_LED_OUT). In this manner, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is executed in the interrupt process (I_INTR). The specific contents of the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) will be described later.
Then, when the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is ended, the process proceeds to step S2765, where the main control board 50 saves the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) in the stack area of the usage area of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to step S2221, where the main control board 50 executes ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY).

Here, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is a process for controlling the lighting of the credit number display LED 76, the acquisition number display LED 78, and the setting value display LED 73 (digits 1 to 5), etc., and is executed by the program in the usage area (first program).
In contrast, the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is a process for controlling the lighting of the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9), and is executed by a program (second program) outside the usage area. The specific contents of the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) will be described later. Then, when the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is completed, the process proceeds to step S458.

In step S458, the main control board 50 judges whether the set value is within the normal range. Specifically, it reads the set value data (_NB_RANK) stored in address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 and stores it in the A register. Next, it executes a comparison operation between the A register value and "5" (subtracts "5" from the A register value) and judges whether the carry flag is "1". If the carry flag is not "1", it judges that the set value data is within the normal range (the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5"), and if the carry flag is "1", it judges that the set value data is not within the normal range. If it is judged to be within the normal range, it proceeds to step S459, and if it is judged to be not within the normal range, it proceeds to unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in step S2811.

98, if step S458 is "No" or step S460 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step S2811, where the main control board 50 executes unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP). The specific contents of unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) will be described later.
98, if the answer is "No" in step S460, the process proceeds to step S2766, where the main control board 50 restores the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) that was saved in step S2765. Then, the process proceeds to step S457.

In the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 98, the processes of steps S2221, S458, S459, and S460 are executed by a program outside the use area (second program).
Then, when transitioning from processing by a program in the used area (first program) to processing by a program outside the used area (second program), the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is saved to the stack area of the used area of RWM53 in step S2765, and when processing by the program outside the used area (second program) is terminated and processing returns to the program in the used area (first program), the AF register is restored in step S2766.

FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) of step S2771 in FIG.
When the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S2771 is started, first, in step S2772, the main control board 50 saves the registers. This process saves the various registers in the stack area of the RWM 53 usage area.

Proceeding to the next step S2773, the main control board 50 clears all output ports 52. This turns off the output of all output ports 52, and for example, when the motor 32 is being driven (while the reels 31 are spinning) or when the hopper motor 36 is being driven (while medals are being paid out), the driving is stopped.
In the next step S2774, the main control board 50 saves the stack pointer at a predetermined address in the work area of the used area of the RWM 53. The stack pointer saved in step S2774 is restored in step S2722 of the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) in FIG.

Proceeding to the next step S2775, the main control board 50 saves the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) in the stack area of the used area of the RWM 53. Then, proceeding to next step S2776, the main control board 50 executes the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET). The specific contents of the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) will be described later. Then, when the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) is completed, proceeding to the next step S2777, the main control board 50 restores the AF register saved in step S2775. Then, proceeding to the next step S2778.

The RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) is executed by a program outside the used area (second program).
Then, when transitioning from processing by a program in the used area (first program) to processing by a program outside the used area (second program), the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is saved to the stack area of the used area of RWM53 in step S2775, and when processing by the program outside the used area (second program) is terminated and processing returns to the program in the used area (first program), the AF register is restored in step S2777.

When the process proceeds to step S2778, the main control board 50 prohibits access to the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2779, where the main control board 50 goes into a reset wait state (loop processing state). Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 100 is a flow chart showing the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) in step S2776 in FIG.
When the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) in step S2776 is started, the main control board 50 first saves the stack pointer (SP register) to a specific address in the work area outside the area used by RWM 53 in step S2781, and in the next step S2782 sets the stack pointer outside the area used ("F400 (H)"), and proceeds to the next step S2783 where multiple registers are saved to a stack area outside the area used by RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2784.

Here, in step S2781, the stack pointer (SP register) is stored in stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (address "F2A3 (H)" in FIG. 86).
As described above, the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) is a process performed by a program outside the area of use (second program). Therefore, while the program outside the area of use (second program) is being executed, the stack pointer used by the program in the area of use (first program) is saved, and the stack pointer is restored when returning to the program in the area of use (first program).
Also, in step S2782, the stack pointer outside the used area (address "F400(H)") is stored in the stack pointer (SP register).
Furthermore, in step S2783, various registers are saved to a stack area outside the area in use.

In step S2784, the main control board 50 sets a power-off processing completion flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) at address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53. When the power-off processing has been executed, "55(H)" is stored as the power-off processing completion flag (_SF_POWER_OFF).
When the power is restored, the power-off processing completion flag is cleared (set to "0") in step S2724 of the power restoration processing (M_POWER_ON) in Fig. 93. Therefore, after the processing of this step S2724 is executed, the address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53 becomes "00(H)". If the power-off processing is not executed, the power-off processing completion flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is not set, and the address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53 remains "00(H)".
Proceeding to the next step S2785, the main control board 50 clears (to "0") the RWM checksum data (_SW_SUM_CHK) at address "F2A0(H)" of the RWM 53. Then, proceeding to the next step S2786.

Proceeding to step S2786, the main control board 50 sets the top address ("F000(H)") of the area used by RWM 53 in a register for address designation (for example, the B register), proceeds to the next step S2787, sets the number of bytes (number of checksum calculations) of the area used by RWM 53 in a register for the number of calculations (for example, the C register), and proceeds to the next step S2788, sets initial data ("00000000(B)") in a register for checksum calculation (for example, the D register).

Then, proceeding to the next step S2789, the main control board 50 executes a checksum calculation process for the used area of the RWM 53.
In this embodiment, the used area of RWM 53 is set to the range of addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)", and the processes of steps S2789 and S2790 are repeated until it is determined in the next step S2790 that the checksum calculation process has been completed up to address "F1FF(H)" of RWM 53. This causes the checksum of the used area of RWM 53 (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)") to be calculated.

More specifically, in this embodiment, in step S2789, the data indicated by the value of the register for addressing (B register) is subtracted from the value of the register for checksum calculation (D register). In the next step S2790, the value of the register for the number of operations (C register) is updated (subtracted by "1"), and it is determined whether the result is "0". If it is determined that the value is "0", it is determined that the checksum calculation process for the used area of RWM53 has ended, and the process proceeds to step S2791. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is not "0", the value of the register for addressing (B register) is updated (added by "1"), and the process returns to step S2789.

When the checksum calculation process for the area used by RWM 53 is completed, the process proceeds to step S2791, where the main control board 50 sets the first address ("F210(H)") outside the area used by RWM 53 in the address specification register (B register), and in the next step S2792, sets the number of bytes outside the area used by RWM 53 (the number of checksum calculations) in the calculation count register (C register).

Then, proceeding to the next step S2793, the main control board 50 executes a checksum calculation process outside the used area of the RWM 53.
In this embodiment, the outside of the used area of RWM 53 is set to addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)", and the processes of steps S2793 and S2794 are repeated until it is determined in the next step S2794 that the checksum calculation process has been completed up to address "F3FF(H)" of RWM 53. This causes the checksum to be calculated for the outside of the used area of RWM 53 (addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)").

More specifically, in this embodiment, when proceeding to step S2793, the checksum calculation result of the area used by RWM53 is stored in the register for checksum calculation (D register). Then, in step S2793, data indicated by the value of the register for address specification (B register) is subtracted from the value of the register for checksum calculation (D register). In the next step S2794, the value of the register for the number of operations (C register) is updated (subtracted by "1"), and it is determined whether the result is "0". If it is determined that the result is "0", it is determined that the checksum calculation process outside the area used by RWM53 has ended, and the process proceeds to step S2795. On the other hand, if it is determined that the result is not "0", the value of the register for address specification (B register) is updated (added by "1"), and the process returns to step S2793.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the RWM checksum data (also called complement data, error detection data, or error detection information) is calculated by executing the processes of steps S2785 to S2794.
As described above, this RWM checksum data (complement data) is a value that becomes "0" when added to the sum of the data at addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM 53 and the data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" (excluding "F2A0(H)") outside the used area.

Then, when the checksum calculation process outside the used area of the RWM 53 is completed, the process proceeds to step S2795, and the main control board 50 stores (saves) the RWM checksum data (complement data) at address "F2A0 (H)" of the RWM 53.
In the next step S2796, the main control board 50 restores the registers saved in step S2783, and in the next step S2797, restores the stack pointer saved in step S2781. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S2821 in FIG.
First, in step S2822, output ports 3 and 4 (FIG. 89) are turned off. Output port 3 is the output port corresponding to digit 1 signals through digit 5 signals, and output port 4 is the output port corresponding to segment 1A through segment 1P signals. By outputting "00000000(B)" from output ports 3 and 4, output of digits 1 through 5 is temporarily suspended. This prevents different LEDs from appearing to be lit simultaneously (overlapping display) even for just a moment when switching the LED display (preventing image retention).

In the next step S2823, the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) (Figures 84 and 91 (A)) of the used area is updated. Updating the LED display counter 1 is a process of shifting the bit "1" one digit to the right. This updated value is stored in address "F051 (H)" (Figure 84) of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to step S2824.

In step S2824, it is determined whether the value of LED display counter 1 is "00000000 (B)". If it is determined that the value is "00000000 (B)", the process proceeds to step S2825. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is not "00000000 (B)", step S2825 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2826.

In step S2825, the LED display counter 1 is initialized. Here, the value of the LED display counter 1 is set to "00010000(B)" and stored in the address "F051(H)" (FIG. 84) of the RWM 53. Then, the flow proceeds to step S2826.
In step S2826, the values of the LED display counter 1 (address "F051(H)" in FIG. 84) and the LED display request flag (address "F052(H)" in FIG. 84) stored in the RWM 53 are obtained. Here, the value of the LED display counter 1 is stored in the E register, and the value of the LED display request flag is stored in the A register.

Then proceed to step S2827 to confirm and set the segment display of the digit to be displayed this time. This process performs an AND operation on the A register value (the value of the LED display request flag) and the E register value (the value of LED display counter 1) to create data for the LED to be lit this time.

for example,
LED display counter value: 00001000B
LED display request flag value: 00001111B
After AND operation: 00001000B
It becomes.
Or, for example,
LED display counter value: 10000000B
LED display request flag value: 00001111B
After AND operation: 00000000B
It becomes.
The result of the calculation is then stored in the A register. Furthermore, the value stored in the A register is stored in the D register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2828, where it is determined whether the A register value (the value obtained by ANDing the value of the LED display counter 1 and the value of the LED display request flag) is "0". If it is "0", it is determined that there is no display request ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2844. On the other hand, if it is not "0", it is determined that there is a display request ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2829.

In step S2829, error display data is obtained. When an error occurs, the error display data is stored at a predetermined address in the RWM 53. In step S2829, the error display data is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the B register.
In the next step S2830, LED segment table 2 is set. In this embodiment, LED segment table 1 storing data for displaying alphabetical characters on the 7-segment display and LED segment table 2 storing data for displaying numbers on the 7-segment display are provided, and these are stored in the use area of ROM 54. Note that a description of the specific configurations of LED segment tables 1 and 2 will be omitted. Then, in step S2830, the top address of LED segment table 2 is read, and the value is stored in the HL register.

Next, the flow proceeds to step S2831, where the set value display data (address "F001(H)" in FIG. 84) is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the A register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S2832 to determine whether or not there is a request to display the set value. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the D4 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 5) of the above ANDed value stored in the D register is "1"("00010000(B)"). If the D4 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display the set value ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2843. On the other hand, if the D4 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no request to display the set value ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2833.

In step S2833, the credit number data (address "F010(H)" in FIG. 84) is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the A register.
In the next step S2834, a high-order offset is obtained. This process executes an operation to divide the A register value (the credit number data obtained in step S2833) by "10 (decimal number)", stores the quotient in the A register, and stores the remainder in the C register.

In the next step S2835, it is determined whether there is a request to display the upper digits of the credit number. Specifically, it is determined whether the D0 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 1) of the above ANDed value stored in the D register is "1". If the D0 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display the upper digits of the credit number ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2843. On the other hand, if the D0 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no request to display the upper digits of the credit number ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2836.

When proceeding to step S2836, it is determined whether there is a request to display the lower digits of the credit number. Specifically, it is determined whether the D1 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 2) of the above ANDed value stored in the D register is "1". If the D1 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display the lower digits of the credit number ("Yes"), and proceeds to step S2842. On the other hand, if the D1 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no request to display the lower digits of the credit number ("No"), and proceeds to step S2837.

In step S2837, the acquisition number data (address "F011(H)" in FIG. 84) is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the A register.
In the next step S2838, it is determined whether or not an error is being displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the B register value is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that an error is not being displayed ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2840. On the other hand, if the B register value is not "0", it is determined that an error is being displayed ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2839.

In step S2839, LED segment table 1 is set. When proceeding to step S2839, the HL register stores the top address of LED segment table 2 for displaying numbers on the 7-segment display, but when an error is displayed, an English character corresponding to the type of error is displayed on the 7-segment display. Therefore, in step S2839, the top address of LED segment table 1 for displaying English characters on the 7-segment display is read, and this value is stored in the HL register. As a result, the top address of LED segment table 1 is set in the HL register instead of the top address of LED segment table 2 set in step S2830.

In the next step S2840, an offset for the upper digits is obtained. When proceeding to step S2840, the A register stores the acquisition number data acquired in step S2837, and the B register stores the error display data acquired in step S2829. Then, if an error has not occurred, an operation is performed to divide the acquisition number data stored in the A register by "10 (decimal number)", the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the C register. On the other hand, if an error has occurred, an operation is performed to divide the error display data stored in the B register by "10 (decimal number)", the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the C register.

In the next step S2841, it is determined whether there is a request to display the upper digits of the acquisition count display LED 78. Specifically, it is determined whether the D2 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 3) of the above ANDed value stored in the D register is "1". If the D2 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display the upper digits of the acquisition count ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2843. In contrast, if the D2 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no request to display the upper digits of the acquisition count ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2842.

In step S2842, the offset for the lower digits is obtained. This process stores the data stored in the C register in the A register. When processing advances to step S2842, the A register stores the quotient calculated by the division in step S2834 or S2840, and the C register stores the remainder calculated by the division in step S2834 or S2840. Then, in step S2842, the C register value (remainder of the division) is stored in the A register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2843, where the segment output data is obtained. Specifically, the data stored in the HL register (the first address of LED segment table 2 stored in step S2830, or the first address of LED segment table 1 stored in step S2839) is added to the data stored in the A register (the offset value corresponding to the display data), and the data corresponding to the address after the addition is obtained from LED segment table 1 or 2 in ROM 54, and stored in the D register.

The flow then proceeds to step S2844, where it is determined whether or not a display request for segment P has been made.
Specifically, first, it is determined whether the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 (E register value) is "1" (timing when digit 4 is lit) and the D0 bit of the advantageous zone display LED flag (obtained from address "F062(H)" of RWM53 in FIG. 84) is "1." Then, if the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 is "1" and the D0 bit of the advantageous zone display LED flag is "1," it is determined that there is a display request for segment P ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2845.
On the other hand, if the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 is "1" and the D0 bit of the favorable zone display LED flag is not "1", it is determined that there is no request to display segment P ("No"), step S2845 is skipped, and processing proceeds to step S2846.

Next, if the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 is not "1", the following process is performed.
An AND operation is performed on the LED display counter 1 (E register value) and the status display LED lighting data (obtained from address "F044(H)" of RWM 53 in FIG. 84) to determine whether the AND operation result is "0". If the AND operation result is not "0", it is determined that there is a display request for segment P ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2845. On the other hand, if the AND operation result is "0", it is determined that there is no display request for segment P ("No"), and step S2845 is skipped to proceed to step S2846.

When the process proceeds to step S2845, the segment P output data is set. Specifically, an OR operation is performed on the segment output data (D register value) obtained in step S2843 and "10000000 (B)", and the result of the OR operation is stored in the D register. As a result, the D7 bit of the segment output data (the bit corresponding to segment P) becomes "1".

Then, proceed to the next step S2846, where a digit signal is output from output port 3, and a segment signal is output from output port 4. Specifically, the data stored in the E register (LED display counter 1) is output as a digit signal from output port 3, and the data stored in the D register (segment output data) is output as a segment signal from output port 4. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP).
As described above, the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is a process by the second program, and since execution of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited during execution of the second program, no interrupt prohibition process is provided after the start of the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP).Other than this, the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 102 is the same as the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 94.
In FIG. 102, the same processes as those in FIG. 94 are given the same step numbers.

FIG. 103 is a flow chart showing the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) in step S2221 of the interrupt process (I_INTR) of FIG.
The ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) is executed during the interrupt process (I_INTR). Since the interrupt process (I_INTR) can be executed during the setting change state, the setting confirmation state, the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 97) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 97) (during game play), and even in the recoverable error state, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can also be executed, and various ratio information can be displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor).

When the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) process starts, the main control board 50 first stores the stack pointer (SP register) in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (address "F2A3 (H)" in Figure 86) in step S2461.
As described above, preparation for ratio display (S_DSP_READY) is a process performed by a program outside the area of use (second program), so while the program outside the area of use (second program) is running, the stack pointer used in the program in the area of use (first program) is saved, and the stack pointer is restored when returning to the program in the area of use (first program).

In the next step S2462, the main control board 50 sets the stack pointer outside the used area. This process stores "F400(H)" in the stack pointer (SP register).
In the next step S2463, the main control board 50 saves the registers. This process saves the various registers in a stack area outside the area of use.
Next, the process proceeds to step S2464, where the main control board 50 executes a blink request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH). This process is the process shown in Fig. 104, which will be described later, and is a process for updating the blink request flag (address "F291(H)").

In the next step S2465, the main control board 50 updates the rate display timer (S_RATE_TIME). This process is the process shown in Fig. 106, which will be described later, and is a process for updating the blinking switch flag (address "F293(H)"), the display switch time (address "F294"), and the blinking switch time (address "F296(H)").
In the next step S2466, the main control board 50 performs a ratio display process (S_LED_OUT). This process is shown in Fig. 107, which will be described later, and is a process for actually displaying (turning on or off) the ratio in the interrupt process.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2467, where the main control board 50 restores the registers. This process restores the various registers that were evacuated in step S2463.
In the next step S2468, the main control board 50 restores the stack pointer. This process stores the stack pointer saved in step S2461, i.e., the data stored in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2, in the stack pointer (SP register). In other words, this process causes the stack pointer to indicate the address of the area in use. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, since the interrupt processing (I_INTR) can be executed in the setting change state, the setting confirmation state, the period between the start switch acceptance processing (step S279 in FIG. 97) and the game end check processing (step S301 in FIG. 97) (during game play), and in the recoverable error state, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can also be executed.
For this reason, even in the setting change state, setting confirmation state, during the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 97) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 97) (during game play), and in the recoverable error state, it is possible for the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) to sequentially display various ratios related to the information type and game results in digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can be executed regardless of whether the door switch 17 is on or off (whether the front door 12 is open or closed). That is, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can be executed when the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open) and when the door switch 17 is off (the front door 12 is closed).
Therefore, whether the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open) or off (the front door 12 is closed), the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) can sequentially display various ratios related to the information type and game results on digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor).

In contrast, when an irrecoverable error occurs and an irrecoverable error state is entered (a state in which the irrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 94 or the irrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 102 is executed and game progress is stopped), the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited and the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) is not executed, so that digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) no longer display the various ratios relating to the information type and game results.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, in an unrecoverable error state, in step S1494 of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 94 described above, or the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 102 described below, the output of output ports 0 to 7 is turned off ("00000000 (B)").

As a result, in the unrecoverable error state, the output from output port 6 (output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) will remain at "00000000 (B)", so digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 will all remain off until the unrecoverable error state is released and the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is resumed.
Digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 all remain off, which is a characteristic of an irrecoverable error state, and this notifies the manager (hall attendant) that an irrecoverable error state has occurred.

FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the blink request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH) in step S2464 of FIG.
When the blink request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH) process is started, the main control board 50 first sets the number of repetitions and an initial value in step S2481. This process stores "6(H)" in the B register and "0" in the C register.
Here, the number of repetitions "6" is a value for determining whether or not to blink the six ratio segments.

In the next step S2482, the main control board 50 sets the address of the blinking/non-matching item determination value table. This process is to store the top address of the blinking/non-matching item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH) in the DE register.
FIG. 105 is a diagram showing the blinking/non-applicable item judgment value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH). The blinking/non-applicable item judgment value table prescribes a predetermined value for each of the six item ratios. For example, when the instruction-included role ratio is "70", the display is made to blink when the instruction-included role ratio is "70" or more.
105, the top address of the blinking/non-applicable item determination value table is "2500(H)." Therefore, "2500(H)" is stored in the DE register.

In addition, "non-applicable item" refers to a machine that does not have the function (performance) corresponding to the item. For example, a gaming machine that does not have "RB (first-class special feature)" does not display the consecutive feature ratio, so when the consecutive feature ratio is displayed, "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
In the fifth embodiment, the ratios of all six items are displayed, but when there is a non-applicable item, “DE(H)” is stored in the address of ROM 54 corresponding to the non-applicable item in the blinking/non-applicable item judgment value table.

For example, in a gaming machine that does not have an "RB (first type special feature),""DE(H)" is stored in addresses "2502(H)" and "2504(H)" instead of "60(H)" in FIG. 105.
In this way, even if the gaming machine does not have "RB (first-class special feature)", the control process is set up to enable lighting control of the management information by simply modifying a portion of the data in the blinking/non-applicable item judgment value table. Therefore, the control program can be easily used in other products.
It should be noted that the value corresponding to the non-applicable item is not limited to "DE(H)".

In the next step S2483, the main control board 50 sets the RWM address of the ratio data. This process is a process of storing the address ("F28D (H)" in FIG. 86) where the role object state ratio data is stored in the HL register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S2484, where the main control board 50 acquires the blinking or non-applicable item determination value. Here, the following process is executed.
(1) The data at the address indicated by the DE register value is stored in the A register.
(2) The value of the A register is decremented by "1."

In the next step S2485, the main control board 50 judges whether or not the item value is a non-corresponding item value. In this process, "DD (H)" is subtracted from the A register value, and if the calculation result is "0" (zero flag="1"), it is judged to be a non-corresponding item value.
In other words, when the item is non-applicable, as described above, "DE(H)" is stored in the blinking/non-applicable item judgment value table, so subtracting "1" from "DE(H)" and then subtracting "DD(H)" results in "0", and the zero flag becomes "1".

In addition, when a specified value other than "DE(H)" is stored as a value corresponding to a non-applicable item, for example, "specified value - 1 - (specified value - 1)" is calculated, and if the result of the calculation is "0" (zero flag = "1"), it is determined to be a non-applicable item value.
In addition, the "predetermined value" may be a value exceeding "70 (H)" in the case of the instructed reel ratio, reel ratio (cumulative), and reel ratio (6000 times), a value exceeding "60 (H)" in the case of the continuous reel ratio (cumulative) and continuous reel ratio (6000 times), and a value exceeding "50 (H)" in the case of the reel etc. state ratio.
If it is determined that the value is not a non-corresponding item value, the process proceeds to the next step S2486, and if it is determined that the value is a non-corresponding item value, step S2486 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2487.

In step S2486, the main control board 50 acquires the ratio data. This process stores the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
In the next step S2487, the main control board 50 saves the ratio data or the non-corresponding item value. This process stores the A register value in the address indicated by the HL register value. This process has the following meaning.

When there is a non-applicable item, no data is stored in the storage area of the RWM 53 in which the ratio data is stored before the above-mentioned saving process.
For example, if the reel does not have an "RB (first type special feature)", the consecutive feature ratio (6000 times) data (address "F289(H)") and the consecutive feature ratio (cumulative) data (address "F28B(H)") are stored as "00(H)".

Details will be described later, but when the ratio is displayed in the ratio segment of the management information display LED 74, the ratio is displayed based on the information stored in the address. In this case, if "00 (H)" is stored in the continuous feature ratio (6000 times) data, when the continuous feature ratio (6000 times) is displayed, "00" will be displayed in the ratio segment of the management information display LED 74. In order to prevent this, the value of the A register acquired in step S2485 ("DD (H)" in this embodiment) is stored as the ratio data, so that "--" will be displayed.
In addition, the program processing is set up so that this can be used in common by gaming machines that have non-relevant items and gaming machines that do not have non-relevant items.

In the next step S2488, the main control board 50 performs a blinking determination. This process subtracts the data at the address indicated by the DE register value from the A register value. If a carry is caused as a result of this calculation, the carry flag becomes "1".
As will be described in more detail later, when the carry flag is set to "1", this means that the corresponding item will be lit in a non-blinking manner when displayed, and when the carry flag is set to "0", this means that the corresponding item will be lit in a blinking manner when displayed.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2489, where the main control board 50 generates a blink request flag. This process performs an arithmetic process of rotating and shifting the carry flag and the C register value to the left.
Specifically, if the value of the carry flag is "CY" and the C register values are "D7, D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0", then
"CY", C register value "D7, D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0"
of,
"D7", C register value "D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0, CY"
The calculation is performed as follows.

For example, if the C register value is the initial value "00000000(B)" as shown in step S2481 and the carry flag is "1" in step S2488,
"1", C register value "00000000(B)"
of,
"0", C register value "00000001 (B)"
The calculation is performed as follows.
Therefore, the C register value becomes "00000001(B)."
This C register value ultimately becomes the blink request flag.
In other words, the processing of step S2488 is a processing of storing information in a register (memory area) that determines whether or not to blink the ratio segment of the item in question by calculation based on the ratio data and the specific value stored in the blinking/non-applicable item judgment value table.

In the next step S2490, the main control board 50 sets the RWM address of the next ratio data. This process subtracts "1" from the HL register value.
For example, the HL register value in the first blinking judgment is "F28D(H)" (reel state ratio data) as described above. If "1" is subtracted from the HL register value, it becomes "F28C(H)" (reel ratio (cumulative) data) which is the target of the second blinking judgment.

In the next step S2491, the main control board 50 sets the address of the next blinking/non-applicable item determination value table. This process is to increment the DE register value by "1." For example, if the DE register value was initially set to "2500(H)," this process will result in the DE register value becoming "2501(H)."
As shown in FIG. 105, the blinking/non-applicable item judgment values are stored in addresses "2500(H)" to "2505(H)" in the following order: reel etc. state ratio, reel ratio (cumulative), continuous reel ratio (cumulative), reel ratio (6000 times), continuous reel ratio (6000 times), and reel ratio with instructions.
This simplifies the process by setting the initial value of the address (DE register value) of the blinking/non-matching item judgment value table to "2500 (H)" and adding "1" when judging the next blinking/non-matching item through a loop process (steps S2484 to S2492). This allows the target address to be specified, thereby simplifying the process.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2492, where the main control board 50 determines whether the repetition has ended. Here, the following process is executed.
(1) The value of the B register is decremented by "1."
(2) If the B register value is not "0", it is determined that the repetition has not ended.
Here, since the B register value is set to "6" in the first step S2481, the number of repetitions becomes "6." If it is determined that the repetition has ended, the process proceeds to step S2493, and if it is determined that the repetition has not ended, the process returns to step S2484.
In this manner, blinking determination is performed for six items.

When the process proceeds to step S2493 after completing the blinking determination of the six items, the main control board 50 acquires the total number of games counter value. Here, the following process is executed.
(1) The value of the lowest two bytes of the total number of games played counter (address "F26D(H)") is stored in the HL register.
(2) The value of the most significant byte of the total number of games played counter (address "F26D(H)") is stored in register A.
As mentioned above, the total number of games counter is composed of 3 bytes, with "F26D(H)" being the memory area that stores the first digit, and the value is stored in the L register.
Also, "F26E(H)" is the storage area for storing the second digit, and that value is stored in the H register.
Furthermore, "F26F(H)" is the memory area for storing the third digit, and this value is stored in the A register.

In the next step S2494, the main control board 50 judges whether or not the most significant byte of the total number of games counter is "0". This process judges whether or not the A register value stored in step S2493 is "0". If it is judged to be "0", the process proceeds to step S2495, and if it is judged not to be "0", the process proceeds to step S2496.
In step S2495, the main control board 50 judges whether or not 6000 games have been played. This process subtracts "6000 (D)" from the HL register value (the lowest 2 bytes of the total number of games played counter). If a carry flag is set to "1" when a carry flag is set to "1", it is determined that 6000 games have not been played, and the process proceeds to step S2497.
On the other hand, if it is determined that 6000 games have elapsed, the flow proceeds to step S2496.

In step S2496, the main control board 50 updates the data for the blink request flag. This process sets the D6 bit of the C register to "1." Here, the C register value is set to a value corresponding to the blink request flag at address "F291(H)" in FIG. 86 (however, at this point, the bit is inverted). Therefore, when 6000 games have passed, the process of setting the D6 bit to "1" is executed.

In the next step S2497, the main control board 50 determines whether the most significant byte of the total number of plays counter exceeds "2" (is "3" or greater). Here, a process is performed to subtract "3" from the A register value. If there is no borrowing in this subtraction, the carry flag becomes ≠ "1". If the carry flag is ≠ "1", it is determined that the most significant byte of the total number of plays counter exceeds "2" (is "3" or greater).

The reason for doing this is that in order to determine whether 175,000 games have been reached, first the most significant byte is compared with "3." Here, since "175,000 (D)" is "2AB98 (H)" in hexadecimal, it is clear that when the A register value exceeds "2" (the A register value is "3" or greater), it is inevitable that the value of the total number of games played counter exceeds "175,000 (D)."
In step S2497, if the carry flag is not "1", it is determined that the most significant byte of the total number of plays counter exceeds "2" and the process proceeds to step S2500. If the carry flag is "1", it is determined that the most significant byte of the total number of plays counter does not exceed "2" and the process proceeds to step S2498.

In step S2498, the main control board 50 determines whether the value of the most significant byte of the total play count counter is "2". This process subtracts "2" from the A register value, and if it is determined that the value is not "0", it determines that the value of the most significant byte of the total play count counter is not "2". If it is determined that the value of the most significant byte of the total play count counter is not "2", the process proceeds to step S2501, and if it is determined that the value of the most significant byte of the total play count counter is "2", the process proceeds to step S2499.

In step S2499, the main control board 50 judges whether or not 175,000 games have passed. Specifically, "AB98(H)" is subtracted from the HL register value, and if a carry flag is dropped as a result of the calculation, the carry flag becomes "1." If the carry flag is "1," it is determined that 175,000 games have not passed.
If it is determined in step S2499 that 175,000 games have been played, the process proceeds to step S2500, and if it is determined that 175,000 games have not been played, the process proceeds to step S2501.

In step S2500, the main control board 50 updates the data for the blink request flag. This process sets the D7 bit of the C register to "1." The D7 bit of the C register corresponds to the D7 bit of the blink request flag (175000 game blink flag) at address "F291(H)" in Figure 86. Then, the process proceeds to step S2501.

In step S2501, the main control board 50 generates a blinking request flag and executes the following processes.
(1) Store “01111111(B)” in the A register.
(2) An exclusive OR (XOR) is performed on the A register value and the C register value, and the result is stored in the A register.

Before the process of step S2501 is executed, as described above, the blinking item (bit) among the data stored in the C register stores "0." For example, when 175,000 games have been played, the D7 bit becomes "1" as described above. In other words, when 175,000 games have not been played, the bit becomes "0."
Therefore, a blink request flag is generated by inverting the bit of the C register value so that the item (bit) to be blinked becomes "1".

In the next step S2502, the main control board 50 stores the blink request flag generated in step S2501. Here, the following process is executed.
(1) The address of the blink request flag ("F291(H)" in FIG. 86) is stored in the HL register.
(2) The A register value is stored in the address indicated by the HL register value ("F291(H)" in FIG. 86).
As a result, items that are to be blinked are set to "1" and items that are not to be blinked are set to "0." In this way, the information corresponding to each bit is represented by "1" or "0," and the blink request flags for eight items, including whether to blink or not, are stored in address "F291(H)" in FIG. 86.

FIG. 106 is a flow chart showing the rate display timer update (S_RATE_TIME) in step S2465 in FIG.
When the rate display timer update (S_RATE_TIME) process is started, the main control board 50 first updates the display switching time in step S2511. Here, the following process is executed.
(1) The address storing the display switching time ("F294(H)" in FIG. 86) is stored in the HL register.
(2) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is decremented by "1", and the result of the subtraction is stored at that address.
This process executes a cyclic subtraction process that cyclically cycles between "0" and "2144 (D)" when the display switching time is expressed in decimal.

Therefore, if this process is performed when the display switching time is "0", "2144 (D)" (860 (H)) will be stored as the display switching time.
Moreover, when the process is performed at "0", and "2144(D)" (860(H)) is stored as the display switching time, the carry flag becomes "1".
Incidentally, since an interrupt process is executed every 2.235 ms, the value changes from "0" to "2144(D)" approximately every 4792 ms, and the carry flag becomes "1."
This causes the ratio display content to be switched approximately every 5 seconds.

In the next step S2512, the main control board 50 judges whether or not the display switching time has elapsed. This judgement is made by judging whether or not the carry flag has become "1" in the processing of step S2511. If the carry flag is "1", it is judged that the display switching time has elapsed.
If it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2513, and if it is determined that the display switching time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2518.

In step S2513, the main control board 50 saves the blinking switching time. This process stores "134(D)(86(H))" in the address (blinking switching time) indicated by the data obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value (i.e., "F296(H)").
That is, when it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed, the blinking switching time is saved. The blinking switching time of 2.235×134=299.49 (ms) is stored.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2514, where the main control board 50 turns off the blinking switch flag. Here, the following process is executed.
(1) The address of the blinking switch flag ("F293(H)" in FIG. 86) is stored in the HL register.
(2) Store "0" in the address indicated by the HL register value.
As described above, when the data stored in the blinking switch flag is "0", it indicates that the light is on, and when it is "1", it indicates that the light is off.
That is, when the display switching time has elapsed, the blinking switching flag becomes "0" (lit).

Next, the process proceeds to step S2515, where the main control board 50 updates the ratio display number. Here, the following process is executed.
(1) The HL register value is decremented by "1."
In other words, the address of the RWM 53 corresponding to the ratio display number ("F292(H)" in FIG. 86) is stored in the HL register.
(2) Add "1" to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
This process executes a cyclic addition process for the ratio display number, which cycles between "0" and "5." Therefore, if this process is performed when the ratio display number is "5,""0" is stored as the ratio display number. Also, if this process is performed when the ratio display number is less than "5," the carry flag becomes "1."

In the next step S2516, the main control board 50 determines whether the updated ratio display number is "0". Here, when the carry flag = "1", it is determined that the ratio display number is not "0". In other words, when the ratio display number is "5", if the processing of step S2515 is executed, the carry flag ≠ "1" (= "0"), and in this case, it is determined that the ratio display number is "0".

If it is determined in step S2516 that the updated ratio display number is "0", the process proceeds to step S2517, and if it is determined that the updated ratio display number is not "0", the process according to this flowchart ends.
In step S2517, the main control board 50 corrects the ratio display number. This process adds "1" to the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value ("F292(H)" in FIG. 86). As a result of this process, if a "0" is stored in the ratio display number, it is updated to "1". As a result, the ratio display number cycles through "1" to "6". Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

If it is determined in step S2512 that the display switching time has not elapsed and the process proceeds to step S2518, the main control board 50 updates the blinking switching time. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The address of the blinking switching time ("F296(H)" in FIG. 86) is stored in the HL register.
(2) "1" is subtracted from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and the result of the subtraction is stored at that address.
This process executes a cyclic subtraction process that cyclically cycles between "0" and "134 (D)" when expressed as a decimal number as the blinking switching time.
Therefore, if this process is performed when the blinking switching time is "0", "134(D)" (86(H)) will be stored as the blinking switching time.
Moreover, when the process is performed at "0", and "134(D)" (86(H)) is stored as the blinking switching time, the carry flag becomes "1".

Next, the process proceeds to step S2519, where the main control board 50 determines whether the blinking switching time has elapsed. This determination is made by determining whether the carry flag is "1", and if the carry flag is not equal to "1", it is determined that the blinking switching time has not elapsed. If it is determined that the blinking switching time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2520, and if it is determined that the blinking switching time has not elapsed, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In step S2520, the main control board 50 updates the blinking switch flag. Here, the following process is executed.
(1) The address of the blinking switch flag ("F293(H)" in FIG. 86) is stored in the HL register.
(2) "1" is added to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and the result of the addition is stored at that address.
This process executes a cyclic addition process for the blinking switch flag, which cycles between "0" and "1." Therefore, if this process is performed when the blinking switch flag is "1,""0" is stored as the blinking switch flag.
Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in step S2466 in FIG.
When the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) starts, the main control board 50 first acquires the value of LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) (address "F297(H)" in FIG. 86) in step S1471. This process acquires the value of LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) and stores it in the D register.

In the next step S1472, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a request to display a ratio. Here, it determines whether or not there is a request to display any of the digits 6 to 9. Specifically, it performs an AND operation on the value of the LED display counter 2 stored in the D register and "00001111 (B)." If the result of this AND operation is "0," it is determined that there is no request to display a ratio, and the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, if the result of the AND operation is not "0," it is determined that there is a request to display a ratio, and the process proceeds to step S1475.
In the fifth embodiment, the result of the AND operation between the value of the LED display counter 2 and "00001111 (B)" will never be "0", and therefore the result in step S1472 will never be "No".

In the next step S1475, the ratio display number (address "F292(H)" in FIG. 86) is obtained. This process executes a process of obtaining the ratio display number and storing it in the A register, and further storing the A register value in the E register.
Here, the number of times to check the blinking bit, which will be described later, is determined based on the ratio display number. For example, the following is given:
Example 1)
Ratio display number is "1": Obtain the number of blinking bit checks for the ratio of indicated features.
Example 2)
Ratio display number is "2": Obtain the number of blinking bit inspections for the continuous feature ratio (6000 times).
Example 3)
Ratio display number is "5": Obtain the number of blinking bit checks for the reel ratio (total cumulative).
Example 4)
Ratio display number is "6": The number of blinking bit checks for the reel status ratio is obtained.
Furthermore, by executing the process of storing the A register value in the E register, the A register value and the E register value become the same value.

In the next step S2531, the address of the blink bit check count table is set. This process stores the address obtained by subtracting "1" from the top address of the blink bit check count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK) in the HL register.
FIG. 108 is a diagram showing the blink bit check count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK).
As shown in FIG. 108, a predetermined value (for example, the value corresponding to the indicated feature ratio is "8(H)") is stored for each ratio.
And the top address is "2510(H)." Therefore, "250F(H)" is stored in the HL register.

The "blink bit inspection count" is a value indicating how many bits from bit D0 in the blink request flag at address "F292(H)" must be proceeded to before reaching the bit to be inspected.
For example, in Fig. 108, "8 (H)" is stored in the command-indicated feature ratio, continuous feature ratio (cumulative), feature ratio (cumulative), and feature etc. state ratio, which is a value for determining whether the value of the eighth D7 bit counting from the D0 bit in the blinking request flag is "1." The D7 bit is a flag that becomes "1" when the total number of plays has not reached 175,000, and when this D7 bit is "1," the identification segments of the command-indicated feature ratio, continuous feature ratio (cumulative), feature ratio (cumulative), and feature etc. state ratio are subject to blinking.

In addition, in FIG. 108, "7 (H)" is stored for the consecutive feature ratio (6000 times) and feature ratio (6000 times), which is a value for determining whether the value of the seventh bit D6, counting from bit D0 in the blinking request flag, is "1". Bit D6 is a flag that becomes "1" when the total number of plays has not reached 6000, and when bit D6 is "1", the identification segments for the consecutive feature ratio (6000 times) and feature ratio (6000 times) are subject to blinking.

In the next step S2532, the main control board 50 sets the identification segment blinking bit inspection count. Here, the following process is executed.
(1) The data obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is stored in the HL register.
(2) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the B register.
For example, when the A register value (the ratio display number stored in step S1475) is "3",
250F(H)+3(H)=2512(H) (=HL register value)
7 (H) (=B register value)
It becomes.

In other words, "250F (H)" is the reference address, and the data stored in the ratio display number (address "F292 (H)") is used as the offset value to calculate the address of the blinking bit inspection table and obtain the data stored in that address.
In the above example, "7 (H)" is obtained, which is information for determining whether or not to blink the identification segment at the reel ratio (6000 times) stored in address "2512 (H)".

Next, the process proceeds to step S1476, where the main control board 50 sets the identification segment offset table. This process stores the top address of the identification segment offset table (TBL_SEGID_DATA) in the HL register. The top address is "2520(H)", and the value obtained by subtracting "1" from this address, which is "251F(H), is stored in the HL register.

In the next step S1477, the main control board 50 acquires an identification segment offset value. This process is a process of reading the ratio display number stored in the A register in step S1475 as an offset value from the identification segment offset table.
Specifically, the following process is executed.
(1) The data obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is stored in the HL register.
(2) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
As a result, for example, when the ratio display number is "1", "2520(H)" obtained by adding "1(H)" to "251F(H)" is stored in the HL register, and "7A(H)", which is the data stored at that address, is stored in the A register. Also, when the ratio display number is "2", "2521(H)" obtained by adding "2(H)" to "251F(H)" is stored in the HL register, and "6B(H)", which is the data stored at that address, is stored in the A register.

In the next step S1478, the main control board 50 determines whether there is a request to display the ratio (1000 digit) (a request to display digit 6). Here, it determines whether the D0 bit of the value stored in the D register (the value of LED display counter 2) is "1", and if it is "1", it determines that there is a display request. If there is a request to display the ratio (1000 digit), the process proceeds to step S1482, and if there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S1479.

In step S1479, the main control board 50 determines whether there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits) (a request to display digit 7). Here, it determines whether the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register (the value of LED display counter 2) is "1", and if it is "1", it determines that there is a display request. If there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits), the process proceeds to step S1483, and if there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S2533.

In step S2533, the main control board 50 sets the ratio segment blinking bit inspection count. Here, the following process is executed.
(1) Store the E register value in the A register.
(2) Store the A register value in the B register.
Here, the ratio display number acquired in step S1475 is stored in the E register, so the same value is stored in the E register, the A register, and the B register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1480. Note that the process proceeds to step S1480 when there is no request to display the ratio (1000th digit) and the ratio (100th digit), i.e., when there is no request to display the identification segment (when the ratio segment is to be displayed). Therefore, in step S1480, the ratio data is obtained.
In this step S1480, the main control board 50 acquires a value corresponding to the ratio display number stored in the E register. For example, when the E register value is "00000001 (B)" corresponding to the ratio display number "1", the command-inclusive role ratio data is acquired.

Specific ratio data is obtained as follows.
(1) In the HL register, the value ("F287(H)") obtained by subtracting "1" from the address of the RWM 53 in which the instructed feature ratio data is stored ("F288(H)" in FIG. 86) is stored.
(2) The value of the HL register is added to the value of the A register, and the result is stored in the HL register.
(3) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
In other words, using "F287 (H)" as the base address and the ratio display number as the offset value, the RWM address where the ratio data is stored can be calculated (specified), and the data stored in that RWM address can be obtained (stored) in a register (memory area).

By this process, the A register stores an offset value for displaying the ratio of any of the following: instructed reel ratio data, continuous reel ratio data (6000 times), reel ratio data (6000 times), continuous reel ratio data (cumulative), reel ratio data (cumulative), and reel etc. state ratio. This offset value (A register value) is used when obtaining the ratio display segment data in step S1484.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1481, where the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a request to display the ratio (single digit) (a request to display digit 9). This process is to determine whether or not the D3 bit of the value stored in the D register (the value of the LED display counter 2) is "1." If there is a request to display the ratio (single digit), the process proceeds to step S1483, and if there is no request, the process proceeds to step S1482.
When it is determined in step S1481 that there is no request to display the ratio (1 digit), this means that there is a request to display the ratio (10 digits).

Through the above processing, if there is a request to display the ratio (1000's digit) or the ratio (10's digit), the flow proceeds to step S1482; if there is a request to display the ratio (100's digit) or the ratio (1's digit), the flow proceeds to step S1483.
In step S1482, the main control board 50 sets the offset for the upper digits. The reason for proceeding to step S1482 is to light up the upper digits of the identification segment or ratio segment. At this point, the A register stores the identification segment offset value (step S1477) or the ratio data (step S1480). Then, the following process is executed.

(1) Swap the lower 4 bits and upper 4 bits stored in the A register.
For example, if the data before swapping is "0011/1001(B)" (where "/" indicates the boundary between the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits), swapping the lower 4 bits with the upper 4 bits results in "1001/0011(B)."
(2) The value of the A register is ANDed with "00001111(B)" and the result is stored in the A register. This process masks the upper 4 bits (setting them to "0") so that the lower 4 bits of the A register can be used as an offset value.
Of the 1-byte data of the identification segment offset value and the 1-byte data of the offset value for displaying the ratio, the upper 4 bits correspond to the upper offset value, and the lower 4 bits correspond to the lower offset value. Therefore, by performing the above process, an offset value for acquiring the upper segment data is generated.

In the next step S1483, the main control board 50 sets the ratio display segment data table. This process stores the first address of the ratio display segment data table in the HL register. The first address is "2530 (H)", and "2530 (H)" is stored in the HL register. Note that a description of the specific configuration of the ratio display segment data table will be omitted.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1484, where the main control board 50 acquires the segment output data. This process adds the A register value (offset value) to the HL register value (top address of the ratio display segment data table), and stores the data corresponding to the address of the ratio display segment data table after the addition in the E register.
Specifically, for example,
HL register value = 2530 (H) (before addition; top address value of ratio display segment data table)
A register value = 5 (H)
If
HL register value = 2535 (H) (after addition)
E register value = 01101101 (B) (display data for "5")
It becomes.

Next, proceeding to step S1485, the main control board 50 determines whether or not segment P is being displayed. In this embodiment, when displaying digits 6 to 9, the segment P (dot) of digit 7 is always displayed, so when there is a request to display the ratio (100th digit), it is determined that there is a request to display segment P. On the other hand, when there is a request to display the ratio (1 digit), ratio (10 digit), and ratio (1000 digit), it is determined that there is no request to display segment P.

Here, for example, it is determined whether or not the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display segment P, and if it is not "1", it is determined that there is no request to display segment P. Specifically, the following process is executed.
(1) Store “00000010(B)” in the A register.
(2) The A register value and the D register value (the value of the LED display counter 2 stored in step S1471) are ANDed. If the result of this AND is not "0", it is determined that a display request for segment P has been made.
If it is determined that a display request for segment P has been made, the process proceeds to step S1486; if it is determined that a display request has not been made, the process proceeds to step S2534.

In step S1486, the main control board 50 sets the output data corresponding to segment P. Since segment P corresponds to bit D7 of the 8-bit data, it performs an OR operation on the segment data (E register value) obtained in step S1484 and "10000000 (B)" and stores the result of the operation in the E register.

In the next step S2534, the main control board 50 acquires the blink request flag. This process is to store the data of the blink request flag (address "F291 (H)" in FIG. 86) in the A register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S2535, where the main control board 50 performs a blink bit check. This process shifts the A register to the right by "1" and stores the overflow result in the carry flag. That is, the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is stored in the carry flag. Therefore, if the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is "0", the carry flag = "0", and if the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is "1", the carry flag = "1".

In the next step S2536, the main control board 50 determines whether the inspection has ended. Here, the following process is executed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the value of the B register.
(2) If it is determined that the B register value is "0", it is determined that the inspection is completed.
If it is determined that the inspection has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2537, and if it is determined that the inspection has not been completed, the process returns to step S2535.
Through the above process, the value of the blink request flag is shifted to the right by the number of times initially stored in the B register, and the overflow result from this shift is stored in the carry flag.

For example, when the blink request flag value is "10000000(B)" (the 175000 blink flag in bit D7 is on) and the B register value is "8(H)",
1st time: "10000000(B)" → "01000000(B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 8 - 1 = 7 (H)
2nd time: "01000000(B)" → "00100000(B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 7 - 1 = 6 (H)
3rd time: "00100000(B)" → "00010000(B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 6 - 1 = 5 (H)
4th time: "00010000(B)" → "00001000(B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 5 - 1 = 4 (H)
5th time: "00001000(B)" → "00000100(B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 4 - 1 = 3 (H)
6th time: "00000100(B)" → "00000010(B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 3 - 1 = 2 (H)
7th time: "00000010(B)" → "00000001(B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 2 - 1 = 1 (H)
8th time: "00000001(B)" → "00000000(B)", carry flag = "1"
B register value = 1-1 = 0 (H)
It becomes.

In step S2537, the main control board 50 determines whether the blink request flag is on. This process determines whether the carry flag is "1" when it is determined in step S2536 that the inspection has ended, and if it is "1", it determines that the blink request flag is on. If it is determined that the blink request flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2538, and if it is determined that the blink request flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S1487.

In step S2538, the main control board 50 determines whether the blinking switch flag is ON or not. Here, the following process is executed.
(1) The data of the blinking switch flag (address "F293(H)" in FIG. 86) is stored in the A register.
(2) When the A register value is "0" (second zero flag="1"), it is determined that the blinking switch flag is not on.
If it is determined that the blinking switch flag is on, the flow proceeds to step S2539, and if it is determined that the blinking switch flag is not on, the flow proceeds to step S1487.
In addition, from steps S2537 and S2538,
a) If the blink request flag is off (step S2537: No), the process does not proceed to step S2538, and the light will not be turned off even if the blink switch flag is on.
b) Even if the blink request flag is on ("Yes" in step S2537), if the blink switch flag is off ("No" in step S2538), the light is turned on.
c) If the blink request flag is on (Yes in step S2537) and the blink switch flag is on (Yes in step S2538), the process proceeds to step S2539, where the light is turned off.

In step S2539, the main control board 50 clears the segment data. This process stores the B register value in the E register.
Here, the B register value is always "0" when it is determined in step S2536 that the inspection has ended. Therefore, this process is a process for setting "0" to the E register. That is, when the blink request flag is on ("1") and the blink switch flag is on ("1", i.e., off), the display to be lit is turned off in this interrupt process, so the process of step S2539 is executed to set the segment data (E register value) to "00000000 (B)". Then, the process proceeds to step S1487.

In step S1487, in order to output a digit signal and a segment signal, the main control board 50 outputs a segment signal from output port 7 and outputs a digit signal from output port 6. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The DE register value and the HL register value are exchanged.
Here, the D register stores a digit signal, and the E register stores a segment signal.
The data stored in the D register is swapped with the data stored in the H register.
The data stored in the E register and the data stored in the L register are swapped.
This means:
The H register stores the digit signal.
The L register stores a segment signal.
(2) The L register value is output to the output port 7 and the H register value is output to the output port 6 .
This ends the processing according to this flowchart.

Next, an operation when the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 in the fifth embodiment is operated will be described.
When the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit and medals can be bet, and a recoverable error state occurs (for example, a medal retention error in the medal selector ("CE" error), etc.), the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is operated to release the recoverable error state.
In this case, as described above, even if the recoverable error state is released, the data in the used area of RWM53 and outside the used area are maintained without being initialized, and the data relating to the favorable zone is also maintained without being initialized, so the favorable zone display LED77 also remains lit.
When recovering from a recoverable error state, data relating to errors such as error detection flags stored in a specified address of the RWM 53 may be initialized.

In contrast, when a recoverable error state occurs while the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit and medals can be bet, the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on (operated).
In this case, when the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 92 becomes "No" and step S2710 becomes "Yes", the process proceeds to step S2713, and the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of setting changes when the power is restored normally after a power outage is set.

Also, since medals can be bet in this situation, the setting change impossible flag is off, so step S2714 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731. Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of FIG. 95, the initialization process is performed for the addresses "F001 (H)" to "F1FF (H)" in the use area of RWM 53 and the addresses "F292 (H)" to "F3FF (H)" outside the use area. Therefore, the data related to the advantageous zone is initialized, and the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned off. However, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of address "F000 (H)" is maintained without being initialized, so the setting value is not changed. Furthermore, since it is a reset time, step S2741 of FIG. 95 becomes "Yes", and the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) of step S2742 is skipped, so the setting change state is not entered. After that, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) in step S248 (Figure 97), and the game returns to a state in which medals can be bet.

In this way, if a recoverable error state occurs when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit and medals can be bet, the recoverable error state can be released by operating the reset switch 153, making it possible to continue playing in the advantageous zone.
On the other hand, if a recoverable error state occurs when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit and medals can be bet, the power can be turned off once and then turned on with the reset switch 153 turned on, thereby canceling the recoverable error state and allowing play to be resumed from the normal zone rather than the advantageous zone.
This allows the manager (hall staff) to choose whether to continue playing in the advantageous zone or to resume playing in the normal zone.

Also, for example, if a player stops playing in the advantageous zone (in the middle of playing in the advantageous zone), if the next player is allowed to play in the middle of playing in the advantageous zone, the player will be too advantageous.
On the other hand, changing the settings while the hall is open is not advisable, as it may stimulate players' gambling instincts.
Furthermore, if the gaming machines are turned off and stopped from operating while the hall is open, the operating rate of the gaming machines will decrease, which is undesirable from the perspective of the hall's management.
Therefore, when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is on and medals can be bet, the power is turned off once, and then the power is turned on with the reset switch 153 turned on. This allows the game to be resumed from the normal zone without changing the settings.

Also, suppose that the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off (not operated).
In this case, it becomes possible to transition to a setting change state (setting change mode, setting change in progress), and then the start switch 41 is operated, the setting key switch 152 is turned off, and when the setting change state ends, the state returns to one in which medals can be bet.

Specifically, when the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off (not operated), step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 92 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S2711. Also, since the power recovery is not abnormal, step S2712 becomes "No", and the process proceeds to step S2713, where the initialization range of RWM 53 at the start of setting changes when the power recovery is normal is set. Furthermore, since the situation is such that medals can be bet, the setting change prohibition flag is off, so step S2714 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731.

Furthermore, since it is not reset, step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 95 becomes "No", and the process proceeds to step S2742 of the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL). Then, since it is not the time to start the setting confirmation, step S2755 of the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in FIG. 96 becomes "No", and the process of steps S2752 to S2758 is repeated until step S2756 becomes "Yes". That is, the setting change state is entered. After that, when the start switch 41 is operated, step S2756 becomes "Yes", and further, when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, step S2760 becomes "Yes", and the setting change state ends. Then, through the processes of steps S2743 to S2747 in FIG. 95, the process proceeds to step S248 of the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 97), and the state in which medals can be bet is returned to.

Also, as described above, in the main processing (M_MAIN) (Figure 97), the setting is set to be unchangeable from the start switch acceptance processing (step S279 in Figure 97) to the game end check processing (step S301 in Figure 97), including while the reels 31 are spinning, and during this period the setting unchangeable flag is turned on.
Then, when the setting change disable flag is on, the power is turned off, and then, even if the power is turned on under the circumstances where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the result in step S2714 of FIG. 92 is "No", so there is no transition to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731, and therefore no transition to the setting change state.

In contrast, when medals can be bet, the setting change prohibition flag is off, so when the power is turned off in this situation, and then the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, if the power is turned on, step S2714 in FIG. 92 becomes "Yes", and the process moves to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731, making it possible to move to the setting change state.

Also, as described above, when an operation is performed to transition to the setting change state when the power is restored normally after a power outage, the process proceeds to step S2713 in FIG. 92, and the addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area and the addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area are set as the initialization range of RWM53. Furthermore, the initialization range of the used area of RWM53 includes the number of credits data (_NB_CREDIT) at address "F010(H)" and the number of bets data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) at address "F043(H)".

Therefore, if the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, the bet number is any one of "1" to "3", and the credit number is any one of "1" to "50", and then the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, when the setting change state ends and it becomes possible to bet medals, the bet number will be "0" and the credit number will also be "0".

In addition, if the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, the bet number is any one of "1" to "3", and the credit number is "0", and then the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, when the setting change state ends and it becomes possible to bet medals, the bet number will be "0" and the credit number will also be "0".

Furthermore, if the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, the bet number is "0", and the credit number is any number between "1" and "50", and then the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, when the setting change state ends and it becomes possible to bet medals, the bet number will be "0" and the credit number will also be "0".

Furthermore, if the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, the number of bets is "0", and the number of credits is "0", and then the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, when the setting change state ends and it becomes possible to bet medals, the number of bets will become "0" and the number of credits will also become "0".

Also, suppose that the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on (operated). In this case, it becomes possible to execute the initialization process of a specified memory area of the RWM 53, and after the initialization process is executed, the game enters a situation where medals can be bet without transitioning to a setting change state.

Specifically, when the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 92 becomes "No", step S2710 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S2713, where the initialization range of RWM 53 at the start of setting changes when the power is restored normally after being turned off is set. Also, since it is a situation where medals can be bet, the setting change prohibition flag is off, so step S2714 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731.

Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 95, initialization process is performed for addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM 53, and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area.
Also, since it is reset, the result in step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in Fig. 95 becomes "Yes", and the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2743. Therefore, the setting change state is not entered. After that, through the processes in steps S2744 to S2747, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) in step S248 (Fig. 97) and the state returns to one in which medals can be bet.

In addition, if the power is turned off while the setting change disable flag is on, and then the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, step S2714 in FIG. 92 becomes "No", so the process does not proceed to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731, and therefore the initialization process of RWM 53 is not executed.

In contrast, when medals can be bet, the setting change unchangeable flag is off, and when the power is turned off under these circumstances, and then the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, when the power is turned on, step S2714 in FIG. 92 becomes "Yes", and the process moves to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731, and the initialization process of RWM 53 is executed.

In addition, when the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on, in step S2713 of FIG. 92, the addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area and the addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area are set as the initialization range of the RWM 53. This initialization range is the same as the initialization range that is set when an operation is performed to transition to the setting change state when the power is restored normally after a power outage.

In other words, on the condition that the power recovery is normal (not abnormal), the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed to the same extent when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 off, and when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on.

In this manner, in this embodiment, even if the setting key switch 152 is not operated, and therefore even if the setting key is not in possession of the device, the initialization process of the RWM 53 can be executed to the same extent as when an operation is performed to transition to the setting change state.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the initialization process of the RWM 53 can be executed without transitioning to the setting change state, but within the same scope as when transitioning to the setting change state.

Therefore, when the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, the number of bets is between "1" and "3", and the number of credits is between "1" and "50", and then the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed, and then, when it becomes possible to bet medals, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

In addition, when the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, the bet number is one of "1" to "3", and the credit number is "0", and then the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed, and then, when it becomes possible to bet medals, the bet number becomes "0" and the credit number also becomes "0".

Furthermore, when the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, the number of bets is "0", and the number of credits is any value between "1" and "50", and then the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed, and then, when it becomes possible to bet medals, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Furthermore, when the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, the number of bets is "0", and the number of credits is "0", and then the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed, and then, when it becomes possible to bet medals, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

In addition, suppose that the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. In other words, suppose that the power is turned on in a situation where both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are on. In this case, it becomes possible to transition to a setting change state, and then the start switch 41 is operated, the setting key switch 152 is turned off, and when the setting change state ends, the state returns to one where medals can be bet.

92, in the program start process (M_PRG_START), in step S2707 it is determined whether the setting key switch signal is on or not, and then in step S2710 it is determined whether the reset switch signal is on or not. That is, first it is determined whether the setting key switch signal is on or not, and then it is determined whether the reset switch signal is on or not.
Therefore, when the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on, the result in step S2707 is "Yes" and the process does not proceed to step S2710. In other words, when the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on, the setting key switch 152 is given priority. Then, when the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in Fig. 95, the result in step S2741 is "No" and the process proceeds to the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742, so that it is possible to transition to the setting change state.

Also, assume that when the state is changed to a setting change state, the setting value "M" (for example, "2") is initially displayed on the setting value display LED 73. At this time, the value of the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 is "M-1", and the value of the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at address "F001(H)" is "M".
Thereafter, suppose that the setting change switch 153 is operated and the setting value "N" (for example, "3") is displayed on the setting value display LED 73. At this time, the value of the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 remains "M-1", and the value of the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at "F001(H)" becomes "N".

Furthermore, assume that the power is turned off without the start switch 41 being operated while the setting value display LED 73 is displaying the setting value "N". In this case, since the start switch 41 has not been operated, the changed setting value data has not been saved (stored) in address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53, and the value of "F000(H)" remains "M-1". Furthermore, since the start switch 41 has not been operated and the setting key switch 152 has not been turned off, the power is turned off without ending the setting change state (remaining in the setting change state).

Then, suppose the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are both off. In this case, the power is simply turned on/off, and the data in the used area and outside the used area of RWM 53 is maintained without being initialized, so the state returns to the same as when the power failure occurred, and the setting change state is restored. Also, since "M-1" is stored in the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of RWM 53, and "N" is stored in the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at "F001(H)" of RWM 53, when the setting change state is restored, the setting value display LED 73 displays the setting value "N".

In contrast, suppose that when the setting change state is entered, the setting value display LED 73 first displays the setting value "M" (for example, "2"). Then, the setting change switch 153 is operated, causing the setting value display LED 73 to display the setting value "N" (for example, "3"). Furthermore, suppose that while the setting value display LED 73 displays the setting value "N," the power is turned off without operating the start switch 41. Up to this point, the situation is the same as above. Now suppose that the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on.

In this case, since step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Fig. 92 is "No" and step S2710 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step S2731, where the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of the setting change when the power is restored normally after a power outage is set. Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in Fig. 95, initialization process is performed for addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of the RWM 53 and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area. Therefore, the value of the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 remains "M-1".
Also, since it is reset, the result in step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 95 is "Yes", and the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2743. Therefore, the setting change state is not entered. After that, through the processes in steps S2744 to S2747, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) in step S248 (FIG. 97), and it becomes possible to bet medals. At this time, the value of the setting value data (_NB_RANK) in address "F000(H)" of RWM 53 remains "M-1", so the setting value becomes "M".

Also, assume that the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state, and then the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on.
In this case, in an unrecoverable error state, the interrupt process (I_INTR) is not executed, and therefore the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed either, so that when the power is turned off, the power-off process completed flag is not set and the RWM checksum data is not saved.

Also, since the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 in the OFF state, step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Fig. 92 results in "No", and the program proceeds to step S2708. Furthermore, since the power-off process completion flag has not been set and the RWM checksum data has not been saved, step S2708 results in "Yes", and the program proceeds to step S2801 for unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP).
That is, if the power is turned off in an irrecoverable error state, and then the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the irrecoverable error state will occur again.

Although the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on, the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 92 does not proceed to step S2710, so the power-off recovery process (M_POWER_ON) is not executed, and the initialization process (M_INI_SET) is not executed.
Also, while the processing by the second program is being executed, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not executed, and the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed either, so if the power is turned off while the processing by the second program is being executed, when the power is turned on thereafter, the power-off processing completion flag is not set, and the RWM checksum data is not saved, so that the result in step S2708 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801. In other words, an unrecoverable error state is entered.

In addition, if the power is turned off while the irrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is being executed by a program outside the area of use (second program), and then the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in Figure 92 becomes "No", step S2708 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S2801, so that the irrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) by the program in the area of use (first program) is executed.

Similarly, if the power is turned off while the program in the used area (first program) is executing an irrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP), and then the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 92 becomes "No", step S2708 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S2801, so that the program in the used area (first program) executes an irrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP).

Also, assume that the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state, and then the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 off.
In this case, the result in step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Fig. 92 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step S2711, and the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of the setting change at the time of the power interruption recovery abnormality is set. Also, since the power interruption recovery abnormality has occurred, the result in step S2712 is "Yes", and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731. Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 95, initialization process is performed for the entire range (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)") including the setting value data (_NB_RANK) in the used area of RWM 53, and the entire range outside the used area (addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)". As a result, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of RWM 53 becomes "0", and the setting value becomes "1".

Also, since it is not reset, the result in step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 95 becomes "No", the process proceeds to step S2742 of the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL), and the state changes to the setting change state.
In this setting change state, it is assumed that the power is turned off without operating the setting change switch (reset switch/RWM clear switch) 153. In this case, since an interrupt process (I_INTR) is executed in the setting change state, a power-down process (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed.
Thereafter, the power is turned on while the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. In this case, since the power recovery is not abnormal, step S2708 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Fig. 92 is "No". Also, since the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, step S2710 is "Yes". Then, the process proceeds to step S2713, where the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of setting changes when the power recovery is normal is set.

Also, since the setting change disable flag is off, step S2714 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 92 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. Furthermore, since it is reset, step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 95 becomes "Yes", and the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 is skipped. Therefore, this time, the setting change state is not entered. After that, through the processes of steps S2744 to S2747, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 97) in step S248, and it becomes possible to bet medals. At this time, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of RWM 53 is "0" as described above, so the setting value becomes "1".

In this embodiment, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed in step S2771 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 98. Furthermore, RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) is executed in step S2776 of the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in FIG. 99. Then, in the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) in FIG. 100, steps S2785 to S2794 are executed to calculate RWM checksum data (complement data), and the calculated RWM checksum data is stored in address "F2A0(H)" of RWM 53 in step S2795.

As described above, this RWM checksum data is a value that becomes "0" when added to the sum of the data at addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM53 and the data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" (excluding "F2A0(H)") outside the used area.

In this embodiment, even if a recoverable error occurs and a recoverable error state occurs (the error detection flag is turned on and the progress of the game is stopped), the interrupt process (I_INTR) can be executed as described above. Therefore, even if an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off (the power is turned off) in the recoverable error state, the power cutoff process (I_POWER_DOWN) can be executed.
In contrast, if an irrecoverable error occurs and an irrecoverable error state occurs (a state in which the irrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 94 or the irrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 102 is executed and game progress stops), the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited as described above. For this reason, if an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off (the power is turned off) during an irrecoverable error state, the power down processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed.

In this way, if the power is turned off during an irrecoverable error state, by not executing the power off processing (I_POWER_DOWN), when the power is turned on thereafter, in the program start processing (M_PRG_START) of FIG. 92, it is possible to determine in step S2708 that a power off recovery abnormality has occurred, and to proceed to the irrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801.
That is, when an unrecoverable error state occurs, simply turning the power on and off will not result in the unrecoverable error state occurring again.
When an unrecoverable error state occurs, the power supply must be turned off and an operation to transition to a setting change state (turning the power supply on with the setting key switch 152 turned on) must be performed before the machine can be returned to a state in which medals can be bet (a state in which game play can be progressed).

In addition, when an unrecoverable error state occurs, even if the power is turned off and then turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 92 determines in step S2708 that there is a power outage recovery abnormality and proceeds to unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801. Therefore, it does not proceed to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 97), and it is not possible to return to a state in which medals can be bet (a state in which game play can be progressed).

Furthermore, even if a recoverable error occurs and a recoverable error state is reached (the error detection flag is turned on and game progress is stopped), the interrupt process (I_INTR) can be executed; however, if an irrecoverable error occurs and a recoverable error state is reached (the irrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 94 or the irrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 102 is executed and game progress is stopped), the interrupt process (I_INTR) is prohibited.
Furthermore, LED display control (I_LED_OUT) that controls the lighting of digits 1 to 5 (credit number display LED 76, acquisition number display LED 78, setting value display LED 73), and ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) that controls the lighting of digits 6 to 9 (management information display LED 74) are executed in the interrupt process (I_INTR).

Because of this, in a recoverable error state, the interrupt process (I_INTR) can be executed, and therefore the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) can also be executed. Therefore, even in a recoverable error state, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) can display error information on the acquisition count display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4), and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) can sequentially display various ratios related to the information type and game results on the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9).

In contrast, in an unrecoverable error state, the interrupt process (I_INTR) is prohibited, and therefore the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) are not executed either.
Therefore, during an unrecoverable error state, error information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) of FIG. 94 or the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) of FIG.

Also, in step S1494 of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 94 or the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 102, the outputs of output ports 0 to 7 are turned off ("00000000 (B)").
As a result, during the unrecoverable error state, the output from output port 6 (output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) will remain at "00000000 (B)", so digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 will all remain off until the unrecoverable error state is released and the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is resumed.
Digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 all remain off, which is a characteristic of an irrecoverable error state, and this notifies the manager (hall attendant) that an irrecoverable error state has occurred.

Although the fifth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, during an unrecoverable error state, the outputs of output port 6 (output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) are turned off ("00000000(B)"), so that digits 6 to 9 of management information display LED 74 all remain off.
However, the display mode of digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 in an unrecoverable error state is not limited to this.

For example, during an unrecoverable error state, the management information display LED 74 may display "8" in each of digits 6 to 9. That is, the display on the management information display LED 74 may be "8888."
FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP), and corresponds to FIG.
In FIG. 109, steps that differ from FIG. 102 are underlined with their step numbers, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 102 are given the same step numbers.
Below, differences from FIG. 102 will be mainly explained.

In the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) shown in FIG. 109, after step S1505, the process proceeds to step S1506, where the main control board 50 outputs data for displaying "8" in digit 6 from output ports 6 and 7.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs “00000001(B)” (data in which only the digit 6 signal is “1”), and output port 7 outputs “01111111(B)” (data in which the segment 2A to 2G signals are “1”).

Next, proceeding to step S1507, the main control board 50 executes a wait process to prevent the LED from flickering. The length of the wait depends on the performance of the LED, but can be set to about 0.1 ms, for example. For example, a predetermined value (for example, "255") is stored in the B register, and this value is subtracted by the internal system clock. When the B register value becomes "0", it is determined that the wait time has elapsed and proceeds to the next step S1508.

In step S1508, the main control board 50 turns off ("00000000(B)") the output of the output ports 6 and 7. This process is for preventing image retention.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1509, where the main control board 50 executes a wait process to prevent the LEDs from flickering. This is a process to reliably turn off the LEDs after the outputs of the output ports 6 and 7 are turned off.

Proceeding to the next step S1510, the main control board 50 outputs data for displaying "8" in digit 7 from output ports 6 and 7.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs “00000010(B)” (data in which only the digit 7 signal is “1”), and output port 7 outputs “01111111(B)” (data in which the segment 2A to 2G signals are “1”).
Steps S1511 to S1513 are similar to steps S1507 to S1509.

Then, in step S1514, the main control board 50 outputs data for displaying "8" in digit 8 from output ports 6 and 7.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs “00000100(B)” (data in which only the digit 8 signal is “1”), and output port 7 outputs “01111111(B)” (data in which the segment 2A to 2G signals are “1”).
Steps S1515 to S1517 are similar to steps S1507 to S1509.

Then, in step S1518, the main control board 50 outputs data for displaying "8" in digit 9 from output ports 6 and 7.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs “00001000(B)” (data in which only the digit 9 signal is “1”), and output port 7 outputs “01111111(B)” (data in which the segment 2A to 2G signals are “1”).
Steps S1519 to S1521 are similar to steps S1507 to S1509. After the process of step S1521 is executed, the process returns to step S1497.

In this manner, during an unrecoverable error state, digits 6 through 9 of the management information display LED 74 may each display "8."
The display of digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 all becoming "8" is a characteristic of an irrecoverable error state, and this notifies the manager (hall attendant) that an irrecoverable error state has occurred.

The display on the management information display LED 74 may be "---" instead of "8888." In other words, only the segments G of the digits 6 to 9 may be lit.
Also, the display of the management information display LED 74 may be "...." In other words, only the segments P of the digits 6 to 9 may be lit.
Furthermore, the display of the management information display LED 74 may be "8.8.8.8." In other words, as shown in Figure 30(a) or (c), all segments of digits 6 to 9 (segments A to G and P) may be lit.

(2) In the above embodiment, during an unrecoverable error state, the outputs of output port 6 (output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) are turned off ("00000000(B)"), so that digits 6 to 9 of management information display LED 74 all remain off.
However, in step S1494 of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in Fig. 94 or the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in Fig. 102, the outputs of output ports 6 and 7 may be maintained rather than being turned off ("00000000(B)"). In this case, the display of digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 will be as follows:

As mentioned above, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 are dynamically lit with four interrupts as one cycle. Therefore, for example, when digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 display "7P.65", digit 9 "5", digit 8 "6", digit 7 "P.", and digit 6 "7" are sequentially lit. For example, assume that an unrecoverable error state occurs when digits 6 to 8 of the management information display LED 74 are turned off and digit 9 is lit and displayed as "5". In this case, the interrupt process (I_INTR) stops when signals (digit signals and segment signals) that turn off digits 6 to 8 and turn on digit 9 to display "5" are being output from output ports 6 and 7.

Specifically, when output port 6 outputs "00001000(B)" (digit 9 signal is "1" and the others are "0") and output port 7 outputs "01101101(B)" (segment 2G, 2F, 2D, 2C, and 2A signals are "1" and the others are "0"), the interrupt process (I_INTR) stops and thereafter the signals (data) output from output ports 6 and 7 are no longer rewritten.
As a result, until the unrecoverable error state is released and the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is resumed, the output of signals (digit signals and segment signals) from output ports 6 and 7 is maintained, so digits 6 to 8 remain unlit and digit 9 remains lit and displays "5."

Similarly, assume that an unrecoverable error state has occurred when digit 6 of the management information display LED 74 is lit to display "7" and digits 7 to 9 are off.
In this case, until the unrecoverable error state is released and the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is resumed, the signals (digit signal and segment signal) that cause digit 6 to light up and digits 7 to 9 to be turned off will continue to be output from output ports 6 and 7, so digit 6 will light up and digits 7 to 9 will remain turned off.

For example, suppose that unrecoverable error processing 2 is executed by the second program while digit 6 of management information display LED 74 is lit with "7" and digits 7 to 9 are off. Then, suppose that in unrecoverable error processing 2 by the second program, the output of output ports 6 and 7 is maintained without being turned off. In this case, as described above, the signals (digit signal and segment signal) that light digit 6 and turn digits 7 to 9 off continue to be output from output ports 6 and 7, so digit 6 remains lit with "7" and digits 7 to 9 remain off.

When the power is turned off in this state, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 are turned off. If the power is then turned on with the setting key switch 152 in the OFF state, step S2708 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 92 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S2801, where the first program executes the unrecoverable error process. In this case, the process does not proceed to the initialization process of step S2731, so the data in RWM 53 is maintained without being initialized. For this reason, data related to the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) in RWM 53 (for example, the ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) at address "F292(H)" to the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) at "F297(H)") is also maintained without being initialized.

Now, suppose that in the irrecoverable error processing by the first program, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is enabled and not prohibited. In this case, the lighting of the management information display LED 74 is controlled by the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) during the interrupt processing (I_INTR), so that digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 first display the ratio information immediately before the irrecoverable error processing 2 by the second program is executed, i.e., "7P.65" (instruction-included role ratio, ratio display number "1").

Also, assume that immediately before the unrecoverable error processing 2 is executed by the second program, "7P.65" is displayed in digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 for, for example, "2000 ms." In this case, when the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) is resumed in the unrecoverable error processing by the first program, "7P.65" is displayed in digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 for "4791.84 ms" - "2000 ms" = "2791.84 ms." After that, the display items from ratio display number "2" onwards are displayed sequentially on the management information display LED 74 by the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY).

In this way, when the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is resumed during the unrecoverable error processing by the first program, the display starts (resumes) from the continuation of the ratio information immediately before the unrecoverable error processing 2 by the second program is executed.
In contrast, if the interrupt process (I_INTR) is prohibited in the unrecoverable error processing by the first program, the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) during the interrupt process (I_INTR) is also not executed, and digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain off.

As described above, for the instructed role ratio, continuous role ratio (cumulative), role ratio (cumulative), and role etc. state ratio, when the total number of plays is less than "175,000", the identification segment is displayed flashing. For the continuous role ratio (6,000 times) and role ratio (6,000 times), when the total number of plays is less than "6,000", the identification segment is displayed flashing. For the instructed role ratio, role ratio (cumulative), and role ratio (6,000 times), when the displayed value is "70" or more, the ratio segment is displayed flashing. For the continuous role ratio (cumulative) and continuous role ratio (6,000 times), when the displayed value is "60" or more, the ratio segment is displayed flashing. For the role etc. state ratio, when the displayed value is "50" or more, the ratio segment is displayed flashing. When displayed flashing, the light is turned on and off repeatedly every 0.3 seconds.

For this reason, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 may all be turned off. For example, assume that an unrecoverable error state has occurred when digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 are all turned off, that is, when the outputs from output ports 6 and 7 are "00000000(B)" (off).
In this case, the output from output ports 6 and 7 will remain “00000000 (B)” (off) until the unrecoverable error state is released and the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is resumed, so digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 will all remain off.

The display mode of digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 as described above is specific to an irrecoverable error state, and this notifies the manager (hall attendant) that an irrecoverable error state has occurred.

(3) In the above embodiment, on the condition that the power recovery is normal (not abnormal), the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, and the power is turned on (when transitioning to the setting change state) and the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed to the same extent when the power is turned on.

However, without being limited to this, the initialization range of RWM 53 may be different when the power is turned on (when transitioning to a setting change state) with the setting key switch 152 on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 off, and when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on.
For example, when the power is turned on under a situation in which the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the initialization process of the RWM 53 may be executed within the same range as at the end of the favorable period.
Specifically, an initialization process is executed for a predetermined range of the usage area of RWM53 where data relating to advantageous zones is stored (for example, addresses "F061(H)" to "F068(H)" in Figure 84), and other ranges (for example, the credit number data (_NB_CREDIT) at address "F010(H)" in Figure 84 and the bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) at address "F043(H)" in Figure 84) can be maintained without initialization.
In any case, it is preferable to set the initialization range when the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on to be narrower than the initialization range when transitioning to the setting change state.

(4) In the above embodiment, in step S458 of the interrupt process (I_INTR) in Fig. 98, it is determined whether the set value is within the normal range, and if it is determined that the set value is not within the normal range, the process proceeds to unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in step S2811. However, this is not limited to the above.
For example, it may be determined whether the set value is within the normal range immediately after it is determined in the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 97) that the start switch 41 has been turned on (operated).

(5) In the above embodiment, when the power is turned off while in the setting change state, and then the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, the state transitions to a state in which medals can be bet, without transitioning to the setting change state.
However, without being limited to this, for example, when the power is turned off while in the setting change state, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on, and then the power is turned on, an unrecoverable error state may occur.

Specifically, for example, a setting change state flag is set, and when a transition is made to a setting change state, the setting change state flag is set in a specified memory area of the RWM 53, and when the termination condition for the setting change state is met, the setting change state flag is cleared.
When the power is turned off in the setting change state and then turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, it is determined in step S2714 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Fig. 92 whether the setting change state flag is on. If it is determined that the setting change state flag is on, the process proceeds to unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801, where an unrecoverable error state is entered.
This makes it possible to prevent a set value from being set even though an operation for confirming the set value (for example, turning on the start switch 41) has not been performed.

(6) In the above embodiment, any one of values "0(D)" to "5(D)" is stored as the setting value data (_NB_RANK) in the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53. In other words, the setting value data is managed as "0(D)" to "5(D)."
However, without being limited thereto, any value from "1(D)" to "6(D)" may be stored as the setting value data (_NB_RANK) in the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53. In other words, the setting value data may be managed as "1(D) to "6(D)."

When transitioning to a setting change state, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of RWM 53 is cleared (to "0"), and when an operation to confirm the setting value is performed (for example, turning on start switch 41), any one of values "1(D)" to "6(D)" may be stored as the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of RWM 53.
In this case, if the power is turned off while the setting has been changed, and then the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, it may be determined in step S458 of FIG. 98 that the setting value is not within the normal range (a setting value error has occurred), and the process may proceed to unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in step S2811, causing an unrecoverable error state.

(7) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 89, digit signals for digits 1 to 5 (digit 1 to 5 signals) are output from output port 3, segment signals for digits 1 to 5 (segment 1A to 1P signals) are output from output port 4, digit signals for digits 6 to 9 (digit 6 to 9 signals) are output from output port 6, and segment signals for digits 6 to 9 (segment 2A to 2P signals) are output from output port 7.
When digits 1 to 5 were to be lit, a digit signal was output from output port 3, and a segment 1 signal was output from output port 4. When digits 6 to 9 were to be lit, a digit signal was output from output port 6, and a segment 2 signal was output from output port 7. In other words, different output ports were used for digits 1 to 5, whose lighting is controlled by a program in the usage area (first program), and digits 6 to 9, whose lighting is controlled by a program outside the usage area (second program).

However, this is not limited to the above, and for example, the output port may be shared between digits 1 to 5, whose lighting is controlled by a program in the usage area (first program), and digits 6 to 9, whose lighting is controlled by a program outside the usage area (second program).
FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a modified example of the output port in the fifth embodiment.
110, segment signals for digits 1 to 9 (segment A to P signals) may be output from output port 3. Also, digit signals for digits 1 to 5 (digit 1 to 5 signals) can be output from output port 2, and digit signals for digits 6 to 9 (digit 6 to 9 signals) can be output from output port 4.
In this case, during an unrecoverable error state, the output of output port 4 (output port for signals of digits 6 to 9) can be turned off ("00000000 (B)"), thereby keeping all of digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 off.

(8) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 91, an LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) for outputting digit 1 signals to digit 5 signals is provided in the usage area of RWM53, and an LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) for outputting digit 6 signals to digit 9 signals is provided outside the usage area of RWM53. In other words, an LED display counter for lighting digits 1 to 5 and an LED display counter for lighting digits 6 to 9 are provided separately and independently. However, this is not limited to the above.

FIG. 111 is a diagram showing a modified example of the LED display counter in the fifth embodiment.
111, an LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) with 5 interrupts per cycle may be provided in the usage area of RWM 53, and based on the value of this LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1), digit 1 signals to digit 5 signals may be output, as well as digit 6 signals to digit 9 signals. In other words, the LED display counter for lighting digits 1 to 5 and the LED display counter for lighting digits 6 to 9 may be combined into one.

In this case, in step S1471 of the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in FIG. 107, the value of LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is obtained and stored in the D register.
In the next step S1472, it is determined whether or not a ratio display request has been made. Specifically, an AND operation is performed on the value of the LED display counter 1 stored in the D register and "11110000 (B)." If the AND operation result is "0," it is determined that a ratio display request has been made, and the process proceeds to step S1475. If the AND operation result is not "0," it is determined that a ratio display request has not been made, and the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

Here, if the value of LED display counter 1 is "00001000 (B)", "00000100 (B)", "00000010 (B)", or "00000001 (B)", the result of the AND operation will be "0", so it is determined that a ratio display request has been made and the flow proceeds to step S1475.
On the other hand, when the value of LED display counter 1 is "00010000(B)", the AND operation result is not "0", so it is determined that there is no ratio display request, and the process according to this flowchart is terminated. In this case, the output of output ports 6 and 7 is maintained, so the display mode of digits 6 to 9 on the management information display LED 74 is the same as the display mode at the time of the previous interrupt process. For example, if digit 6 was lit to display "7" at the time of the previous interrupt process, digit 6 will also be lit to display "7" at the time of the current interrupt process.

In addition, if it is determined in step S1472 that there is no request for ratio display, the output of output port 6 (output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) may be turned off ("00000000(B)"), and digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 may all be turned off.

(9) For example, provided that the power recovery is normal (not abnormal), the initialization range of RWM 53 may be made different when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 off, and when the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on.
Specifically, when the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, for example, addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area are set as the initialization range of the RWM 53. In this case, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) in the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 and addresses "F210(H)" to "F291(H)" outside the used area are maintained without being initialized (cleared).

In contrast, when the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are on, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is set to, for example, the entire range of the used area (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)"), including the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of address "F000(H)", and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area. In this case, the addresses "F210(H)" to "F291(H)" outside the used area are maintained without being initialized (cleared), but the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of address "F000(H)" is initialized (cleared). In this case, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) becomes "0", so the setting value becomes "1". This allows the setting value to be changed to "1" simply by transitioning to the setting change state.

In addition, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 off, or when the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on, it is possible to transition to the setting change state.

(10) In the above embodiment, the addresses “F001(H)” to “F1FF(H)” of the used area of RWM 53 and the addresses “F292(H)” to “F3FF(H)” outside the used area were set as the initialization range of RWM 53 for normal power recovery after power failure.
However, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is not limited to the above-mentioned range, and can be set appropriately according to the specifications of the slot machine 10.

For example, the initialization range of the RWM 53 can be varied according to the contents of the action status flag (_FL_ACTION) at address "F030(H)" of the RWM 53 in FIG.
Specifically, for example, when the D2 bit of the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) of "F030 (H)" is "1" and 1BB is in operation, the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) of address "F030 (H)" can be excluded from the initialization range of RWM53.
In contrast, when the D2 bit of the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) of "F030 (H)" is "0" and 1BB is not in operation, the initialization range of RWM53 can include the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) of address "F030 (H)".

(11) In the above embodiment, interrupt processing is prohibited in step S1490 of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in Fig. 94. However, this is not limiting, and for example, interrupt processing does not have to be prohibited in the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP).
Specifically, when the result is "Yes" in step S2708 or S2715 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 92 and the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801, interrupt processing does not need to be prohibited.

Furthermore, even during execution of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP), the interrupt processing (I_INTR) of FIG. 98 may be executable, and the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) of step S2821 and the preparation for ratio display (S_DSP_READY) of step S2221 may be executable.
This makes it possible to control the lighting of digits 1 to 5 (credit number display LED 76, acquired number display LED 78, setting value display LED 73) and digits 6 to 9 (management information display LED 74) even while an unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) is being executed.

(12) In the above embodiment, when an operation to transition to the setting change state (turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 turned on) is performed and it is determined that the power recovery is normal, the address "F292 (H)" (ratio display number) of the RWM 53 is initialized. For this reason, for example, when the power is turned off while the control information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) displays the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), an operation to transition to the setting change state is performed, and when it is determined that the power recovery is normal, the control information display LED 74 starts displaying the role ratio data with instructions (ratio display number "1"), which is the first display item of various ratio information.

However, without being limited to this, for example, when an operation is performed to transition to a setting change state (turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 turned on) and it is determined that the power recovery is normal, the management information display LED 74 may first display specific information different from the ratio information, such as "8888" or "8.8.8.8.", and then start displaying the indicated game device ratio data (ratio display number "1"), which is the first display item of various ratio information.
This makes it possible to check whether all segments of digits 6 to 9 are lit, making it possible to check whether any segment is faulty or whether any of the segment signal lines are broken.
Similarly, when an operation is performed to transition to a setting change state and a power outage recovery abnormality is determined, specific information other than ratio information such as "8888" or "8.8.8.8." may first be displayed on the management information display LED 74, and then the display may begin with the command-included reel ratio data (ratio display number "1"), which is the first display item of various ratio information.

(13) For example, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 also turned off, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on and the reset switch 153 turned off, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch 153 turned on, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on and the reset switch 153 turned on, or when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on and the reset switch 153 also turned on, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) can first display specific information that is different from the ratio information, such as "8888" or "8.8.8.8.".

Then, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) display the on/off state of the various switches when the power is turned on, and information according to whether the power recovery is judged to be normal or abnormal. This makes it possible to check whether all segments of digits 6 to 9 are lit when the power is turned on, making it possible to check whether any segments are faulty or whether any of the segment signal lines are broken.

When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 on and the reset switch 153 off, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 off and the reset switch 153 on, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 on and the reset switch 153 on, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 on and the reset switch 153 on, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) display specific information different from the ratio information such as "8888" or "8.8.8.8.", but when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 off, the management information display LED 74 does not have to display the specific information.

(14) In the above embodiment, an operation to transition to the setting change state (turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 turned on) is performed, and when it is determined that the power recovery is normal, data related to the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) in the RWM 53 (for example, the ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) of address "F292(H)" to the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) of "F297(H)" etc.) is initialized.
However, this is not limited to the above, and when an operation is performed to transition to a setting change state and it is determined that the power recovery is normal, data related to the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) in the RWM 53 (for example, the ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) at address "F292(H)" to the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) at "F297(H)" etc.) may be maintained without being initialized.

For example, suppose that the power is turned off when the control information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) displays the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), and then an operation is performed to transition to the setting change state, and it is determined that the power recovery is normal. In this case, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is started and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is resumed, the control information display LED 74 first displays the ratio information immediately before the power was turned off, i.e., the role ratio (cumulative) data.

Also, assume that immediately before the power is turned off, the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5") is displayed for, for example, "1000 ms" on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor). In this case, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is started and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is resumed, the role ratio (cumulative) data is displayed on the management information display LED 74 for "4791.84 ms" - "1000 ms" = "3791.84 ms". After that, the display items from the ratio display number "6" onwards are displayed sequentially on the management information display LED 74 by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY).
In this way, when an operation is performed to transition to the setting change state, the power recovery is determined to be normal, and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is resumed, the display will begin (resume) from the continuation of the ratio information from just before the power was turned off.

(15) In the above embodiment, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on and it is determined that the power recovery is normal, data related to the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) in the RWM 53 (for example, the ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) of address "F292(H)" to the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) of "F297(H)" etc.) is initialized.
However, without being limited to this, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on and it is determined that the power recovery from power outage is normal, data related to the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) in the RWM 53 (for example, the ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) of address "F292 (H)" to the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) of "F297 (H)" etc.) may be maintained without being initialized.

For example, suppose that the power is turned off when the consecutive role ratio (6000 plays) data (ratio display number "2") is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor), and then the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and it is determined that the power recovery from power interruption is normal. In this case, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is started and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is resumed, the management information display LED 74 first displays the ratio information immediately before the power was turned off, i.e., the consecutive role ratio (6000 plays) data.

Also, assume that immediately before the power is turned off, the continuous role ratio (6000 games) data (ratio display number "2") is displayed for, for example, "3000 ms" on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor). In this case, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is started and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is resumed, the continuous role ratio (6000 games) data is displayed on the management information display LED 74 for "4791.84 ms" - "3000 ms" = "1791.84 ms". After that, the display items from the ratio display number "3" onwards are displayed sequentially on the management information display LED 74 by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY).
In this way, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, the power recovery is determined to be normal, and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is resumed, the display will start (resume) from the continuation of the ratio information from just before the power was turned off.

(16) In the above embodiment, the setting is set to be unchangeable (during play) from the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 97) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 97), including while the reel 31 is spinning, and during this period the setting unchangeable flag is turned on.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a period during which the settings cannot be changed may not be provided, and therefore the settings may be allowed to be changed at all times without providing a setting change prohibition flag.

(17) In the above embodiment, a determination was made as to whether or not a power outage had occurred in step S2770 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 98. If it was determined that a power outage had occurred, the process proceeded to power outage processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S2771. If it was determined that a power outage had not occurred, the process skipped power outage processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S2771 and proceeded to step S454.
However, this is not limiting, and for example, instead of executing the power off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) of FIG. 98, when a power off is detected, an interrupt processing other than the interrupt processing (I_INTR) of FIG. 98 may be executed, and the power off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) may be executed during this other interrupt processing.
In this case, when a power outage is detected during execution of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 98, another interrupt processing is not started during execution of the interrupt processing (I_INTR), but is started after the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is completed, and power down processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed during this other interrupt processing.

(18) In the above embodiment, the slot machine 10 is given as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can be applied to Parrot, which uses gaming balls as a gaming medium, an enclosed gaming machine (medalless gaming machine) that uses electronic information (electronic medals) instead of physical (tangible) medals, and a casino machine.
(19) The first to fifth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to fifth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but may be implemented in appropriate combinations.

Sixth Embodiment
Fig. 112 is a diagram showing the built-in memory of the main CPU 55 in the sixth embodiment. In the figure, (A) is a diagram showing an overview of the built-in memory, and (B) is a diagram showing the built-in register area of the storage area in the built-in memory. Fig. 112 shows only the part of the built-in memory that is related to this embodiment, and does not show the entire built-in memory.
Note that an internal memory is also shown in Fig. 83 (Fifth embodiment). Here, in the sixth embodiment, the "inside the use area" in Fig. 83 is referred to as "first" and the "outside the use area" is referred to as "second." Also, the "control area" in Fig. 83 is referred to as "program area." Thus, in the sixth embodiment, the names are different from those in the fifth embodiment, but the actual functions are not different.

Within the areas of ROM 54, the first program area and the first data area correspond to the area in use (area for storing data related to the progress of the game), and the second program area and the second data area correspond to the area outside the area in use (area for storing data unrelated to the progress of the game, in particular, an area for storing data related to the display of the winning ratio monitor).

166, the ROM 54 has an address range of "0000h" to "2FFFh" and a storage area of "12K" bytes. Within this storage area, the first program area is set to "4.5K" bytes, and the first data area is set to "3.0K" bytes.
Furthermore, in the RWM 53, the first working area and the first stack area are storage areas used (updated, referenced) during the execution of a first program (a program related to the progress of a game) stored in the first program area. Similarly, the second working area and the second stack area are storage areas used (updated, referenced) during the execution of a second program (a program not related to the progress of a game, for example, a program related to the display of a winning ratio monitor) stored in the second program area.
Furthermore, the first program stored in the first program area cannot update the data in the second working area and the second stack area, but can refer to the data in the second working area and the second stack area.
Similarly, the second program stored in the second program area cannot update the data in the first working area and the first stack area, but can reference the data in the first working area and the first stack area.

In the example of Fig. 83 (fifth embodiment), one built-in register area is provided, and the built-in register area is provided with a general-purpose register.
In contrast, in the sixth embodiment, the built-in register region (synonymous with the built-in register area) includes a register bank 0 and a register bank 1. Each register bank includes a main register (front register) and a sub-register (back register). The main register includes a general-purpose register.
In the following description, the sub-registers will be omitted, and the term "register" refers to the main register.

The registers in register bank 0 are registers that are used when a program stored in the first program area is being executed. Similarly, the registers in register bank 1 are registers that are used when a program stored in the second program area is being executed. For example, the A register, F register, etc. are each provided in both register bank 0 and register bank 1. In other words, the A register in register bank 0 and the A register in register bank 1 are different registers.

The A register is an accumulator.
The F register is a flag register, the structure of which will be described later.
The B, C, D, E, H, and L registers are general purpose registers.
The IX and IY registers are index registers, and are used, for example, when specifying an address.
The SP register is a stack pointer register that specifies the address to which data is saved when data is saved to the stack area, and specifies the address to which data is restored when data is restored from the stack area.
Specifically, the SP register of register bank 0 specifies an address in the first stack area (the range of "F1D0h" to "F1FFh"). Similarly, the SP register of register bank 1 specifies an address in the second stack area (the range of "F3E8h" to "F3FFh").

In addition to register banks 0 and 1, there are I, R, PC, and IFF registers.
The I register is an interrupt register and is used when executing an interrupt process.
The R register is a refresh register and is used to refresh the RWM 53 .
The PC register is a program counter, which holds the currently executing address in memory.

The IFF register is an interrupt enable register. The IFF register is composed of an IFF1 register that determines whether a maskable interrupt (INT) is enabled or disabled, and an IFF2 register that is used to restore IFF1 after processing a non-maskable interrupt (NMI). The IFF2 register is used not only to return from non-maskable interrupt processing, but also to return by a RETEX instruction (described later) after executing a CALLEX instruction (described later).
Furthermore, when a non-markable interrupt is accepted or when the CALEX instruction is executed, the IFF1 register is cleared (set to a value ("0") that prohibits interrupt processing), maskable interrupts are prohibited, and the IFF2 register holds the state at that time (whether the interrupts were in the interrupt disabled state or interrupt enabled state when the non-markable interrupt was accepted or when the CALEX instruction was executed). Furthermore, by executing the RET instruction or the RETEX instruction, the value of the IFF2 register is moved to the IFF1 register, and the state of accepting maskable interrupts is restored to the previous state.

113 is a diagram showing the detailed configuration of the F register. The F register is made up of one byte (8 bits, indicated by "D0" to "D7" in the diagram).
The structure of the F register in the sixth embodiment is as follows.
(1) D0 bit: Carry Flag (C)
The carry flag is a flag that becomes "1" if a carry or borrow occurs as a result of an operation, and becomes "0" if no carry or borrow occurs.
(2) D1 bit: Subtraction flag (N)
The subtraction flag is a flag that is set to "1" if the immediately preceding instruction is a subtraction instruction, and is set to "0" if the immediately preceding instruction is not a subtraction instruction.

(3) D2 bit: Parity/Overflow Flag (P/V)
The parity/overflow flag is a flag that becomes "1" if the number of "1" bits (parity) in the calculation result is even, and becomes "0" if it is odd. Also, this flag becomes "1" if an overflow occurs as a result of the calculation, and becomes "0" if no overflow occurs.
(4) D3 bit: Register Bank Monitor (RB)
The register bank monitor is a flag that is set to "0" when register bank 0 is in use and to "1" when register bank 1 is in use. Therefore, by referring to the D3 bit of the F register, it is possible to determine whether register bank 0 or 1 is in use.

(5) D4 bit: Half carry flag (H)
The half carry flag is a flag that becomes "1" when there is a carry from the lower 4 bits to the upper 4 bits during an arithmetic operation, and becomes "0" when there is no carry.
(6) D5 bit: Second Zero Flag (TZ)
The second zero flag is a flag that becomes "1" when the operation result is "0" and becomes "0" if the operation result is not "0".
(7) D6 bit: Zero Flag (Z)
As described above, the zero flag is a flag that becomes "1" when the operation result is "0" and becomes "0" if the operation result is not "0".
(8) D7 bit: Sign Flag (S)
The sign flag is a flag that becomes "0" if the operation result is positive, and becomes "1" if the operation result is negative.

Fig. 114 is a diagram showing the stack area in the sixth embodiment. As shown in Fig. 112, the RWM 53 includes a first stack area ("F1D0h" to "F1FFh") for the first program and a second stack area ("F3E8h" to "F3FFh") for the second program.
As described above, when storing (also called piling, saving, stacking, etc.) data in the first stack area, the data is piled in ascending order (reverse order) from the last address. For example, when first piling two bytes of data in the first stack area, the data is stored at "F1FFh" and "F1FEh".
The same applies to the second stack area, with data being stacked in order starting from the final address (F3FFh).

The SP register stores a value indicating which address in the stack area data is to be stored at. As shown in FIG. 112, SP registers are provided in both register banks 0 and 1, and the SP register in register bank 0 stores which address in the first stack area data is to be stored at. Similarly, the SP register in register bank 1 stores which address in the second stack area data is to be stored at.

As shown in FIG. 114, when power is turned on, the SP register of register bank 0 stores the initial value "F200h" in accordance with the instruction "LD SP, F200h."
Next, when some program (such as a CALL instruction (also referred to as a "first call instruction"), a CALLEX instruction (also referred to as a "second call instruction"), or a PUSH instruction (also referred to as a "register save instruction")) is executed and data is loaded into the two-byte area of "F1FFh" and "F1FEh" in the first stack area, the SP register value of register bank 0 is updated to "F1FEh". Note that the example in FIG. 114 shows an example in which "CALL mn" is executed.
Next, when the data stored in "F1FFh" and "F1FEh" in the first stack area is to be called, some program (RET instruction (also called "first return instruction"), RETEX instruction (also called "second return instruction"), POP instruction (also called "register restore instruction"), etc.) is executed. Then, the data stored in the 2-byte memory area of "F1FEh" and "F1FFh" is called by this instruction. For example, the RET instruction (example of FIG. 114) returns to the instruction after CALL (returns to the program of the program counter saved in the stack area (returns to the program of the return address)), and the SP register value of register bank 0 is updated from "F1FEh" to "F200h".

The same applies to the second stack area.
When power is turned on, the SP register of register bank 1 stores the initial value "F400h" in response to the command "LD SP, F400h."
Next, when some program (CALL instruction, PUSH instruction, etc.) is executed and data is pushed to "F3FFh" in the second stack area, the SP register value of register bank 1 is updated to "F1FFh".
Next, when calling the data stored in "F3FFh" of the second stack area, some program (RET instruction, RETEX instruction, POP instruction, etc.) is executed. Then, the data stored in the 1-byte storage area of "F3FFh" is called by the instruction, and the instruction after CALL is returned to by the RET instruction or RETEX instruction, and the SP register value of register bank 1 is updated from "F3FFh" to "F400h".

Although details of the instructions will be described later, in this embodiment, the CALLEX instruction is an instruction that is included in the first program (when register bank 0) but is not included in the second program (when register bank 1).
Moreover, the RETEX instruction is an instruction that is not included in the first program (when the register bank is 0) but is included in the second program (when the register bank is 1).

Fig. 115 is a diagram showing main commands in the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, there are several thousand types of commands, but Fig. 115 shows three representative types.
In the figure, (A) indicates an LDF instruction.
In FIG. 115, first, the opcode and operands in the command statement will be described.
As shown in (A) in the figure, when the instruction is "LDF HL, mn", the first half "LDF" may be called the opcode (function) and the latter half "HL, mn" may be called the operand (argument). The LDF instruction is one aspect of the LD (load) instruction (a special form. Why it is special will be explained later). Furthermore, "HL" indicates the HL register, and "mn" indicates the address. The instruction "LDF HL, mn" is an instruction that instructs storing the value of address "mn" in the HL register.
As described below, the LDF instruction is not limited to an instruction to store an address value in a specified register, but may also be an instruction to store a specified value (however, the "specified value" is limited to a specified range (described below)) in a specified register.

Specifically, for example, when "LDF HL, 1200h" is executed,
1200h = 0001/0010/0000/0000 ("/" is inserted every 4 bits. The same applies below.)
Therefore,
H register value = 0001/0010
L register value = 0000/0000
It becomes.

Furthermore, the LDF instruction is limited to instructions that store a value in the range of "1200h" to "1DFF" in a register (the HL register in this example). The opcode for other load instructions is "LD" instead of "LDF".
That is,
LDF HL, mn (mn = 1200h to 1DFFh)
LD HL, mn (mn ≠ 1200h to 1DFFh)
It is.

Fig. 116 is a diagram showing the modes of the LDF command and the LD command. As shown in Fig. 112, the range of the first data area is from address "1200h" to "1DF3h". Therefore, in the case of a load command that specifies an address in the first data area, it can all be executed with the LDF command.
In contrast, the second data area is in the address range of "2600h" to "2FBEh." Therefore, in the case of a load instruction that specifies an address in the second data area, the opcode "LDF" cannot be used, and instead the opcode "LD" is used.
In FIG. 116, (A) shows an LDF command that specifies the address range from "1200h" to "1DF3h" (first data area), and (B) shows an LD command that specifies the address range from "2600h" to "2FBEh" (second data area).

Furthermore, the load instruction is not limited to an instruction for storing a specific address value in a specific register, but may also be used as an instruction for storing, for example, any register value in any other register.
116C shows "LDF HL, xy," which is an instruction to store a predetermined value "xy" (within the range of "1200h" to "1DFFh") in the HL register using the LDF instruction. In this way, when the value of "xy" is within the range of "1200h" to "1DFFh," the LDF instruction can also be used as an instruction to store the value in a predetermined register.
For example, in the case of a command to store a timer value "5000(D)" (1388h) in the HL register, the command would be "LDF HL, 1388h".
116(D) shows "LD A, (HL)", an instruction to store a specified register value (HL register value in this example) in another specified register (A register in this example) using the LD instruction. In an instruction to copy a specified register value to another specified register, if the specified register value or the specified value to be copied is outside the range of "1200h" to "1DFFh", the LD instruction (rather than the LDF instruction) is used.

Also, all instructions such as "LDF HL,mn" and "LD HL,mn" are actually encoded and stored in the program area of ROM 54.
In the sixth embodiment, the code size of "LDF HL,mn" is 2 bytes, and the code size of "LD HL,mn" is 3 bytes.
First, in the case of the instruction "LDF HL, mn", the range of "mn" is "1200h" to "1DFFh". If "1200h" and "1DFFh" (both in hexadecimal) are expressed in decimal and binary, respectively, they become
1200h = 4608 (D) = 0001/0010/0000/0000 (B)
1DFFh = 7679 (D) = 0001/1101/1111/1111 (B)
It becomes.

When "1200h" is taken as the reference value "0", "1DFFh" becomes "3070(D)" or "1011/1111/1110(B)" (12 bits).
Therefore, in the opcode for specifying the address value in the LDF instruction, "1200h" is set to a value of "0." This means that 12 bits are sufficient to specify the address value "mn"(mn="1200h" to "1DFFh").

Also assume that the total number of instructions is, for example, "3000," and that a unique value is assigned to each instruction.
in this case,
3000(D) = 1011/1011/1000(B) (12 bits)
Therefore, they can be assigned to "0000/0000/0000(B)" to "1011/1011/1000(B)".
In the case of particularly important instructions, specifically, instructions that are used frequently, for example, a small value is assigned. In this embodiment, the code value of "LDF HL" is assigned to "1101" (4 bits).
Therefore, since "LDF HL" is 4 bits and "mn" is 12 bits, the total is 16 bits, or 2 bytes. Therefore, the code size of "LDF HL, mn (mn=1200h to 1DFFh)" is 2 bytes.

On the other hand, if the range of "mn" in the load command is outside the range of "1200h" to "1DFFh", particularly if the range of the second data area is specified, from "2600h" to "2FBEh", the following occurs:
Within the range of the second data area, the largest address value is "2FBEh", so
"2FBEh" - "1200h"
= 1 DBEh
= 1/1101/1011/1110 (B)
This results in 13 bits.
That is, when "1200h" is taken as the reference value "0" as described above, "2FBEh" can be expressed in 13 bits.
Therefore, when "LD HL" is coded, it is coded as 4 bits like the above "LDF HL", and "LD HL, mn" (mn ≠ 1200h to 1DFFh) is expressed as "4 + 13 = 17 bits (3 bytes)".

Also, in the case of other load instructions such as "LD A, (HL)" mentioned above, the code size is set to 3 bytes in the same manner as above.
If the code size of "LD HL, mn" is 3 bytes, then "LD HL" does not necessarily have to be 4 bits. If it is 11 bits or less, since "mn" (mn ≠ 1200h to 1DFFh) is 13 bits, it is possible to fit these together within 24 bits (3 bytes).

From the above, in the sixth embodiment, the code size of the load instruction is
LDF HL, mn (mn = 1200h to 1DFFh): 2 bytes (16 bits)
LD HL, mn (mn ≠ 1200h to 1DFFh): 3 bytes (17 bits)
LD A, (HL) ("A" or "HL" is optional): 3 bytes.
As a result, the code size of "LDF HL, mn (mn=1200h to 1DFFh)" which specifies an address in the first data area and stores it in the HL register is one byte less than the code size of other load instructions, making it possible to conserve storage capacity in the first program area.

In particular, since the first program area stores programs related to the progress of the game, the capacity of the first program area is more likely to increase than programs stored in the second program area, in other words, programs not related to the progress of the game (programs related to the winning ratio monitor). For example, lottery processing related to the game, processing for shifting the game state, processing for driving the reels, and processing for granting game value (game media) according to the game result (the combination of symbols stopped and displayed) are executed by the first program. Therefore, by reducing the code size of the load command that calls addresses "1200h" to "1DFFh" among the load commands stored in the first program area, it becomes possible to store more programs in the first program area.
On the other hand, among the programs stored in the second program area, the opcodes of the load instructions that specify addresses in the second data area are all unified as "LD". This makes it easier to check the validity of the program source in the programs stored in the second program area. In other words, it becomes possible to design programs that prioritize readability over reducing the program capacity (code size).

Specifically, the above-mentioned LDF instruction and LD instruction are used, for example, as follows.
(1) Example 1
In the 1 line display judgment (M_LINE_JUDGE), a process is executed to set the payout number table. This process stores the top address "1400h" of the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) in the HL register. Since the address specified here is "1400h", this can be executed with the LDF command. Therefore, this command is
LDF HL, 1400h
It becomes.

(2) Example 2
In preparation for starting reel rotation, the symbol control data table set executes a process to store the top address "1200h" of the symbol control data table (TBL_PIC_DAT) in the HL register. Since the address specified here is "1200h", it can be executed with the LDF command. Therefore, this command is
LDF HL, 1200h
It becomes.

(3) Example 3
In the reel control data address set (C_RLDAT_SET), the top RWM address request set has, as one of its processes, a process for storing the C register value in the A register. This process is the same as the process shown in FIG. 116(C), so
L.D. A.C.
It becomes.
(4) Example 4
In the reel control data address set (C_RLDAT_SET), the designated address data set has, as one of its processes, a process for storing the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register. This process is the same as the process shown in FIG. 116(C), so
L.D. A, (HL)
It becomes.

The data area of ROM 54 referenced by the second program is outside the range of "1200h" to "1DFFh." Therefore, when specifying the address of the data area of ROM 54 referenced by the second program, "LD HL, mn" (mn ≠ 1200h to 1DFF) is used.
An example of this is shown below.
(5) Example 5
In the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) shown in Fig. 107, in step S2531, the blink bit check count table address is set, and a process is executed to store a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the top address "2510h" of the blink bit check count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK; Fig. 108) in the HL register. The command in this case is:
LD HL, 250Fh
It becomes.

(6) Example 6
In the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) shown in Fig. 107, the identification segment blink bit check count set in step S2532 includes a process of storing the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value in the B register. The command in this case is:
L.D. B. (HL)
It becomes.
(7) Example 7
In the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) shown in Fig. 107, the identification segment offset acquisition in step S1477 includes a process of storing the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register. The command in this case is:
L.D. A, (HL)
It becomes.

In this way, there are multiple LD instructions (an instruction with LD as the opcode, also referred to as the "first load instruction") as instructions constituting the first program, and there are multiple LDF instructions (an instruction with LDF as the opcode, also referred to as the "second load instruction" or "special load instruction") as instructions constituting the first program, but there are no LDF instructions (an instruction with LDF as the opcode, also referred to as the "second load instruction" or "special load instruction") as instructions constituting the second program.
The LD instruction can also be used to store 2-byte data in the HL register. However, storing 2-byte data in the HL register using the LDF instruction can reduce the code size. However, the LDF instruction has a limit on the range of the 2-byte data.

The above-mentioned specific examples 1 to 7 of the LDF command and LD command are examples of various processes in a slot machine (for example, a reel-type gaming machine under the Entertainment and Amusement Act), but none of the commands are applicable only to specific examples 1 to 7, and can be applied without problem to various general-purpose processes in pachinko gaming machines.
Pachinko gaming machines, like slot machines, are equipped with a first program area and a second program area, with the first program area storing programs related to the progress of the game and the second program area storing programs unrelated to the progress of the game (for example, a program relating to a base monitor that displays the base (which normally refers to a value calculated by "number of prize balls paid out / total number of balls dispensed x 100"; the same applies below). For this reason, the first program area tends to be larger in capacity than the second program area. Therefore, a capacity compression effect can be expected by adopting the LDF command in the program stored in the first program area.

In addition, the programs stored in the first program area in a pachinko game machine include, for example, a process related to a winning/losing lottery, a process related to control of stopping the fluctuation of special symbols, a process related to displaying special symbols or normal symbols, a process related to displaying game information (game status, error status, base, etc.), a process related to jackpot control, a process related to movement control of various movable objects (such as a big prize opening and an electric device that activates an opening extension function), a process related to payout control, etc. The LDF command can be used for these programs.
In particular, the display control of the base monitor of a pachinko game machine and the display control of the hand ratio monitor of a slot machine are similar in that they ultimately display game information as data, although there are differences in the process of calculating the display contents. Therefore, the above specific examples 5 to 7 can also be applied to the display control of the base monitor in a pachinko game machine.
It is of course possible to use the LDF command in other processes controlled by the main CPU in both slot machines and pachinko games, without being limited to the above.

Let us return to the explanation given in FIG.
115B shows the CALLEX instruction, which is one of the call instructions.
When the "CALLEX mn" command is executed,
(1) Disable non-maskable interrupts (NMI) and maskable interrupts (INT) regardless of whether the interrupts are enabled or disabled at that time.
(2) Switch the register bank to "1",
(3) Call the address specified by mn
To carry out the task.
In this embodiment, when a program in a first program area is to be executed from a program in a second program area, the program in the second program area can be executed by executing a CALLEX command.

In the above-mentioned load instruction, either an LDF instruction or an LD instruction is used depending on the range of mn, but in the call instruction of the sixth embodiment, a CALLEX instruction is used regardless of the range of mn. The CALLEX instruction is used when reading the second program from the first program.
Here, the second program area is in the range of addresses "2000h" to "25FFh" as shown in Fig. 112. In the CALLEX instruction, the code size of "CALLEX mn" when calling the address range "2000h" to "20FFh" among the addresses "2000h" to "25FFh" is 2 bytes, and the code size of "CALLEX mn" when calling a range other than the addresses "2000h" to "20FFh" is 4 bytes.

Here, the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh" is "FFh", i.e., 1 byte. In this case, the code value of the address value "2000h" is set to "0h". This allows the code value when calling up the address value "20FFh" to be "FFh", so the code size of "mn" can be set to 1 byte regardless of when any address in the range of "2000h" to "20FFh" is called.
In addition, when encoding the opcode of "CALLEX", in the sixth embodiment, the code is set to "0100/1000", i.e., 1 byte. This allows the code size of "CALLEX mn" (mn=2000h to 20FFh) to be set to 2 bytes.

FIG. 117 is a diagram showing aspects of the CALLEX instruction.
In the figure, (A) shows "CALLEX 2000h". In this case, the code value corresponding to "2000h" is "0000/0000" as described above. Also, when the range of "mn" is "2000h" to "20FFh", the code value of "CALLEX" is "0100/1000". Therefore, the code of "CALLEX 2000h" is:
0100/1000/0000/0000
It becomes.
When this command is executed, it calls the command at address "2000h" in the second program area.

Also, (B) in the figure shows "CALLEX 20FFh". In this case, the code value corresponding to "20FFh" is "1111/1111". Also, as described above, when the range of "mn" is "2000h" to "20FFh", the code value of "CALLEX" is "0100/1000". Therefore, the code of "CALLEX 20FFh" is,
0100/1000/1111/1111
It becomes.
When this instruction is executed, it calls the instruction at address "20FFh" in the second program area.

Furthermore, (C) in the figure shows "CALLEX 2100h". Here, when "mn" changes from "20FFh" to "2100h", a carry occurs, and "mn" cannot be expressed in one byte, so the code size of "mn" becomes two bytes. When "mn" = "2100h", the code of "mn" is
0000/0001/0000/0000
It becomes.

Furthermore, the "CALLEX" code in this case is also different. When the "mn" range is "2000h" to "20FFh", the "CALLEX" code is 1 byte, but when the "mn" range is "2100h" to "25FFh", the "CALLEX" code is 2 bytes instead of 1 byte. As described above, when the opcode is composed of 1 byte, only 256 out of several thousand instructions are available. Therefore, when the "mn" range is "2000h" to "20FFh", a 1-byte code is assigned as the "CALLEX" code, but when the "mn" range is not "2000h" to "20FFh", a 2-byte code is assigned as the "CALLEX" code. In the example of FIG. 117, the "CALLEX" code in this case is as follows:
1010/0000/1000/0000
It states that:
Therefore, the code for "CALLEX mn" when "mn" = "2100h" is
1010/0000/1000/0000/0000/0001/0000/0000
It becomes.
When this command is executed, it calls the command at address "2100h" in the second program area.

Furthermore, (D) in the figure indicates "CALLEX 25FFh" (a command specifying the last address of the second program area). The maximum value when specifying an address in the second program area is "25FFh".
When the code for "2000h" is "0", "25FFh" is:
0000/0101/1111/1111
It becomes.
Therefore, the code for "CALLEX 25FFh" is:
1010/0000/1000/0000/0000/0101/1111/1111
It becomes.
When this instruction is executed, the instruction at address "25FFh" in the second program area is called.

As described above, in the “CALLEX mn” instruction of the sixth embodiment, if “mn” is in the range of “2000h” to “20FFh”, the instruction has a code size of 2 bytes, and if “mn” is outside the above range, the instruction has a code size of 4 bytes.
Therefore, if instructions that are called frequently are concentrated in the address range of "2000h" to "20FFh", the number of instructions that can be completed with a code size of 2 bytes increases accordingly. This makes it possible to save the storage capacity of the ROM 54 that stores the instructions.
Furthermore, by storing the address used when calling the second program from the first program in the address range "2000h" to "20FFh" within the address range "2000h" to "25FFh" in the second program area, it is possible to easily determine when the second program is a program called from the first program, when checking the second program.

Let us return to the explanation given in FIG.
115C shows a RETEX instruction, which corresponds to a conventional return instruction.
The RETEX command is
(1) The non-maskable interrupt (NMI) and the maskable interrupt (INT) are set to the state before the CALLEX instruction.
(2) Switch the register bank to "0",
(3) Return (RET) (return to the state before the CALLEX (the next instruction after the CALLEX (the program at the return address))
To carry out the task.
This makes it possible to execute the program in the first program area.
If the state when the CALLEX instruction is issued is an interrupt enabled state, the RETEX instruction puts the state into an interrupt enabled state. On the other hand, if the state when the CALLEX instruction is issued is an interrupt disabled state, the RETEX instruction puts the state into an interrupt disabled state.

In a conventional general call/return instruction, a program is called by a call instruction, and after the program is executed, a return instruction is used to return to the position after the call instruction.
In contrast to this, in this embodiment, a program is called by a CALLEX instruction, and after the program is executed, a RETEX instruction is used to return to the state after the CALLEX instruction.
The above points will be explained in more detail below.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an example of a conventional CALL instruction and a RET instruction.
In this example, a second program is called while a first program is being executed.
When a second program is called while a first program is being executed, at least the following processing must be executed.
"1" Interrupt Management Processing In order to prevent the processing from becoming complicated, interrupt processing is prevented from being executed while the second program is being executed.
[2] SP Register Switching Process Since the stack area used in the second program is different from the stack area used in the first program, it is necessary to switch the SP register.
[3] Register Management Processing When a register is used during execution of the second program, it is necessary to take over the register value so as not to return to the first program.

In order to comply with the above, the program illustrated in FIG. 118 includes the following instructions:
First, when the second program is executed while the first program is being executed, interrupt processing is prohibited. The interrupt prohibit instruction is the DI instruction in the figure. This is the instruction corresponding to "1" above. Note that the DI instruction, which is an interrupt prohibit instruction, is paired with the EI instruction, which is an interrupt enable instruction. Note that the DI instruction can prohibit maskable interrupt processing, but cannot prohibit non-maskable interrupt processing (NMI).

After executing the DI command, "PUSH AF" is executed to save the AF register. This command corresponds to the above "3". The PUSH command is an command to store data in the stack area. That is, the command to store the A register value and the F register value in the stack area is executed.
The next "CALL S_CHERR_CHK" command is a command to call "S_CHERR_CHK" (input/dispense sensor abnormality management), which is one of the second programs. In this example, "S_CHERR_CHK" is listed as the second program.
When this "S_CHERR_CHK" (second program) is finished, the "POP AF" instruction is used to restore the AF register that was saved. This instruction is used to call data from the stack area, and corresponds to "3" above. Next, the EI instruction is used to enable interrupt processing (corresponding to "1" above).

In "S_CHERR_CHK" (second program), "LD (_SB_STACK2), SP" is an instruction (corresponding to "2" above) to save (store) the SP register value for the first program to a specified address in the second stack area.
The next "LD SP, @STACK2" is an instruction to set the SP register for the second program (an instruction corresponding to the above "2").
Next, "PUSH GPR" and "PUSH QI" are executed to save the registers. Here, "GPR" indicates the type of register to be saved, and corresponds to the A, F, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers. Also, since "GPR" does not include the Q and I registers, "PUSH QI" is executed in addition to "PUSH GPR" to save the Q and I registers (the instruction corresponding to "3" above).

After the second program is executed, the registers and the SP register are restored. The Q and I registers are restored by "POP QI". Furthermore, the A, F, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers are restored by "POP GPR" (these are the instructions corresponding to "3" above).
Next, the SP register is restored by "LD SP, (_SB_STACK2)" (the instruction corresponding to "2" above).
Then, RET is used to return to the state before the CALL instruction.

In this way, in a typical call/return instruction, the instructions corresponding to the above "1" to "3" are as follows in the first program:
D.I.
PUSH AF
POP AF
E.I.
needs to be done.
In addition, in the second program,
LD (), SP
PUSH GPR
PUSH QI
POP QI
POP GPR
LD SP, ()
needs to be done.

In contrast to this, as described above, the CALLEX instruction in this embodiment includes a process for inhibiting interrupts and a process for switching the register bank from 0 to 1. Therefore, a program in the second program area can be executed by a CALLEX instruction (one instruction), and there is no need to provide an interrupt inhibition instruction (DI instruction) or a register save instruction (PUSH instruction) separately.
The RETEX instruction also includes a process for returning the interrupt to the state before the CALLEX instruction, and a process for switching the register bank from 1 to 0. Therefore, the RETEX instruction (one instruction) can return to the program in the first program area, and there is no need to separately provide an interrupt enable instruction (EI instruction) for returning the interrupt to the original state, or an instruction for restoring the register (POP instruction).
This makes it possible to reduce the program capacity.

Furthermore, the CALLEX and RETEX instructions make it possible to return to the interrupt state of the first program immediately prior to the execution of the second program.
Therefore, if the state immediately before the CALLEX instruction is an interrupt-enabled state, after the second program has been executed, the RETEX instruction can be used to return to the first program in the interrupt-enabled state.
On the other hand, if the state immediately before the CALLEX instruction is an interrupt disabled state, after the second program is executed, it is possible to return to the first program in an interrupt disabled state by the RETEX instruction.

Furthermore, when a CALLEX instruction is executed, the register bank is switched from 0 to 1. Furthermore, when a RETEX instruction is executed, the register bank is switched from 1 to 0.
Therefore, when the CALLEX instruction is executed, the D3 bit of the F registers of the register banks 0 and 1 is updated from "0" to "1." Also, when the RETEX instruction is executed, the D3 bit of the F registers of the register banks 0 and 1 is updated from "1" to "0."
When the CALLEX instruction is executed, the D3 bit of the F register of either register bank 0 or 1 may be updated from "0" to "1."

Furthermore, the data stored in each register of register banks 0 and 1, except for the D3 bit of the F register, is not updated by the CALLEX and RETEX instructions themselves.
This point will be explained with a concrete example.
In the following description, the A, B, H, and L registers of register bank 0 are referred to as the 0A, 0B, 0H, and 0L registers, respectively.
Moreover, the A, B, H, and L registers of register bank 1 are referred to as 1A, 1B, 1H, and 1L registers, respectively.
Assume that the following data is currently stored in the registers of register banks 0 and 1.
0A register: 00000001 (B)
0B register: 00000000 (B)
0H register: 11110001 (B)
0L register: 00000001 (B)
1A register: 00000000 (B)
1B register: 00000011 (B)
1H register: 11110010 (B)
1L register: 00000001 (B)

In this state, when the CALLEX instruction is executed, the state switches from using the 0A, 0B, 0H, and 0L registers to using the 1A, 1B, 1H, and 1L registers. The register values of the 0A, 0B, 0H, 0L, 1A, 1B, 1H, and 1L registers do not change immediately before and after the CALLEX instruction. As mentioned above, only the D3 bit of the F register is updated.
Next, execution of the second program uses the 1A, 1H, and 1L registers, e.g.
1A register: 00000011 (B)
1B register: 00000011 (B)
1H register: 11110001 (B)
1L register: 00000000 (B)
Let us assume that the following occurs:

Then, when the RETEX command is executed based on the end of the second program, the values of the 1A, 1B, 1H, and 1L registers remain unchanged, and the state switches to a state in which the 0A, 0B, 0H, and 0L registers are used. At this point, the values of the 0A, 0B, 0H, and 0L registers are the values immediately before the CALLEX command, that is,
0A register: 00000001 (B)
0B register: 00000000 (B)
0H register: 11110001 (B)
0L register: 00000001 (B)
It is.
Note that the 0H register value is the value it had immediately before the CALLEX instruction, and has not been replaced with the 1H register value.
Then, when the first program is executed and, for example, the value of the OA register is incremented by "1",
0A register: 00000010 (B)
It becomes.

From the above, if we focus on a special register (for example, the A register), if the special register value immediately before the CALLEX instruction is "x", the special register value will become "y" when the CALLEX instruction is executed. This is because the special register value does not change due to the CALLEX instruction, but because the special register being used has changed from the special register in register bank 0 to the special register in register bank 1.

Let us now assume that the program in the second program area is executed, causing the special register to be used and the special register value to be updated from "y" to "y'". After that, when the RETEX instruction is executed, the special register to be used switches from the special register in register bank 1 to the special register in register bank 0. Therefore, the special register value immediately after the RETEX instruction becomes the value it had immediately before the CALLEX instruction, i.e., "x". Note that even immediately after the RETEX instruction, the special register value in register bank 1 remains "y'".

Specifically, the above-mentioned CALLEX instruction and RETEX instruction are used, for example, as follows.
(1) Example 1
Fig. 119 is a flowchart showing program start (M_PRG_SET) in the sixth embodiment, and corresponds to Fig. 92 in the fifth embodiment. The same steps as in Fig. 92 are given the same step numbers. Step numbers specific to the sixth embodiment are underlined.
119, when the program start (M_PRG_START) process is started, first in step S2851, an initial value is set in the SP register of register bank 0. When power is turned on, the SP register value of register bank 0 is "0." Here, "F200h" is stored in the SP register of register bank 0 by the command "LD SP, F200h."

The value "F200h" stored here is the last address of the first stack area plus "1", as shown in Fig. 114. When the SP register value of register bank 0 is "F200h", this indicates that data is stored (pile) in "F1FFh".
Secondly, in step S2851, "CALLEX 2000h" is executed. In this example, it is assumed that the start address of the RWM checksum calculation command in step S2852 is "2000h".
Next, the process proceeds to step S2852, where the second program (RWM checksum calculation) is started based on "CALLEX 2000h." When the second program is started for the first time after power-on, an initial value is set in the SP register of register bank 1. When power is turned on, the SP register value of register bank 1 is "0." Here, "F400h" is stored in the SP register of register bank 1 by the command "LD SP, F400h."

The value "F400h" stored here is the last address "F3FFh" of the second stack area plus "1" as shown in Fig. 114. When the SP register value of register bank 1 is "F400h", this indicates that data is to be stored (pile) in "F3FFh".
Furthermore, when the RWM checksum calculation is completed, RETEX is executed and the program returns to the program (instruction) in the first program after the CALLEX in step S2851 (S2705).
The process from step S2705 onward will not be described.

In the program start (M_PRG_START) of the fifth embodiment shown in Fig. 92, it is necessary to execute "PUSH AF" due to the AF register being saved in step S2702. Also, it is necessary to execute "POP AF" due to the AF register being restored in step S2704. Furthermore, although not shown in Fig. 92, after step S2703, a RET command is executed.
In contrast, in the sixth embodiment, since the CALLEX instruction is an instruction including register saving, there is no need to define separate register saving instructions ("PUSH AF", "PUSH GPR", and "PUSH QI") Similarly, since the RETEX instruction is an instruction including register restoring, there is no need to define separate register restoring instructions ("POP AF", "POP GPR", and "POP QI").

Furthermore, after storing the initial value "F400h" in the SP register of register bank 1 when the second program is executed for the first time after power-on (step S2852), when returning to the first program and executing the second program again, there is no need to store the initial value "F400h" in the SP register of register bank 1 again.
In other words, starting from when the power is turned on, the first time the second program is executed, a process (instruction) is executed to store the initial value "F400h" in the SP register of register bank 1, but the process (instruction) does not need to be executed to store the initial value "F400h" in the SP register of register bank 1 during subsequent executions of the second program, which makes it possible to reduce the size of the second program.

However, without being limited thereto, a process (instruction) may be executed to store the initial value "F400h" in the SP register of register bank 1 each time the second program is executed. Alternatively, a process (instruction) may be executed to store the initial value "F400h" in the SP register of register bank 1 when a specific condition is satisfied during execution of the second program.
Assume that the first time the second program is executed after power-on, the initial value "F400h" is stored in the SP register of register bank 1, and the second program is executed. If data is stored in the second stack area during execution of the second program, the SP register value of register bank 1 is updated.

As described above, for example, when two bytes of data are first stored in the second stack area, the SP register value of register bank 1 is updated from "F400h" to "F3FEh". After that, the data is usually returned from the second stack area before the second program is terminated. Therefore, when the second program is terminated, the SP register value of register bank 1 is usually "F400h".
When the second program ends and the program returns to the first program, the SP register of register bank 0 is used. The SP register value of register bank 0 maintains the value it had immediately before the program started. For example, if the SP register value of register bank 0 was "F1FDh" immediately before the program started, the SP register value of register bank 0 will be "F1FDh" when the program ends and the program returns to the first program.

(2) Example 2
In the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of the fifth embodiment shown in Fig. 95, if the start address of the RWM initialization 2 command in step S2736 is "2020h", the commands in steps S2735 to S2737 can be configured with commands including "CALLEX 2020h" and "RETEX" (as above, the register save command (PUSH command) and the register restore command (POP command) are unnecessary). Although not shown in Fig. 95, the RET command is executed at the end of the program corresponding to step S2736 (processing outside the use area). The command equivalent to this RET command is the RETEX command in this embodiment.

(3) Example 3
In the interrupt process (I_INTR) of the fifth embodiment shown in Fig. 98, if the start address of the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) command in step S2221 is "2040h", the commands in steps S2765 to S2766 can be configured with commands including "CALLEX 2040h" and "RETEX" (the register save command (PUSH command) and the restore command (POP command) are unnecessary). Although not shown in Fig. 98, the RET command is executed at the end of the program corresponding to the determination process in step S460 (processing outside the use area). The command equivalent to this RET command is the RETEX command in this embodiment.

(4) Example 4
In the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) of the fifth embodiment shown in Fig. 99, if the start address of the RWM checksum set (S_SUM_SET) in step S2776 is "2060h", the instructions in steps S2775 to S2777 can be configured with instructions including "CALLEX 2060h" and "RETEX" (the register save instruction (PUSH instruction) and restore instruction (POP instruction) are unnecessary). Although not shown in Fig. 99, a RET instruction is executed at the end of the program corresponding to the process in step S2776 (processing outside the use area). The instruction equivalent to this RET instruction becomes the RETEX instruction in this embodiment.

Next, a method of using the CALLEX command (application example) will be described.
FIG. 120 is a diagram showing an example in which a CALLEX instruction and a JR instruction (jump instruction) are used.
As mentioned above, the CALLEX instruction can be a two-byte instruction if the address range to be called is from "2000h" to "20FFh". Therefore, when calling a second program from a first program, the more the CALLEX instruction is used, the more memory capacity required for the instructions can be saved.

For example, if a "CALLEX 2000h" instruction is provided and executed, the program stored at address "2000h" is called, but if the description (storage) of that program starts at address "2000h" and that program occupies most of the addresses "2000h" to "20FDh", then it will be impossible to provide many CALLEX instructions. In the extreme, if a program starts at address "2000h" and continues to address "20FFh", in other words, if there is only one program in the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh", then only one 2-byte CALLEX instruction can be provided.

Therefore, in the example of Figure 120, a JR (jump) instruction is placed in the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh", the destination to which the JR instruction jumps is specified outside the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh", and the actual program is stored at the destination to which the JR instruction jumps.
For example, "JR 2200h" is stored at address "2000h". Incidentally, the instruction "JR 2200h" means to jump to address "2200h". Thus, when "CALLEX 2000h" is executed, address "2000h" is called, but since "JR 2200h" is stored at address "2000h", a jump to address "2200h" is also performed. If an actual program ("Program A" in FIG. 120) is stored at address "2200h" or later, the actual program (Program A) can be placed outside the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh".

In this embodiment, the code size required for the "JR mn (mn=2000h to 20FFh)" instruction is 3 bytes.
2000h JR mn1 (in the example of FIG. 120, mn1=2200h)
2003h JR mn2 (in the example of FIG. 120, mn2=2250h)
2006h JR mn3 (in the example of FIG. 120, mn3=22A0h)
:
As shown above, JR instructions are placed in 3-byte increments.

However, this is not limiting, and if the code size required for the "JR mn (mn = 2000h to 20FFh)" instruction can be configured from 2 bytes,
2000h JR mn1
2002h JR mn2
2004h JR mn3
:
It becomes.
Also, if the code size required for the "JR mn (mn = 2000h to 20FFh)" instruction is 4 bytes,
2000h JR mn1
2004h JR mn2
2008h JR mn3
:
It becomes.

In the example of Figure 120, if taken to the extreme, it would be possible to place JR instructions in the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh". In this case,
(1) 2000h JR mn1
(2) 2003h JR mn2
(3) 2006h JR mn3
:
(84) 20F9h JR mn84
(85) 20FCh JR mn85
(86) 20FFh JR mn86
Therefore, a total of 86 JR instructions, each consisting of 3 bytes, can be stored within the address range from "2000h" to "20FFh."

In the example of FIG.
2000h JR 2200h
The actual program (program A) at address "2000h" was stored in the range of addresses "2200h" to "224Fh".
Also,
2003h JR 2250h
The actual program (program B) at address "2003h" was stored within the range of addresses "2250h" to "229Fh".

Furthermore,
2006h JR 22A0h
The actual program (program C) at address "2006h" is stored at address "22A0h" and onward.
In this way, it is desirable to store almost no actual program to be executed by the CALLEX instruction in the address range "2000h" to "20FFh" of the CALLEX instruction, which allows a code size of 2 bytes. In other words, the address of the second program called by the CALLEX instruction is stored in the address range "2000h" to "20FFh". However, as will be described later, the JR instruction does not need to be used for the second program called by the CALLEX instruction and that is closest to the address "20FFh" in the address range "2000h" to "20FFh". In this way, if the majority (including "almost" or "all") of the instructions of the second program called by the CALLEX instruction use the JR instruction and the actual program is stored at address "2100h" or later, the second program area can be used efficiently.

For example, if there are only ten CALLEX instructions, the JR instruction is stored in the addresses corresponding to the first through ninth CALLEX instructions, but the actual program may be directly stored in the address corresponding to the tenth CALLEX instruction without using the JR instruction.
On the other hand, regardless of the number of CALLEX instructions, it may be determined that only JR instructions are stored in the address range from "2000h" to "20FFh", and even if the number of JR instructions (CALLEX instructions) is significantly below the upper limit of 86, the memory area before address "20FFh" may be left free as a spare.

As described above, the CALLEX instruction has a code size of 2 bytes when calling within the address range of "2000h" to "20FFh", and a code size of 4 bytes when calling outside the address range of "2000h" to "20FFh".
Therefore, the total is 5 bytes for the "2-byte CALLEX instruction + 3-byte JR instruction", which is larger than the code size (4 bytes) of the CALLEX instruction that calls an address outside the range of "2000h" to "20FFh".

However, in the case of chips for gaming machines that comply with the Entertainment and Amusement Act regulations (such as slot machines and pachinko gaming machines), the first program area has no spare memory capacity, but the second program area has spare memory capacity.
Therefore, even if the JR instruction stored in the second program area increases by 3 bytes, it is more advantageous in terms of efficient use of the first program area to keep the code size of the CALLEX instruction stored in the first program area to 2 bytes.

Also, toward the end approaching address "20FFh", the program itself may be stored without providing a JR instruction.
As described above, if 3-byte JR instructions are sequentially placed after address "2000h", the instruction "JR mn86" will be stored at address "20FFh". In this case, the instruction "JR mn86" is stored in the 3-byte memory area from address "20FFh" to "2101h".

However, storing the JR instruction in the 3-byte memory area after address "20FFh" and storing the actual program for that instruction in another memory area will save memory capacity by storing the program directly from address "20FFh".
For this reason, in the example shown in FIG. 120, the JR instruction is not placed at address "20FFh", and a program (program D) is stored starting from address "20FFh".
As a result, when "CALLEX 20FFh" is executed, program D stored at address "20FFh" and after will be executed.

Although the above example uses address "20FFh", the same applies to cases where the JR instruction is placed at address "20FDh" or "20FEh".
Specifically, in terms of saving memory capacity, it is preferable to store the JR instruction in the 3-byte memory area from address "20FDh" to "20FFh" and store the program directly at address "20FDh" and after, rather than storing the program in another memory area.
Similarly, it is preferable in terms of saving memory capacity to store the program directly at addresses after "20FEh" rather than storing the JR instruction in the 3-byte memory area from address "20FEh" to "2100h" and storing the program in other memory areas.

Although the sixth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described content, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In Fig. 112, the ROM 54 has a program management area and an unused area, but this is not limiting, and the ROM 54 may have at least a first program area, a first data area, a second program area, and a second data area. In addition, while Fig. 112 shows the start address and end address for each of these storage areas, the storage capacity shown in Fig. 112 is an example and is not limited to this. Therefore, the start address and end address of each storage area shown in Fig. 112 are also only an example and can be set arbitrarily.

Therefore, in the example of FIG. 112, since the address range of the second program area is "2000h" to "25FFh,""2000h" to "20FFh" is exemplified as the address range in which the code size of the CALLEX instruction can be 2 bytes; however, if the address range of the second program area changes, the address range in which the code size of the CALLEX instruction can be 2 bytes also changes.
For example, if the address range of the second program area is "2150h" to "264Fh", the address range in which the code size of the CALLEX instruction can be set to 2 bytes is "2150h" to "224Fh".

(2) In the example of Fig. 112, the first program area, the first data area, the second program area, and the second data area are arranged in this order in ROM 54, but this is not limited thereto, and for example, the second program area and the second data area may be arranged before the first program area and the first data area. Also, a predetermined management area or the like may be arranged at the top address of ROM 54 (before the first program area in Fig. 112).
Similarly, the RWM 53 is not limited to being arranged in the order of the work area and the stack area, and may be arranged in the order of the stack area and the work area. Also, although the first work area, the first stack area, the second work area, and the second stack area are arranged in this order, this is not limited, and for example, the second work area and the second stack area may be arranged before the first work area and the first stack area. Furthermore, a predetermined management area or the like may be arranged at the top address of the RWM 53 (before the first work area in FIG. 112).

(3) In the built-in register area, each register bank is provided with a main register and a sub-register, but this is not limiting and any register bank may be used as long as it has at least a main register.
(4) In Fig. 113, the register bank monitor is assigned to the D3 bit of the F register, but this is not limited to this and it may be assigned to any bit. For example, if the second zero flag is not used, it may be assigned to the D5 bit.
Also, rather than allocating a specific bit in the F register to the register bank monitor, it is possible to provide a register dedicated to the register bank monitor.

(5) In the example of FIG. 112, the address range of the first data area is from "1200h" to "1DF3h," and it has been explained that within this range the range of "mn" can be expressed in 12 bits.
here,
1200h = 0000/0000/0000 (B)
When
1111/1111/1111(B)=FFFh
It is.
and,
1200h+FFFh=21FFh
It is.
Therefore, if the range of the first data area is within the range of "1200h" to "21FFh", the range of "mn" can be expressed in 12 bits, and the code size of "LDF HL, mn" can be configured as 2 bytes.

(6) The address ranges and sizes of the first stack area and second stack area shown in FIG. 112 are examples and are not limited to these. For example, if the range of the first stack area is addresses "F1D0h" to "F2FFh", then in step S2851 of FIG. 119, it will be "LD SP, F300h".

(7) The sixth embodiment can be applied to both slot machines and pachinko machines under the Entertainment and Amusement Act. It can also be applied to Parrot machines that use game balls, enclosed game machines (medalless game machines) that use electronic information (electronic medals) instead of physical (tangible) medals, and casino machines.
(8) The first to sixth embodiments and the various modified examples shown in the first to sixth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

Seventh Embodiment
The seventh embodiment relates to operation button presentation.
Although not shown in Fig. 1, the sub-control board 80 is connected to an operation button 24. The operation button 24 is also called a performance button, chance button, push button, decision button, sub button, etc. The operation button 24 is a button having the same function as the "push button" described in the fourth embodiment.

In the fourth embodiment, only one operation button 24 is shown, but in the seventh embodiment, a plurality of operation buttons (two operation buttons 24A and 24B in the following example) are provided.
As described above in the first embodiment, the shape of the operation body is a push button, and hence it is called an "operation button." However, the term "operation button" does not mean that it is limited to a push button shape.
For example, as explained in the fourth embodiment, the operation button may have a function of popping out toward the ceiling. In this case, the operation button can be pressed (button operation) in the same way as a normal operation button. Furthermore, the operation button pops out toward the ceiling and transforms into a lever, allowing the player to operate the lever (tilt). Even when the operation button has such a function, it is still included in the concept of "operation button" in this embodiment.

On the other hand, when it is detected that the operation button has changed from an off state (no load) where no external force is being applied to it to an on state due to an external force being applied (by the player's operation) (the operating body being pressed), the operation button, performance button, chance button, push button, decision button, and sub-button may also be referred to as an operation switch, performance switch, chance switch, push switch, decision switch, and sub-switch, respectively, based on the switch function that sends an electrical signal to the sub-control board 80.

In the following, examples of the operation timing of the operation button are "when the start switch 41 is operated" and "when the engine is completely stopped."
Here, "when the start switch 41 is operated" strictly speaking corresponds to the time when the main control board 50 detects that the start switch 41 has been operated. However, at least in this embodiment, "when the start switch 41 is operated" is a concept that includes any of the following timings: when the operation of the start switch 41 is detected, when the reel 31 starts to rotate (accelerate), when the reel 31 is accelerating, and when the reel 31 reaches a constant speed and is ready to accept operation of the stop switch 42.

Furthermore, strictly speaking, "when the reel is completely stopped" corresponds to when the third reel 31 has stopped. However, at least in this embodiment, "when the reel is completely stopped" is a concept that includes any of the following: when the main control board 50 detects that the third stop switch 42 is on; when the main control board 50 detects that the third stop switch 42 has turned off after it has turned on; when the third reel 31 starts to decelerate based on detecting that the third stop switch 42 has turned on; while the third reel 31 is decelerating; when the third reel 31 has stopped; when the third reel 31 has stopped and before the medal payout process is executed; while the medal payout process is being executed; at the end of the medal payout process; and at a specified timing after the end of the medal payout process.

121 is a perspective view of the appearance of a slot machine (gaming machine) 10 in the seventh embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, the operation button 24 includes operation buttons 24A and 24B.
The operation button 24A is arranged on the control panel 12c alongside the bet switches 40 (40a, 40b), the cross key, and the like.
The operation button 24B is provided adjacent to a lower panel 10a provided at the bottom of the front surface of the slot machine 10. The operation button 24B is larger in size than the operation button 24A.

The operation buttons 24A and 24B are configured so that when pressed, a signal is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
In addition, an LED (not shown in FIG. 121) is provided inside the operation buttons 24A and 24B, and is configured to be able to light up in a predetermined color, for example, when prompting the operation of the operation button 24A or 24B.

FIG. 122 is a diagram showing the effect ratios of the operation buttons 24 in game state 1 in the seventh embodiment.
Here, in the seventh embodiment, game states 1 to 3 are exemplified as game states. Game state 1 is, for example, a normal state (non-AT, non-CZ), game state 2 is, for example, in CZ or AT, and game state 3 is, for example, in a non-AT or an added specialization zone in AT. FIG. 122 shows the staying ratio of each game state. The staying ratio of the game states is "game state 1>game state 2>game state 3".

122, in game state 1, either no effect or any of effects 1 to 4 is selected for each game. The sub-control board 80 determines the effect for the game by lottery or the like based on commands such as the role lottery result, the number of premonition games, the number of pull-back games, and the game state (normal, CZ, AT, etc.) transmitted from the main control board 50. For example, in game state 1, no effect is determined 44% of the time, effect 1 is determined 20% of the time, effect 3 is determined 5% of the time, and effect 4 is determined 1% of the time.
Here, "no effects" does not mean that no effects are output at all, but rather that only the basic effects in game state 1 (such as an effect in which the image progresses according to a scenario on the image display device 23) are output, and no effects specific to that game are output.
Furthermore, effects 1 to 4 mean that while the basic effects in game state 1 are output, effects specific to that game are also output.

Furthermore, when any one of the effects is selected, the operation button effect is determined based on the number of inputs shown in Fig. 122. For example, when effect 3 is determined, there is a ratio of "200/256" in which it is determined to have no operation button effect, a ratio of "40/256" in which it is determined to have the operation button 24A effect, and a ratio of "16/256" in which it is determined to have the operation button 24B effect.
122, when effects 1 and 2 are selected, the operation button effects are not selected. In contrast, when effects 3 and 4 are selected, the operation button effects may be selected.

Here, the "operation button effect" refers to an effect that outputs an image or sound that prompts the user to operate the operation button 24A or 24B. Note that the "image" is not limited to a still image, but also includes a moving image.
Specifically, the "operation button 24A presentation" refers to outputting a presentation that prompts the operation of the operation button 24A, and the "operation button 24B presentation" refers to outputting a presentation that prompts the operation of the operation button 24B. These presentations are implemented, for example, by displaying an image of the surface shape of the operation button 24A or 24B on the image display device 23 to indicate which operation button (24A or 24B) should be operated.

Furthermore, after outputting an image or sound prompting the player to operate operation button 24A or 24B, when it is detected that the player has operated operation button 24A or 24B, there are cases in which an effect is output that simply erases the image prompting the player to operate operation button 24A or 24B, and cases in which an effect is developed (changed) in accordance with the operation of operation button 24A or 24B.
In particular, when the presentation is developed (changed) in accordance with the operation of operation button 24A or 24B, it is possible to display whether or not a CZ or AT has been won, whether or not an additional bonus has been added, the number of bonus bonuses, etc.

Although not shown in FIG. 122, the operation button 24A effect and the operation button 24B effect have predetermined timings at which the output of the effect starts.
For example, the operation button 24A effect is set to start most often when the start switch 41 is operated, and the operation button 24B effect is set to start most often when the reels are completely stopped. Also, during a game, for example, when the stop switch 42 is operated to stop the reels for the first or second time, or when the reels 31 are stopped for the first or second time, the operation button 24A effect or the operation button 24B effect may be output. Note that the operation button 24A effect may be output when the reels are completely stopped, and the operation button 24B effect may be output when the start switch 41 is operated.

Furthermore, an "operation button 24A+24B effect" is an effect that outputs both an operation button 24A effect and an operation button 24B effect within one game. Here, it is possible to output an effect that prompts the operation of both operation buttons 24A and 24B at the same time, but in this embodiment, an "operation button 24A+24B effect" is an effect that outputs an operation button 24B effect after outputting an operation button 24A effect within one game. For example, an operation button 24A effect can be output when the start switch 41 is operated, and an operation button 24B effect can be output when the machine is fully stopped. However, this is not limited to the above, and it is of course possible to output an operation button 24A effect after outputting an operation button 24B effect.

As shown in Fig. 122, in game state 1, the majority of the effects are those without operation buttons (98.6%). In addition, in the operation button effects, the proportion of operation button 24A effects (0.94%) is set to be higher than the proportion of operation button 24B effects (0.41%). Furthermore, the proportion of operation button 24A + 24B effects (0.05%) is lower than the proportions of operation button 24A effects and operation button 24B effects.
As shown in FIG. 122, the ratio of operation button effects throughout the entire game state is "no operation button effect > operation button 24A effect > operation button 24B effect > operation button 24A + 24B effect."

However, this is not limited to the above, and for example, in game state 1, the proportion of operation button 24B effects may be higher than the proportion of operation button 24A effects. Alternatively, in game state 1, "proportion of operation button 24A effects > proportion of operation button 24B effects" may be set, but in other game states, "proportion of operation button 24A effects < proportion of operation button 24B effects" may be set. Furthermore, in other game states, "proportion of operation buttons 24A + 24B effects > proportion of operation button 24B effects > proportion of operation button 24A" may be set.

FIG. 123 is a diagram showing the performance ratios in game states 2 and 3.
First, the effects in game state 2 include no effect, and effects 1 to 6. In the no effect and effect 1 in game state 2, similar to the no effect and effect 1 in game state 1, no operation button effects are selected.
In addition, the ratio of the operation button effects of effects 2 to 4 in game state 2 is different from the ratio of the operation button effects of effects 2 to 4 in game state 1. In game state 2, when effects 2 to 4 are selected, the operation button effects are set to be more likely to be selected than in game state 1.
Therefore, for example, in both game states 1 and 2, effect 3 may be selected, but the percentage of the operation button effect being output when effect 3 is selected in game state 2 is higher than the percentage of the operation button effect being output when effect 3 is selected in game state 1.

Furthermore, the game state 2 includes effects 5 and 6. In effect 5, the ratio of operation button 24A effects is set higher than the ratio of no operation button effects. In effect 6, the ratio of operation button 24B effects is set highest.
Incidentally, even in game state 2, the ratio of operation button effects is "no operation button effect>operation button 24A effect>operation button 24B effect>operation button 24A+24B effect."
123, in game state 3, only effect 7 is set to be selected (no effect or effects 1 to 6 are not selected). In effect 7, the ratio of the operation button 24B effect is "100%." In other words, in game state 3, effect 7 and the operation button 24B effect are output every time a game is played.

Next, a specific example of the operation button presentation in the seventh embodiment will be described.
As described above, the "operation button effect" is an effect in which an image or the like indicating an operation button is displayed.
Furthermore, an "image showing an operation button" is not limited to an image that faithfully reproduces an actual operation button, but any image from which it can be easily inferred that it is an operation button is included in the "image showing an operation button".
For example, this includes the case where a schematic diagram of the appearance of an operation button is displayed as an image, or the case where characters or the like displayed on the top surface of an actual operation button are displayed as an image surrounded by a shape similar to the shape of the top surface of the operation button.

In addition, since the operation button presentation can be considered a presentation that encourages the player to operate the operation button, the images of the operation button, and/or images and sounds such as "Press!" or "PUSH!" are sometimes referred to as "operation button promotion images (presentations)."
However, it can also be said that merely displaying an image of an operation button does not encourage the player to operate the operation button (it is the player's freedom to decide whether or not to operate the button, and the player will not be at a disadvantage if they do not operate it), so it cannot necessarily be called an "operation button promotion image (performance)."
In addition, there are cases where an image of the operation button itself is not displayed, but an image that evokes the operation button or its operation is displayed, thereby increasing the possibility that the player will operate the operation button.

In view of the above, the "operation button effect" in this embodiment is not necessarily limited to displaying an image of the operation button or encouraging the player to operate the operation button. If one were to put it simply, the "operation button effect" in this embodiment is an effect that is thought to make the player more likely to operate the operation button when that effect is performed than when that effect is not performed.

124 and 125 are diagrams for explaining an example of the operation button 24A+24B presentation in the seventh embodiment. Fig. 125 is a diagram following Fig. 124. In one game, the game starts from Fig. 124(a) and ends with Fig. 125(h).
124 and 125, the stop switch 42 indicated by a black circle indicates a non-operated state or an operation acceptance permitted state, and the stop switch 42 indicated by a white circle indicates a state in which an operation has been accepted.

The state of FIG. 124(a) is the state before the start of the game (before the start switch 41 is operated). Next, moving on to (b), when the start switch 41 is operated, the operation button 24A effect is output as the effect when the start switch 41 is operated. The operation button 24A effect displays an image showing the operation button 24A superimposed on the effect image (background image) that has been output up to that point on the image display device 23. In this case, the layer of the image showing the operation button 24A is set to be located in front of the layer of the previous effect image. Therefore, a part of the previous effect image may be hidden by the image showing the operation button 24A.
Also, although not shown in FIG. 124, images and sounds such as "Press!" and "Chance!" are also displayed in conjunction with the display of the image showing the operation button 24A (the same applies to the subsequent operation button presentations).

Next, proceeding to (c), when the player operates the operation button 24A, the image showing the operation button 24A is erased and the effect corresponding to the operation of the operation button 24A is switched to (also referred to as "updating the effect", "developing the effect", or "changing the effect"). In this example, an image display of "Chance!" is shown. Here, the effect corresponding to the operation of the operation button 24A (display of "Chance!") is also displayed superimposed on the effect image (background image) that had been output up to that point on the image display device 23. In this case, the layer of the effect image corresponding to the operation of the operation button 24A is set to be located in front of the layer of the previous effect image. Therefore, part of the previous effect image may be hidden by the effect image corresponding to the operation of the operation button 24A.

The image of the operation button 24A effect is configured to be erased when the operation button 24A is operated. Here, the image may be erased immediately when the operation button 24A is operated, or may be erased after a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation button 24A was operated.
In addition, when the operation button 24A is not operated after the image of the operation button 24A effect is output,
a) Until the operation button 24A is operated,
b) Until the first stop switch 42 is operated.
c) Until the game ends (for example, until the game stops completely),
d) Until the next bet is placed.
e) It may be output until the start switch 41 for the next game is operated. Alternatively, after outputting the image of the operation button 24A effect, a timer may be used to measure time, and when a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, when the number of interrupts is counted and the number of interrupts reaches a predetermined number; the same applies below), the image of the operation button 24A effect may be erased even if the operation button 24A is not operated.

Next, proceeding to (d), when the first (left in this example) stop switch 42 is operated, this operation triggers the end of the presentation (image display of "Chance!") corresponding to the operation of the operation button 24A.
It should be noted that when the first stop switch 42 is operated without operating the operation button 24A, the corresponding effect is not output after the operation of the operation button 24A.
However, this is not limited to the above, and when the first stop switch 42 is operated without the operation of the operation button 24A, the output of the corresponding effect may be started after the operation of the operation button 24A, and erased after a predetermined time (for example, one second) has elapsed.

In this example, when the first stop switch 42 is operated, the effect (the image display of “Chance!”) corresponding to the operation of the operation button 24A is erased. However, the present invention is not limited to this.
a) After starting an image display corresponding to operation of the operation button 24A, the image display is erased after a predetermined time has elapsed regardless of operation of the stop switch 42. b) After starting an image display corresponding to operation of the operation button 24A, if the first stop switch 42 is operated, the image display is erased after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point. c) After starting an image display corresponding to operation of the operation button 24A, the image display is not erased even if the first stop switch 42 is operated, but is erased at a predetermined timing thereafter (for example, when the second stop switch 42 is operated).

Next, proceeding to (e) and (f) in FIG. 125, respectively, when the second and third stop switches 42 are operated, as shown in (g) in the figure, the operation of the third stop switch 42 (the third stop switch is turned on, or the third stop switch 42 is turned from on to off) or the third reel 31 stops, triggers the output of the operation button 24B effect. The operation button 24B effect displays an image of the operation button 24B effect in place of the previous effect image. In particular, the entire image display area is used to display the image of the operation button 24B effect. In other words, the start of the operation button 24B effect triggers the end of the previous effect image.

Next, proceeding to (h), when the player operates the operation button 24B, the operation is used as a trigger to output an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation button 24B. In other words, the image of the effect is updated (developed). In this example, as the image of the operation button 24B effect, first, "Press!" is displayed together with the image of the operation button 24B, and when the operation button 24B is operated, the image display is changed to "Next big win confirmed!?", which corresponds to the operation of the operation button 24B.
If the operation button 24B is not operated after the operation button 24B effect is output, the operation button 24B effect may be erased after a predetermined time has elapsed. Alternatively, the operation button 24B effect may be continued to be output regardless of the elapse of time, and may be erased when a bet operation for the next game is performed or when the next game starts (when the start switch 41 is operated).

As described above, within one game, the output timing of the operation button 24A effect and the output timing of the operation button 24B effect are different. Also, as in the case where the operation button 24B effect is selected, the operation button 24A effect is not output, but the operation button 24B effect may be output. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the operation button 24B effect may be output later, even if the operation button 24A effect, which is likely to be output at the start of the game (when the start switch 41 is operated), is not output.
Also, as in the above example, the image of the operation button 24A effect is displayed superimposed on the previous effect image, but the image of the operation button 24B effect is displayed in place of the previous effect image. In this way, by clearly differentiating the image of the operation button 24A effect from the image of the operation button 24B effect, the player can easily understand which operation button 24A or 24B to operate without confusion.

Furthermore, when an operation button effect is output at the start of a game (during a game) (in this example, the operation button 24A effect), the image of the operation button effect is displayed superimposed on the effect image that has been output up to that point, without wasting the effect image that has already been output, so that the operation button effect can be output without interrupting the flow of the effect.
On the other hand, when the operation button effect is output at the end of the game (when the game is stopped), even if the effect image already output is switched to the image of the operation button effect, it is considered that there is little disadvantage in interrupting the flow of the effect image that has been output up to that point. Furthermore, by outputting a new image of the operation button effect in place of the effect image that has been output up to that point, it is possible to suggest that it is a hot effect (in other words, a highly reliable effect).

Also, when the operation button 24A effect is output, only the operation button 24A is enabled for operation acceptance, and operation acceptance for the operation button 24B remains disabled. At this time, the operation of the operation button 24B is not detected. Therefore, when the operation button 24A effect is output, even if the player operates the operation button 24B, the effect does not change (develop). However, this is not limited to this, and when the operation button 24A effect is output, it is possible to detect the operation of both the operation buttons 24A and 24B, and, for example, when the operation button 24A is not operated and the operation button 24B is operated, it is possible to detect this and display an image of a comment such as "Please operate the operation button 24A".
Similarly, when the operation button 24B presentation is output, it is possible to detect the operation of both operation buttons 24A and 24B, and, for example, when operation button 24B is not operated and operation button 24A is operated, it is possible to detect this and display an image of a comment such as "Please operate operation button 24B."

The timing at which the operation buttons 24A and 24B are enabled may be, for example, a timer management method or a feedback method as shown in Figs. 77 and 78 of the fourth embodiment.
This point will be briefly explained again.
First, in the timer management method, the start switch 41 is operated and a lottery result command is sent from the main to the sub-main. When the sub-main decides on an effect with operation buttons, it sends an effect designation command with operation buttons to the sub-sub. Also, when the sub-main sends an effect designation command with operation button effect, it starts counting the timer. Then, when the timer value reaches a predetermined value, it enables the target operation button 24A or 24B.
On the other hand, when the sub-sub receives a performance designation command with operation button performance, it starts the performance (image processing) and then executes the operation button performance (displays an image of the operation button).
The timing at which the operation button 24A or 24B is enabled in the sub-main is configured to be substantially the same as the timing at which the operation button presentation is executed (the operation button is displayed as an image) in the sub-sub.

In the feedback system, the start switch 41 is operated and a lottery result command is transmitted from the main to the sub-main. When the sub-main determines that a performance with an operation button is to be performed, it transmits a performance designation command with an operation button to the sub-sub.
When the sub-sub receives a performance designation command with operation button performance, it starts the performance (image processing) and then executes the operation button performance (displays an image of the operation button).
When the sub-sub executes the operation button effect, a feedback command is transmitted from the sub-sub to the sub-main. Upon receiving this feedback command, the sub-main enables the target operation button.

In addition, in the above embodiment, operation buttons 24A and 24B electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 are given as an example of operation buttons for changing (developing) the presentation, but this is not limited thereto, and operation switches electrically connected to the main control board 50 (bet switches 40 (40a and 40b), start switch 41, stop switch 42, settlement switch 43, etc.) may be used in place of at least one of operation buttons 24A or 24B.

For example, a "bet switch 40 + operation button 24A effect" or a "bet switch 40 + operation button 24B effect" can be provided. In particular, when an operation switch electrically connected to the main control board 50 is used, the period during which the operation switch is disabled during the progress of the game can be used, or the period during which the operation switch is enabled can be used. When using the period during which the operation switch is disabled, for example, an effect can be output that prompts the operation of the bet switch 40 or the start switch 41 after the reels 31 start to rotate (while all reels 31 are rotating). Also, an effect can be output that prompts the operation of the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, or any of the stop switches 42 after all reels have stopped.

As an example of utilizing the period during which the operating switch is active during the progress of the game, for example, after Figure 124 (b), an image of the left stop switch 42 is displayed as an operating switch presentation, and a presentation such as "Put your energy into it and press the left stop switch!" is output.
In addition, after a full stop, an operation switch effect may be produced by displaying an image of the bet switch 40 and outputting an effect such as "Press the bet switch!".
In this case, the operation of the bet switch 40 corresponding to the bet switch effect may be enabled only when there are stored medals and the bet process is executed by operating the bet switch 40. Alternatively, even if there are no stored medals, the operation of the bet switch 40 corresponding to the bet switch effect may be enabled.

When multiple operation button effects are output in one game, each operation button effect may be output at any timing. In the above example, the operation button 24A effect is output when the start switch 41 is operated, and the operation button 24B effect is output when all reels are stopped. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, first, the operation button 24A effect may be output when the start switch 41 is operated, and the operation button 24B effect may be output when the first reel 31 is stopped.
Alternatively, the operation button 24A effect may be output when the first reel 31 stops, and the operation button 24B effect may be output when the second reel 31 stops.

As shown in FIG. 122, on average throughout the entire game state, the frequency of the operation button 24B presentation is set lower than that of the operation button 24A presentation. The operation button 24A is located closer to the operation switches (bet switch 40, start switch 41, stop switch 42) that are operated each time the game is played and to progress through the game than the operation button 24B. For this reason, the frequency of the operation button 24A presentation is set higher because the operation button 24A is easier to operate than the operation button 24B. In addition, the operation button 24B is made larger in shape than the operation button 24A and is treated (positioned) as a premium. However, this is not limited to the above, and for example, the operation button 24A presentation and the operation button 24B presentation may be set to the same frequency, or the operation button 24B presentation may be set to a higher frequency than the operation button 24A presentation.

On the other hand, in a specific game state such as game state 3, the frequency of the operation button 24B presentation is set higher than the frequency of the operation button 24A presentation. By setting in this manner, the operation button 24B presentation can be set so that it is more likely to be output in a specific game state. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 123, the frequency of the operation button 24A presentation is set to "0"% in game state 3, but this is not limiting, and the operation button 24A presentation may be set to a frequency lower than the frequency of the operation button 24B presentation and exceeding "0"%.
In addition, in a specific game state, the frequency of the effects of the operation buttons 24A and 24B may be set to be the highest.

Note that the ratio of operation button effects in game states 1 to 3 is an example and is not limited to this.
for example,
(1) A game state in which the ratio of operation button effects is set to "0" (a game state in which no operation button effects appear at all)
(2) A game state in which the ratio of the operation button 24A effect exceeds "0", and the ratio of the operation button 24B effect and the ratio of the operation button 24A + 24B effect are both "0". (3) A game state in which the ratio of the operation button 24B effect exceeds "0", and the ratio of the operation button 24A effect and the ratio of the operation button 24A + 24B effect are both "0" (game state 3 in the above example).
(4) A game state in which the proportion of operation button 24A + 24B effects exceeds "0", and the proportion of operation button 24A effects and the proportion of operation button 24B effects are both "0". (5) A game state in which the proportion of operation button 24A effects and the proportion of operation button 24B effects both exceed "0", and the proportion of operation button 24A + 24B effects is "0". Various settings such as these are possible.

In addition, when multiple types of operation button effects are provided in one game state, it is possible to set the operation button effects that appear less frequently to have a higher expectation of additional bonuses or wins.
For example, by setting "proportion of operation button 24A effects > proportion of operation buttons 24A + 24B effects > proportion of operation button 24B effects," it is possible to set the expectation level to be the highest if the operation button 24A effect does not appear and the operation button 24B effect appears during one game.
On the other hand, even if the game state is advantageous to the player, such as RB (regular bonus) play, where small winning symbols are awarded regardless of the button press order in most games, in game states where executing the operation button presentation is not thought to give the player much hope, it is possible to deliberately set the proportion of operation button presentation to "0."

Furthermore, even in the same game state, it is possible to vary the ratio of operation button effects depending on the result of the role lottery.
For example, when there are non-winning, replay, general small role (e.g. bell), and rare small role (e.g. watermelon, cherry, etc.) as winning roles,
(1) When not winning, and when a replay is won, the ratio of no operation button effect > the ratio of operation button 24A effect (the ratio of operation button 24B effect and the ratio of operation button 24A + 24B effect are both "0")
(2) When a general small win occurs: Proportion of no operation button performance> Proportion of operation button 24A performance> Proportion of operation button 24B performance (proportion of operation button 24A + 24B performance is "0")
(3) When a rare small win is won, it is possible to set the following: percentage of operation button 24A effects > percentage of no operation button effects > percentage of operation button 24B effects > percentage of operation button 24A + 24B effects.

Eighth Embodiment
The eighth embodiment relates to displaying the number of points acquired at the end of a specific period (a type of total display).
Here, "display of number of medals acquired at the end of a specific period" refers to the display, at a specified timing, of the total number of medals awarded (acquired by the player) during the specific period at least before the specified timing when a specific period such as a special game or AT ends.
Here, "at least" is used because there may be cases where the number of medals to be paid out after a specified timing is predicted and added to the total when displaying the number of medals won at the end of a specific period.

It should be noted that although it is expressed as "displaying the number of winnings at the end of a specific period," it does not mean that the number of winnings is displayed at the time when the specific period ends, but rather that it is displayed at any timing, such as at or after the end of the game one game before the final game of the specific period, when a bet operation is executed for the final game of the specific period, when the final game of the specific period begins (when the start switch 41 is operated, when the reels 31 start to spin, etc.), during that final game, at the end of that final game (specific period) (when all reels stop, during the payout process, at the end of the payout process), or after the end of the specific period.
However, the display of the number of winnings (difference in number of coins) from the start of the specific period is not included in the display of the number of winnings at the end of the specific period in this embodiment.
The number of points earned at the end of a specific period is displayed only after the end of the specific period approaches.

Here, during a specific period such as a special game or AT, the total number of difference coins may be constantly displayed in a corner (e.g., the upper right) of the image display area, and updated for each game. For example, when a game is started with three medals bet, the number of bets is updated to a value obtained by subtracting the number of medals bet, and when medals are paid out in the game, the number of medals paid out is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of medals paid out.
Specifically, in Fig. 126(a) described later, "TOTAL: 150 coins" displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 23 does not correspond to the display of the number of coins acquired at the end of the specific period in this embodiment. This display is displayed continuously from the start to the end of a specific period such as a special game or AT, and is not displayed after the start of the final game of the specific period.

Hereinafter, the display of the number of winnings (difference in number of coins) that continues to be displayed from the start to the end of a specific period will be referred to as the "display of the number of winnings during a specific period (a type of total display)."
In contrast, in Figure 127 (m) described later, at the end of a specific period, "TOTAL: 164 coins" is displayed below "Continued G number: 300G" in approximately the center of the screen of the image display device 23, which is the display of the number of coins won at the end of the specific period in this embodiment.
The display of the number of winnings during the specific period is often displayed in a corner (for example, near the upper right) in the image display area of the image display device 23 so as not to interfere with the presentation image. In contrast, the display of the number of winnings at the end of the specific period is often displayed near the center of the image display area of the image display device 23 because its primary purpose is to be visible to the player.
Furthermore, since the display of the number of winnings during the specific period is sufficient for the player to check the number of winnings at the current time, the display is often not displayed larger than necessary so as not to interfere with the presentation image.
In contrast, since the primary purpose of the display of the number of winnings at the end of a specific period is to be shown to the player, it is given priority over the performance image and is often displayed large.

In addition, the display of the number of coins won at the end of the specific period indicates the difference in number of coins (the number of coins paid out minus the number of coins bet) in this embodiment, but it may be the number of coins paid out itself.
Furthermore, when the specific period is a special game, the display of the number of medals won at the end of the specific period may include the number of medals paid out in at least some of the games during the special role before the special game is started.
Furthermore, if the specific period is an AT, the display of the number of medals acquired at the end of the specific period may include the number of medals paid out during preparation for the AT or in a CZ executed before the AT.
On the other hand, if the specific period is an AT, and the number of medals decreases during preparation for the AT or before the AT starts, the display of the number of medals acquired at the end of the specific period may include the amount of the decrease.

In addition, the display of the number of medals earned at the end of a specific period does not necessarily include the number of medals paid out in the final game of the specific period. For example, the display of the number of medals earned at the end of a specific period may be output at the start of the final game of the specific period (when the number of medals paid out in that final game has not yet been determined). When the display of the number of medals earned at the end of a specific period is executed at the start of the final game of the specific period, it may be a display that does not include the number of medals paid out in that final game, or a display that includes the number of medals paid out in that final game (the number of medals paid out in that final game is estimated and added).

In addition, the number of medals paid out based on the winning of a small role is added as the number of medals won at the end of a specific period, but this is optional when displaying a replay. When displaying a replay, the number of medals won at the end of a specific period can be updated as follows.
(1) When the game is started, the number of bets is subtracted from the number of winnings at the end of the specific period. Then, when the replay stops (after the full pause), a number equivalent to the number of bets is added to the number of winnings at the end of the specific period.
For example, if the number of winnings at the end of the specific period before the start of the game is "100," at the start of the game, the number of bets "3" is subtracted from the number of winnings at the end of the specific period to make it "97." Then, when the replay is stopped (after the full stop), the number of winnings at the end of the specific period is added with "3," a number equivalent to the number of bets, to make it "100."
(2) When the game is started, the number of bets is subtracted from the number of winnings at the end of the specific period. Then, when the replay is stopped (after the replay is completely stopped), the number of winnings at the end of the specific period is not changed. In addition, the next game is started with an automatic bet based on the stopped display of the replay, but when the next game starts, the number of bets is not subtracted from the number of winnings at the end of the specific period.
For example, if the number of winnings at the end of the specific period before the start of the game is "100", at the start of the game, the number of bets "3" is subtracted from the number of winnings at the end of the specific period to make it "97". Then, when the replay is stopped (after the full stop), the number of winnings at the end of the specific period is left at "97". At the start of the next game, the number of bets is not subtracted from the number of winnings at the end of the specific period, and it remains at "97".

(3) When the game is started and a replay is won, the number of winnings at the end of the specific period is not changed. And even when the replay is stopped (after the full stop), the number of winnings at the end of the specific period is not changed.
For example, if the number of winnings at the end of the specific period before the start of the game is "100," when a replay is won at the start of the game, the number of winnings at the end of the specific period will remain at "100." And even when the replay stops (after the full stop), the number of winnings at the end of the specific period will remain at "100."

On the other hand, the number of wins during a specific period when the replay is stopped is displayed as follows.
When the game is started, the number of bets is subtracted from the number of wins during the specific period. Then, when the replay is stopped (after the full pause) or when the start switch 41 for the next game is operated, a number equivalent to the number of bets is added to the number of wins during the specific period.
Unlike the number of winnings at the end of the specific period, the number of winnings during the specific period can be returned to the number of bets in the next game, so there is no problem even if the number of bets is reduced at the start of the game in which the replay was won. Also, when the replay is stopped and a number equivalent to the number of bets is added when the start switch 41 of the next game is operated, if the game is the final game of the specific period, the number of winnings during the specific period will remain the number of bets reduced. However, the number of winnings at the end of the specific period can be displayed by adding a number equivalent to the number of bets reduced in the final game, so it is possible to display an appropriate value.

Next, specific examples of the display of the number of winnings at the end of a specific time period will be described with reference to the drawings. Four examples (Example 1 to Example 4) will be shown below with reference to the drawings.
All of Examples 1 to 4 consist of a first half performance (first diagram) and a second half performance (second diagram; the performance following the first half performance), and the first half performance is common to all of Examples 1 to 4 and is the performance shown in Figure 126.
127 to 130 are diagrams showing the latter half of the effects of Examples 1 to 4, respectively.
Example 1: Fig. 126 and Fig. 127
Example 2: Fig. 126 and Fig. 128
Example 3: Fig. 126 and Fig. 129
Example 4: Fig. 126 and Fig. 130
It becomes.

126 and 127 are diagrams for explaining Example 1 of the display of the number of winnings at the end of a specific period. It is assumed that the game progresses from (a) in FIG. 126 to (m) in FIG.
In Examples 1 to 4, the specific period is assumed to be during AT, and the number of bets is assumed to be "3." In addition, when the symbol combination of "●"-"●"-"●" is displayed, a small prize is awarded, and 10 coins are paid out.
In addition, in the figures, the down arrow on the reel 31 (for example, FIG. 126(b)) indicates that the reel 31 is spinning.
Furthermore, in Figs. 126 to 130, the stop switch 42 indicated by a white circle indicates a state in which operation acceptance is not permitted (or a state in which operation has been performed), and the stop switch 42 indicated by a black circle indicates a state in which operation acceptance is permitted.

Figure 126 (a) shows the state before the game starts. In this state, as displayed on the image display device 23, there are two games remaining. Also, at this point in time, the number of coins won during the AT is 150. "TOTAL: 150 coins" displayed in the upper right area of the image display device 23 corresponds to the "display of the number of coins won during a specific period" described above, and the number of coins bet is subtracted each time a coin is bet in a game, and the number of coins paid out is added each time a coin is paid out. In other words, as a general rule, it is updated with each game. And this display continues to be displayed from the start to the end of the AT.

Next, Fig. 126(b) shows the image display content when the start switch 41 is operated. When the start switch 41 is operated, the content of the presentation is changed to the content corresponding to the operation of the start switch 41. Specifically, at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated (or the timing when the reel 31 starts to rotate), the number of remaining games is subtracted by "1" and the display of the number of remaining games is updated to "1". In addition, the display of the number of winnings during the specific period is updated to a display of "147 coins" by subtracting the number of bets "3".
When the start switch 41 is operated, a command related to the number of bets is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, and the sub-control board 80 determines the number of bets for the game from the command related to the number of bets and displays a subtraction of the number of bets. In this case, the display may be updated in one go from "150 coins" to "147 coins," or the display may be updated to count down by "1" (150 → 149 → 148 → 147).

Next, Figures 126(c), (d), and (e) show the left, center, and right stop switches 42 being operated in sequence, respectively, causing the left, center, and right reels 31 to stop. As shown in Figure 126(e), an example is shown in which the symbol combination "●"-"●"-"●" is displayed stopped on the top line. The payout number of the minor combination corresponding to this symbol combination is 10 coins. Then, a payout process of 10 coins is executed, and as shown in Figure 126(f), an acquisition display (an image corresponding to the medal payout; in this example, a "GET" display) is executed in place of the previous performance image. Furthermore, the acquisition number display during the specific period is updated to "157 coins" by adding "10 coins."

Here, when updating the display of the number of coins acquired during the specific period from "147 coins" to "157 coins," the display may be counted up by "1" at the same or similar timing as the actual medal payout or credit addition process. Alternatively, the display of the number of coins acquired during the specific period may be updated from "147 coins" to "157 coins" in one go when the actual medal payout or credit addition process begins.
In addition, since the credit addition process executed by the main control board 50 takes, for example, several hundred ms, if the display of the number of points earned during a specific period is updated all at once at approximately the same time as the credit addition process begins on the main control board 50, the update of the display of the number of points earned during the specific period may be completed first.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 actually executes the medal payout process, it takes about 100 ms per medal, so it takes about 1000 ms to pay out 10 medals. For this reason, if the display of the number of medals acquired during the specific period is updated all at once at approximately the same time as the main control board 50 starts the process of paying out 10 medals, it is considered that the update of the display of the number of medals acquired during the specific period will finish first.
On the other hand, when or after the medal payout process or credit addition process in the main control board 50 is completed, the main control board 50 may send a command related to the addition to the sub-control board 80, and when the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it may update the display of the number of coins won during the specific period from "147 coins" to "157 coins" in one go.

After Figure 126 (f), the screen proceeds to Figure 127 (g), where the remaining number of plays and the number of wins during the specific period remain displayed, but the win display (display of "GET") in Figure 126 (f) is erased, and the screen transitions to the presentation before play begins (play standby state).
The timing for clearing the acquisition display is as follows:
a) When a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the number of acquisitions during a specific period was updated,
b) When the payout process of "10 coins" is started or completed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the payout process of "10 coins" was started or completed,
c) When the bet switch 40 is operated.

127(h) shows the image display content when the start switch 41 is operated. Here, when the start switch 41 is operated (or when the reels 31 start to spin), the remaining number of games is subtracted by "1" and the display of the remaining number of games is updated to "0." In addition, the display of the number of wins during the specific period is updated to "154 coins" by subtracting the bet number "3."
Next, Figures 127(i), (j), and (k) show the state in which the left, center, and right stop switches 42 are operated in sequence, respectively, and the left, center, and right reels 31 are stopped. Then, as shown in Figure 126(k), an example is shown in which the symbol combination "●"-"●"-"●" is displayed stopped on the upper line. As a result, a payout process for 10 medals is executed, and as shown in Figure 127(l), an acquisition display (display of "GET") is displayed in place of the previous performance image. Furthermore, the display of the number of medals acquired during the specific period is updated to "164 medals" by adding "10 medals."

Then, since the game in which the number of remaining games becomes "0" (the final game of the specific period) has ended, after the final game of the specific period has stopped, the number of winnings at the end of the specific period is displayed. Fig. 127(m) shows an example in which "TOTAL: 164 coins" is displayed as the number of winnings at the end of the specific period.
In addition to the display of the number of wins at the end of the specific period, the number of times the game has been continued during the specific period is displayed as an image. Furthermore, in the upper right area of the image display device 23, the display of the number of wins during the specific period up to that point is erased, and a display regarding prevention of addiction to the game (hereinafter referred to as "addiction prevention display") is executed.

Here, the performance image at the end of the specific period is displayed on the image display device 23, but the addiction prevention display is displayed before the said performance image (on the front layer). Therefore, in the area where the addiction prevention display and the said performance image overlap, the addiction prevention display is in front.
Therefore, in the example of Figure 127 (m), the addiction prevention display area and the acquisition number display area at the end of a specific period do not overlap, but if at least a portion of the addiction prevention display area and the acquisition number display area at the end of a specific period overlap, the addiction prevention display will be in front in the overlapping area.

The acquisition display (the "GET" display) in FIG. 127(l) may be displayed while the number of acquisitions at the end of a specific period is being displayed (for example, when FIG. 127(m) is displayed).
In addition, in the example of Fig. 127, a small role of "10 coins" is shown as a winning combination in the final game of the specific period, but the timing of the winning number display at the end of the specific period does not change whether a small role with a payout is won or a replay without a payout is stopped and displayed in the final game of the specific period. Note that when a replay is stopped and displayed, the winning display shown in Fig. 127(l) is not performed.

FIG. 128 is a continuation of FIG. 126, and shows an example 2 of the number of winnings displayed at the end of a specific period.
In this example 2, when the final game of the specific period is stopped, the winning effect (display of "GET") in that game is not performed. In other words, the effect shown in FIG. 127(l) is not executed.
Figures 128(g) to (k) are the same as Figures 127(g) to (k).
In FIG. 128(k), when all reels 31 stop, a small win of 10 coins is won in that game, and a payout process is executed, but without executing the winning performance in the final game, the display proceeds to FIG. 128(l) and displays the number of coins won at the end of the specific period (same as FIG. 127(m)). In this display of the number of coins won at the end of the specific period, the number of coins reflected the payout of 10 coins in the final game. Therefore, at the time of FIG. 128(k), the display of the number of coins won during the specific period is "154 coins", but when the display proceeds to FIG. 128(l) and switches from the display of the number of coins won during the specific period to the display of the number of coins won at the end of the specific period, the display of the number of coins won at the end of the specific period is "164 coins".
In this way, in the final game of the specific period, the winning presentation after all reels 31 have stopped may be omitted and the display may transition to the winning number display at the end of the specific period.
Of course, when the payout process is executed in the final game of the specific period, the winning number is displayed on the winning number display LED 78 on the main control board 50 side.

FIG. 129 is a continuation of FIG. 126, and shows an example 3 of the number of winnings displayed at the end of a specific period.
In this example 3, the winning number display at the end of the specific period is executed at the start of the final game of the specific period (when the start switch 41 is operated and the reels 31 start to rotate).
129(g) does not mean that no effect image is displayed, but rather, for example, an effect image before the final game of the specific period is displayed. At this point, the remaining number of games and the number of wins during the specific period are displayed.
Then, when the start switch 41 is operated (FIG. 129(h)), the remaining number of plays and the number of acquisitions during the specific period are erased, and the acquisition number at the end of the specific period and the addiction prevention display are executed. Note that the presentation image displayed in FIG. 129(g) is displayed after the acquisition number at the end of the specific period and the addiction prevention display (after layer). Therefore, in the part where the presentation image and the acquisition number at the end of the specific period and the addiction prevention display overlap, the acquisition number at the end of the specific period and the addiction prevention display are in front.

Also, before the start of the final game in the specific period, as shown in FIG. 129(g), the number of coins won during the specific period is "157 coins", but when the process proceeds to FIG. 129(h) and the final game begins, the number of coins bet in the final game, "3", is subtracted, so the number of coins won at the end of the specific period becomes "154 coins", and this value is displayed as the number of coins won at the end of the specific period. In this way, when displaying the number of coins won at the end of the specific period at the start of the final game of the specific period, the value with the number of coins bet in the final game subtracted is displayed. However, this is not limited to this, and a value without the number of coins bet in the final game subtracted may be displayed as the number of coins won at the end of the specific period. In this case, the number of coins won up to one game before the final game of the specific period will be displayed as the number of coins won at the end of the specific period.

Next, the left, center, and right stop switches 42 are operated, proceeding to FIG. 129(l), where even after the full stop, the display of the number of balls acquired at the end of the specific period and the display to prevent addiction continue. Note that the presentation image while the display of the number of balls acquired at the end of the specific period and the display to prevent addiction are being executed, in other words, the presentation image during the final game of the specific period, may be a single image as described in the third embodiment, but may also be an image that progresses based on the operation of the stop switches 42.

Also, at the point in Figure 129(k), i.e. until the reels stop completely, the number of coins won at the end of the specific period is displayed as "154 coins." Then, in the final play, the symbol combination "●"-"●"-"●" is displayed, 10 coins are paid out, and this number is added to the number of coins won at the end of the specific period. As a result, in Figure 129(l), the number of coins won at the end of the specific period is updated from "154 coins" to "164 coins."

In addition, when displaying the number of winnings at the end of a specific period at the start of the final game of the specific period (before all the winnings stop), it is also possible to configure it as follows.
For example, if the player wins the push order bell of "PB ≠ 1" in the final game of the specific period, or if the player wins the push order-independent bell of "PB = 1", there is a high possibility that "10 coins" will be won in the final game. In such a case, the number of coins estimated to be won in the final game can be added in advance and displayed as the number of coins won at the end of the specific period at the start of the final game of the specific period (before all the coins stop).
Therefore, if this example is applied to example 3 in Fig. 129, "TOTAL: 164 sheets" is displayed at the timing of Fig. 129(h). This display continues until the final Fig. 129(l).
At the time shown in Figure 129 (g), the number of coins won during the specific period is displayed as "157 coins," and when the display progresses to Figure 129 (h) (at the start of play) the number of coins won at the end of the specific period is displayed as "164 coins," the player will know that he or she has won a 10-coin role in the final game.

Also, if the player wins the "PB ≠ 1" push order bell in the final game of the specific period and the number of coins won at the end of the specific period is displayed by adding the number of coins won in the final game as described above, and if the player makes a mistake in the push order and is unable to win "10 coins," the number of coins won at the end of the specific period may be corrected to the correct value (154 coins) at the point in Figure 129 (l). Alternatively, even if the player makes a mistake in the push order in the final game and is unable to win "10 coins," this may be ignored and the display of the number of coins won at the end of the specific period displayed in Figure 129 (h) may continue until the end.

Furthermore, in the example of Figure 129, the addiction prevention display is executed at the start of the final game of the specific period together with the winning number display at the end of the specific period, but this is not limited to this, and the addiction prevention display may be executed at the timing of Figure 129 (l) after the complete pause. Therefore, in this case, the winning number display at the end of the specific period (and the number of continued games) is executed at the start of the final game of the specific period, and after the complete pause of the final game, the addiction prevention display is executed in addition to the winning number display at the end of the specific period.

FIG. 130 is a continuation of FIG. 126, and shows an example 4 of the number of winnings displayed at the end of a specific period.
In this example 4, an anti-addiction display is performed at the start of the final game of the specific period (when the start switch 41 is operated and the reels 31 start to spin), and then the number of winnings at the end of the specific period is displayed.
At the time of Fig. 130(g), the remaining number of games and the number of wins during the specific period are displayed. Then, when the final game of the specific period starts and the display of the remaining number of games and the number of wins during the specific period is displayed, the display of the addiction prevention is executed. Note that, although Fig. 129(h) shows only the addiction prevention display, in reality, the presentation image for the final game of the specific period is displayed, and the addiction prevention display is executed by superimposing it in front of the presentation image.
Next, proceeding to Fig. 130(i), in addition to the addiction prevention display, the number of continuous games in the specific period is displayed.Furthermore, proceeding to Fig. 130(j), in addition to the addiction prevention display and the number of continuous games, the number of wins at the end of the specific period is displayed.At this point, all reels 31 are spinning (at the start of the game), and the stop switch 42 has not yet been operated.

The above-mentioned display of the prevention of addiction, the number of times to continue playing, and the number of coins won at the end of the specific period will continue until the end of the game (when the game stops completely). If a 10-coin role is won in this final game, the display will move from FIG. 130(k) to FIG. 130(l), and the number of coins won at the end of the specific period will be updated from "154 coins" to "164 coins" (the number of coins won in the final game will be added).

In Fig. 130, when moving from the state shown in (k) to the state shown in (l), if a no medal error (hopper empty, hereafter referred to as an "HE error") occurs while the number of medals acquired at the end of a specific period is being incremented, the following processing may be performed, for example. In the following example, suppose that an HE error has occurred when the display is incremented by "+5" from "154 medals" to "159 medals."
In addition, if an HE error occurs while the specific period acquisition number is being incremented, the display on the image display device 23 will switch to a display indicating that an HE error has occurred, and the display of the specific period acquisition number will be temporarily interrupted.

Example 1) After the HE error is cleared, the display of the number of coins acquired at the end of the specific period may be returned to its initial state. In this case, after the HE error is cleared, the display of the number of coins acquired at the end of the specific period may return to "154 coins", and then the display is incremented by "+10" to "164 coins". Note that the number of coins acquired at the end of the specific period is again displayed with an increment of "+10", but since five coins have already been paid out on the main control board 50 side, the number of coins paid out after recovery from the HE error is +5 coins.
Example 2) After the HE error is released, when the display of the number of coins won at the end of the specific period is restored, it displays "164 coins," in other words, the display of the number of coins won at the end of the specific period is restored with all the winning numbers of the game added up. Therefore, after the HE error is released and the display of the number of coins won at the end of the specific period is restored, no increment display is performed.

To summarize the patterns of the number of points acquired at the end of the specific period mentioned above, the following patterns can be mentioned.
(1) In the final game of a specific period, the number of coins won at the end of the specific period may be displayed after all coins have stopped and after a payout process. In this case, if there is a payout in the final game, the number of coins won at the end of the specific period is displayed by adding the number of coins paid out. If the number of coins won at the end of the specific period can be displayed including the number of coins paid out in the final game, a more accurate value can be displayed as the number of coins won at the end of the specific period. Many players would like to take a photo of the number of coins won at the end of the specific period, and players are interested in how many coins they ultimately won, so this configuration meets the player's wishes.
In addition, if the payout number (estimated value) in the final game is added and the winning number at the end of the specific period is displayed before the payout process in the final game of the specific period is executed, there is a risk that the number actually paid out up to that point and the number displayed as the winning number at the end of the specific period will differ for a long time if an HE error occurs in the final game as described above. In contrast, if the winning number at the end of the specific period is displayed after the payout process in the final game, such a risk can be avoided.

(2) After starting the final game of the specific period, the number of winnings at the end of the specific period may be displayed before the full stop. By displaying the number of winnings at the end of the specific period before the full stop, the player can be notified quickly that the specific period will end in that game. Here, even if there is a payout in the final game, the number of winnings at the end of the specific period may be displayed without adding the payout amount. In this way, the display of the number of winnings at the end of the specific period is not too conspicuous, and the player can be directed to the setting suggestion by the ending screen of the specific period and whether or not a revival performance will be executed.
In addition, in this case, the display of the number of winnings at the end of the specific period will not be erased at least until the final game is completed, so that, for example, in the state shown in Figure 130 (j) (without operating the stop switch 42), the player can take his or her time to photograph the display of the number of winnings at the end of the specific period.
Furthermore, when the display of the number of winnings at the end of the specific period is executed after the start of the final game of the specific period, the number of winnings at the end of the specific period may be displayed by subtracting the number of bets in the final game. By executing the display of the number of winnings at the end of the specific period from the number of bets, it is possible to display the accurate number at the timing when the display of the number of winnings at the end of the specific period starts.

(3) In the case where the display of the number of winnings at the end of the specific period is executed after the start of the final game of the specific period and before the full stop, when a small win is won in the final game, the display of the number of winnings at the end of the specific period is executed by adding the payout number (estimated value) in the final game. In this way, the display of the number of winnings at the end of the specific period that reflects the payout number in the final game can be executed, and the display of the number of winnings at the end of the specific period can be executed before the full stop of the final game (early).
In addition, if, after the start of the final game and before the game stops, the display of the number of medals to be won at the end of the specific period is executed by adding the number of medals to be paid out in the final game (estimated value), and if the player wins the push order bell in the final game but does not operate the stop switch 42 in the correct push order and therefore is unable to win the number of medals that was estimated to be added in advance, then the display of the number of medals to be won at the end of the specific period may or may not be revised.
If you modify the display of the number of points earned at the end of a specific period, a more accurate number can be displayed.
On the other hand, if the display of the number of acquisitions at the end of the specific period is not modified, the program processing can be simplified.

(4) When the number of winnings at the end of a specific period is displayed before a full stop in the final game of the specific period, if a payout is made in that final game, after the full stop, the number of winnings at the end of the specific period already displayed may be updated by adding the payout number in the final game.
In this case, the payout number in the last game may be added to the winning number at the end of the specific period all at once (at one time), or a count-up display may be displayed that adds "1" at a time. By displaying the count-up, the player can easily know that the winning number at the end of the specific period reflects the payout number in the last game.

(5) When the display of the number of acquisitions at the end of the specific period overlaps with the addiction prevention display, the addiction prevention display may be made the front layer and the addiction prevention display may be made the back layer. This allows the addiction prevention display to be displayed preferentially during the period when the display of the number of acquisitions at the end of the specific period overlaps with the addiction prevention display, so that the player does not overlook the warning.
However, during the display of the number of medals acquired at the end of the specific period, it is preferable that the portion displaying the number of medals does not overlap with the addiction prevention display. Alternatively, when displaying the number of medals acquired at the end of the specific period, by providing at least a certain period during which the addiction prevention display is not executed, the player can correctly view the display of the number of medals acquired at the end of the specific period without it being obstructed by the addiction prevention display.

(6) In the above example, the winning number at the end of the specific period is displayed after the start of the final game of the specific period (when the start switch 41 is operated and the reels 31 start to rotate). However, this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to display the winning number at the end of the specific period after the game one game before the final game of the specific period ends and before the start of the final game of the specific period.
For example, when a replay is won in a game one game before the final game of a specific period, the replay is stopped and displayed in that game, and an automatic bet process is executed, the display of the number of winnings at the end of the specific period may be executed after the automatic bet process. In other words, in this case, the display of the number of winnings at the end of the specific period is executed before the start of the final game of the specific period (before the start switch 41 is operated).
Also, when the game before the final game of the specific period is finished and a medal insertion operation (betting operation) is performed for the next game (final game), the display of the number of winnings at the end of the specific period may be executed. In this case, as in the above, the display of the number of winnings at the end of the specific period is executed before the start of the final game of the specific period (before the start switch 41 is operated).

Furthermore, examples of timing for ending (erasing) the display of the number of acquisitions at the end of the specific period after the display of the number of acquisitions at the end of the specific period include the following.
(1) After the final game of the specific period is completed, the display of the number of winnings at the end of the specific period may be terminated when the player places a bet for the next game (non-specific period) or when the start switch 41 is operated. In this way, the display of the number of winnings at the end of the specific period will not be terminated unless the player performs an operation to proceed to the next game, so that the player can take ample time to take photographs, etc.

(2) When a predetermined time has elapsed after the final game of the specific period has ended (when all the balls have stopped or when the payout process has ended) or after the display of the number of balls won at the end of the specific period has started, the display of the number of balls won at the end of the specific period may be ended. In this way, the display of the number of balls won at the end of the specific period may be ended without being longer than necessary.
Alternatively, after starting to display the number of acquisitions at the end of the specific period, when the display transitions to a demonstration screen, the display of the number of acquisitions at the end of the specific period may be terminated.
(3) When the settlement switch 43 is operated after starting to display the number of winnings at the end of the specific period, the display of the number of winnings at the end of the specific period may be terminated. When the settlement switch 43 is operated, it is considered that the player has indicated his/her intention to end the game, and thereafter, there is little need to continue displaying the number of winnings at the end of the specific period.

(4) After starting to display the number of winnings at the end of the specific period, when the operation button 24 is operated to move to the menu screen (when the menu screen is displayed), the display of the number of winnings at the end of the specific period may be ended. This is because when the menu screen is displayed, it is considered that the intention to end My Slot has been indicated (the operation to display the two-dimensional code reflecting the game results has been performed), and thereafter, there is little need to continue displaying the number of winnings at the end of the specific period.
(5) If an error occurs after the display of the number of points acquired at the end of the specific period has started, the display may switch to a screen showing the error and end the display of the number of points acquired at the end of the specific period. Therefore, in this case, even if the error is resolved, the display will not return to the number of points acquired at the end of the specific period.

In addition, after the display of the number of acquisitions at the end of the specific period is ended (deleted), the display of the number of acquisitions at the end of the specific period may not be resumed. On the other hand, for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the display of the number of acquisitions at the end of the specific period that has been once ended may be resumed.
For example, if the specification is such that the display of the number of winnings at the end of a specific period is ended when the settlement switch 43 is operated, it would be cruel to the player if the player accidentally touches the settlement switch 43 even though he or she has no intention of ending the display of the number of winnings at the end of the specific period, ending the display of the number of winnings at the end of the specific period, and then having no means of resuming the display.

In such a case, the display of the number of acquisitions at the end of the specific period may be made resumable, for example, by operating the operation button 24 to move to a menu screen or by performing a specific operation of the cross key. In such a case, even after the display of the number of acquisitions at the end of the specific period is ended by operating the settlement switch 43, the data of the display of the number of acquisitions at the end of the specific period is temporarily stored in the RWM 83 and is kept until the conditions for finally deleting the data of the display of the number of acquisitions at the end of the specific period are met. Then, in the above example, when the operation button 24 is operated or a specific operation of the cross key is performed, the data of the display of the number of acquisitions at the end of the specific period is read and the number of acquisitions at the end of the specific period is displayed again on the image display device 23.

Ninth embodiment
The ninth embodiment relates to the display (push order notification) of an image showing the operation mode of the stop switch (in this embodiment, the push order).
In the following example, the manner of operation of the stop switches corresponds to the order in which the stop switches are pressed.
Figure 131 is a diagram illustrating example 1 of an image display of the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed in the ninth embodiment, where (1) indicates the correct order and (2) indicates the incorrect order.
The correct order of pressing the stop switch 42 is displayed as an image, for example, when the pressing order bell is won during the AT.
In both cases of "(1) when the button press order is correct" and "(2) when the button press order is incorrect", the game progresses from (a) to (d).

In the example of Figure 131, the correct button press sequence announced is "123 (left center right)", and when the button press sequence is correct, an example of the left button stopping first is shown, and when the button press sequence is incorrect, an example of the center button stopping first is shown.
As shown in Fig. 131 (1) (a), when the correct button press sequence is announced (after the start switch 41 is operated and before the stop switch 42 is operated), an image of the button press sequence and a presentation image (background image, character image) are displayed. Note that the images in this case are not limited to still images and include moving images.

In “(1) When the button press order is correct” in Figure 131, (a) shows an notification image of the correct button press order before the stop switch 42 is operated, and is an example in which images of the button press orders “1,” “2,” and “3” and performance images for each button press order image are displayed.
The layers are the image of the push order (forward) and the image of the performance (backward). For this reason, for example, as shown in FIG. 131(1)(a), in the part where the image of the push order "1" and the performance image overlap, the image of the push order "1" is displayed in front.

When the left stop switch 42 is operated in the state shown in Figure 131 (1) (a) (therefore, the first stop is the correct push order), the display advances to (b) in the figure, where the image of the push order "1" corresponding to the operated left stop switch 42 is highlighted. Furthermore, as shown in (c) and (d) in the figure, the image of the push order "1" is then gradually reduced in size, and is configured to finally disappear. In this way, when the push order is correct, the image of the correct push order is configured to be erased with an effect applied.

The effect image (character image) corresponding to the image of the push sequence "1" is displayed as if it is thrown backwards when the stop switch 42 is operated, and is configured to eventually disappear, just like the push sequence image. Furthermore, when the image of the push sequence "1" and its effect image are erased, the image of the push sequence "2" and its effect image are displayed larger (as if coming to the foreground) compared to (a), as shown in (d) in the figure.

In contrast, in "(2) When the button press order is incorrect" in Figure 131, (a) is an example in which, like (a) in Figure 131(1), an notification image of the correct button press order before operating the stop switch 42 (images of the correct button press order "1,""2," and "3" and a performance image) is displayed.
In this state, if the middle stop switch 42 is operated (therefore, the push order is incorrect at this point), the process proceeds to (b) of Fig. 131 (2), and based on the fact that the operated push order is incorrect, all (the entire) images of the push order "1", "2", and "3" displayed on the screen are erased. Here, when the push order is incorrect, the images of the push order "1", "2", and "3" are erased all at once (at one time) rather than gradually disappearing as they do when the push order is correct.

In this way, by erasing all of the push sequence images, it is possible to inform the player that he or she pressed the button incorrectly. Here, for example, if only the push sequence image corresponding to the incorrect push sequence is erased, the player may not realize that he or she pressed the button incorrectly, and may continue to operate the stop switch 42 in accordance with the image display at the second stop. In order to prevent the player from performing such a wasteful operation, the entire push sequence image is erased if the push sequence was incorrect at the first stop. Also, there is no point in leaving some of the push sequence image after the push sequence has been determined to be incorrect.

Furthermore, if the push order images are gradually erased when the push order is incorrect, there is a risk that the push order images will be erased after all stop switches 42 have been operated. Therefore, when the push order is incorrect, by immediately erasing all of the push order images at the time the push order is incorrect, the player can be informed that the push order is incorrect (the player has made a mistake in the push order) before the end of the game.
From the above, comparing when the button press sequence is correct and when it is incorrect, when the button press sequence is correct, only the image of the correct button press sequence is gradually erased from the button press sequence image, but when the button press sequence is incorrect, the entire button press sequence image is immediately erased.

On the other hand, as shown in (b) to (d) of Figure 131 (2), the presentation images (character images, background images) other than the button press sequence image are updated in the same manner as when the button press sequence is correct.
For example, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated under the circumstances shown in FIG. 131(2)(a), the effect image corresponding to the image of the push order "1" (the left character image of the three character images) is erased. That is, the update of the effect image is configured to be the same when the push order is correct and when it is incorrect. In other words, when the push order is incorrect, the effect image corresponding to the middle stop switch 42 (the center character image of the three character images) is not erased just because the middle stop switch 42 is operated first.
Therefore, for example, in Figure 131 (2), even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of middle, right, left (incorrect button press order), the performance images (character images) are erased in the order of left, middle, right, corresponding to the correct button press order.

In this way, the manner in which at least the push order image (front layer) of the presentation image is erased differs depending on whether the push order is correct or incorrect, so that the player can easily determine whether or not the push order is correct in that game by looking at the manner in which the push order image is erased.
Furthermore, since the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated to the time the push-order image is erased differs depending on whether the push-order is correct or incorrect, it is easy to know whether the push-order is correct in the game based on the time it takes for the push-order image to be erased.

Furthermore, when the push order is incorrect, the push order image is erased in its entirety, so that no image of the incorrect push order remains, thereby preventing the player from feeling embarrassed.
If the entire push order image is not erased when the push order is incorrect, and the remaining push order notification continues, the player may be misled into thinking that a favorable game result can be obtained by operating the stop switch 42 in the remaining push order. Therefore, by erasing the entire push order image when the push order is incorrect, it is possible to prevent such a misunderstanding.
On the other hand, the deletion (update, change) mode of the performance image (character image, background image) (back layer) is the same whether the button is pressed correctly or incorrectly, so the program processing can be shared and the data capacity can be reduced. Also, since the button press error can be made less noticeable, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling a sense of loss.

In addition, Figure 131 (2) shows an example in which the button press sequence is incorrect at the first stop, but if the button press sequence is incorrect at the second stop, the control will be as follows.
First, when the button is pressed correctly with the first stop on the left, the state goes through (b) and (c) in Figure 131 (1) to (d).
Next, if the push order is incorrect at the second right stop, the images of push orders "2" and "3" are erased all at once. Furthermore, the effect corresponding to the image of push order "2" is erased in a manner that makes it fly backwards as described above. This updates the image to that shown in FIG. 132(2)(c) described later.

Figure 132 is a diagram illustrating example 2 of an image display of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed in the ninth embodiment, where (1) indicates the correct order and (2) indicates the incorrect order.
In Fig. 132(1), (a) shows an image before the stop switch 42 is operated. Then, when the left stop switch 42 is operated (the push order is correct), the image of the push order "1" and the corresponding effect image are erased, and the images of the push orders "2" and "3" and the effect images corresponding to each push order image remain (Fig. 132(1)(b)).
Next, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated (correct button press sequence), the image of button press sequence "2" and the corresponding presentation image are erased, and the image of button press sequence "3" and the corresponding presentation image remain (Figure 132 (1) (c)).
Furthermore, when the right stop switch 42 is operated, the image of the push order "3" and the corresponding effect image are erased. Also, since the push order is correct, the push order bell is won and a payout process of a predetermined number of medals is executed. Also, a winning image (an image of "GET!!") indicating that a medal has been won is displayed (Figure 132 (1) (d)).

On the other hand, in Fig. 132(2), (a) shows an image before the stop switch 42 is operated. Then, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated first (incorrect push order), the entire push order image and the effect image (left character image) corresponding to push order "1" (left stop switch 42) are erased, and the effect images (character images) corresponding to push orders "2" (middle stop switch 42) and "3" (right stop switch 42) remain (Fig. 132(2)(b)).
Next, when the left stop switch 42 is operated (incorrect pressing sequence), the performance image (center character image) corresponding to pressing sequence "2" (middle stop switch 42) is erased, and the performance image (right character image) corresponding to pressing sequence "3" (right stop switch 42) remains (Figure 132 (2) (c)).

Furthermore, when the right stop switch 42 is operated, the effect image (character image) corresponding to the push sequence "3" (right stop switch 42) is erased (Figure 132 (2) (d)). Also, if the push sequence is incorrect, the winning image is not displayed, whether it is a missed win or a low bell win. Note that instead of displaying the winning image, images such as "Lose" or "Miss" may be displayed.

133 is a diagram illustrating Example 3 of an image display of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed in the ninth embodiment. In Example 3, the relationship between the back lamp effect and the win effect will be described.
As mentioned above, the back lamps are lamps (nine in total) that are arranged on the inner periphery of each reel 31 to illuminate from behind the patterns displayed on the reels 31 (three consecutive patterns visible from above and below through the display window), and are configured to be able to light, flash, and turn off independently.
133(a) shows an image before the stop switch 42 is operated. In this example, similar to the above-mentioned examples 1 and 2, images of the push order "1", "2", and "3" and performance images (character images) corresponding to each push order image are displayed.

Then, when the player operates the left stop switch 42, the left reel 31 stops. In this case, as shown in (b), the image of the push sequence "1" and its corresponding effect image are erased, and the images of the push sequences "2" and "3" and their corresponding effect images remain. Next, when the player operates the middle stop switch 42, the middle reel 31 stops. In this case, as shown in (c), the image of the push sequence "2" and its corresponding effect image are erased, and the image of the push sequence "3" and its corresponding effect image remain.
Next, when the player operates the right stop switch 42, the right reel 31 stops. At this time, a symbol combination of "●"-"●"-"●" stops on the middle line, and a small prize is awarded.

When all the stop switches 42 are operated, the process proceeds to (d), and the image of the push sequence "3" and the corresponding performance image are erased.
Furthermore, as a back lamp effect, only the middle line (winning line) is lit or flashes (the upper and lower lines are turned off). In the figure, the black upper and lower lines indicate the back lamp is turned off.
In addition, simultaneously with the back lamp effect, an effect of lighting the reel window frame lamps and other lamps 21 may be output.
Furthermore, when all the reels 31 have stopped and a small winning combination has been achieved, a medal payout process is executed.
When a small win occurs, as shown in (e), a winning effect (display of "GET!!") is executed. When the winning effect starts, the back lamp effect is still ongoing. In other words, in this example, the winning effect is executed after the back lamp effect starts.

Next, the process proceeds to (f) where the back lamp effect is terminated. At the end of the back lamp effect, the winning effect is still ongoing. Then, the process proceeds to (g) where the winning effect is terminated.
In this way, in the flow of Example 3,
(1) Start of the back lamp performance (2) Start of the acquisition performance (3) End of the back lamp performance (4) End of the acquisition performance.

In addition, the payout process is executed immediately after all the reels 31 are stopped as shown in (c). However, since the payout process is completed in a short time,
(1) At the end of the payout process, the back lamp effect and the win effect have not yet started. (2) At the end of the payout process, the back lamp effect has started but the win effect has not yet started. (3) The back lamp effect and the win effect start before the payout process ends, but the back lamp effect and the win effect have not yet ended at the end of the payout process.

In this way, the player plays the game while paying attention to the push order image until the push order image is erased, so by showing the backlight effect and the winning effect after the push order image is erased, the player can see all of these effects together (as a series of events). Also, the player can intuitively feel that the push order was correct and that the medals were won.
Furthermore, by not ending the back lamp effect and the acquisition effect when the payout process is completed, the game can be played at a good tempo without any discomfort, and appropriate effects can be output at appropriate timing during the progress of the game.

Although the seventh to ninth embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
A. Seventh embodiment (1) In the case where an operation switch (bet switch 40, start switch 41, stop switch 42, or settlement switch 43) connected to the main control board 50 is operated instead of the operation button 24A or 24B, and an effect is output (developed) when the operation switch is operated, it is also possible to execute a reel effect. For example, an effect may be executed in which the reel 31 is caused to swing or rotate in the reverse direction and then stopped at a predetermined position.
(2) The operation button 24A or 24B is provided at the position shown in Fig. 121, but the position of the operation button 24A or 24B is not limited thereto as long as the operation button 24A or 24B is provided at a position where the player can operate the operation button during a game. For example, the operation button 24A or 24B may be provided next to the display window. Alternatively, the entire lower panel 10a may be used as the operation button 24B.

(3) After the operation button effect is output, the situation after the operation button 24A or 24B is operated can be classified as "success of the operation button effect" or "failure of the operation button effect." A "success of the operation button effect" corresponds to, for example, an added effect being output, the effect developing, an effect that improves the situation being output, or an effect that heightens expectations being output. Also, a "failure of the operation button effect" corresponds, for example, to the status quo being maintained, with no added effect being output or no development of the effect. Note that when the operation button effect fails, the background image from the time of the operation button effect continues to be displayed.
If the time from when the operation button is operated to when the operation button effect is erased is "T1" (when the operation button effect is successful) or "T2" (when the operation button effect fails), it is preferable that "T1<T2". This is because if the operation button effect disappears immediately when the operation button 24A or 24B is operated when the operation button effect fails, it becomes unclear whether the operation button 24A or 24B has been operated or not. For this reason, by erasing the operation button effect over a certain amount of time (not immediately erasing it) when the operation button effect fails, it becomes possible to convince the player.

B. Eighth embodiment (1) In the above embodiment, when the number of winnings at the end of the specific period is displayed, the number of continued games is also displayed. However, it is also possible to display only the number of winnings at the end of the specific period and not the number of continued games.
(2) In the above embodiment, the display of the number of acquisitions at the end of the specific period is not executed while the display of the number of acquisitions during the specific period is executed, and the display of the number of acquisitions during the specific period is not executed after the display of the number of acquisitions at the end of the specific period is executed. However, this is not limited to this, and there may be a period in which the display of the number of acquisitions during the specific period and the display of the number of acquisitions at the end of the specific period are executed simultaneously.
For example, in Figure 127 (l), the display of the number of coins acquired during a specific period, "TOTAL: 164 coins," shown in the upper right corner, may remain displayed even when proceeding to Figure 127 (m), and then the display of the number of coins acquired during the specific period may be erased and switched to an anti-addiction display.

(3) The display of the number of winnings during the specific period may be ended (erased) at any time. For example, it may be at the end of the game before the final game of the specific period, when a bet is made after the game before the final game of the specific period is ended, at the start of the final game of the specific period (when the start switch 41 is operated or when the reels 31 start to rotate), during the final game of the specific period (for example, when the first, second or third stop switch 42 is operated), at the end of the final game of the specific period (when the payout process ends), etc.

(4) In the case where an addiction prevention display is executed at the start of the final game of a specific period (for example, FIG. 130(h)), when the push order bell is won in the final game and the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is notified, the addiction prevention display and the notification of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 are not overlapped. In other words, the addiction prevention display can alert the player and enable the player to correctly understand the correct push order in the final game.
Similarly, when the display of the number of winnings at the end of the specific period is executed at the start of the final game of the specific period (for example, FIG. 130(j)), if the push order bell is won in the final game and the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is notified, the display of the number of winnings at the end of the specific period and the notification of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 are not overlapped. In this way, the number of winnings at the end of the specific period can be shown to the player, and the player can correctly understand the correct push order in the final game.

(5) The display of the number of winnings at the end of the specific period can also be executed in the next game (non-specific period) after the final game of the specific period. For example, the display of the number of winnings at the end of the specific period can be executed for a predetermined time at the start of the next game after the final game of the specific period (when the start switch 41 is operated, when the reel 31 starts to rotate). In this case, after the display of the number of winnings at the end of the specific period is executed, when the specific time has passed, the display of the number of winnings at the end of the specific period can be ended (deleted).
In addition, it is also possible to display the number of winnings at the end of a specific period after the final game of the specific period, and then continue the display until the start of or partway through the next game (non-specific period) following the final game of the specific period.
Therefore, the display of the number of acquisitions at the end of the specific period may continue for a non-specific period. Furthermore, the display of the number of acquisitions at the end of the specific period may not be executed during the specific period, but may be executed when the period transitions to a non-specific period.

(6) The display of the number of winnings during a specific period may or may not be updated at the final game of the specific period.
Specifically, if there is a payout in the final game of the specific period, the game result of the final game is reflected in the display of the number of wins during the specific period, as shown in Fig. 127(l). After that, the display of the number of wins at the end of the specific period is executed (Fig. 127(m)). Therefore, in this case, the number of wins during the specific period at the end of the final game and the number of wins at the end of the specific period are the same number.
On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 128(k), even if there is a payout in the final game of the specific period, the display of the number of wins during the specific period may be ended without reflecting the payout number of the final game of the specific period in the display of the number of wins during the specific period.Then, the display of the number of wins at the end of the specific period that is subsequently displayed shows the number that reflects the payout number of the final game of the specific period (Fig. 128(l)).

(7) In cases where the display of the number of winnings at the end of a specific period is executed even after the end of the final game of the specific period, a freeze process may be executed for a predetermined time at the end of the final game of the specific period, and the display of the number of winnings at the end of the specific period may be executed while frozen for this predetermined time, so that the display of the number of winnings at the end of the specific period is not erased for at least the predetermined time. In particular, in cases where the addictive prevention display is executed together with the addictive prevention display at the end of the specific period, the freeze process can guarantee a minimum time for which the addictive prevention display is displayed.

C. Ninth embodiment (1) When the push order image is erased when the push order is correct, various patterns can be mentioned, not limited to the content shown in FIG. 131 (1). For example, first, there is a pattern in which the push order image is erased by exploding, a pattern in which the transparency of the push order image is gradually increased (opaque → semi-transparent → transparent), a pattern in which the push order image is gradually made smaller and finally disappeared, etc. Furthermore, there is a combination of these, for example, a pattern in which the push order image gradually becomes transparent and small.

(2) The size of the images of the three push sequences may be the same or may be different. For example, in FIG. 131 (1), the image of push sequence "1" corresponding to the left stop switch 42 that should be operated first is displayed larger than the images of push sequences "2" and "3". This is not limited to this, and they may all be the same size, or the size relationship of the push sequence images may be "image of push sequence "1" > image of push sequence "2" > image of push sequence "3"" according to the correct push sequence.

In addition, when the push order image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated first is displayed larger than the push order images corresponding to the other stop switches 42, after the stop switch 42 is operated, the push order image corresponding to the next stop switch 42 to be operated may be changed to be larger than the push order images corresponding to the remaining stop switches 42, as shown in FIG. 131(1)(d). Specifically, in the situation in FIG. 131(1)(a), the image for push order "2" and the image for push order "3" are approximately the same size, but in the situation in FIG. 131(1)(d), the image for push order "2" is displayed larger than the image for push order "3".

Furthermore, for example, if the correct push sequence is displayed as "123" and the size of the push sequence image is "image of push sequence "1"> image of push sequence "2"> image of push sequence "3"" (note that "image of push sequence "1"> image of push sequence "2" = image of push sequence "3" may also be possible), the left stop switch 42 corresponding to the image of push sequence "1" is operated, and the image of push sequence "1" is erased with an effect. In this case, the image of push sequence "2" (the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated next) may start to get larger before the image of push sequence "1" completely disappears. In this way, the player can quickly recognize the stop switch 42 to be operated next.
Furthermore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated as in the above example to make the image of the push order "2" larger, the image of the push order "3" may or may not be made larger. When the image of the push order "3" is not made larger, the image of the push order "2" stands out more, which can prevent the player from making a mistake in the push order.
Furthermore, if the size of the push order image is set as "image of push order "1"> image of push order "2" = image of push order "3," and after the left stop switch 42 is operated, if only the image of push order "2" is enlarged, the image of push order "2" will be more noticeable, as described above, thereby preventing the player from pressing the wrong order.

(3) When the entire push order image is erased when the push order is incorrect, it may be erased instantly, or may be erased in a pattern of gradually increasing transparency (opaque → semi-transparent → transparent), or may be erased in a pattern of gradually decreasing the size of the entire push order image and finally disappearing. In other words, when the entire push order image is erased when the push order is incorrect, it may be erased over a certain period of time (for example, about 0.5 to 1 second).
In addition, when a failure sound (sound effect) is output to inform the player that the push order is incorrect, it is preferable to output it after the push order image is erased. In this way, the push order image is erased to visually inform the player that the push order is incorrect, and then audio can be used to supplement the fact that the push order is incorrect. In this way, the player can be informed in stages that the push order is incorrect, making it easier for the player to understand the situation.

(4) In the above embodiment, the operation of the stop switch is determined by the order in which the stop switch is pressed. However, this is the case when the pressing order is the same and the reel can be stopped on a valid line with "PB=1".
On the other hand, if the pressing order of the stop switch 42 matches and the target symbol must be pressed to stop the reel on the active line, the image display (notification) shows symbol information (symbol type, symbol color, etc.) to be pressed in addition to the pressing order of the stop switch 42. Therefore, the "operation mode of the stop switch" in this case corresponds to the pressing order of the stop switch and the symbol information.

(5) The back lamp effect is not limited to the example shown in which the winning line is lit or blinks and the others are turned off. Normally, all nine back lamps are lit, but any other state can be said to be a back lamp effect. For example, the following patterns can be mentioned.
a) A pattern in which a specific back lamp is turned on or blinks and the other back lamps are turned off regardless of the winning line.
b) A pattern in which a specific back lamp is turned on and the other back lamps are turned on or off regardless of the winning line.
c) A pattern in which all the back lamps are blinked (turned on and off).

(6) For example, in “(1) When the button press sequence is correct” in FIG. 131, the time from the moment the left stop switch 42 is operated to the moment the image of the button press sequence “1” is erased is “T1,” and in “(2) When the button press sequence is incorrect” the time from the moment the middle stop switch 42 is operated to the moment the images of the button press sequences “1” to “3” are erased is “T2.” In the above embodiment, it was explained that “T1 > T2.”
This relationship also applies when the first stop is pressed in the correct order and the second stop is pressed in the incorrect order.
For example, if the first stop is the correct push order, then the time from the moment the second stop, which is the correct push order, is operated to the moment the corresponding push order image is erased is defined as "T1," and the time from the moment the second stop, which is the incorrect push order, is operated to the moment all of the remaining push order images are erased is defined as "T2," so that "T1 >T2."
However, the relationship is not limited to "T1>T2" as described above, and it is also possible to have "T1=T2" or "T1<T2".

(7) In the above embodiment, the manner in which the push order image is erased is different depending on whether the push order is correct or incorrect, and the manner in which other effect images (background images) are updated (erased) is the same. However, this is not limited to the above, and when the push order is incorrect, an image specific to an incorrect push order may be displayed for effect images (background images) other than the push order image.

(8) The timing of the start and end of the back lamp effect and the start and end timing of the acquisition effect are not limited to the examples described above, and various patterns can be mentioned.
For example, first,
The order may be as follows: 1) Start of the winning effect; 2) Start of the back lamp effect; 3) End of the winning effect; 4) End of the back lamp effect.
Secondly,
The order of the effects can be as follows: 1) Start of the back lamp effect; 2) Start of the acquisition effect; 3) End of the acquisition effect; 4) End of the back lamp effect.
And thirdly,
The order of the winning effect can be as follows: 1) Start of the winning effect; 2) Start of the back lamp effect; 3) End of the back lamp effect; 4) End of the winning effect.

(9) When the push order image is displayed, when a stop operation (correct push order) is performed, the push order image for the operated stop switch 42 is erased, and then the operation of the remaining stop switches 42 becomes valid.
In particular, the system is configured so that after a stop operation (correct push order) is performed, the push order image for the operated stop switch 42 is erased, and the push order image for the next stop switch 42 to be operated becomes larger, the operation of the remaining stop switches 42 becomes valid. By configuring in this way, the timing when the stop switches 42 can be operated can be suggested to the player, thereby realizing a game with a good tempo.

Tenth Embodiment
Next, a tenth embodiment will be described.
The tenth embodiment relates to a slot machine 10 capable of executing an announcement game (AT) during a special game (1BB game).
In the tenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 140 described later, the "special role (role)" includes "1BB (first type role continuous operation device; first type big bonus)", "RB (first type special role; regular bonus)" and "SB (single bonus)". Therefore, the "special game" includes "1BB game", "RB game" and "SB game".

"1BB" is a device that can activate "RB" continuously.
In addition, "SB" is a device that can execute an SB game consisting of one game. When the SB game ends, the game state before the transition to the SB game is returned to.
Furthermore, "1BB" and "RB" are special roles that allow winning information to be carried over to the next game or later, and "SB" is a special role that does not allow winning information to be carried over to the next game or later.
When a special role capable of carrying over winning information to the next game or later is won, the winning information of the special role is carried over to the next game until a symbol combination corresponding to the special role is stopped and displayed on an effective line (the special role wins).

In the tenth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the "RB" is drawn in the "general game during 1BB game (meaning a game other than RB game)." Then, when the "RB" is won in the "general game during 1BB game" and a symbol combination corresponding to the "RB" is stopped and displayed (the "RB" wins), the "general game during 1BB game" is switched to the "RB game." For this reason, the "RB" drawn in the "general game during 1BB game" is also called an "SRB (shift RB)."
In addition, in the tenth embodiment, "1BB" has five types, "1BB-A" to "1BB-E", "RB" has four types, "RB-A" to "RB-D", and "SB" has two types, "SB-A" and "SB-B".

In the tenth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the role selection means 61 determines a "winning number" by lottery. For this reason, the role selection means 61 is also referred to as a "winning number selection (determination, selection) means." Furthermore, when the winning number is determined, a "condition device number" corresponding to the winning number is generated. When the condition device number is generated, a condition device corresponding to the condition device number is activated, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role included in the activated condition device can be displayed stopped on the pay line (a winning role).

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, the "condition device number" includes a "gimmick condition device number" and a "minor role and replay condition device number."
Furthermore, the "gimmick condition device number" is a condition device number corresponding to a special role (gimmick), and in the tenth embodiment, includes numbers "1" to "11" as shown in FIG. 140 described later.
Furthermore, the "small win and replay condition device number" is a condition device number corresponding to a small win or a replay, and in the tenth embodiment, includes "1" to "47" as shown in Figures 141 to 146 described later.

In addition, the "special role win" is also called the "operation of the special role condition device." For example, the "1BB-A win" is also called the "1BB-A condition device operation."
Furthermore, the "small win" is also called "small win condition device operation", and the "replay win" is also called "replay condition device operation". For example, the "small win A1" is also called "small win A1 condition device operation".

Furthermore, when a special role is won (the role condition device is activated), but the symbol combination corresponding to the special role that was won (the role condition device that was activated) is not displayed on the pay line, this is called "inside". In other words, a game in which the winning information of the special role is carried over is called "inside".
For example, when "1BB-A" is won, but the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is not displayed stopped on the pay line, this is called "inside 1BB-A."

In contrast, a game in which a special role that can be carried over to the next game or later has not been won (a game in which the role condition device is not activated) is referred to as a "non-internal game."
In this embodiment, the game in which a special role is won (the role condition device is activated) is included in the "non-internal" category, but the game in which a special role is won may also be included in the "internal" category.
In addition, the "special game" is also referred to as the "operation state of the special feature (when the special feature is operated)." For example, the "1BB-A game" is also referred to as the "1BB-A operation state (when 1BB-A is operated)."

Furthermore, "when the reel is not activated" includes a state in which the reel condition device is activated but the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination included in the activated reel condition device is not displayed stopped on the pay line.
For example, when the 1BB condition device is not activated, or when the 1BB condition device is activated but the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination included in the activated 1BB condition device is not displayed on the active line, it is called "1BB not activated". In other words, when the 1BB is not won, or when the 1BB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the 1BB is not displayed on the active line (within the 1BB), it is 1BB not activated. The same applies to RB.

Moreover, the meanings of "RT" and "non-RT" are the same as in the first embodiment.
In the tenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 171 described later, "RT" includes "non-RT" and "RT1" to "RT5".
"RT2" is "when the 1BB-A to 1BB-D condition device is activated,""RT3" is "when the 1BB-E condition device is activated,""RT4" is "when the 1BB-A or 1BB-B is activated," and "RT5" is "when the RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated while the 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated."

In addition, the "expected number of medals paid out" refers to a value calculated for all condition devices that are subject to lottery in that game state by adding up the "winning probability of the condition device" x "winning probability of the winning role included in the condition device" x "number of medals paid out when winning."
Furthermore, when operation information of the stop switch 42 is notified, it refers to the "expected number of medals to be paid out" when the stop switch 42 is operated in an operation manner based on the notified operation information.
For example, if the stop switch 42 is operated in an operation manner based on the notified operation information, and the winning role included in the activated condition device always wins (with a 100% probability), the "probability of winning the winning role included in the condition device" is set to "1" and the "expected number of medals to be paid out" is calculated.

In addition, the "ball payout rate" refers to the value obtained by dividing the expected number of medals paid out by the number of bets ("expected number of medals paid out/number of bets").
Furthermore, when operation information of the stop switch 42 is notified, it refers to the "ball payout rate" when the stop switch 42 is operated in an operation manner based on the notified operation information.
When the "ball payout rate" is "1", the number of medals is maintained, when the "ball payout rate" exceeds "1", the number of medals increases, and when the "ball payout rate" is less than "1", the number of medals decreases.

In addition, the "setting value" relates to the degree of advantage of the player, and in the tenth embodiment, six levels are provided, from "setting 1" to "setting 6." The higher the setting value, the higher the degree of advantage of the player.
When the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the power is on, the setting values cannot be changed but the device transitions to a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting values can be confirmed.
When the power is turned off and the setting key switch 152 is turned on, the device transitions to a setting change state (setting change mode) in which the setting values can be changed. At this time, an initialization process (RWM clear process) is executed to initialize a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

Examples of the specified memory areas of RWM53 that are subject to the initialization process include a "memory area for information regarding the instruction function (advantageous zone)," a "memory area for information regarding RT," a "memory area for information regarding the operation of the reel condition device (winning of a special role)," and a "memory area for information regarding the operation of the reel (execution of a special game)."
For example, when the initialization process is executed when "1BB-A to 1BB-E condition device is activated (1BB-A to 1BB-E inside)", by clearing the information relating to "1BB-A to 1BB-E condition device activated (1BB-A to 1BB-E winning)", it is possible to subsequently set it to "1BB-A to 1BB-E condition device is not activated (not inside)".

In addition, when the initialization process is executed when "1BB-A to 1BB-D are in operation (1BB-A to 1BB-D are being played)", the information related to "1BB-A to 1BB-D in operation" can be cleared, and thereafter the device can be set to "1BB-A to 1BB-E condition device not in operation (not in the internal state)".

However, when the initialization process is executed "when 1BB-E is in operation (during 1BB-E play)", information regarding "1BB-E operation" may be cleared, or may be maintained without being cleared.
As will be explained later, during non-AT when 1BB-E is activated, the payout rate is less than "1" just like during non-AT when not inside (RT1), and the player's medals decrease, so there is no risk of causing a disadvantage to the hall even if information regarding "1BB-E activation" is maintained without being cleared during the initialization process.

In addition, when "1BB-E is activated," it is the time when the reel is activated, so no lottery is held for the reel condition device (special role (bonus)), and therefore the "1BB-A to 1BB-D condition devices" do not activate (win), which puts the player at a disadvantage in this respect.
However, as described later, when "1BB-E is activated," the "Chance Zone (CZ)" where the probability of winning the AT lottery is set high and the "CZ High Probability Zone" where the probability of transitioning to the Chance Zone is set high are alternately repeated. Furthermore, when the "Small Role I Condition Device" to the "Small Role V Condition Device" (rare role) are activated (won) in the "Chance Zone (CZ)," the right to play the notification game (AT) is granted.

Therefore, when "1BB-E is activated," the probability of being granted the right to play the notification game (AT) is higher than during non-internal play (RT1).
Furthermore, since the above-mentioned initialization process is performed after the hall closes or before it opens, by maintaining the information relating to "1BB-E operation" during the initialization process without clearing it, it is possible to increase the probability of granting the right to play the notification game (AT) in a relatively early time period after the hall opens.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, the start condition of the "advantageous zone" is set to the activation of any of the role condition devices or any of the minor role condition devices as a result of a lottery by the role selection means 61 in a non-advantageous zone (normal zone).
That is, in the non-advantageous zone (normal zone), if any special role or any minor role is won in the lottery by the role selection means 61, the zone will transition to the advantageous zone.
For this reason, in the tenth embodiment, even if the advantageous zone ends and the player moves to the non-advantageous zone, the player immediately moves to the advantageous zone. Therefore, in the tenth embodiment, the player stays in the advantageous zone most of the time, and the player rarely plays in the non-advantageous zone.

Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, the conditions for ending the "favorable zone" are set to when the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", when the favorable zone clear counter (number of plays during the favorable zone) reaches "1500 (D)", when the notification game (AT) ends, or when the right to execute the notification game (AT) is not possessed at the time when the operation of the device ends.
In other words, if the difference in the number of coins in the advantageous zone exceeds 2,400 coins, the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaches 1,500 plays, the notification game (AT) ends, or the right to execute the notification game (AT) does not exist at the end of the special game, the advantageous zone ends and transitions to the non-advantageous zone (normal zone).

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, in a game in which the role condition device is activated (a special role is won), an "AT lottery" is executed to determine whether or not the right to play an announcement game (AT) is granted. The winning probability of the AT lottery when the "1BB-A or 1BB-B condition device" is activated is set to "100%," and the winning probability of the AT lottery when the "1BB-C or 1BB-C condition device" is activated is set to "10%". In addition, the winning probability of the AT lottery when the "1BB-E condition device" is activated is set to "50%," and the winning probability of the AT lottery when the "SB-A or SB-B condition device" is activated is set to "5%".

Therefore, when the "1BB-A or 1BB-B condition device" is activated, the right to play the notification game is granted with a "100%" probability, and when the "1BB-C or 1BB-D condition device" is activated, the right to play the notification game is granted with a "10%" probability. Furthermore, when the "1BB-E condition device" is activated, the right to play the notification game is granted with a "50%" probability, and when the "SB-A or SB-B condition device" is activated, the right to play the notification game is granted with a "5%" probability.

Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, an AT lottery is executed when the "small role I condition device" to the "small role V condition device" are activated. The "small role I condition device" to the "small role V condition device" have a relatively low probability of activation (winning), and are referred to as "rare roles". The probability of winning the AT lottery when the "small role I condition device" to the "small role V condition device" are activated is set to "10%". If the AT lottery is won when the "small role I condition device" to the "small role V condition device" are activated, the right to play the notification game is granted.

When the player has the right to play the notification game and the conditions for starting the notification game are satisfied, the notification game starts.
In the tenth embodiment, the initial value of the number of times the notification game is played is set to "50 games." When the right to play the notification game is granted and the start condition of the notification game is satisfied, the notification game is played for "50 games."

Furthermore, in the case where a player already has the right to play the notification game, when the player wins the AT lottery, the number of rights to play the notification game is increased (added). For example, when a player has two rights to play the notification game, the player can play the notification game for "(50 games + 50 games =) 100 games".
Furthermore, when the AT lottery is won during the execution of the notification game, the remaining number of times of the notification game is added. For example, when the AT lottery is won when the remaining number of times of the notification game is "20 games", the remaining number of times of the notification game becomes "(20 games + 50 games =) 70 games".

In the tenth embodiment, as in the other embodiments, the instruction function can be activated and the push order suggestion effect can only be executed during advantageous zones, and the instruction function can not be activated and the push order suggestion effect cannot be executed in non-advantageous zones (normal zones). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the instruction function is activated and the push order suggestion effect is executed, it is considered to be an advantageous zone.

The "external signal" is a signal outputted to the outside of the slot machine 10 (such as the hall computer 200 or a data counter installed in the hall) via the external centralized terminal board 100. In the tenth embodiment, an external signal is outputted indicating that an alert game (AT) is in progress or that a special game is in progress.
At the start of the notification game (AT), the output of the external signal is started (turned on), the output of the external signal is maintained (on) during the notification game, and the output of the external signal is ended (turned off) at the end of the notification game. Similarly, the output of the external signal is started at the start of the operation of the accessory, the output of the external signal is maintained during the operation of the accessory, and the output of the external signal is ended at the end of the operation of the accessory.

FIG. 134 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on the reel 31 in the tenth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 134, in the tenth embodiment, like the first embodiment, each reel 31 consists of 20 frames.
In addition, the symbol numbers are also shown in Figure 134. For example, on the left reel 31, the symbol number 0 is "REPLAY".

Also, in the tenth embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the maximum number of moving symbols from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to "4".
For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated immediately before the number 1 "Bell" on the left reel 31 crosses the pay line, the symbols can move up to a maximum of four symbols from that symbol, up to the number 5 "Replay", and stop on the pay line.

Therefore, as in the first embodiment, for example, if four specific symbols are arranged on one reel 31 at intervals of five symbols, the specific symbols can always be stopped on an active line regardless of the position at which the stop switch 42 is operated.
Specifically, on the left reel 31, "Replays" are arranged at numbers 5, 10, 15, and 0. That is, on the left reel 31, four "Replays" are arranged at intervals of five symbols. Therefore, for the left reel 31, no matter when the left stop switch 42 is operated, "Replays" can always be stopped on an active line. Note that such a symbol arrangement is sometimes referred to as a "PB=1" arrangement. On the other hand, a symbol arrangement other than this is sometimes referred to as a "PB≠1" arrangement.

On the left reel 31 and the center reel 31, the "replay" and "bell" are respectively arranged as "PB=1".
Additionally, on the right reel 31, the "replay", "bell" and "watermelon" are each arranged as "PB=1".
Furthermore, on the right reel 31, the four symbols "Blue 7" at No. 4, "Red 7" at No. 9, "Black BAR" at No. 14, and "White 7" at No. 19 are combined to form a "PB=1" arrangement. Therefore, no matter when the right stop switch 42 is operated, any of the "Blue 7", "Red 7", "Black BAR", or "White 7" can be stopped on an active line.

FIG. 135 is a diagram showing the display window 18, the relative positions of the reels 31, and the pay lines (display lines showing symbol combinations).
In the tenth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, three reels 31 are arranged so as to be visible from the display window 18, and three symbols on each reel 31 are arranged so as to be visible. As a result, a total of nine symbols (frames) are arranged so as to be visible from the display window 18. The designations of the symbol positions (for example, "upper left row") are as shown in FIG. 3(B) of the first embodiment.

Moreover, the meaning of the "effective line" is the same as in the first embodiment.
In the tenth embodiment, the only effective line is the middle line that passes through "left middle" - "middle middle" - "right middle" as shown in FIG. 135, and the other lines are invalid lines.
Specifically, for example, the upper line that passes through the "top left" - "top middle" - "top right"; the lower line that passes through the "bottom left" - "bottom middle" - "bottom right"; the downward sloping line that passes through the "top left" - "middle middle" - "bottom right"; and the upward sloping line that passes through the "bottom left" - "middle middle" - "top right" are all invalid lines.
The effective lines and ineffective lines are collectively referred to as "symbol combination lines."

136 to 139 are diagrams showing the types of winning combinations (such as winning combinations corresponding to winning numbers drawn by the winning combination drawing means 61), symbol combinations, payout numbers, etc. in the tenth embodiment.
The winning combinations are broadly divided into special winning combinations, replay winning combinations, and small winning combinations.
A symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination and the number of medals to be paid out when a winning combination is achieved are also determined. When all the reels 31 come to a stop, if a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination stops on an active line (the winning combination is achieved; the same applies below), the number of medals corresponding to that winning combination is paid out (a dividend (profit) is awarded).
However, the number of medals to be paid out when a special combination is won is set to 0. In addition, in the case of a replay, the same number of medals as in the previous game are automatically inserted, and a replay can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 136, the game states in the tenth embodiment include when the reel is not activated (reel is not activated state), when the reel is not activated with 1BB activated (1BB activated state), and when RB is activated (RB activated state), and the specified number of coins for each of these game states is set to "3".
In Figures 136 to 139, "3 coins (1)" corresponds to the time when the reels are not activated, and particularly in the tenth embodiment, corresponds to a game other than "when 1BB-A to 1BB-E are activated (1BB-A to 1BB-E game)."

In addition, "3 coins (2)" corresponds to the time when 1BB is activated but the special device is not activated, and in particular in the tenth embodiment, corresponds to "the time when RB-A to RB-D are not activated but 1BB-C to 1BB-E are activated (general play during play of 1BB-C to 1BB-E (including when not inside SRB and when inside SRB))."
Furthermore, "three coins (3)" corresponds to when RB is activated, and particularly in the tenth embodiment, corresponds to "when RB-A or RB-B is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated (during SRB play while playing 1BB-C or 1BB-D)," or "when RB-C or RB-D is activated when 1BB-E is activated (during SRB play while playing 1BB-E)."

For example, in FIG. 136, "1BB01" for the role number "1" means that it is subject to the lottery when the specified number is 3 (1) (when the role is not activated), but is not subject to the lottery when the specified number is 3 (2) (when the role is not activated when 1BB is activated) or when the specified number is 3 (3) (when RB is activated).
The role numbers "1" to "12" shown in FIG. 136 correspond to special roles (roles). In the tenth embodiment, six types of "1BB (1BB01 to 1BB06)", four types of "RB (RB01 to RB04)", and two types of "SB (SB01 to SB02)" are provided as special roles.

In the tenth embodiment, since the RB lottery is not conducted when the reel is not activated, there is no case where the transition occurs from when the reel is not activated to when the RB is activated.
When 1BB is won when the device is not in operation, if 1BB is won, no medals are paid out in the current game, but from the next game, the game will move to the 1BB operation time (1BB game), which corresponds to a special game.

When 1BB is activated (1BB game), a lottery for RB is held. If RB is won during 1BB activation and RB is awarded, no medals are paid out in the current game, but the game will move to RB activation (RB game) during 1BB activation (1BB game) from the next game.
In the tenth embodiment, the time when 1BB is activated but RB is not activated may be referred to as "general game of 1BB game".
When the termination condition for RB operation is met, if the termination condition for 1BB operation is met, the 1BB operation is terminated and the game transitions to a state where the reel is not in operation (normal game play).
On the other hand, when the termination condition for RB operation is satisfied, if the termination condition for 1BB operation is not satisfied, the state transitions to the state when RB is not in operation but 1BB is in operation.

Furthermore, if the SB is won and a prize is awarded when the device is not activated, no medals will be paid out in the current game, and the SB will be activated (SB game) in the next game. Furthermore, the SB operation ends after one game. Furthermore, a SB lottery is also held when the SB is activated, and if the SB is won and a prize is awarded when the SB is activated, no medals will be paid out in the current game, and the SB will be activated again in the next game. And if the SB operation ends without the SB being won or awarded, the game state before the SB was activated will be restored.

The combination numbers "13" shown in Fig. 136 to "62" shown in Fig. 137 all correspond to replays (replay combinations). In the tenth embodiment, the replays include ten types of replays, "replay 01" to "replay 10".
As shown in Figures 136 and 137, "Replay 01" to "Replay 10" are eligible for the lottery when the reel is not activated (3 coins (1)), when the reel is not activated when 1BB is activated (3 coins (2)), and when RB is activated (3 coins (3)).

The combination numbers "63" shown in FIG. 137 to "134" shown in FIG. 139 all correspond to small combinations. In the tenth embodiment, the small combination includes 22 types of "small combination 01" to "small combination 22".
As shown in Figures 137 to 139, the number of coins to be paid out when winning for "Small Winning Role 01" to "Small Winning Role 07" and "Small Winning Role 22" is set to "10 coins", the number of coins to be paid out when winning for "Small Winning Role 15" is set to "3 coins", and the number of coins to be paid out when winning for "Small Winning Role 08" to "Small Winning Role 14" and "Small Winning Role 16" to "Small Winning Role 21" is set to "1 coin".
Also, as shown in Figures 137 to 139, "small prize 01" to "small prize 21" are eligible for selection when the special feature is not activated (3 coins (1)), when the special feature is not activated when 1BB is activated (3 coins (2)), and when RB is activated (3 coins (3)). Meanwhile, "small prize 22" is eligible for selection only when RB is activated (3 coins (3)).

For each of the above-mentioned roles, when a symbol combination corresponding to a winning role does not stop on an active line in a game in which the winning role is won, roles that are carried over to the next game and roles that are not carried over are determined.
In the tenth embodiment, the carried over combinations are 1BB and RB. Since the symbol combinations of 1BB and RB are both set to "PB ≠ 1", there may be cases where the game in which 1BB or RB is won does not win. When 1BB or RB is won, the winning information of the 1BB or RB is controlled to be carried over to the next game or later in the game until the 1BB or RB is won.

On the other hand, when a minor win or replay is won, the winning combination is only valid for the current game, and the winning information is not carried over to the next game or later. In other words, in a game in which such a combination is won, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can stop on an active line, but regardless of whether the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination stops on an active line or not, the right to the winning combination will be extinguished at the end of the game.

140 to 146 are diagrams showing a condition device in the tenth embodiment.
Fig. 140 shows a reel condition device. As shown in Fig. 140, the reel condition device has 11 types from the "1BB-A condition device" corresponding to the reel condition device number "1" to the "SB-B condition device" corresponding to the reel condition device number "11".
For example, when the winning number "2" is drawn by the prize drawing means 61, the prize condition device number "1" and the small prize and replay condition device number "33" are generated from the winning number "2" (FIG. 147). Then, the "1BB-A condition device" (FIG. 140) corresponding to the prize condition device number "1" and the "small prize J condition device" (FIG. 146) corresponding to the small prize and replay condition device number "33" are activated.

The "1BB-A condition device" is drawn during non-RT or RT1 (Figures 147 and 149).
In addition, the winning combination of the "1BB-A Condition Device" is set to "1BB01" (FIG. 140). Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB01" is set to "white 7"-"white 7"-"white 7" (FIG. 136). Therefore, when the "1BB-A Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "1BB01" can stop on an active line (can win a prize).

In addition, the notes section of Figure 140 shows the operating conditions, performance, and termination conditions of the reels.
When the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB01" is displayed stopped on an active line, no medals will be paid out in the current game, but from the next game onwards, the game will transition to "1BB-A activation time (1BB-A game)". In other words, the condition for transitioning to the "1BB-A activation state" is that the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB01" is displayed stopped on an active line.

When "1BB-A is in operation", "RB-E" operates continuously.
In addition, the "RB-E operating state (RB-E game)" ends when two games are played, two wins are won, or the "1BB-A operating state" ends. In other words, the end conditions for the "RB-E operating state" are that two games are played, two wins are won, or the "1BB-A operating state" ends.

Then, when the termination conditions for the "RB-E operation state" are met, if the termination conditions for the "1BB-A operation state" are also met, the "1BB-A operation state" is terminated and the state transitions to the state when the reels are not in operation (RT1).
On the other hand, when the termination condition of the "RB-E activated state" is satisfied, if the termination condition of the "1BB-A activated state" is not satisfied, the state will again be "RB-E activated state." In this way, "RB-E" operates continuously during "1BB-A activation."
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "RB-E" is not set. Therefore, during "1BB-A operation", the symbol combination corresponding to "RB-E" is not displayed in a stopped state, and "RB-E" is operated continuously.

In addition, during "1BB-A in operation (1BB-A game in progress)", a lottery is performed by the role selection means 61 based on the number table shown in Figures 155 to 156, which will be described later. Therefore, during "1BB-A in operation", the "small role X condition device" operates with a probability of "61536/65536" for all set values. Furthermore, when the "small role X condition device" operates, regardless of the operation mode (push order and operation timing) of the stop switch 42, one of "small role 01" to "small role 07" (each pays out 10 medals) will win. Therefore, during "1BB-A in operation", "3 medals" are inserted and "10 medals" are paid out almost every time the game is played, so the player's medals increase.

Furthermore, the "1BB-A operating state" continues until the number of medals acquired (number of medals paid out, number of medals awarded) exceeds "210 medals."
In the "1BB-A operation state", when the number of medals acquired exceeds "210", the "1BB-A operation state" ends. In other words, the end condition for the "1BB-A operation state" is that the number of medals acquired exceeds "210".

The "1BB-B condition device" is drawn during non-RT or RT1 (Figures 147 and 149).
In addition, the "1BB-B condition device" differs from the "1BB-A condition device" in that the winning role is set to "1BB02" (Figure 140) and the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB02" is set to "red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7" (Figure 136). However, it is similar to the "1BB-A condition device" in that "RB-E" operates continuously during "1BB-B operation (1BB-B play)" and that the "1BB-B operation state" ends when the number of medals won exceeds "210".

The "1BB-C condition device" is drawn during non-RT or RT1 (Figures 147 and 149).
In addition, the winning combination of the "1BB-C condition device" is set to "1BB03" (Figure 140), and the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB03" is set to "white 7"-"white 7"-"red 7" (Figure 136).
When the "1BB-C condition device" is activated, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB03" is stopped and displayed on an active line, no medals will be paid out in the current game, but from the next game onwards, the game will transition to "1BB-C activated state (1BB-C game)". In other words, the condition for transitioning to the "1BB-C activated state" is that the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB03" is stopped and displayed on an active line.

"1BB-C in operation" is different from "1BB-A in operation" in that "RB-E" does not operate continuously.
When the conditions for transition to the "1BB-C operating state" are met, first, transition is made to "when 1BB-C is operating but RB is not operating and the RB condition device is not operating (general play of 1BB-C game and SRB is not inside)."
In addition, when "RB is not in operation while 1BB-C is in operation and the RB condition device is not in operation," a lottery is held for the "RB-A condition device" and the "RB-B condition device" (SRB).
Furthermore, if the "RB-A condition device" or "RB-B condition device" is won when "RB is not activated and the RB condition device is not activated when 1BB-C is activated", the game will move to "RB-A condition device activated" or "RB-B condition device activated". In other words, the game will move to "RB-A condition device activated or RB-B condition device activated when 1BB-C is activated (general game of 1BB-C game and in SRB)".

Furthermore, when the symbol combination corresponding to "RB01" is displayed stopped on an active line "when the RB-A condition device is activated while 1BB-C is activated," the game transitions to "when RB-A is activated while 1BB-C is activated (RB-A game during 1BB-C game (SRB game))."
Similarly, if the symbol combination corresponding to "RB02" is displayed stopped on an active line when "the RB-B condition device is activated when 1BB-C is activated," the game transitions to "when RB-B is activated when 1BB-C is activated (RB-B game during 1BB-C game (SRB game))."

The "RB-A operating state when 1BB-C is operating (SRB game)" ends when 12 games have been played, 8 wins have been made, or the "1BB-C operating state" has ended. In other words, the conditions for ending the "RB-A operating state when 1BB-C is operating" are that 12 games have been played, 8 wins have been made, or the "1BB-C operating state" has ended.

Then, when the termination conditions of the "RB-A operation state when 1BB-C is activated" are satisfied, if the termination conditions of the "1BB-C operation state" are also satisfied, the "1BB-C operation state" is terminated and a transition is made to the state when the reels are not activated (RT1).
On the other hand, when the termination condition of "RB-A operating state when 1BB-C is operating" is satisfied, if the termination condition of "1BB-C operating state" is not satisfied, the state again becomes "RB not operating when 1BB-C is operating and RB condition device not operating".
The same applies to "when RB-B is in operation while 1BB-C is in operation" as to "when RB-A is in operation while 1BB-C is in operation."

Furthermore, the "1BB-C operating state" continues until the number of medals acquired exceeds "210 medals."
In the "1BB-C operation state", when the number of medals acquired exceeds "210", the "1BB-C operation state" ends. In other words, the end condition for the "1BB-C operation state" is that the number of medals acquired exceeds "210".

In addition, when "RB is not in operation while 1BB-C is in operation and the RB condition device is not in operation (general play of 1BB-C game and SRB is not inside)", a lottery is conducted by the role selection means 61 based on the number placement table shown in Figures 157 to 158 described later.
For this reason, when "RB is not activated when 1BB-C is activated and the RB condition device is not activated," for all setting values, one of the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" to "Small Role B6 Condition Device" (all of which are push order bells) will be activated with a probability of "30,480/65,536,"

In addition, when "RB is not activated when 1BB-C is activated and the RB condition device is not activated," if the "small prize A1 condition device" to "small prize B6 condition device" are activated and the stopping operation is performed in the correct button press sequence, a small prize that pays out 10 coins will be won, but if the stopping operation is performed in a button press sequence other than the correct button press sequence, a small prize that pays out 1 coin will be won.
Therefore, if the correct button press sequence is announced when the "small prize A1 condition device" through the "small prize B6 condition device" are activated when "1BB-C is activated but RB is not activated and the RB condition device is not activated," the player can perform the stopping operation in the announced button press sequence to win a small prize that pays out 10 coins, thereby increasing the number of medals (the payout rate will exceed "1").

In contrast, if the correct button press sequence is not announced when the "Small Prize A1 Condition Device" through the "Small Prize B6 Condition Device" are activated when "1BB-C is activated but RB is not activated and the RB condition device is not activated," then the player will only have a 1/6 chance of winning the small prize that pays out 10 coins, and therefore will not be able to increase the number of medals (the payout rate will be less than 1).
Therefore, when "RB is not activated while 1BB-C is activated and the RB condition device is not activated," the payout rate will exceed "1" or be less than "1" depending on whether or not the correct button press sequence is notified.

In addition, when "RB is not activated while 1BB-C is activated and the RB-A condition device is activated or the RB-B condition device is activated (general play of 1BB-C game and inside SRB)", a lottery is conducted by the role selection means 61 based on the number placement table shown in Figures 159 to 160 described later.
For this reason, when "RB is not activated while 1BB-C is activated and the RB-A condition device is activated or the RB-B condition device is activated", just like when "RB is not activated while 1BB-C is activated and the RB condition device is not activated while 1BB-C is activated", one of the "small prize A1 condition device" to "small prize B6 condition device" will be activated with a probability of "30480/65536" for all setting values.

However, unlike when "1BB-C is activated and RB is not activated and the RB-A condition device or the RB-B condition device is activated," when the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize B6 condition device" are activated, a small prize (common bell) that pays out 10 coins will be won, regardless of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 (the order in which it is pressed and the timing of operation), when "1BB-C is activated and RB is not activated and the RB condition device is not activated."

In addition, in the case of setting 1, when "RB is not activated while 1BB-C is activated and the RB-A condition device or the RB-B condition device is activated," there is a probability of "18600/65536" that one of the replay condition devices will activate.
Furthermore, in the case of setting 1, the probability of not winning when "RB is not activated when 1BB-C is activated and the RB-A condition device or the RB-B condition device is activated" is set to "12178/65536."
Therefore, when "RB is not activated while 1BB-C is activated and the RB-A condition device or the RB-B condition device is activated," the payout rate exceeds "1," allowing the player to increase the number of medals.

In addition, when "RB-A is activated or RB-B is activated when 1BB-C is activated (during SRB play of 1BB-C play)", a lottery is conducted by the role selection means 61 based on the number placement table shown in Figures 165 to 166 described later.
For this reason, in the case of setting 1, when RB-A or RB-B is activated while 1BB-C is activated, the "small prize W condition device" is activated with a probability of "36958/65536". When the "small prize W condition device" is activated, regardless of the operation mode (push order and operation timing) of the stop switch 42, either "small prize 08" to "small prize 14" or "small prize 17" to "small prize 21" (each pays out one coin) will be won.

In addition, in the case of setting 1, when "RB-A or RB-B is activated while 1BB-C is activated," there is a probability of "20778/65536" of not winning.
For this reason, when "RB-A is activated while 1BB-C is activated or RB-B is activated," the payout rate becomes less than "1," and the player's medals decrease.

In this way, when "1BB-C is activated",
(1) "When 1BB-C is in operation and RB is not in operation and the RB condition device is not in operation (when 1BB-C is in general play and SRB is not inside)"
(2) "When RB is not activated during 1BB-C operation and the RB-A condition device is activated or the RB-B condition device is activated (when 1BB-C game is in general play and inside SRB)"
(3) "When RB-A or RB-B is activated while 1BB-C is activated (during SRB play of 1BB-C game)"
There are three game states:

Furthermore, when "RB is not in operation while 1BB-C is in operation and the RB condition device is not in operation (general play of 1BB-C game and not inside SRB)," the payout rate will exceed "1" or be less than "1" depending on whether or not the correct button press sequence is announced.
In addition, when "RB is not activated while 1BB-C is activated and the RB-A condition device is activated or the RB-B condition device is activated (general play of 1BB-C game and inside SRB)", the payout rate exceeds "1", so the player can increase the number of medals.

Furthermore, when "RB-A is in operation while 1BB-C is in operation or RB-B is in operation (during SRB play in 1BB-C play)", the payout rate becomes less than "1" and the player's medals decrease.
Therefore, when "1BB-C is activated," it is most advantageous for the player to play when "RB-A condition device is activated or RB-B condition device is activated (inside SRB)," and it is most disadvantageous for the player to play when "RB-A is activated or RB-B is activated (during SRB play)."

The "1BB-D condition device" is drawn during non-RT or RT1 (Figures 147 and 149).
In addition, the "1BB-D Condition Device" differs from the "1BB-C Condition Device" in that the winning role is set to "1BB04" (Figure 140) and the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB04" is set to "red 7"-"red 7"-"white 7" (Figure 136), but in other respects it is similar to the "1BB-C Condition Device."
In other words, when "RB is not in operation while 1BB-D is in operation and the RB condition device is not in operation (during general play of 1BB-D game and not inside SRB)," a lottery is held for the "RB-A condition device" and the "RB-B condition device" (SRB), similar to the "1BB-C condition device."

Also, similarly to the "1BB-C condition device," when the "RB-A condition device" or "RB-B condition device" is won, the game transitions to "when the RB-A condition device is activated when 1BB-D is activated or when the RB-B condition device is activated (when 1BB-D is in general play and inside the SRB)."
Furthermore, when a symbol combination corresponding to "RB01" or "RB02" is displayed stopped on an active line, the device transitions to "when RB-A or RB-B is activated while 1BB-D is activated (RB-A game or RB-B game during 1BB-D game (SRB game))", just like the "1BB-C condition device."
Furthermore, similarly to the "1BB-C condition device," if the number of medals acquired in the "1BB-D operating state" exceeds "210 medals," the "1BB-D operating state" ends.

The "1BB-E condition device" is drawn during non-RT or RT1 (Figures 147 and 149).
In addition, the winning combinations of the "1BB-E condition device" are set to "1BB05" and "1BB06" (FIG. 140). Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB05" is set to "Blue 7"-"Blue 7"-"Blank", and the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB06" is set to "Blue 7"-"Blank"-"Blue 7" (FIG. 136).
When a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB05" or "1BB06" is stopped and displayed on an active line during "1BB-E condition device operation", no medals are paid out in the current game, but the game will transition to "1BB-E operation (1BB-E game)" from the next game. In other words, the condition for transitioning to the "1BB-E operation state" is that a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB05" or "1BB06" is stopped and displayed on an active line.

"1BB-E in operation" differs from "1BB-A in operation" in that "RB-E" does not operate continuously.
When the conditions for transitioning to the "1BB-E operating state" are met, first, the state transitions to "when 1BB-E is operating and RB is not operating and the RB condition device is not operating (general play of 1BB-E game and SRB is not inside)".
In addition, when "1BB-E is in operation but RB is not in operation and the RB condition device is not in operation", unlike when "1BB-C is in operation but RB is not in operation and the RB condition device is not in operation", a lottery is held for the "RB-C condition device" and the "RB-D condition device" (SRB).
Furthermore, if the "RB-C condition device" or "RB-D condition device" is won when "RB is not in operation and the RB condition device is not in operation during 1BB-E operation", the game will move to "RB-C condition device in operation" or "RB-D condition device in operation". In other words, the game will move to "RB-C condition device in operation or RB-D condition device in operation during 1BB-E operation (general game of 1BB-E game and in SRB)".

Furthermore, when the symbol combination corresponding to "RB03" is displayed stopped on an active line "when the RB-C condition device is activated during 1BB-E operation," the game transitions to "when RB-C is activated during 1BB-E operation (RB-C game during 1BB-E game (SRB game))."
Similarly, when the symbol combination corresponding to "RB04" is displayed stopped on an active line when "the RB-D condition device is activated when 1BB-E is activated," the game transitions to "when RB-D is activated when 1BB-E is activated (RB-D game during 1BB-E game (SRB game))."

The "RB-C operating state when 1BB-E is operating (SRB game)" ends when 12 games have been played, 8 wins have been made, or the "1BB-E operating state" has ended. In other words, the conditions for ending the "RB-C operating state when 1BB-E is operating" are that 12 games have been played, 8 wins have been made, or the "1BB-E operating state" has ended.

Then, when the termination conditions of the "RB-C operating state when 1BB-E is operating" are met, if the termination conditions of the "1BB-E operating state" are also met, the "1BB-E operating state" is terminated and the state transitions to when the reels are not operating (RT1).
On the other hand, when the termination condition of "RB-C operating state when 1BB-E is operating" is satisfied, if the termination condition of "1BB-E operating state" is not satisfied, it will again become "RB not operating and RB condition device not operating when 1BB-E is operating".
The same applies to "when RB-D is in operation while 1BB-E is in operation" as to "when RB-C is in operation while 1BB-E is in operation."

Furthermore, the "1BB-E operating state" continues until the number of medals acquired exceeds "210 medals."
In the "1BB-E operation state", when the number of medals acquired exceeds "210", the "1BB-E operation state" ends. In other words, the condition for ending the "1BB-E operation state" is that the number of medals acquired exceeds "210".

In addition, when "RB is not in operation while 1BB-E is in operation and the RB condition device is not in operation (when 1BB-E is in general play and SRB is not inside)", a lottery is conducted by the role selection means 61 based on the number placement table shown in Figures 161 to 162 described later.
For this reason, when "RB is not activated when 1BB-E is activated and the RB condition device is not activated," for all setting values, one of the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" to "Small Role B6 Condition Device" (all of which are push order bells) will be activated with a probability of "30,480/65,536,"

In addition, when "RB is not activated when 1BB-E is activated and the RB condition device is not activated," if the "small prize A1 condition device" to "small prize B6 condition device" are activated and the stopping operation is performed in the correct button press order, a small prize that pays out 10 coins will be won, but if the stopping operation is performed in a button press order other than the correct button press order, a small prize that pays out 1 coin will be won.
Therefore, if the correct button press sequence is announced when the "small prize A1 condition device" through the "small prize B6 condition device" are activated when "1BB-E is activated but RB is not activated and the RB condition device is not activated," the player can perform the stopping operation in the announced button press sequence to win a small prize that pays out 10 coins, thereby increasing the number of medals (the payout rate will exceed "1").

In contrast, if the correct button press sequence is not announced when the "Small Prize A1 Condition Device" through the "Small Prize B6 Condition Device" are activated when "1BB-E is activated but RB is not activated and the RB condition device is not activated," then the player will only have a 1/6 chance of winning the small prize that pays out 10 coins, and therefore will not be able to increase the number of medals (the payout rate will be less than 1).
Therefore, when "RB is not activated while 1BB-E is activated and the RB condition device is not activated," the payout rate will exceed "1" or be less than "1" depending on whether or not the correct button press sequence is notified.

In addition, when "RB is not in operation while 1BB-E is in operation and the RB-C condition device or the RB-D condition device is in operation (general play of 1BB-E game and inside SRB)", a lottery is conducted by the role selection means 61 based on the number placement table shown in Figures 163 to 164 described later.
For this reason, when "RB is not activated when 1BB-E is activated and the RB-C condition device is activated or the RB-D condition device is activated", just like when "RB is not activated when 1BB-E is activated and the RB condition device is not activated" one of the "small prize A1 condition device" to "small prize B6 condition device" will activate with a probability of "30480/65536" for all setting values.

Furthermore, "when RB is not activated when 1BB-E is activated and the RB-C condition device or the RB-D condition device is activated", just like "when RB is not activated when 1BB-E is activated and the RB condition device is not activated", when the "Small Prize A1 Condition Device" to "Small Prize B6 Condition Device" are activated, if the stopping operation is performed in the correct button press sequence, a small prize with a payout of 10 coins will be won, but if the stopping operation is performed in a button press sequence other than the correct one, a small prize with a payout of 1 coin will be won.
In addition, in the case of setting 1, the probability of not winning when "RB is not activated while 1BB-E is activated and the RB-C condition device or the RB-D condition device is activated" is set to "30778/65536."
For this reason, when "RB is not activated while 1BB-E is activated and the RB-C condition device or the RB-D condition device is activated," the payout rate will exceed "1" or be less than "1" depending on whether or not the correct button press sequence is announced.

In addition, when "RB-C or RB-D is activated when 1BB-E is activated (during SRB play in 1BB-E game)", a lottery is conducted by the role selection means 61 based on the number placement table shown in Figures 165 to 166 described later, in the same manner as when "RB-A or RB-B is activated when 1BB-C is activated (during SRB play in 1BB-C game)".
For this reason, in the case of setting 1, when "RB-C or RB-D is activated when 1BB-E is activated," the "small prize W condition device" is activated with a probability of "36958/65536." When the "small prize W condition device" is activated, regardless of the operation mode (push order and operation timing) of the stop switch 42, either "small prize 08" to "small prize 14" or "small prize 17" to "small prize 21" (each pays out one coin) will be won.

In addition, in the case of setting 1, if "RB-C or RB-D is activated when 1BB-E is activated," there is a probability of "20778/65536" of not winning.
For this reason, when "RB-C is activated while 1BB-E is activated or RB-D is activated," the payout rate becomes less than "1," and the player's medals decrease.

In this way, when "1BB-E is activated",
(1) "When 1BB-E is in operation and RB is not in operation and the RB condition device is not in operation (when 1BB-E is in general play and SRB is not inside)"
(2) "When RB is not activated during 1BB-E operation and the RB-C condition device is activated or the RB-D condition device is activated (when 1BB-E is in general play and inside SRB)"
(3) "When RB-C or RB-D is activated while 1BB-E is activated (during SRB play of 1BB-E game)"
There are three game states:

Furthermore, when "RB is not in operation while 1BB-E is in operation and the RB condition device is not in operation (general play of 1BB-E game and not inside SRB)," the payout rate will exceed "1" or be less than "1" depending on whether or not the correct button press sequence is announced.
In addition, even when "RB is not activated while 1BB-E is activated and the RB-C condition device or the RB-D condition device is activated (general play of 1BB-E game and inside SRB)," the payout rate will exceed "1" or be less than "1" depending on whether or not the correct button press sequence is announced.
Furthermore, when "RB-C is in operation or RB-D is in operation while 1BB-E is in operation (during SRB play in 1BB-E play)", the payout rate becomes less than "1" and the player's medals decrease.

As described above, the end condition for "1BB-E operation (1BB-E game)" is that the number of medals paid out exceeds "210 medals."
Furthermore, when "RB is not in operation while 1BB-E is in operation and the RB-C and RB-D condition devices are not in operation (during general play of 1BB-E game and not inside SRB)" and "when RB is not in operation while 1BB-E is in operation and the RB-C or RB-D condition device is in operation (during general play of 1BB-E game and inside SRB)", a lottery is held for the "small role A1 condition device" to the "small role B6 condition device".

Furthermore, when the "Small Winning A1 Condition Device" to the "Small Winning B6 Condition Device" are activated, if the stop operation is performed in the correct button press sequence, a small winning combination that pays out 10 coins will be won, and if the stop operation is performed in a button press sequence other than the correct button press sequence, a small winning combination that pays out 1 coin will be won.
For this reason, if the notification game is not executed (if the correct button press sequence is not notified) when "1BB-E is in operation but RB is not in operation and RB-C and RB-D condition devices are not in operation" and "1BB-E is in operation but RB is not in operation and RB-C or RB-D condition device is in operation", the payout rate will be less than "1", the player's medals will decrease, and the medal payout number of "210 medals", which is the end condition of "1BB-E operation", will not be reached easily. In other words, the number of games until "1BB-E operation" ends will increase.

In contrast, when a notification game is executed (when the correct button press sequence is announced) in "when RB is not activated and RB-C and RB-D condition devices are not activated when 1BB-E is activated" and "when RB is not activated and RB-C or RB-D condition devices are activated when 1BB-E is activated", the payout rate exceeds "1", the player's medals increase, and it becomes easier to reach the medal payout number of "210 medals", which is the end condition of "when 1BB-E is activated". In other words, the number of games until "when 1BB-E is activated" ends will decrease.

Therefore, depending on whether or not a notification game is executed when "1BB-E is activated", the number of games played until "1BB-E is activated" ends may increase or decrease.
And since "when 1BB-E is in operation" is when the reel is in operation, it is a game state in which no lottery for the reel condition device (special role (bonus)) is conducted; however, depending on whether or not a notification game is executed when "when 1BB-E is in operation", the number of games played until the end of "when 1BB-E is in operation" may increase or decrease, so the player can feel that the probability of winning the reel condition device is fluctuating.

In addition, the end condition for "when 1BB-E is activated" is that the number of medals won exceeds "210 medals," and the end condition for the notification game is that a predetermined number of games (initial value "50 games") have been played.
For this reason, when a notification game is played when "1BB-E is activated", there are times when "1BB-E is activated" satisfies the end condition first, and times when the notification game satisfies the end condition first. When "1BB-E is activated" ends, a transition is made to RT1, so if "1BB-E is activated" satisfies the end condition first, the notification game will continue in RT1. In contrast, if the notification game satisfies the end condition first, it will become a non-notification game of "1BB-E is activated".

The "RB-A condition device" only conducts a lottery when "RB is not in operation when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is in operation and the RB condition device is not in operation (general play of 1BB-C or 1BB-D game and not inside SRB)" (Figure 157).
In addition, the winning combination of the "RB-A condition device" is set to "RB01" (Figure 140), and the pattern combination corresponding to "RB01" is set to "Blue 7"-"Red 7"-"Red 7" (Figure 136).
Furthermore, the conditions for transitioning to the "RB-A operating state", the performance of the "RB-A operating state", and the conditions for terminating the "RB-A operating state" are as explained above in the section "RB-A operating when 1BB-C is operating (RB-A play during 1BB-C play (SRB play))".

Like the "RB-A condition device," the "RB-B condition device" only conducts a lottery when "RB is not in operation when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is in operation and the RB condition device is not in operation (when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is in general play and the SRB is not inside)" (Figure 157).
In addition, the "RB-B condition device" differs from the "RB-A condition device" in that the winning role is set to "RB02" (Figure 140) and the symbol combination corresponding to "RB02" is set to "Blue 7"-"Red 7"-"White 7" (Figure 136); however, the performance of the "RB-B operating state" and the conditions for terminating the "RB-B operating state" are the same as those of the "RB-A condition device."

Unlike the "RB-A condition device," the "RB-C condition device" only conducts a lottery when "RB is not in operation while 1BB-E is in operation and the RB condition device is not in operation (during general play of 1BB-E game and not inside SRB)" (Figure 161).
In addition, the winning combination of the "RB-C condition device" is set to "RB03" (Figure 140), and the symbol combination corresponding to "RB03" is set to "Blue 7"-"White 7"-"Red 7" (Figure 136).
Furthermore, the conditions for transitioning to the "RB-C operating state", the performance of the "RB-C operating state", and the conditions for terminating the "RB-C operating state" are as explained above in the section "RB-C operation during 1BB-E operation (RB-C play during 1BB-E play (SRB play))".

As with the "RB-C condition device," the "RB-D condition device" only conducts a lottery when "RB is not in operation while 1BB-E is in operation and the RB condition device is not in operation (during general play of 1BB-E game and not inside SRB)" (Figure 161).
In addition, the "RB-D Condition Device" differs from the "RB-C Condition Device" in that the winning role is set to "RB04" (Figure 140) and the symbol combination corresponding to "RB04" is set to "Blue 7"-"White 7"-"White 7" (Figure 136); however, the performance of the "RB-D operating state" and the conditions for terminating the "RB-D operating state" are the same as those of the "RB-C Condition Device."

The "SB-A condition device" conducts lotteries during non-RT, RT1, when SB is activated during non-RT, and when SB is activated in RT1 (Figures 147, 149, 167, and 169).
In addition, the winning role of the "SB-A condition device" is set to "SB01" (Figure 140), and the pattern combination corresponding to "SB01" is set to "False 7"-"White 7"-"Red 7" (Figure 136).
When the "SB-A condition device" is activated, if the symbol combination corresponding to "SB01" is displayed on the pay line, no medals will be paid out in the current game, and the next game will be in the "SB-A activation state (SB-A game)". Also, the "SB-A activation state" ends after one game.

Like the "SB-A condition device," the "SB-B condition device" conducts lotteries when the SB is activated during non-RT, during RT1, when the SB is activated during non-RT, and when the SB is activated in RT1 (Figures 147, 149, 167, and 169).
In addition, the "SB-B condition device" differs from the "SB-A condition device" in that the winning role is set to "SB02" (Figure 140) and the pattern combination corresponding to "SB02" is set to "False 7"-"White 7"-"White 7" (Figure 136); however, the performance of the "SB-B operating state" and the conditions for terminating the "SB-B operating state" are the same as those of the "SB-A condition device."

Furthermore, in the "SB (SB-A or SB-B) operating state," a lottery for the "SB condition device" is also conducted.
Then, in the "SB operating state", when the "SB condition device" is activated and a symbol combination corresponding to "SB" is displayed stopped on an active line, no medals are paid out in the current game, and the "SB operating state" is entered again in the next game.

In contrast, if the "SB operating state" ends without the "SB condition device" operating, the game state before transition to the "SB operating state" is restored.
Also, in the "SB operating state", even if the "SB condition device" is operated, the symbol combination corresponding to "SB" is not displayed stopped on the active line, and when the "SB operating state" ends, the game state before the transition to the "SB operating state" is restored.

When "SB is activated during non-RT", a lottery is performed by the role selection means 61 based on the number table shown in Figs. 161 to 162 described later. As a result, in the case of setting 1, when "SB is activated during non-RT", the "small role W condition device" is activated with a probability of "28839/65536". When the "small role W condition device" is activated, either "small role 08" to "small role 14" or "small role 17" to "small role 21" (each pays out one coin) will be won, regardless of the operation mode (push order and operation timing) of the stop switch 42.
In addition, in the case of setting 1, when "SB is activated during non-RT", the "SB condition device" is activated with a probability of "21794/65536". In a game in which the "SB condition device" is activated, medals are not paid out regardless of whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the "SB" is stopped and displayed.
Therefore, when "SB is activated during non-RT", the payout rate becomes less than "1", and the player's medals decrease.

141 to 146 show the small winnings and replay condition device in the tenth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 141, there are 13 types of replay condition devices, ranging from a "replay A condition device" corresponding to a small win and replay condition device number "1" to a "replay M condition device" corresponding to a small win and replay condition device number "13."

The winning role of the "Replay A Condition Device" is set to "Replay 01", and when the "Replay A Condition Device" is activated, "Replay"-"Replay"-"Replay" corresponding to "Replay 01" is displayed stopped on the active line.
The winning combinations of the "Replay B Condition Device" are set to "Replay 01" and "Replay 02." When the "Replay B Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 01" is displayed on the active line regardless of the operation mode (push order and operation timing) of the stop switch 42. Also, the "Replay B Condition Device" does not win alone, but wins together with the "1BB-D Condition Device."

The winning combinations of the "Replay C Condition Device" are set to "Replay 01" and "Replay 03." When the "Replay C Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 01" is displayed on the active line regardless of the operation mode (push order and operation timing) of the stop switch 42. Also, the "Replay C Condition Device" does not win alone, but wins together with the "1BB-B Condition Device."
The winning combinations of the "Replay D Condition Device" are set to "Replay 01" and "Replay 04." When the "Replay D Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 01" is displayed on the active line regardless of the operation mode (push order and operation timing) of the stop switch 42. Also, the "Replay D Condition Device" does not win alone, but wins together with the "1BB-C Condition Device."

The winning combination of the "Replay E Condition Device" is set to "Replay 01" to "Replay 03". When the "Replay E Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 01" is displayed on the active line regardless of the operation mode (push order and operation timing) of the stop switch 42. Also, the "Replay E Condition Device" does not win alone, but wins together with the "1BB-D Condition Device".
The winning combinations of the "Replay F Condition Device" are set to "Replay 01", "Replay 02" and "Replay 04". When the "Replay F Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 01" is displayed on the active line regardless of the operation mode (push order and operation timing) of the stop switch 42. Also, the "Replay F Condition Device" will not win alone, but will win together with the "1BB-E Condition Device".

The winning combinations of the "Replay G condition device" are set to "Replay 01" to "Replay 06". When the "Replay G condition device" is activated, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display "Blue 7"-"Blue 7/Black BAR/Cherry"-"Bell" corresponding to "Replay 03" on the active line, regardless of the operation mode (push order and operation timing) of the stop switch 42. When the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 03" cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display symbol combinations corresponding to other replays included in the winning combination on the active line.
In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 03" is displayed stopped on an active line, "Replay"-"Replay"-"Replay" are displayed stopped on the upper line (invalid line) passing through the "upper left"-"upper middle"-"upper right"

The winning combinations of the "Replay H Condition Device" are set to "Replay 01" to "Replay 10".
In addition, the "Replay H Condition Device" conducts a lottery in the following states (1) to (3) (Figures 151, 155, and 159).
(1) "RT2 (1BB-A to 1BB-D condition device operation (inside 1BB-A to 1BB-D))"
(2) "RT4 (when 1BB-A or 1BB-B is in operation (when 1BB-A or 1BB-B is in play))"
(3) "RT5 (when RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated (when playing 1BB-C or 1BB-D during general play and in SRB))"
In addition, the stop control of the reel 31 when the replay H condition device is activated is different between (A) "RT2" and (B) "RT4" and "RT5".

(A) In a game in which the "Replay H Condition Device" is activated in "RT2", regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display "Blue 7" - "Blue 7/Replay" - "Blue 7" corresponding to "Replay 04" on the active line. In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 04" cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to other replays included in the winning combination on the active line.

(B) In a game in which the "Replay H condition device" is activated in "RT4" or "RT5," when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of middle first stop (middle push) ("middle left/right" or "middle right/left"), the reel 31 is controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 01" is displayed on the pay line.
In addition, in a game in which the "Replay H condition device" is activated in "RT4" or "RT5," when the stop switch 42 is operated in a push order other than the middle first stop ("left-center-right,""left-right-center,""right-left-center," or "right-center-left"), the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 04 is stopped and displayed on the active line, and when the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 04" cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to other replays included in the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line.

When you are in "RT2", one of the "1BB-A to 1BB-D condition devices" is activated (one of 1BB-A to 1BB-D is won). In other words, you have won a special role (bonus).
In a game in which the "Replay H condition device" is activated in "RT2", operation information of the stop switch 42 is provided to inform the player that the stop switch 42 should be operated in order (in the order of "left, middle, right") to aim for the "Blue 7" symbol. Specifically, for example, an image of an "arrow pointing right" and the words "Aim for Blue 7!" are displayed on the image display device 23.

In addition, when the stop switch 42 is operated in an operation mode based on the notified operation information (by pushing in order and at an operation timing that allows the "Blue 7" symbol on each reel 31 to stop on an active line) and a symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 04" is displayed stopped on an active line, it is notified that a special combination has been won. Specifically, for example, a "bonus confirmation screen" indicating that a special combination has been won is displayed on the image display device 23.
On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a different manner from the manner based on the notified operation information, the symbol combination corresponding to "REPLAY 04" is not displayed on the pay line, and the symbol combination corresponding to another replay included in the winning combination is displayed on the pay line, the fact that the special combination has been won in the current game is not notified. In this case, the fact that the special combination has been won in the next game after the game in which the "REPLAY H condition device" was activated is notified.

In addition, in a game in which the "1BB-A to 1BB-D condition device" has been activated (1BB-A to 1BB-D has been won), an AT lottery is held to determine whether or not the right to execute the notification game (AT) will be granted.
The probability of winning the AT lottery when the "1BB-A or 1BB-B condition device" is activated is set to "100%," and the probability of winning the AT lottery when the "1BB-C or 1BB-C condition device" is activated is set to "10%."
For this reason, when the "1BB-A or 1BB-B condition device" is activated, the right to play the notification game is granted with a probability of "100%," and when the "1BB-C or 1BB-D condition device" is activated, the right to play the notification game is granted with a probability of "10%."

In "RT4" or "RT5", when the player has the right to play the notification game, in a game in which the "Replay H condition device" is activated, the operation information for the stop switch 42 notifies the player that the stop switch 42 should be operated by pushing the buttons in order to aim for the "blue 7" symbol, just as in a game in which the "Replay H condition device" is activated in "RT2".
In addition, when the stop switch 42 is operated in an operation manner based on the notified operation information (by pushing in order and at an operation timing that allows the "Blue 7" symbol on each reel 31 to stop on an active line) and a symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 04" is displayed stopped on an active line, it is notified that the player has the right to play the notified game.

In contrast, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a different manner from the manner based on the notified operation information, and the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 04" is not displayed frozen on the active line, and a symbol combination corresponding to another replay included in the winning combination is displayed frozen on the active line, the player is not notified that he/she has the right to play the notification game in this game. In this case, the player is notified that he/she has the right to play the notification game at the end of "RT4" or "RT5" (at the end of 1BB-A to 1BB-D operation (1BB-A to 1BB-D games)).

In addition, in "RT5", when the player does not have the right to execute the notification game, in a game in which the "Replay H condition device" is activated, the operation information for the stop switch 42 notifies the player that the stop switch 42 should be operated at the middle first stop (pressing "middle left/right" or "middle right/left" in that order).
Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated in an operation mode based on the notified operation information (at the first stop in the middle), the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 01" is stopped and displayed on the pay line. In this case, since the player does not have the right to play the notification game, the player is not notified that he or she has the right to play the notification game.

In addition, in "RT5", when the player does not have the right to play the notification game, the "Replay H condition device" is activated and a notification is given to operate the stop switch 42 at the first intermediate stop, but the stop switch 42 is operated in order and at a timing when the "Blue 7" symbols on each reel 31 can be stopped on an active line. In this case, although the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 04" is displayed stopped on an active line, since the player does not have the right to play the notification game, there is no notification that the player has the right to play the notification game.

The probability of winning the AT lottery when the "1BB-A or 1BB-B condition device" is activated is set to "100%", so when moving to "RT4", the player has the right to play the notification game, but the probability of winning the AT lottery when the "1BB-A or 1BB-B condition device" is activated can also be set to less than "100%". In this case, when the player does not have the right to play the notification game in "RT4", in a game in which the "Replay H condition device" is activated, the operation information for the stop switch 42 notifies the player that the stop switch 42 should be operated at the first intermediate stop.

The winning combinations of the "Replay I Condition Device" are set to "Replay 01" to "Replay 08".
In addition, like the "Replay H Condition Device," the "Replay I Condition Device" also conducts lotteries at RT2, RT4, and RT5 (Figures 151, 155, and 159).
And, like the "Replay H Condition Device," the stopping control of reel 31 differs between a game in which the "Replay I Condition Device" is activated in RT2 and a game in which the "Replay I Condition Device" is activated in RT4 and RT5.

In a game in which the "Replay I condition device" is activated in RT2, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display "blank"-"blue 7/watermelon/blank"-"cherry/blank" corresponding to Replay 02 on the active line, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. Also, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 02" cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to another replay included in the winning combination on the active line.
In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 02" is displayed stopped on an active line, "Blue 7"-"Blue 7"-"Blue 7" can be stopped on the downward sloping line (invalid line) passing through the "top left"-"middle middle"-"bottom right"

In contrast, in a game in which the "Replay I condition device" is activated in RT4 or RT5, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push sequence for the middle first stop ("middle left/right" or "middle right/left"), the reel 31 is controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 01" is displayed on the pay line.
In addition, in a game in which the "Replay I condition device" is activated in RT4 or RT5, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a push sequence other than the middle first stop ("left center right", "left left center", "right left center" or "right center left"), the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 02" is displayed on the active line, and when the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 02" cannot be displayed on the active line, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to other replays included in the winning combination is displayed on the active line.

In a game in which the "replay I condition device" is activated in RT2, similarly to a game in which the "replay H condition device" is activated in RT2, operation information for the stop switch 42 notifies the player that the stop switch 42 should be operated by pushing the buttons in order to aim for the "blue 7" symbol.
In addition, when the stop switch 42 is operated in an operation manner based on the notified operation information (by pushing in order and at an operation timing that allows the "blue 7" symbol on each reel 31 to stop on an active line) and a symbol combination corresponding to "replay 02" is displayed stopped on an active line, it is notified that a special role has been won.

In contrast, if the stop switch 42 is operated in an operation mode different from the operation mode based on the notified operation information, and the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 02" is not displayed frozen on the active line, and a symbol combination corresponding to another replay included in the winning combination is displayed frozen on the active line, the fact that a special combination has been won in the current game is not notified. In this case, the fact that a special combination has been won in the next game after the game in which the "Replay I condition device" was activated is notified.

In addition, in RT4 or RT5, when the right to execute a notification game is held, in a game in which the "Replay I condition device" is activated, the operation information of the stop switch 42 is a notification that the stop switch 42 should be operated by pushing the buttons in order to aim for the "blue 7" symbol, just as in a game in which the "Replay H condition device" is activated.
In addition, when the stop switch 42 is operated in an operation manner based on the notified operation information (by pushing in order and at an operation timing that allows the "Blue 7" symbol on each reel 31 to stop on an active line) and a symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 02" is displayed stopped on an active line, it is notified that the player has the right to play the notified game.

In contrast, if the stop switch 42 is operated in an operation mode different from the operation mode based on the notified operation information, and the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 02" is not displayed frozen on the active line, and a symbol combination corresponding to another replay included in the winning combination is displayed frozen on the active line, the player is not notified of the right to play the notification game in this game. In this case, the player is notified of the right to play the notification game at the end of RT4 or RT5.

In addition, in RT5, when the right to execute the notification game is not possessed, in a game in which the "Replay I condition device" is activated, the operation information of the stop switch 42 notifies the player that the stop switch 42 should be operated at the first intermediate stop, in the same manner as in a game in which the "Replay H condition device" is activated.
Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated in an operation mode based on the notified operation information (at the first stop in the middle), the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 01" is stopped and displayed on the pay line. In this case, since the player does not have the right to play the notification game, the player is not notified that he or she has the right to play the notification game.

In addition, in RT5, when the player does not have the right to play the notification game, the "Replay I condition device" is activated and a notification is given to operate the stop switch 42 at the first intermediate stop, but the stop switch 42 is operated in order and at a timing when the "Blue 7" symbols on each reel 31 can be stopped on an active line. In this case, although the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 02" is displayed stopped on an active line, since the player does not have the right to play the notification game, there is no notification that the player has the right to play the notification game.

Here, the above-mentioned "Replay G Condition Device" conducts lotteries at non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT4, RT5, when SB is activated during non-RT, and when SB is activated during RT1 (Figures 147, 149, 151, 155, 159, 167, 169).
In addition, in non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT4, and RT5, in a game in which the "Replay G condition device" is activated, a performance lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific performance is to be output. When the performance lottery is won, a notification is given that the player should operate the stop switch 42 by pushing the buttons in order to aim for the "blue 7" symbol, as in a game in which the "Replay H condition device" or the "Replay I condition device" is activated in RT2, or in a game in which the "Replay H condition device" or the "Replay I condition device" is activated in RT4 or RT5, in the case where the player has the right to execute a notification game.

In addition, when the stop switch 42 is operated in an operation mode based on the notified operation information (by pushing in order and at an operation timing that allows the "Blue 7" symbol on each reel 31 to stop on an active line), the symbol combination "Blue 7"-"Blue 7/Black BAR/Cherry"-"Bell" corresponding to "Replay 03" is displayed stopped on an active line, instead of the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 04". In this case, there is no notification that a special combination has been won, and there is no notification that the player has the right to play the notification game.
In this way, the notification that one should aim for the "Blue 7" symbol when the "Replay G Condition Device" is activated is intended to heighten the expectation that one has won a special role or has the right to play the notification game, and is a so-called false notification.

In addition, in "RT3 (when the 1BB-E condition device is activated)," in a game that is not a winning combination in the role selection means 61, it becomes possible to stop the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB05" or "1BB06," which is the winning role of the "1BB-E condition device," on an active line. At this time, in a game in RT2 in which the "Replay H condition device" or the "Replay I condition device" is activated, or in RT4 or RT5 in which the player has the right to execute a notification game, the operation information for the stop switch 42 notifies the player that the stop switch 42 should be operated in order to aim for the "blue 7" symbol, just as in a game in which the "Replay H condition device" or the "Replay I condition device" is activated.

In addition, when the stop switch 42 is operated in an operation manner based on the notified operation information (by pushing in order and at an operation timing that allows the "Blue 7" symbol on each reel 31 to stop on an active line), "Blue 7"-"Blue 7"-"Blank" corresponding to "1BB05", or "Blue 7"-"Blank"-"Blue 7" corresponding to "1BB06" is displayed stopped on an active line.
Then, when a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB05" or "1BB06" is stopped and displayed on an active line, no medals are paid out in the current game, but the game will transition to "1BB-E operation (1BB-E game)" from the next game.

In this way, in the tenth embodiment, in a game in which the "Replay H condition device" or the "Replay I condition device" is activated during RT2, in a game in which the "Replay H condition device" or the "Replay I condition device" is activated when the player has the right to execute an announcement game during RT4 or RT5, in a game in which the "Replay G condition device" is activated during non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT4 or RT5, and in a game in which the player is not won by the role selection means 61 "during RT3 (when the 1BB-E condition device is activated)," the operation information of the stop switch 42 notifies the player that the stop switch 42 should be operated by pushing in order to aim for the "blue 7" symbol.
This increases the expectation that a special role has been won or that the player has the right to play a notification game.

The winning combinations of the "Replay J Condition Device" are set to "Replay 01", "Replay 06" and "Replay 07". When the "Replay J Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 06" or "Replay 07" is stopped and displayed on the pay line regardless of the operation mode (push order and operation timing) of the stop switch 42.
The winning combinations of the "Replay K Condition Device" are set to "Replay 01" and "Replay 05." When the "Replay K Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 05" is displayed on the pay line regardless of the operation mode (push order and operation timing) of the stop switch 42.

The winning combinations of the "Replay L Condition Device" are set to "Replay 01", "Replay 08" and "Replay 09". When the "Replay L Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 08" or "Replay 09" is displayed stopped on the pay line regardless of the operation mode (push order and operation timing) of the stop switch 42.
The winning combinations of the "Replay M Condition Device" are set to "Replay 01" and "Replay 10." When the "Replay M Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 10" is displayed on the pay line regardless of the operation mode (push order and operation timing) of the stop switch 42.

As shown in Figures 142 to 146, there are 34 types of small win condition devices, ranging from a "small win A1 condition device" corresponding to the small win and replay condition device number "14" to a "small win X condition device" corresponding to the small win and replay condition device number "47".
The winning combinations of the "small win A1 condition device" are set to "small win 01", "small win 08" and "small win 09".

In addition, the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" draws lots under the following conditions (1) to (8) (Figures 148, 150, 152, 154, 158, 160, 162, and 164).
(1) "Non-RT"
(2) "RT1"
(3) "RT2 (when 1BB-A to 1BB-D condition device is activated (inside 1BB-A to 1BB-D))"
(4) "RT3 (when 1BB-E condition device is activated (inside 1BB-E))"
(5) "When RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not in operation while 1BB-C or 1BB-D is in operation (when playing 1BB-C or 1BB-D in general play and not inside SRB)"
(6) "RT5 (when RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated (in general play and inside SRB during 1BB-C or 1BB-D play))"
(7) "When RB-C and RB-D condition devices are not in operation when 1BB-E is in operation (when playing 1BB-E in general play and not inside SRB)"
(8) "When RB-C or RB-D condition device is activated when 1BB-E is activated (when playing 1BB-E during general play and inside SRB)"

In addition, the stopping control of the reel 31 when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated differs depending on the following states (A) to (D).
(A) "Non-internal (non-RT and RT1)"
(B) "1BB-A to E condition device operation (RT2 and RT3)"
(C) "When RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated (RT5)"
(D) "When 1BB-C or 1BB-D is in operation and the RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not in operation,""When 1BB-E is in operation and the RB-C and RB-D condition devices are not in operation," and "When 1BB-E is in operation and the RB-C or RB-D condition device is in operation."

(A) The stopping control of the reel 31 when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated during "non-internal (non-RT and RT1)" will be explained.
When the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, center, right (123)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 01" (payout of 10 coins) is displayed on an active line.
In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 01" is displayed stopped on an active line, "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on the upper line (invalid line) passing through the "upper left"-"upper middle"-"upper right"

In addition, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a push order other than "left, center, right (123)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that a symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 08" or "small prize 09" (both of which pay out one coin) is displayed stopped on an active line.
Thus, in (A) "non-inner middle (non-RT and RT1)", when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated, only the push order of "left, middle, right (123)" is the correct push order, and the other five push orders are incorrect. Therefore, if the correct push order is not announced, a small prize with a payout of 10 coins will be won with a probability of "1/6", and a small prize with a payout of 1 coin will be won with a probability of "5/6".

(B) We will explain the stopping control of the reel 31 when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated during "1BB-A to E condition device activation (RT2 and RT3)".
When the stop switch 42 is operated in either the push order of "left, center, right (123)" or "left, right, center (132)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 01" (payout of 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on an active line.

In addition, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than "left, center, right (123)" and "left, right, center (132)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that a symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 08" or "small prize 09" (both of which pay out one coin) is displayed stopped on an active line.
In this way, in (B) "1BB-A to E condition device operation (RT2 and RT3)," when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated, the two push orders, "left, center, right (123)" and "left, right, center (132)," are the correct push orders, and the other four push orders are the incorrect push orders. Therefore, a small prize with a payout of 10 coins is won with a probability of "1/3," and a small prize with a payout of 1 coin is won with a probability of "2/3."

(C) We will explain the stopping control of the reel 31 when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated in "when the RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated (RT5)".
In a game in which the "small win A1 condition device" is activated in RT5, regardless of the manner in which the stop switch 42 is operated (the order in which it is pressed and the timing of its operation), the reel 31 is controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01" (payout of 10 coins) is displayed stopped on the pay line.
For this reason, when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated during RT5, the "small prize 01" is always won (with a 100% probability), and "10 medals" are paid out.

(D) When "RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated," "RB-C and RB-D condition devices are not activated when 1BB-E is activated," and "RB-C or RB-D condition devices are activated when 1BB-E is activated," the same stopping control of reel 31 as in (A) "non-internal (non-RT and RT1)" is performed.

For the "Small win A2 condition device" to the "Small win B6 condition device," a lottery is held in the states (1) to (8) shown in the "Small win A1 condition device" section, and the stopping control of reel 31 differs depending on the states (A) to (D) shown in the "Small win A1 condition device" section.
In addition, the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" to the "Small Role A6 Condition Device" are collectively referred to as the "A Group Bell", and the "Small Role B1 Condition Device" to the "Small Role B6 Condition Device" are collectively referred to as the "B Group Bell".
In addition, the "Small Prize A1 Condition Device" to the "Small Prize B6 Condition Device" are collectively referred to as the "Push Order Bell."

The winning combinations of the "small win A2 condition device" are set to "small win 02", "small win 08" and "small win 10".
(A) In the "non-inner middle (non-RT and RT1)" mode, when the "small prize A2 condition device" is activated, only the "left/right middle (132)" push order is the correct push order, and the other five push orders are incorrect push orders. Therefore, if the correct push order is not announced, the probability of getting the push order correct is "1/6".
(B) In the "1BB-A to E condition device operation (RT2 and RT3)", when the "small prize A2 condition device" is activated, the two push orders, "left, center, right (123)" or "left, right, center (132)", are the correct push orders, and the other four push orders are the incorrect push orders. Therefore, the probability of getting the push order correct is "1/3".

When the button presses are correct when the "Small Win A2 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 02" (payout of 10 coins) is displayed stopped on the valid line, and at this time, "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" are displayed stopped on the downward-right line (invalid line) passing through the "top left" - "middle middle" - "bottom right".
In addition, if the push order is incorrect when the "small prize A2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 08" or "small prize 10" (both of which pay out one coin) will be displayed stopped on the active line.

(C) In "when RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated (RT5)", when the "small prize A2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 02" (payout of 10 coins) is displayed stopped on the active line regardless of the operation mode (push order and operation timing) of the stop switch 42.
Therefore, when the "small prize A2 condition device" is activated during RT5, the "small prize 02" is always won (with a 100% probability), and "10 medals" are paid out.
(D) When "RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated,""RB-C and RB-D condition devices are not activated when 1BB-E is activated," and "RB-C or RB-D condition device is activated when 1BB-E is activated," the same stopping control of reel 31 is performed as in (A) "non-internal (non-RT and RT1)."

The winning combinations of the "small combination A3 condition device" are set to "small combination 03", "small combination 08", "small combination 09" and "small combination 11".
(A) In the "non-inner middle (non-RT and RT1)" mode, when the "small prize A3 condition device" is activated, only the "middle left right (213)" push order is the correct push order, and the other five push orders are incorrect push orders. Therefore, if the correct push order is not announced, the probability of getting the push order correct is "1/6".
(B) In the "1BB-A to E condition device operation (RT2 and RT3)", when the "small prize A3 condition device" is activated, the two push orders, "center left right (213)" or "center right left (231)", are the correct push orders, and the other four push orders are the incorrect push orders. Therefore, the probability of getting the push order correct is "1/3".

When the pressing order is correct when the "small prize A3 condition device is activated,""Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell," which corresponds to "small prize 03" (payout of 10 coins), is displayed stopped on the active line.
In addition, if the push order is incorrect when the "Small Win A3 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 08,""Small Win 09," or "Small Win 11" (each of which pays out one coin) will be displayed stopped on the active line.

(C) In "when the RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated (RT5)", when the "small prize A3 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 03" (payout of 10 coins) is displayed stopped on the active line regardless of the operation mode (push order and operation timing) of the stop switch 42.
Therefore, when the "small prize A3 condition device" is activated during RT5, the "small prize 03" is always won (with a 100% probability), and "10" medals are paid out.
(D) When "RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated,""RB-C and RB-D condition devices are not activated when 1BB-E is activated," and "RB-C or RB-D condition device is activated when 1BB-E is activated," the same stopping control of reel 31 is performed as in (A) "non-internal (non-RT and RT1)."

The winning combinations of the "small combination A4 condition device" are set to "small combination 04", "small combination 08", "small combination 09" and "small combination 11".
(A) In the "non-inner middle (non-RT and RT1)" mode, when the "small prize A4 condition device" is activated, only the "middle right left (231)" push order is the correct push order, and the other five push orders are incorrect push orders. Therefore, if the correct push order is not announced, the probability of getting the push order correct is "1/6".
(B) In the "1BB-A to E condition device operation (RT2 and RT3)", when the "small prize A4 condition device" is activated, the two push orders, "center left right (213)" or "center right left (231)", are the correct push orders, and the other four push orders are the incorrect push orders. Therefore, the probability of getting the push order correct is "1/3".

When the button presses are correct when the "Small Win A4 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 04" (payout of 10 coins) is displayed stopped on the valid line, and at this time, "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" are displayed stopped on the right-sloping line (invalid line) that passes through the "bottom left" - "middle middle" - "top right" row.
In addition, if the push order is incorrect when the "Small Win A4 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 08,""Small Win 09," or "Small Win 11" (each of which pays out one coin) will be displayed stopped on the active line.

(C) In "when the RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated (RT5)", when the "small prize A4 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 04" (payout of 10 coins) is displayed stopped on the active line regardless of the operation mode (push order and operation timing) of the stop switch 42.
Therefore, when the "small prize A4 condition device" is activated during RT5, the "small prize 04" is always won (with a 100% probability), and "10" medals are paid out.

(D) When "RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not in operation when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is in operation," "RB-C and RB-D condition devices are not in operation when 1BB-E is in operation," and "RB-C or RB-D condition devices are in operation when 1BB-E is in operation," the reel 31 is stopped in the same way as in (A) "non-internal (non-RT and RT1)."

The winning combinations of the "small combination A5 condition device" are set to "small combination 05", "small combination 08", "small combination 09" and "small combination 12".
(A) In the "non-inner middle (non-RT and RT1)" mode, when the "small prize A5 condition device" is activated, only the push order of "right left middle (312)" is the correct push order, and the other five push orders are incorrect push orders. Therefore, if the correct push order is not announced, the probability of getting the push order correct is "1/6".
(B) In the "1BB-A to E condition device operation (RT2 and RT3)", when the "small prize A5 condition device" is activated, the two push orders, "right left center (312)" or "right center left (321)", are the correct push orders, and the other four push orders are the incorrect push orders. Therefore, the probability of getting the push order correct is "1/3".

When the button presses are correct when the "Small Win A5 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 05" (payout of 10 coins) is displayed stopped on the valid line, and at this time, "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" are displayed stopped on the lower line (invalid line) passing through the "lower left" - "lower middle" - "lower right".
In addition, if the push order is incorrect when the "Small Win A5 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 08,""Small Win 09," or "Small Win 12" (each of which pays out one coin) will be displayed stopped on the active line.

(C) In "when RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated (RT5)", when the "small prize A5 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 05" (payout of 10 coins) is displayed stopped on the active line regardless of the operation mode (push order and operation timing) of the stop switch 42.
Therefore, when the "small prize A5 condition device" is activated during RT5, the "small prize 05" is always won (with a 100% probability), and "10 medals" are paid out.

(D) When "RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not in operation when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is in operation," "RB-C and RB-D condition devices are not in operation when 1BB-E is in operation," and "RB-C or RB-D condition devices are in operation when 1BB-E is in operation," the reel 31 is stopped in the same way as in (A) "non-internal (non-RT and RT1)."

The winning combinations of the "small combination A6 condition device" are set to "small combination 06", "small combination 08", "small combination 09" and "small combination 12".
(A) In the "non-inner middle (non-RT and RT1)" mode, when the "small prize A6 condition device" is activated, only the push order of "right-center-left (321)" is the correct push order, and the other five push orders are incorrect push orders. Therefore, if the correct push order is not announced, the probability of getting the push order correct is "1/6".
(B) In the "1BB-A to E condition device operation (RT2 and RT3)", when the "small prize A6 condition device" is activated, the two push orders, "right left center (312)" or "right center left (321)", are the correct push orders, and the other four push orders are the incorrect push orders. Therefore, the probability of getting the push order correct is "1/3".

When the button presses are correct when the "Small Win A6 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 06" (payout of 10 coins) is displayed stopped on the valid line, and at this time, "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on an inverted V-shaped line (invalid line) passing through the "bottom left"-"middle middle"-"bottom right"
In addition, if the push order is incorrect when the "Small Win A6 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 08,""Small Win 09," or "Small Win 12" (each of which pays out one coin) will be displayed stopped on the active line.

(C) In "when the RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated (RT5)", when the "small prize A6 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 06" (payout of 10 coins) is displayed stopped on the active line regardless of the operation mode (push order and operation timing) of the stop switch 42.
Therefore, when the "small prize A6 condition device" is activated during RT5, the "small prize 06" is always won (with a 100% probability), and "10 medals" are paid out.

(D) When "RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not in operation when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is in operation," "RB-C and RB-D condition devices are not in operation when 1BB-E is in operation," and "RB-C or RB-D condition devices are in operation when 1BB-E is in operation," the reel 31 is stopped in the same way as in (A) "non-internal (non-RT and RT1)."

The winning combinations of the "small combination B1 condition device" are set to "small combination 01", "small combination 08", "small combination 09" and "small combination 13".
In addition, the stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated is the same as the stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated.
The winning combinations of the "small win B2 condition device" are set to "small win 02", "small win 08", "small win 10" and "small win 13".
In addition, the stopping control of the reel 31 when the "small prize B2 condition device" is activated is the same as the stopping control of the reel 31 when the "small prize A2 condition device" is activated.

The winning combinations of the "small combination B3 condition device" are set to "small combination 03", "small combination 08", "small combination 09", "small combination 11" and "small combination 13".
In addition, the stopping control of the reel 31 when the "small prize B3 condition device" is activated is the same as the stopping control of the reel 31 when the "small prize A3 condition device" is activated.
The winning combinations of the "small combination B4 condition device" are set to "small combination 04", "small combination 08", "small combination 09", "small combination 11" and "small combination 13".
In addition, the stopping control of the reel 31 when the "small prize B4 condition device" is activated is the same as the stopping control of the reel 31 when the "small prize A4 condition device" is activated.

The winning combinations of the "small combination B5 condition device" are set to "small combination 05", "small combination 08", "small combination 09", "small combination 12" and "small combination 13".
In addition, the stopping control of the reel 31 when the "small prize B5 condition device" is activated is the same as the stopping control of the reel 31 when the "small prize A5 condition device" is activated.
The winning combinations of the "small combination B6 condition device" are set to "small combination 06", "small combination 08", "small combination 09", "small combination 12" and "small combination 13".
In addition, the stopping control of the reel 31 when the "small prize B6 condition device" is activated is the same as the stopping control of the reel 31 when the "small prize A6 condition device" is activated.

The winning combination of the "small win C condition device" is set to "small win 07".
In addition, when the "small win C condition device" is activated, regardless of the operation mode (pressing order and operation timing) of the stop switch 42, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 07" (10 coins paid out) is displayed stopped on the activated line.
Therefore, when the "small prize C condition device" is activated, the "small prize 07" is always won (with a 100% probability), and "10 medals" are paid out.

The winning combinations of the "small win D condition device" are set to "small win 01", "small win 08", "small win 10" and "small win 21".
In addition, when the "small prize D condition device" is activated, regardless of the operation mode (pressing order and operation timing) of the stop switch 42, the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 01" (10 coins paid out) is displayed stopped on the active line.
Therefore, when the "small prize D condition device" is activated, the "small prize 01" is always won (with a 100% probability), and "10 medals" are paid out.

The winning combinations of the "small win E condition device" are set to "small win 02", "small win 08", "small win 10" and "small win 21".
In addition, the "Small Winning E Condition Device" is selected in the states (1) to (8) shown in the "Small Winning A1 Condition Device" section (Figures 148, 150, 152, 154, 158, 160, 162, and 164).

Furthermore, the "small win E condition device" controls the stopping of the reel 31 differently depending on the state of (A) or (B) below.
(A) "Not inside (non-RT and RT1)" and "1BB-A to E condition device operation (1BB-A to E inside) (RT2 and RT3)"
(B) "When RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not in operation when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is in operation (when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is in general play and not inside the SRB)", "When RB-C and RB-D condition devices are not in operation when 1BB-E is in operation (when 1BB-E is in general play and not inside the SRB)", "When RB-A or RB-B condition devices are in operation when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is in operation (when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is in general play and inside the SRB) (RT5)", and "When RB-C or RB-D condition devices are in operation when 1BB-E is in operation (when 1BB-E is in general play and inside the SRB)".

(A) In "non-internal" and "when the 1BB-A to E condition device is activated", when the "small win E condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 21" (1 coin payout) is displayed stopped on the active line regardless of the operation mode (push order and operation timing) of the stop switch 42. Therefore, "small win 21" is always won (100% probability), and "1 coin" is paid out.

(B) "When RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated," "When RB-C and RB-D condition devices are not activated when 1BB-E is activated," "When RB-A or RB-B condition devices are activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated," and "When RB-C or RB-D condition devices are activated when 1BB-E is activated," when the small win E condition device is activated, regardless of the operation mode (push order and operation timing) of the stop switch 42, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 02" (10 medals paid out) is displayed stopped on the active line. Therefore, "small win 02" always wins (with a 100% probability), and "10 medals" are paid out.

For the "Small win F condition device" to "Small win H condition device", the lottery is held in the states (1) to (8) shown in the "Small win A1 condition device" section, and the stopping control of the reel 31 differs depending on the state (A) or (B) shown in the "Small win E condition device" section.

In addition, the winning combinations of the "small win F condition device" are set to "small win 03", "small win 08", "small win 10" and "small win 21".
Furthermore, the winning combinations of the "small combination G condition device" are set to "small combination 04", "small combination 08", "small combination 10" and "small combination 21".
Furthermore, the winning combinations of the "small combination H condition device" are set to "small combination 05", "small combination 08", "small combination 10", "small combination 20" and "small combination 21".

(A) In the "non-internal" state and when the "1BB-A to E condition device is activated", when the "small win F condition device" to "small win H condition device" are activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 21" (1 coin payout) is displayed stopped on the active line regardless of the operation mode of the stop switch 42.

(B) "When the RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated,""When the RB-C and RB-D condition devices are not activated when 1BB-E is activated,""When the RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated," and "When the RB-C or RB-D condition device is activated when 1BB-E is activated," when the "small prize F condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 03" (payout of 10 coins) is displayed stopped on the active line regardless of the operation mode of the stop switch 42.
Similarly, when the "small win G condition device" is activated, regardless of the manner in which the stop switch 42 is operated, a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 04" (10 coins paid out) is displayed frozen on the active line, and when the "small win H condition device" is activated, regardless of the manner in which the stop switch 42 is operated, a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 05" (10 coins paid out) is displayed frozen on the active line.

The winning combinations of the "small win I condition device" are set to "small win 15" and "small win 16". When the "small win I condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 15" (3 coins paid out) or "small win 16" (1 coin paid out) can be stopped on the effective line.
In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 15" is displayed stopped on an active line, "watermelon" - "watermelon" - "watermelon" can be stopped on the downward sloping line (invalid line) passing through the "top left" - "middle middle" - "bottom right".

The winning combinations of the "small win J condition device" are set to "small win 13", "small win 15" and "small win 16". In addition, the stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win J condition device" is activated is the same as the stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win I condition device" is activated.
The "Small Win J Condition Device" will not win on its own, but will win in combination with the "1BB-A Condition Device."

The winning combinations of the "small prize K condition device" are set to "small prize 09", "small prize 17" and "small prize 21". When the "small prize K condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 17" or "small prize 21" (both pay out one coin) can be stopped on the active line.
In addition, when a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 17" is displayed stopped on an active line, "watermelon"-"watermelon"-"watermelon" can be stopped on the upper line (invalid line), and when a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 21" is displayed stopped on an active line, "watermelon"-"watermelon"-"watermelon" can be stopped on the lower line (invalid line).

The winning combinations of the "small win L condition device" are set to "small win 09", "small win 10", "small win 17" and "small win 21". In addition, the stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win L condition device" is activated is the same as the stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win K condition device" is activated.
The "small prize L condition device" will not win on its own, but will win in combination with the "1BB-C condition device."

The winning combination of the "small win M condition device" is set to "small win 18".
When the "small prize M condition device" is activated, regardless of the manner in which the stop switch 42 is operated (the order in which it is pressed and the timing of its operation), a symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 18" (one coin payout) is displayed stopped on the active line.
In addition, the winning combination corresponding to "minor win 18" is displayed stopped on an active line and the winning combination is called "chance win A".

When the "small prize N condition device" to the "small prize Q condition device" are activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 18" is displayed stopped on the pay line, similarly to when the "small prize M condition device" is activated, regardless of the operation mode of the stop switch 42.
In addition, the winning roles of the "small role N condition device" are set to "small role 09" and "small role 18", the winning roles of the "small role O condition device" are set to "small role 10" and "small role 18", the winning roles of the "small role P condition device" are set to "small role 11" and "small role 18", and the winning roles of the "small role Q condition device" are set to "small role 12" and "small role 18".

In addition, the "Small Role N Condition Device" through the "Small Role Q Condition Device" will never win on their own. The "Small Role N Condition Device" will win in combination with the "1BB-D Condition Device", the "Small Role O Condition Device" will win in combination with the "1BB-B Condition Device", the "Small Role P Condition Device" will win in combination with the "1BB-C Condition Device", and the "Small Role Q Condition Device" will win in combination with the "1BB-D Condition Device".

The winning combinations of the "small combination R condition device" are set to "small combination 19" and "small combination 20".
When the "small win R condition device" is activated, a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 19" or "small win 20" (both of which pay out one coin) is displayed stopped on the pay line.
In addition, the winning combination corresponding to "small win 19" or "small win 20" when stopped and displayed on an active line is called "chance win B".

When the "Small win S condition device" to the "Small win V condition device" are activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 19" or "Small win 20" is displayed stopped on the active line, just as when the "Small win R condition device" is activated.
In addition, the winning roles of the "small role S condition device" are set to "small role 09", "small role 19", "small role 20" and "small role 21", the winning roles of the "small role T condition device" are set to "small role 10", "small role 19" and "small role 20", the winning roles of the "small role U condition device" are set to "small role 11", "small role 19" and "small role 20", and the winning roles of the "small role V condition device" are set to "small role 12", "small role 19" and "small role 20".

In addition, the "Small Prize S Condition Device" through the "Small Prize V Condition Device" will never win on their own. The "Small Prize S Condition Device" will win in combination with the "1BB-A Condition Device", the "Small Prize T Condition Device" will win in combination with the "1BB-C Condition Device", the "Small Prize U Condition Device" will win in combination with the "1BB-C Condition Device", and the "Small Prize V Condition Device" will win in combination with the "1BB-D Condition Device".

The winning combinations of the "small combination W condition device" are set to "small combination 08" to "small combination 14" and "small combination 17" to "small combination 21".
When the "small prize W condition device" is activated, a symbol combination corresponding to either "small prize 08" to "small prize 14" or "small prize 17" to "small prize 21" (each of which pays out one coin) is displayed on the pay line. In other words, any one of the one coin combinations will win.

The winning combination of the "small combination X condition device" is set to "small combination 01" to "small combination 22". That is, when the "small combination X condition device" is activated, all small combinations become winning combinations.
When the "small prize X condition device" is activated, a symbol combination corresponding to any one of "small prize 01" to "small prize 07" or "small prize 22" (each of which pays out 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on the pay line. In other words, any one of the 10 coin combinations will win.

147 to 170 are diagrams (number placement table) showing the number of winning numbers to be placed for each game state (RT) and each setting value in the tenth embodiment.
Dividing the numbers shown in Figures 147 to 170 by "65536" gives the probability of winning for each winning number. For example, in Figure 147, the number of numbers for the winning number "2" is "4" for all settings, so the probability of winning the winning number "2" in non-RT is "4/65536".
Also, for example, when the winning number "2" in Fig. 147 is won in the lottery by the role lottery means 61, the role condition device number "1" and the small role and replay condition device number "33" are generated from this winning number "2". Then, the "1BB-A condition device" corresponding to the role condition device number "1" and the "small role J condition device" corresponding to the small role and replay condition device number "33" are operated.

In Figures 147 to 170, in the "Lottery" column, "○" means that a lottery will be held (the number is subject to the lottery), and "×" means that a lottery will not be held (the number is not subject to the lottery). Also, for winning numbers with an "○" in the "Lottery" column (for which a lottery will be held), a value of "1" or more is set, and for winning numbers with an "×" in the "Lottery" column (for which a lottery will not be held), a value of "0" is set.

Also, in Figures 147 to 170, the last part of each number placement table shows the 1BB total value, the RB total value, the SB total value, the replay total value, the small win total value, and the non-winning value.
In addition, when the 1BB condition device and the small win or replay condition device are activated at the same time (double winning), the number of pieces is added to both the 1BB total value and the small win or replay total value. Therefore, the total from the 1BB total value to the non-winning value may not be "65536".

147 to 148 are diagrams showing the number placement table in non-RT (non-internal).
During non-RT, a lottery is held for the role condition devices "1BB-A condition device" through "1BB-E condition device", as well as "SB-A condition device" and "SB-B condition device", but a lottery is not held for "RB-A condition device" through "RB-D condition device".
The "RB-A condition device" and the "RB-B condition device" are only drawn when "RB is not in operation when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is in operation and the RB condition device is not in operation (when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is in general play and not inside the SRB)" as described below.
In addition, the "RB-C condition device" and the "RB-D condition device" are only drawn when "RB is not in operation when 1BB-E is in operation and the RB condition device is not in operation (during general play of 1BB-E game and not inside SRB)" as described below.

Also, during non-RT, with regard to the replay condition devices, a lottery is held only for the "replay A condition device" and the "replay G condition device".
Furthermore, during non-RT, selection is made for the small win condition devices "small win A1 condition device" to "small win B6 condition device", but selection is not made for the "small win X condition device".
During non-RT, when the "Small Prize A1 Condition Device" to "Small Prize B6 Condition Device" are activated, only one of the six possible push sequences will be the correct push sequence, and the other five push sequences will be incorrect push sequences.

During non-RT, one of the "small prize A1 condition device" to "small prize B6 condition device" operates with a probability of "(4400 x 6 + 680 x 6 =) 30480/65536". At this time, if the correct push order is notified, the small prize that pays out 10 coins can always be won, but if the correct push order is not notified, the small prize that pays out 10 coins will be won with a probability of "1/6", and the small prize that pays out 1 coin will be won with a probability of "5/6".
During non-RT, if the correct button press sequence is announced when the "Small Prize A1 Condition Device" through the "Small Prize B6 Condition Device" are activated, the payout rate exceeds "1" and the player's medals increase; if the correct button press sequence is not announced, the payout rate is less than "1" and the player's medals decrease.

149 to 150 are diagrams showing the number placement table in RT1 (non-internal).
During RT1, the number of "Replay A condition devices" and "Replay G condition devices" placed (probability of winning) is different from that during non-RT, but otherwise it is the same as during non-RT.
The allocation of the number of "replay A condition devices" and "replay G condition devices" differs between non-RT and RT1, but the replay total value is the same between non-RT and RT1. Therefore, the winning probability of the replay condition devices is the same between non-RT and RT1.

In addition, the stopping control of the reel 31 when the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize B6 condition device" are activated is the same in non-RT and RT1.
Therefore, during RT1, just like during non-RT, if the correct button press sequence is announced when the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" through the "Small Role B6 Condition Device" are activated, the payout rate will exceed "1" and the player's medals will increase; if the correct button press sequence is not announced, the payout rate will be less than "1" and the player's medals will decrease.

151 to 152 are diagrams showing the number setting table in RT2 (when the 1BB-A to 1BB-D condition device is in operation (inside 1BB-A to 1BB-D)).
During RT2, no selection of the reel condition device is made.
During RT2, a lottery is held to select the replay condition device from among the "replay A condition device" and the "replay G condition device" to "replay M condition device."
Furthermore, the replay total value in non-RT and RT1 is 8978, whereas the replay total value in RT2 is 17000. Therefore, when moving from non-RT or RT1 to RT2, the winning probability of the replay condition device increases.

The number of small win condition devices in RT2 is the same as that in non-RT and RT1. Therefore, even if the mode shifts from non-RT or RT1 to RT2, the winning probability of each small win condition device does not change.
However, in RT2, unlike non-RT and RT1, when the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize B6 condition device" are activated, two of the six possible push orders are correct push orders, and the other four are incorrect push orders. Therefore, if the correct push order is not announced, there is a 1/3 probability of winning a small prize that pays out 10 coins, and a 2/3 probability of winning a small prize that pays out 1 coin.
In RT2, since the selection of the special feature condition device is not performed, the number of small feature condition devices that overlap with the special feature condition device during non-internal play are assigned to the winning numbers "59,""61,""63" to "66," and "68" to "71," respectively.

During RT2, there is a probability of 17000/65536 for any replay included in the winning combination of the "Replay A condition device" or the "Replay G condition device" to "Replay M condition device" to win.
Furthermore, during RT2, one of the "small prize A1 condition device" to "small prize B6 condition device" operates with a probability of "(4400 x 6 + 680 x 6 =) 30480/65536". At this time, if the correct push order is notified, the small prize that pays out 10 coins can always be won, but if the correct push order is not notified, there is a 1/3 probability that the small prize that pays out 10 coins will be won, and a 2/3 probability that the small prize that pays out 1 coin will be won.
During RT2, just like during non-RT and RT1, if the correct button press sequence is announced when the "Small Prize A1 Condition Device" through the "Small Prize B6 Condition Device" are activated, the payout rate will exceed "1" and the player's medals will increase; if the correct button press sequence is not announced, the payout rate will be less than "1" and the player's medals will decrease.

153 to 154 are diagrams showing the number setting table in RT3 (when the 1BB-E condition device is in operation (inside 1BB-E)).
During RT3, as during RT2, no selection of the reel condition device is conducted.
During RT3, the lottery is held only for the "Replay A condition device."

Furthermore, the replay total value in non-RT and RT1 is 8978, whereas the replay total value in RT3 is 11000. Therefore, when moving from non-RT or RT1 to RT3, the winning probability of the replay condition device increases.
Furthermore, the winning probability of the replay condition device in RT3 is set lower than the winning probability of the replay condition device in RT2. And, in RT3, the winning probability of the replay condition device is lower than that in RT2, so that the probability of not winning is higher.

The number of small win condition devices in RT3 is the same as that in non-RT, RT1, and RT2. Therefore, even if you move from non-RT or RT1 to RT3, the winning probability of each small win condition device does not change. In addition, the winning probability of each small win condition device is the same in RT2 and RT3.
In addition, the stopping control of the reel 31 when the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize B6 condition device" are activated is the same in RT2 and RT3.
In RT3, since the selection of the special feature condition device is not performed, the number of small feature condition devices that overlap with the special feature condition device during non-internal play are assigned to the winning numbers "59,""61,""63" to "66," and "68" to "71," respectively.

Also, during RT3, there is a probability of "11000/65536" for the "Replay A Condition Device" to be activated and "Replay 01" to be won.
Furthermore, during RT3, one of the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize B6 condition device" operates with a probability of (4400 x 6 + 680 x 6 =) 30480/65536. The stop control of the reel 31 during operation of the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize B6 condition device" is the same in RT2 and RT3, so if the correct push order is notified, a small prize that pays out 10 coins can always be won, but if the correct push order is not notified, there is a 1/3 probability that a small prize that pays out 10 coins will be won, and a 2/3 probability that a small prize that pays out 1 coin will be won.
Therefore, during RT3, just like during non-RT and RT1 to RT2, if the correct button press sequence is announced when the "Small Prize A1 Condition Device" to "Small Prize B6 Condition Device" are activated, the payout rate will exceed "1" and the player's medals will increase, and if the correct button press sequence is not announced, the payout rate will be less than "1" and the player's medals will decrease.

155 to 156 are diagrams showing the number placement table in RT4 (when 1BB-A or 1BB-B is in operation (1BB-A is being played)).
During RT4, as during RT2 and RT3, no selection of the reel condition device is conducted.
During RT4, a lottery is held to select the replay condition device from among the "replay G condition device" to the "replay I condition device."
Furthermore, the replay total value in RT4 is "4000", which is smaller than the replay total values in non-RT and RT1 to RT3. Therefore, when the game shifts to RT4, the winning probability of the replay condition device becomes lower.

Furthermore, as described above, in RT4, when the right to execute the notification game (AT) is possessed, when the "replay H condition device" or the "replay I condition device" is activated, the operation information of the stop switch 42 is notified that the stop switch 42 should be operated by pushing in order aiming for the "blue 7" symbol.
Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated in an operation mode based on the notified operation information and a symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 02" or "Replay 04" is displayed stopped on an active line, it is notified that the player has the right to play the notified game.

During RT4, a lottery is held only for the "small win X condition device" with respect to the small win condition device.
Furthermore, during RT4, the number of "small prize X condition device" is "61536" in common to all settings, so the "small prize X condition device" operates with a probability of "61536/65536".
As described above, when the "small win X condition device" is activated, regardless of the operation mode (push order and operation timing) of the stop switch 42, a symbol combination corresponding to either "small win 01" to "small win 07" or "small win 22" (each of which pays out 10 coins) is displayed stopped on the active line.

During RT4, there is a probability of 4000/65536 for any of the replays included in the winning combinations of the "Replay G Condition Device" to the "Replay I Condition Device" to win, or there is a probability of 61536/65536 for any of the minor combinations that pay out 10 coins to win. During RT4, the probability of not winning is 0, so there is no chance of not winning.
Therefore, during RT4, the payout rate exceeds "1" and 10 medals are paid out for every game in which three medals are inserted, so the player's medals increase.

Figures 157 to 158 are diagrams showing the number placement table when "RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not in operation while 1BB-C or 1BB-D is in operation (general play during 1BB-C or 1BB-D play and not inside SRB)."
When "RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not in operation while 1BB-C or 1BB-D is in operation," a lottery is held for the "RB-A condition device" and the "RB-B condition device" (shift RB).
In addition, when "RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not in operation while 1BB-C or 1BB-D is in operation," no lottery is drawn for the replay condition device.

Furthermore, the number of small prize condition devices set is the same for non-RT and RT1 to RT3, and when "RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not activated while 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated."
Furthermore, the stopping control of reel 31 when the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize B6 condition device" are activated is the same in non-RT and RT1 and when "RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated."
In addition, when "RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not in operation while 1BB-C or 1BB-D is in operation," a lottery is not conducted for the 1BB-A to 1BB-E condition devices, so the numbers of small winning condition devices that overlap with the 1BB-A to 1BB-E condition devices in the non-internal area are assigned to the winning numbers "59,""61,""63" to "66," and "68" to "71," respectively.

In addition, when "1BB-C or 1BB-D is in operation and the RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not in operation," there is a probability of "30,778/65,536" that the RB-A or RB-B condition device will be activated, or there is a probability of "34,758/65,536" that one of the minor winning condition devices will be activated, and the probability of not winning is "0."

In addition, when "RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not activated while 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated," one of the "small prize A1 condition device" to "small prize B6 condition device" will be activated with a probability of "(4400 x 6 + 680 x 6 =) 30480/65536." And, since the stop control of the reel 31 when the "small prize A1 condition device" to "small prize B6 condition device" are activated is the same as in non-RT, if the correct push order is notified, a small prize that will pay out 10 coins will always be won, but if the correct push order is not notified, there is a 1/6 probability that a small prize that will pay out 10 coins will be won, and a 5/6 probability that a small prize that will pay out 1 coin will be won.
Therefore, when "RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not in operation while 1BB-C or 1BB-D is in operation," if the correct button press sequence is announced when the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" through the "Small Role B6 Condition Device" are in operation, the ball payout rate will exceed "1" and the player's medals will increase, and if the correct button press sequence is not announced, the ball payout rate will be less than "1" and the player's medals will decrease.

Figures 159 to 160 are diagrams showing the number placement table for RT5 (when RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated (general play during 1BB-C or 1BB-D play and inside SRB)).
During RT5, as during RT2 to RT4, no selection of the reel condition device is conducted.
During RT5, a lottery is held to select the replay condition device from among the "replay A condition device" and the "replay G condition device" to "replay I condition device."

Furthermore, as described above, in RT5, when the right to execute the notification game (AT) is possessed, when the "replay H condition device" or the "replay I condition device" is activated, the operation information of the stop switch 42 is notified that the stop switch 42 should be operated by pushing in order to aim for the "blue 7" symbol.
Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated in an operation mode based on the notified operation information and a symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 02" or "Replay 04" is displayed stopped on an active line, it is notified that the player has the right to play the notified game.

In addition, the number of small prize condition devices in RT5 is the same as that in non-RT, RT1 to RT3, and when RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not activated while 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated.
However, in RT5, unlike non-RT and RT1 to RT3, when the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize B6 condition device" are activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 01" (10 medals paid out) is stopped and displayed on the active line regardless of the operation mode (push order and operation timing) of the stop switch 42. Therefore, in RT5, when the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize B6 condition device" are activated, "small prize 01" always wins (with a 100% probability), and 10 medals are paid out.
In RT5, since the lottery for the special feature condition device is not conducted, the number of small feature condition devices that overlap with the special feature condition device during non-internal play are assigned to the winning numbers "59,""61,""63" to "66," and "68" to "71," respectively.

In addition, in RT5, there is a probability of (4400 x 6 + 680 x 6 =) 30480/65536 that one of the "small prize A1 condition device" to "small prize B6 condition device" will be activated, "small prize 01" will be awarded, and 10 medals will be paid out.
Furthermore, in RT5, when the setting is 1, there is a probability of 18,600/65,536 that either the "Replay A condition device" or the "Replay G condition device" through "Replay I condition device" will be activated, and any of the replays included in these winning combinations will win, resulting in a replay.

Furthermore, in RT5, when setting 1, the probability of not winning is "12178/65536".
Therefore, during RT5, there is the highest probability that one of the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize B6 condition device" will be activated, resulting in the winning of "small prize 01" and the payment of 10 medals, so that the payout rate exceeds "1" and the player's medals will increase.

Figures 161 to 162 are diagrams showing the number placement table when "RB-C and RB-D condition devices are not in operation while 1BB-E is in operation (general play during 1BB-E play and not inside SRB)."
When "RB-C and RB-D condition devices are not in operation while 1BB-E is in operation," a lottery is held for the "RB-C condition device" and the "RB-D condition device."
In addition, when "RB-C and RB-D condition devices are not in operation while 1BB-E is in operation," no lottery is drawn for the replay condition device.

Furthermore, the number of each small prize condition device is the same for non-RT and RT1 to RT3, and when "RB-C and RB-D condition devices are not activated when 1BB-E is activated."
Furthermore, the stopping control of the reel 31 when the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize B6 condition device" are activated is the same in non-RT and RT1 and when the "RB-C and RB-D condition devices are not activated when 1BB-E is activated."
In addition, when "RB-C and RB-D condition devices are not in operation while 1BB-E is in operation," a lottery is not conducted for the 1BB-A to 1BB-E condition devices, so the numbers of small winning condition devices that overlap with the 1BB-A to 1BB-E condition devices and win during non-internal play are assigned to the winning numbers "59,""61,""63" to "66," and "68" to "71," respectively.

In addition, when "1BB-E is in operation and the RB-C and RB-D condition devices are not in operation," in the case of setting 1, there is a probability of "30,778/65,536" that the RB-C or RB-D condition device will be activated, or there is a probability of "34,758/65,536" that one of the minor winning condition devices will be activated, and the probability of not winning is "0."

Also, when "RB-C and RB-D condition devices are not activated while 1BB-E is activated," one of the "small win A1 condition device" to "small win B6 condition device" will be activated with a probability of "(4400 x 6 + 680 x 6 =) 30480/65536." And, since the stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win A1 condition device" to "small win B6 condition device" are activated is the same as in non-RT, if the correct push order is notified, a small win with a payout of 10 coins can always be won, but if the correct push order is not notified, there is a 1/6 probability of a small win with a payout of 10 coins, and a 5/6 probability of a small win with a payout of 1 coin.
Therefore, when "RB-C and RB-D condition devices are not in operation while 1BB-E is in operation," if the correct button press sequence is announced when the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" through "Small Role B6 Condition Device" are in operation, the ball payout rate will exceed "1" and the player's medals will increase, and if the correct button press sequence is not announced, the ball payout rate will be less than "1" and the player's medals will decrease.

Figures 163 to 164 are diagrams showing the number placement table when "RB-C or RB-D condition device is activated when 1BB-E is activated (general play during 1BB-E play and inside SRB)".
When "RB-C and RB-D condition devices are activated while 1BB-E is activated," no selection is made for the reel condition device, and no selection is made for the replay condition device either.

In addition, the number of each small prize condition device is the same for non-RT, RT1 to RT3, and when "RB-C and RB-D condition devices are not activated when 1BB-E is activated" and when "RB-C and RB-D condition devices are activated when 1BB-E is activated."
Furthermore, the stopping control of reel 31 when the "small prize A1 condition device" to "small prize B6 condition device" are activated is the same in non-RT, RT1 and "when the RB-C and RB-D condition devices are not activated when 1BB-E is activated" and "when the RB-C and RB-D condition devices are activated when 1BB-E is activated."
In addition, since the selection of the bonus condition device is not conducted when "RB-C and RB-D condition devices are activated while 1BB-E is activated," the number of small bonus condition devices that overlap with the 1BB-A to 1BB-E condition devices and win during non-internal play are assigned to the winning numbers "59,""61,""63" to "66," and "68" to "71," respectively.

In addition, when "RB-C and RB-D condition devices are activated when 1BB-E is activated," one of the "Small Winning A1 Condition Device" to "Small Winning B6 Condition Device" will be activated with a probability of (4400 x 6 + 680 x 6 =) 30480/65536. And since the stop control of reel 31 when the "Small Winning A1 Condition Device" to "Small Winning B6 Condition Device" are activated is the same as in non-RT, if the correct button press sequence is notified, a small winning combination that pays out 10 coins will always be won, but if the correct button press sequence is not notified, there is a 1/6 probability of a small winning combination that pays out 10 coins, and a 5/6 probability of a small winning combination that pays out 1 coin.

Furthermore, when "RB-C and RB-D condition devices are activated when 1BB-E is activated," in the case of setting 1, there is a probability of "30778/65536" of not winning.
Therefore, when "RB-C and RB-D condition devices are in operation while 1BB-E is in operation," if the correct button press sequence is announced when the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" through the "Small Role B6 Condition Device" are in operation, the payout rate will exceed "1" and the player's medals will increase; if the correct button press sequence is not announced, the payout rate will be less than "1" and the player's medals will decrease.

165 to 166 are diagrams showing the number placement table when "RB-A to RB-D are in operation while 1BB-C to 1BB-E are in operation (when SRB is being played while 1BB-C to 1BB-E are being played)."
When "RB-A to RB-D are in operation while 1BB-C to 1BB-E are in operation," no selection is made for the reel condition device, and no selection is made for the replay condition device either.
In addition, when "RB-A to RB-D are in operation while 1BB-C to 1BB-E are in operation," only the "small win W condition device" and the "small win X condition device" are selected for the small win condition device.

When the "small win W condition device" is activated, regardless of the operation mode (pressing order and operation timing) of the stop switch 42, a symbol combination corresponding to either "small win 08" to "small win 14" or "small win 17" to "small win 21" (each of which pays out one coin) is displayed stopped.
In addition, when the "small win X condition device" is activated, regardless of the operation mode of the stop switch 42, a symbol combination corresponding to either "small win 01" to "small win 07" or "small win 22" (each of which pays out 10 coins) is displayed stopped on the active line.

Then, when "RB-A to RB-D are activated while 1BB-C to 1BB-E are activated," in the case of setting 1, there is a probability of "36,958/65,536" for the "small prize W condition device" to be activated and any of the small prizes that result in the payout of 1 coin to be won, there is a probability of "7,800/65,536" for the "small prize X condition device" to be activated and any of the small prizes that result in the payout of 10 coins to be won, and there is a probability of "20,778/65,536" for a non-winning result.
Therefore, when "RB-A to RB-D are in operation while 1BB-C to 1BB-E are in operation," the payout rate becomes less than "1," and the player's medals decrease.

Figures 167 to 168 are figures showing the number setting table when "SB is activated during non-RT."
When "SB is activated during non-RT" is compared with "SB is not activated during non-RT" (Figures 147 to 148), the number of each role condition device and each replay condition device placed is the same, but the number of each minor role condition device placed is different.
When "SB is not activated during non-RT", the "small role A1 condition device" to the "small role B6 condition device" are selected, but the "small role X condition device" is not selected. In addition, the number of "small role W condition devices" is set to "4" in all settings.
In contrast, when "SB is activated during non-RT", the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize B6 condition device" are not selected, and only the "small prize W condition device" and the "small prize X condition device" are selected.

Then, when "SB is activated during non-RT", in the case of setting 1, there is a probability of "28839/65536" for the "small prize W condition device" to be activated and any small prize resulting in a payout of 1 coin to be won, and there is a probability of "5784/65536" for the "small prize X condition device" to be activated and any small prize resulting in a payout of 10 coins to be won. Also, there is a probability of "21794/65536" for the "SB-A condition device" or "SB-B condition device" to be activated. In this case, regardless of whether "SB01" or "SB02" is won or not, the number of medals paid out in the current game will be "0".
Therefore, when "SB is activated during non-RT", the payout rate becomes less than "1", and the player's medals decrease.

In addition, when SB is activated during non-RT, the total value of the small wins is "34759" and the non-winning value is "5".
In contrast, when SB is not activated during non-RT (Figures 147 to 148), the total value of small wins is "34758" and the non-winning value is "6".
Therefore, when "SB is activated during non-RT", the total value of small wins is "1" larger and the non-winning value is "1" smaller than when "SB is not activated during non-RT".

Figures 169 to 170 are diagrams showing the number setting table when "SB is activated during RT1."
When comparing "when SB is activated during RT1" with "when SB is not activated during RT1" (Figures 149 to 150), the number of each reel condition device and each replay condition device is the same, but the number of each minor role condition device is different.
In addition, when comparing "when SB is activated during RT1" with "when SB is activated during non-RT" (Figures 167 to 168), the number of "Replay A condition devices" and "Replay G condition devices" placed is different, but the other numbers placed are the same.

Furthermore, the stopping control of reel 31 when the "small win W condition device,""small win X condition device,""SB-A condition device," and "SB-B condition device" are activated is the same "when SB is activated during non-RT" and "when SB is activated during RT1."
Therefore, when "SB is activated during RT1", the payout rate is less than "1", just like when "SB is activated during non-RT", and the player's medals decrease.

In addition, when comparing "when SB is activated during RT1" with "when SB is activated during non-RT", the allocation of the numbers of the "Replay A condition device" and the "Replay G condition device" is different, but the total replay value is the same, so the probability of winning the replay condition device is the same.
In addition, when comparing "when SB is activated during RT1" with "when SB is not activated during RT1," the combined small win value is "1" greater when SB is activated during RT1 than when SB is not activated during RT1, and the non-winning value is "1" less when SB is activated during RT1 than when SB is not activated during RT1.

Next, the RT transition in the tenth embodiment will be described.
FIG. 171 is a diagram showing RT transitions in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 172 is a diagram showing RT variation conditions in the tenth embodiment.
In Figure 172, "∞" (infinite) in the number of times column means that there is no upper limit on the number of times that each RT can be played, and that RT will be maintained (continued) until the transition condition written in the change trigger column is met.

The main control means 50 judges whether or not the RT transition condition is satisfied every game when all the reels 31 are stopped, and performs control to transition to RT when it judges that the RT transition condition is satisfied.
First, when the RWM 53 is initialized, the state transitions to non-RT. When shipped from the factory, the state transitions to non-RT. Also, when the power is off and the setting key switch 152 is turned on and the power is turned on in this state, the state transitions to a setting change state. At this time, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed, and the state transitions to non-RT.
Also, when the "1BB-A to 1BB-E operating state" ends (the number of medals paid out in the 1BB-A to 1BB-E games reaches a predetermined number (210 medals)), the game transitions to RT1.

Non-RT is maintained until the "1BB-A to 1BB-E condition device" is activated. Then, in non-RT, when the "1BB-A to 1BB-D condition device" is activated, it transitions to RT2. Also, in non-RT, when the "1BB-E condition device" is activated, it transitions to RT3.
The same applies to RT1 as for non-RT. In other words, RT1 is maintained until the "1BB-A to 1BB-E condition device" is activated. Then, when the "1BB-A to 1BB-D condition device" is activated in RT1, it transitions to RT2. Also, when the "1BB-E condition device" is activated in RT1, it transitions to RT3.

RT2 is maintained until a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB01" or "1BB02" is stopped and displayed on an active line, or until a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB03" or "1BB04" is stopped and displayed on an active line.
Then, in RT2, when a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB01" or "1BB02" is stopped and displayed on an active line, the game transitions to RT4.
In addition, in RT2, when a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB03" or "1BB04" is displayed stopped on an active line, the state transitions to "when RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not activated while 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated (general play during 1BB-C or 1BB-D play and not inside SRB)."

RT3 is maintained until the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB05" or "1BB06" is displayed stopped on the pay line.
Then, in RT3, when a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB05" or "1BB06" is displayed stopped on an active line, the state transitions to "when 1BB-E is activated (during 1BB-E play)".
In addition, "when 1BB-E is activated" includes "when the RB-C and RB-D condition devices are not activated when 1BB-E is activated (during general play during 1BB-E play and not inside the SRB)", "when the RB-C or RB-D condition device is activated when 1BB-E is activated (during general play during 1BB-E play and inside the SRB)", and "when RB-C or RB-D is activated when 1BB-E is activated (during SRB play during 1BB-E play)".

In addition, when the notification game is not being played (not during AT), "1BB-E operation (1BB-E play)" serves as a "chance zone (CZ)" with a high probability of winning the AT lottery, and when the notification game is being played (during AT), it serves as an "add-on specialized zone" with a high probability of adding (adding on) the number of rights to play the notification game or the number of plays during the notification game.
When the game transitions to "When 1BB-E is activated," the game alternates between the "Chance Zone (CZ)," in which the probability of winning the AT lottery is set high, and the "CZ High Probability Zone," in which the probability of transitioning to the Chance Zone is set high, until the end conditions of "When 1BB-E is activated" are met.
Specifically, when the transition to "1BB-E operation" occurs, the game first transitions to the chance zone. The chance zone continues until five plays have been played, and ends when five plays have been played. In other words, the condition for ending the chance zone is that the number of plays has reached five (five plays have been played). In addition, in the tenth embodiment, the number of plays in the chance zone is fixed at five plays.

In addition, in the chance zone during a non-AT, when the "small role I condition device" to the "small role V condition device" (rare role) are activated (won), the right to play the notification game (AT) is granted. Furthermore, in the chance zone during a non-AT, if the right to play the notification game is held, when the "small role I condition device" to the "small role V condition device" are activated, the number of rights to play the notification game is added (topped up). Furthermore, in the chance zone during the notification game (AT), when the "small role I condition device" to the "small role V condition device" are activated, the number of rights to play the notification game or the number of times played during the notification game is added (topped up).
Then, when five games are played in the chance zone, the chance zone ends and the game transitions to the CZ high probability zone.

In addition, the CZ high probability zone continues until the "small role I condition device" to the "small role V condition device" are activated or the "1BB-E operation time" ends. In other words, the end condition of the CZ high probability zone is that the "small role I condition device" to the "small role V condition device" are activated or the "1BB-E operation time" ends.
Then, in the CZ high probability zone, if the "small prize I condition device" to "small prize V condition device" are activated, and the termination condition "when 1BB-E is activated" is not met, the CZ high probability zone ends and the game transitions to the chance zone again.
In addition, when the termination condition for "When 1BB-E is activated" is met in the CZ high probability zone, "When 1BB-E is activated" ends and the CZ high probability zone ends.

However, when the end condition of "1BB-E Activation" is met in the chance zone, "1BB-E Activation" ends, but the chance zone continues until the end condition is met (5 plays are completed). In this case, when "1BB-E Activation" ends, it transitions to RT1, but since the chance zone continues until 5 plays are completed, the remaining plays in the chance zone can be played after transitioning to RT1. In other words, it becomes a chance zone during RT1.

The end condition for "1BB-E Activation" is set to when the number of medals paid out exceeds "210", and the end condition for the Chance Zone is set to when 5 plays have been played. For this reason, if you transition to the Chance Zone just before the end of "1BB-E Activation" (just before the number of medals paid out reaches "210"), "1BB-E Activation" will end, but the Chance Zone may not end. In this case, it becomes a Chance Zone during RT1. Then, when the number of plays in the Chance Zone reaches 5 after transitioning to RT1, the Chance Zone ends. Note that when the Chance Zone ends after transitioning to RT1, there is no transition to the CZ High Probability Zone.

In addition, in RT1, a lottery is held for the "1BB-A condition device" through the "1BB-D condition device" (big bonus). Then, in the chance zone after the transition to RT1, when the "1BB-A condition device" through the "1BB-D condition device" are activated, the right to play the notification game is granted. In other words, when the "1BB-A condition device" through the "1BB-D condition device" are activated (the big bonus is won), the right to play the notification game can always be acquired (with a 100% probability).
As a result, the probability of acquiring the right to play the notification game is higher in the chance zone during RT1 than in the non-chance zone during RT1.

In addition, if the notification game (AT) is not executed when "1BB-E is activated", the payout rate will be less than "1", and the player's medals will decrease. In addition, the medal payout number of "210 medals", which is the end condition of "1BB-E is activated", will not be reached easily. In other words, the number of games until "1BB-E is activated" ends will increase.

In contrast, if the notification game (AT) is executed when "1BB-E is activated", the payout rate exceeds "1", the player's medals increase, and it becomes easier to reach the medal payout number of "210 medals", which is the end condition of "1BB-E is activated". In other words, the number of games until "1BB-E is activated" ends will decrease.

Therefore, depending on whether or not a notification game is executed when "1BB-E is activated", the number of games played until "1BB-E is activated" ends may increase or decrease.
And since "when 1BB-E is in operation" is when the reel is in operation, it is a game state in which no lottery is conducted for the reel condition device, but depending on whether or not a notification game is executed when "when 1BB-E is in operation", the number of games played until the end of "when 1BB-E is in operation" may increase or decrease, so the player can feel that the probability of winning the reel condition device is fluctuating.

RT4 is maintained until the end condition of the 1BB-A or 1BB-B operation state is met (the number of medals paid out in the 1BB-A or 1BB-B game reaches a predetermined number (210 medals)). Then, when the end condition of the 1BB-A or 1BB-B operation state is met in RT4, it transitions to RT1.
The same applies to RT4 when 1BB-E is in operation. That is, 1BB-E is maintained until the termination condition is met (the number of medals paid out in 1BB-E game reaches a predetermined number (210 medals)). Then, when 1BB-E is in operation, if the termination condition is met, it transitions to RT1.

"When RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not operating while 1BB-C or 1BB-D is operating" is maintained until the RB-A or RB-B condition device operates or the termination condition of the 1BB-C or 1BB-D operating state is met (the number of medals paid out in 1BB-C or 1BB-D play reaches a predetermined number (210 medals)).
Then, when the RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated while "1BB-C or 1BB-D is in operation and the RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not in operation," the game transitions to RT5 (when the RB-A or RB-B condition device is in operation while 1BB-C or 1BB-D is in operation (general play during 1BB-C or 1BB-D play and not in the SRB section)).
Also, when "RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not in operation while 1BB-C or 1BB-D is in operation," if the termination condition for the 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation state is satisfied, transition to RT1 occurs.

RT5 is maintained until the symbol combination corresponding to RB01 or RB02 is displayed statically on a pay line, or the end condition of the 1BB-C or 1BB-D operating state is satisfied.
Then, in RT5, when a symbol combination corresponding to RB01 or RB02 is displayed stopped on an active line, the mode transitions to "when RB-A or RB-B is activated while 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated (when SRB is being played while 1BB-C or 1BB-D is being played)".
Also, in RT5, if the termination conditions for the 1BB-C or 1BB-D operating state are met, it transitions to RT1.

"When RB-A or RB-B is activated while 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated" is maintained until the number of wins reaches 8 or the number of games played reaches 12 in the RB-A or RB-B activation state, or until the termination conditions of the 1BB-C or 1BB-D activation state are met.
Then, when the number of winnings reaches 8 or the number of games plays reaches 12 in the RB-A or RB-B operating state, but the termination conditions for the 1BB-C or 1BB-D operating state are not met, the state transitions to "when the RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not operating while 1BB-C or 1BB-D is operating."
Also, when "RB-A or RB-B is in operation while 1BB-C or 1BB-D is in operation", if the termination condition of the 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation state is satisfied, transition to RT1 occurs.

Next, the features of each game state in the tenth embodiment will be described.
In Figure 173, (1) is a diagram showing the ball payout rate in each game state, and (2) is a diagram showing the characteristics of each game state during non-AT.

First, we will explain the payout rate in each game state shown in Figure 173 (1).
Figure 173 (1) shows the ball payout rates during non-AT and AT for "RT1 (not inside)", "when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is operating (when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is being played)", and "when 1BB-E is operating (when 1BB-E is being played)".
First, the payout rates during non-AT and AT in RT1 will be explained.
As shown in Figures 149 to 150, during RT1, for all setting values, one of the "Small Prize A1 Condition Device" to "Small Prize B6 Condition Device" will be activated with a probability of "(4400 x 6 + 680 x 6 =) 30480/65536".

Also, as described above, in RT1, when the "Small Prize A1 Condition Device" to the "Small Prize B6 Condition Device" are activated, only one of the six possible push sequences will be the correct push sequence, and the other five possible push sequences will be the incorrect push sequences.
For this reason, in RT1, if the correct button press sequence is announced when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" through the "Small Win B6 Condition Device" are activated, a small win that pays out 10 coins will always be won, but if the correct button press sequence is not announced, there is a 1/6 probability that a small win that pays out 10 coins will be won, and a 5/6 probability that a small win that pays out 1 coin will be won.

Therefore, the expected number of medals paid out when the "small role A1 condition device" to the "small role B6 condition device" are activated during non-AT in RT1 is:
"10 x (30480/65536) x (1/6) + 1 x (30480/65536) x (5/6)" ≒ "1.163 (sheets)"
It becomes.

In addition, in the case of setting 1, the expected number of medals paid out when the "small role C condition device" or "small role D condition device" (both pay out 10 medals) is activated in RT1 is,
"10 x (100 + 4) / 65536" ≒ "0.016 (sheets)"
It becomes.
Furthermore, in the case of setting 1, the expected number of medals paid out when the "small role I condition device" (3 medals paid out) is activated in RT1 is
"3 x (896/65536)" ≒ "0.041 (sheets)"
It becomes.

Furthermore, in the case of setting 1, the expected number of medals to be paid out when the small role condition device is activated, which pays out one medal in RT1, is
"1 x (34758 - 30480 - 104 - 896) / 65536" ≒ "0.050 (sheets)"
It becomes.
In addition, in the case of setting 1, the expected number of medals to be paid out when the replay condition device is activated in RT1 is:
3 x (8978/65536) ≒ 0.411 (sheets)
It becomes.

Therefore, in the case of setting 1, the expected number of medals paid out during non-AT in RT1 is
“1.163” + “0.016” + “0.041” + “0.050” + “0.411” = “1.681”
It becomes.
Therefore, in the case of setting 1, the payout rate during non-AT in RT1 is
"1.681/3" ≒ "0.560"
It becomes.

In addition, during the AT, if the stop switch 42 is operated in an operation mode based on the notified operation information when the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize B6 condition device" are activated, a small prize that always pays out 10 coins can be won.
Therefore, the expected number of medals paid out when the "small role A1 condition device" to the "small role B6 condition device" are activated during the AT in RT1 is:
"10 x (30480/65536)" ≒ "4.651 (sheets)"
It becomes.

Therefore, in the case of setting 1, the expected number of medals paid out during AT in RT1 is
“4.651” + “0.016” + “0.041” + “0.050” + “0.411” = “5.169”
It becomes.
Therefore, in the case of setting 1, the payout rate during AT in RT1 is
"5.169/3" ≒ "1.723"
It becomes.
The ball payout rates during non-AT and AT when "1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated" and "1BB-E is activated" can also be calculated in the same manner as in the case of "RT1" described above.

Next, we will explain the ball payout rates during non-AT and AT when "1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated."
As shown in FIG. 173(1), "when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is in operation" has three game states: "when RB-A and RB-B condition device are not in operation (when 1BB-C or 1BB-C is in general game and not inside SRB)", "when RB-A or RB-B condition device is in operation (when 1BB-C or 1BB-C is in general game and inside SRB)", and "when RB-A or RB-B is in operation (when 1BB-C or 1BB-C is in SRB game)". In these three game states, the payout rate during non-AT and AT is respectively the value shown in FIG. 173(1).

As shown in Figure 173 (1), when "1BB-C or 1BB-D is in operation," during non-AT, when "RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not in operation," the ball payout rate is "0.514," which is less than "1," so the player's medals decrease, but when the transition is made to "RB-A or RB-B condition devices in operation," the ball payout rate becomes "1.930," exceeding "1," even during non-AT, so the player's medals increase.

Also, as shown in FIG. 173 (1), when "1BB-C or 1BB-D is in operation," during the AT, when "RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not in operation," the ball payout rate is "1.677," and when it transitions to "RB-A or RB-B condition devices in operation," the ball payout rate rises to "1.930," and in either case exceeds "1," so the player's medals increase.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 173 (1), when "RB-A and RB-B condition devices are activated" while "1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated," the payout rate is "1.930," which exceeds "1," both during non-AT and AT, and therefore the player's medals increase.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 173 (1), when "1BB-C or 1BB-D is in operation" and "RB-A or RB-B is in operation," the payout rate is "0.585," which is less than "1," both during non-AT and AT, and therefore the player's medals will decrease.

When the "RB-A and RB-B condition devices are activated" during "1BB-C or 1BB-D activation", when the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize B6 condition device" are activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 01" (10 medals paid out) is displayed frozen on the active line regardless of the operation state of the stop switch 42. Therefore, when the "RB-A and RB-B condition devices are activated" during "1BB-C or 1BB-D activation", regardless of whether the operation information of the stop switch 42 is notified or not, that is, regardless of whether the AT is in progress or not, "small prize 01" is always won (with a 100% probability) and 10 medals are paid out. Therefore, when the "RB-A and RB-B condition devices are activated" during "1BB-C or 1BB-D activation", regardless of whether the AT is in progress or not, the payout rate is the same.

Next, we will explain the ball payout rates during non-AT and AT when "1BBB-E is activated."
As shown in Fig. 173(1), "1BB-E operation" has three game states: "RB-C and RB-D condition device not in operation (general game during 1BB-E game and not inside SRB)", "RB-C or RB-D condition device in operation (general game during 1BB-E game and inside SRB)", and "RB-C or RB-D in operation (SRB game during 1BB-E game)". In these three game states, the payout rate during non-AT and AT is respectively the value shown in Fig. 173(1).

As shown in Figure 173 (1), when "1BB-E is in operation," during non-AT, whether "RB-C and RB-D condition devices are not in operation" or "RB-C or RB-D condition devices are in operation," the payout rate is "0.514," which is less than "1," so the player's medals are reduced.

Also, as shown in FIG. 173 (1), when "1BB-E is activated," during the AT, whether "RB-C or RB-D condition device is not activated" or "RB-C or RB-D condition device is activated," the ball payout rate is "1.677," which exceeds "1," and the player's medals increase.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 173 (1), when "1BB-E is activated," whether in non-AT or AT, when "RB-C or RB-D is activated," the payout rate is "0.585," which is less than "1," so the player's medals will decrease.

Next, we will explain the characteristics of each game state during non-AT as shown in Figure 173 (2).
Figure 173 (2) shows the expected number of medals paid out per game when each device is activated during non-AT, the probability of winning the AT lottery, the probability of transitioning from non-RT or RT1 to when each device is activated, and the number of games until the end of the game when each device is activated during non-AT, for four game states: "When 1BB-A or 1BB-B is activated (when 1BB-A or 1BB-B is being played)", "When 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated (when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is being played)", "When 1BB-E is activated (when 1BB-E is being played)", and "When SB-A or SB-B is activated (when SB-A or SB-B is being played)".

First, the expected number of medals paid out per game when each device is activated during non-AT will be explained.
As shown in Figure 173 (2), the expected value of the number of medals paid out per game when each role is activated during non-AT is the highest when "1BB-A or 1BB-B is activated," the second highest when "1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated," the third highest when "1BB-E is activated," and the lowest when "SB-A or SB-B is activated."

Specifically, the expected number of medals paid out per game when "1BB-A or 1BB-B is activated" during non-AT can be calculated as shown below.
As shown in Figures 155 to 156, when "1BB-A or 1BB-B is activated," the sum of the numbers of "Replay G condition devices" to "Replay I condition devices" placed (replay combined value) is "4000" for all setting values, and the number of "small role X condition devices" placed is "61536" for all setting values.

Also, as described above, when "1BB-A or 1BB-B is in operation," when the "Replay G condition device" to "Replay I condition device" are in operation, any of the replays included in these winning combinations will always win (with a 100% probability), and when the "Small combination X condition device" is in operation, any of the small combinations that pay out 10 coins will always win.
Therefore, the expected value of the number of medals paid out per game during non-AT when "1BB-A or 1BB-B is activated" is:
"3 x (4000/65536) + 10 x (61536/65536)"
≒ "9.573 (sheets)"
It becomes.

In addition, the payout rate per game when "1BB-A or 1BB-B is activated" during non-AT is the expected value of the number of medals paid out per game when "1BB-A or 1BB-B is activated" during non-AT divided by the number of bets,
"9.573/3" = "3.191"
It becomes.
The expected number of medals paid out per game when "1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated,""1BB-E is activated," and "SB-A or SB-B is activated" during non-AT can also be calculated in the same way as when "1BB-A or 1BB-B is activated."

Next, the probability of winning the AT lottery will be explained.
As shown in Figure 173 (2), the probability of winning the AT lottery is highest when "1BB-A or 1BB-B is activated," followed by the second highest when "1BB-E is activated." In addition, the third highest is when "1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated," followed by the lowest when "SB-A or SB-B is activated."
Specifically, in the tenth embodiment, in a game in which the role condition device is activated (a special role is won), an AT lottery is executed to determine whether or not the right to execute an announcement game (AT) is granted. The winning probability of the AT lottery when the "1BB-A or 1BB-B condition device" is activated is set to "100%, and the winning probability of the AT lottery when the "1BB-C or 1BB-C condition device" is activated is set to "10%". In addition, the winning probability of the AT lottery when the "1BB-E condition device" is activated is set to "50%, and the winning probability of the AT lottery when the "SB-A or SB-B condition device" is activated is set to "5%".

Therefore, when the "1BB-A or 1BB-B condition device" is activated, the right to play the notification game is granted with a "100%" probability, and when the "1BB-C or 1BB-D condition device" is activated, the right to play the notification game is granted with a "10%" probability. Furthermore, when the "1BB-E condition device" is activated, the right to play the notification game is granted with a "50%" probability, and when the "SB-A or SB-B condition device" is activated, the right to play the notification game is granted with a "5%" probability.

Next, the winning probability of each reel condition device in non-RT or RT1 will be explained.
The "Winning Probability of the Gadget Condition Device" column in FIG. 173(2) shows the winning probability of each gadget condition device for transitioning when each gadget is activated. That is, it shows the winning probability of the "1BB-A or 1BB-B condition device" for transitioning to "1BB-A or 1BB-B activation", the winning probability of the "1BB-C or 1BB-D condition device" for transitioning to "1BB-C or 1BB-D activation", the winning probability of the "1BB-E condition device" for transitioning to "1BB-E activation", and the winning probability of the "SB-A or SB-B condition device" for transitioning to "SB-A or SB-B activation".
As shown in FIG. 173(2), the winning probability of each device with the condition for non-RT or RT1 is the highest for the "SB-A or SB-B device," the second highest for the "1BB-E device," the third highest for the "1BB-C or 1BB-D device," the lowest for the "1BB-A or 1BB-B device," and the third highest for the "1BB-C or 1BB-D device."

Specifically, as shown in Figures 147 to 150, in the case of setting 1, in non-RT or RT1, the winning probability of the "1BB-A or 1BB-B condition device" is "16/65536", the winning probability of the "1BB-C or 1BB-D condition device" is "396/65536", the winning probability of the "1BB-E condition device" is "412/65536", and the winning probability of the "SB-A or SB-B condition device" is "21794/65536".
Therefore, the winning probability of each reel condition device in non-RT or RT1 is as shown in Figure 173 (2).

Next, we will explain the expected number of games played until the operation of each device is completed during non-AT.
As shown in Figure 173 (2), the expected number of games played until the end of each role activation during non-AT is the lowest (smallest) when "SB-A or SB-B is activated," the second lowest (smallest) when "1BB-A or 1BB-B is activated," the third lowest (smallest) when "1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated," and the highest (largest) when "1BB-E is activated."

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 140, the "SB-A or SB-B operating state" ends with one game or one winning. Therefore, the expected number of games until the end when the role is activated is the smallest (smallest) when "SB-A or SB-B is activated."
Furthermore, "when 1BB-A to 1BB-E are in operation" continues until the number of medals paid out (number of medals acquired) exceeds 210. When the number of medals paid out during "when 1BB-A to 1BB-E are in operation" exceeds 210, "when 1BB-A to 1BB-E are in operation" ends. In other words, the end condition for "when 1BB-A to 1BB-E are in operation" is when the number of medals paid out exceeds 210.

As described above, the expected value of the number of medals paid out per game when each role is activated during non-AT is the highest when "1BB-A or 1BB-B is activated." Because many medals are paid out when "1BB-A or 1BB-B is activated," the number of medals paid out is likely to reach 210, so the expected value of the number of games until the end of the role activation is the second smallest (smallest) when "1BB-A or 1BB-B is activated."
Also, the expected number of medals paid out per game when each role is activated during non-AT is the second highest when "1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated," and the third highest when "1BB-E is activated." Because of this, it is easier for the number of medals paid out to reach 210 when "1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated" than when "1BB-E is activated," so the expected number of games until the end when the role is activated is the third lowest (smallest) when "1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated," and the highest (largest) when "1BB-E is activated."

As explained above using Figures 173 (1) and (2), when "1BB-C or 1BB-D is operating (during 1BB-C or 1BB-D play)", there are times when an announcement game (AT) is executed and times when an announcement game is not executed (non-AT).
In addition, when the RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not in operation while 1BB-C or 1BB-D is in operation (general play during 1BB-C or 1BB-D play and not inside the SRB), the payout rate when the notification game is not executed (not during AT) is 0.514, as shown in Figure 173 (1), which is less than 1, and therefore the player's medals will decrease.
In contrast, when "RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not in operation while 1BB-C or 1BB-D is in operation," the payout rate when playing the notification game (during AT) is "1.677" as shown in Figure 173 (1), which exceeds "1," and therefore the player's medals increase.

Also, as shown in Figures 157 to 158, when "RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not in operation while 1BB-C or 1BB-D is in operation," a lottery is held for the "small prize I condition device" to the "small prize V condition device."
Furthermore, when the "small prize I condition device" to the "small prize V condition device" are activated, an AT lottery is held, and if the AT lottery is won when the notification game is not being played (non-AT), the right to play the notification game is granted. After that, when the start conditions for the notification game are met, the notification game is played when "RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated." This increases the payout rate from "0.514" to "1.677."

Similarly, when "1BB-E is operating (during 1BB-E play)", there are times when an announcement game (AT) is executed and times when an announcement game is not executed (non-AT).
In addition, when the RB-C and RB-D condition devices are not in operation while 1BB-E is in operation (general play during 1BB-E play and not inside the SRB), the payout rate when the notification game is not executed (not during AT) is 0.514, as shown in Figure 173 (1), which is less than 1, and therefore the player's medals will decrease.
In contrast, when "RB-C and RB-D condition devices are not in operation while 1BB-E is in operation," the payout rate when playing the notification game (during AT) is "1.677," as shown in FIG. 173 (1), which exceeds "1," and therefore the player's medals increase.

In addition, when the RB-C or RB-D condition device is activated during 1BB-E operation (general play during 1BB-E play and inside SRB), the payout rate when the notification game is not executed (non-AT) is 0.514, as shown in FIG. 173 (1), which is less than 1, and therefore the player's medals will decrease.
In contrast, when "RB-C or RB-D condition device is activated while 1BB-E is activated," the payout rate when playing the notification game (during AT) is "1.677," as shown in FIG. 173 (1), which exceeds "1," and therefore the player's medals increase.

Also, as shown in Figures 161 to 164, a lottery is held for the "small prize I condition device" to the "small prize V condition device" both when "the RB-C and RB-D condition devices are not in operation when 1BB-E is in operation" and when "the RB-C and RB-D condition devices are in operation when 1BB-E is in operation."
Furthermore, when the "small prize I condition device" to the "small prize V condition device" are activated, an AT lottery is held, and if the AT lottery is won when the notification game is not being played (non-AT), the right to play the notification game is granted. After that, when the start conditions for the notification game are met, the notification game is played in both "when the RB-C and RB-D condition devices are not activated when 1BB-E is activated" and "when the RB-C and RB-D condition devices are activated when 1BB-E is activated." This increases the payout rate from "0.514" to "1.677."

In addition, when the "SB-A condition device" is activated, if the symbol combination corresponding to "SB01" is displayed stopped on an active line, no medals will be paid out in the current game, and the next game will be "SB-A activated (SB-A game)".
Similarly, when the "SB-B condition device" is activated and a symbol combination corresponding to "SB02" is displayed stopped on an active line, no medals will be paid out in the current game, and the next game will be "SB-B activated (SB-B game)".
Also, when SB is activated (when SB-A or SB-B is activated), only one game ends. Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 167 to Fig. 170, when SB is activated, the lottery for "small role A1 condition device" to "small role B6 condition device" is not performed. And, when SB is activated, the notification game is not executed.

In addition, when the RB-C or RB-D condition device is in operation when 1BB-E is in operation, the ball payout rate when the notification game is not executed (non-AT) is 0.514. On the other hand, when the RB-A or RB-B condition device is in operation when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is in operation, the ball payout rate when the notification game is not executed (non-AT) is 1.930.
In this way, the ball payout rate when no notification game is executed when "the RB-C or RB-D condition device is activated when 1BB-E is activated" is set to be lower than the ball payout rate when no notification game is executed when "the RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated."

The "ball payout rate" is calculated by "expected number of medals paid out/number of bets", so the expected number of medals paid out when the notification game is not executed when "RB-C or RB-D condition device is activated when 1BB-E is activated" is set to be lower than the expected number of medals paid out when the notification game is not executed when "RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated".

Furthermore, when the RB-C or RB-D condition device is activated when 1BB-E is activated, the ball payout rate when the notification game is executed (in the AT) is 1.677. On the other hand, when the RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated, the ball payout rate when the notification game is executed (in the AT) is 1.930.
In this way, the ball payout rate when an announcement game is executed when "the RB-C or RB-D condition device is activated when 1BB-E is activated" is also set lower than the ball payout rate when an announcement game is executed when "the RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated."

Therefore, the expected number of medals paid out when playing a notification game when "RB-C or RB-D condition device is activated when 1BB-E is activated" is also set to be lower than the expected number of medals paid out when playing a notification game when "RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated."

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the probability of winning the AT lottery when "the 1BB-C or 1BB-D condition device is activated (when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is won)" is set to "10%," and the probability of winning the AT lottery when "the 1BB-E condition device is activated (when 1BB-E is won)" is set to "50%."
For this reason, the probability of having the right to play the notification game when "1BB-E is activated (while 1BB-E is being played)" is set to be higher than the probability of having the right to play the notification game when "1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated (while 1BB-C or 1BB-D is being played)."

Next, the presentation patterns at the end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation (1BB-C or 1BB-D game) will be described.
Figure 174 is a time chart showing the performance pattern (1) at the end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation.
The time chart shown in Figure 174 shows the presentation pattern at the end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation when the right to execute the notification game (AT) is held but this is not notified (announced) during 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation.

As mentioned above, in a game in which the 1BB-C or 1BB-D condition device is activated (1BB-C or 1BB-D is won), an AT lottery is held to determine whether or not the right to play the notification game (AT) will be granted. Because the probability of winning the AT lottery when the 1BB-C or 1BB-C condition device is activated is set to "10%," when the 1BB-C or 1BB-D condition device is activated, the right to play the notification game is granted with a probability of "10%."

In addition, when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated (1BB-C or 1BB-D game), if the player has the right to play a notification game, in a game in which the "Replay H condition device" or the "Replay I condition device" is activated, the operation information for the stop switch 42 notifies the player that the stop switch 42 should be operated by pushing in order to aim for the "blue 7" symbol.
Furthermore, when the stop switch 42 is operated in an operation manner based on the notified operation information (by pushing in order and at an operation timing that allows the "Blue 7" symbol on each reel 31 to stop on an active line) and a symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 02" or "Replay 04" is displayed stopped on an active line, it is notified that the player has the right to play the notified game.

On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a different operation mode from the operation mode based on the notified operation information, the symbol combination corresponding to "REPLAY 02" or "REPLAY 04" is not displayed on the pay line, and the symbol combination corresponding to another replay included in the winning combination is displayed on the pay line, the fact that the player has the right to play the notification game is not notified in the current game. In this case, the fact that the player has the right to play the notification game is notified at the end of the operation of 1BB-C or 1BB-D.
The time chart shown in FIG. 174 shows the presentation pattern when notifying the player that he/she has the right to play the notification game upon completion of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation.

In the tenth embodiment, when the operation of 1BB-A to 1BB-E is completed, if the player has the right to execute the notification game, the advantageous zone is maintained and the advantageous zone display LED 77 is kept lit.
In contrast, if the right to execute the notification game is not present when operation of 1BB-A to 1BB-E is completed, the advantageous zone is ended and transition is made to a non-advantageous zone (normal zone), and the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned off.

In the example shown in Figure 174, since the right to execute the notification game is obtained when 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation is completed, the main control means 50 maintains the advantageous zone and keeps the advantageous zone display LED 77 lit even after 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation is completed.
Furthermore, the main control means 50 executes a freeze for a predetermined period of time when the 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation is completed.
"Freeze" is also called a "freeze effect" and refers to a state in which the progress of the game is stopped for a predetermined period of time ("five seconds" in the tenth embodiment).

While the main control means 50 is executing the freeze, the sub-control means 80 displays on the image display device 23 the number of medals won when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is operated, and also displays a warning image (addiction prevention image) to draw attention to the risk of addiction.
In addition, when the freeze ends, the sub-control means 80 displays the word "PUSH" on the image display device 23 to encourage the user to operate the effect switch.
Thereafter, when the effect switch is operated, the sub-control means 80 erases the word "PUSH" that was displayed on the image display device 23 and turns on the notification lamp.

The "effect switch", also called a "push button", is a switch used for effecting, and is electrically connected to the sub-control means 80. In addition, the sub-control means 80 and the effect switch are configured to be capable of two-way communication.
The "notification lamp" is a lamp used for the performance, which is disposed in a position close to the display window in the front door 12 and is electrically connected to the sub-control means 80. By lighting the notification lamp, for example, it is possible to notify that any of the 1BB-A to 1BB-D condition devices has been activated (a special role (bonus) has been won) or that the right to play the notification game (AT) has been granted (an AT lottery has been won).

In Figure 174, at the timing of "end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation," the main control means 50 begins freezing, and the sub-control means 80 begins displaying the number of medals won and a warning image on the image display device 23.
In addition, the main control means 50 executes a freeze for a predetermined period of time (5 seconds), and the sub-control means 80 continues to display the number of medals won and the warning image on the image display device 23 during the freeze.

174, at the timing of "freeze end", the main control means 50 ends the freeze, and the sub-control means 80 erases the display of the number of medals acquired and the display of the attention-calling image on the image display device 23. Furthermore, at the timing of "freeze end", the sub-control means 80 starts displaying the word "PUSH" on the image display device 23 to encourage the operation of the performance switch.
Then, at the timing of "effect switch operation (ON)" in Fig. 174, the sub-control means 80 erases the word "PUSH" displayed on the image display device 23 and starts lighting the notification lamp, thereby notifying the player that he or she has the right to play the notification game.

174, the right to play the notification game is acquired when the operation of 1BB-C or 1BB-D is completed. After the execution of the freeze, the main control means 50 maintains the advantageous zone and keeps the advantageous zone display LED 77 lit. After the freeze is executed, the sub-control means 80 notifies the player that the right to play the notification game is acquired by turning on the notification lamp.
In this way, by setting the timing for the notification lamp to light up not when "1BB-C or 1BB-D operation ends" or when "freeze ends" but when the "effect switch is operated (on)" after the freeze ends, the player's anticipation of the right to play the notification game is maintained until the timing of the "effect switch is operated (on)" after the freeze ends.

The image display of the word "PUSH" may start while the freeze is in progress, or may start after the freeze is finished.
In addition, if the image display of the word "PUSH" is started while the freeze is being executed, and the effect switch is operated (turned on) while the freeze is being executed, a notification lamp may be turned on while the freeze is being executed.

Figure 175 is a time chart showing the performance pattern (2) at the end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation.
The time chart shown in Figure 175 shows the presentation pattern at the end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation when the right to execute the notification game (AT) is not possessed.
In the example shown in Figure 175, since there is no right to play the notification game, the right to play the notification game remains ``none'' both while 1BB-C or 1BB-D is operating and after 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation has ended.

In Figure 175, at the timing of "end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation," the main control means 50 begins freezing, and the sub-control means 80 begins displaying the number of medals won and a warning image on the image display device 23.
In addition, the main control means 50 executes a freeze for a predetermined period of time (5 seconds), and the sub-control means 80 continues to display the number of medals won and the warning image on the image display device 23 during the freeze.

Furthermore, at the timing of “freeze end” in FIG. 175, the main control means 50 ends the freeze, and the sub-control means 80 erases the display of the number of medals won and the warning image on the image display device 23.
Furthermore, at the timing of "freeze end" in Fig. 175, the main control means 50 turns off the advantageous zone display LED 77. As described above, if there is no right to execute the notification game when the operation of 1BB-A to 1BB-E ends, the advantageous zone is ended and transition is made to a non-advantageous zone (normal zone), and the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned off. The timing for turning off the advantageous zone display LED 77 is set to the timing of "freeze end".

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 175, when 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation ends, the player does not have the right to play the notification game. After executing the freeze, the main control means 50 turns off the advantageous zone display LED 77. Furthermore, after executing the freeze, the sub-control means 80 does not execute a notification regarding the right to play the notification game.

In this way, by setting the timing for turning off the advantageous zone display LED 77 to the "end of freeze" timing rather than the "end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation", the player's anticipation for the right to play the notification game is maintained until the "end of freeze". In addition, the player is prevented from realizing that he or she does not have the right to play the notification game until the freeze ends.

In the example shown in Figure 175, since there is no right to execute the notification game, the sub-control means 80 does not display the word "PUSH" on the image display device 23, nor does it turn on the notification lamp.
In addition, the advantageous zone display LED 77 may be turned off while the freeze is being performed, and the advantageous zone display LED 77 may be turned off after the freeze has ended.

Figure 176 is a time chart showing the presentation pattern (3) at the end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation.
The time chart shown in Figure 176 shows the presentation pattern at the end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation when the right to execute the notification game (AT) is held but this is not notified (announced) during 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation.

In the example shown in Figure 176, since the right to play the notification game is held, the right to play the notification game remains "existent" while 1BB-C or 1BB-D is operating and even after 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation has ended.
In addition, in the example shown in Figure 176, since the right to execute the notification game is obtained when 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation is completed, the main control means 50 maintains the advantageous zone and keeps the advantageous zone display LED 77 lit even after 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation is completed.

Furthermore, in Figure 176, at the timing of "end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation," the main control means 50 begins freezing, and the sub-control means 80 begins displaying the number of medals won and a warning image on the image display device 23.
Furthermore, the main control means 50 executes a freeze for a predetermined period of time (5 seconds), and the sub-control means 80 continues to display the number of medals won and the warning image on the image display device 23 during the freeze.
Then, at the timing of "freeze end" in Figure 176, the main control means 50 ends the freeze, and the sub-control means 80 erases the display of the number of medals won and the warning image on the image display device 23, and turns on the notification lamp.

In this way, by setting the timing for the notification lamp to light up at the "end of freeze" timing rather than the "end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation", the player's anticipation for the right to play the notification game is maintained until the "end of freeze" timing.

In the example shown in Figure 176, unlike the example shown in Figure 174, operation (on) of the effect switch is not a condition for lighting the notification lamp, so the sub-control means 80 does not display the word "PUSH" on the image display device 23.
The notification lamp may be turned on while the freeze is in progress, or may be turned on after the freeze is completed.

Figure 177 is a time chart showing the presentation pattern (4) at the end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation.
The time chart shown in Figure 177 shows the presentation pattern at the end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation when the right to execute an announcement game (AT) is held and further, the number of plays (number of continuations) of the announcement game is increased while 1BB-C or 1BB-D is in operation, but this fact is not announced (notified) during 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation.

In the example shown in Figure 177, since the right to play the notification game is held, the right to play the notification game remains "existent" while 1BB-C or 1BB-D is operating and even after 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation has ended.
In addition, in the example shown in Figure 177, since the right to execute the notification game is obtained when 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation is completed, the main control means 50 maintains the advantageous zone and keeps the advantageous zone display LED 77 lit even after 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation is completed.

Furthermore, in Figure 177, at the timing of "end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation," the main control means 50 begins freezing, and the sub-control means 80 begins displaying the number of medals won and a warning image on the image display device 23.
Furthermore, the main control means 50 executes a freeze for a predetermined period of time (5 seconds), and the sub-control means 80 continues to display the number of medals won and the warning image on the image display device 23 during the freeze.

177, at the timing of "freeze end", the main control means 50 ends the freeze, and the sub-control means 80 erases the display of the number of medals acquired and the display of the attention-calling image on the image display device 23. Furthermore, at the timing of "freeze end", the sub-control means 80 starts displaying the word "PUSH" on the image display device 23 to encourage the operation of the performance switch, and starts turning on the notification lamp.
177, at the timing of "effect switch operation (ON)", the sub-control means 80 erases the word "PUSH" on the image display device 23 and displays an image indicating that the number of plays of the notification game has been increased (for example, the words "+50G"). That is, the image display on the image display device 23 is switched from "PUSH" to "+50G".

In this way, by setting the timing for lighting the notification lamp to the "end of freeze" timing rather than the "end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation", the player's anticipation for the right to play the notification game is maintained until the "end of freeze" timing.
Furthermore, by setting the timing of the display indicating that the number of plays of the notification game has been increased to the timing of the "effect switch operation (on)" after the freeze ends, the player's anticipation for the increase in the number of plays of the notification game is maintained until the timing of the "effect switch operation (on)" after the freeze ends.

The image display of the word "PUSH" may start while the freeze is in progress, or may start after the freeze is completed.
In addition, if the image display of the word "PUSH" is started while the freeze is being executed, and the effect switch is operated (turned on) while the freeze is being executed, an additional display (image display of "+50G") may be started (turned on) while the freeze is being executed.
Furthermore, the notification lamp may be turned on while the freeze is being executed, or may be turned on after the freeze is completed.

Figure 178 is a time chart showing the presentation pattern (5) at the end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation.
The time chart shown in Figure 178 shows the presentation pattern at the end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation when the right to execute the notification game (AT) is not possessed.
In the example shown in Figure 178, since the right to play the notification game is not possessed, the right to play the notification game remains "none" both while 1BB-C or 1BB-D is operating and after 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation has ended.

In Figure 178, at the timing of "end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation," the main control means 50 begins freezing, and the sub-control means 80 begins displaying the number of medals won and a warning image on the image display device 23.
In addition, the main control means 50 executes a freeze for a predetermined period of time (5 seconds), and the sub-control means 80 continues to display the number of medals won and the warning image on the image display device 23 during the freeze.

Furthermore, at the timing of “freeze end” in FIG. 178, the main control means 50 ends the freeze, and the sub-control means 80 erases the display of the number of medals won and the warning image on the image display device 23.
Furthermore, in Fig. 178, at the timing of "freeze end", the main control means 50 turns off the advantageous zone display LED 77. By setting the timing of turning off the advantageous zone display LED 77 to the timing of "freeze end" rather than the timing of "1BB-C or 1BB-D operation end", the player's expectation of the right to play the notification game is maintained until the timing of "freeze end". Also, the player is prevented from realizing that he does not have the right to play the notification game until the freeze ends.

178, the sub-control means 80 starts displaying the word "PUSH" to prompt the user to operate the effect switch on the image display device 23 at the timing of "freeze end". Then, in FIG. 178, the sub-control means 80 erases the word "PUSH" that has been displayed on the image display device 23 at the timing of "effect switch operation (ON)".
In the example shown in Figure 178, since there is no right to execute the notification game, the sub-control means 80 will not light up the notification lamp even if the effect switch is operated (turned on).
In addition, the display of "PUSH" in the example shown in FIG. 178 is intended to heighten the expectation that the player has the right to play the notification game, and is a so-called false notification.

By executing this false notification and displaying the word "PUSH" on the image display device 23, the player can be made to expect to gain or receive additional rights to play the notification game, thereby increasing the player's interest. In addition, the player's gaze can be focused on the image display device 23, which is located directly in front of the player and is larger than the advantageous zone display LED 77. Furthermore, by confirming that the advantageous zone display LED 77 is off, the player can easily understand that he does not have the right to play the notification game.

The image display of the word "PUSH" may start while the freeze is in progress, or may start after the freeze is completed.
In addition, the advantageous zone display LED 77 may be turned off while the freeze is being performed, and the advantageous zone display LED 77 may be turned off after the freeze has ended.

Figure 179 is a time chart showing the presentation pattern (6) at the end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation.
The time chart shown in Figure 179 shows the presentation pattern at the end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation when the right to execute the notification game (AT) is held but this is not notified (announced) during 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation.

In the example shown in Figure 179, since the right to play the notification game is held, the right to play the notification game remains "existent" while 1BB-C or 1BB-D is operating and even after 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation has ended.
In addition, in the example shown in Figure 179, since the right to execute the notification game is possessed when 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation is completed, the main control means 50 maintains the advantageous zone and keeps the advantageous zone display LED 77 lit even after 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation is completed.

Furthermore, in Figure 179, at the timing of "end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation," the main control means 50 begins freezing, and the sub-control means 80 begins displaying the number of medals won and a warning image on the image display device 23.
Furthermore, the main control means 50 executes a freeze for a predetermined period of time (5 seconds), and the sub-control means 80 continues to display the number of medals won and the warning image on the image display device 23 during the freeze.

In the example shown in FIG. 179, at a predetermined timing after "end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation" and before "end of freeze," that is, at a predetermined timing during freeze execution, the sub-control means 80 starts displaying the word "PUSH" on the image display device 23 to encourage the operation of the effect switch.

In the example shown in FIG. 179, at the timing of the "effect switch operation (ON)" which occurs after "end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation" and before "end of freeze", the sub-control means 80 erases the word "PUSH" displayed on the image display device 23 and starts turning on the notification lamp.
This allows the player's anticipation for the right to play the notification game to be maintained until the timing of the "effect switch operation (on)" after "end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation" and before "end of freeze."

Figure 180 is a time chart showing the presentation pattern (7) at the end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation.
The time chart shown in Figure 180 shows the presentation pattern at the end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation when the right to execute the notification game (AT) is not possessed.
In the example shown in Figure 180, since the right to play the notification game is not possessed, the right to play the notification game remains "none" both while 1BB-C or 1BB-D is operating and after 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation has ended.

In Figure 180, at the timing of "end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation," the main control means 50 begins freezing, and the sub-control means 80 begins displaying the number of medals won and a warning image on the image display device 23.
In addition, the main control means 50 executes a freeze for a predetermined period of time (5 seconds), and the sub-control means 80 continues to display the number of medals won and the warning image on the image display device 23 during the freeze.
Furthermore, in Figure 180, at the timing of ``freeze end,'' the main control means 50 ends the freeze and turns off the advantageous zone display LED 77, and the sub-control means 80 erases the display of the number of medals won and the warning image on the image display device 23.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 180, at a predetermined timing after "end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation" and before "end of freeze," that is, at a predetermined timing during freeze execution, the sub-control means 80 starts displaying the word "PUSH" on the image display device 23 to encourage the operation of the effect switch.

In the example shown in Figure 180, at the timing of the "effect switch operation (ON)" after "end of 1BB-C or 1BB-D operation" and before "end of freeze", the sub-control means 80 erases the word "PUSH" that was displayed on the image display device 23.
In the example shown in Figure 180, since there is no right to execute the notification game, the sub-control means 80 will not light up the notification lamp even if the effect switch is operated (turned on).
In addition, the display of "PUSH" in the example shown in FIG. 180 is intended to heighten the expectation that the player has the right to play the notification game, and is a so-called false notification.

Next, the operation mode when the "Aim for Blue 7!" effect is output will be described.
FIG. 181 shows the operation mode when the "Aim for blue 7!" effect is output.
Figure 181 (1) shows the operating mode when the "Aim for Blue 7!" effect is output when the "Replay H condition device" or "Replay I condition device" is activated in RT2 (when the 1BB-A to 1BB-D condition devices are activated).
When you are in RT2, any one of the 1BB-A to 1BB-D condition devices is activated (any one of 1BB-A to 1BB-D is won). In other words, you have won a special role (bonus).

In a game in which the "Replay H condition device" or the "Replay I condition device" is activated in RT2, operation information for the stop switch 42 is provided to inform the player that the stop switch 42 should be operated in order (in the order of "left, middle, right") to aim for the "Blue 7" symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 181 (1), an image of an "arrow pointing right" and the words "Aim for Blue 7!" are displayed on the image display device 23.

In addition, when the stop switch 42 is operated in an operation manner based on the notified operation information (by pushing in order and at an operation timing that allows the "Blue 7" symbol on each reel 31 to stop on an active line) and a symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 02" or "Replay 04" is displayed stopped on an active line, it is notified that a special combination has been won. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 181 (1), a "bonus confirmation screen" indicating that a special combination has been won is displayed on the image display device 23.

In contrast, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a different manner from the manner based on the notified operation information, and the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 02" or "Replay 04" is not displayed stopped on the active line, and a symbol combination corresponding to another replay included in the winning combination is displayed stopped on the active line, the fact that a special combination has been won in the current game is not notified. In this case, in the next game after the game in which the "Replay H condition device" or "Replay I condition device" was activated, the fact that a special combination has been won is notified at any time between the time when the start switch 41 is operated and the time when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the last reel 31 to stop is operated.

Figure 181 (2) shows the operating mode when the ``Aim for Blue 7!'' effect is output when ``non-winning'' during RT3 (when the 1BB-E condition device is activated).
When staying at RT3, the "1BB-E condition device" is activated.
In addition, in RT3 (when the 1BB-E condition device is activated), in a game in which the winning combination is not won by the role selection means 61, it is possible to stop the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB05" or "1BB06", which is the winning role of the "1BB-E condition device", on an active line. At this time, as in a game in which the "Replay H condition device" or the "Replay I condition device" is activated in RT2, the operation information of the stop switch 42 notifies the player that the stop switch 42 should be operated by pushing in order to aim for the "blue 7" symbol.

In addition, when the stop switch 42 is operated in an operation manner based on the notified operation information (by pushing in order and at an operation timing that allows the "Blue 7" symbol on each reel 31 to stop on an active line), "Blue 7"-"Blue 7"-"Blank" corresponding to "1BB05", or "Blue 7"-"Blank"-"Blue 7" corresponding to "1BB06" is displayed stopped on an active line.
Then, when a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB05" or "1BB06" is stopped and displayed on an active line, no medals are paid out in the current game, but the game will transition to the next game when 1BB-E is activated (1BB-E game).

Figure 181 (3) shows the operating mode when the ``Aim for Blue 7!'' effect is output when the ``Replay G Condition Device'' is activated during RT1 (not internal) or RT2 (when the 1BB-A to 1BB-D condition devices are activated).
In RT1 or RT2, a lottery for the "Replay G Condition Device" is held.
In addition, in RT1 or RT2, in a game in which the "Replay G condition device" is activated, a performance lottery is held, and if this performance lottery is won, similar to a game in RT2 in which the "Replay H condition device" or "Replay I condition device" is activated, or a game in RT3 in which the role lottery means 61 is not a winning combination, operation information for the stop switch 42 notifies the player that the stop switch 42 should be operated by pushing the buttons in order to aim for the "blue 7" symbol.

When the stop switch 42 is operated in a manner based on the notified operation information (by pressing in order and at a timing that allows the "Blue 7" symbol on each reel 31 to stop on an active line), the "Blue 7" - "Blue 7/Black BAR/Cherry" - "Bell" corresponding to "Replay 03" are displayed stopped on an active line. In this case, the "Bonus Confirmation Screen" is not displayed, and there is no transition to "1BB-E Operation (1BB-E Play)". The screen then returns to the original screen before the operation information was notified.

The "Aim for Blue 7!" effect displayed when the "Replay G Condition Device" is activated during RT1 or RT2 is intended to heighten the expectation of winning a special role, and is a so-called false notification.
After the symbol combination corresponding to "REPLAY 03" is stopped and displayed on the pay line, the brightness of the image display device 23 may be reduced, the screen may be darkened once, and then, specifically, after the start switch 41 is operated to start the next game, the screen may be restored to the original screen before the operation information was notified. By reducing the brightness of the image display device 23 in this way, the player can easily recognize that the notification was false.

Figure 181 (4) shows the operating mode when the "Aim for the Blue 7!" effect is output when the "Replay H condition device" or "Replay I condition device" is activated, in the case where the player has the right to execute an announcing game (AT) in RT4 (when 1BB-A or 1BB-B is activated) or RT5 (when RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated while 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated).

In a game in which the 1BB-A to 1BB-D condition device is activated (winning), an AT lottery is held to determine whether or not the right to execute an announcement game (AT) is granted.
In addition, the probability of winning the AT lottery when the 1BB-A or 1BB-B condition device is activated is set to "100%," and the probability of winning the AT lottery when the 1BB-C or 1BB-C condition device is activated is set to "10%."
For this reason, when the 1BB-A or 1BB-B condition device is activated, the right to play the notification game is granted with a probability of "100%," and when the 1BB-C or 1BB-D condition device is activated, the right to play the notification game is granted with a probability of "10%."

Furthermore, in RT4 or RT5, if the player has the right to play a notification game, in a game in which the "Replay H condition device" or the "Replay I condition device" has been activated, the operation information for the stop switch 42 notifies the player that the stop switch 42 should be operated in order to aim for the "blue 7" symbol, just as in a game in RT2 in which the "Replay H condition device" or the "Replay I condition device" has been activated, or a game in RT3 in which the hand selection means 61 has not won.

Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated in an operation mode based on the notified operation information (by pushing in order and at an operation timing that allows the "Blue 7" symbol on each reel 31 to stop on an active line) and a symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 02" or "Replay 04" is displayed stopped on an active line, it is notified that the player has the right to play the notification game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 181 (4), an "AT confirmation screen" indicating that the player has the right to play the notification game is displayed on the image display device 23.

In contrast, if the stop switch 42 is operated in an operation mode different from the operation mode based on the notified operation information, and the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 02" or "Replay 04" is not displayed frozen on the active line, and a symbol combination corresponding to another replay included in the winning combination is displayed frozen on the active line, the player is not notified that he/she has the right to play the notification game in this game. In this case, the player is notified that he/she has the right to play the notification game at the end of RT4 or RT5 (at the end of 1BB-A to 1BB-D operation (1BB-A to 1BB-D games)).

Figure 181 (5) shows the operating mode when the "Aim for Blue 7!" effect is output when the "Replay G condition device" is activated in RT4 (when 1BB-A or 1BB-B is activated) or RT5 (when RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated while 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated).
In RT4 or RT5, a lottery for the "Replay G condition device" is also conducted, similarly to RT1 or RT2.

In addition, in a game in RT4 or RT5 where the "Replay G condition device" is activated, a performance lottery is held, and if this performance lottery is won, the operation information for the stop switch 42 notifies the player that the stop switch 42 should be operated in order to aim for the "blue 7" symbol, just as in a game in RT1 or RT2 where the "Replay H condition device" or "Replay I condition device" is activated, or in a game in RT4 or RT5 where the player has the right to play an announcement game, where the "Replay H condition device" or "Replay I condition device" is activated.

When the stop switch 42 is operated in a manner based on the notified operation information (by pushing in order and at a timing that allows the "Blue 7" symbol on each reel 31 to stop on an active line), the "Blue 7" - "Blue 7/Black BAR/Cherry" - "Bell" corresponding to "Replay 03" are displayed stopped on an active line. In this case, the "Bonus Confirmation Screen" or "AT Confirmation Screen" is not displayed, and there is no transition to "1BB-E Activated (1BB-E Play)". The screen then returns to the original screen before the operation information was notified.

The "Aim for Blue 7!" effect displayed when the "Replay G Condition Device" is activated during RT4 or RT5 is intended to heighten anticipation for the right to play the notification game, and is a so-called false notification.
In addition, when the "Replay G condition device" is activated in RT4 or RT5, similarly to the case where the "Replay G condition device" is activated in RT1 or RT2, after the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 03" is stopped and displayed on the pay line, the brightness of the image display device 23 may be lowered, the screen may be darkened once, and then the original screen before the operation information was notified may be restored. This allows the player to easily recognize that it was a false notification.

As described above with reference to Fig. 181 (1) to (5), when the following (A) to (E) occur, a notification is given that the player should operate the stop switch 42 in order to aim for the "blue 7" symbol. In other words, the same operation information regarding the stop switch 42 is notified.
(A) When the "Replay H Condition Device" or "Replay I Condition Device" is activated in RT2 (when the 1BB-A to 1BB-D condition devices are activated). (B) When the "non-winning" occurs in RT3 (when the 1BB-E condition device is activated).
(C) When the "Replay G condition device" is activated in RT1 (not inside) or RT2 (when the 1BB-A to 1BB-D condition devices are activated). (D) When the "Replay H condition device" or "Replay I condition device" is activated in RT4 (when 1BB-A or 1BB-B is activated) or RT5 (when the RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated) if you have the right to play an announcement game. (E) When the "Replay G condition device" is activated in RT4 (when 1BB-A or 1BB-B is activated) or RT5 (when the RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated).

When the "Replay H Condition Device" or "Replay I Condition Device" of RT2 is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in sequence and at a timing when the "Blue 7" symbol on each reel 31 can be stopped on an active line, the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 02" or "Replay 04" is displayed stopped on the active line, and the player is notified that a special combination has been won.

In addition, when RT3 is not won, if the reels are pressed in order and the stop switch 42 is operated at a timing that allows the "Blue 7" symbol on each reel 31 to stop on an active line, the reels will stop and display "Blue 7" - "Blue 7" - "Blank" corresponding to "1BB05", or "Blue 7" - "Blank" - "Blue 7" corresponding to "1BB06" on the active line, and the game will transition to 1BB-E operation (1BB-E gameplay).

Furthermore, when the "Replay G Condition Device" of RT1 or RT2 is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in sequence and at a timing when the "Blue 7" symbol on each reel 31 can be stopped on an active line, the "Blue 7" - "Blue 7/Black BAR/Cherry" - "Bell" corresponding to "Replay 03" will be displayed stopped on an active line.

Furthermore, when the "Replay H Condition Device" or "Replay I Condition Device" of RT4 or RT5 is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in sequence and at a timing when the "Blue 7" symbol on each reel 31 can be stopped on an active line, the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 02" or "Replay 04" is displayed stopped on an active line, and the player is notified that they have the right to play the notification game.

In addition, when the "Replay G Condition Device" of RT4 or RT5 is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in sequence and at a timing when the "Blue 7" symbol on each reel 31 can be stopped on an active line, the "Blue 7" - "Blue 7/Black BAR/Cherry" - "Bell" corresponding to "Replay 03" will be displayed stopped on the active line.

Next, using Figure 182, we will explain the output mode of the image indicating the type of 1BB condition device that has been activated (the pattern combination that can be stopped).
Figure 182 is a diagram showing the output mode of an image indicating the type of activated 1BB condition device (the pattern combination that can be stopped) when any of multiple types of 1BB condition devices is activated.
Figure 182 (1) shows the output mode when the symbol combination that can be stopped ("red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7" corresponding to "1BB02") is first displayed on the image display device 23 when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated.

As described above, when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated in RT1, it transitions to RT2. Also, when the "Replay H condition device" or "Replay I condition device" is activated in RT2, the operation information of the stop switch 42 notifies the player that the stop switch 42 should be operated by pushing the reels in order to aim for the "Blue 7" symbol. Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated in order at an operation timing that allows the "Blue 7" symbol on each reel 31 to stop on an active line, and the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 02" or "Replay 04" is displayed stopped on an active line, "Bonus Confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 23.

After that, in RT2, in a game that is not a winning combination in the role selection means 61, "red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7" corresponding to "1BB02", which is the winning combination of the "1BB-B condition device", can be stopped on an active line. At this time, the sub-control means 80 displays on the image display device 23 the symbol combination that can be stopped, that is, "red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7" corresponding to "1BB02".

When the sub-control means 80 first displays a symbol combination that can be stopped on the image display device 23, it first displays on the image display device 23 that the symbols on the left reel 31 and center reel 31 are "red 7", as shown in FIG. 182 (1). Then, after a predetermined time (for example, "one second") has elapsed, it displays on the image display device 23 that the symbol on the right reel 31 is "red 7". At this time, the symbol on the right reel 31 is displayed larger than the symbol on the left reel 31 and center reel 31 on the image display device 23, thereby emphasizing that the symbol on the right reel 31 is "red 7".

Here, in the tenth embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB02", which is the winning role of the "1BB-B condition device", is "red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7", and the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB04", which is the winning role of the "1BB-D condition device", is "red 7"-"red 7"-"white 7" (Figures 136 and 140).
For this reason, at the point in time when the image display device 23 shows that the patterns on the left reel 31 and center reel 31 are "red 7", the player cannot tell whether "red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7" corresponding to "1BB02" can be stopped on a valid line, or whether "red 7"-"red 7"-"white 7" corresponding to "1BB04" can be stopped on a valid line.

Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the image display device 23 displayed that the symbols on the left reel 31 and center reel 31 are "red 7," the image display device 23 displays that the symbol on the right reel 31 is "red 7," creating a sense of anticipation in the player as to whether the "1BB-B condition device" or the "1BB-D condition device" has been activated.

In addition, from when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) until the operation of the stop switch 42 becomes acceptable (valid), the image display device 23 displays that the symbols on the left reel 31 and center reel 31 are "red 7", and further displays in large letters that the symbol on the right reel 31 is "red 7". In other words, at the point when the operation of the stop switch 42 becomes acceptable (valid), the image display device 23 displays that the symbols on the left reel 31, center reel 31 and right reel 31 are "red 7".

The specified time from when the image display device 23 displays that the symbols on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 are "red 7" to when the image display device 23 displays that the symbol on the right reel 31 is "red 7" is set to be shorter than the time from when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) to when the operation of the stop switch 42 becomes acceptable (valid).
This makes it possible to have the player operate the stop switch 42 after informing him of the symbol combination that can stop on the pay line, thereby preventing the player from being disadvantaged.

Figure 182 (2) shows the output mode when a pattern combination that can be stopped ("red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7" corresponding to "1BB02") is displayed on the image display device 23 for the second or subsequent time when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated.
As described above, when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated in RT1 and the reel transitions to RT2, in a game that is not a winning combination in the role selection means 61, "red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7" corresponding to "1BB02", the winning combination of the "1BB-B condition device", can be stopped on a valid line.

At this time, if "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Red 7" corresponding to "1BB02" cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line, then in a game that is not won by the role selection means 61, "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Red 7" corresponding to "1BB02" can be stopped on the active line again. In addition, the sub-control means 80 displays again on the image display device 23 the symbol combination that can be stopped, that is, "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Red 7" corresponding to "1BB02".

Then, when the sub-control means 80 displays a stoppable symbol combination on the image display device 23 for the second or subsequent time, it simultaneously displays on the image display device 23 that the symbols on the left reel 31, center reel 31, and right reel 31 are "red 7", as shown in Fig. 182 (2). That is, instead of displaying the symbols on the left reel 31 and center reel 31 and then highlighting the symbol on the right reel 31 a predetermined time later, it displays the three symbols simultaneously.
In addition, between the time when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) and the time when the operation of the stop switch 42 becomes acceptable (valid), the symbols on the left reel 31, center reel 31, and right reel 31 are "red 7", i.e., three "red 7s", are simultaneously displayed on the image display device 23.

When the symbol combinations which can be stopped are displayed for the second or subsequent times, the player already knows which symbol combinations can be stopped, so if the image is displayed in the manner as shown in Figure 182 (1) above, it may be annoying to the player.
Therefore, when the symbol combinations that can be stopped are displayed on the image display device 23 for the second or subsequent times, the symbols of each reel 31 are simultaneously displayed on the image display device 23. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

In addition, if a power outage occurs before the image in the form of Figure 182(1) is displayed, an image in the form of Figure 182(1) is displayed in a game that has not been won by the winning lottery means 61 after the power is restored from the power outage.
In contrast, when a power outage occurs after the image of FIG. 182(1) is displayed, an image of FIG. 182(2) is displayed in a game that has not been won by the winning lottery means 61 after the power is restored from the power outage.
In addition, if a power outage occurs after displaying an image in the form of Figure 182 (1), an image in the form of Figure 182 (1) may be displayed in a game that has not been won by the role selection means 61 after recovery from the power outage.

Figure 182 (3) shows the output mode when the pattern combination that can be stopped ('Red 7'-'Red 7'-'White 7' corresponding to '1BB04') is first displayed on the image display device 23 when the '1BB-D condition device' is activated.
When the "1BB-D condition device" is activated in RT1 and transitions to RT2, in a game in which the "replay H condition device" or "replay I condition device" is activated in RT2, operation information for the stop switch 42 is provided to inform the player that the stop switch 42 should be operated by pushing the reels in order to aim for the "blue 7" symbol. Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated in order at an operation timing that allows the "blue 7" symbol on each reel 31 to stop on an active line, and a symbol combination corresponding to "replay 02" or "replay 04" is displayed stopped on an active line, "bonus confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 23.

After that, in a game in which the winning combination is not won by the winning combination selection means 61 in RT2, "red 7"-"red 7"-"white 7" corresponding to "1BB04", which is the winning combination of the "1BB-D condition device", can be stopped on the active line. At this time, the sub-control means 80 displays on the image display device 23 the symbol combination that can be stopped, that is, "red 7"-"red 7"-"white 7" corresponding to "1BB04".
Furthermore, when the sub-control means 80 first displays a symbol combination that can be stopped on the image display device 23, as shown in Fig. 182 (3), it first displays on the image display device 23 that the symbols on the left and center reels 31 are "red 7". Then, after a predetermined time (for example, "one second") has elapsed, it displays on the image display device 23 that the symbol on the right reel 31 is "white 7". At this time, the symbol "white 7" on the right reel 31 is displayed larger than the symbol "red 7" on the left and center reels 31, thereby emphasizing that the symbol on the right reel 31 is "white 7".

As in the example shown in FIG. 182(1), by displaying on the image display device 23 that the symbols on the left and center reels 31 are "red 7" and then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, displaying on the image display device 23 that the symbol on the right reel 31 is "white 7," the player can be made to feel a sense of anticipation as to whether the "1BB-B condition device" or the "1BB-D condition device" has been activated.

Figure 182 (4) shows the output mode when a pattern combination that can be stopped ("Red 7"-"Red 7"-"White 7" corresponding to "1BB04") is displayed on the image display device 23 for the second or subsequent time when the "1BB-D condition device" is activated.
When the "1BB-D condition device" is activated in RT1 and transitions to RT2, in a game that is not a winning combination in the role selection means 61 in RT2, "red 7"-"red 7"-"white 7", which corresponds to "1BB04", the winning combination of the "1BB-D condition device", can be stopped on an active line.

At this time, if the "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"White 7" corresponding to "1BB04" cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line, then in a game that is not won by the role selection means 61, the "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"White 7" corresponding to "1BB04" can be stopped on the active line again. In addition, the sub-control means 80 displays the symbol combination "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"White 7" that can be stopped on the image display device 23 again.

Then, when the sub-control means 80 displays the symbol combinations that can be stopped on the image display device 23 for the second time or later, it simultaneously displays on the image display device 23 that the symbols on the left reel 31 and center reel 31 are "red 7" and that the symbol on the right reel 31 is "white 7", as shown in FIG. 182 (4). This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

As explained above using Figures 182 (1) to (4), in a game in which the "1BB-B condition device" is activated and "red 7" - "red 7" - "red 7" corresponding to the winning combination "1BB02" can be stopped, the sub-control means 80 displays "red 7" - "red 7" - "red 7" on the image display device 23. The sub-control means 80 displays different types of images when "red 7" - "red 7" - "red 7" is displayed on the image display device 23 for the first time and when it is displayed for the second time or later.

Similarly, in a game in which the "1BB-D condition device" is activated and "red 7"-"red 7"-"white 7" corresponding to the winning combination "1BB04" can be stopped, the sub-control means 80 displays "red 7"-"red 7"-"white 7" on the image display device 23. The sub-control means 80 displays different images when "red 7"-"red 7"-"white 7" is displayed on the image display device 23 for the first time and when it is displayed for the second time or later.

In addition, when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, when "red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7" is displayed on the image display device 23 for the first time (first time) and the second time, it may be displayed in the manner shown in Figure 182 (1), and when it is displayed for the third time or later, it may be displayed in the manner shown in Figure 182 (2).
Similarly, when the "1BB-D condition device" is activated, when "red 7"-"red 7"-"white 7" is displayed on the image display device 23 for the first time (first time) and the second time, it may be displayed in the manner shown in Figure 182 (3), and when it is displayed for the third time or later, it may be displayed in the manner shown in Figure 182 (4).

Next, the output mode of the image display showing the number of medals paid out (number of medals acquired) will be described.
FIG. 183 shows the output mode of the image display showing the number of medals paid out.
Figure 183 (1) shows the output mode of the image display of the number of medals to be paid out when the stop switch 42 is pressed in the order notified when the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize B6 condition device" are activated in "RT5 (when the RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated (general play during 1BB-C or 1BB-D play and inside SRB))" and the stop switch 42 is operated in the order notified.

As described above, when the RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not activated while 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated (general play during 1BB-C or 1BB-D play and not inside the SRB), when the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" to "Small Role B6 Condition Device" are activated, only one of the six possible push sequences will be the correct push sequence, and the other five will be incorrect push sequences.
Then, when "RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not in operation while 1BB-C or 1BB-D is in operation," when the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize B6 condition device" are in operation, the correct button press sequence is notified to the player to allow him or her to win medals.

In addition, in "RT5 (when RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated (general play during 1BB-C or 1BB-D play and inside SRB))," when the "Replay H condition device" or "Replay I condition device" is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order for the first stop in the middle, the reel 31 is stopped and displayed so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 01" can be stopped on the active line, and if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order other than the first stop in the middle, the reel 31 is stopped and displayed so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 02" or "Replay 04" can be stopped on the active line.

Furthermore, in RT5, when the right to execute an announcement game (AT) is possessed, when the "replay H condition device" or the "replay I condition device" is activated, operation information for the stop switch 42 is provided to notify that the stop switch 42 should be operated by pushing in order to aim for the "blue 7" symbol.
Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated in order and at the timing when the "blue 7" symbol on each reel 31 can be stopped on an active line, and a symbol combination corresponding to "replay 02" or "replay 04" is displayed stopped on an active line, a notification is issued that the player has the right to play the notification game.

In addition, in RT5, if the player does not have the right to execute the notification game, when the "replay H condition device" or the "replay I condition device" is activated, a notification is issued that the stop switch 42 should be operated at the first intermediate stop.
When the stop switch 42 is operated at the first intermediate stop, the symbol combination corresponding to "REPLAY 01" is stopped and displayed on the pay line. In this case, since the player does not have the right to play the notification game, the player is not notified that he or she has the right to play the notification game.

In this way, when the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" to the "Small Role B6 Condition Device" are activated when "RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated," or when the "Replay H Condition Device" or "Replay I Condition Device" is activated in "RT5 (when RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated)," operation information of the stop switch 42 is notified.

Here, in "RT5 (when RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated)," when the "Small win A1 condition device" to "Small win B6 condition device" are activated, as described above, regardless of the operation mode (push order and operation timing) of the stop switch 42, the symbol combination corresponding to the small win that will pay out 10 coins is displayed stopped on the active line. For this reason, when the "Small win A1 condition device" to "Small win B6 condition device" are activated during RT5, there is no need to notify the operation information of the stop switch 42.

However, in order to notify the operation information of the stop switch 42 when the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize B6 condition device" are activated "when the RB-A and RB-B condition devices are not activated while 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated," if the operation information of the stop switch 42 is not notified when the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize B6 condition device" are activated during RT5, there is a possibility that the player will feel uncomfortable.
In addition, in RT5, if the operation information of the stop switch 42 is notified only when the "replay H condition device" or the "replay I condition device" is activated, for example, by notifying the player of the press order for the first middle stop, there is a possibility that the player will realize that he does not have the right to execute the notification game (AT).

Therefore, in the tenth embodiment, when the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize B6 condition device" are activated during RT5, the sub-control means 80 notifies dummy operation information (push order) that does not affect the number of medals paid out.
This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable and prevents the player from realizing that he or she does not have the right to play the notification game.
Figure 183 (1) shows the output mode of the image display of the number of medals paid out when the stop switch 42 is pressed in the order (dummy operation information) when the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize B6 condition device" are activated during RT5, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the order that has been notified.

As shown in FIG. 183 (1), when the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize B6 condition device" are activated during RT5, the sub-control means 80 notifies the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed (for example, "middle, right, left").
Then, suppose that the stop switch 42 is operated in the notified push order (for example, "middle, right, left") and a symbol combination corresponding to a minor role for paying out 10 medals is stopped and displayed on the active line. In this case, the sub-control means 80 displays on the image display device 23 the fact that 10 medals have been paid out while the 10 medals are being paid out. Specifically, for example, the words "GET 10 medals" are displayed on the image display device 23. Furthermore, the sub-control means 80 outputs a sound effect from the speaker 22 indicating that medals have been paid out. Specifically, for example, the sound effect "GET!" is output from the speaker 22.

Furthermore, the stop switch 42 is operated in the notified push sequence, and a symbol combination corresponding to a minor win resulting in the payout of 10 medals is displayed stopped on the pay line, and as a result, the cumulative number of medals paid out in RT5 reaches a predetermined number (for example, "100 medals").
In this case, the sub-control means 80 displays on the image display device 23 that the cumulative total number of medals paid out in RT5 has reached a predetermined number. Specifically, for example, the words "OVER 100 medals" are displayed on the image display device 23.

In contrast, Figure 183 (2) shows the output mode of the image display of the number of medals paid out when the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed (dummy operation information) is notified when the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize B6 condition device" are activated during RT5, but the stop switch 42 is operated in an order different from the notified order.
As shown in FIG. 183 (2), when the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize B6 condition device" are activated during RT5, the sub-control means 80 notifies the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed (for example, "middle, right, left").

Then, suppose that the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing sequence different from the notified pressing sequence (for example, "left, center, right"), and a symbol combination corresponding to a minor win resulting in the payout of 10 coins is displayed stopped on the pay line.
In this case, the sub-control means 80 outputs a sound effect indicating that the stop switch 42 has been operated in a different pressing order from the notified pressing order from the speaker 22. Specifically, for example, a sound effect such as "MISS!" or "beep beep" is output from the speaker 22. In addition, the sub-control means 80 does not display on the image display device 23 the fact that the 10 medals have been paid out while the 10 medals are being paid out.

However, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in a different pressing sequence from the notified pressing sequence, when a symbol combination corresponding to a minor win resulting in a payout of 10 medals is displayed stopped on an active line and the cumulative number of medals paid out in RT5 reaches a predetermined number as a result, the sub-control means 80 displays on the image display device 23 that the cumulative number of medals paid out in RT5 has reached the predetermined number. Specifically, for example, the words "OVER 100" are displayed on the image display device 23 in the same manner as above.

In addition, this is not limited to when the cumulative number of medals paid out in RT5 reaches a predetermined number ("100 medals"), but may be displayed on the image display device 23, for example, when the difference in the number of medals (net increase in number of medals) in RT5 reaches a predetermined number.

In addition, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a different pressing sequence from the notified pressing sequence, a symbol combination corresponding to a minor win resulting in a payout of 10 medals is displayed stopped on an active line, and as a result, when the cumulative number of medals paid out in RT5 reaches a predetermined number ("100 medals"), the image display device 23 may not display the fact that the cumulative number of medals paid out in RT5 has reached the predetermined number.

In this way, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a different pressing sequence from the notified pressing sequence, images are not displayed indicating that 10 medals have been paid out or that the cumulative number of medals paid out has reached a predetermined number, so that a player who wants to see an image display regarding the medal payout can perform a stop operation according to dummy operation information.

As explained above using Figures 183 (1) and (2), when the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize B6 condition device" are activated during RT5, the symbol combination corresponding to the small prize that will pay out 10 coins is displayed stopped on the active line regardless of the operation mode of the stop switch 42. In addition, the sub-control means 80 notifies the order in which the stop switch 42 should be pressed when the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize B6 condition device" are activated during RT5.

Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the notified pressing sequence and a symbol combination corresponding to a minor win resulting in the payment of 10 medals is displayed stopped on an active line, the sub-control means 80 displays on the image display device 23 that 10 medals have been paid out.
In contrast, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a push order different from the notified push order and a symbol combination corresponding to a minor win resulting in the payout of 10 medals is displayed stopped on an active line, the sub-control means 80 does not display on the image display device 23 that 10 medals have been paid out.

However, in either case, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the notified pressing sequence and a symbol combination corresponding to a minor role resulting in the payout of 10 medals is displayed frozen on the active line, and as a result the cumulative number of medals paid out in RT5 reaches a predetermined number, or when the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing sequence different from the notified pressing sequence and a symbol combination corresponding to a minor role resulting in the payout of 10 medals is displayed frozen on the active line, and as a result the cumulative number of medals paid out in RT5 reaches a predetermined number, the sub-control means 80 displays on the image display device 23 that the cumulative number of medals paid out in RT5 has reached a predetermined number.

Figure 184 (1) shows the output mode of the image display when the cumulative number of medals paid out reaches a predetermined number (in the tenth embodiment, "86 medals") in "RT5 (when the RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated (during general play and inside SRB while playing 1BB-C or 1BB-D))".
For example, suppose that when the cumulative number of medals paid out in RT5 is 80, any one of the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize B6 condition device" is activated.

Then, operation information (press order) of the stop switch 42 is announced, the stop switch 42 is operated in an operation manner corresponding to the announced operation information, and a symbol combination corresponding to a minor win resulting in a payout of 10 coins is displayed stopped on the pay line.
In this case, as described above, the sub-control means 80 displays on the image display device 23 a message indicating that 10 medals have been paid out (the text "GET 10 medals") while the 10 medals are being paid out.

In addition, the stop switch 42 is operated in the notified push sequence, and a symbol combination corresponding to a minor win resulting in the payout of 10 medals is displayed stopped on the pay line, and as a result, the cumulative number of medals paid out in RT5 reaches "86 medals."
In this case, the sub-control means 80 performs the effect lottery using a lottery table that determines the probability of winning according to six setting values from Setting 1 to Setting 6. When the effect lottery is won, a message is displayed on the image display device 23 indicating that the cumulative number of medals paid out has reached "86 medals." Specifically, for example, the words "OVER 86 medals" are displayed on the image display device 23. In contrast, when the effect lottery is not won, the above image is not displayed.

Figure 184 (2) shows the probability of winning the effect lottery for each setting value from setting 1 to setting 6. For example, in the case of setting 1, the probability of winning the effect lottery is set to "0%", so even if the cumulative number of medals paid out in RT5 reaches "86 medals", the image "OVER 86 medals" will not be displayed.

In contrast, in the case of setting 6, the probability of winning the performance lottery is set to "100%," so when the cumulative number of medals paid out in RT5 reaches "86 medals," the image "OVER 86 medals" is always displayed.
The player can guess the setting value from the frequency of appearance of the image display of "OVER 86" when the cumulative number of medals paid out in RT5 reaches "86".

As described above, in RT2 (when the 1BB-A to 1BB-D condition device is activated (inside 1BB-A to 1BB-D)), after the "bonus confirmation screen" is displayed on the image display device 23, in a game that is not won by the role selection means 61, the symbol combination (for example, "red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7") corresponding to the winning role of the "1BB-A to 1BB-D condition device" is displayed on the image display device 23.

However, after the "bonus confirmation screen" is displayed on the image display device 23 in RT2, there may be cases where the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role cannot be stopped and displayed on the pay line, no matter how many plays are played, because the role selection means 61 does not determine a non-winning combination. In such cases, players who are hoping for a special role to be won will be kept waiting indefinitely.

Therefore, in the tenth embodiment, after the "bonus confirmation screen" is displayed as an image in RT2, each time five plays are played without a non-winning result in the role selection means 61, a performance selection is performed using a selection table that determines the probability of winning according to a set value. Then, when the performance selection is won, an image of a specific character is displayed on the image display device 23. This allows the player to guess the set value from the frequency with which the image of the specific character appears after the image of the "bonus confirmation screen" is displayed.

In addition, the effect lottery may be held not only when the cumulative number of medals paid out in RT5 reaches a predetermined number ("86 medals"), but also, for example, when the difference in the number of medals (net increase in the number of medals) in RT5 reaches a predetermined number, and when this effect lottery is won, a message indicating that the difference in the number of medals in RT5 has reached the predetermined number may be displayed on the image display device 23.

In addition, in RT5, dummy operation information is notified, but if the stop switch 42 is operated in a different pressing sequence from the notified pressing sequence, resulting in a small win with a payout of 10 medals, and as a result the cumulative number of medals paid out in RT5 reaches a predetermined number ("86 medals"), no performance lottery is conducted, and no image is displayed to indicate that the cumulative number of medals paid out has reached the predetermined number.

In this way, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a different pressing sequence from the notified pressing sequence, the effect lottery is not performed, and an image is not displayed indicating that the cumulative number of medals paid out has reached a predetermined number, so that a player who wants to guess the set value can perform a stop operation according to dummy operation information.

In addition, the winning probability of the effect lottery for each setting value of Settings 1 to 6 shown in Figure 184 (2) is merely an example, and when the cumulative number of medals paid out in RT5 reaches a predetermined number ("86 medals"), an image may always (with a 100% probability) be displayed to indicate that the cumulative number of medals paid out has reached the predetermined number, regardless of the setting value.

Furthermore, for example, if a power outage occurs in RT5 and the power is restored, when the number of plays since the power was restored reaches a predetermined number of plays (for example, 5 plays), an image of the cumulative number of medals paid out in RT5 at that point in time may be displayed with a probability according to a set value. For example, with setting 1, the cumulative number of medals paid out is not displayed as an image, but with setting 6, the cumulative number of medals paid out can always be displayed as an image.

Next, control during freezing will be described with reference to FIG.
Figure 185 (1) is a diagram explaining the operating mode of the reel 31 during a freeze, the excitation state of the motor 32 (four-phase stepping motor) for rotating the reel 31, the rotation speed of the reel 31, and the processing contents of the freeze data.
As shown in FIG. 185(1), in the tenth embodiment, the main control means 50 is capable of executing three types of freeze, namely, first to third modes.

In the tenth embodiment, the main control means 50 is provided with freeze data used to control freezing. Specifically, the freeze data is stored in ROM 54 on the main control means (main control board) 50. When executing a freeze, the main CPU 55 reads the freeze data from ROM 54 and executes processing based on the freeze data.

Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, the freeze data has three parts: a first part, a second part, and a third part. Specifically, the freeze data is composed of, for example, 100 lines (100 pieces) of processing (instructions) in total. The processing from lines 1 to 30 is the first part, the processing from lines 31 to 60 is the second part, and the processing from lines 61 to 100 is the third part.

Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, when executing the freeze of any of the first, second and third operational modes, the main control means 50 (main CPU 55) uses the same freeze data.
Then, when the main control means 50 decides to execute the first mode of freezing, it executes the first part of the processing of the freeze data (processing of lines 1 to 30), and ends the processing of the freeze data when the first part of the processing (processing of line 30) has been executed, thereby ending the freezing.

Furthermore, when the main control means 50 decides to execute the second mode of freezing, it executes the processing of the first and second parts of the freeze data (processing from the first line to the sixtieth line), and terminates the processing of the freeze data when the processing of the second part (processing of the sixtieth line) has been executed, thereby terminating the freezing.
Furthermore, when the main control means 50 decides to execute a third mode freeze, it executes processing of the first through third parts of the freeze data (processing of lines 1 through 100), and terminates processing of the freeze data when processing of the third part (processing of line 100) has been executed, thereby terminating the freeze.

The main control means 50 also has a freeze counter on the RWM 53 that is used to process freeze data. When the main control means 50 decides to execute a first mode freeze, it sets the freeze counter to an initial value of "30", when it decides to execute a second mode freeze, it sets the freeze counter to an initial value of "60", and when it decides to execute a third mode freeze, it sets the freeze counter to an initial value of "100".

Then, the main control means 50 subtracts "1" from the value of the freeze counter each time it executes processing of the freeze data, and when the value of the freeze counter becomes "0", ends processing of the freeze data.
As a result, when it is decided to execute the first mode of freeze, processing of lines 1 to 30 (first part) of the freeze data is executed, and processing of the freeze data can be terminated when processing of line 30 has been executed.

Similarly, when it is decided to perform a second mode freeze, processing of lines 1 to 60 of the freeze data (first and second parts) is executed, and processing of the freeze data can be terminated when processing of line 60 is completed.
Furthermore, when it is decided to execute the third mode freeze, processing of the first through 100th lines of the freeze data (first through third parts) is executed, and processing of the freeze data can be terminated when processing of the 100th line has been executed.

When the first freeze is executed, the main control means 50 first de-energizes the motor 32 (four-phase stepping motor) for one second when the start switch 41 is operated. The rotation speed of the reel 31 at this time is "0". Next, after the motor 32 rotates in reverse for one second, four-phase excitation is applied to the motor 32, and then the motor 32 is de-energized for two seconds. The rotation speed of the reel 31 during reverse rotation is "60 rotations per second". Then, after the motor 32 is de-energized for two seconds, the processing of the freeze data is terminated, and then normal drive control of the reel 31 is executed. In normal drive control of the reel 31, the main control means 50 performs a 1-2 phase excitation output that alternates between one-phase excitation and two-phase excitation on the motor 32. This causes the reel 31 to rotate steadily. The rotation speed of the reel 31 during steady rotation is "80 rotations per second".

Furthermore, when the freeze is executed in the second mode, it differs from the freeze execution in that after four-phase excitation is applied to the motor 32, the excitation is released for four seconds; otherwise, it is the same as the freeze execution in the first mode.
Furthermore, when the freeze is executed in the third mode, the difference from the freeze execution in the first mode is that the motor 32 is rotated in reverse for 10 seconds, and that after four-phase excitation is applied to the motor 32, the excitation is released for 0.5 seconds; otherwise, the freeze execution in the third mode is the same as the freeze execution in the first mode.
In this way, in the tenth embodiment, the same freeze data is used when executing any of the freezes from the first to the third modes, so that a single freeze data set can be used to execute freezes for a plurality of operation modes, and since only one freeze data set needs to be stored in the ROM 54, the amount of ROM 54 used can be reduced.

Figure 185 (2) is a diagram showing the probability of executing a freeze and the probability of selecting an operation mode for each game state and each condition device.
As shown in FIG. 185(2), the freeze is not executed when the "small win A1 condition device" to the "small win B6 condition device" are activated during RT1. Similarly, the freeze is not executed when there is no winning during RT1.

When the "Small Winning K Condition Device" to "Small Winning L Condition Device" are activated during RT1, there is a 10% chance that the first type of freeze will be selected and executed, and a 5% chance that the second type of freeze will be selected and executed. There is no chance that the third type of freeze will be selected and executed. Therefore, the total probability of a freeze being executed when the "Small Winning K Condition Device" to "Small Winning L Condition Device" are activated during RT1 is 15%.

When the "1BB-A Condition Device" through "1BB-D Condition Device" are activated during RT1, there is a 30% chance that the first freeze will be selected and executed, a 20% chance that the second freeze will be selected and executed, and a 1% chance that the third freeze will be selected and executed. Therefore, the total probability of a freeze being executed when the "1BB-A Condition Device" through "1BB-D Condition Device" are activated during RT1 is 51%.

During RT2, no lottery will be held for the "1BB-A condition device" through the "1BB-D condition device."
In addition, when a non-winning combination occurs during RT2, a symbol combination corresponding to a special role can stop on an effective line, and therefore the first freeze mode is selected and executed with a probability of "20%," and the second freeze mode is selected and executed with a probability of "30%."
Similarly, when the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" to "Small Role B6 Condition Device" and the "Small Role K Condition Device" to "Small Role L Condition Device" are activated during RT2, a freeze of each operation mode is selected and executed with the probability shown in FIG. 185 (2).

Next, changing the BGM will be described.
In this embodiment, the background music output from the speaker 22 is configured to be changeable.
Although not shown in Fig. 1, a "cross key" is electrically connected to the sub-control means 80. The "cross key" is also called a "selection button" or a "selection switch", and is a switch used for effects and the like, and is operated when the player causes predetermined information to be displayed or when various settings are made.
The cross key also includes an up switch, a down switch, a right switch, and a left switch.

When the cross key (either the up switch, down switch, right switch, or left switch) is operated during game standby, the sub-control means 80 displays a “menu screen” on the image display device 23 .
Furthermore, when the "menu screen" is displayed on the image display device 23, the "BGM selection mode" can be selected by operating the up or down switch on the cross key.
Then, when the effect switch is operated while the "BGM selection mode" is selected, the sub-control means 80 transitions to the "BGM selection mode" and displays the "BGM selection mode" screen on the image display device 23.

In the "BGM selection mode", it is possible to select the BGM.
In the "BGM selection mode", one of a plurality of BGMs can be selected by operating the up or down switch on the directional pad, and when the performance switch is operated with one of the BGMs selected, the sub-control means 80 confirms that BGM and outputs that BGM from the speaker 22 in the subsequent game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the "Copyright-free BGM mode" is selectable in the "BGM selection mode." Then, when the effect switch is operated while the "Copyright-free BGM mode" is selected, the sub-control means 80 confirms the "Copyright-free BGM mode" and outputs copyright-free BGM from the speaker 22 in subsequent games.

In recent years, it has become possible for anyone to easily shoot videos using a smartphone or the like and upload the shot videos to a video distribution site (also called a video posting site or a video sharing site) via the Internet.
However, if a video shot on a smartphone or other device contains music that is protected by copyright, uploading it to a video distribution site without the permission of the copyright holder would constitute copyright infringement.
In particular, in gaming machines, copyrighted music is sometimes used as background music to enhance the player's enjoyment. In such cases, uploading video footage of the game being played to a video distribution site without the permission of the copyright holder constitutes copyright infringement.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the "copyright-free BGM mode" is selected, copyright-free (not protected by copyright) music is output from the speaker 22 as background music, so that even if a video of the game being played is uploaded to a video distribution site, it does not constitute copyright infringement.
In addition, by allowing many people to easily upload videos of themselves playing the game to a video distribution site, the effectiveness of advertising the game machine can be improved.

In addition, the timing at which the output of copyrighted music or copyright-free music begins can be the timing at which a game that is advantageous to the player begins, specifically, the timing at which the operation of a reel (special game) or an announcement game (AT) begins.
In addition, the timing at which the "Copyright-Free BGM Mode" can be selected using the "BGM Selection Mode" can be during game standby, specifically, after all reels 31 have stopped and before the start switch 41 is operated (turned on).

Furthermore, in the "BGM selection mode", a "no BGM mode" is provided in which no BGM is output. When the "no BGM mode" is selected, BGM will not be output from the speaker 22 in subsequent games. In this case, sound effects such as the stop operation acceptance sound output when the stop switch 42 is operated and the payout sound output when medals are being paid out may be output from the speaker 22.

The tenth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, but the present invention is not limited to the above content, and various modifications are possible, for example, as follows:

(1) In the above embodiment, the expected value of the number of medals paid out when the notification game is not executed (non-AT) when the RB-C or RB-D condition device is activated when 1BB-E is activated (general game during 1BB-E game and inside SRB) is set to be lower than the expected value of the number of medals paid out when the notification game is not executed (non-AT) when the RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated (general game during 1BB-C or 1BB-D game and inside SRB). However, this is not limited to the above.

For example, the number of replay condition devices (probability of winning) is set to be the same for "when RB-C or RB-D condition device is activated when 1BB-E is activated" and "when RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated." Alternatively, the number of replay condition devices is set to be different, while the replay total value is set to be the same.
Furthermore, the stopping control of reel 31 when the "small prize A1 condition device" to "small prize B6 condition device" are activated is made the same when "the RB-C or RB-D condition device is activated when 1BB-E is activated" and when "the RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated."

This allows the expected number of medals paid out when the notification game is not executed (non-AT) when the RB-C or RB-D condition device is activated when 1BB-E is activated to be set to the same value as the expected number of medals paid out when the notification game is not executed (non-AT) when the RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated.

Also, for example, the number of replay condition devices (probability of winning) is set to be the same for "when RB-C or RB-D condition device is activated when 1BB-E is activated" and "when RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated." Alternatively, the number of replay condition devices is set to be different, while the replay total value is set to be the same.
Furthermore, the stopping control of reel 31 when the "small prize A1 condition device" to "small prize B6 condition device" are activated is made the same when "the RB-C or RB-D condition device is activated when 1BB-E is activated" and when "the RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated."

Furthermore, when "RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated", when the "small prize E condition device" to the "small prize H condition device" are activated, the system is controlled so that a small prize that pays out 1 coin is always won, regardless of the operation mode of the stop switch 42. In contrast, when "RB-C or RB-D condition device is activated when 1BB-E is activated", when the "small prize E condition device" to the "small prize H condition device" are activated, the system is controlled so that a small prize that pays out 10 coins is always won, regardless of the operation mode of the stop switch 42.

This allows the expected number of medals paid out when the notification game is not executed (non-AT) when the RB-C or RB-D condition device is activated when 1BB-E is activated to be set higher than the expected number of medals paid out when the notification game is not executed (non-AT) when the RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated.

(2) In the above embodiment, the expected value of the number of medals paid out when a notification game is executed (in the AT) when the RB-C or RB-D condition device is activated when 1BB-E is activated (in general game during 1BB-E game and inside SRB) is set lower than the expected value of the number of medals paid out when a notification game is executed (in the AT) when the RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated (in general game during 1BB-C or 1BB-D game and inside SRB). However, this is not limited to the above.

As with the modified example (1) above, by adjusting the number of replay condition devices (winning probability) and the stop control of reel 31 when the small win condition device is activated, the expected number of medals paid out when an announcement game is executed (during the AT) when "the RB-C or RB-D condition device is activated when 1BB-E is activated" can be set to the same value as the expected number of medals paid out when an announcement game is executed (during the AT) when "the RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated."

In addition, the expected number of medals paid out when playing the notification game (during the AT) when the RB-C or RB-D condition device is activated when 1BB-E is activated can be set to be higher than the expected number of medals paid out when playing the notification game (during the AT) when the RB-A or RB-B condition device is activated when 1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated.

(3) In the above embodiment, the probability of having the right to play the notification game when "1BB-E is activated (1BB-E is being played)" is set to be higher than the probability of having the right to play the notification game when "1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated (1BB-C or 1BB-D is being played)." However, this is not limited to the above.

For example, the probability of winning the AT lottery when the "1BB-C or 1BB-C condition device" is activated is set to the same as the probability of winning the AT lottery when the "1BB-E condition device" is activated (for example, "50%" for both).
This makes it possible to set the probability of having the right to play the notification game when "1BB-E is activated" to be the same as the probability of having the right to play the notification game when "1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated."

Also, for example, the winning probability of the AT lottery when the "1BB-C or 1BB-C condition device" is activated is set to "50%," and the winning probability of the AT lottery when the "1BB-E condition device" is activated is set to "10%." In other words, the winning probability of the AT lottery when the "1BB-C or 1BB-C condition device" is activated is set to be higher than the winning probability of the AT lottery when the "1BB-E condition device" is activated.
This allows the probability of having the right to play the notification game when "1BB-E is activated" to be set lower than the probability of having the right to play the notification game when "1BB-C or 1BB-D is activated."

(4) The winning probability of the effect lottery for each setting value of Settings 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 184(2) is merely an example and is not limited to this content. The winning probability of the effect lottery for each setting value can be set as appropriate.

(5) In the above embodiment, three types of freezes, a first aspect, a second aspect, and a third aspect, can be executed, and the freeze data has three parts, a first part, a second part, and a third part. However, the freeze operation modes are not limited to three types, and the parts of the freeze data are not limited to three parts.
For example, five types of freezing, from a first aspect to a fifth aspect, may be executable, and in this case, the freeze data may be configured to have five parts, from a first part to a fifth part.

In general, "N" types of freezes can be performed, from a first aspect to an Nth aspect (N≧2), in which case the freeze data can be configured to have "N" parts, from a first part to an Nth part (N≧2).
When the main control means 50 decides to execute the Mth (1≧M≧N) type of freeze, it is configured to process "M" parts from the first part to the Mth part of the freeze data, and to end the freeze when the Mth part has been processed.

(6) The probability of executing a freeze and the probability of selecting a freeze operation mode for each game state and condition device shown in FIG. 185(2) are merely examples and are not limited to these. The probability of executing a freeze and the probability of selecting a freeze operation mode for each game state and condition device can be set as appropriate.

(7) In the above embodiment, when "1BB-E is in operation (during 1BB-E play)", the "Chance Zone (CZ)", which is a play area (also referred to as a play state or play period; the same applies below) in which the probability of winning the AT lottery is set high, and the "CZ High Probability Zone", which is a play area in which the probability of transitioning to the Chance Zone is set high, are alternately repeated, but this is not limited to the above.

For example, it is possible to provide a "non-chance zone", which is a game zone in which the probability of winning the AT lottery is set to a predetermined probability, and a "chance zone (CZ)", which is a game zone in which the probability of winning the AT lottery is set higher than in the non-chance zone.
In addition, the main control means 50 executes an AT lottery to determine whether or not to grant the right to play an announcement game (AT) in a game in which the "small role I condition device" to the "small role V condition device" (rare role) are activated (won) in a non-chance zone. The probability of winning the AT lottery when the "small role I condition device" to the "small role V condition device" are activated in a non-chance zone is set to "10%." Then, if the AT lottery is won, the right to play an announcement game is granted.

Furthermore, the main control means 50 executes a transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the chance zone in a game in which the "small role I condition device" to the "small role V condition device" are activated in the non-chance zone. The probability of winning the transition lottery when the "small role I condition device" to the "small role V condition device" are activated in the non-chance zone is set to "10%." Then, when the transition lottery is won, the main control means 50 transitions from the non-chance zone to the chance zone.

Furthermore, when the cumulative number of games played since the transition to the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number of games (500 games), the main control means 50 transitions from the non-chance zone to the chance zone. In other words, when the number of games played in the advantageous zone reaches 500 games, the non-chance zone is transitioned to the chance zone.
In this way, the conditions for starting the chance zone are set to winning the transition lottery or the cumulative number of plays since transitioning to the advantageous zone reaching 500 plays.

In addition, the main control means 50 executes an AT lottery in a game in which the "small role I condition device" to the "small role V condition device" are activated in the chance zone. The winning probability of the AT lottery when the "small role I condition device" to the "small role V condition device" are activated in the chance zone is set to "80%." Then, when the AT lottery is won, the main control means 50 grants the right to execute the notification game.
Furthermore, the chance zone continues until 10 games are played, and ends when 10 games are played. That is, the end condition of the chance zone is set to when the number of games reaches 10 (10 games are played).

Then, when 10 games have been played in the chance zone without winning the AT lottery, the main control means 50 ends the chance zone and transitions to a non-chance zone. In other words, when the player does not have the right to play the notification game at the end of the chance zone, the main control means 50 transitions to a non-chance zone when the chance zone ends.

In response to this, when the AT lottery is won in the chance zone, the main control means 50 ends the chance zone after 10 plays have been played, and transitions to the notification game. In other words, if there is a right to play the notification game at the end of the chance zone, the notification game begins when the chance zone ends. As in the above embodiment, the initial number of plays in the notification game is set to "50 plays."

In addition, when the transition lottery is won and a transition to the chance zone is made, the main control means 50 does not turn on the output of an external signal at the time of transition to the chance zone, but when the cumulative number of games played since the transition to the advantageous zone reaches 500 games and a transition to the chance zone is made, the main control means 50 turns on the output of an external signal at the time of transition to the chance zone.
Furthermore, when the cumulative number of plays since the transition to the advantageous zone reaches 500 plays and transitions to the chance zone, if the player does not win the AT lottery in the chance zone and does not have the right to execute the notification game at the end of the chance zone, the main control means 50 turns off the output of the external signal at the end of the chance zone, ends the advantageous zone, and transitions to the non-advantageous zone (normal zone).

In response to this, when the cumulative number of plays since the transition to the advantageous zone reaches 500 plays and the game is transitioned to the chance zone, if the player wins the AT lottery in the chance zone and has the right to play the notification game at the end of the chance zone, the main control means 50 transitions to the notification game when the chance zone ends, and at this time keeps the output of the external signal on, continuing the advantageous zone without ending it. After that, when the notification game ends, the output of the external signal is turned off, and the advantageous zone is ended and the game is transitioned to the non-advantageous zone.

Furthermore, when the main control means 50 wins the transition lottery and transitions to the chance zone, if the AT lottery is not won in the chance zone and the player does not have the right to execute the notification game at the end of the chance zone, the output of the external signal is maintained off at the end of the chance zone and the advantageous zone is continued without ending.
Furthermore, in the case where the main control means 50 wins the transition lottery and transitions to the chance zone, if the player wins the AT lottery in the chance zone and has the right to play the notification game at the end of the chance zone, the main control means 50 transitions to the notification game when the chance zone ends, and at this time turns on the output of the external signal and continues the advantageous zone without ending it. After that, at the end of the notification game, the output of the external signal is turned off, and the advantageous zone is ended and transitions to the non-advantageous zone is made. The start conditions of the advantageous zone are the same as those in the above embodiment.

Next, the output pattern of the external signal when moving to the chance zone will be described.
Figure 186 is a time chart showing the output pattern (1) of the external signal when transitioning to the chance zone.
The time chart shown in Figure 186 shows the output pattern of the external signal when the number of plays from the time of transition to the advantageous zone reaches 500 plays, transitioning to the chance zone, and the AT lottery is not won in the chance zone.

As shown in FIG. 186, when the number of plays from the time of transition to the advantageous zone reaches 500 plays, the zone transitions from the non-chance zone to the chance zone, and the output of the external signal is turned on. Also, when the number of plays in the chance zone reaches 10 plays without winning the AT lottery in the chance zone, the advantageous zone ends and transitions to the non-advantageous zone (normal zone), and the chance zone ends and transitions to the non-chance zone, and the output of the external signal is turned off.

Here, the external signal is output via the external centralized terminal board 100 to a hall computer 200 outside the slot machine 10 or to a data counter installed above the slot machine 10. The data counter is configured to count the number of times a special game has been played, the number of times a notification game has been played, and the number of games played since the end of a special game or notification game, based on the external signal output from the slot machine 10, and display this on a display.

Then, after 500 plays from the time of transition to the advantageous zone, the chance zone is entered and the output of an external signal is turned on, and when the chance zone ends without winning the AT lottery, the advantageous zone and chance zone are ended and the output of the external signal is turned off, thereby making it possible to approximate the number of plays from the time of transition to the advantageous zone since the end of the special game or notification game, which is displayed on the display of the data counter, to the number of plays from the time of transition to the advantageous zone.
This enables the player to grasp the remaining number of games to be played until the transition to the chance zone from the number of games played since the end of the special game or the notification game, which is displayed on the display of the data counter.

In addition, when the game moves to the chance zone after 500 plays from the time of the transition to the advantageous zone, the number of remaining plays until 1,500 plays, which is the end condition of the advantageous zone, is reduced.
Thus, when the chance zone is entered after 500 plays from the time of the advantageous zone transition and the chance zone ends without winning the AT lottery, the advantageous zone is ended and the advantageous zone clear counter is reset, so that the player is not disadvantaged.

Figure 187 is a time chart showing the output pattern (2) of the external signal when transitioning to the chance zone.
The time chart shown in Figure 187 shows the output pattern of the external signal when the number of plays from the time of transition to the advantageous zone reaches 500 plays, transitioning to the chance zone, and winning the AT lottery in the chance zone.

As shown in FIG. 187, when the number of plays from the time of transition to the advantageous zone reaches 500 plays, the zone transitions from the non-chance zone to the chance zone, and the output of the external signal is turned on. Also, when an AT lottery is won in the chance zone, the zone transitions to the notification game when the chance zone ends. At this time, the advantageous zone continues without ending, and the output of the external signal is maintained as being on. After that, when the notification game ends, the advantageous zone ends and the zone transitions to the non-advantageous zone, and the output of the external signal is turned off.
In this case too, the number of games played from the end of the special game or the notification game, which is displayed on the display of the data counter, can be made to approximate the number of games played from the transition to the advantageous zone.

Figure 188 is a time chart showing the output pattern (3) of the external signal when transitioning to the chance zone.
The time chart shown in Figure 188 shows the output pattern of the external signal when the transition lottery is won and the player moves to the chance zone, but the AT lottery is not won in the chance zone.

As shown in FIG. 188, if the transition lottery is won, the player transitions from the non-chance zone to the chance zone. At this time, the output of the external signal is maintained off. After that, if the number of plays in the chance zone reaches 10 without winning the AT lottery in the chance zone, the chance zone ends and the player transitions to the non-chance zone. At this time, the advantageous period does not end and continues, and the output of the external signal is maintained off.

Figure 189 is a time chart showing the output pattern (4) of the external signal when transitioning to the chance zone.
The time chart shown in Figure 189 shows the output pattern of the external signal when the transition lottery is won, the player transitions to the chance zone, and the AT lottery is won in the chance zone.

As shown in FIG. 189, when the transition lottery is won, the game transitions from the non-chance zone to the chance zone. At this time, the output of the external signal is maintained at OFF. After that, when the AT lottery is won in the chance zone, the game transitions to the notification game when the chance zone ends. At this time, the advantageous zone continues without ending, and the output of the external signal changes from OFF to ON. After that, when the notification game ends, the advantageous zone ends and the game transitions to the non-advantageous zone, and the output of the external signal turns OFF.
In this case too, the number of games played from the end of the special game or the notification game, which is displayed on the display of the data counter, can be made to approximate the number of games played from the transition to the advantageous zone.

In addition, when the number of plays since the transition to the advantageous zone reaches 500 plays, the game may transition to a premonition spanning a predetermined number of plays (for example, 5 plays), and when the predetermined number of plays has been consumed in the premonition, the game may transition from the non-chance zone to the chance zone.
Similarly, when a transition lottery is won in a non-chance zone, the game may transition to a premonition spanning a predetermined number of plays (e.g., five plays), and when the predetermined number of plays is consumed in the premonition, the game may transition from the non-chance zone to the chance zone.

Furthermore, as the external signals, for example, external signals 1 to 3 can be provided.
Furthermore, external signal 1 can be an external signal corresponding to a chance zone, external signal 2 can be an external signal corresponding to the operation of a role device (special game), and external signal 3 can be an external signal corresponding to an announcement game (AT).

In this case, when the number of plays since the transition to the advantageous zone reaches 500 plays, the non-chance zone is transitioned to the chance zone, and the output of external signal 1 is turned on.
Also, while staying in the chance zone, the output of external signal 1 is maintained on.
Furthermore, when the number of plays in the chance zone reaches a predetermined number of plays (10 plays) without winning the AT lottery in the chance zone, the advantageous zone is ended and shifted to a non-advantageous zone (normal zone), the chance zone is ended and shifted to a non-chance zone, and the output of the external signal 1 is turned off.

Furthermore, if the AT lottery is won in the chance zone, the game will transition to notification play when the chance zone ends. At this time, the advantageous zone will not end and will continue. Also, the output of external signal 1 will be turned off and the output of external signal 3 will be turned on. Furthermore, during the notification play, the output of external signal 3 will be kept on. Then, when the notification play ends, the advantageous zone will end and the game will transition to the non-advantageous zone, and the output of external signal 3 will be turned off.

When the reel operation (special game) starts, the output of external signal 2 is turned on, and while the reel operation is in progress, the output of external signal 2 is kept on, and when the reel operation ends, the output of external signal 2 is turned off.
Similarly, when the notification game (AT) starts, the output of the external signal 3 is turned on, the output of the external signal 3 is maintained on during the notification game, and when the notification game ends, the output of the external signal 3 is turned off.

In addition, external signal 1 can be an external signal corresponding to a chance zone, and external signal 2 can be an external signal corresponding to the operation of a reel (special game) and an announcement game (AT).
In this case, when the AT lottery is won in the chance zone, the game transitions to the notification game when the chance zone ends. At this time, the advantageous zone does not end but continues. Also, the output of external signal 1 is turned off and the output of external signal 2 is turned on. Furthermore, during the notification game, the output of external signal 2 is kept on. Then, when the notification game ends, the advantageous zone ends and the game transitions to the non-advantageous zone, and the output of external signal 2 is turned off.

In addition, when the reel operation (special game) starts or when the notification game (AT) starts, the output of external signal 2 is turned on, and while the reel operation or notification game is in progress, the output of external signal 2 is kept on, and when the reel operation or notification game ends, the output of external signal 2 is turned off.

The tenth embodiment has been described above, but the first to tenth embodiments and the various modified examples shown in the first to tenth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

Eleventh Embodiment
In the following description, when the term "gaming machine 10" is mentioned, it is intended to include both the slot machine 10 (FIG. 1) shown in the first embodiment and a pachinko gaming machine, for example.
Furthermore, when referring to the "main control board 50 (of the gaming machine 10)," this is intended to include the main control board of the pachinko gaming machine.
Furthermore, when referring to the "sub-control board 80 (of the gaming machine 10)," this is intended to include the sub-control board of the pachinko gaming machine.
Furthermore, when referring to "the RWM of the main control board 50 (of the gaming machine 10)," this includes the RWM mounted on the main control board (the RWM built into the one-chip microprocessor).
In addition, when referring to "RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80 (of the gaming machine 10)," this includes the RWM mounted on the sub-control board (including both an internal RWM built into the one-chip microprocessor and an external RWM provided outside the one-chip microprocessor).

The eleventh embodiment relates to storing logs (game logs, game history, operation history, event history, events, history, information, data, records, usage status, etc.). In the following description, these will be referred to as "logs".
First, the storage means (memory) for storing the logs is the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80. The RWM 83 is provided with a storage area for storing various logs.
Here, in FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 is provided with a one-chip microprocessor in which an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub-CPU 85 are integrated.

On the other hand, on the sub-control board 80, in addition to this one-chip microprocessor (outside the one-chip microprocessor), another RWM 83 (hereinafter referred to as "external RWM 83" as necessary) is provided. The storage capacity of the external RWM 83 is larger than that of the RWM 83 in the one-chip microprocessor (hereinafter referred to as "internal RWM 83" as necessary). Therefore, logs are stored in the external RWM 83. Note that the internal RWM 83 stores data that is to be processed at a higher speed (for example, data on the lighting of a lamp, etc.). In other words, the time required to process data stored in the internal RWM 83 is shorter than the time required to process data stored in the external RWM 83. In other words, storing and reading various logs does not affect the performance related to the game, so there is no problem in storing them in the external RWM 83.
However, the present invention is not limited to the above, and if the storage capacity of the internal RWM 83 is large enough to store various logs, the logs may be stored in the internal RWM 83. Alternatively, the logs may be stored separately in the internal RWM 83 and the external RWM 83.

The reason why the logs are stored in the external RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80, rather than in the main control board 50, is that the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 does not have sufficient storage capacity. Furthermore, in the case of the main control board 50, an external RWM 53 is not provided. However, this is not limited to the above, and if the storage capacity of the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 increases in the future, or if it becomes possible to provide an external RWM 53, it is also possible to store logs (number of games played, ball information, information on the power supply, setting value information, etc.) based on the main control (progress of the game) in the RWM (internal RWM and/or external RWM) 53 of the main control board 50.

Also, gaming machines are known that do not use physical (tangible) medals as gaming value (gaming media) but use electronic information (electronic medals) (hereinafter referred to as "medalless gaming machines"; they are also called "managed gaming machines" or "sealed gaming machines"). In medalless gaming machines, it is known that in addition to the main control board 50, a gaming media number control board is provided as a second main control board. In this case, the gaming media number control board is also provided with a one-chip microprocessor that integrates an RWM, ROM, and main CPU, just like the main control board 50 described above.
For this reason, in a medalless gaming machine, a log related to main control (progress of a game) may be stored in the RWM (internal RWM and/or external RWM) of the gaming media number control board based on a command transmitted from the main control board 50. In other words, in gaming machines that use physical (tangible) medals as gaming value (gaming media) and medalless gaming machines, as long as they have an RWM (storage means) capable of storing a log, any control means (for example, a one-chip microprocessor provided on the main control board, a one-chip microprocessor provided on the sub-control board, a one-chip microprocessor provided on the gaming media number control board, etc.) may execute a process of storing a log.

The log is configured to be able to be maintained even after the power is cut off (also referred to as the power off state). A backup battery (also referred to as a backup means or backup device) is mounted on the sub-control board 80 to hold the data stored in the memory areas of both the RWM (internal RWM and external RWM) even if the power supply is cut off. The backup battery is, for example, a manganese lithium secondary battery. When the power cable of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the power supply source and the gaming machine 10 is turned off, the sub-control board 80 is supplied with power to hold the data stored in the RWM (internal RWM and external RWM). Therefore, in this case, the power of the backup battery is not used.

In contrast, when the power cable of the gaming machine 10 is unplugged or when the sub-control board 80 is removed from the gaming machine 10, power is not supplied, so the data stored in the RWM (internal RWM and external RWM) is maintained using power from the backup battery. Although it depends on the capacity of the backup battery, the data stored in the RWM (internal RWM and external RWM) is configured to be maintained using power from the backup battery for, for example, about several months.
As a result, in the process of removing the gaming machine 10 from the market, since the gaming machine 10 is not connected to the power supply source via the power cable, power is not supplied to the gaming machine 10, but data stored in the RWM (internal RWM and external RWM) is maintained by the power of the backup battery. Furthermore, even if the sub-control board 80 is removed from the gaming machine 10 after the gaming machine 10 is removed from the market, the data stored in the RWM 83 (internal RWM and external RWM) of the sub-control board 80 is maintained as long as the remaining battery power of the backup battery does not become zero.

The main control board 50 also uses a backup battery to hold the data stored in the RWM 53. Here, the backup power supply for the sub-control board 80 is mounted on the sub-control board 80, but in the case of the main control board 50, the backup battery is not mounted on the main control board 50, and may not even be present in the board case housing the main control board 50. In other words, the gaming machine 10 may be configured so that when the main control board 50 is removed from the gaming machine 10 after it is collected from the market, the data stored in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 is erased.

The logs include logs generated based on commands sent from the main control board 50 and logs generated independently by the sub-control board 80 (without being based on commands sent from the main control means 50).
Furthermore, the logs include logs that are stored for each game (for each game, for each unit game), and logs that are stored when an event occurs (for example, when a specific operation or a specific event is detected).
In the following explanation, "one game" and "unit game" correspond to the time from when the start switch 41 is operated to when all reels 31 have stopped (or, in the case of the awarding (payout) of game media, when the awarding process of game media has ended).

First, the log stored for each game is stored with an upper limit of, for example, "70,000" games. When the number of games reaches "70,000", storage thereafter is stopped. For example, a flag is set that is turned on when the number of games reaches the upper limit of "70,000", and it is determined whether the flag is on or not. If the flag is not on, the log is stored, and if the flag is on, the log is not stored.
However, this is not limiting, and old logs may be overwritten. For example, after storing logs from the "1" game to the "70000" game, the log of the "70001" game may be overwritten in the storage area in which the log of the "1" game is stored.

In addition, logs related to setting changes (described below) are stored until the number of setting changes reaches "256". When the number of setting changes reaches "256", storage thereafter is discontinued. However, this is not limited to the above, and old information may be overwritten. For example, after storing logs for setting changes "1" through "256", the log for the "257th" change may be overwritten in the memory area that stored the log for the "1st" change.

In addition, when storing the total number of plays or the cumulative number of operations of various operation switches (bet switch 40 described below, sub-input device (sub-buttons, cross key, etc.)), a memory area sufficient to store the number of operations is secured, and storage is possible up to the upper limit of the memory area, and when the upper limit of the memory area is reached, storage is terminated. For example, when storing the total number of plays, if a memory area of 3 bytes is used, storage is possible up to the total number of plays reaching the full 3 bytes (FFFFFF (H)). Then, when the total number of plays reaches the full 3 bytes, for example, an upper limit flag is used to store that the upper limit has been reached, and when the upper limit flag is on, the total number of plays is not updated.

By storing the log as described above, it is possible to obtain the log when the gaming machine 10 is removed from the market. By referring to this log, it is possible to know what games were played on the market and how the gaming machine 10 was handled in the hall. In addition, it is also possible to determine whether or not a part is reusable based on the total number of games played on the gaming machine 10 when it is removed from the market and the cumulative number of operations of the various operating switches.

Fig. 190 is a diagram showing the items, contents, and log update timing of the log stored for each game. Fig. 190 shows the types of logs recorded for each game, and the gaming machine 10 is configured to store the logs recorded for each game shown in Fig. 190 for "70,000" games. However, this is not limited to "70,000" games, and may be increased or decreased as appropriate depending on the storage capacity of the RWM 83.
In FIG. 190, the "number of coins in" corresponds to the specified number for the current game (it is not the cumulative value of multiple games). The "specified number" corresponds to the number of bets (number of coins inserted) at the start of the game (when the start switch 41 is operated). When the start switch 41 is operated, the number of coins bet for the current game is determined (this determined number corresponds to the specified number), and the main control board 50 transmits a start switch reception command and a specified number command, so the number of coins in is stored based on the command. In other words, the number of coins in can be called the "number of bets". For example, in a certain game, if the number of bets is "2" or "3", when the start switch 41 is operated with the number of bets "2", "2" is stored as the number of coins in the current game, but when the start switch 41 is operated with the number of bets "3", "3" is stored as the number of coins in the current game.

Additionally, the "number of coins out" corresponds to the number of coins paid out (awarded) in the current game (it is not a cumulative value over multiple games). After all reels 31 have stopped, the winning combination has been determined, and the number of coins to be paid out has been decided, a payout command is sent from the main control board 50. This payout command also includes information on the number of coins to be paid out. Therefore, the number of coins to be paid out in the current game is stored based on the information on the number of coins paid out in this payout command. Even in the case of a game in which no payout is made, information on the number of coins to be paid out of "0" is sent.
The log of the number of in coins is updated when the game starts (when the start switch acceptance command is received) or when the game ends.
In addition, the log of the number of coins out is updated at the end of the game (when a payout command is received) or at the start of the next game.
The timing at which these logs are stored depends on the specifications of the gaming machine 10.

"Winning information 1" corresponds to the performance group number transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80. In FIG. 1, when the role selection means 61 selects a role, the performance group number corresponding to the role selection result is selected by the performance group number selection means 64. This performance group number is then transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Under the current rules, from the viewpoint of security, the role selection result related to the minor role (specifically, the winning and replay condition device number shown in FIG. 139) is not transmitted from the main control means 50 to the sub-control board 80. For this reason, after the role selection is performed, the performance group number corresponding to the role selection result is selected and transmitted to the sub-control board 80. The sub-control board 80 can roughly grasp the role selection result based on the received performance group number, and can therefore determine (execute) the performance corresponding to the role selection result.

For example, when one of the push order bells is won, an effect group number indicating that one of the push order bells has been won is selected and transmitted to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives this effect group number, it knows that one of the push order bells has been won, but it does not know the correct push order. When the main control board 50 activates the instruction function during AT (to notify the correct push order), for example, it transmits a push order instruction number corresponding to the correct push order to the sub-control board 80. The sub-control board 80 is able to display an image of the correct push order based on the received push order instruction number.

"Winning number 2" corresponds to the reel condition device number. The reel condition device number, like the performance group number, is stored in a specified memory area of the RWM 53 on the main control board 50 side (see address "F0AA (H)" in FIG. 139, for example). The reel condition device number is set, for example, as "0" for non-reel win, "1" for 1BB win, "2" for RB win, "3" for MB win, and so on. When the game starts, the main control board 50 transmits the reel condition device number corresponding to the reel that will be activated in the current game to the sub-control board 80 as winning information 2. When the sub-control board 80 receives this reel condition device number (winning information 2), it stores it as a log.

The performance group number corresponding to winning number 1 and the accessory condition device number corresponding to winning number 2 are transmitted from the main control board 50 at the start of a game, so the sub-control board 80 stores these logs, for example, at the start of a game. Alternatively, the sub-control board 80 may be provided with a buffer for temporarily storing winning number 1 and winning number 2, and store them together with other logs at the end of a game.
In the above example, the winning number 1 is the performance group number and the winning number 2 is the role condition device number, but this is not limited to this. Any information based on the lottery (including the AT lottery) executed on the main control board 50 may be used.

In the case of three reels, the "push order" corresponds to information that can determine which of the six push orders, "left-center-right," "left-right-center," ..., and "right-center-left," is the push order. As shown in FIG. 190, the push order here is the push order actually operated by the player, and is not the push order instruction number (selected by the push order instruction number selection means 63 in FIG. 1).

When any of the stop switches 42 are operated (or any of the reels 31 stop), a stop acceptance command (information that can determine which stop switch 42 has been operated or which reel 31 will stop) is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, so the sub-control board 80 temporarily stores that information in a buffer, and when all of the stop switches 42 are operated (when all of the reels 31 stop), for example when the sub-control board 80 receives a stop acceptance command three times in the game, it converts it into push order data and stores it as a log. For example, "left, center, right" can be stored as "001 (B)", "left, right, center" as "010 (B)", ..., and "right, center, left" as "110 (B)". The push order is stored, for example, at the end of each game. However, it is not limited to this, and may also be stored at the time of the second stop when the push order is confirmed, or at the start of the next game.

In addition, the push order is stored for each game regardless of the value of the instruction monitor information (regardless of whether the instruction function is activated). This makes it possible to know, for example, which push order is most common when the instruction function is not activated. In addition, when the instruction function is activated, it is possible to determine whether the push order instructions are being followed, along with the number of outs.
As described above, during the AT, the main control board 50 transmits a push order instruction number to the sub-control board 80. The sub-control board 80 displays an image of the correct push order based on the received push order instruction number. The push order stored as a log is the push order that was actually performed (by the player), regardless of the push order instruction number. Therefore, during the AT, if the player performs a push order different from the instructed push order, the push order stored as a log will differ from the push order that corresponds to the push order instruction number.

Also, depending on the performance group number, it is possible to grasp what kind of push order was used. For example, when the performance group number X is selected, in a case where the probability of executing performance A is higher than the probability of executing performance B (including the case where the execution probability of performance A is 100% or the execution probability of performance B is 0%. Also, including the case where a performance other than performance A and performance B is selected), it is possible to grasp what kind of push order was used when the performance group number X is selected. Also, when the performance group number Y is selected, in a case where the probability of executing performance A is lower than the probability of executing performance B (including the case where the execution probability of performance A is 0% or the execution probability of performance B is 100%. Also, including the case where a performance other than performance A and performance B is selected), it is possible to grasp what kind of push order was used when the performance group number Y is selected.
In addition, although the performance group number is stored as a log, in this embodiment, the type of performance that was executed (whether or not performance A was executed, whether or not performance B was executed, etc.) is not stored. However, the executed performance may be stored as a log.
In this way, by collecting them from the market and checking the logs, it is possible to know what push order (operation mode) is likely to be performed when what performance group is selected, etc. Specifically, for example, when a minor role that is not a push order role (cherry role, watermelon role, rare minor role, etc.) is won, the performance group number corresponding to the winning of the minor role is selected, and the performance corresponding to the performance group number is executed, the player can know what push order (operation mode of the stop switch 42) was used to play the game.

The "instruction monitor information" is information indicating whether or not the instruction function has been activated on the main control board 50 side (whether or not the push order has been notified), and if the instruction function has been activated (instruction by the instruction monitor), for example, "1" is stored, and if the instruction function has not been activated (no instruction by the instruction monitor), for example, "0" is stored. At the start of each game (when the start switch 41 is operated), instruction monitor information is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, and the sub-control board 80 stores the instruction monitor information based on this information. However, the sub-control board 80 may temporarily store the instruction monitor information transmitted from the main control board 50 in a buffer, and store it in the RWM 83 when the game ends.
The "instruction monitor" corresponds to, for example, that shown in Fig. 39 (first embodiment). And, "instruction function is activated" corresponds to displaying any of the information (push order instruction information) shown in "A1" to "A6" in Fig. 39 when there are six push order options.
In addition, "instruction function not operating" corresponds to not displaying anything on the instruction monitor (lighting off), or displaying information other than information that can be used to determine the correct button press sequence.

Furthermore, the "instruction monitor information" is not limited to information on whether or not an instruction function has been activated, but may also store information on what type of operation has been instructed (reported).
For example, first, in the "Push Order AT" that notifies the correct push order, depending on the specifications of the slot machine 10, there may be three options (when there are three stop switches 42, only the first stop is notified), six options (when there are three stop switches 42, the first to third stops are notified), four options (when there are four stop switches 42, only the first stop is notified), or 24 options (when there are four stop switches 42, the first to fourth stops are notified), and in this case, information relating to the notified correct push order (operation mode) may be stored as a log.
Secondly, there is a "push position (eye push) AT" which notifies the push position (information related to the push pattern, or the operation timing of the stop switch) for at least one reel 31, and in this case, information related to the notified push position (operation mode) is stored as a log.
A third example is "push order + push position AT," which notifies the correct push order and the push position for at least one reel 31. In this case, information relating to the notified correct push order and the notified push position for at least one reel 31 is stored as a log.
From the above, "instruction monitor information" is,
a) Information on whether the instruction function has been activated, b) Information concerning the correct button press sequence (operation mode) that has been notified, c) Information concerning the button press positions that have been notified (operation mode), and d) Information concerning the correct button press sequence and button press positions (operation mode) that have been notified.
In addition, in the example of Figure 194 described later, a one-bit memory area is allocated for storing information on whether or not an instruction function has been activated as instruction monitor information, but the memory area (number of bits) for storing instruction monitor information differs depending on the type of information related to the operation mode to be stored.

In addition, the instruction monitor information is stored for each game regardless of whether the game is in the AT or not. Therefore, when the game is not in the AT, a command indicating that the instruction function is not activated is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 for each game, and the sub-control board 80 stores, for example, "0" indicating that the instruction function is not activated.
In addition, even if the AT is in progress, if the instruction function is not activated in the current game, such as a game in which the push order bell or push order replay has not been won, a command indicating that the instruction function is not activated is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, and the sub-control board 80 stores, for example, "0", indicating that the instruction function is not activated.

In this embodiment, only the presence/absence of instructions is stored as the instruction monitor information, but this is not limiting, and the push order instruction number may also be stored as the instruction monitor information. The push order instruction number may be, for example, "0" (no push order instruction), "1" (push order "left, center, right"), ..., "6" (push order "right, center, left"), and transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 when the game starts, etc. If the push order instruction information is stored as a log, it can be compared with the actual push order described above to determine whether the stop switch 42 was operated as instructed.

In this embodiment, the "stop acceptance position" corresponds to the symbol number at the reference position at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. The stop acceptance position is stored for each reel 31. The "reference position" may be a position on an active line or a position other than an active line.
Furthermore, the reference position may be, for example, the middle, lower, or upper row of the display window 18. For example, if the reference position is the middle row, and the number "0" symbol on the left reel 31 is located in the middle row at the moment the left stop switch 42 is operated, the value "0" is stored as the stop acceptance position of the first reel 31.
In the description of this embodiment, the first reel 31 corresponds to the left reel 31, the second reel 31 corresponds to the center reel 31, and the third reel 31 corresponds to the right reel 31.

The moment the left, center, or right stop switch 42 is operated, a command at the time of stop acceptance (actually, the planned stop position (symbol number) of the reel 31 and the number of slip frames) is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, and this information is stored in a buffer for temporary storage of the stop acceptance position. A buffer for temporary storage of the command at the time of stop acceptance is provided for each reel 31 (three buffers in the case of three reels). Then, when all the reels 31 have stopped (when the game ends), the stop acceptance position (symbol number) is calculated for each reel 31 based on the planned stop position (symbol number) and the number of slip frames in the command at the time of stop acceptance, and the calculated stop acceptance position (symbol number) is stored.
In addition, the buffer for temporarily storing commands when a stop is accepted is not cleared when the game ends, but is overwritten the next time the game is played.

The number of slip frames corresponds to the number of symbols that move from the symbol at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated to the symbol at the moment the reel stops. For example, in FIG. 115, when the left reel 31 stops, if the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the No. 1 "watermelon" symbol is located at the top row (active line) and then the No. 4 "bell A" stops at the top row, the number of slip frames is "3".
As described above, the number of sliding frames is included in the information of the command sent from the main control board 50 when a stop is accepted.
In the above, an example has been shown in which the intended stop position (symbol number) of the reel 31 and the number of slipping frames are transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 as a command at the time of stop acceptance. However, this is not limiting, and the command at the time of stop acceptance may include the stop acceptance position (symbol number) and the number of slipping frames, making it unnecessary to calculate the stop acceptance position (symbol number).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the stop acceptance position is stored as a log, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the actual stop position may be stored as a log. If the command transmitted at the time of the stop acceptance includes information on the planned stop position (symbol number) of the reel 31, the planned stop position may be stored as the stop position.
In addition, if the command at the time of stop acceptance includes the stop acceptance position (pattern number) and the number of sliding frames but does not include the stop position, the stop position (pattern number) can be calculated and stored based on the received stop acceptance position (pattern number) and number of sliding frames.

Furthermore, if the above-mentioned effect group number and stop acceptance position are stored as a log, when a certain effect group number is selected, the player can know the position aimed at by operating the stop switch 42. Furthermore, if the type of effect to be executed and the stop acceptance position are stored as a log together with or instead of the effect group number, the player can know the position aimed at by operating the stop switch 42 when a certain effect is executed.
Specifically, when an effect group number corresponding to, for example, a cherry winning combination among the minor combinations is selected or when an effect corresponding to a cherry winning combination is executed, the player can know whether or not the stop switch 42 is being operated to aim at a cherry symbol, and when multiple cherry symbols are arranged on one reel 31, which cherry symbol the player is aiming at by operating the stop switch 42. To give a specific example, in FIG. 2, cherry symbols are arranged at numbers 2, 7, and 17 on the left reel 31, and it becomes possible to know which cherry symbol of the symbol number the player is aiming at by operating the stop switch 42.

Similarly, when an effect group number corresponding to, for example, a win of a watermelon role among the minor roles is selected or when an effect corresponding to a win of a watermelon role is executed, the player can know whether or not he is operating the stop switch 42 aiming at a watermelon symbol, and when multiple watermelon symbols are arranged on one reel 31, he can know which symbol number of the watermelon symbol he is operating the stop switch 42 aiming at.
Similarly, when an effect group number corresponding to the winning of the push order bell role is selected during non-AT or when an effect corresponding to the winning of the push order bell role is executed (when the winning of the bell is announced but the correct push order is not announced), the player can know which symbol is aimed at by operating the stop switch 42. In particular, the bell symbol is often arranged with "PB=1", but even with such a symbol arrangement, it is possible to know whether the stop switch 42 is aimed at a specific position or not.

In this embodiment, the "function state" is information indicating the operation state of SB, RB, and CB. For example, SB is assigned as "01(B)", RB is assigned as "10(B)", and CB is assigned as "11(B)", and the corresponding values are stored.
In addition, the "linked role state" is different from the above-mentioned role state, and is information indicating the operating state of 1BB or 2BB (also called "MB"). Note that "linked role" refers to a "continuous role", which corresponds to 1BB or 2BB in this embodiment. When the operating state is either 1BB or 2BB, "1" is stored, and otherwise "0" is stored.
In addition, the reels and consecutive reels are not limited to those mentioned above.
When a game starts, main operation status information is transmitted from the main control board 50. The main operation status information includes information on the operation status of the reels and information on the operation status of consecutive reels. The sub-control board 80 stores the reels status and consecutive reels status based on this command. The reels status and consecutive reels status may be stored as a log when the main operation status information is received (when a game starts), or the main operation status information received when a game starts may be temporarily stored in a buffer and stored as a log when a game ends.

The "anomaly detection information" is as follows:
When the main control board 50 detects the operation of the start switch 41, it transmits a start switch acceptance command to the sub-control board 80. In addition, when the main control board 50 performs a role selection by the role selection means 61 and determines the performance group number and the role condition device number, it transmits winning information (winning information 1 and winning information 2) to the sub-control board 80.
Here, the sub-control board 80 measures the time from receiving the start switch acceptance command to receiving the winning information. The time is measured, for example, by counting the number of interrupt processes. When the number of interrupt processes is counted to measure the time, if the number of interrupts exceeds a predetermined threshold, it is determined to be abnormal, and the abnormality detection information is set to "1". On the other hand, if it is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold, it is determined to be normal, and the abnormality detection information is set to "0". This abnormality detection information can be used as a guide to whether or not cheating has occurred. The abnormality detection information may be stored when the start switch acceptance command and winning information are received, or the count value of the number of interrupts described above may be stored in a buffer, and the abnormality detection information may be generated and stored when the game ends.

The "RT number" corresponds to the current RT state. The RT number is the RT state number stored, for example, at address "F009(H)" in Fig. 134. A command related to the main RT information is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, and the RT number is stored as a log based on the main RT information sent.
The "product unique number" is information required for each product number. Examples of the product unique number include information related to the main game state and ART, but a detailed description will be omitted.

As described above, by storing a predetermined log in the game-by-game RWM 83, it is possible to know what operations have been performed in the market when the gaming machine 10 is collected from the market.
For example, by knowing the stop acceptance position of the reel 31, it becomes possible to grasp at what timing the player operated the stop switch 42.
It will also be possible to ascertain whether or not there is any fraud in the market.
Furthermore, by knowing the actual push order and the stop acceptance position of the reel 31, it becomes possible to understand in what manner (pushing order and operation timing) the player operated the stop switch 42.

Furthermore, it is possible to know the relationship between the instruction monitor information, the actual push order, and the stop acceptance position of the reel 31. For example, in a game in which the push order is not notified by the instruction monitor, it becomes possible for the player to know whether the timing of the operation of the stop switch 42 is arbitrary or whether the stop switch 42 is operated at a fixed timing.
Furthermore, in a game in which the push order is notified by the instruction monitor, the player can ascertain whether the timing of operation of the stop switch 42 is arbitrary, or whether the stop switch 42 is operated at a fixed timing even when the push order is notified by the instruction monitor.

Furthermore, if the instruction monitor information is not merely stored as to whether or not an instruction has been given, but is instead stored as to the notified information on the operation mode (information on the order in which to press and/or information on the position at which to press) as described above, then by comparing this with the actual operation mode of the stop switch 42, it becomes possible to grasp whether the stop switch 42 is being operated in accordance with the notified information on the operation mode, and further the degree of agreement between the notified information on the operation mode and the actual operation mode.
Furthermore, by comparing the winning information 1 (effect group number) with the push order and the stop acceptance position, it is possible to grasp the relationship between the selected effect group number (and further the executed effect) and the push order and the stop acceptance position. For example, it is possible to grasp that when one effect group number is selected (when one effect is output), the frequency of pushing in the order is high, and when another effect group number is selected (when another effect is output), the frequency of pushing in an irregular manner (for example, pushing in the middle) is high.
Alternatively, it can be understood that when one performance group number is selected (when one performance is output), the stop acceptance position is frequently set to arbitrary, and when another performance group number is selected (when another performance is output), the stop acceptance position is frequently set to a predetermined position.

The above is the log that is stored for each game.
In contrast, as a log that is stored at any time,
(1) Information on balls paid out during setting changes (Fig. 191)
(2) Information regarding settings (FIG. 192(a))
(3) Information regarding power outage (FIG. 192(b))
(4) Device-related information (FIG. 193(a))
(5) Event information (FIG. 193(b))
Examples include:
However, this is merely an example and the logs are not limited to these.

FIG. 191 is a diagram showing the ball output information between setting changes. The ball output information between setting changes is stored to know, for example, how many times the game with the special feature is performed and how many balls are paid out when the setting value is what. The ball output information (log) shown in FIG. 191 indicates the type of ball output information (log) stored at the current setting value. As shown in FIG. 196(a), the ball output information (log) at the setting value is stored until the setting is changed "256" times. Note that "256" times is an example, and the number of setting changes to be stored is arbitrary, and can be increased or decreased as appropriate according to the storage capacity.
In FIG. 191, the number in (1), the number out (1), the number in (2), and the number out (2) all refer to the cumulative number of sheets from when the setting value was set to the setting value until the setting was changed.
For example, assume that a setting value of 3 is changed to a setting value of 4, then a setting change is made from setting value 4 to setting value 3, and then a setting change is made from setting value 3 to setting value 4.
In this case,
a) Setting value before change 3, setting value after change 4: number of in... sheets, number of out... sheets b) Setting value before change 4, setting value after change 3: number of in... sheets, number of out... sheets c) Setting value before change 3, setting value after change 4: number of in... sheets, number of out... sheets It is stored as follows.
That is, the number of IN sheets and the number of OUT sheets at the setting value 4 in the above a) and the number of IN sheets and the number of OUT sheets at the setting value 4 in the above c) are stored separately.

In addition, when re-entering the same setting value, for example, the previous setting value may be setting value 3, and by operating setting change switch 153 when changing the setting, the setting value may change to setting value 3 → setting value 4 → setting value 5 → setting value 6 → setting value 1 → setting value 2 → setting value 3, and then the setting value may be confirmed.
In this case, a method of continuously storing the in number and the out number by maintaining the set value before and after the change;
a) Pre-change setting value: O, post-change setting value: 3: in number: . . . sheets, out number: . . . sheets b) Pre-change setting value: 3, post-change setting value: 3: in number: . . . sheets, out number: . . . sheets Either method may be used.
However, if a log is stored as in the latter case, it is possible to know that the same setting value has been re-entered.

Furthermore, when the setting value has not been changed but the power is turned on with the reset switch 153 (setting change (reset) switch 153) turned on (hereinafter, such a situation will be referred to as a "reset start"), the post-change setting value will be the pre-change setting value plus "10". In this way, it will be possible to determine whether or not a reset start has been performed by looking at the log. Specifically, when a reset start is performed with a setting value of "3", "13" is stored as the post-change setting value. When a reset start is performed, a command indicating that the reset switch is on is sent, and the presence or absence of a reset start is determined based on this command.
The value to be added is not limited to "10", but may be any value that exceeds the maximum setting value 6 when added to the minimum setting value 1.
Also, at the time of reset start, it is possible to assume that the set values have not been changed, maintain the pre-change set values and post-change set values as they are, and continue updating the in-count and out-count.

Also, instead of memorizing the number of in and out sheets each time you change the settings, for example,
The cumulative in and out numbers may be stored for each setting value, such as: Setting value 1: cumulative in number... sheets, cumulative out number... sheets Setting value 2: cumulative in number... sheets, cumulative out number... sheets Setting value 3: cumulative in number... sheets, cumulative out number... sheets Setting value 4: cumulative in number... sheets, cumulative out number... sheets Setting value 5: cumulative in number... sheets, cumulative out number... sheets Setting value 6: cumulative in number... sheets, cumulative out number... sheets Alternatively, in addition to storing the in number and out number for the setting value each time the setting is changed, it is also possible to store the cumulative in number and out number for each setting value.
By storing ball information (log) between setting changes in this way, it is possible to check how many coins were in and how many coins were out between setting changes after recovering the gaming machine 10. Note that the setting value can be checked by checking information about the setting (pre-change setting value, post-change setting value) described later, and linking the setting value with the number of coins in and the number of coins out.

In this way, the in number is updated every time a game is played, and the out number is updated every time a payout is made. However, in a game where no payout is made, a command for the payout number of "0" is sent, so a process of adding "0" to the out number may be executed.
In addition, depending on the counting method when the replay is stopped and when an automatic bet is made, the counting may be made as follows.
When the replay is paused,
a) The number of out coins for the game in which the replay is stopped is set to "0", and the number of in coins for the next game (a game in which an automatic bet is placed based on the stopped display of the replay) is set to "0",
b) A game is played with a set number (number of bets) of "N", the number of "out" coins for the game in which the replay is stopped is set to "N", and the number of "in" coins for the next game (a game in which an automatic bet is placed based on the stopped replay display) is set to "N".

In the above case of b),
The specified number (number of bets) and the number of out coins in the game for which the replay is stopped and displayed, as well as the number of in coins for the next game, "N", will indicate either "1", "2" or "3" (same below).
Furthermore, the specified number (number of bets) "N" in the game in which the replay is stopped and displayed, the number of out coins "N" in that game, and the number of in coins "N" for the next game will all be the same number.
Specifically, when a game is played with the specified number "1" and the replay is stopped and displayed, the number of "out" coins for that game becomes "1", and the number of "in" coins for the next game becomes "1".
Similarly, when a game is played with the specified number "2" and the replay is stopped and displayed, the number of "out" coins for that game will be "2", and the number of "in" coins for the next game will be "2".
Similarly, when a game is played with the specified number "3" and the replay is stopped and displayed, the number of "out" coins for that game becomes "3", and the number of "in" coins for the next game becomes "3".

"Number of in sheets (1)" and "Number of out sheets (1)" correspond to the number of in sheets and the number of out sheets when the above method a) is adopted.
In contrast, "Number of in sheets (2)" and "Number of out sheets (2)" correspond to the number of in sheets and the number of out sheets when the above method b) is adopted.
In this case, any one of the counting methods may be used to store the in number and the out number. That is, it is sufficient to store either the in number (1) and the out number (1), or the in number (2) and the out number (2).
On the other hand, if there is sufficient memory area, it is also possible to provide memory areas for the number of in sheets (1), the number of out sheets (1), the number of in sheets (2), and the number of out sheets (2) and store each of them.
In addition, when a replay is stopped during operation of a continuous reel or while a reel is in operation, the number of outs for the game in which the replay is stopped and the number of bets for the next game may be set to "0", for example.

When the replay is stopped when all reels 31 have stopped, replay flag information is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80. For example, in a game in which the replay is stopped, replay flag information "1" is sent, and in a game in which the replay is not stopped, replay flag information "0" is sent. When the sub-control board 80 receives replay flag information, it temporarily stores this information. Also, in a game in which the replay is stopped, a payout command is sent indicating that the payout number is "0".

For this reason, in a game in which a specified number "N" is played and the replay is stopped and displayed, based on the payout command (payout number "0") and the replay flag information "1", if the number of outs is (1), the number of outs will be set to "0", and if the number of outs is (2), the number of outs will be set to "N".
The start switch acceptance command includes specified number information (information on the number of bets at the start of a game).
Then, in the next game, when a start switch acceptance command is received, based on the specified number information (for example, the specified number "3") and the replay flag information ("0" or "1") temporarily stored in the previous game, if the number of in coins is (1), the number of in coins is set to "0", and if the number of in coins is (2), the number of in coins is set to "N" (for example, "3").

The "number of medals paid out when RB is activated" corresponds to the total number of medals paid out in a game in which the RB, which is a consecutive role, is activated. If the current game is a game in which RB is activated and a payout has been made, the number of medals paid out is added (updated) to the "number of medals paid out when RB is activated."
The "number of coins paid out when a special feature is activated" corresponds to the total number of coins paid out in a game in which any special feature (SB, RB, CB) is activated. If the current game is played when SB, RB, or CB is activated and a payout has been made, the number of coins paid out is added (updated) to the "number of coins paid out when a special feature is activated."
In addition, when a game is played with a set number "N" and the replay is displayed stopped when the device is activated, the number of outs may be counted as "0" (however, this is not limited to the above, and the number of outs may be counted as "N").

The "number of games played when SB is activated" corresponds to the cumulative number of games played when SB is activated (the number of times SB games are executed). Every time an SB game (one game) is executed, the "number of games played when SB is activated" is updated.
The "number of games played when a single RB is activated" corresponds to the cumulative number of games played when the RB is activated (number of games played when the RB is activated). For example, when one RB game is played and five games are played, "5" is added to the "number of games played when a single RB is activated".
The "number of games played when a single CB is activated" corresponds to the cumulative number of games played when the CB is activated (the number of games played in the CB game). Every time a single CB game (one game) is played, the "number of games played when a single CB is activated" is updated.
The "number of general games during BB operation" corresponds to the total number of general games played during a BB game, when the BB game is composed of a general game and a RB game. For example, when 20 general games are played during one BB game, "20" is added to the BB game.

The "number of RB operated games when BB is activated" corresponds to the number of times (total number) that the RB game is played during the BB game when the BB game consists of the general game and the RB game as described above.
The "number of general games played during MB operation" corresponds to the number (total number) of general games played during an MB game, when the MB game consists of a general game and a CB game.
The "number of CB operation games during MB operation" corresponds to the number of times (total number) that the CB game is played during the MB game, when the MB game consists of a general game and a CB game.
The "number of games with other features activated" corresponds to the number of games in which a unique feature is activated, for example, if the gaming machine is provided with such a feature.
In addition, in the case where the gaming machine is not provided with a corresponding one of the above-mentioned roles (SB, RB, CB), the number of outs or number of plays for that role will not be stored.
By storing such ball payout information (log) between setting changes, it is possible to check the number of games in which various roles (RB, SB, CB) were activated and the number of games in which various consecutive roles (1BB, 2BB) were activated between setting changes after playing the gaming machine 10. Note that the setting value can be checked by checking the setting information (pre-change setting value, post-change setting value) described later, and linking the setting value with the number of games in which various roles (RB, SB, CB) and various consecutive roles (1BB, 2BB) were activated.

FIG. 192 is a diagram showing information regarding settings and information regarding power outages.
In the figure, "(a) Information regarding settings" includes the number of games played at the time of the setting change, the setting value before the change, and the setting value after the change. For example, as described above, these can store "256" setting changes. When the number of setting changes reaches "256," there are two methods: either to stop storing logs thereafter, or to delete the oldest log and store a new log. In the latter case, specifically, after storing the "1" through "256" changes, for the "257" change, the "257" log is stored (overwritten) in the storage area for the "1" log.
The "number of games played when the setting is changed" corresponds to the cumulative number of games played since the setting was changed to the current setting. Therefore, the number of games played when the setting is changed is stored for each game unless the upper limit has been reached.
When the setting change is completed, a setting change end command is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, and when this command is received, the information on the pre-change setting value and the post-change setting value is updated. The setting change end command is sent to the sub-control board 80 by the processing of steps S246 and S247 in FIG.
Furthermore, when a reset start is executed as described above, the set value obtained by adding "10" to the previous set value is stored as the changed set value.

Also, in the figure, in "(b) Information regarding power outage,""Number of games played when power is off" stores the number of games played (total number of games played, cumulative number of games played) from when the power is turned on until the power is turned off.
for example,
Number of power outages "1": Number of games "N1"
Number of power outages "2": Number of games "N2" (cumulative value including "N1")
Number of power outages "3": Number of games "N3" (cumulative value including "N2")
:
It is memorized like this.
However, this is not limiting, and each time the power is turned on, the number of games that have been played before the power is turned off may be stored.
for example,
Number of power outages "1": Number of games "N1"
Number of power outages "2": Number of games "N2" (not including "N1")
Number of power outages "3": Number of games "N3" (not including "N1" and "N2")
:
Examples of things to remember include:
In other words, the information may be stored in any manner as long as it allows the number of games played from when the power was turned on until the power was turned off to be confirmed after the gaming machine 10 is collected.

Moreover, the "power-off interval time" refers to the time from when the power is turned on until the power is turned off (more precisely, a value corresponding to the time).
Here, the "frame processing" will be described.
The sub-control board (sub-main control board) 80 executes frame processing (also referred to as "processing every 16 ms", "one frame processing", or "one frame processing"; the same applies below) after startup (after the main loop of the sub-control board 80). The processing executed by the sub-control board 80 includes frame processing performed once every 16 ms and one command processing performed within 16 ms. The frame processing includes monitoring whether the image display device 23 is operating normally, monitoring whether the sound source amplifier of the speaker 22 is operating normally, measuring the power-on time, storing control commands to be sent to the sub-sub control board (image control board) in a command buffer, generating level data and start-up data based on the operation of the performance button and cross key, measuring error time and drive time of the reel 31, etc.

By counting the number of frame processes from when the power is turned on until when the power is turned off, it is possible to know an estimate of the time from when the power is turned on until when the power is turned off. For example, a process of adding "1" to the value in the memory area each time a frame process is performed can be performed.
for example,
Number of power outages "1": Number of frame processes "x1"
Number of power outages "2": Number of frame processes "x2" (cumulative value including the above "x1")
Number of power outages "3": Number of frame processes "x3" (cumulative value including the above "x2")
:
It is memorized like this.
For example, when the power-on time is "15" hours, the number of frame processes is "3,375,000".
As for the number of power outages, the number of games played, and the number of frame processes, in the same manner as the setting change, for example, it is possible to store a log of "256" power outages.
When the number of power outages reaches "256", there are two methods: either stop storing subsequent logs, or delete the oldest log and store a new log. In the latter case, specifically, after storing the "1" through "256" power outages, the "257" log is stored (overwritten) in the storage area for the "1" log.

As described above, by storing the history of the setting values, it is possible to know which setting values are most commonly used in the market.
It is also possible to grasp the operating rate (total number of games played) for each setting value.
Furthermore, by knowing the information regarding the power outage, it is possible to grasp the continuous power-on time. By grasping the continuous power-on time, it is possible to use the information to design the durability required for electronic components such as various control boards and power supply units. Furthermore, by grasping the continuous power-on time, it is possible to grasp whether or not electronic component units such as various control boards and power supply units can be reused.

FIG. 193 is a diagram showing device-related information and event information.
In the figure, in "(a) Device Information,""Power-on Time (minutes)" corresponds to the time the power has been on. As described above, the sub-control board 80 executes frame processing after startup, so it counts the number of times the processing has been performed and stores the value converted to "minutes."
Since frame processing is performed every 16 ms as described above, the number of frame processing times "3750" corresponds to one minute (60000 ms). Therefore, for example, "1" is added to the first storage area for each frame processing, and the number of frame processing times itself is stored in the first storage area. Then, when the value stored in the first storage area reaches "3750", "1" is added to the second storage area. As a result, the value converted to minutes is stored in the second storage area. Also, when the value of the first storage area reaches "3750" and "1" is added to the second storage area, the first storage area is cleared (set to "0"). Then, "1" is added to the first storage area again for each frame processing.

The "total number of plays" corresponds to the total number of plays since the gaming machine 10 was shipped. For example, when play begins, winning information (winning information 1 (performance group number) and winning information 2 (gimmick condition device number)) is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, and "1" is added each time a performance group number is received. However, this is not limited to the above, and a method of adding "1" each time a start switch reception command or the like is received is also possible. As mentioned above, one example is to provide a 3-byte memory area and count until the count value reaches the full 3 bytes.

The "selector counter" corresponds to the number of times the medal has been groomed. When the passage sensor 46 detects a medal, the main control board 50 transmits a groom command to the sub-control board 80. Each time the sub-control board 80 receives a groom command, it adds "1" to the selector counter.
The passage sensor 46 is a sensor located in a position where it can detect the insertion of a medal when it is inserted, whether or not a medal flow path is formed by the blocker 45. On the other hand, the insertion sensor 44 (44a, 44b) is a sensor located in a position where it cannot detect the insertion of a medal when a medal flow path is not formed by the blocker 45, but is located in a position where it can detect the insertion of a medal when a medal flow path is formed (a sensor located downstream of the passage sensor 46).

In this way, by counting the number of detections of the passage sensor 46, it is possible to count the insertion of medals regardless of the state of the blocker 45, compared to the case where the number of detections of the insertion sensor 44 is counted, so that the deterioration degree of the selector can be grasped after the gaming machine 10 is collected. Based on this information, it is possible to determine whether or not to reuse the passage sensor 46 or the insertion sensor 44. Note that other sensors may be used as long as they are provided on the selector instead of the passage sensor 46. For example, a configuration may be used in which the number of detections of the insertion sensor 44 (at least one of 44a and 44b) is counted. This is because when the insertion sensor 44 detects a medal, it is clear that the passage sensor 46, which is upstream of the insertion sensor 44, also detects a medal. In this way, it is possible to grasp the deterioration degree of the selector after the gaming machine 10 is collected.

The "hopper motor drive time" is stored as the sum of the medal payout time and the settlement time. However, this is not limited to this, and the drive time of the hopper motor 36 itself may be measured and stored.
When actual medals are being paid out, the main control board 50 sets (turns on) a payout flag. For example, after proceeding to step S398 in FIG. 49, the payout flag is turned on until the result of step S401 becomes "No".
Similarly, when settlement is in progress, the main control board 50 sets (turns on) the settlement in progress flag until the settlement process is completed (until the number of credits becomes "0").

Then, the main control board 50 sends to the sub-control board 80 a command indicating that the payout flag has changed from off to on, and a command indicating that the payout flag has changed from on to off. The sub-control board 80 counts and stores the number of frame processes during the period in which the payout flag is on. The storage area in which this is stored is a separate storage area from the "hopper motor drive time". Then, when the number of frame processes reaches "3750", "1" is added to the storage area for "hopper motor drive time". As a result, "1" is added to the "hopper motor drive time" per minute (60,000 ms).
The same applies to the settlement flag.
A command indicating that the settlement in progress flag has been changed from off to on and a command indicating that the settlement in progress flag has been changed from on to off are transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80. The sub-control board 80 stores the number of frame processes during the period in which the settlement in progress flag was on, in the same manner as described above.

The "sub-input counter" corresponds to the cumulative number of times the sub-input device is pressed.
Here, the "sub-input device" corresponds to, for example, first, the push button shown in the fourth embodiment, or the operation buttons 24A and 24B (FIG. 121) shown in the seventh embodiment. These buttons may also be called "chance buttons,""effectbuttons," or "decision buttons."
Also, the "sub-input device" corresponds to, for example, a cross key (also called a "selection button") drawn to the left of the operation button 24A in FIG.
The push button is a switch that is operated when developing a performance, and is also used as a switch that is operated when confirming an object selected on a menu screen, etc.
The cross key is a switch that is operated to move the cursor position on a menu screen or the like.
Hereinafter, these buttons, keys, switches, etc. will be collectively referred to as the "sub-input device."

During a game, as shown in the fourth embodiment (FIGS. 77 to 82) and the seventh embodiment (FIGS. 122 to 125), an effect prompting the user to operate the sub-input device may be output. As shown in FIG. 77, when the sub-input device is not valid (for example, when the reel 31 is spinning, when an error screen is displayed, or after the effect prompting the user to operate the sub-input device has ended), the operation is invalid even if the user operates the sub-input device.
However, the sub-input device is electrically connected to the sub-control board 80, and when the gaming machine 10 is powered on and in game standby or during game play, it is possible to detect that the sub-input device has been operated. Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the sub-input device is enabled or disabled, when an operation is detected, the number of operations is counted. Whether or not the sub-input device has been operated is determined when the rise data of the sub-input device becomes "1" (on), and "1" is added to the number of operations. The cumulative number of operations of the sub-input device is then stored. The rise of the sub-input device is detected by frame processing executed by the sub-control board 80.

In addition, since the number of operations is counted based on the rising edge data and not on the level data of the sub-input device, even if the sub-input device is pressed and held, it is counted as "+1".
Also, the number of operations may be stored only when the sub-input device is valid, or the number of operations may be stored separately for each sub-input device (for example, separately for the push button and the cross key).

The bet switch count corresponds to the number of times the bet switch 40 (the 1 bet switch 40a and the 3 bet switch 40b) is operated under a condition in which the operation of the bet switch 40 is valid.
When the bet switch 40 is operated under a condition in which the operation of the bet switch 40 is valid (for example, when the determination is "Yes" in step S2881 in FIG. 396), an input command based on the operation is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives this input command, it adds "1" to the bet switch count.

Therefore, for example, when the current number of bets is "0", if the 3 bet switch 40b is operated, an input command is sent to the sub-control board 80 and the bet switch count is updated. On the other hand, when the current number of bets is "3", if the 3 bet switch 40b is operated, an input command is not sent to the sub-control board 80 and the bet switch count is not updated.
In addition, even if any of the bet switches 40 is operated when the replay is stopped and a bet is automatically placed, the input command is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80, and the number of bet switches is not updated.

As with the sub-input device, the number of operations of the bet switch 40 may be counted regardless of whether the operation is valid or not. The main control board 50 is configured to be able to detect whether the bet switch 40 has been operated regardless of whether the bet switch 40 is valid or not. Therefore, when the main control board 50 detects the operation of the bet switch 40, it transmits a bet switch operation command to the sub-control board 80, and when the sub-control board 80 receives the bet switch operation command, it adds "1" to the number of bet switches. In other words, the number of bet switches may be updated even if the bet switch 40 is operated during a period when the operation of the bet switch 40 is invalid, such as when the reels 31 are spinning or an error screen is displayed.

The "setting key input counter" corresponds to the number of times the setting key switch 152 has been turned on/off. In this embodiment, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on and then turned off (when the falling edge data of the setting key switch becomes "1" (ON)), "1" is added to the setting key input counter. When the setting key switch 152 is turned off, a command related to the falling edge data of the setting key switch 152 is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80. This command is detected by frame processing in the sub-control board 80. The falling edge data of the setting key switch turns on when the setting change process is completed, as well as when the setting confirmation is completed.
Since the setting change is executed by turning on the setting key switch 152 and turning on the power, the rising edge data of the setting key switch cannot be detected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the number of times the setting key switch 152 has been operated can be correctly detected by detecting the falling edge data of the setting key switch.
In addition, the setting key input counter is configured to add "1" when the falling data of the setting key switch becomes "1", but it is not limited to this and may be configured to add "1" when the rising data of the setting key switch becomes "1".

The "reset input counter" corresponds to the number of times the reset switch 153 (setting change (reset) switch 153) has been turned on/off. In this embodiment, when the rising data of the reset switch 153 becomes "1" (on), "1" is added to the reset input counter. A command related to the rising data of the reset switch 153 is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 and detected by frame processing.
If a recoverable error (hopper empty (error with no medals), door open error (when the front door is open), medal jam error, etc.) occurs and the cause of the error is removed, and then the reset switch 153 is operated, a determination is made as to whether a recoverable error has occurred (whether the cause of the error has been removed), and if it is determined that a recoverable error has not occurred, the state before the recoverable error occurred is restored. In this way, the reset switch 153 is operated when recovering from a recoverable error. It is also operated at the time of a reset start, as described above. Furthermore, when it is used as a setting change switch, it is also operated when selecting a setting value in setting change mode.
The reset input counter is configured to increment "1" when the rising data of the reset switch 153 becomes "1", but is not limited to this and may be configured to increment "1" when the falling data of the reset switch 153 becomes "1".

When the rising data of the reset switch 153 becomes "1", the reset input counter is updated, so that even if the reset switch 153 is operated under a situation where a recoverable error has not occurred (for example, when the reel 31 is rotating or when a payout process is being executed), the reset input counter is updated.
Also, at the time of a reset start, the power is turned on with the reset switch 153 turned on, so the rising data of the reset switch 153 does not become "1" (on). That is, at the time of a reset start, the reset input counter is not updated. In other words, even if the falling data of the reset switch 153 becomes "1" (on), the reset input counter is not updated.
Furthermore, for example, when an irrecoverable error occurs, interrupt processing is prohibited, so that a command cannot be sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80. Therefore, even if the reset switch 153 is operated during an irrecoverable error, the value of the reset input counter is not updated. Here, an example is given of a situation in which a command cannot be sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 when an irrecoverable error occurs, but there may be other situations (for example, immediately after the power is turned on) in which a command cannot be sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80. In this way, in a situation in which a command cannot be sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, even if the reset switch 153 is operated, the value of the reset input counter is not updated.
As described above, the reset input counter may be configured to increment "1" when the falling data of the reset switch 153 becomes "1". In this case, the reset input counter can be incremented by "1" even at the time of reset start.

The "drive time for each volume level" corresponds to the time that indicates how much the speaker 22 is driven when a certain volume is set. Here, "volume" can refer to the volume in administrator mode and the volume in player mode, as shown in FIG. 163, but here it refers to the volume in player mode.

It is also possible to actually count the drive time (number of frame processes) of the speaker 22 and store the original drive time, but in this embodiment, to simplify processing, the time (unit: minutes) from power-on to power-off is measured. As described above, first, the number of frame processes is counted and stored. The first storage area in which it is stored is a separate storage area from the "drive time per volume level". Then, when the frame process count value reaches "3750", "1" is added to the storage area (second storage area) for the "drive time per volume level". As a result, "1" is added per minute (60,000 ms) to the "drive time per volume level (second storage area)".

The "drive time for each volume level" is provided for each volume. For example, if the volume levels are from volume "1" to volume "N",
Operating time at volume "1" (frames processed in minutes)
Operating time at volume "2" (frames processed in minutes)
:
Operating time at volume "N" (frames processed in minutes)
In this way, the operating time (power-on time) is stored for each volume.

By storing information about the devices as described above, it becomes possible to grasp the degree of deterioration and durability of the selector sensor and the hopper motor after collecting the gaming machine 10. Furthermore, based on this information, it becomes possible to determine whether or not these components can be reused.
In addition, by knowing the cumulative number of operations of the sub-input device, the bet switch 40, the setting key switch 152, and the reset switch 153, it becomes possible to grasp the deterioration and durability of these operating means. Furthermore, it becomes possible to judge whether or not to reuse them depending on the frequency of use.
Furthermore, by knowing the drive time for each volume level, it is possible to know which volume is used most and which is used least, which can be useful in the design of future gaming machines.

The event information shown in Fig. 193(b) stores the date and time (date and time) when the power is turned on, when the power is turned off, when the settings are changed, when the settings are confirmed, and when the reset start is performed. The date and time when the event occurs is stored using the system time provided in the sub-control board 80. The number of times to be stored is arbitrary, but for example, it is possible to store logs for "256" times, similar to the setting change described above.
When the number of event occurrences reaches "256", there are two methods: either stop storing subsequent logs, or delete the oldest log and store a new log. In the latter case, specifically, after storing the "1" through "256" events, the "257" event is stored (overwritten) in the storage area for the "1" event log.
The "date and time when power was turned on" corresponds to the date and time when the sub-control board 80 detected that power was turned on.
The "date and time when power was turned off" corresponds to the date and time when the power outage was detected on the sub-control board 80 side.

When the setting change is completed, a setting change end command is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, so the "date and time when the setting change was made" corresponds to the date and time when that command was received. For example, in FIG. 39, when the setting change process is completed, a setting change end command is sent to the sub-control board 80 in steps S246 and S247. This corresponds to the date and time when this command was received.

The "date and time of setting confirmation" corresponds to the date and time when a setting display end command is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 when the setting confirmation is completed, and thus corresponds to the date and time when the command was received. When the setting key switch 152 is turned on during game standby, the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state, setting confirmation in progress) is entered, and in FIG. 1, for example, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73 of the main control board 50. When the setting key switch 152 is then turned off, the setting confirmation mode is ended, and the display of the setting value by the setting value display LED 73 is terminated. Here, based on the setting key switch 152 being turned off (falling data), a command indicating that the display of the setting value has ended is sent to the sub-control board 80, and the date and time when this command was received is stored as the date and time when the setting confirmation was completed.
The "date and time of reset start" corresponds to the date and time when a reset start command is received from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 when the power is turned on with the reset switch 153 (setting change (reset) switch 153) on.
By storing event information as described above, it is possible to grasp the frequency of power on/off, setting changes (or confirmations), and reset starts.

Fig. 194 is a diagram showing the allocation of stored bits of the log stored for each game (log shown in Fig. 190) among the logs stored in the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80. Fig. 194 shows an example of a three-reel gaming machine.
As shown in Fig. 194, four 2-byte memory areas (8 bytes in total) are provided as memory areas for storing logs for each game, from (1) to (4) in the figure. As described above, since the logs for each game are stored until the number of games reaches "70,000", the required memory capacity is "70,000 x 8 = 560,000 (bytes)".

In the figure, the 2-byte memory area indicated by (1) stores the stop acceptance positions of the first reel 31 to the third reel 31, and instruction monitor information.
The stop acceptance position is a symbol number, and for example, in the case of 20 symbols, it is "0" to "10100 (B)." Therefore, 5 bits are assigned to each reel 31 as a memory area for the stop acceptance position.
In addition, since the instruction monitor information stores "0" or "1", the storage area is 1 bit.

In addition, the 2-byte memory area shown in (2) in the figure stores the reel status, push order, winning information 2, and winning information 1.
The reel states are assigned, for example, as "01(B)" for SB, "10(B)" for RB, and "11(B)" for CB, and the corresponding values are stored in this 2-byte memory area.
In the case of three reels, there are six possible push orders: "left, center, right,""left, right, center," ..., and "right, center, left." For example, if "left, center, right" is "001 (B),""left, right, center" is "010 (B)," ..., and "right, center, left" is "110 (B)," six different push orders can be stored in three bits, so three bits are allocated as the push order storage area.

In this embodiment, the command monitor information is stored in a one-bit memory area, but this is not limiting; the command monitor information may be stored in a three-bit memory area, like the push order, and one of the push order command numbers "1" to "6" ("001 (B)" to "110 (B)") may be stored. In this way, by comparing the command monitor information with the push order, it is possible to determine whether the stop switch 42 has been operated as instructed. In this case, for example, the number of memory bits for the product-specific information described below may be reduced by two bits, and the command monitor information may be stored in a three-bit memory area.

Since the winning number 2 (the winning number of the special feature) is provided with 5 bits as a memory area, up to "31" types of winning numbers of the special feature can be stored. For example, a non-winning number of the special feature is defined as "0", a winning number of 1BB is defined as "1", a winning number of RB is defined as "2", a winning number of MB is defined as "3", etc., and when the sub-control board 80 receives the winning number of the special feature, it stores it in the memory area of the winning number 2.
The storage area for winning information 1 (performance group number) is provided with 6 bits. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 26, the performance group numbers are provided with "0" to "13", but in this case, since "13 (D) = 1101 (B)", 4 bits are sufficient. If the storage area for winning information 1 (performance group number) is set to 6 bits, up to "63" types of performance group numbers can be stored.

In the figure, the 2-byte memory area indicated by (3) stores product specific information, RT number, and irregularity detection information.
In this example, the product specific information has a storage area of 11 bits, but this can be increased or decreased as appropriate depending on the type of product specific information.
Also, a 4-bit storage area is provided for the RT number. For example, when RT0 is set as RT number "0", up to RT15 ("1111(B)") can be stored.
As described above, the abnormality detection information is a 1-bit storage area because normal is "0" and abnormal is "1".

In the figure, the 2-byte memory area shown in (4) stores the number of sliding frames on the first reel, the number of sliding frames on the second reel, the number of sliding frames on the third reel, the winning combination status, the number of out coins, and the number of in coins.
For example, in the example of FIG. 115, the maximum number of slip frames is set to "4", so the range is "001(B)" to "100(B)". Therefore, since the number of slip frames can be stored in 3 bits, the memory areas for the number of slip frames of the first reel, the number of slip frames of the second reel, and the number of slip frames of the third reel are all set to 3 bits. In this way, by storing the number of slip frames instead of the stop position, it is possible to grasp the stop position while reducing the memory area. Note that, in cases where there is a surplus of memory area, the stop position may be stored instead of the number of slip frames.

Regarding the combination state, when either the 1BB or 2BB operation state is present, a "1" is stored, otherwise a "0" is stored, so that it is a 1-bit storage area.
The number of coins to be paid out is stored in a 4-bit memory area. The maximum number of coins to be paid out in one game in the gaming machine 10 is 15 coins, and since the maximum value 15 (D) = 1111 (B), this can be stored in 4 bits.
The number of in coins is stored in a 2-bit memory area. The maximum number of bets in one game is "3" coins, and the maximum value is "3 (D)" = "11 (B)", so it can be stored in 2 bits.

195 is a diagram showing the allocation of stored bits of the logs stored for each game among the logs stored in the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80, and shows an example of a four-reel gaming machine. An example of a four-reel gaming machine is the structure shown in FIG.
In the example of Fig. 195, like the example shown in Fig. 194, the log for each game is stored in four 2-byte memory areas. Furthermore, like the example of Fig. 194, the log for each game is stored until "70000" games are played, so the required memory capacity is "70000 x 8 = 560000 (bytes)".
In FIG. 195, the 2-byte memory area shown in (1) stores the RT number and the number of sliding frames of the first to third reels.
Even when there are four reels 31, the maximum number of slip frames on the reel 31 is "4." Therefore, the number of slip frames in the case of four reels can also be stored in three bits.

In the figure, the 2-byte memory area shown in (2) stores anomaly detection information and the first to third reel stop acceptance positions. As shown in the example of FIG. 194, if the number of symbols on the reel is "20", 5 bits are required for the memory area for the reel stop acceptance positions. Also, if the memory area for the stop acceptance positions for one reel 31 is 5 bits, it is not possible to store four reels in one byte. For this reason, the first to third reel stop acceptance positions are stored in the 1-byte memory area shown in (2), and the fourth reel stop acceptance position is stored in bits "0" to "4" of the 2-byte memory area shown in (3).

The 2-byte memory area shown in (3) in the diagram stores the fourth reel stop acceptance position, winning information 2, and winning information 1. The fourth reel stop acceptance position is the same as the first to third reel stop acceptance positions described above. Winning information 1 and winning information 2 are also the same as in the case of three reels, with winning information 1 corresponding to the performance group number and winning information 2 corresponding to the role winning number. Winning information 2 is a 5-bit memory area, as in the case of three reels, and winning information 1 is a 6-bit memory area, as in the case of three reels.

The 2-byte memory area shown in (4) in the figure stores product-specific information, instruction monitor information, push order, consecutive win status, reel status, number of out coins, and number of in coins.
Unlike the three-reel case, the product specific information is set in a one-bit storage area.
The instruction monitor information, like the three-reel case, is information indicating whether the instruction function is operating or not, and is a one-bit memory area.

The push order is a 5-bit memory area. In the case of 3 reels, there are 6 push order options, so it can be stored in 3 bits. In contrast, in the case of 4 reels, there are 24 push order options, so it can be stored in 5 bits ("00001 (B)" to "11000 (B)").
In addition, the winning combination state, the handicap state, the number of out coins, and the number of in coins are the same as in the case of three reels, so the explanation will be omitted.
As described above, in both the case of 3 reels and the case of 4 reels, the log shown in Fig. 190 can be stored in four 2-byte areas. If up to "70000" games are to be stored, the required storage capacity will be "560" kilobytes.

Figure 196 (a) is a diagram showing an example of storage of logs of ball payout information (Figure 191) between setting changes and information regarding settings (Figure 192 (a)).
It is assumed that the number of in sheets and the number of out sheets in FIG. 196(a) are, for example, the number of in sheets (1) and the number of out sheets (1) in FIG.
When storing the above items, as shown in Fig. 196, information on the setting value before the change and the setting value after the change, and information (cumulative value) of "a) number of games played" to "m) number of games with other features activated" at the setting value after the change are stored. Then, for example, a log of "256" setting changes is stored.
Further, the storage capacity of each of the storage areas a) to m) is secured so that up to "17,500" game numbers can be stored for one set value.

To save the setting value,
Setting 1 = 001 (B)
Setting 2 = 010 (B)
:
Setting 6 = 110 (B)
However,
for example,
Setting 1 = 000 (B)
Setting 2 = 001 (B)
:
Setting 6 = 101 (B)
It is also possible to use the following.

In addition, when the set value has not been changed but a reset start has been performed, the set value before the reset start is regarded as the pre-change set value, and the set value after the reset start is regarded as the post-change set value.
For example, when a reset start is performed with a set value of 6 (110(B)), the set value after the reset start is "6+100", so "1101010(B)" is stored.
Therefore, if you reset and start from a setting value of 6,
Setting value before change = 110 (B)
Changed setting value = 1101010 (B)
It becomes.
In addition, if the setting value 6 (110(B)) is changed to 6 again by changing the setting (if the setting value is re-entered),
Setting value before change = 110 (B)
Changed setting value = 110 (B)
It becomes.
By configuring in this manner, even if the setting value before the change and the setting value after the change are the same setting value (in the above example, setting value 6), it is possible to confirm after retrieving the gaming machine 10 whether the change is due to a setting change or a reset start.

Fig. 196(b) is a diagram showing an example of a storage form of information regarding power outage (Fig. 192(b)). For example, when the power is turned on for the first time after shipping from the factory, the number of games until the next power outage (number of games when power is off) and the time from when the power is turned on until the power is off (number of frame processing) (time interval when power is off) are stored in a storage area corresponding to the number of power outages "0".
Furthermore, the number of games played during power outage and the time interval during power outage after the first power outage may be the number of games played during power outage and the time interval during power outage each time the power is turned on, or may be a cumulative value.

For example, if 5000 games were played from the first time the power was turned on (power off count "0") until the power was turned off, and the time during that time was 10 hours (although the number of frame processes is actually stored, for the sake of simplicity, the explanation will be given in terms of time), then in FIG. 196(b),
N1 = 5000
F1=10
It becomes.
Next, when the power is turned on (power off count "1"), "6000" games are played until the power is turned off, and the time during that time is "11" hours, in FIG. 196(b),
N2 = 6000
F2=11
It becomes.

On the other hand, when storing the cumulative value, in FIG.
N1 = 5000
F1=10
N2 = 5000 + 6000 = 11000
F2 = 10 + 11 = 21
It becomes.
The number of plays and the time interval may be stored for each play, or the number of plays and the time interval of the cumulative value may be stored.

Next, a method for clearing data stored in the RWM 83, including the various logs described above, will be described.
The data stored in the RWM 83 includes data that is not cleared and data that is cleared when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
Fig. 197 is a diagram showing clear conditions for various data stored in the RWM 83. Note that the data stored in the RWM 83 is not limited to the example shown in Fig. 197.
197 shows five items as examples of items that are not to be cleared, but the number is not limited to these five items. The same applies to data for other clear conditions.

First, the clearing condition "do not clear" means that data will not be cleared, including data at the time of initial shipment or when an abnormality occurs.
The data that is not cleared includes the five shown in FIG.
First, the "count value that causes a cold start" is data (count value) for determining whether or not to execute a cold start. These are stored in a specified buffer (temporary storage area).
Here, "cold start" refers to clearing (initializing) data stored in a specific storage area of the RWM 83 and starting up when the sub-control board 80 detects a specific abnormality when power is turned on (including when an abnormality was detected during the previous power off). The data to be cleared during a cold start will be described later (described as the third clearing condition in FIG. 197).

If the main control board 50 detects a specified abnormality that may cause a cold start when the power is turned on, it executes a cold start, which clears (initializes) the data stored in a specified memory area of the RWM 53 and starts up the device. Therefore, there are cases in which the main control board 50 cold starts but the sub-control board 80 does not cold start (hot start), the main control board 50 does not cold start but the sub-control board 80 does cold start, and both the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 cold start.

The causes of cold starts are:
When the WDT (watchdog timer) times out When the checksum of the RWM83 at power-on is abnormal When the address of the program to be returned to after power-on (the address where the program is resumed) is abnormal An internal RAM expansion error, etc.
If any of these errors are detected when the power is turned on, the data stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 83 is cleared (initialized) to start up the gaming machine 10. The count values relating to these cold start factors are not cleared.

The "count value for system check" is a count value for determining whether the system (hardware and software) is operating normally. These count values are stored in a specified buffer. Examples of the count value for system check include:
Number of VDP (Video Display Processor) abnormalities, number of power-on occurrences, number of hardware random number abnormalities, number of fan errors, number of communication reception failures, etc.
The "master volume value" corresponds to the volume value set in the administrator mode shown in FIG. 163 (A).
The "user volume setting level" corresponds to the volume value set in the player mode shown in Figure 163 (B).
The "device counter" corresponds to the number of inputs or the number of times each device has been powered on. However, this does not include accessories. The device counter is constantly monitored after the main loop of the sub-control board 80 is started.

In addition, the information to be cleared when there is a "factory initial shipment", "checksum abnormality in stack storage area", or "stack pointer abnormality" is as follows:
Logs stored for each game (information shown in FIG. 190)
Information on balls paid out between setting changes (information shown in FIG. 191)
Information regarding settings (information shown in FIG. 192(a))
Information regarding power outage (information shown in FIG. 192(b))
Total number of games played (corresponding to "Total number of games played" in "Information about device" in FIG. 193(a))
Examples include:
In addition, if a checksum anomaly or stack pointer anomaly occurs and the log (data) is cleared, the log starts to be stored again after recovery from the checksum anomaly or stack pointer anomaly.
As a result, logs stored for each game and logs of ball payout information between setting changes are not cleared even when a setting change process is executed, and are accumulated unless a checksum abnormality or stack pointer abnormality occurs in the stack storage area.

Note that the information that is cleared at "initial (factory) shipping", "checksum abnormality in stack storage area", or "stack pointer abnormality" is not cleared at "cold start", "checksum abnormality", "setting change", or "power on/off".
In addition, when an "initial (factory) shipment", "checksum abnormality in stack storage area", or "stack pointer abnormality" occurs, various processes related to sub-control (e.g., storage process related to logs) may be configured to be started after a cold start is performed (without requiring a setting change), or alternatively, processes related to sub-control (e.g., storage process related to logs) may be configured to be started after a setting change is made.

Furthermore, as a clearing condition, the information to be cleared at "cold start" or "checksum abnormality" is as follows:
Recovery stack pointer Power failure recovery address Setting value information Setting value information before change Information about the main command receive buffer Error-related information On/off status of the user volume function Power saving, multi-language mode Touch panel information MySlot information Information specific to the device (*1)
Examples include:
Note that the "checksum abnormality" here refers to a checksum abnormality other than the above-mentioned "stack save area checksum abnormality."

When the sub-control board 80 detects a power cut, it executes the process of saving the recovery stack pointer, saving the power cut recovery address, setting a power cut processing completion flag (a flag for determining whether or not the power cut has been performed normally), and executing a checksum of the RWM 83. Then, when the power is turned on, it refers to the recovery stack pointer, the power cut recovery address, etc.
However, upon a cold start or when a checksum error occurs, these recovery stack pointers and power interruption recovery addresses are cleared.
In addition, when the device is started up cold or the checksum is abnormal, the setting value information and the setting value information before the change are cleared. Therefore, these data are all set to "0" at startup. In other words, the setting value before the change is also set to "1."
Furthermore, the setting value information (current setting values) is stored based on the setting values transmitted from the main control board 50 after startup.

Furthermore, the sub-control board 80 stores commands sent from the main control board 50 in a command storage buffer (ring buffer) based on the read pointer and write pointer. Information on the command storage buffer and the main command receiving buffer including the read pointer and write pointer is cleared at the time of a cold start or when a checksum abnormality occurs.
Furthermore, when an error occurs, the gaming machine 10 stores the type of error that has occurred, but this error-related information is also cleared upon a cold start or when the checksum is abnormal.

The "on/off state of the user volume function" corresponds to information as to whether or not the volume setting in the player mode shown in FIG. 163 is enabled.
Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 stores power saving mode settings and language mode settings, but this "power saving, multi-language mode" data is also cleared upon cold start or when a checksum abnormality occurs.
Furthermore, the "touch panel information" is information about what operation is currently being performed on the touch panel, and this information is also cleared upon a cold start or when the checksum is abnormal.
"Information about My Slot" refers to the customization information of the presentation set by the user in the service (My Slot) for customizing presentations or continuing from the previous game using a smartphone, as well as the game history information from the start of the current game. This information is also cleared at the time of a cold start or when the checksum is abnormal.

The "machine-specific information on games" has different clearing conditions depending on its type. The machine-specific information on games includes information that is cleared at cold start or when the checksum is abnormal (in the figure, "*1"), information that is cleared by changing settings (in the figure, "*2"), and information that is cleared by turning the power on and off (in the figure, "*3").
The information to be cleared at "cold start" or when "checksum abnormality" occurs may be configured to be cleared when "checksum abnormality in stack storage area" or "stack pointer abnormality" occurs, or may not be cleared. On the other hand, the information to be cleared at "cold start" or when "checksum abnormality" occurs is not cleared by "changing settings" or "turning the power on/off."
During a "cold start" or "checksum abnormality", various processes related to sub-control (e.g., storage processes related to logs) may be configured to be initiated without the need for a setting change, or alternatively, processes related to sub-control (e.g., storage processes related to logs) may be configured to be initiated after a setting change has been made.

The clearing conditions are as follows:
Information about the game specific to the device (*2)
These include information about checking settings and settlement, information about the lamps, and information about the reels.
"Information relating to setting confirmation and settlement" includes information on a flag indicating that setting confirmation is in progress, information on a flag indicating that settlement is in progress, information on the number of pieces to be settled, etc.
"Information about lamps" refers to information about each lamp, such as side lamps, back lamps, lower panel lamps, 3-bed button lamps, and stop switch lamps, and corresponds to information indicating whether the lamp is turned on (ON) or off (OFF). In addition, in the case of lamps with full-color lighting modes, it corresponds to RGB (color) information.
The information about the lamps is not cleared by simply turning the power on and off normally, and is configured so that the various lamps can continue to light up from where they were before the power was cut off after the normal power is restored. In contrast, when a setting change is made, the information about the lamps is cleared because it is not necessary to continue to light up the various lamps from where they were before the power was cut off.

"Information about the reels" refers to information about the push order, spinning flags (information indicating which reels are spinning), stop acceptance positions, stop positions, etc. This information is different from the above-mentioned log (FIGS. 194 and 195) that records each game, and is, for example, information about a memory area (buffer) for temporarily storing information.
"Main state information" refers to RT information and game state (main game state, etc.).
Note that information on the push order, stop acceptance position, and RT information are necessary for the progress of the game, and are different from the log shown in FIG.
As for the information for "clearing by turning the power on/off" as the clearing condition, as described above, there is a part of the information relating to the game specific to the model ("*3" in the figure).
The information to be "cleared by changing the settings" may be configured to be cleared in the event of "stack save area checksum abnormality", "stack pointer abnormality", "at cold start", or "checksum abnormality", or may not be cleared. On the other hand, the information to be "cleared by changing the settings" is not cleared by "power on/off".

As described above, important logs (logs stored for each game, ball payout information between setting changes, information about settings, information about power outages, and total number of games played) are not erased when the power is turned on/off or the settings are changed, so these logs can be accumulated after the gaming machine 10 is installed in the market.

Although the eleventh embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In Figure 197, five examples of data to be cleared at the time of initial shipment, when the checksum of the stack storage area is abnormal, or when the stack pointer is abnormal are given: the log stored for each game, ball payout information between setting changes, information related to settings, information related to power outages, and the total number of games played. However, this is not limited to these, and all of the logs in Figures 190 to 193 may be configured to be cleared at the time of initial shipment, when the checksum of the stack storage area is abnormal, or when the stack pointer is abnormal.
Also, at least some of the logs in Figures 190 to 193 may be configured not to be cleared under any circumstances.
Furthermore, at least a portion of the logs in Figures 190 to 193 may be configured to be cleared upon a cold start or when a checksum abnormality occurs.
Furthermore, at least some of the logs in Figures 190 to 193 may be configured to be cleared by changing the settings.
Furthermore, at least some of the logs in FIGS. 190 to 193 may be configured to be cleared by turning the power on and off.

(2) The four 2-byte memory areas shown in Figures 194 and 195 are examples. The size of the memory area per game varies depending on the type of log stored for each game and the size of the data. Therefore, there may be two or three 2-byte memory areas per game, or five or six 2-byte memory areas per game.

(3) If the power is turned off during play (for example, after the first stop and before the second stop), and the settings are changed and then the game is started up, the following processing may be performed, for example.
In this case, the data stored as a log before the power was turned off is retained as is, and when playing after the settings are changed, the log is stored in the next memory area (storage area).
Alternatively, if a log of the game that was played when the power was cut off has already been stored, the log may be erased.
In addition, when counting the total number of games, there are a method of counting games in which the power is cut off halfway through a game, and a method of not counting games in which the power is cut off halfway through a game.

(4) As mentioned at the beginning of the eleventh embodiment, the present invention is not limited to being applied to slot machines 10, but can also be applied to pachinko gaming machines.
In a pachinko gaming machine, a memory area for storing logs is provided in the RWM of the sub-control board, and similarly to the slot machine 10, a log is stored for each game or each time an event occurs.
It is assumed that an RWM is also provided on the sub-control board of the pachinko gaming machine, and that a backup battery (backup means) is also mounted on the sub-control board of the pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, the start and end timing of a "play (unit play)" on a pachinko gaming machine is as follows.
First, the start timing of a pachinko game is as follows:
When the game ball enters the starting hole 532 provided in the game area,
When the game ball enters the start hole 532 and the start hole switch 533 is turned on,
When the special symbol display device 531 starts to vary,
In addition, the timing of the end of one game is as follows:
When the variation of the special symbol display device 531 ends and the special symbol is displayed stationary, for example.

Examples of logs stored in a pachinko gaming machine include the following:
Number of outs (cumulative and/or between setting changes)
Safe pitch count (cumulative value and/or setting change interval)
Number of safe balls during big win Number of games when setting is changed (same as Figure 192 (a))
Setting value before change (same as FIG. 192(a))
Setting value after change (same as FIG. 192(a))
Number of games played when power is off (same as Figure 192 (b))
Power off interval time (same as FIG. 192(b))
Power-on time (minutes) (same as FIG. 193(a))
Total number of games played (same as Figure 193 (a))
The driving time of the prize ball payout motor of the payout device 524 (FIG. 100) (corresponding to the "hopper motor driving time" in FIG. 193 (a))
Sub-input counter (same as FIG. 193(a))
Setting key input counter (same as FIG. 193(a))
RAM clear switch input counter (same as FIG. 193(a))
Drive time for each volume level (same as FIG. 193(a))
Event information (same as FIG. 193(b))

In addition, there are logs specific to pachinko machines,
Number of times the launching device has been activated Number of times the performance movable object (performance device) has been activated Number of times the special electric device (attacker) has been activated Number of times the normal electric device (electric chute) has been activated Number of times other various movable parts have been activated (for example, a distribution part that performs a certain operation when the power is turned on to distribute the flow of game balls, and a movable part that moves to a position that makes it easier or more difficult for the ball to enter the V-ball entry port (a ball entry port that activates a jackpot or a probability fluctuation function when a ball enters it) located inside the large prize entry port, etc.)
One example of a method is to store a log of the above.
In addition, since the slot machine 10 may also be provided with a movable object (a performance device) (for example, a shutter provided on the front of the image display device 23), the number of times the movable object (a performance device) is operated may be stored as a log for such a slot machine 10.

Furthermore, at least a part of the log may be configured to be cleared at the time of initial shipment, or if a checksum abnormality occurs in the stack storage area, or if a stack pointer abnormality occurs.
Alternatively, at least a portion of the log may be configured not to be cleared under any circumstances.
At least a part of the log may be configured to be cleared at the time of a cold start or when a checksum error occurs.
Furthermore, at least a part of the logs may be configured to be cleared by changing settings.
Furthermore, at least a part of the log may be configured to be cleared when the power is turned on/off.

(5) Whether it is a slot machine 10 or a pachinko machine, the stored log is
a) In the administrator menu operated by the hall manager (similar to FIG. 162(a) and also called "manager mode"), the logs cannot be displayed (viewed) as images at all. b) At least some of the logs can be displayed as images by performing a specified operation in the administrator menu. c) A log viewing mode (log display menu) separate from the administrator menu is provided, and by performing a specified operation, a user can switch to the log viewing mode and at least some of the logs can be displayed as images.
In the case of a) above, after the manufacturer of the gaming machine 10 collects the gaming machine 10, the log can be checked by a predetermined operation. By configuring the log in this way so that even the manager of the hall cannot check it, the security of the log can be improved. Furthermore, by making the log difficult to access, it can also be made difficult to tamper with the contents of the log, for example, by cheating.
In addition, in the case of b) above, if the manager (store manager) of the hall has any doubts about the behavior of the gaming machine 10, he/she can check the log, thereby making it possible to check whether any cheating is taking place.
Furthermore, in the case of c), for example, a predetermined operation is performed when the power is turned on to switch to the log confirmation mode. By configuring in this way, only those who know how to switch to the log confirmation mode can check the log.

Also, for example, in the administrator menu, error information (such as a list of errors that have occurred in the past) can be displayed as an image, and in this case, at least a part of the event information (Figure 193 (b)) may be configured to be displayed together with the error information.
When displaying at least a portion of the event information, all of the event information may be displayed, or, for example, about "5" to "10" event information may be displayed going back from the most recent event information.
Furthermore, in the administrator menu, at least one type of log shown in Figures 190 to 192 and Figure 193 (a) may be displayed together with the error information, or all of the logs shown in Figures 190 to 193 may be displayed.

(6) The first to eleventh embodiments and the various modified examples shown in the first to eleventh embodiments may be implemented in any suitable combination, rather than being implemented alone.

<Twelfth embodiment>
The twelfth embodiment is a slot machine in which the winning of a special role (MB) can be avoided by changing the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed.
In this embodiment, the "special role (role)" includes "CB (second type special role)" and "MB (second type role continuous operation device. Also called second type big bonus, second type BB, or 2BB)." Therefore, the "special game" includes "CB game" and "MB game."

During MB play (MB operation), "CB" is continuously operated. That is, during MB play, CB play is continuously executed.
Furthermore, during CB play (when CB is in operation), all minor roles are won regardless of the results of the lottery by the role selection means 61, and the time from the moment the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected until the reel 31 stops for a specific reel 31 (in this embodiment, the left reel 31) is within 75 ms. In other words, the maximum number of moving symbols from the moment the operation of the left stop switch 42 is detected until the left reel 31 stops is one symbol. Furthermore, CB play ends after one play.

Furthermore, the MB game continues until the total number of medals acquired (the number of medals paid out, the number of medals awarded) exceeds 13, and ends when the total number of medals acquired exceeds 13. In other words, the end condition of the MB game is set to be when the total number of medals acquired exceeds 13.
When the CB game ends, if the ending condition of the MB game is satisfied, the MB game ends and the game transitions to a non-internal state (non-RT).

On the other hand, when the CB game is ended, if the end condition of the MB game is not satisfied, the CB game is executed again. In this way, the CB game is executed continuously during the MB game.
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to the CB (CB operation symbol) is not set. Therefore, during the MB game, the symbol combination corresponding to the CB is not displayed stationarily, and the CB game is continuously executed (the CB is continuously operated).

During CB play, the reel 31 is controlled to stop so that a specified number (the number of medals bet to start a game) becomes two and a minor combination with a payout (the number of medals paid out when a corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed) set to two is won.
Therefore, during MB play (when MB is in operation or CB is in continuous operation), two medals are bet for each play and two medals are paid out (two in, two out), so the player's medals neither increase nor decrease.
Then, when CB play is executed seven times during MB play, the total number of medals paid out during MB play becomes 14, exceeding 13, so the end condition of MB play is met and then the game transitions to a non-internal state (non-RT).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 200 described later, "MB" has three types, "MB01" to "MB03", but as shown in FIG. 206 described later, there is only one type of reel condition device, the "MB condition device".
Furthermore, the winning roles of the "MB Condition Device" are set to "MB01" to "MB03", and when the "MB Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning roles "MB01" to "MB03" can be displayed stopped on the pay line (can win a prize).
When the "MB condition device" is activated, if a symbol combination corresponding to any one of "MB01" to "MB03" is displayed stopped on an active line, an MB win is achieved, and although no medals are paid out in this game, the game transitions to an MB game (when the MB is activated) from the next game.

In this embodiment, as in the other embodiments, the role selection means 61 determines a "winning number" by lottery. For this reason, the role selection means 61 is also referred to as a "winning number selection (determination, selection) means." Furthermore, when the winning number is determined, a "condition device number" corresponding to the winning number is generated. When the condition device number is generated, a condition device corresponding to the condition device number is activated, and the symbol combination of the role corresponding to the activated condition device can be displayed stopped on the pay line (the role can win).

In addition, the "condition device number" includes a "gimmick condition device number" and a "minor winnings and replay condition device number."
Furthermore, the "gimmick condition device number" is a condition device number corresponding to a special role (gimmick), and in this embodiment, it only has "1" as shown in Figure 206 described later.
Furthermore, the "small win and replay condition device number" is a condition device number corresponding to a small win or a replay, and in this embodiment, includes numbers "1" to "56" as shown in Figures 207 to 218 described later.

In addition, the "special role winning" is also called "operation of the role condition device." For example, the "MB winning" is also called "operation of the MB condition device."
Furthermore, the "small win" is also called "small win condition device operation", and the "replay win" is also called "replay condition device operation". For example, the "small win A1" is also called "small win A1 condition device operation".

When a special combination capable of carrying over winning information to the next game or later is won, the winning information of the special combination is carried over to the next game until a symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is stopped and displayed on an effective line (the special combination wins).
Furthermore, when a special combination is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is not stopped and displayed on the pay line, this is called "inside". In other words, a game in which the winning information of the special combination is carried over is called "inside".

In contrast, a game in which the winning information of a special role that can be carried over to the next game or later is not won is called a "non-internal game". In other words, a game in which the winning information of a special role is not carried over is called a "non-internal game".
In this embodiment, the game in which a special role is won is included in the "non-internal" category, but the game in which a special role is won may also be included in the "internal" category.
"MB" is a special role that allows winning information to be carried over to the next game or later, and when "MB" is won but the pattern combination corresponding to "MB" is not displayed stopped on the winning line, it is called "inside MB."

In addition, the "special game" is also called "operation of a special feature." For example, the "MB game" is also called "MB operation."
Furthermore, "when the reel is not activated" includes a state in which the reel condition device is activated but the symbol combination corresponding to the activated reel condition device is not displayed stopped on the pay line.
For example, when the MB condition device is not operating, or when the MB condition device is operating but the symbol combination corresponding to the MB is not displayed stopped on the pay line, it is called "MB not operating". In other words, when the MB is not won, or when the MB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the MB is not displayed stopped on the pay line (inside the MB), it is the MB not operating time.

In addition, the "expected number of medals paid out" refers to a value calculated for all condition devices that are subject to lottery in that game state by adding up the "winning probability of the condition device" x "winning probability of the winning role included in the condition device" x "number of medals paid out when winning."
Furthermore, when operation information of the stop switch 42 is notified, it refers to the "expected number of medals to be paid out" when the stop switch 42 is operated in an operation manner based on the notified operation information.
For example, if the stop switch 42 is operated in an operation manner based on the notified operation information, and the winning role included in the activated condition device always wins (with a 100% probability), the "probability of winning the winning role included in the condition device" is set to "1" and the "expected number of medals to be paid out" is calculated.

In addition, the "payout rate" refers to the value obtained by dividing the expected number of medals paid out by the number of bets ("expected number of medals paid out/number of bets").
Furthermore, when operation information of the stop switch 42 is notified, it refers to the "ball payout rate" when the stop switch 42 is operated in an operation manner based on the notified operation information.
When the "ball payout rate" is "1", the number of medals is maintained, when the "ball payout rate" exceeds "1", the number of medals increases, and when the "ball payout rate" is less than "1", the number of medals decreases.

The "setting value" relates to the degree of advantage given to the player, and in this embodiment, six levels are provided, from setting 1 to setting 6. The higher the setting value, the higher the degree of advantage given to the player.
Furthermore, when the power is turned off and the setting key switch 152 is turned on and then the power is turned on in this state, the device transitions to a setting change state (setting change mode) in which the setting values can be changed. At this time, an initialization process (RWM clear process) is executed to initialize a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.
Furthermore, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the power is on, the setting value cannot be changed but the device transitions to a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting value can be confirmed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 219 to 220 described later, the start condition of the "favorable zone" is set to be that in the non-favorable zone, a winning number between "1" (replay A condition device) and "27" (small win C6 condition device), or between "76" (small win E condition device) and "79" (small win H condition device) has been won (determined) by a lottery by the role selection means 61.
In other words, in the non-advantageous zone, if the winning number selected by the role selection means 61 is between "1" (replay A condition device) and "27" (small role C6 condition device), or between "76" (small role E condition device) and "79" (small role H condition device), the zone will transition to the advantageous zone.

In addition, in this embodiment, the end condition of the "favorable zone" is set to when the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", when the favorable zone clear counter (number of plays during the favorable zone) reaches "1500 (D)", or when the notification game (AT) ends.
In other words, when the difference in the number of coins in the advantageous zone exceeds "2,400 coins," the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaches "1,500 plays," or the notification game (AT) ends, the advantageous zone ends and transitions to a non-advantageous zone.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 219 to 220 described later, for example, in the case of "setting 1", during non-RT and non-internal play, the probability of winning any of the winning numbers "1" (replay A condition device) to "27" (small role C6 condition device), or the winning number "76" (small role E condition device) to "79" (small role H condition device) in the lottery by the role selection means 61 is "57736/65536".
Therefore, even if the advantageous zone ends and the player moves to a non-advantageous zone, the player will subsequently win either the winning number "1" (replay A condition device) to the winning number "27" (small win C6 condition device), or the winning number "76" (small win E condition device) to the winning number "79" (small win H condition device) in the first or second play, and the player will move to the advantageous zone.

In addition, in this embodiment, an AT lottery is executed when any of the winning numbers "3" (Replay C condition device) through "9" (Replay I condition device) is won (determined) in the lottery by the role selection means 61. The "Replay C condition device" through "Replay I condition device" have a relatively low probability of activation (winning), and are referred to as "rare replays", etc. The probability of winning the AT lottery when the "Replay C condition device" through "Replay I condition device" are activated is set to "10%".

Furthermore, in this embodiment, an AT lottery is also executed when the winning number "76" (small prize E condition device) is won (determined) in the lottery by the prize lottery means 61. The "small prize E condition device" has a relatively low probability of activation (winning), and is called a "rare prize" or "rare small prize." The probability of winning the AT lottery when the "small prize E condition device" is activated is set to "20%."
Moreover, when the AT lottery is won, the right to play the notification game is granted. Then, when the right to play the notification game is granted, the notification game starts when the start condition of the notification game is satisfied.

In the present embodiment, the initial value of the number of times the notification game can be played is set to "50 games." When the right to play the notification game is granted and the start condition of the notification game is satisfied, the notification game is played for "50 games."
Furthermore, in the case where a player already has the right to play the notification game, when the AT lottery is won, the number of rights to play the notification game is increased (added). For example, when a player has two rights to play the notification game, the player can play the notification game for "(50 games + 50 games =) 100 games".

Furthermore, when the AT lottery is won during the execution of the notification game, the remaining number of times of the notification game is added. For example, when the AT lottery is won when the remaining number of times of the notification game is "20 games", the remaining number of times of the notification game becomes "(20 games + 50 games =) 70 games".
In this embodiment, as in the other embodiments, the indication function can be activated and the push order suggestion effect can be executed only during the advantageous zone, and the indication function can not be activated and the push order suggestion effect cannot be executed in the non-advantageous zone. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the indication function is activated and the push order suggestion effect is executed, it is considered to be an advantageous zone.

Figure 198 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on the reel 31 in this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 198, in this embodiment as in the other embodiments, each reel 31 consists of "20 frames."
In addition, the symbol numbers are also shown in Figure 198. For example, on the left reel 31, the symbol with the symbol number "0" is "REPLAY".

In addition, in this embodiment, the time from the moment the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected until the reel 31 stops is set to within 190 ms, except for a specific reel 31 (in this embodiment, the left reel 31) during MB play (when MB is activated, when CB is continuously activated). As a result, the maximum number of moving symbols from the moment the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected until the reel 31 stops is 4, except for a specific reel 31 during MB play.

On the other hand, for a specific reel 31 during MB play, the time from the moment the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected until the reel 31 stops is set to within 75 ms. As a result, for a specific reel 31 during MB play, the maximum number of moving symbols from the moment the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected until the reel 31 stops is one symbol.

For example, when the MB is not in operation, if the left stop switch 42 is operated just before the No. 1 "small BAR" on the left reel 31 passes over an active line, the symbols can move up to a maximum of four symbols from that symbol and stop on an active line up to the No. 5 "replay."
Therefore, if four specific symbols are arranged at intervals of five symbols on one reel 31, the specific symbols can always be stopped on an active line no matter when the stop switch 42 is operated.

Specifically, on the left reel 31, the "small BARs" are arranged at numbers 1, 6, 11, and 16. That is, on the left reel 31, four "small BARs" are arranged at intervals of five symbols. Therefore, when the MB is not in operation, the "small BARs" can always be stopped on the pay line on the left reel 31, regardless of when the left stop switch 42 is operated.
In this way, a symbol arrangement in which the target symbol can always be stopped on a pay line regardless of when the stop switch 42 is operated is called a "PB=1" arrangement.
In contrast, a symbol arrangement in which the target symbol cannot be stopped on a valid line unless the stop switch 42 is operated at the appropriate timing (within the range of the maximum number of moving symbols from the valid line) is called a "PB≠1" arrangement.

On the left reel 31, in addition to the "small BAR", the "bell" and "replay" are also arranged as "PB=1".
In addition, on the left reel 31, the combination of the four symbols "Big BAR" at No. 3, "Red 7" at No. 8, "Symbol" at No. 13, and "Blue 7" at No. 18 results in a "PB=1" arrangement. Therefore, when the MB is not activated, any of the "Big BAR", "Red 7", "Symbol", or "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 can be stopped on an active line regardless of the timing at which the left stop switch 42 is operated.

Similarly, on the left reel 31, the 2nd and 7th "watermelon" symbols and the 12th and 17th "blank" symbols combine to form a "PB=1" arrangement. Therefore, when the MB is not activated, the "watermelon" or "blank" symbol on the left reel 31 can be stopped on a winning line regardless of when the left stop switch 42 is operated.

Additionally, on the center reel 31, the "bell" and "replay" are each arranged as "PB=1".
Furthermore, on the center reel 31, the combination of the four symbols of the "large BAR" at No. 3, the "small BAR" at No. 8, the "blue 7" at No. 13, and the "symbol" at No. 18 forms a "PB=1" arrangement.
Furthermore, on the center reel 31, the “blanks” at numbers 1, 6, and 16, and the “red 7” at number 11, form a “PB=1” arrangement when these four symbols are combined.
Similarly, on the center reel 31, the 2nd, 7th and 17th “watermelon” symbols, as well as the 12th “mark” symbol, form a “PB=1” arrangement in combination of these four symbols.

Also, on the right reel 31, the "small BAR", "bell" and "replay" are each arranged as "PB=1".
Furthermore, on the right reel 31, the combination of the four symbols "Big BAR" at No. 3, "Red 7" at No. 8, "Symbol" at No. 13, and "Blue 7" at No. 18 forms a "PB=1" configuration.
Furthermore, on the right reel 31, the 4th and 19th “watermelon” symbols, and the 9th and 14th “blank” symbols, combine to form a “PB=1” arrangement.

FIG. 199 is a diagram showing the display window 18, the relative positions of the reels 31, and the pay lines (display lines showing symbol combinations).
In this embodiment, as in the other embodiments, three reels 31 are arranged so as to be visible from the display window 18, and three symbols on each reel 31 are arranged so as to be visible. As a result, a total of nine symbols (frames) are arranged so as to be visible from the display window 18. The designations of the symbol positions (for example, "upper left row") are as shown in FIG. 3(B) of the first embodiment.

In addition, an "effective line" is a line of symbols arranged when the reel 31 stops, which is a symbol combination line (display line) that forms a symbol combination, and which is a line that will result in the winning of a certain role when a symbol combination corresponding to that role stops on that line.
In this embodiment, the only valid line is the curved line that passes through the "upper left" - "middle middle" - "middle right" as shown in FIG. 199, and all other lines are invalid lines.

200 to 205 are diagrams showing the types of roles (such as roles corresponding to the winning numbers drawn by the role drawing means 61), pattern combinations, payout numbers, etc. in this embodiment.
The winning combinations are broadly divided into special winning combinations, replay winning combinations, and small winning combinations.
A symbol combination corresponding to each role and the number of medals to be paid out when a winning combination is achieved are also determined. When all the reels 31 come to a stop, if a symbol combination corresponding to any of the roles stops on an active line (the role is a winning combination), the number of medals corresponding to that role is paid out (a dividend (profit) is awarded).
However, the number of coins to be paid out when a special combination is won is set to 0. In addition, in the case of a replay, coins are automatically inserted and the player can play again.

As shown in FIG. 200, the game state in this embodiment includes when the special feature is not activated (when the MB is not activated) and when the CB is activated (when the MB is activated). The specified number when the special feature is not activated is set to "3", and the specified number when the CB is activated is set to "2".
In Figures 200 to 205, "3 coins" corresponds to when the reel is not activated, and "2 coins" corresponds to when the CB is activated.

The role numbers "1" to "12" shown in FIG. 200 correspond to special roles (roles). In this embodiment, there are three types of special roles: "MB01" to "MB03."
As shown in FIG. 200, for "MB01" to "MB03," when the specified number is three (when the reel device is not activated), the corresponding symbol combination can be displayed (winning), but when the specified number is two (when the CB is activated), the corresponding symbol combination will not be displayed.

In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" has four types of role numbers "1" to "4", the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" has four types of role numbers "5" to "8", and the symbol combination corresponding to "MB03" has four types of role numbers "9" to "12".
Here, for the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01", the "small BAR" on the left reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, the "replay" on the middle reel 31 is also in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the "blue 7", "red 7", "big BAR" and "symbol" on the right reel 31 are also in the "PB=1" arrangement for these four symbols combined. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" is in the "PB=1" arrangement.

For the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02", the "small BAR" on the left reel 31 is in the "PB=1" position, the "blue 7", "big BAR", "small BAR" and "symbol" on the middle reel 31 are also in the "PB=1" position for these four symbols combined, and the "small BAR" on the right reel 31 is also in the "PB=1" position. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" is also in the "PB=1" position, just like the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01".

Furthermore, for the symbol combination corresponding to "MB03", the four symbols "Blue 7", "Red 7", "Large BAR" and "Symbol" on the left reel 31 are combined to form a "PB=1" arrangement, the "Replay" on the middle reel 31 is also in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the "Small BAR" on the right reel 31 is also in a "PB=1" arrangement. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB03" is also in a "PB=1" arrangement, just like the symbol combinations corresponding to "MB01" and "MB02".

Furthermore, as described above, in this embodiment, there are three types of special roles (gimmicks), namely, "MB01" to "MB03", but there is only one type of gambling device, namely, an "MB condition device", and the three winning roles, namely, "MB01" to "MB03", are set for this one "MB condition device".
Then, when the "MB condition device" is activated (MB is won) and a symbol combination corresponding to one of the winning roles "MB01" to "MB03" is displayed stopped on an active line (MB is won), no medals are paid out in this game, but from the next game, the game will transition to the time when MB is activated (MB game).

It should be noted that the symbol combinations corresponding to "MB01" to "MB03" are all in the "PB=1" arrangement, so if the "MB condition device" were to operate alone (single winning) during a non-internal period, for example, a symbol combination corresponding to any of "MB01" to "MB03" would stop on a valid line; however, in this embodiment, the "MB condition device" will not operate alone during a non-internal period.
Also, for example, if the role selection means 61 does not result in a winning combination while inside an MB, the symbol combination corresponding to any of "MB01" to "MB03" will stop on a valid line, but in this embodiment, the role selection means 61 will never result in a non-winning combination while inside an MB.

The combination numbers "13" to "88" shown in FIG. 200 to FIG. 202 correspond to replays (replay combinations). In this embodiment, the replays include 14 types of replays, "replay 01" to "replay 14."
As shown in Figures 200 to 202, for "Replay 01" to "Replay 14," when the specified number of coins is three (when the reel device is not activated), the corresponding symbol combination can be displayed (winning), but when the specified number is two coins (when the CB is activated), the corresponding symbol combination will not be displayed.
When the CB is activated, the "small win ALL condition device" is activated, and based on this "small win ALL condition device," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to a small win that pays out two coins. Therefore, when the CB is activated, symbol combinations corresponding to "Replay 01" to "Replay 14" are not stopped and displayed.
Furthermore, when a symbol combination corresponding to "REPLAY 01" to "REPLAY 14" is displayed (a winning combination), a medal is automatically inserted and the player can play the game again.

The symbol combinations corresponding to "Replay 01" include eight types of combination numbers from "13" to "20." In addition, for the symbol combinations corresponding to "Replay 01," the "Replay" on the left reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, the four symbols "Blue 7," "Big BAR," "Small BAR," and "Symbol" on the middle reel 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement when combined, and the two symbols "Watermelon" and "Blank" on the right reel 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement when combined. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 01" is in the "PB=1" arrangement.

The symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 02" is only one type of combination with the winning combination number "21", and the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 03" is only one type of combination with the winning combination number "22". In addition, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Replay 02" and "Replay 03" are both arranged as "PB=1".
The symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 04" has 16 types of role numbers from "23" to "38", which is a combined "PB=1" arrangement.
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 05" has four types of role numbers "39" to "42", which together form a "PB=1" arrangement.

The symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 06" has three types of role numbers, "43" to "45". In addition, for the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 06", the "Big BAR" on the left reel 31 is in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration. Therefore, although the two symbols, the "Red 7" and "Blank" on the center reel 31, combine to form "PB = 1", and the "Replay" on the right reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration, the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 06" is in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration.

The symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 07" has two types of role numbers, "46" and "47". In addition, for the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 07", the "watermelon" on the center reel 31 is in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration. Therefore, although the "small BAR" on the left reel 31 and the "bell" on the right reel 31 are in the "PB = 1" configuration, the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 07" is in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration.

The symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 08" is only one type of symbol number "48", and the arrangement is "PB=1".
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 09" has two types of role numbers, "49" and "50", each of which is arranged as "PB=1".

The symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 10" has two types of role numbers, "51" and "52". In addition, for the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 10", the "bell" on the left reel 31 is in the "PB=1" position, and the "watermelon" and "blank" on the right reel 31 are in the "PB=1" position for the combined two symbols, but the "watermelon" on the center reel 31 is in the "PB≠1" position. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 10" is in the "PB≠1" position.

The symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 11" has 12 types of role numbers from "53" to "64", which together form a "PB=1" arrangement.
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 12" has 12 types of role numbers from "65" to "76", which is a combined "PB=1" arrangement.

The symbol combinations corresponding to "Replay 13" include 10 types of combination numbers from "77" to "86". In addition, for the symbol combinations corresponding to "Replay 13", the "Big BAR" on the left reel 31 is in the "PB≠1" arrangement. Therefore, although the four symbols of the "Blue 7", "Big BAR", "Small BAR" and "Symbol" on the center reel 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement for a total of four symbols, and the "Watermelon" and "Blank" on the right reel 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement for a total of two symbols, the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 13" is in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

The symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 14" has two types of role numbers, "87" and "88". In addition, for the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 14", the "watermelon" and "blank" on the left reel 31 are in a "PB=1" arrangement when combined, and the "small BAR" on the right reel 31 is in a "PB=1" arrangement, but the "mark" on the center reel 31 is in a "PB≠1" arrangement. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 14" is in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

The winning numbers "89" to "252" shown in FIG. 202 to FIG. 205 correspond to small winnings. In this embodiment, the small winnings include 92 types of "small winnings 01" to "small winnings 92".
As shown in Figures 202 to 205, for "Small Prize 01" to "Small Prize 92," the corresponding symbol combinations can be displayed (winning) either when the specified number is three (when the reel is not activated) or when the specified number is two (when the CB is activated).
Also, as shown in Figures 202 to 205, for "Small Prize 01", "Small Prize 02" and "Small Prize 06" to "Small Prize 84", the number of medals paid out when a prize is won is set to 1, both when the specified number is 3 (when the reel is not activated) and when the specified number is 2 (when the CB is activated).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 202, for "Small Prize 03" to "Small Prize 05", the number of medals paid out when a prize is won is set to two, both when the specified number is three (when the reel is not activated) and when the specified number is two (when the CB is activated).
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 205, for "Small Prize 85" to "Small Prize 88", the number of medals paid out when a winning combination is achieved when the specified number of medals is three (when the reel is not activated) is set to three, whereas the number of medals paid out when a winning combination is achieved when the specified number of medals is two (when the CB is activated) is set to two.

Also, as shown in FIG. 205, for "small prize 89," the number of medals paid out upon winning is set to 1 when the specified number is 3 (when the reel is not activated), whereas the number of medals paid out upon winning is set to 2 when the specified number is 2 (when the CB is activated).
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 205, for "Small Prize 90" to "Small Prize 92", the number of medals paid out when a winning combination is achieved when the specified number is three (when the reel is not activated) is set to 13, whereas the number of medals paid out when a winning combination is achieved when the specified number is two (when the CB is activated) is set to two.

The symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 01" has two types of prize numbers, "89" and "90", and is arranged in a "PB ≠ 1" configuration.
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 02" has two types of prize numbers "91" and "92", and is arranged as "PB ≠ 1".
Here, the "red 7" and "blank" on the center reel 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement for the two symbols combined. Therefore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 01" and "small prize 02" are all in the "PB≠1" arrangement, but in a game in which "small prize 01" and "small prize 02" are both won, the symbol combination corresponding to either "small prize 01" or "small prize 02" can be stopped and displayed.

The symbol combination corresponding to "small role 03" is only one type of role number "93", and the symbol combination corresponding to "small role 04" is only one type of role number "94". Also, the symbol combination corresponding to "small role 05" is only one type of role number "95", and the symbol combination corresponding to "small role 06" is only one type of role number "96". And, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small role 03" to "small role 06" are all "PB ≠ 1" arrangement.
Here, the four symbols of "Blue 7", "Red 7", "Big BAR" and "Symbol" on the left reel 31 are combined to form a "PB=1" arrangement. Therefore, although the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Role 03" to "Small Role 06" are all in a "PB≠1" arrangement, in a game in which "Small Role 03" to "Small Role 06" are overlappingly won, any symbol combination corresponding to "Small Role 03" to "Small Role 06" can be stopped and displayed.

The symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 07" has two types of prize numbers, "97" and "98", which together form a "PB=1" arrangement.
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 08" has four types of prize numbers "99" to "102", which is a combined "PB=1" arrangement.
Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 09" has four types of prize numbers "103" to "106", which is a combined "PB=1" arrangement.
Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small prize 10" has two types of prize numbers, "107" and "108", which is combined to form a "PB=1" arrangement.

The symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 11" has four types of prize numbers "109" to "112", which is a combined "PB=1" arrangement.
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 12" has two types of prize numbers "113" and "114", and the arrangement is "PB ≠ 1".
Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small prize 13" is only one type, the prize number "115", and the arrangement is "PB ≠ 1".
Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 14" has two types of prize numbers "116" and "117", and is arranged in a "PB ≠ 1" configuration.

The symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 15" is only one type, which is the prize number "118", and the arrangement is "PB ≠ 1".
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 16" has two types of prize numbers "119" and "120", and the arrangement is "PB ≠ 1".
Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 17" has two types of prize numbers "121" and "122", and is arranged in a "PB ≠ 1" configuration.
Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 18" is only one type, which is the prize number "123", and the arrangement is "PB ≠ 1".

The symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 19" has two types of prize numbers "124" and "125", and is arranged in a "PB ≠ 1" configuration.
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 20" has three types of prize numbers "126" to "128", and is arranged in a "PB ≠ 1" configuration.
Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small prize 21" has three types of prize numbers "129" to "131", and is arranged in a "PB ≠ 1" configuration.
Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small prize 22" has three types of prize numbers "132" to "134", and is arranged in a "PB ≠ 1" configuration.

Here, the "Blue 7", "Big BAR", "Small BAR" and "Symbol" on the middle reel 31 are in a "PB=1" arrangement for these four symbols combined. Therefore, although the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winner 18" to "Small Winner 22" are all in a "PB≠1" arrangement, in a game in which "Small Winner 18" to "Small Winner 22" are overlappingly won, it is possible to make it possible to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to any of "Small Winner 18" to "Small Winner 22".

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small prize 23" has three types of prize numbers "135" to "137", and is arranged in a "PB ≠ 1" configuration.
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small prize 24" has three types of prize numbers "138" to "140", and is arranged in a "PB ≠ 1" configuration.

The symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 25" has four types of prize numbers "141" to "144", and is arranged in a "PB ≠ 1" configuration.
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small prize 26" has four types of prize numbers "145" to "148", and is arranged in a "PB ≠ 1" configuration.
Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small prize 27" has four types of prize numbers "149" to "152", and is arranged in a "PB ≠ 1" configuration.
Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small prize 28" has four types of prize numbers "153" to "156", and is arranged in a "PB ≠ 1" configuration.

Here, the four symbols on the right reel 31, "Blue 7", "Red 7", "Big BAR" and "Symbol", combine to form a "PB=1" arrangement. Therefore, although the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winner 25" to "Small Winner 28" are all in a "PB ≠ 1" arrangement, in a game in which "Small Winner 25" to "Small Winner 28" are overlappingly won, it is possible to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to any of "Small Winner 25" to "Small Winner 28".

The symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 29" has 12 types of prize numbers from "157" to "168", and is arranged as "PB=1".
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 30" has eight types of prize numbers "169" to "176", and is arranged as "PB=1".

The symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 31" has four types of prize numbers "177" to "180", and is arranged in a "PB ≠ 1" configuration.
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small prize 32" has four types of prize numbers "181" to "184", and is arranged in a "PB ≠ 1" configuration.
Here, the "red 7" and "blank" on the center reel 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement for the two symbols combined. Therefore, although the symbol combinations corresponding to the "small prize 31" and the "small prize 32" are both in the "PB≠1" arrangement, in a game in which the "small prize 31" and the "small prize 32" are both won, the symbol combination corresponding to either the "small prize 31" or the "small prize 32" can be stopped and displayed.

There is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to each of "small prize 33" to "small prize 81", and all of them are arranged in "PB≠1".
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small prize 82" has two types of prize numbers, "234" and "235", and is arranged in a "PB ≠ 1" configuration.
Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small prize 83" is only one type, which is the prize number "236", and the arrangement is "PB ≠ 1".
Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 84" has four types of prize numbers "237" to "240", and is arranged in a "PB ≠ 1" configuration.

The symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 85" has four types of prize numbers "241" to "244", and is arranged in a "PB ≠ 1" configuration.
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small prize 86" is only one type, which is the prize number "245", and the arrangement is "PB ≠ 1".
Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small prize 87" is only one type, the prize number "246", and the arrangement is "PB=1".
Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small prize 88" has two types of prize numbers, "247" and "248", which together form a "PB=1" arrangement.

The symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 89" is only one type, the prize number "249", and the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 90" is only one type, the prize number "250". In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 91" is only one type, the prize number "251", and the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 92" is only one type, the prize number "252". And the symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 89" to "small prize 92" are all in the "PB=1" arrangement.

For each of the above-mentioned roles, when a symbol combination corresponding to a winning role does not stop on an active line in a game in which the winning role is won, roles that are carried over to the next game and roles that are not carried over are determined.
In this embodiment, the carried over role is MB ("MB01" to "MB03"). In this embodiment, all of the symbol combinations corresponding to MB are set to "PB=1", but even if MB is won, there are cases where the symbol combination corresponding to MB is not stopped and displayed (MB does not win). When MB is won, the winning information of MB is controlled to be carried over to the next game and thereafter until MB wins.

On the other hand, when a minor win or replay is won, the winning combination is only valid for the current game, and the winning information is not carried over to the next game or later. In other words, in a game in which such a combination is won, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can stop on an active line, but regardless of whether the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination stops on an active line or not, the right to the winning combination will be extinguished at the end of the game.

206 to 218 are diagrams showing the condition device in this embodiment.
Fig. 206 shows a reel condition device. As shown in Fig. 206, in this embodiment, the reel condition device is provided with only one type of "MB condition device" corresponding to the reel condition device number "1".
Furthermore, the "MB condition device" is drawn only during non-RT and non-internal periods (Figures 219 to 220).
For example, when the winning number "22" is drawn by the lottery by the role drawing means 61 during non-RT and non-internal play, the role condition device number "1" and the small role and replay condition device number "22" are generated from this winning number "22" (Fig. 219). Then, the "MB condition device" (Fig. 206) corresponding to the role condition device number "1" and the "small role C1 condition device" (Fig. 211) corresponding to the small role and replay condition device number "22" are activated.

In addition, the winning roles of the "MB condition device" are set to three types: "MB01" to "MB03" (Figure 206).
In this embodiment, there are three types of MBs, "MB01" to "MB03" (Figure 200), but there is only one type of reel condition device, the "MB condition device" (Figure 206).
Furthermore, when the "MB condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combinations "MB01" to "MB03" can be stopped and displayed on the pay line (can win a prize).
When the "MB condition device" is activated, if a symbol combination corresponding to any one of "MB01" to "MB03" is displayed stopped on an active line, an MB win is achieved, and although no medals are paid out in this game, the game transitions to an MB game (when the MB is activated) from the next game.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figures 219 to 220 described below, during non-RT and non-internal periods, the "MB condition device" does not operate alone (single winning), but operates in overlap with any of the "small prize C1 condition device" to "small prize F condition device" (overlapping winning).
Here, the symbol combinations corresponding to "MB01" to "MB03" are all arranged as "PB=1". For this reason, for example, when the "MB condition device" operates alone (single winning) during a non-RT and non-internal period, the symbol combination corresponding to any of "MB01" to "MB03" in the game will be displayed on the pay line, but in this embodiment, the "MB condition device" does not operate alone (single winning) during a non-RT and non-internal period.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 221 to 222 described later, during a non-RT and inside an MB, the lottery by the role selection means 61 will never result in a non-winning result.
As described above, all of the symbol combinations corresponding to "MB01" to "MB03" are in the "PB=1" arrangement, so for example, if the symbol combination is not a winning combination by the role selection means 61 while not in a RT and inside an MB, the symbol combination corresponding to any of "MB01" to "MB03" will be displayed stopped on the winning line; however, in this embodiment, the symbol combination is not a winning combination by the role selection means 61 while not in a RT and inside an MB.

Also, for example, when the winning number "22" is drawn by the role drawing means 61 in a non-RT and inside the MB, the small role and replay condition device number "22" and the role condition device number "1" are generated from this winning number "22". Then, the "small role C1 condition device" operates in response to the generated small role and replay condition device number "22", but since the "MB condition device" is already operating in a non-RT and inside the MB, the generated role condition device number "1" is cleared.
Similarly, for example, when the winning number "22" is drawn by the role drawing means 61 during MB play, a small role and replay condition device number "22" and a role condition device number "1" are generated from this winning number "22", but since the MB is already operating during MB play, the generated role condition device number "1" is cleared.

In addition, the notes column in Figure 206 indicates the operating conditions, performance, and termination conditions of the reels.
When the "MB condition device" is activated, if a symbol combination corresponding to any one of "MB01" to "MB03" is displayed stopped on an active line, no medals will be paid out in the current game, but from the next game, the game will transition to the MB activation time (MB game).

While MB is in operation (while MB is being played), CB operates continuously.
In addition, since a symbol combination (CB operation symbol) corresponding to CB is not set, while MB is in operation, CB operates continuously without a symbol combination corresponding to CB being displayed in a stopped state.
Furthermore, during CB operation, regardless of the results of the lottery by the prize lottery means 61, all minor prizes are won, and the time from the moment the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected until the reel 31 stops for a specific reel 31 (in this embodiment, the left reel 31) is within 75 ms. In other words, the maximum number of moving symbols from the moment the operation of the left stop switch 42 is detected until the left reel 31 stops is one symbol. Furthermore, CB operation ends after one game.

Furthermore, the MB operation continues until the cumulative number of medals acquired (number of medals paid out, number of medals awarded) exceeds 13, and ends when the cumulative number of medals acquired exceeds 13.
Then, when the CB operation is ended, if the MB operation end condition is satisfied, the MB operation is ended and a transition is made to a non-RT and non-internal state.
On the other hand, when the CB operation is terminated, if the MB operation termination condition is not satisfied, the CB is activated again.

In addition, while the CB is in operation, the specified number (the number of medals betted to start a game) is set to two, and the reel 31 is controlled to stop so that a minor winning combination with a payout (the number of medals paid out when a pattern combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed) set to two is won.
Therefore, when the MB is in operation (when the CB is in continuous operation), two medals are bet for each game and two medals are paid out (two medals in, two medals out), so the player's medals neither increase nor decrease.
Then, when the CB is activated seven times while the MB is in operation, the total number of medals paid out during the MB operation becomes 14, exceeding 13, so the condition for terminating the MB operation is met, and then the game transitions to a non-RT and non-internal state.

Figures 207 to 218 show the minor winnings and replay condition device in this embodiment.
In the notes column of Figures 207 to 218, "Push order 123" indicates the push order of "left, center, right," and "Push order 132" indicates the push order of "left, right, center." Also, "Push order 213" indicates the push order of "center, left, right," and "Push order 231" indicates the push order of "center, right, left." Furthermore, "Push order 312" indicates the push order of "right, left, center," and "Push order 321" indicates the push order of "right, center, left." Furthermore, "Push order 1 --" indicates that the first stop is "1 (left)" and the second and third stops are optional. Similarly, "Push order 2 --" indicates that the first stop is "2 (center)," and the second and third stops are optional, and "Push order 3 --" indicates that the first stop is "3 (right)," and the second and third stops are optional.

As shown in FIG. 207, there are nine types of replay condition devices, ranging from a "replay A condition device" corresponding to a small win and replay condition device number "1" to a "replay I condition device" corresponding to a small win and replay condition device number "9."
In addition, the "Replay A Condition Device" to the "Replay I Condition Device" conduct lotteries in all game states (non-RT and not inside (Figures 219 to 220), non-RT and inside MB (Figures 221 to 222), and during MB gameplay (Figures 223 to 224)).
However, during MB play, the "small win ALL condition device" operates, and based on this "small win ALL condition device," the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to a small win that pays out two coins. Therefore, during MB play, the reel 31 is not controlled to stop based on the "replay A condition device" to "replay I condition device."

The "Replay A Condition Device" includes the four types of winning combinations described in the winning combination column of FIG.
For example, when the winning number "1" is drawn by the lottery by the winning lottery means 61 during non-RT and non-internal play, a small win and a replay condition device number "1" are generated from this winning number "1" (FIG. 219). Then, the "replay A condition device" (FIG. 207) corresponding to the small win and the replay condition device number "1" is activated.
During non-RT and non-internal play, when the "Replay A condition device" is activated, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to any one of "Replay 01" to "Replay 03" on an active line according to the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed.

Specifically, during non-RT and non-internal play, when the "Replay A condition device" is activated, and the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display the pattern combination (PB=1) corresponding to "Replay 01" on the activated line.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any desired pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "Replay 02" on the activated line.

Furthermore, when the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop to the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "Replay 03" on the activated line.
When the symbol combinations corresponding to "REPLAY 01" to "REPLAY 03" are displayed, a medal is automatically inserted and the player can play again.

Also, when the "Replay A condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside an MB, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "Replay A condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside an MB.
When the symbol combination corresponding to "REPLAY 01" is displayed stopped on an active line, "REPLAY"-"REPLAY"-"REPLAY" are displayed stopped on the upper inactive line.
In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to "REPLAY 02" is displayed stopped on an active line, "REPLAY"-"REPLAY"-"REPLAY" are displayed stopped on an inactive line sloping downward to the right passing through the upper left, middle middle, and lower right rows.
Furthermore, when a symbol combination corresponding to "REPLAY 03" is stopped and displayed on an active line, "REPLAY"-"REPLAY"-"REPLAY" are stopped and displayed on an inactive line in the middle row.

The "Replay B Condition Device" includes the three types of winning combinations described in the winning combination column of FIG.
When the "Replay B condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that a symbol combination corresponding to any one of "Replay 01" to "Replay 03" is displayed on an active line in accordance with the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed.

Specifically, when the "Replay B condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that, when the reels stop first on the left, a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "Replay 02" is displayed on the activated line, when the reels stop first on the center, a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "Replay 01" is displayed on the activated line, and when the reels stop first on the right, a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "Replay 03" is displayed on the activated line.
In addition, when the "Replay B condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside MB, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "Replay B condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside MB.

The "Replay C Condition Device" includes the nine types of winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of FIG.
When the "Replay C condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "Replay 01" is displayed on the pay line regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed.

Specifically, when the "Replay C condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, priority is given to displaying, on an active line, among the symbol combinations corresponding to "Replay 01", "REPLAY"-"Big BAR"-"Watermelon" with the role number "15", or "REPLAY"-"Big BAR"-"Blank" with the role number "16", and if these cannot be displayed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that any one of the symbol combinations with the role numbers "13", "14", or "17" to "20" is displayed on an active line.
In addition, when the "Replay C condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside an MB, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "Replay C condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside an MB.

The "Replay D Condition Device" includes the seven types of winning combinations described in the winning combination column of FIG.
When the "Replay D condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "Replay 09" is displayed on the pay line regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed.
In addition, when the "Replay D condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside an MB, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "Replay D condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside an MB.

The "Replay E Condition Device" includes the eight types of winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of FIG.
When the "Replay E condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "Replay 04" is displayed on the activated line, regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed.

Specifically, when the "Replay E condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, priority is given to displaying, on an active line, among the symbol combinations corresponding to "Replay 04", "watermelon"-"big BAR"-"big BAR" with the role number "32", or "blank"-"big BAR"-"big BAR" with the role number "36", and if these cannot be displayed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that any one of the symbol combinations with role numbers "23" to "31", "33" to "35", or "37" to "38" is displayed on an active line.
In addition, when the "Replay E condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside an MB, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "Replay E condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside an MB.

The "Replay F Condition Device" includes the nine types of winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of FIG.
When the "Replay F condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "Replay 05" is displayed on the activated line, regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed.

Specifically, when the "Replay F condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay 05", namely, "Bell"-"Big BAR"-"Small BAR" with the symbol number "40", on the active line, and if this cannot be displayed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that any one of the symbol combinations with the symbol numbers "39", "41" or "42" is displayed on the active line.
In addition, when the "Replay F condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside an MB, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "Replay F condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside an MB.

The "Replay G Condition Device" includes the seven types of winning combinations described in the winning combination column of FIG.
When the "Replay G condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal operation, if the stop switch 42 is operated with the first left stop, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination (PB ≠ 1) corresponding to "Replay 06" on the active line, and if this cannot be displayed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination (PB = 1) corresponding to "Replay 02" or "Replay 03" on the active line.

In addition, when the "Replay G condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the first stop in the middle or right, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "Replay 02" or "Replay 03" on the activated line.
In addition, when the "Replay G condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside an MB, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "Replay G condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside an MB.

The "Replay H Condition Device" includes the six types of winning combinations described in the winning combination column of FIG.
When the "replay H condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "replay 11" is displayed on the activated line, regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed.
In addition, when the "replay H condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside an MB, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "replay H condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside an MB.

The "Replay I Condition Device" includes the five types of winning combinations described in the winning combination column of FIG.
When the "Replay I condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "Replay 12" is displayed on the pay line regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed.
In addition, when the "Replay I condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside an MB, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "Replay I condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside an MB.

As shown in Figures 208 to 218, there are 47 types of small win condition devices, ranging from the "small win A1 condition device" corresponding to the small win and replay condition device number "10" to the "small win ALL condition device" corresponding to the small win and replay condition device number "56".
In addition, the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" to the "Small Role H Condition Device" are drawn in all game states (non-RT and not inside (Figures 219 to 220), non-RT and inside MB (Figures 221 to 222), and during MB play (Figures 223 to 224)).
Furthermore, during MB play, regardless of the lottery result by the role lottery means 61, the "small role ALL condition device" operates, and based on this "small role ALL condition device", the reel 31 is stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to the small role that pays out two coins is stopped and displayed. Therefore, during MB play, the reel 31 is not stopped and controlled based on the "small role A1 condition device" to the "small role H condition device".

The "small prize A1 condition device" includes the 10 types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
For example, when the winning number "10" is drawn by the winning lottery means 61 during non-RT and non-internal play, the small win and replay condition device number "10" is generated from the winning number "10" (FIG. 219). Then, the "small win A1 condition device" (FIG. 208) corresponding to the small win and replay condition device number "10" is activated.
When the "small win A1 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, center, right (123)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 90" (payout of 13 coins) on an active line with a probability of 1/1 (always).

Specifically, at the first left stop, the "Bell" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row, at the second center stop, the "Replay" (PB=1) of the center reel 31 is stopped in the middle row, and at the third right stop, the "Small BAR" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stopped in the middle right row. This allows the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 90" at "PB=1" to be stopped and displayed on the activated line.
When the symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 90" is displayed stopped on an active line, "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on the inactive line in the upper row.

When the "small win A1 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "left/right/middle (132)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01" or "small win 02" (both pay out one coin) on the active line with a probability of 1/1 (always).

Specifically, at the first left stop, the "bell" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row, and then at the second right stop, the "watermelon" or "blank" (the two symbols combined for "PB=1") on the right reel 31 is stopped in the middle right row to allow either "minor prize 01" or "minor prize 02" to be won. After that, at the third middle stop, the "red 7" or "blank" (the two symbols combined for "PB=1") on the middle reel 31 is stopped in the middle middle row. This allows the symbol combination corresponding to either "minor prize 01" or "minor prize 02" to be stopped and displayed on the winning line at "PB=1".

When the "small win A1 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the "center left right (213)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03" or "small win 04" (both pay out one coin) on the active line with a probability of 1/2.

Specifically, at the first center stop, the "bell" (PB=1) on the center reel 31 is stopped in the center middle row to allow either "small prize 03" or "small prize 04" to be won. Next, at the second left stop, the "blue 7" or "red 7" on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row. Finally, at the third right stop, the "small BAR" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row.
Here, since the "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 is positioned only on "No. 18", unless the left stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "No. 14" to "No. 18" on the left reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 cannot be stopped on the active line (upper left row). Therefore, the probability of the "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 stopping on the upper left row is "1/4".

Similarly, since the "red 7" on the left reel 31 is positioned only on the "8th" symbol, unless the left stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "4" to "8" on the left reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "red 7" on the left reel 31 cannot be stopped on the active line (upper left row). Therefore, the probability of the "red 7" on the left reel 31 stopping on the upper left row is "1/4".
From the above, the probability of the “Blue 7” or “Red 7” on the left reel 31 stopping in the upper left row is “1/2”, and therefore the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to the “Small win 03” or “Small win 04” stopping on the pay line is “1/2”.

When the "small win A1 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "middle right left (231)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03" or "small win 04" on the pay line with a probability of 1/2, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "middle left right (213)."

When the "small win A1 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "right, left, center (312)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 18", "small win 19" or "small win 21" (each of which pays out one coin) on the pay line with a probability of 1/2.

Specifically, at the first right stop, "Replay" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row so that either "Small Win 18", "Small Win 19" or "Small Win 21" can be won. Next, at the second left stop, "Watermelon", "Blank" or "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row. Finally, at the third middle stop, "Blue 7" or "Small BAR" is stopped in the middle middle row.
Here, since the two symbols of "watermelon" and "blank" on the left reel 31 combine to form a "PB=1" arrangement, when the left reel stops for the second time, the "watermelon", "blank" or "blue 7" on the left reel 31 can always be stopped on the upper left row.

However, since the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 is only positioned at "No. 13," unless the center stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "No. 9" to "No. 13" on the center reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 cannot be stopped on an active line (middle row). Therefore, the probability of the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 stopping on the middle row is "1/4."

Similarly, since the "small BAR" on the center reel 31 is positioned only on "No. 8", unless the center stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "No. 4" to "No. 8" on the center reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "small BAR" on the center reel 31 cannot be stopped on the active line (middle row). Therefore, the probability of stopping the "small BAR" on the center reel 31 on the middle row is "1/4".
From the above, the probability of stopping the “Blue 7” or “Small BAR” on the center reel 31 in the middle row is “1/2”, and therefore the probability of stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the “Small symbol 18”, “Small symbol 19”, or “Small symbol 21” on an active line is “1/2”.

When the "small win A1 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "right, center, left (321)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 18," "small win 19," or "small win 21" on the pay line with a probability of 1/2, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "right, left, center (312)."

In addition, when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside MB, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside MB.
In addition, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated in the non-RT and MB, the "bell" (PB=1) of the center reel 31 always stops on an active line in order to prioritize the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03" or "small win 04" at the time of the first stop in the middle. Therefore, when "small win 03" or "small win 04" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" to "MB03" will not stop on an active line.

Similarly, when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated in a non-RT and inside an MB, the "Replay" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 always stops on an active line, since priority is given to stopping and displaying the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 18", "Small Win 19" or "Small Win 21" when the first right reel stops. Therefore, when "Small Win 18", "Small Win 19" or "Small Win 21" is missed, the symbol combinations corresponding to "MB01" to "MB03" will never stop on an active line.

The "small prize A2 condition device" includes the eight types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
When the "small win A2 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, center, right (123)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01" or "small win 02" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/1 (always).
When the "small win A2 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, right, center (132)," the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 90" (payout of 13 coins) on an active line with a probability of 1/1 (always).

When the "small win A2 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "center left right (213)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 05" or "small win 06" (both pay out one coin) on the active line with a probability of 1/2.

Specifically, at the first center stop, the "bell" (PB=1) on the center reel 31 is stopped in the center middle row to allow either "small prize 05" or "small prize 06" to be won. Next, at the second left stop, the "big BAR" or "symbol" on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row. Finally, at the third right stop, the "small BAR" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row.
Here, since the "big BAR" on the left reel 31 is positioned only on "number 3", unless the left stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "number 19", "number 0", "number 1" to "number 3" on the left reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "big BAR" on the left reel 31 cannot be stopped on the active line (upper left row). Therefore, the probability of stopping the "big BAR" on the left reel 31 on the upper left row is "1/4".

Similarly, since the "symbol" on the left reel 31 is only positioned at "13th", unless the left stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "9" to "13" on the left reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "symbol" on the left reel 31 cannot be stopped on the active line (upper left row). Therefore, the probability of stopping the "symbol" on the left reel 31 on the upper left row is "1/4".
From the above, since the probability of the “Big BAR” or “Symbol” on the left reel 31 stopping in the upper left row is “1/2”, the probability of the pattern combination corresponding to the “Small Winning Symbol 05” or the “Small Winning Symbol 06” stopping on the winning line is “1/2”.

When the "small win A2 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "middle right left (231)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 05" or "small win 06" on the pay line with a probability of 1/2, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "middle left right (213)."

When the "small win A2 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "right, left, center (312)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 20" or "small win 22" (both pay out one coin) on the pay line with a probability of 1/2.

Specifically, at the first right stop, the "Replay" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row so that either the "Small Win 20" or the "Small Win 22" can be won. Next, at the second left stop, the "Watermelon", "Blank" or "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row. Finally, at the third middle stop, the "Big BAR" or "Symbol" on the center reel 31 is stopped in the middle middle row.
As described above, the two symbols of "watermelon" and "blank" on the left reel 31 combine to form a "PB=1" arrangement, so that when the left second stop occurs, the "watermelon", "blank" or "blue 7" on the left reel 31 can always be stopped on the upper left row.

However, since the "Big BAR" on the center reel 31 is only positioned at "3", unless the center stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "19", "0", "1" to "3" on the center reel 31 are positioned on an active line, the "Big BAR" on the center reel 31 cannot be stopped on an active line (middle row). Therefore, the probability of the "Big BAR" on the center reel 31 stopping on the middle row is "1/4".

Similarly, since the "symbol" on the center reel 31 is only positioned at "18", unless the center stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "14" to "18" on the center reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "symbol" on the center reel 31 cannot be stopped on the active line (middle row). Therefore, the probability of stopping the "symbol" on the center reel 31 on the middle row is "1/4".
From the above, since the probability of stopping the “big BAR” or “symbol” on the center reel 31 in the middle-middle row is “1/2”, the probability of stopping the pattern combination corresponding to the “small win 20” or the “small win 22” on an active line is “1/2”.

When the "small win A2 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "right, center, left (321)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 20" or "small win 22" on the pay line with a probability of 1/2, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "right, left, center (312)."

In addition, when the "small prize A2 condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside MB, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "small prize A2 condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside MB.
In addition, when the "small win A2 condition device" is activated in non-RT and inside MB, the "bell" (PB=1) on the center reel 31 always stops on an active line in order to prioritize displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 05" or "small win 06" at the time of the first stop in the middle. Therefore, when "small win 05" or "small win 06" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" to "MB03" will not stop on an active line.

Similarly, when the "Small win A2 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and MB, the "Replay" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 always stops on an active line, since priority is given to stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 20" or "Small win 22" when the first right reel stops. Therefore, when "Small win 20" or "Small win 22" is missed, the symbol combinations corresponding to "MB01" to "MB03" will never stop on an active line.

The "small prize A3 condition device" includes the 10 types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
When the "small win A3 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, center, right (123)," the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01" or "small win 31" (both of which pay out one coin) on the activated line.
Specifically, at the first left stop, the "bell" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row so that either "small prize 01" or "small prize 31" can be won. Next, at the second center stop, the "red 7" on the center reel 31 is stopped in the middle center row. Finally, at the third right stop, the "watermelon", "blank", "blue 7", "red 7", "big BAR" or "symbol" on the right reel 31 is stopped in the middle right row.

Here, since the "red 7" on the center reel 31 is positioned only on "number 11," unless the center stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "number 7" to "number 11" on the center reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "red 7" on the center reel 31 cannot be stopped on the active line (middle row).
From the above, since the probability of the "red 7" on the center reel 31 stopping in the middle row is "1/4", the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 01" or the "small win 31" stopping on the pay line is "1/4".

When the "small win A3 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left/right/middle (132)," the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01" or "small win 31" on the activated line, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left/middle/right (123)."

When the "small win A3 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "middle left right (213)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 91" (payout of 13 coins) on an active line with a probability of 1/1 (always).
When the "small win A3 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "middle right left (231)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to any one of "small win 03" to "small win 06" (each of which pays out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/1 (always).

Specifically, when the center first stop occurs, the "bell" (PB=1) on the center reel 31 is stopped in the center middle row, and then when the right second stop occurs, the "small BAR" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row to allow any of "small prize 03" to "small prize 06" to be won. After that, when the left third stop occurs, the "blue 7", "red 7", "big BAR" or "symbol" (4 symbols combined for "PB=1") on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row. This allows a symbol combination corresponding to any of "small prize 03" to "small prize 06" to be stopped and displayed on an active line with "PB=1".

When the "small prize A3 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "right left middle (312)" or "right middle left (321)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 18," "small prize 19," or "small prize 21" on the activated line with a probability of 1/2, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "right left middle (312)" or "right middle left (321)" during non-RT and non-internal play.

When the "small prize A3 condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside MB, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "small prize A3 condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside MB.
In addition, when the "small win A3 condition device" is activated in non-RT and inside MB, the "bell" on the left reel 31 always stops on an active line in order to prioritize displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01" or "small win 31" when the left first stop occurs. Therefore, when "small win 01" or "small win 31" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" to "MB03" will not stop on an active line.

Similarly, when the "Small Win A3 Condition Device" is activated in a non-RT and inside an MB, the "Replay" on the right reel 31 always stops on an active line, as priority is given to stopping and displaying the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 18", "Small Win 19" or "Small Win 21" when the first right reel stops. Therefore, when "Small Win 18", "Small Win 19" or "Small Win 21" is missed, the symbol combinations corresponding to "MB01" to "MB03" will never stop on an active line.

The "small prize A4 condition device" includes the six types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
When the "small win A4 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, center, right (123)," the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 02" or "small win 32" (both of which pay out one coin) on the activated line.

Specifically, at the first left stop, the "bell" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row to allow for either "minor prize 02" or "minor prize 32" to be won. Next, at the second middle stop, the "blank" on the middle reel 31 is stopped in the middle middle row. Finally, at the third right stop, the "watermelon", "blank", "blue 7", "red 7", "big BAR" or "symbol" on the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row.

Here, since the “blanks” on the middle reel 31 are located in three positions, “1,” “6,” and “16,” if the middle stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols “7” to “11” on the middle reel 31 are located on an active line, the “blanks” on the middle reel 31 cannot be stopped on an active line (middle row).
From the above, since the probability of making the “blank” on center reel 31 stop in the middle-middle row is “3/4”, the probability of making the symbol combination corresponding to “minor win 02” or “minor win 32” stop on an active line is “3/4”.

When the "small win A4 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left/right/middle (132)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 02" or "small win 32" on the pay line, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left/middle/right (123)."

When the "small win A4 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "center left right (213)," the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 07" (payout of 1 coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/1 (always).
When the "small win A4 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "middle right left (231)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to one of the "small win 92" (payout of 13 coins) on an active line with a probability of 1/1 (always).

When the "small prize A4 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "right left center (312)" or "right center left (321)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 20" or "small prize 22" on the activated line with a probability of 1/2, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "right left center (312)" or "right center left (321)" during non-RT and non-internal play.

When the "small prize A4 condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside MB, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "small prize A4 condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside MB.
In addition, when the "small win A4 condition device" is activated in non-RT and inside MB, the "bell" on the left reel 31 always stops on an active line in order to prioritize displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 02" or "small win 32" when the left first stop occurs. Therefore, when "small win 02" or "small win 32" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" to "MB03" will not stop on an active line.

Similarly, when the "Small win A4 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and inside an MB, the "Replay" on the right reel 31 always stops on an active line, since priority is given to stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 20" or "Small win 22" when the first right reel stops. Therefore, when "Small win 20" or "Small win 22" is missed, the symbol combinations corresponding to "MB01" to "MB03" will never stop on an active line.

The "small prize A5 condition device" includes the seven types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
When the "small win A5 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, center, right (123)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 25" or "small win 26" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/2.

Specifically, at the first left stop, the "Replay" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row so that either "Small Win 25" or "Small Win 26" can be won. Next, at the second center stop, the "Blue 7", "Big BAR", "Small BAR" or "Symbol" (4 symbols combined for "PB=1") on the center reel 31 is stopped in the middle center row. Finally, at the third right stop, the "Blue 7" or "Red 7" on the right reel 31 is stopped in the middle right row.

Here, since the "red 7" on the right reel 31 is positioned only at the "8th" position, the probability of the "red 7" on the right reel 31 stopping in the right middle row is "1/4".
Similarly, since the "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 is positioned only at "number 18", the probability of the "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 stopping in the middle right row is "1/4".
From the above, the probability of the "red 7" or "blue 7" on the right reel 31 stopping in the middle right row is "1/2", and therefore the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to the "minor win 25" or "minor win 26" stopping on the pay line is "1/2".

When the "small win A5 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left/right/middle (132)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 25" or "small win 26" on the pay line, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left/middle/right (123)."

When the "small win A5 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "middle left/right (213)" or "middle right/left (231)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03" or "small win 04" on the activated line with a probability of 1/2, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "middle left/right (213)" or "middle right/left (231)" during non-RT and non-internal play.

When the "small win A5 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "right, left, center (312)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 90" (payout of 13 coins) on an active line with a probability of 1/1 (always).
When the "small win A5 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "right, center, left (321)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 08" (payout of 1 coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/1 (always).

When the "small prize A5 condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside MB, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "small prize A5 condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside MB.
In addition, when the "small win A5 condition device" is activated in non-RT and inside MB, the "replay" of the left reel 31 always stops on an active line in order to prioritize displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 25" or "small win 26" when the left first stop occurs. Therefore, when "small win 25" or "small win 26" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" to "MB03" will not stop on an active line.

Similarly, when the "Small win A5 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and MB, the "bell" on the center reel 31 always stops on an active line, since priority is given to stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 03" or "Small win 04" at the time of the first center stop. Therefore, when "Small win 03" or "Small win 04" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" to "MB03" will not stop on an active line.

The "small prize A6 condition device" includes the seven types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
When the "small win A6 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, center, right (123)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 27" or "small win 28" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/2.

Specifically, at the first left stop, the "Replay" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row so that either "Small Win 27" or "Small Win 28" can be won. Next, at the second center stop, the "Blue 7", "Big BAR", "Small BAR" or "Symbol" (4 symbols combined for "PB=1") on the center reel 31 is stopped in the middle center row. Finally, at the third right stop, the "Big BAR" or "Symbol" on the right reel 31 is stopped in the middle right row.

Here, since the "big BAR" on the right reel 31 is positioned only at "number 3", the probability of stopping the "big BAR" on the right reel 31 in the right middle row is "1/4".
Similarly, since the "symbol" on the right reel 31 is positioned only at "number 13", the probability of stopping the "symbol" on the right reel 31 in the right middle row is "1/4".
From the above, since the probability of the “big BAR” or “symbol” on the right reel 31 stopping in the right middle row is “1/2”, the probability of the pattern combination corresponding to the “small win 27” or the “small win 28” stopping on the pay line is “1/2”.

When the "small win A6 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left/right/middle (132)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 27" or "small win 28" on the pay line, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left/middle/right (123)."

When the "small win A6 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "middle left/right (213)" or "middle right/left (231)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 05" or "small win 06" on the activated line with a probability of 1/2, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "middle left/right (213)" or "middle right/left (231)" during non-RT and non-internal play.

When the "small win A6 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "right, left, center (312)," the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 08" (payout of 1 coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/1 (always).
When the "small win A6 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "right, center, left (321)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 90" (payout of 13 coins) on an active line with a probability of 1/1 (always).

When the "small prize A6 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and inside an MB, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "small prize A6 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and outside an MB.
In addition, when the "small win A6 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and MB, the "replay" of the left reel 31 always stops on an active line in order to prioritize displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 27" or "small win 28" when the left first stop occurs. Therefore, when the "small win 27" or "small win 28" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" to "MB03" will not stop on an active line.

Similarly, when the "Small win A6 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and inside an MB, the "bell" on the center reel 31 always stops on an active line, since priority is given to stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 05" or "Small win 06" at the time of the first center stop. Therefore, when "Small win 05" or "Small win 06" is missed, the symbol combinations corresponding to "MB01" to "MB03" will not stop on an active line.

The "small prize B1 condition device" includes the 11 types of winning prizes listed in the winning prize column of FIG.
When the "small win B1 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 90" (payout of 13 coins) on an active line with a probability of "1/1" (always), regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed.
When the "small win B1 condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside MB, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated while not in RT and not inside MB or inside MB.

The "small prize B2 condition device" includes the nine types of winning prizes listed in the winning prize column of FIG.
When the "small win B2 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 90" (payout of 13 coins) on an active line with a probability of "1/1" (always), regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed.
When the "small prize B2 condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside MB, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "small prize A2 condition device" is activated while not in RT and not inside MB or inside MB.

The "small prize B3 condition device" includes the 11 types of winning prizes listed in the winning prize column of FIG.
When the "small win B3 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 91" (payout of 13 coins) on an active line with a probability of "1/1" (always), regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed.
When the "small prize B3 condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside MB, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "small prize A3 condition device" is activated while not in RT and not inside MB or inside MB.

The "small prize B4 condition device" includes the seven types of winning prizes listed in the winning prize column of FIG.
When the "small win B4 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 92" (payout of 13 coins) on an active line with a probability of "1/1" (always), regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed.
When the "small win B4 condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside MB, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "small win A4 condition device" is activated while not in RT and not inside MB or inside MB.

The "small prize B5 condition device" includes the eight types of winning prizes listed in the winning prize column of FIG.
When the "small win B5 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 90" (payout of 13 coins) on an active line with a probability of "1/1" (always), regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed.
When the "small prize B5 condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside MB, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "small prize A5 condition device" is activated while not in RT and not inside MB or inside MB.

The "small prize B6 condition device" includes the eight types of winning prizes listed in the winning prize column of FIG.
When the "small win B6 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 90" (payout of 13 coins) on an active line with a probability of "1/1" (always), regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed.
When the "small win B6 condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside an MB, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "small win A6 condition device" is activated while not in RT and not inside an MB or inside an MB.

The "small prize C1 condition device" includes the seven types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
Also, during non-RT and non-internal periods, the "small win C1 condition device" operates in conjunction with the "MB condition device" (duplicate win).
Specifically, when the winning number "22" is selected by the lottery by the role selection means 61 during non-RT and non-internal play, the role condition device number "1" and the small role and replay condition device number "22" are generated from the winning number "22" (Fig. 219). Then, the "MB condition device" (Fig. 206) corresponding to the role condition device number "1" and the "small role C1 condition device" (Fig. 211) corresponding to the small role and replay condition device number "22" are activated.

When the "small win C1 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, center, right (123)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 87" (payout of 3 coins) on an active line with a probability of 1/1 (always).
When the "small win C1 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, right, center (132)," the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 09" (payout of 1 coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/1 (always).

When the "small win C1 condition device" in the non-RT and non-internal middle is activated, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "middle left right (213)", the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of 1/4.
Specifically, at the first center stop, the "bell" (PB=1) on the center reel 31 is stopped in the center middle row to allow the "small prize 03" to be won. Next, at the second left stop, the "blue 7" on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row. Finally, at the third right stop, the "small BAR" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row.
Here, since the "blue 7" on the left reel 31 is positioned only at "number 18", the probability of the "blue 7" on the left reel 31 stopping on the upper left row is "1/4".
Therefore, the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 03" being stopped and displayed on an active line is "1/4".

When the "small win C1 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "middle right left (231)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03" on the activated line with a probability of 1/4, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "middle left right (213)."

When the "small win C1 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "right, left, center (312)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 18" or "small win 19" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/4.
Specifically, at the first right stop, the "Replay" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row so that either "Small Win 18" or "Small Win 19" can be won. Next, at the second left stop, the "Watermelon", "Blank" or "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row. Finally, at the third middle stop, the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 is stopped in the middle middle row.
Since the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 is only positioned at "No. 13", the probability that the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 can be stopped in the middle row is "1/4". Therefore, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 18" or "Small win 19" can be stopped on an active line is "1/4".

When the "small win C1 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "right, center, left (321)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 18" or "small win 19" on an active line with a probability of 1/4, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "right, left, center (312)."

When the "small win C1 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and inside an MB, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and inside an MB.
In addition, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal or MB, the "bell" (PB=1) on the center reel 31 always stops on an active line in order to prioritize displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03" at the time of the first center stop. Therefore, when "small win 03" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" to "MB03" will not stop on an active line.

Similarly, when the "Small win C1 condition device" is activated while not in RT and not inside or inside MB, when the first right reel stops, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 18" or "Small win 19", so the "Replay" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 always stops on an active line. For this reason, when "Small win 18" or "Small win 19" is missed, the symbol combinations corresponding to "MB01" to "MB03" will never stop on an active line.

The "small prize C2 condition device" includes the six types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, the "small prize C2 condition device" operates in conjunction with the "MB condition device" (duplicate win).

When the "small win C2 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, center, right (123)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 09" (payout of 1 coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/1 (always).
When the "small win C2 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, right, center (132)," the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 87" (payout of 3 coins) on an active line with a probability of 1/1 (always).

When the "small win C2 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "center left right (213)," the reel 31 is controlled to stop so that a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 04" (one coin payout) is stopped and displayed on an active line with a probability of 1/4.
Specifically, at the first center stop, the "bell" (PB=1) on the center reel 31 is stopped in the center middle row to allow the "small prize 04" to be won. Next, at the second left stop, the "red 7" on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row. Finally, at the third right stop, the "small BAR" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row.
Since the "red 7" on the left reel 31 is positioned only on the "8th" position, the probability that the "red 7" on the left reel 31 will stop on the upper left row is "1/4". Therefore, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 04" will stop on the pay line is "1/4".

When the "small win C2 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "middle right left (231)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 04" on the activated line with a probability of 1/4, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "middle left right (213)."

When the "small win C2 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "right, left, center (312)," the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 20" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of 1/4.
Specifically, at the first right stop, "Replay" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row to allow for the winning of "Small Win 20". Next, at the second left stop, "Watermelon", "Blank" or "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row. Finally, at the third middle stop, "Big BAR" on the center reel 31 is stopped in the middle middle row.
Since the "big BAR" on the center reel 31 is only positioned at "number 3", the probability that the "big BAR" on the center reel 31 can be stopped in the middle row is "1/4". Therefore, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 20" can be stopped on an active line is "1/4".

When the "small win C2 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "right, center, left (321)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 20" on the activated line with a probability of 1/4, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "right, left, center (312)."

When the "small win C2 condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside MB, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "small win C2 condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside MB.
In addition, when the "small win C2 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal or MB, the "bell" (PB=1) of the center reel 31 always stops on an active line in order to prioritize displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 04" at the time of the first center stop. Therefore, when "small win 04" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" to "MB03" will not stop on an active line.

Similarly, when the "Small win C2 condition device" is activated while not in RT and not inside or inside MB, when the first right reel stops, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 20", so the "Replay" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 always stops on an active line. For this reason, when "Small win 20" is missed, the symbol combinations corresponding to "MB01" to "MB03" will never stop on an active line.

The "small prize C3 condition device" includes the eight types of winning prizes listed in the winning prize column of FIG.
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, the "small prize C3 condition device" operates in conjunction with the "MB condition device" (duplicate win).

When the "small win C3 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, center, right (123)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 25" (payout of 1 coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/4.
Specifically, at the first left stop, the "Replay" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row to allow the "Small Win 25" to be won. Next, at the second center stop, the "Blue 7", "Big BAR", "Small BAR" or "Symbol" on the center reel 31 is stopped in the middle center row. Finally, at the third right stop, the "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 is stopped in the middle right row.
Since the "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 is positioned only on the "18th", the probability that the "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 will stop on the right middle row is "1/4". Therefore, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the "minor win 25" will stop on an active line is "1/4".

When the "small win C3 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal operation, even when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left/right/middle (132)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 25" on the activated line with a probability of 1/4, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left/middle/right (123)."
When the "small win C3 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "middle left right (213)," the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 88" (payout of 3 coins) on an active line with a probability of 1/1 (always).

When the "small win C3 condition device" is activated while not in RT and not inside, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "middle right left (231)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to one of "small win 03" to "small win 06" (each of which pays out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/1 (always), just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "middle right left (231)" while the "small win A3 condition device" is activated while not in RT and not inside or inside MB.

When the "small win C3 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "right, left, center (312)," the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 21" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of 1/4.
Specifically, at the first right stop, the right reel 31 stops "Replay" (PB=1) in the middle right row to allow the "small prize 21" to be won. Next, at the second left stop, the left reel 31 stops "Watermelon", "Blank" or "Blue 7" in the upper left row. Finally, at the third middle stop, the middle reel 31 stops "Small BAR" in the middle middle row.
Since the "small BAR" on the center reel 31 is only positioned at "No. 8", the probability that the "small BAR" on the center reel 31 can be stopped in the middle row is "1/4". Therefore, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "small winnings 21" can be stopped on an active line is "1/4".

When the "small win C3 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "right, center, left (321)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 21" on the pay line with a probability of 1/4, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "right, left, center (312)."

When the "small win C3 condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside MB, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "small win C3 condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside MB.
In addition, when the "small win C3 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-inside or MB, the "replay" of the left reel 31 always stops on an active line in order to prioritize displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 25" when the first left reel stops. Therefore, when the "small win 25" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" to "MB03" will not stop on an active line.

Similarly, when the "small win C3 condition device" is activated while not in RT and not inside or inside MB, when the first right reel stops, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 21", so the "replay" on the right reel 31 always stops on an active line. For this reason, when "small win 21" is missed, the symbol combinations corresponding to "MB01" to "MB03" will never stop on an active line.

The "small prize C4 condition device" includes the five types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, the "small prize C4 condition device" operates in conjunction with the "MB condition device" (duplicate win).

When the "small win C4 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, center, right (123)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 26" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of 1/4.
Specifically, at the first left stop, the "Replay" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row to allow the "Small Win 26" to be won. Next, at the second middle stop, the "Blue 7", "Big BAR", "Small BAR" or "Symbol" on the middle reel 31 is stopped in the middle middle row. Finally, at the third right stop, the "Red 7" on the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row.
Since the "red 7" on the right reel 31 is positioned only on the "8th" position, the probability that the "red 7" on the right reel 31 will stop on the right middle row is "1/4". Therefore, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the "minor win 26" will stop on an active line is "1/4".

When the "small win C4 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "left/right/middle (132)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 26" on the activated line with a probability of 1/4, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "left/middle/right (123)."

When the "small win C4 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "center left right (213)," the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 10" (payout of 1 coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/1 (always).
When the "small win C4 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "center, right, left (231)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 88" (payout of 3 coins) on an active line with a probability of 1/1 (always).

When the "small win C4 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "right, left, center (312)," the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 22" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of 1/4.
Specifically, at the first right stop, the "Replay" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row to allow the "minor prize 22" to be won. Next, at the second left stop, the "watermelon", "blank" or "blue 7" on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row. Finally, at the third middle stop, the "symbol" is stopped in the middle middle row.
Since the "symbol" of the center reel 31 is arranged only at "number 18", the probability that the "symbol" of the center reel 31 can be stopped in the middle row is "1/4". Therefore, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 22" can be stopped on an active line is "1/4".

When the "small win C4 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "right, center, left (321)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 22" on the activated line with a probability of 1/4, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "right, left, center (312)."

When the "small win C4 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and inside an MB, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "small win C4 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and inside an MB.
In addition, when the "small win C4 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-inside or MB, the "replay" of the left reel 31 always stops on an active line in order to prioritize displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 26" when the first left reel stops. Therefore, when the "small win 26" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" to "MB03" will not stop on an active line.

Similarly, when the "Small win C4 condition device" is activated while not in RT and not inside or inside MB, when the first right reel stops, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 22", so the "Replay" on the right reel 31 always stops on an active line. For this reason, when "Small win 22" is missed, the symbol combinations corresponding to "MB01" to "MB03" will never stop on an active line.

The "small prize C5 condition device" includes the five types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, the "small prize C5 condition device" operates in conjunction with the "MB condition device" (duplicate win).

When the "small win C5 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, center, right (123)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 27" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of 1/4.
Specifically, at the first left stop, the "replay" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row to allow the "small prize 27" to be won. Next, at the second center stop, the "blue 7", "big BAR", "small BAR" or "symbol" (4 symbols combined for "PB=1") on the center reel 31 is stopped in the middle center row. Finally, at the third right stop, the "big BAR" on the right reel 31 is stopped in the middle right row.
Since the "Big BAR" on the right reel 31 is positioned only at "number 3", the probability that the "Big BAR" on the right reel 31 can be stopped in the right middle row is "1/4". Therefore, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 27" can be stopped and displayed on the pay line is "1/4".

When the "small win C5 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "left/right/center (132)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 27" on the pay line, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "left/center/right (123)."

When the "small win C5 condition device" in the non-RT and non-internal middle is activated, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "middle left right (213)", the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 05" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/4".
Specifically, at the first center stop, the "bell" (PB=1) on the center reel 31 is stopped in the center middle row to allow the "small prize 05" to be won. Next, at the second left stop, the "big BAR" on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row. Finally, at the third right stop, the "small BAR" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row.
Since the "Big BAR" on the left reel 31 is positioned only at "number 3", the probability that the "Big BAR" on the left reel 31 can be stopped on the upper left row is "1/4". Therefore, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 05" can be stopped and displayed on the pay line is "1/4".

When the "small win C5 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, even when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "middle right left (231)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 05" on the activated line with a probability of 1/4, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "middle left right (213)."
When the "small win C5 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "right, left, center (312)," the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 87" (payout of 3 coins) on an active line with a probability of 1/1 (always).

When the "small win C5 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "right, center, left (321)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 11" (payout of 1 coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/1 (always).
When the "small win C5 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and inside an MB, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "small win C5 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and inside an MB.

In addition, when the "small win C5 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-inside or MB, the "replay" of the left reel 31 always stops on an active line in order to prioritize displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 27" when the first left reel stops. Therefore, when the "small win 27" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" to "MB03" will not stop on an active line.
Similarly, when the "small win C5 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-interior or MB interior, the "bell" on the center reel 31 always stops on an active line in order to prioritize displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 05" at the time of the first center stop. Therefore, when "small win 05" is missed, the symbol combinations corresponding to "MB01" to "MB03" will not stop on an active line.

The "small prize C6 condition device" includes the five types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, the "small prize C6 condition device" operates in conjunction with the "MB condition device" (duplicate win).

When the "small win C6 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, center, right (123)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 28" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of 1/4.
Specifically, at the first left stop, the "replay" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row to allow the "minor prize 28" to be won. Next, at the second center stop, the "blue 7", "big BAR", "small BAR" or "symbol" (4 symbols combined for "PB=1") on the center reel 31 is stopped in the middle center row. Finally, at the third right stop, the "symbol" on the right reel 31 is stopped in the middle right row.
Since the "symbol" on the right reel 31 is only positioned at "number 13", the probability that the "symbol" on the right reel 31 will stop in the right middle row is "1/4". Therefore, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 28" will stop and be displayed on the pay line is "1/4".

When the "small win C6 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "left/right/middle (132)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 28" on the pay line, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "left/middle/right (123)."

When the "small win C6 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "center left right (213)," the reel 31 is controlled to stop so that a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 06" (one coin payout) is stopped and displayed on an active line with a probability of 1/4.
Specifically, at the first center stop, the "bell" (PB=1) on the center reel 31 is stopped in the center middle row to allow the "small prize 06" to be won. Next, at the second left stop, the "symbol" on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row. Finally, at the third right stop, the "small BAR" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row.
Since the "symbol" on the left reel 31 is only positioned at "number 13", the probability that the "symbol" on the left reel 31 will stop on the upper left row is "1/4". Therefore, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 06" will stop on the pay line is "1/4".

When the "small win C6 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "middle right left (231)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 06" on the activated line with a probability of 1/4, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "middle left right (213)."

When the "small win C6 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "right, left, center (312)," the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 11" (payout of 1 coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/1 (always).
When the "small win C6 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal state, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "right, center, left (321)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 87" (payout of 3 coins) on an active line with a probability of 1/1 (always).

When the "small win C6 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and inside an MB, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "small win C6 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and inside an MB.
In addition, when the "small win C6 condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-inside or MB, the "replay" of the left reel 31 always stops on an active line in order to prioritize displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 28" when the first left reel stops. Therefore, when the "small win 28" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" to "MB03" will not stop on an active line.

Similarly, when the "Small win C6 condition device" is activated in a non-RT and non-internal or MB state, the "bell" on the center reel 31 always stops on an active line, since priority is given to stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 06" when the first center stop occurs. For this reason, when "Small win 06" is missed, the symbol combinations corresponding to "MB01" to "MB03" will never stop on an active line.

The "small prize D1 condition device" includes the three types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal play, the "small prize D1 condition device" may operate alone (single win) or may operate in conjunction with the "MB condition device" (duplicate win).
Specifically, when the winning number "28" is selected by the lottery by the lottery selection means 61 during non-RT and non-internal play, the small win and replay condition device number "28" is generated from the winning number "28" (FIG. 219). Then, the "small win D1 condition device" (FIG. 212) corresponding to the small win and replay condition device number "28" is activated.

In addition, when the winning number "29" is selected by the role selection means 61 during non-RT and non-internal play, the role condition device number "1" and the small role and replay condition device number "28" are generated from this winning number "29" (Fig. 219). Then, the "MB condition device" (Fig. 206) corresponding to the role condition device number "1" and the "small role D1 condition device" (Fig. 212) corresponding to the small role and replay condition device number "28" are activated.

During non-RT and non-internal play, the stopping control of reel 31 differs between when the "small prize D1 condition device" is activated alone (single win) and when the "small prize D1 condition device" and the "MB condition device" are activated together (duplicate win).
In addition, when the "small prize D1 condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside MB, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "small prize D1 condition device" and the "MB condition device" are activated in overlapping fashion while not in RT and inside MB.

First, the stopping control of the reel 31 in the case where the "small win D1 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during a non-RT and non-internal period will be described.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "minor prize 29" (payout of 1 coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/1" (always).

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 65" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".
Specifically, at the first center stop, the "Replay" (PB=1) on the center reel 31 is stopped in the center middle row. Next, when the second stop is to the left, the "Blue 7" (PB≠1) on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row, and finally, at the third right stop, the "Blue 7" (PB≠1) on the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row.
Also, when the second stop is on the right, the "blue 7" on the right reel 31 is stopped in the middle right row, and finally, when the third stop is on the left, the "blue 7" on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row.

As described above, the probability of getting the "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 to stop in the upper left row is "1/4", and the probability of getting the "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 to stop in the middle right row is also "1/4", so the probability of getting the symbol combination corresponding to "Minor Win 65" to stop on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 65" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination does not stop on an active line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 65" is missed, the winning combination does not win.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 66" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".
Specifically, at the first right stop, the "small BAR" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row. Next, when the second stop is on the left, the "blue 7" (PB≠1) on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row, and finally, at the third middle stop, the "blue 7" (PB≠1) on the center reel 31 is stopped in the middle middle row.
Also, when the second stop is in the middle, the "blue 7" on the center reel 31 is stopped in the middle-middle row, and finally, when the third stop is on the left, the "blue 7" on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row.

As described above, the probability of getting the "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 to stop in the upper left row is "1/4", and the probability of getting the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 to stop in the middle row is also "1/4", so the probability of getting the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 66" to stop on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 66" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination does not stop on an active line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 66" is missed, the winning combination does not win.

Next, we will explain the stopping control of reel 31 when the ``small prize D1 condition device'' and the ``MB condition device'' are activated simultaneously (duplicate win) during a non-RT and non-internal period, or when the ``small prize D1 condition device'' is activated during a non-RT and non-internal period.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, there is a 1/1 probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 29" will be displayed stopped on the valid line, just as when the "small prize D1 condition device" is activated alone (single winning) during non-RT and non-internal play.

When the stop switch 42 is operated in any order with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 65" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 65" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" is displayed on the active line.

Specifically, when the first stop is on the center, the "Replay" (PB=1) on the center reel 31 is stopped in the center-middle row. Next, when the second stop is on the left, priority is given to stopping the "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the upper left row, and if this cannot be stopped, the "Red 7", "Big BAR" or "Symbol" on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row. As mentioned above, the four symbols of the "Blue 7", "Red 7", "Big BAR" and "Symbol" on the left reel 31 are combined to make "PB=1", so any of these can be stopped in the upper left row.

When the "Blue 7" of the left reel 31 stops in the upper left row at the second left stop, priority is given to stopping the "Blue 7" of the right reel 31 in the middle right row at the third right stop, and if this cannot be stopped, the "small BAR" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stopped in the middle right row. When the "Blue 7" stops in the upper left row and also in the middle right row, a "small prize 65" is won. On the other hand, when the "Blue 7" stops in the upper left row and the "small BAR" stops in the middle right row, a "MB03" is won.
When the left reel 31 stops at the upper left row at the second left stop, the right reel 31 stops at the middle right row at the third right stop, and the right reel 31 stops at the upper left row at the second left stop. This results in the winning of "MB03".

Also, when the second stop is on the right, priority is given to stopping the "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 in the middle right row, and if this cannot be stopped, the "Red 7", "Big BAR" or "Symbol" on the right reel 31 is stopped in the middle right row. As mentioned above, the four symbols "Blue 7", "Red 7", "Big BAR" and "Symbol" on the right reel 31 total "PB=1", so any of these can be stopped in the middle right row.

When the "Blue 7" of the right reel 31 stops in the middle right row at the second right stop, priority is given to stopping the "Blue 7" of the left reel 31 in the upper left row at the third left stop, and if this cannot be stopped, the "small BAR" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row. When the "Blue 7" stops in the middle right row and also in the upper left row, a "small prize 65" is won. On the other hand, when the "Blue 7" stops in the middle right row and the "small BAR" stops in the upper left row, a "MB01" is won.
When the right reel 31 stops at the middle right row at the second stop on the right, the left reel 31 stops at the upper left row at the third stop on the left, causing the left reel 31 to stop at the upper left row (PB=1). This results in the winning of "MB01".

As described above, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the "minor win 65" will stop and be displayed on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, the probability of missing out on the "small win 65" is "15/16", and when the "small win 65" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop to the right and the second and third stops in any push order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 66" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 66" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" on the active line.

Specifically, when the first stop is on the right, the "small BAR" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is stopped in the middle right row. Next, when the second stop is on the left, priority is given to stopping the "blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the upper left row, and if this cannot be stopped, the "red 7", "big BAR" or "symbol" on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row. As mentioned above, the four symbols of the "blue 7", "red 7", "big BAR" and "symbol" on the left reel 31 are combined to make "PB=1", so any of these can be stopped in the upper left row.

When the "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 stops in the upper left row at the second left stop, priority is given to stopping the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 in the middle row at the third middle stop, and if it cannot be stopped, the "Replay" (PB=1) on the center reel 31 is stopped in the middle row. When the "Blue 7" stops in the upper left row and the "Blue 7" also stops in the middle row, a "Small Win 66" is won. On the other hand, when the "Blue 7" stops in the upper left row and the "Replay" stops in the middle row, a "MB03" is won.
When the left reel 31 stops at the upper left row with a "Red 7", "Big BAR" or "Symbol" at the second left stop, the center reel 31 stops at the middle row with a "Replay" (PB=1) at the third middle stop. This results in a win of "MB03".

Also, when the second stop is in the middle, priority is given to stopping the "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 in the middle-middle row, and if this cannot be stopped, the "Big BAR", "Small BAR" or "Symbol" on the middle reel 31 is stopped in the middle-middle row. As mentioned above, the four symbols of the "Blue 7", "Big BAR", "Small BAR" and "Symbol" on the middle reel 31 are combined to form "PB=1", so any of these can be stopped in the middle-middle row.

When the "Blue 7" of the center reel 31 stops in the middle middle row at the time of the middle second stop, priority is given to stopping the "Blue 7" of the left reel 31 in the upper left row at the time of the left third stop, and if this cannot be stopped, the "small BAR" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row. When the "Blue 7" stops in the middle middle row and also in the upper left row, a "small prize 66" is won. On the other hand, when the "Blue 7" stops in the middle middle row and the "small BAR" stops in the upper left row, a "MB02" is won.
When the "big BAR", "small BAR" or "symbol" of the center reel 31 stops in the center middle row at the second center stop, the "small BAR" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 stops in the upper left row at the third left stop. This results in the winning of "MB02".

As described above, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 66" will stop and be displayed on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, the probability of missing out on the "small win 66" is "15/16", and when the "small win 66" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

The "small prize D2 condition device" includes the three types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
In addition, like the "small prize D2 condition device," during non-RT and non-internal periods, the "small prize D2 condition device" may operate alone (single win) or may operate in conjunction with the "MB condition device" (double win).

Furthermore, during non-RT and non-internal periods, the stopping control of reel 31 differs between when the "small prize D2 condition device" operates alone (single win) and when the "small prize D2 condition device" and the "MB condition device" operate together (duplicate win).
In addition, when the "small prize D2 condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside MB, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "small prize D2 condition device" and the "MB condition device" are activated in overlapping fashion while not in RT and inside MB.

First, the stopping control of the reel 31 in the case where the "small win D2 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during a non-RT and non-internal period will be described.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "minor prize 29" (payout of 1 coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/1" (always).

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 67" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".
Specifically, at the first center stop, the "Replay" (PB=1) of the center reel 31 is stopped in the center middle row. Next, when the second stop is to the left, the "Blue 7" (PB≠1) of the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row, and finally, at the third right stop, the "Red 7" (PB≠1) of the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row.
Also, when the second stop is on the right, the "red 7" on the right reel 31 is stopped in the middle right row, and finally, at the third stop on the left, the "blue 7" on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row.

The probability of getting the "red 7" on the right reel 31 to stop in the middle right row is "1/4", and the probability of getting the "blue 7" on the left reel 31 to stop in the upper left row is also "1/4", so the probability of getting the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 67" to stop on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 67" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination does not stop on an active line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 67" is missed, the winning combination does not win.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 68" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".
Specifically, at the first right stop, the "small BAR" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row. Next, when the second stop is on the left, the "blue 7" (PB≠1) of the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row, and finally, at the third middle stop, the "big BAR" (PB≠1) of the center reel 31 is stopped in the middle middle row.
Also, when the second stop is in the middle, the "big BAR" on the center reel 31 is stopped in the middle-middle row, and finally, when the third stop is on the left, the "blue 7" on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row.

The probability of getting the "Big BAR" on the center reel 31 to stop in the middle-middle row is "1/4", and the probability of getting the "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 to stop in the upper left row is also "1/4", so the probability of getting the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 68" to stop on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 68" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination does not stop on an active line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 68" is missed, the winning combination does not win.

Next, we will explain the stopping control of reel 31 when the ``small prize D2 condition device'' and the ``MB condition device'' are activated simultaneously (duplicate win) during a non-RT and non-internal period, or when the ``small prize D2 condition device'' is activated during a non-RT and non-internal period.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, there is a 1/1 probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 29" will be displayed stopped on the valid line, just as when the "small prize D2 condition device" is activated alone (single winning) during non-RT and non-internal play.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 67" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor prize 67" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" on the active line.

Specifically, when the first stop is in the middle, the "Replay" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is stopped in the middle middle row. Next, when the second stop is on the left, the "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row with priority, and if this cannot be stopped, the "Red 7", "Big BAR" or "Symbol" on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row.
When the "Blue 7" of the left reel 31 stops in the upper left row at the second left stop, priority is given to stopping the "Red 7" of the right reel 31 in the middle right row at the third right stop, and if this cannot be stopped, the "Small BAR" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stopped in the middle right row. When the "Blue 7" stops in the upper left row and the "Red 7" stops in the middle right row, the "Small Win 67" is won. On the other hand, when the "Blue 7" stops in the upper left row and the "Small BAR" stops in the middle right row, the "MB03" is won.
When the left reel 31 stops at the upper left row at the second left stop, the right reel 31 stops at the middle right row at the third right stop, and the right reel 31 stops at the upper left row at the second left stop. This results in the winning of "MB03".

In addition, when the second stop is on the right, priority is given to stopping the "red 7" on the right reel 31 in the right middle row, and if this cannot be stopped, the "blue 7", "big BAR" or "symbol" on the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row.
When the "red 7" of the right reel 31 stops in the middle right row at the second right stop, priority is given to stopping the "blue 7" of the left reel 31 in the upper left row at the third left stop, and if this cannot be stopped, the "small BAR" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row. When the "red 7" stops in the middle right row and the "blue 7" stops in the upper left row, the "small prize 67" is won. On the other hand, when the "red 7" stops in the upper right row and the "small BAR" stops in the upper left row, the "MB01" is won.
When the right reel 31 stops at the middle right row at the second stop on the right, the left reel 31 stops at the upper left row at the third stop on the left, and the left reel 31 stops at the middle right row at the second stop on the right. This results in the winning of "MB01".

As described above, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 67" will stop and be displayed on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, the probability of missing out on the "small win 67" is "15/16", and when the "small win 67" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop to the right and the second and third stops in any push order, priority is given to stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 68" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be stopped and displayed (when "minor prize 68" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" on the active line.

Specifically, when the first stop is on the right, the "small BAR" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is stopped in the middle right row. Next, when the second stop is on the left, the "blue 7" on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row with priority, and if this cannot be stopped, the "red 7", "big BAR" or "symbol" on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row.
When the "Blue 7" of the left reel 31 stops in the upper left row at the second left stop, priority is given to stopping the "Big BAR" of the center reel 31 in the middle row at the third middle stop, and if this cannot be stopped, the "Replay" (PB=1) of the center reel 31 is stopped in the middle row. When the "Blue 7" stops in the upper left row and the "Big BAR" stops in the middle row, the "Small Win 68" is won. On the other hand, when the "Blue 7" stops in the upper left row and the "Replay" stops in the middle row, the "MB03" is won.
When the left reel 31 stops at the upper left row with a "Red 7", "Big BAR" or "Symbol" at the second left stop, the center reel 31 stops at the middle row with a "Replay" (PB=1) at the third middle stop. This results in a win of "MB03".

In addition, when the second stop is medium, priority is given to stopping the "big BAR" of the center reel 31 in the middle-middle row, and if this cannot be stopped, the "blue 7", "small BAR" or "symbol" of the center reel 31 is stopped in the middle-middle row.
When the "big BAR" of the center reel 31 stops in the middle middle row at the time of the middle second stop, priority is given to stopping the "blue 7" of the left reel 31 in the upper left row at the time of the left third stop, and if this cannot be stopped, the "small BAR" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row. When the "big BAR" stops in the middle middle row and the "blue 7" stops in the upper left row, the "small prize 68" is won. On the other hand, when the "big BAR" stops in the middle middle row and the "small BAR" stops in the upper left row, the "MB02" is won.
When the middle reel 31 stops at the middle middle row at the second middle stop, the left reel 31 stops at the upper left row at the third left stop, causing the left reel 31 to stop at the upper left row (PB=1). This results in the winning of "MB02".

As described above, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 68" will stop and be displayed on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, the probability of missing out on the "small win 68" is "15/16", and when the "small win 68" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

When the "small prize D3 condition device" to the "small prize D8 condition device" are activated, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "small prize D1 condition device" or the "small prize D2 condition device" is activated.
The "small prize D3 condition device" includes the three types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
First, the stopping control of the reel 31 in the case where the "small win D3 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during a non-RT and non-internal period will be described.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "minor prize 29" (payout of 1 coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/1" (always).

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 73" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 73" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 73" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 74" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 74" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 74" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

Next, we will explain the stopping control of reel 31 when the ``small prize D3 condition device'' and the ``MB condition device'' are activated simultaneously (duplicate win) during a non-RT and non-internal period, or when the ``small prize D3 condition device'' is activated during a non-RT and non-internal period.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, there is a 1/1 probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 29" will be displayed stopped on the active line, just like when the "small prize D3 condition device" is activated alone (single winning) during non-RT and non-internal play.

When the stop switch 42 is operated in any order with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 73" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 73" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" on the active line.
The probability of missing out on the "small win 73" is "15/16", and when the "small win 73" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop to the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 74" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 74" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" is displayed on the active line.
The probability of missing out on the "small win 74" is "15/16", and when the "small win 74" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

The "small prize D4 condition device" includes the three types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
First, the stopping control of the reel 31 in the case where the "small win D4 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during a non-RT and non-internal period will be described.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "minor prize 29" (payout of 1 coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/1" (always).

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 75" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".
The probability of the "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 stopping in the upper left row is "1/4", and the probability of the "symbol" on the right reel 31 stopping in the middle right row is also "1/4", so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 75" stopping on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 75" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 76" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 76" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".
The probability of the "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 stopping in the upper left row is "1/4", and the probability of the "symbol" on the center reel 31 stopping in the middle row is also "1/4", so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 76" stopping on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 76" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 76" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

Next, we will explain the stopping control of reel 31 when the ``small prize D4 condition device'' and the ``MB condition device'' are activated simultaneously (duplicate win) during a non-RT and non-internal period, or when the ``small prize D4 condition device'' is activated during a non-RT and non-internal period.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, there is a 1/1 probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 29" will be displayed stopped on the active line, just like when the "small prize D4 condition device" is activated alone (single winning) during non-RT and non-internal play.

When the stop switch 42 is operated in any order with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in the middle, priority is given to stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 75" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be stopped and displayed (when "minor win 75" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" on the active line.

The probability of missing out on the "small win 75" is "15/16", and when the "small win 75" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" will stop and be displayed on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" stopping and being displayed on the active line is "15/16".

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop to the right and the second and third stops in any push order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 76" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 76" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" on the active line.

The probability of missing out on "small win 76" is "15/16", and when "small win 76" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".
Although the "small prize D4 condition device" is selected during MB play, the reel 31 is stopped in a unique manner that results in a small prize of two coins being paid out during MB play, and therefore the reel 31 is not stopped based on the operation of the "small prize D4 condition device".

The "small prize D5 condition device" includes the three types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
First, the stopping control of the reel 31 in the case where the "small win D5 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during a non-RT and non-internal period will be described.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "minor prize 29" (payout of 1 coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/1" (always).

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 69" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".
The probability of getting the "red 7" on the left reel 31 to stop in the upper left row is "1/4", and the probability of getting the "blue 7" on the right reel 31 to stop in the middle right row is also "1/4", so the probability of getting the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 69" to stop on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 69" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 69" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 70" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".
The probability of getting the "red 7" on the left reel 31 to stop in the upper left row is "1/4", and the probability of getting the "blue 7" on the center reel 31 to stop in the middle row is also "1/4", so the probability of getting the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 70" to stop on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 70" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 70" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

Next, we will explain the stopping control of reel 31 when the ``small prize D5 condition device'' and the ``MB condition device'' are activated simultaneously (duplicate win) during a non-RT and non-internal period, or when the ``small prize D5 condition device'' is activated during a non-RT and non-internal period.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, there is a 1/1 probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 29" will be displayed stopped on the active line, just like when the "small prize D5 condition device" is activated alone (single winning) during non-RT and non-internal play.

When the stop switch 42 is operated in any order with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 69" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 69" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" on the active line.
The probability of missing out on the "small win 69" is "15/16", and when the "small win 69" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop to the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 70" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 70" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" on the active line.
The probability of missing out on the "small win 70" is "15/16", and when the "small win 70" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

The "small prize D6 condition device" includes the three types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
First, the stopping control of the reel 31 in the case where the "small win D6 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during a non-RT and non-internal period will be described.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "minor prize 29" (payout of 1 coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/1" (always).

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 71" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".
The probability of the "red 7" on the left reel 31 stopping in the upper left row is "1/4", and the probability of the "red 7" on the right reel 31 stopping in the middle right row is also "1/4", so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to the "minor win 71" stopping on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 71" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 71" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 72" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".
The probability of getting the "Red 7" on the left reel 31 to stop in the upper left row is "1/4", and the probability of getting the "Big BAR" on the center reel 31 to stop in the middle-middle row is also "1/4", so the probability of getting the symbol combination corresponding to the "Small Win 72" to stop on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 72" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 72" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

Next, we will explain the stopping control of reel 31 when the ``small prize D6 condition device'' and the ``MB condition device'' are activated simultaneously (duplicate win) during a non-RT and non-internal period, or when the ``small prize D6 condition device'' is activated during a non-RT and non-internal period.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, there is a 1/1 probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 29" will be displayed stopped on the active line, just like when the "small prize D6 condition device" is activated alone (single winning) during non-RT and non-internal play.

When the stop switch 42 is operated in any order with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 71" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 71" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" on the active line.
The probability of missing out on the "small win 71" is "15/16", and when the "small win 71" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop to the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 72" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 72" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" on the active line.
The probability of missing out on the "small win 72" is "15/16", and when the "small win 72" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

The "small prize D7 condition device" includes the three types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
First, the stopping control of the reel 31 in the case where the "small win D7 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during a non-RT and non-internal period will be described.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "minor prize 29" (payout of 1 coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/1" (always).

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 77" (one coin paid out) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".
The probability of getting the "Red 7" on the left reel 31 to stop in the upper left row is "1/4", and the probability of getting the "Big BAR" on the right reel 31 to stop in the middle right row is also "1/4", so the probability of getting the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 77" to stop on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 77" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 77" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 78" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".
The probability of getting the "red 7" on the left reel 31 to stop in the upper left row is "1/4", and the probability of getting the "small BAR" on the center reel 31 to stop in the middle-middle row is also "1/4", so the probability of getting the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 78" to stop on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 78" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 78" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

Next, we will explain the stopping control of reel 31 when the ``small prize D7 condition device'' and the ``MB condition device'' are activated simultaneously (duplicate win) during a non-RT and non-internal period, or when the ``small prize D7 condition device'' is activated during a non-RT and non-internal period.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, there is a 1/1 probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 29" will be displayed stopped on the active line, just like when the "small prize D7 condition device" is activated alone (single winning) during non-RT and non-internal play.

When the stop switch 42 is operated in any order with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 77" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 77" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" is displayed on the active line.
The probability of missing out on the "small win 77" is "15/16", and when the "small win 77" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop to the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 78" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 78" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" is displayed on the active line.
The probability of missing out on the "small win 78" is "15/16", and when the "small win 78" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

The "small prize D8 condition device" includes the three types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
First, the stopping control of the reel 31 in the case where the "small win D8 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during a non-RT and non-internal period will be described.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "minor prize 29" (payout of 1 coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/1" (always).

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 79" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".
The probability of the "red 7" on the left reel 31 stopping in the upper left row is "1/4", and the probability of the "symbol" on the right reel 31 stopping in the middle right row is also "1/4", so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 79" stopping on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 79" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 79" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 80" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".
The probability of the "red 7" on the left reel 31 stopping in the upper left row is "1/4", and the probability of the "symbol" on the center reel 31 stopping in the middle row is also "1/4", so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 80" stopping on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 80" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 80" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

Next, we will explain the stopping control of reel 31 when the ``small prize D8 condition device'' and the ``MB condition device'' are activated simultaneously (duplicate win) during a non-RT and non-internal period, or when the ``small prize D8 condition device'' is activated during a non-RT and internal period.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, there is a 1/1 probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 29" will be displayed stopped on the active line, just like when the "small prize D8 condition device" is activated alone (single winning) during non-RT and non-internal play.

When the stop switch 42 is operated in any order with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 79" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 79" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" is displayed on the active line.
The probability of missing out on "small win 79" is "15/16", and when "small win 79" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop to the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 80" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 80" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" is displayed on the active line.
The probability of missing out on the "small win 80" is "15/16", and when the "small win 80" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

The "small prize D9 condition device" includes the three types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
First, the stopping control of the reel 31 in the case where the "small win D9 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during a non-RT and non-internal period will be described.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 33" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".

Specifically, at the first left stop, the "small BAR" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row. Next, when the second stop is in the middle, the "blue 7" (PB≠1) on the center reel 31 is stopped in the middle row, and finally, at the third right stop, the "blue 7" (PB≠1) on the right reel 31 is stopped in the middle right row.
Also, when the second stop is on the right, the "blue 7" on the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row, and finally, at the time of the middle third stop, the "blue 7" on the middle reel 31 is stopped in the middle middle row.

The probability of getting the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 to stop in the middle row is "1/4", and the probability of getting the "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 to stop in the right middle row is also "1/4", so the probability of getting the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 33" to stop on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 33" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination does not stop on an active line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 33" is missed, the winning combination does not win.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "minor prize 30" (payout of 1 coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/1" (always).

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 34" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".
Specifically, at the first right stop, the "small BAR" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row. Next, when the second stop is on the left, the "big BAR" (PB≠1) of the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row, and finally, at the third middle stop, the "blue 7" (PB≠1) of the center reel 31 is stopped in the middle middle row.
Also, when the second stop is in the middle, the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 is stopped in the middle-middle row, and finally, when the third stop is on the left, the "Big BAR" on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row.

The probability of making the "Big BAR" on the left reel 31 stop in the upper left row is "1/4", and the probability of making the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 stop in the middle row is also "1/4", so the probability of making the symbol combination corresponding to the "Small Winning Symbol 34" stop on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 34" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination does not stop on an active line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 34" is missed, the winning combination does not win.

Next, we will explain the stopping control of reel 31 when the ``small prize D9 condition device'' and the ``MB condition device'' are activated simultaneously (duplicate win) during a non-RT and non-internal period, or when the ``small prize D9 condition device'' is activated during a non-RT and internal period.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 33" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 33" is missed), the reel 31 is controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" is displayed on the active line.

Specifically, at the first left stop, the "small BAR" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row. Next, when the second stop is in the middle, priority is given to stopping the "blue 7" on the center reel 31 in the middle-middle row, and if this cannot be stopped, the "big BAR", "small BAR" or "symbol" on the center reel 31 is stopped in the middle-middle row.
When the "Blue 7" of the center reel 31 stops in the middle middle row at the time of the second middle stop, priority is given to stopping the "Blue 7" of the right reel 31 in the right middle row at the time of the third right stop, and if this cannot be stopped, the "small BAR" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row. When the "Blue 7" stops in the middle middle row and also in the right middle row, the "small prize 33" is won. On the other hand, when the "Blue 7" stops in the middle middle row and the "small BAR" stops in the right middle row, the "MB02" is won.
When the "big BAR", "small BAR" or "symbol" of the center reel 31 stops in the center middle row at the second center stop, the "small BAR" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 stops in the right middle row at the third right stop. This results in the winning of "MB02".

In addition, when the second stop is on the right, priority is given to stopping the "blue 7" on the right reel 31 in the right middle row, and if this cannot be stopped, the "red 7", "big BAR" or "symbol" on the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row.
When the "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 stops in the right middle row at the second right stop, priority is given to stopping the "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 in the middle middle row at the third middle stop, and if it cannot be stopped, the "Replay" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is stopped in the middle middle row. When the "Blue 7" stops in the right middle row and the "Blue 7" also stops in the middle middle row, the "Small Role 33" is won. On the other hand, when the "Blue 7" stops in the right middle row and the "Replay" stops in the middle middle row, the "MB01" is won.
When the right reel 31 stops at the right middle row at the second right stop, the right reel 31 stops at the right middle row with a "Red 7", "Big BAR" or "Symbol" at the third middle stop, the center reel 31 stops at the middle middle row with a "Replay" (PB=1). This results in the winning of "MB01".

The probability of getting the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 to stop in the middle row is "1/4", and the probability of getting the "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 to stop in the right middle row is also "1/4", so the probability of getting the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 33" to stop on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, the probability of missing out on "small win 33" is "15/16", and when "small win 33" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, there is a 1/1 probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 30" will stop and be displayed on the active line, just like when the "minor prize D9 condition device" is activated alone (single winning) during non-RT and non-internal play.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop to the right and the second and third stops in any push order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 34" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 34" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" on the active line.

Specifically, when the first stop is on the right, the "small BAR" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is stopped in the middle right row. Next, when the second stop is on the left, the "big BAR" on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row with priority, and if this cannot be stopped, the "blue 7", "red 7" or "symbol" on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row.
When the "Big BAR" on the left reel 31 stops in the upper left row at the second left stop, priority is given to stopping the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 in the middle row at the third middle stop, and if this cannot be stopped, the "Replay" (PB=1) on the center reel 31 is stopped in the middle row. When the "Big BAR" stops in the upper left row and the "Blue 7" stops in the middle row, the "Small Role 34" is won. On the other hand, when the "Big BAR" stops in the upper left row and the "Replay" stops in the middle row, the "MB03" is won.
When the left reel 31 stops at the upper left row with a "blue 7", "red 7" or "symbol" at the second left stop, the center reel 31 stops at the middle row with a "replay" (PB=1) at the third middle stop. This results in a win of "MB03".

In addition, when the second stop is the middle, priority is given to stopping the "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 in the middle-middle row, and if this cannot be stopped, the "Big BAR", "Small BAR" or "Symbol" on the middle reel 31 is stopped in the middle-middle row.
When the "Blue 7" of the center reel 31 stops in the middle middle row at the time of the middle second stop, priority is given to stopping the "Big BAR" of the left reel 31 in the upper left row at the time of the left third stop, and if this cannot be stopped, the "Small BAR" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row. When the "Blue 7" stops in the middle middle row and the "Big BAR" stops in the upper left row, the "Small Role 34" is won. On the other hand, when the "Blue 7" stops in the middle middle row and the "Small BAR" stops in the upper left row, the "MB02" is won.
When the "big BAR", "small BAR" or "symbol" of the center reel 31 stops in the center middle row at the second center stop, the "small BAR" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 stops in the upper left row at the third left stop. This results in the winning of "MB02".

The probability of making the "Big BAR" on the left reel 31 stop in the upper left row is "1/4", and the probability of making the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 stop in the middle row is also "1/4", so the probability of making the symbol combination corresponding to the "Small Winning Symbol 34" stop on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, the probability of missing out on "small win 34" is "15/16", and when "small win 34" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

The "small prize D10 condition device" includes the three types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
First, the stopping control of the reel 31 in the case where the "small win D10 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during a non-RT and non-internal period will be described.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 35" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".

Specifically, at the first left stop, the "small BAR" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row. Next, when the second stop is in the middle, the "blue 7" (PB≠1) on the center reel 31 is stopped in the middle row, and finally, at the third right stop, the "red 7" (PB≠1) on the right reel 31 is stopped in the middle right row.
Also, when the second stop is on the right, the "red 7" on the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row, and finally, at the time of the middle third stop, the "blue 7" on the middle reel 31 is stopped in the middle middle row.

The probability of getting the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 to stop in the middle row is "1/4", and the probability of getting the "Red 7" on the right reel 31 to stop in the right middle row is also "1/4", so the probability of getting the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 35" to stop on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 35" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination does not stop on an active line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 35" is missed, the winning combination does not win.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "minor prize 30" (payout of 1 coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/1" (always).

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 36" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".
Specifically, at the first right stop, the "small BAR" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row. Next, when the second stop is on the left, the "big BAR" (PB≠1) of the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row, and finally, at the third middle stop, the "big BAR" (PB≠1) of the center reel 31 is stopped in the center middle row.
Also, when the second stop is in the middle, the "big BAR" on the center reel 31 is stopped in the middle-middle row, and finally, when the left third stop is reached, the "big BAR" on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row.

The probability of making the "Big BAR" on the left reel 31 stop in the upper left row is "1/4", and the probability of making the "Big BAR" on the center reel 31 stop in the middle-middle row is also "1/4", so the probability of making the symbol combination corresponding to the "Small Winning Symbol 36" stop on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 36" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination does not stop on an active line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 36" is missed, the winning combination does not win.

Next, we will explain the stopping control of reel 31 when the ``small prize D10 condition device'' and the ``MB condition device'' are activated simultaneously (duplicate win) during a non-RT and non-internal period, or when the ``small prize D10 condition device'' is activated during a non-RT and non-internal period.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 35" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 35" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" is displayed on the active line.

Specifically, at the first left stop, the "small BAR" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row. Next, when the second stop is in the middle, priority is given to stopping the "blue 7" on the center reel 31 in the middle-middle row, and if this cannot be stopped, the "big BAR", "small BAR" or "symbol" on the center reel 31 is stopped in the middle-middle row.
When the "Blue 7" of the center reel 31 stops in the middle middle row at the second middle stop, priority is given to stopping the "Red 7" of the right reel 31 in the right middle row at the third right stop, and if this cannot be stopped, the "small BAR" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row. When the "Blue 7" stops in the middle middle row and the "Red 7" stops in the right middle row, the "small prize 35" is won. On the other hand, when the "Blue 7" stops in the middle middle row and the "small BAR" stops in the right middle row, the "MB02" is won.
When the "big BAR", "small BAR" or "symbol" of the center reel 31 stops in the center middle row at the second center stop, the "small BAR" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 stops in the right middle row at the third right stop. This results in the winning of "MB02".

In addition, when the second stop is on the right, priority is given to stopping the "red 7" on the right reel 31 in the right middle row, and if this cannot be stopped, the "blue 7", "big BAR" or "symbol" on the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row.
When the "Red 7" on the right reel 31 stops in the right middle row at the second right stop, priority is given to stopping the "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 in the middle middle row at the third middle stop, and if this cannot be stopped, the "Replay" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is stopped in the middle middle row. When the "Red 7" stops in the right middle row and the "Blue 7" stops in the middle middle row, the "Small Win 35" is won. On the other hand, when the "Red 7" stops in the right middle row and the "Replay" stops in the middle middle row, the "MB01" is won.
When the right reel 31 stops at the right middle row at the second right stop, if the right reel 31 stops at the right middle row, the center reel 31 stops at the middle middle row at the third middle stop. This results in the winning of "MB01".

The probability of getting the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 to stop in the middle row is "1/4", and the probability of getting the "Red 7" on the right reel 31 to stop in the right middle row is also "1/4", so the probability of getting the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 35" to stop on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, the probability of missing out on "small win 35" is "15/16", and when "small win 35" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, there is a 1/1 probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 30" will stop and be displayed on the active line, just like when the "minor win D10 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during non-RT and non-internal play.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop to the right and the second and third stops in any push order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 36" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 36" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" on the active line.

Specifically, when the first stop is on the right, the "small BAR" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is stopped in the middle right row. Next, when the second stop is on the left, the "big BAR" on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row with priority, and if this cannot be stopped, the "blue 7", "red 7" or "symbol" on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row.
When the "Big BAR" of the left reel 31 stops in the upper left row at the second left stop, priority is given to stopping the "Big BAR" of the center reel 31 in the middle row at the third middle stop, and if it cannot be stopped, the "Replay" (PB=1) of the center reel 31 is stopped in the middle row. When the "Big BAR" stops in the upper left row and also in the middle row, the "Small Role 36" is won. On the other hand, when the "Big BAR" stops in the upper left row and the "Replay" stops in the middle row, the "MB03" is won.
When the left reel 31 stops at the upper left row when the left second stop is a "blue 7", a "red 7" or a "symbol", the center reel 31 stops at the middle middle row when the middle third stop is made to stop a "replay" (PB=1) on the center reel 31. This results in the winning of "MB03".

In addition, when the second stop is medium, priority is given to stopping the "large BAR" of the center reel 31 in the middle-middle row, and if this cannot be stopped, the "blue 7", "small BAR" or "symbol" of the center reel 31 is stopped in the middle-middle row.
When the "big BAR" of the center reel 31 stops in the middle middle row at the middle second stop, priority is given to stopping the "big BAR" of the left reel 31 in the upper left row at the left third stop, and if this cannot be stopped, the "small BAR" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row. When the "big BAR" stops in the middle middle row and also in the upper left row, a "small prize 36" is won. On the other hand, when the "big BAR" stops in the middle middle row and the "small BAR" stops in the upper left row, a "MB02" is won.
When the middle reel 31 stops at the middle middle row at the second middle stop, the left reel 31 stops at the upper left row at the third left stop, causing the left reel 31 to stop at the upper left row (PB=1). This results in the winning of "MB02".

The probability of the "Big BAR" on the left reel 31 stopping in the upper left row is "1/4", and the probability of the "Big BAR" on the center reel 31 stopping in the middle-middle row is also "1/4", so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 36" being stopped and displayed on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, the probability of missing out on "small win 36" is "15/16", and when "small win 36" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

When the "small win D11 condition device" to the "small win D16 condition device" are activated, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "small win D9 condition device" or the "small win D10 condition device" is activated.
The "small prize D11 condition device" includes the three types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
First, the stopping control of the reel 31 in the case where the "small win D11 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during a non-RT and non-internal period will be described.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 41" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".

The probability of getting the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 to stop in the middle row is "1/4", and the probability of getting the "Big BAR" on the right reel 31 to stop in the right middle row is also "1/4", so the probability of getting the symbol combination corresponding to the "Small win 41" to stop on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 41" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 41" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "minor prize 30" (payout of 1 coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/1" (always).

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to a "minor prize 42" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".
The probability of making the "large BAR" on the left reel 31 stop in the upper left row is "1/4", and the probability of making the "small BAR" on the center reel 31 stop in the middle-middle row is also "1/4", so the probability of making the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 42" stop on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 42" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 42" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

Next, we will explain the stopping control of reel 31 when the "small prize D11 condition device" and the "MB condition device" are activated simultaneously (duplicate win) during a non-RT and non-internal state, or when the "small prize D11 condition device" is activated during a non-RT and internal state.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 41" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 41" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" on the active line.
The probability of missing out on the "small win 41" is "15/16", and when the "small win 41" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, there is a 1/1 probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 30" will stop and be displayed on the active line, just like when the "minor win D11 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during non-RT and non-internal play.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop to the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 42" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 42" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" on the active line.
The probability of missing out on "small win 42" is "15/16", and when "small win 42" is missed, a symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" is displayed stopped on an active line, so the probability of a symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" being displayed stopped on an active line is "15/16".

The "small prize D12 condition device" includes the three types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
First, the stopping control of the reel 31 in the case where the "small win D12 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during a non-RT and non-internal period will be described.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 43" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".

The probability of the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 stopping in the middle row is "1/4", and the probability of the "symbol" on the right reel 31 stopping in the right middle row is also "1/4", so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 43" stopping on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 43" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 43" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "minor prize 30" (payout of 1 coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/1" (always).

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 44" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".
The probability of making the "big BAR" on the left reel 31 stop in the upper left row is "1/4", and the probability of making the "symbol" on the center reel 31 stop in the middle-middle row is also "1/4", so the probability of making the pattern combination corresponding to "minor win 44" stop and be displayed on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 44" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 44" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

Next, we will explain the stopping control of reel 31 when the "small prize D12 condition device" and the "MB condition device" are activated simultaneously (duplicate win) during a non-RT and non-internal state, or when the "small prize D12 condition device" is activated during a non-RT and internal state.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 43" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 43" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" on the active line.
The probability of missing out on "small win 43" is "15/16", and when "small win 43" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, there is a 1/1 probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 30" will stop and be displayed on the active line, just like when the "minor win D12 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during non-RT and non-internal play.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop to the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 44" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 44" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" is displayed on the active line.
The probability of missing out on "small win 44" is "15/16", and when "small win 44" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

The "small prize D13 condition device" includes the three types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
First, the stopping control of the reel 31 in the case where the "small win D13 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during a non-RT and non-internal period will be described.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 37" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".

The probability of making the "Big BAR" on the center reel 31 stop in the middle row is "1/4", and the probability of making the "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 stop in the right middle row is also "1/4", so the probability of making the symbol combination corresponding to the "Small Winning Symbol 37" stop on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 37" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 37" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "minor prize 30" (payout of 1 coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/1" (always).

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 38" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".
The probability of the “symbol” on the left reel 31 stopping in the upper left row is “1/4”, and the probability of the “Blue 7” on the center reel 31 stopping in the middle row is also “1/4”, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to “minor win 38” stopping on an active line is “1/16”.
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 38" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 38" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

Next, we will explain the stopping control of reel 31 when the "small prize D13 condition device" and the "MB condition device" are activated simultaneously (duplicate win) during a non-RT and non-internal state, or when the "small prize D13 condition device" is activated during a non-RT and internal state.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 37" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 37" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" on the active line.
The probability of missing out on "small win 37" is "15/16", and when "small win 37" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, there is a 1/1 probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 30" will stop and be displayed on the active line, just like when the "minor win D13 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during non-RT and non-internal play.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop to the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 38" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 38" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" is displayed on the active line.
The probability of missing out on "small win 38" is "15/16", and when "small win 38" is missed, a symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" is displayed stopped on an active line, so the probability of a symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" being displayed stopped on an active line is "15/16".

The "small prize D14 condition device" includes the three types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
First, the stopping control of the reel 31 in the case where the "small win D14 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during a non-RT and non-internal period will be described.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 39" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".

The probability of making the "Big BAR" on the center reel 31 stop in the middle row is "1/4", and the probability of making the "Red 7" on the right reel 31 stop in the right middle row is also "1/4", so the probability of making the symbol combination corresponding to the "Small Winning Symbol 39" stop on the pay line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 39" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 39" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "minor prize 30" (payout of 1 coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/1" (always).

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 40" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".
The probability of the “symbol” on the left reel 31 stopping in the upper left row is “1/4”, and the probability of the “big BAR” on the center reel 31 stopping in the middle-middle row is also “1/4”, so the probability of the pattern combination corresponding to “minor win 40” being stopped and displayed on an active line is “1/16”.
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 40" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 40" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

Next, we will explain the stopping control of reel 31 when the "small prize D14 condition device" and the "MB condition device" are activated simultaneously (duplicate win) during a non-RT and non-internal state, or when the "small prize D14 condition device" is activated during a non-RT and internal state.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 39" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 39" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" on the active line.
The probability of missing out on "small win 39" is "15/16", and when "small win 39" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, there is a 1/1 probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 30" will stop and be displayed on the active line, just like when the "minor win D14 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during non-RT and non-internal play.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop to the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 40" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 40" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" on the active line.
The probability of missing out on "small win 40" is "15/16", and when "small win 40" is missed, a symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" is displayed stopped on an active line, so the probability of a symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" being displayed stopped on an active line is "15/16".

The "small prize D15 condition device" includes the three types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
First, the stopping control of the reel 31 in the case where the "small win D15 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during a non-RT and non-internal period will be described.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 45" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".

The probability of making the "Big BAR" on the center reel 31 stop in the middle row is "1/4", and the probability of making the "Big BAR" on the right reel 31 stop in the right middle row is also "1/4", so the probability of making the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 45" stop on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 45" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 45" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "minor prize 30" (payout of 1 coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/1" (always).

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 46" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".
The probability of the “symbol” on the left reel 31 stopping in the upper left row is “1/4”, and the probability of the “small BAR” on the center reel 31 stopping in the middle row is also “1/4”, so the probability of the pattern combination corresponding to “small win 46” being stopped and displayed on an active line is “1/16”.
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 46" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 46" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

Next, we will explain the stopping control of reel 31 when the "small prize D15 condition device" and the "MB condition device" are activated simultaneously (duplicate win) during a non-RT and non-internal state, or when the "small prize D15 condition device" is activated during a non-RT and internal state.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 45" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 45" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" is displayed on the active line.
The probability of missing out on "small win 45" is "15/16", and when "small win 45" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, there is a 1/1 probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 30" will stop and be displayed on the active line, just like when the "minor win D15 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during non-RT and non-internal play.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop to the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 46" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 46" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" on the active line.
The probability of missing out on "small win 46" is "15/16", and when "small win 46" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

The "small prize D16 condition device" includes the three types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
First, the stopping control of the reel 31 in the case where the "small win D16 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during a non-RT and non-internal period will be described.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 47" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".

The probability of making the "big BAR" on the center reel 31 stop in the middle row is "1/4", and the probability of making the "symbol" on the right reel 31 stop in the right middle row is also "1/4", so the probability of making the pattern combination corresponding to "minor win 47" stop on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 47" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 47" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "minor prize 30" (payout of 1 coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/1" (always).

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 48" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".
The probability of the “symbol” of the left reel 31 stopping in the upper left row is “1/4”, and the probability of the “symbol” of the center reel 31 stopping in the middle row is also “1/4”, so the probability of the pattern combination corresponding to “minor win 48” being stopped and displayed on an active line is “1/16”.
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 48" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 48" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

Next, we will explain the stopping control of reel 31 when the "small prize D16 condition device" and the "MB condition device" are activated simultaneously (duplicate win) during a non-RT and non-internal state, or when the "small prize D16 condition device" is activated during a non-RT and internal state.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 47" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 47" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" on the active line.
The probability of missing out on "small win 47" is "15/16", and when "small win 47" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, there is a 1/1 probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 30" will stop and be displayed on the active line, just like when the "minor win D16 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during non-RT and non-internal play.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop to the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 48" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 48" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" on the active line.
The probability of missing out on "small win 48" is "15/16", and when "small win 48" is missed, a symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" is displayed stopped on an active line, so the probability of a symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" or "MB03" being displayed stopped on an active line is "15/16".

The "small prize D17 condition device" includes the five types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
First, the stopping control of the reel 31 in the case where the "small win D17 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during a non-RT and non-internal period will be described.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 49" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".

Specifically, at the first left stop, the "small BAR" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row. Next, when the second stop is in the middle, the "small BAR" (PB≠1) of the center reel 31 is stopped in the middle row, and finally, at the third right stop, the "blue 7" (PB≠1) of the right reel 31 is stopped in the middle right row.
Also, when the second stop is on the right, the "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row, and finally, at the time of the middle third stop, the "Small BAR" on the middle reel 31 is stopped in the middle middle row.

The probability of making the "small BAR" on the center reel 31 stop in the middle row is "1/4", and the probability of making the "blue 7" on the right reel 31 stop in the right middle row is also "1/4", so the probability of making the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 49" stop on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 49" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination does not stop on an active line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 49" is missed, the winning combination does not win.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 50" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".
Specifically, at the first center stop, "REPLAY" (PB=1) on the center reel 31 is stopped in the center middle row. Next, when the second stop is to the left, "Large BAR" (PB≠1) on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row, and finally, at the third right stop, "Blue 7" (PB≠1) on the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row.
Also, when the second stop is on the right, the "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 is stopped in the middle right row, and finally, when the third stop is on the left, the "Big BAR" on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row.

The probability of making the "Big BAR" on the left reel 31 stop in the upper left row is "1/4", and the probability of making the "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 stop in the middle right row is also "1/4", so the probability of making the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 50" stop on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small win 50" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any of the winning combinations does not stop on an active line. Therefore, when the "small win 50" is missed, the winning combination will not be a winning combination.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the right and the second and third stops in any push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "Small win 30", "Small win 31" or "Small win 32" (all of which pay out one coin) on the pay line with a probability of 1/1 (always).

Next, we will explain the stopping control of reel 31 when the ``small prize D17 condition device'' and the ``MB condition device'' are activated simultaneously (duplicate win) during a non-RT and non-internal period, or when the ``small prize D17 condition device'' is activated during a non-RT and non-internal period.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 49" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 49" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" is displayed on the active line.

Specifically, at the first left stop, the "small BAR" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row. Next, when the second stop is in the middle, the "small BAR" on the center reel 31 is stopped in the middle-middle row with priority, and if it cannot be stopped, the "blue 7", "big BAR" or "symbol" on the center reel 31 is stopped in the middle-middle row.
When the "small BAR" of the center reel 31 stops in the middle middle row at the time of the second middle stop, priority is given to stopping the "blue 7" of the right reel 31 in the right middle row at the time of the third right stop, and if this cannot be stopped, the "small BAR" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row. When the "small BAR" stops in the middle middle row and the "blue 7" stops in the right middle row, the "small prize 49" is won. On the other hand, when the "small BAR" stops in the middle middle row and also in the right middle row, the "MB02" is won.
When the middle reel 31 stops at the middle middle row on the second center stop, the right reel 31 stops at the right middle row on the third right stop, and the right reel 31 stops at the right middle row on the third right stop. This results in the winning of "MB02".

In addition, when the second stop is on the right, priority is given to stopping the "blue 7" on the right reel 31 in the right middle row, and if this cannot be stopped, the "red 7", "big BAR" or "symbol" on the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row.
When the right reel 31 stops in the right middle row at the second right stop, priority is given to stopping the "small BAR" of the middle reel 31 in the middle middle row at the third middle stop, and if this cannot be stopped, the "replay" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is stopped in the middle middle row. When the "blue 7" stops in the right middle row and the "small BAR" stops in the middle middle row, the "small win 49" is won. On the other hand, when the "blue 7" stops in the right middle row and the "replay" stops in the middle middle row, the "MB01" is won.
When the right reel 31 stops at the right middle row at the second right stop, the right reel 31 stops at the right middle row with a "Red 7", "Big BAR" or "Symbol" at the middle row at the third middle stop. This results in the winning of "MB01".

The probability of making the "small BAR" on the center reel 31 stop in the middle row is "1/4", and the probability of making the "blue 7" on the right reel 31 stop in the right middle row is also "1/4", so the probability of making the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 49" stop on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, the probability of missing out on "small win 49" is "15/16", and when "small win 49" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

When the stop switch 42 is operated in any order with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in the middle, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 50" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 50" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" is displayed on the active line.

Specifically, when the first stop is on the center, the "REPLAY" (PB=1) on the center reel 31 is stopped in the center center row. Next, when the second stop is on the left, the "Large BAR" on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row with priority, and if this cannot be stopped, the "Blue 7", "Red 7" or "Symbol" on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row.
When the "big BAR" of the left reel 31 stops in the upper left row at the second left stop, priority is given to stopping the "blue 7" of the right reel 31 in the middle right row at the third right stop, and if this cannot be stopped, the "small BAR" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stopped in the middle right row. When the "big BAR" stops in the upper left row and the "blue 7" stops in the middle right row, a "small win 50" is won. On the other hand, when the "big BAR" stops in the upper left row and the "small BAR" stops in the middle right row, a "MB03" is won.
When the left reel 31 stops at the upper left row when the left reel 31 stops at the second left row, the right reel 31 stops at the middle right row when the right reel 31 stops at the third right row. This results in the winning of "MB03".

In addition, when the second stop is on the right, priority is given to stopping the "blue 7" on the right reel 31 in the right middle row, and if this cannot be stopped, the "red 7", "big BAR" or "symbol" on the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row.
When the "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 stops in the middle right row at the second right stop, priority is given to stopping the "Big BAR" on the left reel 31 in the upper left row at the third left stop, and if this cannot be stopped, the "Small BAR" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row. When the "Blue 7" stops in the middle right row and the "Big BAR" stops in the upper left row, a "Small Win 50" is won. On the other hand, when the "Blue 7" stops in the middle right row and the "Small BAR" stops in the upper left row, a "MB01" is won.
When the right reel 31 stops at the middle right row at the second stop on the right, the left reel 31 stops at the upper left row at the third stop on the left, causing the left reel 31 to stop at the upper left row (PB=1). This results in the winning of "MB01".

The probability of making the "Big BAR" on the left reel 31 stop in the upper left row is "1/4", and the probability of making the "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 stop in the middle right row is also "1/4", so the probability of making the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 50" stop on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, the probability of missing out on the "small win 50" is "15/16", and when the "small win 50" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, there is a 1/1 probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 30", "Small win 31" or "Small win 32" will stop and be displayed on the active line, just like when the "Small win D17 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during non-RT and non-internal play.

The "small prize D18 condition device" includes the five types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
First, the stopping control of the reel 31 in the case where the "small win D18 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during a non-RT and non-internal period will be described.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 51" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".

Specifically, at the first left stop, the "small BAR" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row. Next, when the second stop is in the middle, the "small BAR" (PB≠1) of the center reel 31 is stopped in the middle row, and finally, at the third right stop, the "red 7" (PB≠1) of the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row.
Also, when the second stop is on the right, the "red 7" on the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row, and finally, at the time of the middle third stop, the "small BAR" on the middle reel 31 is stopped in the middle middle row.

The probability of making the "small BAR" on the center reel 31 stop in the middle row is "1/4", and the probability of making the "red 7" on the right reel 31 stop in the right middle row is also "1/4", so the probability of making the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 51" stop on the pay line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 51" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination does not stop on an active line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 51" is missed, the winning combination does not win.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 52" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".
Specifically, at the first center stop, "REPLAY" (PB=1) on the center reel 31 is stopped in the center middle row. Next, when the second stop is to the left, "Large BAR" (PB≠1) on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row, and finally, at the third right stop, "RED 7" (PB≠1) on the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row.
Also, when the second stop is on the right, the "red 7" on the right reel 31 is stopped in the middle right row, and finally, when the third stop is on the left, the "big BAR" on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row.

The probability of making the "Big BAR" on the left reel 31 stop in the upper left row is "1/4", and the probability of making the "Red 7" on the right reel 31 stop in the middle right row is also "1/4", so the probability of making the symbol combination corresponding to the "Small Win 52" stop on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 52" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination does not stop on an active line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 52" is missed, the winning combination does not win.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the right and the second and third stops in any push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "Small win 30", "Small win 31" or "Small win 32" (all of which pay out one coin) on the pay line with a probability of 1/1 (always).

Next, we will explain the stopping control of reel 31 when the ``small prize D18 condition device'' and the ``MB condition device'' are activated simultaneously (duplicate win) during a non-RT and non-internal period, or when the ``small prize D18 condition device'' is activated during a non-RT and non-internal period.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 51" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 51" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" on the active line.

Specifically, at the first left stop, the "small BAR" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row. Next, when the second stop is in the middle, the "small BAR" on the center reel 31 is stopped in the middle-middle row with priority, and if it cannot be stopped, the "blue 7", "big BAR" or "symbol" on the center reel 31 is stopped in the middle-middle row.
When the "small BAR" of the center reel 31 stops in the middle middle row at the time of the second middle stop, priority is given to stopping the "red 7" of the right reel 31 in the right middle row at the time of the third right stop, and if this cannot be stopped, the "small BAR" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row. When the "small BAR" stops in the middle middle row and the "red 7" stops in the right middle row, the "small prize 51" is won. On the other hand, when the "small BAR" stops in the middle middle row and also in the right middle row, the "MB02" is won.
When the middle reel 31 stops at the middle middle row on the second center stop, the right reel 31 stops at the right middle row on the third right stop, and the right reel 31 stops at the right middle row on the third right stop. This results in the winning of "MB02".

In addition, when the second stop is on the right, priority is given to stopping the "red 7" on the right reel 31 in the right middle row, and if this cannot be stopped, the "blue 7", "big BAR" or "symbol" on the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row.
When the "red 7" of the right reel 31 stops in the right middle row at the second right stop, priority is given to stopping the "small BAR" of the middle reel 31 in the middle middle row at the third middle stop, and if this cannot be stopped, the "replay" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is stopped in the middle middle row. When the "red 7" stops in the right middle row and the "small BAR" stops in the middle middle row, the "small win 51" is won. On the other hand, when the "red 7" stops in the right middle row and the "replay" stops in the middle middle row, the "MB01" is won.
When the right reel 31 stops at the right middle row at the second right stop, if the right reel 31 stops at the right middle row, the center reel 31 stops at the middle middle row at the third middle stop. This results in the winning of "MB01".

The probability of making the "small BAR" on the center reel 31 stop in the middle row is "1/4", and the probability of making the "red 7" on the right reel 31 stop in the right middle row is also "1/4", so the probability of making the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 51" stop on the pay line is "1/16".
In addition, the probability of missing out on the "small win 51" is "15/16", and when the "small win 51" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

When the stop switch 42 is operated in any order with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in the middle, priority is given to stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 52" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be stopped and displayed (when "minor win 52" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" on the active line.

Specifically, when the first stop is in the middle, the "REPLAY" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is stopped in the middle middle row. Next, when the second stop is on the left, the "Large BAR" on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row with priority, and if this cannot be stopped, the "Blue 7", "Red 7" or "Symbol" on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row.
When the "big BAR" of the left reel 31 stops in the upper left row at the second left stop, priority is given to stopping the "red 7" of the right reel 31 in the middle right row at the third right stop, and if this cannot be stopped, the "small BAR" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stopped in the middle right row. When the "big BAR" stops in the upper left row and the "red 7" stops in the middle right row, the "small prize 52" is won. On the other hand, when the "big BAR" stops in the upper left row and the "small BAR" stops in the middle right row, the "MB03" is won.
When the left reel 31 stops at the upper left row when the left reel 31 stops at the second left row, the right reel 31 stops at the middle right row when the right reel 31 stops at the third right row. This results in the winning of "MB03".

In addition, when the second stop is on the right, priority is given to stopping the "red 7" on the right reel 31 in the right middle row, and if this cannot be stopped, the "blue 7", "big BAR" or "symbol" on the right reel 31 is stopped in the right middle row.
When the "red 7" of the right reel 31 stops in the right middle row at the second right stop, priority is given to stopping the "big BAR" of the left reel 31 in the left upper row at the third left stop, and if this cannot be stopped, the "small BAR" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped in the left upper row. When the "red 7" stops in the right middle row and the "big BAR" stops in the left upper row, the "small prize 52" is won. On the other hand, when the "red 7" stops in the right middle row and the "small BAR" stops in the left upper row, the "MB01" is won.
When the right reel 31 stops at the middle right row at the second stop on the right, the left reel 31 stops at the upper left row at the third stop on the left, and the left reel 31 stops at the middle right row at the second stop on the right. This results in the winning of "MB01".

The probability of making the "Big BAR" on the left reel 31 stop in the upper left row is "1/4", and the probability of making the "Red 7" on the right reel 31 stop in the middle right row is also "1/4", so the probability of making the symbol combination corresponding to the "Small Win 52" stop on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, the probability of missing out on "small win 52" is "15/16", and when "small win 52" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop to the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, there is a 1/1 probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 30", "Small win 31" or "Small win 32" will stop and be displayed on the active line, just like when the "Small win D18 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during non-RT and non-internal play.

When the "small prize D19 condition device" to the "small prize D24 condition device" are activated, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "small prize D17 condition device" or the "small prize D18 condition device" is activated.
The "small prize D19 condition device" includes the five types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
First, the stopping control of the reel 31 in the case where the "small win D19 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during a non-RT and non-internal period will be described.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 57" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".

The probability of the "small BAR" on the center reel 31 stopping in the middle row is "1/4", and the probability of the "big BAR" on the right reel 31 stopping in the right middle row is also "1/4", so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 57" being stopped and displayed on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 57" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 57" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 58" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".
The probability of the "Big BAR" on the left reel 31 stopping in the upper left row is "1/4", and the probability of the "Big BAR" on the right reel 31 stopping in the middle right row is also "1/4", so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 58" being stopped and displayed on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 58" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 58" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the right and the second and third stops in any push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "Small win 30", "Small win 31" or "Small win 32" (all of which pay out one coin) on the pay line with a probability of 1/1 (always).

Next, we will explain the stopping control of reel 31 when the "small prize D19 condition device" and the "MB condition device" are activated simultaneously (duplicate win) during a non-RT and non-internal state, or when the "small prize D19 condition device" is activated during a non-RT and internal state.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 57" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 57" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" on the active line.
The probability of missing out on "small win 57" is "15/16", and when "small win 57" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

When the stop switch 42 is operated in any order with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 58" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 58" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" is displayed on the active line.
The probability of missing out on "small win 58" is "15/16", and when "small win 58" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, there is a 1/1 probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 30", "Small win 31" or "Small win 32" will stop and be displayed on the active line, just like when the "Small win D19 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during non-RT and non-internal play.

The "small prize D20 condition device" includes the five types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
First, the stopping control of the reel 31 in the case where the "small win D20 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during a non-RT and non-internal period will be described.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 59" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".

The probability of the "small BAR" on the center reel 31 stopping in the middle row is "1/4", and the probability of the "symbol" on the right reel 31 stopping in the right middle row is also "1/4", so the probability of the pattern combination corresponding to "small win 59" being stopped and displayed on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 59" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 59" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 60" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".
The probability of making the "big BAR" on the left reel 31 stop in the upper left row is "1/4", and the probability of making the "symbol" on the right reel 31 stop in the middle right row is also "1/4", so the probability of making the pattern combination corresponding to "minor win 60" stop on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 60" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 60" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the right and the second and third stops in any push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "Small win 30", "Small win 31" or "Small win 32" (all of which pay out one coin) on the pay line with a probability of 1/1 (always).

Next, we will explain the stopping control of reel 31 when the "small prize D20 condition device" and the "MB condition device" are activated simultaneously (duplicate win) during a non-RT and non-internal state, or when the "small prize D20 condition device" is activated during a non-RT and internal state.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 59" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 59" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" is displayed on the active line.
The probability of missing out on "small win 59" is "15/16", and when "small win 59" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

When the stop switch 42 is operated in any order with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 60" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 60" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" is displayed on the active line.
The probability of missing out on the "small win 60" is "15/16", and when the "small win 60" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, there is a 1/1 probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 30", "Small win 31" or "Small win 32" will stop and be displayed on the active line, just like when the "Small win D20 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during non-RT and non-internal play.

The "small prize D21 condition device" includes the five types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
First, the stopping control of the reel 31 in the case where the "small prize D21 condition device" is activated alone (single winning) during a non-RT and non-internal period will be described.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 53" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".

The probability of the "symbol" on the center reel 31 stopping in the middle row is "1/4", and the probability of the "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 stopping in the right middle row is also "1/4", so the probability of the pattern combination corresponding to "minor win 53" being stopped and displayed on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 53" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 53" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 54" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".
The probability of the “symbol” on the left reel 31 stopping in the upper left row is “1/4”, and the probability of the “Blue 7” on the right reel 31 stopping in the middle right row is also “1/4”, so the probability of the pattern combination corresponding to “minor win 54” stopping on an active line is “1/16”.
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 54" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 54" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the right and the second and third stops in any push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "Small win 30", "Small win 31" or "Small win 32" (all of which pay out one coin) on the pay line with a probability of 1/1 (always).

Next, we will explain the stopping control of reel 31 when the "small prize D21 condition device" and the "MB condition device" are activated simultaneously (duplicate win) during a non-RT and non-internal state, or when the "small prize D21 condition device" is activated during a non-RT and internal state.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 53" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 53" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" on the active line.
The probability of missing out on "small win 53" is "15/16", and when "small win 53" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

When the stop switch 42 is operated in any order with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 54" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 54" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" is displayed on the active line.
The probability of missing out on "small win 54" is "15/16", and when "small win 54" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, there is a 1/1 probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 30", "Small win 31" or "Small win 32" will stop and be displayed on the active line, just like when the "Small win D21 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during non-RT and non-internal play.

The "small prize D22 condition device" includes the five types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
First, the stopping control of the reel 31 in the case where the "small win D22 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during a non-RT and non-internal period will be described.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 55" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".

The probability of the "symbol" on the center reel 31 stopping in the middle row is "1/4", and the probability of the "red 7" on the right reel 31 stopping in the right middle row is also "1/4", so the probability of the pattern combination corresponding to "minor win 55" being stopped and displayed on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 55" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 55" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 56" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".
The probability of the “symbol” on the left reel 31 stopping in the upper left row is “1/4”, and the probability of the “Blue 7” on the right reel 31 stopping in the middle right row is also “1/4”, so the probability of the pattern combination corresponding to “minor win 56” being stopped and displayed on an active line is “1/16”.
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 56" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 56" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the right and the second and third stops in any push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "Small win 30", "Small win 31" or "Small win 32" (all of which pay out one coin) on the pay line with a probability of 1/1 (always).

Next, we will explain the stopping control of reel 31 when the "small prize D22 condition device" and the "MB condition device" are activated simultaneously (duplicate win) during a non-RT and non-internal state, or when the "small prize D22 condition device" is activated during a non-RT and internal state.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 55" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 55" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" on the active line.
The probability of missing out on "small win 55" is "15/16", and when "small win 55" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

When the stop switch 42 is operated in any order with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 56" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 56" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" is displayed on the active line.
The probability of missing out on "small win 56" is "15/16", and when "small win 56" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, there is a 1/1 probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 30", "Small win 31" or "Small win 32" will stop and be displayed on the active line, just like when the "Small win D22 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during non-RT and non-internal play.

The "small prize D23 condition device" includes the five types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
First, the stopping control of the reel 31 in the case where the "small win D23 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during a non-RT and non-internal period will be described.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 61" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".

The probability of the "symbol" on the center reel 31 stopping in the middle row is "1/4", and the probability of the "big BAR" on the right reel 31 stopping in the right middle row is also "1/4", so the probability of the pattern combination corresponding to the "minor win 61" stopping on the pay line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 61" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 61" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 62" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".
The probability of the "symbol" on the left reel 31 stopping in the upper left row is "1/4", and the probability of the "big BAR" on the right reel 31 stopping in the middle right row is also "1/4", so the probability of the pattern combination corresponding to "minor prize 62" being stopped and displayed on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 62" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 62" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the right and the second and third stops in any push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "Small win 30", "Small win 31" or "Small win 32" (all of which pay out one coin) on the pay line with a probability of 1/1 (always).

Next, we will explain the stopping control of reel 31 when the "small prize D23 condition device" and the "MB condition device" are activated simultaneously (duplicate win) during a non-RT and non-internal state, or when the "small prize D23 condition device" is activated during a non-RT and internal state.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 61" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 61" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" on the active line.
The probability of missing out on the "small win 61" is "15/16", and when the "small win 61" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

When the stop switch 42 is operated in any order with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 62" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 62" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" on the active line.
The probability of missing out on the "small win 62" is "15/16", and when the "small win 62" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, there is a 1/1 probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 30", "Small win 31" or "Small win 32" will stop and be displayed on the active line, just like when the "Small win D23 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during non-RT and non-internal play.

The "small prize D24 condition device" includes the five types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
First, the stopping control of the reel 31 in the case where the "small win D24 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during a non-RT and non-internal period will be described.
When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 63" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".

The probability of the "symbol" on the center reel 31 stopping in the middle row is "1/4", and the probability of the "symbol" on the right reel 31 stopping in the right middle row is also "1/4", so the probability of the pattern combination corresponding to "minor win 63" being stopped and displayed on an active line is "1/16".
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 63" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 63" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops in any pressing order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 64" (one coin payout) on an active line with a probability of "1/16".
The probability of the “symbol” on the left reel 31 stopping in the upper left row is “1/4”, and the probability of the “symbol” on the right reel 31 stopping in the middle right row is also “1/4”, so the probability of the pattern combination corresponding to “minor win 64” being stopped and displayed on an active line is “1/16”.
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, when the "small winning combination 64" is missed, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the pay line. Therefore, when the "small winning combination 64" is missed, the winning combination is not won.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the right and the second and third stops in any push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "Small win 30", "Small win 31" or "Small win 32" (all of which pay out one coin) on the pay line with a probability of 1/1 (always).

Next, we will explain the stopping control of reel 31 when the "small prize D24 condition device" and the "MB condition device" are activated simultaneously (duplicate win) during a non-RT and non-internal state, or when the "small prize D24 condition device" is activated during a non-RT and internal state.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the left and the second and third stops in any pressing order, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 63" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 63" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" on the active line.
The probability of missing out on the "small win 63" is "15/16", and when the "small win 63" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB02" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

When the stop switch 42 is operated in any order with the first stop in the middle and the second and third stops pressed, priority is given to displaying the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 64" (one coin payout) on the active line, and when this cannot be displayed (when "minor win 64" is missed), the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" on the active line.
The probability of missing out on the "small win 64" is "15/16", and when the "small win 64" is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" is displayed stopped on the active line, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" or "MB03" being displayed stopped on the active line is "15/16".

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the right and the second and third stops in any pressing order, there is a 1/1 probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 30", "Small win 31" or "Small win 32" will stop and be displayed on the active line, just like when the "Small win D24 condition device" is activated alone (single win) during non-RT and non-internal play.

The "small win E condition device" includes the seven types of winning combinations described in the winning combination column of FIG.
In addition, during non-RT and non-internal periods, the "small win E condition device" operates in conjunction with the "MB condition device" (duplicate win).
When the "small win E condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to either "small win 18" or "small win 81" to "small win 86" on an active line according to the pressing order and operation timing of the stop switch 42.

Specifically, when the "Small Win E Condition Device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, at the first left stop, the "watermelon" or "blank" (the two symbols combined give "PB=1") on the left reel 31 is stopped in the upper left row to allow for the winning of "Small Win 18", "Small Win 81" to "Small Win 83" or "Small Win 86". From the second stop onwards, the symbols that make up "Small Win 18", "Small Win 81" to "Small Win 83" or "Small Win 86" are made to stop on an active line, and if the symbols that make up these cannot be stopped on an active line, the win will be missed.

When the "small prize E condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, at the time of the first stop in the middle reel, the "watermelon", "red 7" or "blue 7" (the three symbols combined for "PB=1") on the middle reel 31 is stopped in the middle middle row to enable the winning of "small prize 18" or "small prize 81" to "small prize 86".
When the "watermelon" stops in the middle row at the time of the first stop in the middle row, the "small prize 84" or the "small prize 85" can always be won.
When "red 7" stops in the middle row at the first stop, the symbols constituting "small prize 81" or "small prize 82" are made to stop on a valid line from the second stop onwards, and if the symbols constituting these cannot be made to stop on a valid line, the winning combination is missed.

If "Blue 7" stops in the middle middle row when the first center stop occurs, then when the second left stop occurs, a "watermelon" or "blank" (the two symbols combined make "PB=1") on the left reel 31 stops in the upper left row to enable the winning of "small prize 18" or "small prize 82".
When the "watermelon" stops in the upper left row at the second stop on the left, the "replay" (PB=1) stops in the middle right row at the third stop on the right. This results in the "minor win 18" being won.
In addition, when a "blank" stops in the upper left row at the second stop on the left, a "watermelon" (PB ≠ 1) is made to stop in the middle right row at the third stop on the right, and when a "watermelon" stops in the middle right row, a "small prize 82" is won, and when a "watermelon" cannot be made to stop in the middle right row, the prize is missed.

When the "Small Win E Condition Device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, at the first right stop, the right reel 31's "watermelon" or "blank" (the two symbols combined give "PB=1") is stopped in the right middle row to allow for the winning of "Small Win 82", "Small Win 84" or "Small Win 85". From the second stop onwards, the symbols that make up "Small Win 82", "Small Win 84" or "Small Win 85" are made to stop on an active line, and if the symbols that make up these cannot be stopped on an active line, the win will be missed.

When the "small win E condition device" is activated in a non-RT and inside an MB, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "small win E condition device" is activated in a non-RT and inside an MB.
In addition, when the "small prize E condition device" is activated and the left reel stops first, the "watermelon" or "blank" on the left reel 31 always stops on the upper left row (effective line) to allow the "small prize 18", "small prize 81" to "small prize 83" or "small prize 86" to be won. Therefore, when the "small prize 18", "small prize 81" to "small prize 83" or "small prize 86" is missed, the symbol combinations corresponding to "MB01" to "MB03" will not stop on an effective line.

In addition, if the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 stops on the middle middle row (effective line) at the first center stop when the "Small Win E Condition Device" is activated, then at the second left stop, the "Watermelon" or "Blank" on the left reel 31 will always stop on the upper left row (effective line) to allow for the winning of "Small Win 18" or "Small Win 82". Therefore, if the "Small Win 18" or "Small Win 82" is missed, the symbol combinations corresponding to "MB01" to "MB03" will not stop on an effective line.

Furthermore, when the "Small Win E Condition Device" is activated and the right first stop occurs, the "watermelon" or "blank" on the right reel 31 always stops on the right middle row (effective line) to allow for the winning of "Small Win 82", "Small Win 84" or "Small Win 85". Therefore, if "Small Win 82", "Small Win 84" or "Small Win 85" is missed, the symbol combinations corresponding to "MB01" to "MB03" will not stop on an effective line.

The "small win F condition device" includes two types of winning roles described in the winning role column of FIG.
When the "small win F condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, the reel 31 is controlled to stop so that a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 87" or "small win 88" is displayed on the activated line according to the pressing order and operation timing of the stop switch 42.
In addition, when the "small win F condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside MB, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "small win F condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside MB.

The "small prize G condition device" includes 18 types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
When the "small win G condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that a symbol combination corresponding to any one of "small win 12" to "small win 24", "small win 29" to "small win 32" or "small win 89" is displayed on the activated line in accordance with the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed.
In addition, when the "small win G condition device" is activated in a non-RT and inside an MB, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "small win G condition device" is activated in a non-RT and inside an MB.

The "small prize H condition device" includes the three types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column of FIG.
When the "small win H condition device" is activated during non-RT and non-internal play, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that a symbol combination corresponding to any one of "small win 90" to "small win 92" is displayed on the activated line in accordance with the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed.
In addition, when the "small win H condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside MB, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "small win H condition device" is activated while not in RT and inside MB.

The "small prize ALL condition device" is a condition device that operates during MB play (when CB is activated) regardless of the lottery results by the prize lottery means 61, and includes all small prizes ("small prize 01" to "small prize 92") as winning prizes.
Then, depending on the pressing order and operation timing of the stop switch 42, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to either "small prize 03" to "small prize 05" or "small prize 85" to "small prize 92" (each of which pays out two coins when the CB is activated) on the activated line.

During MB play (CB operation), the specified number (the number of medals bet to start the game) becomes two, and the reel 31 is stopped and controlled based on the "small prize ALL condition device," resulting in the winning of any small prize that pays out two medals.
As a result, during MB play (CB operation), two medals are bet for each play and two medals are paid out (two in, two out), so the player's medals neither increase nor decrease.

219 to 224 are diagrams (number placement table) showing the number of winning numbers to be placed for each game state (RT) and each setting value in this embodiment.
219 and 220 show number setting tables when not in RT and not inside, FIGS. 221 and 222 show number setting tables when not in RT and inside MB, and FIGS. 223 and 224 show number setting tables when playing MB.

Dividing the numbers shown in Figures 219 to 224 by "65536" gives the probability of winning for each winning number. For example, in Figure 219, the number of winning numbers "1" is "8946" for all settings, so the probability of winning the winning number "1" during non-RT and non-internal play is "8946/65536".
Also, for example, when the winning number "22" is selected by the lottery by the role selection means 61, the role condition device number "1" and the small role and replay condition device number "22" are generated from the winning number "22". Then, the "MB condition device" corresponding to the role condition device number "1" and the "small role C1 condition device" corresponding to the small role and replay condition device number "22" are activated.

In Figures 219 to 224, in the "Lottery" column, "○" means that a lottery will be held (is subject to lottery). As shown in Figures 219 to 224, in this embodiment, all winning numbers ("1" to "79") are subject to lottery in all game states (non-RT and not inside, non-RT and inside MB, and MB game).

Also, in Figures 219 to 224, in the "Advantageous Zone" column, "○" means that there is a transition from a non-advantageous zone to an advantageous zone, and "×" means that there is no transition from a non-advantageous zone to an advantageous zone.
As shown in Figures 219 to 224, in this embodiment, in a non-advantageous zone, if the winning number selected by the role selection means 61 is between winning number "1" (replay A condition device) and winning number "27" (small role C6 condition device), or between winning number "76" (small role E condition device) and winning number "79" (small role H condition device), the zone will transition from the non-advantageous zone to the advantageous zone.

As shown in Figures 219 to 220, for example, in the case of "setting 1", during non-RT and non-internal play, the probability of winning one of the winning numbers "1" to "27" or "76" to "79" in the lottery by the role selection means 61 is "57736/65536". Therefore, even if the advantageous zone ends and you move to the non-advantageous zone, you will then win one of the winning numbers "1" to "27" or "76" to "79" in one or two plays, and move from the non-advantageous zone to the advantageous zone.

In contrast, in the non-advantageous zone, when the winning number selected by the role selection means 61 is any of the winning numbers "28" (small role D1 condition device) to "75" (small role D24 condition device), the player does not move to the advantageous zone and remains in the non-advantageous zone.
In addition, when the winning number "28" to "75" is selected in the lottery by the role selection means 61 in the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone is maintained.

Also, in Figures 219 to 224, the last part of each number table shows the MB total value, replay total value, small win total value, and non-winning value.
In addition, when the MB condition device and the small win condition device are activated at the same time (double winning), the number of entries is added to both the MB total value and the small win total value. Therefore, the total from the MB total value to the non-winning value may not be "65536".

219 and 220 are diagrams showing the number table in a non-RT and non-internal state.
As shown in Figures 219 and 220, during non-RT and non-internal periods, all winning numbers ("1" to "79") are drawn. This allows the MB condition device, all replay condition devices (replay A condition device to replay I condition device), and all small role condition devices (small role A1 condition device to small role H condition device) to be drawn.

221 and 222 are diagrams showing a numerical entry table within a non-RT MB.
As shown in Figures 221 and 222, during non-RT and inside MB, the lottery for all winning numbers ("1" to "79") is conducted in the same manner as during non-RT and inside MB. However, during non-RT and inside MB, the lottery for the "MB condition device" is not conducted.
For example, when the winning number "22" is drawn by the role drawing means 61, the small role and replay condition device number "22" and the role condition device number "1" are generated from the winning number "22". Then, the "small role C1 condition device" operates in response to the generated small role and replay condition device number "22", but since the "MB condition device" is already operating in the non-RT and MB interior, the generated role condition device number "1" is cleared.

Figures 223 and 224 are diagrams showing the number placement table during MB play.
As shown in FIG. 223 and FIG. 224, during MB play, all winning numbers ("1" to "79") are drawn, just as during non-RT and non-internal play, and during non-RT and MB play. However, during MB play, the "MB condition device" is not drawn. Also, during MB play (when CB is in operation), the "small role ALL condition device" is operated, and the stop control of the reel 31 is performed based on this "small role ALL condition device." Therefore, the stop control of the reel 31 is not performed based on the "replay A condition device" to "replay I condition device" and the "small role A1 condition device" to "small role H condition device."

Next, the RT transition in this embodiment will be described.
FIG. 225 is a diagram showing RT transitions in this embodiment, and FIG. 226 is a diagram showing RT variation conditions in this embodiment.
In Figure 226, "∞" (infinite) in the number of times column means that there is no upper limit on the number of times that each RT can be played, and that RT will be maintained (continued) until the transition condition written in the change trigger column is met.

The main control means 50 judges whether or not the RT transition condition is satisfied every game when all the reels 31 are stopped, and performs control to transition to RT when it judges that the RT transition condition is satisfied.
First, when the RWM 53 is initialized, the state transitions to non-RT and non-internal. At the time of shipment from the factory, the state transitions to non-RT and non-internal. Also, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on with the power off and the power is turned on in this state, the state transitions to a setting change state. At this time, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed, and the state transitions to non-RT and non-internal.

The non-RT and non-internal state is maintained until the "MB condition device" is activated. Then, when the "MB condition device" is activated during the non-RT and non-internal state, and a symbol combination corresponding to one of "MB01" to "MB03" is displayed (MB wins), the state transitions to MB play (MB activated). Also, when the "MB condition device" is activated during the non-RT and non-internal state, but a symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" to "MB03" is not displayed (MB does not win), the state transitions to non-RT and non-internal state.

In the non-RT and MB state, the game continues until a symbol combination corresponding to any one of "MB01" to "MB03" is displayed. Then, in the non-RT and MB state, when a symbol combination corresponding to any one of "MB01" to "MB03" is displayed, the game transitions to MB play.
The MB game (MB operation) continues until the total number of medals acquired (number of medals paid out, number of medals awarded) exceeds 13. When the total number of medals acquired during the MB game exceeds 13, the MB game ends and the game transitions to a non-RT and non-internal state.

Next, the gameplay of this embodiment will be described.
In this embodiment, the game is usually played in a non-RT and inside the MB. Then, in a non-RT and inside the MB, when the "small role D1 condition device" to the "small role D24 condition device" are activated, a push order in which a small role wins with a probability of "1/1" and "MB01" to "MB03" do not win is announced. Specifically, in a non-RT and inside the MB, when the "small role D1 condition device" to the "small role D8 condition device" are activated, a push order of the left first stop is announced, when the "small role D9 condition device" to the "small role D16 condition device" are activated, a push order of the middle first stop is announced, and when the "small role D17 condition device" to the "small role D24 condition device" are activated, a push order of the right first stop is announced.

Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated in response to the notification, a small win occurs with a probability of "1/1", and "MB01" to "MB03" do not win. This prevents "MB01" to "MB03" from winning, and maintains non-RT and inside MB.
In contrast, in a non-RT state and inside an MB, when the "small prize D1 condition device" to the "small prize D24 condition device" are activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order different from that indicated by the notification, there is a 1/16 probability that a small prize will be won, but there is a 15/16 probability that "MB01" to "MB03" will be won.

Also, if "MB01" to "MB03" win, no medals will be paid out in the current game, but the game will transition to MB game from the next game.
The MB game continues until the total number of medals paid out exceeds 13, and ends when the total number of medals paid out exceeds 13.
During MB play, two medals are bet for each game and two medals are paid out, so the player's medals do not increase or decrease.
Then, when CB play is executed seven times during MB play, the total number of medals paid out during MB play becomes 14, exceeding 13, so the end condition of MB play is met, and then the game transitions to a non-RT and non-internal state.

In addition, the non-RT and non-internal state is maintained until the "MB condition device" is activated (a win is made). Then, if the "MB condition device" is activated (a win is made) during the non-RT and non-internal state and "MB01" to "MB03" do not win, the state transitions to the non-RT and MB internal state.
As described above, during non-RT and non-internal play, the "MB condition device" does not operate alone (single winning), but operates in overlap with any of the "small prize C1 condition device" to "small prize F condition device" (overlapping winning).

As described above, in a game in which the "MB condition device" and the "small prize C1 condition device" to "small prize C6 condition device" are activated in overlapping fashion (overlapping wins) during a non-RT and non-internal game, either a small prize will win or the small prize will be missed, and "MB01" to "MB03" will not win.
Similarly, in a game in which the "MB condition device" and the "small prize E condition device" to "small prize F condition device" are activated in overlapping fashion (overlapping wins) during a non-RT and non-internal game, either a small prize will win or the small prize will be missed, and "MB01" to "MB03" will not win.
Therefore, when the "MB condition device" and the "small prize C1 condition device" to "small prize C6 condition device" or the "small prize E condition device" to "small prize F condition device" are activated in a overlapping manner (duplicate wins) during a non-RT and non-internal state, the state will then transition to a non-RT and internal state of MB.

In addition, in a game in which the "MB condition device" and the "small prize D1 condition device" to "small prize D24 condition device" are activated in a non-RT and non-internal state (duplicate win), the system will announce the push order in which a small prize will win with a probability of 1/1, and "MB01" to "MB03" will not win, just like when the "small prize D1 condition device" to "small prize D24 condition device" are activated in a non-RT and non-internal state.

Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated in response to the notification, a small win occurs with a probability of "1/1", and "MB01" to "MB03" do not win. This prevents "MB01" to "MB03" from winning, and then the game moves to non-RT and inside MB.
If the stop switch 42 is operated in a different pressing order from the notification, the probability of winning a small prize is "1/16", but the probability of winning "MB01" to "MB03" is "15/16". When "MB01" to "MB03" win, the game shifts from non-RT and non-internal to MB game without passing through non-RT and MB.

Also, as shown in Figures 219 to 220, the probability that the "MB condition device" will operate (win) during non-RT and non-internal periods is "32348/65536."
Therefore, even if the state transitions to a non-RT and non-internal state, if the "MB condition device" is activated (wins) within about two games thereafter and "MB01" to "MB03" do not win, the state transitions to a non-RT and non-internal state.

In addition, when the "small prize D1 condition device" to "small prize D24 condition device" are activated in a non-RT and inside an MB, the press sequence to avoid winning "MB01" to "MB03" is announced, but the announcement of the press sequence is limited to the advantageous zone, and in the non-advantageous zone, the press sequence to avoid winning "MB01" to "MB03" is not announced.
However, as mentioned above, even if the advantageous zone ends and a transition to a non-advantageous zone occurs, the player will then win either the winning number "1" (Replay A condition device) to the winning number "27" (Small win C6 condition device), or the winning number "76" (Small win E condition device) to the winning number "79" (Small win H condition device) in the first or second play, and will transition to the advantageous zone.
Therefore, when the "small prize D1 condition device" to "small prize D24 condition device" are activated in a non-RT and MB, it is extremely rare that the push order to avoid winning "MB01" to "MB03" is not notified.

As explained above, in this embodiment, most games are played in non-RT and inside MB. Even if "MB01" to "MB03" win and transition to MB game occurs, the game transitions to non-RT and inside after 7 games, and then to non-RT and inside MB after about 2 games. In addition, during MB game, two medals are bet for each game and two medals are paid out, so the player's medals are neither increased nor decreased, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage.
Then, in a non-RT state and inside the MB, when the winning number selection means 61 selects (determines) any of the winning numbers "3" (replay C condition device) through "9" (replay I condition device), and when the winning number "76" (small winnings E condition device) is selected (determined), an AT selection is executed, and if the AT selection is selected, then an announcement game (AT) is executed.

Here, for example, a "RB (first type special role)" or a "BB (first type role continuous operation device)" may be provided as a special role (role), and an "RB game" or a "BB game" may be provided as a "special game."
However, the number of symbol combinations corresponding to RB is not to exceed "1/500" of the number of all symbol combinations. When the number of symbols on each reel 31 is "20", the number of all symbol combinations is "8000", so the number of symbol combinations corresponding to RB is "16" or less. As described above, when the number of symbols on each reel 31 is "20", if four specific symbols are arranged at intervals of five symbols, a "PB=1" arrangement can be achieved, but since the number of symbol combinations corresponding to RB is set to "16" or less, a "PB=1" arrangement cannot be achieved.

Similarly, the number of symbol combinations corresponding to BB is not allowed to exceed 1/1500 of the number of all symbol combinations. If the number of symbols on each reel 31 is 20, the total number of symbol combinations is 8000, so the number of symbol combinations corresponding to BB is 5 or less. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to BB cannot be arranged as "PB=1".

In contrast, since there is no limit to the number of symbol combinations that can be associated with an MB, the symbol combination that can be associated with an MB can be arranged as "PB=1". This allows for a game in which, in a non-RT situation and within an MB, when the "small win D1 condition device" to the "small win D24 condition device" are activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in a different order from the notification, "MB01" to "MB03" will always win if a small win is missed.

In this embodiment, there are three types of special roles: "MB01" to "MB03". Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" has four types of role numbers: "1" to "4", the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" has four types of role numbers: "5" to "8", and the symbol combination corresponding to "MB03" has four types of role numbers: "9" to "12". Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB01" is a "PB=1" arrangement, the symbol combination corresponding to "MB02" is also a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbol combination corresponding to "MB03" is also a "PB=1" arrangement.

The winning roles of the "MB Condition Device" are set to "MB01" to "MB03", and when the "MB Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning roles "MB01" to "MB03" can be displayed stopped on an active line (can win a prize).
As a result, when the "small win D1 condition device" to the "small win D8 condition device" are activated in a non-RT state and inside the MB, if the stop switch 42 is operated at the center or right first stop, the winning of a small win is prioritized, while the MB can always be made to win if a small win is missed.
Similarly, in a non-RT state and inside the MB, when the "small prize D9 condition device" to "small prize D16 condition device" are activated and the stop switch 42 is operated at the first left or right stop, and when the "small prize D17 condition device" to "small prize D24 condition device" are activated and the stop switch 42 is operated at the first left or center stop, it is possible to prioritize the winning of a small prize, while always allowing the MB to win if a small prize is missed.

Also, for example, if a special role is provided with BB, the game is played while in BB, and the AT lottery is won while in BB, the notification game (AT) can be executed while in BB. However, if the BB game is designed to reduce medals, if the BB is won, the medals of the player will be reduced during the BB game, which is disadvantageous to the player.
In contrast to this, in this embodiment, even if "MB01" to "MB03" win and transition to MB play occurs, as described above, during MB play, two medals are bet for each play and two medals are paid out, so the player's medals neither increase nor decrease, and it is possible to ensure that the player is not put at a disadvantage.

In addition, in this embodiment, during non-RT and non-internal periods, there are cases where the "MB condition device" and the "small prize C1 condition device" to "small prize C6 condition device" are activated in overlapping fashion (duplicate wins), and if the button press sequence is correct in this case, a small prize with a payout of 3 coins will be won with a probability of 1/1.
Here, in a game in which the "MB condition device" and the "small prize C1 condition device" to "small prize C6 condition device" are activated in overlapping fashion (overlapping wins), it is also possible to have a small prize that pays out one coin win when the button presses are correct, but in this embodiment, a small prize that pays out three coins wins, which makes it possible to increase the payout rate compared to when a small prize that pays out one coin wins.

In addition, if the conditions for ending the advantageous zone are met during a non-RT and non-internal period, the zone will be non-RT, non-internal, and non-advantageous from the next game.
Furthermore, when the winning numbers "29", "31", "33", "35", "37", "39", "41", "43", "45", "47", "49", "51", "53", "55", "57", "59", "61", "63", "65", "67", "69", "71", "73" or "75" are won during non-RT, non-internal and non-advantageous zones, the "MB condition device" and the "small role D1 condition device" to "small role D24 condition device" are operated in overlapping (overlapping win). In this case, as shown in Figures 219 to 220, there is no transition to the advantageous zone, so the non-advantageous zone will be maintained for the next game.

Furthermore, in the non-advantageous zone, since the push order to avoid winning "MB01" to "MB03" is not announced, "MB01" to "MB03" will win with a probability of "(2/3) x (15/16) = (5/8)", and the game will move to MB game. In this case, the game will be in MB game and non-advantageous zone from the next game.
As shown in Figures 223 to 224, if the winning numbers "1" to "27" or "76" to "79" are won during MB play and in a non-advantageous zone, the next play will enter into MB play and a favorable zone.

As described above, the MB game continues for at least 7 games, but the non-advantageous zone ends at games 1 to 2. Therefore, when the MB game transitions to the non-advantageous zone, the MB game transitions to the advantageous zone at games 1 to 2.
Furthermore, it is extremely rare for the player to be in both an MB game and a non-favorable zone, and when the player transitions from a non-favorable zone to a favorable zone in such an extremely rare game state, the player can be given a privilege, such as being granted the right to execute the AT (a decision to execute the AT) or transitioning to a game state with a higher probability of winning the AT lottery.

Although the twelfth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, the special role is MB (second type role continuous operation device), but the special role is not limited to MB as long as the corresponding pattern combination can be arranged as "PB = 1".

(2) In the above embodiment, during MB play, two medals are bet and two medals are paid out for each play, but this is not limited to the above. For example, one medal may be bet and one medal may be paid out (the specified number becomes one medal and a small role that pays out one medal is won), or three medals may be bet and three medals may be paid out (the specified number becomes three medals and a small role that pays out three medals is won). Even in this way, it is possible to ensure that the player's medals do not increase or decrease. In other words, during MB play, the reels 31 may be stopped and controlled so that a symbol combination corresponding to a small role in which the number of medals to be paid out is set to the same number as the number of medals bet is stopped and displayed.

(3) In the above embodiment, when the push order is correct when the "Small Winning C1 Condition Device" to the "Small Winning C6 Condition Device" are activated, a small winning combination with a payout of 3 coins with a probability of "1/1" is won. However, this is not limited to the above, and for example, a small winning combination with a payout of 2 coins with a probability of "1/1" may be won. In other words, when the push order is correct when the "Small Winning C1 Condition Device" to the "Small Winning C6 Condition Device" are activated, a small winning combination with a payout number of coins equal to or less than a specified number may be won. However, it is preferable that the maximum number of medals to be paid out when a small winning combination is won when the "Small Winning C1 Condition Device" to the "Small Winning C6 Condition Device" are activated is set to the number of medals bet in the game.

(4) In the above embodiment, when the push order is correct when the "Small Winning D1 Condition Device" to the "Small Winning D24 Condition Device" are activated, a small winning combination with a payout of 1 coin with a probability of 1/1 is awarded. However, this is not limited to the above, and for example, a small winning combination with a payout of 2 coins with a probability of 1/1 may be awarded, or a small winning combination with a payout of 3 coins with a probability of 1/1 may be awarded. In other words, when the push order is correct when the "Small Winning D1 Condition Device" to the "Small Winning D24 Condition Device" are activated, a small winning combination with a payout number of coins less than a specified number may be awarded.

(5) In the above embodiment, the "MB condition device" is configured to operate in conjunction with only one of the "small prize condition devices" (duplicate win), but this is not limited to the above, and it may be configured to operate in conjunction with, for example, one of the "replay condition devices" (duplicate win).
(6) In the above embodiment, the condition for ending the MB game was set to when the cumulative number of medals won (number of medals paid out) exceeded 13. However, this is not limited to this and the condition can be set as appropriate, for example, when the cumulative number of medals won exceeds 11 or 15.

(7) In the above embodiment, a slot machine is given as an example of a gaming machine. However, the present invention can also be applied to, for example, casino machines and enclosed gaming machines (medalless gaming machines).
Here, an enclosed gaming machine (medalless gaming machine) can, for example, eliminate the medal payout device (a unit including the hopper 35, hopper motor 36, and payout sensor 37). It can also eliminate the need for the medal insertion port 43 and medal selector. Then, all electronic medals (electronic gaming media) awarded as a result of winning a winning combination are stored in the stored number display LED 76. In this case, it is considered that the stored number display LED 76 is configured with, for example, five digits (allowing the storage of a maximum of "99,999" electronic medals).

(8) The first to twelfth embodiments and the various modified examples shown in the first to twelfth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

Thirteenth embodiment
The thirteenth embodiment relates to interrupt processing and an interrupt prohibited period. Note that the "interrupt (processing)" is also called a "timer interrupt (processing)", but will be simply called an "interrupt (processing)" in the following description.
In addition, in the interrupt processing in the thirteenth embodiment, an interrupt inhibition period may be set. As explained in the fifth embodiment, the interrupt processing may be a maskable interrupt (INT) that can be inhibited, and a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) that cannot be inhibited. In the thirteenth embodiment, the term "interrupt" refers to a "maskable interrupt" that can set an interrupt inhibition period. When referring to a "non-maskable interrupt", the term "interrupt" is not abbreviated to "non-maskable interrupt".
The “interrupt disabled period” is also called an “interrupt disabled section” or an “interrupt disabled state.” Similarly, the “interrupt enabled period” is also called an “interrupt enabled section” or an “interrupt enabled state.”
In addition, in the present specification and claims, "when doing" is used as a general term including any of "before doing ('before' includes 'immediately before'),""at the same time as doing," and "after ('after' includes 'immediately after')." Specifically, for example, "when starting interrupt processing" includes "before (immediately before) starting interrupt processing,""at the same time as starting interrupt processing," and "after (immediately after) starting interrupt processing."

The information processing executed by the gaming machine 10 includes a main processing (FIG. 97) that is executed once for each game, and an interrupt processing (FIG. 232 described later) that is executed by suspending the main processing during execution of the main processing and temporarily escaping the main processing. The interrupt processing is executed at a predetermined cycle. Note that in this embodiment, the configuration is such that the main processing is started after the initialization processing is completed (see FIG. 231), but the processing that occurs before the start of a game, such as the program start processing (FIG. 229), power recovery processing (FIG. 230), and initialization processing (FIG. 231), may also be included in the concept of the main processing.

227 is a block diagram showing a timer circuit 500 for executing interrupt processing, etc. The timer circuit 500 is built in the main chip (MPU (main CPU 55)) of a one-chip microprocessor.
The timer circuit 500 includes a PTC 8-bit counter (hereinafter simply referred to as the “8-bit counter”) 501, a PTC prescaler register (also referred to as the “PTC prescaler setting register”, hereinafter simply referred to as the “prescaler register”) 502, a PTC counter setting register (also referred to as the “PTC count value setting register”, hereinafter simply referred to as the “counter setting register”) 503, and a PTC interrupt flag (hereinafter simply referred to as the “interrupt flag”) 504.

The 8-bit counter 501 is a counter consisting of 8 bits (1 byte) for measuring the timing of interrupt processing. When the power is turned on (the power supply (switch) is turned on), "0" is set to the 8-bit counter 501. The timing at which the 8-bit counter 501 is set to "0" is, for example, before the program is started or at the same time as the program is started in FIG. 229 described later.

The prescaler register 502 is a built-in register that can set a setting value to select the clock to be supplied to the 8-bit counter 501. Specifically, it is a built-in register that can set what frequency division of the system clock (SCK) (at what rate) is to be supplied to the 8-bit counter 501. For example, when the system clock is "16" MHZ, if "143" is set in the prescaler register 502,
16 (MHZ) / 143 = approx. "111.8881" KHZ
becomes the clock source for the 8-bit counter 501 .
The system clock (SCK) is a clock supplied to the main chip (MPU), and is configured to be able to execute various programs (commands) based on the system clock.

The counter setting register 503 is a built-in register capable of setting the count value of the 8-bit counter 501. Specifically, it is a built-in register capable of setting the number of clocks input from the prescaler register 502 at which an interrupt process is executed. For example, as described above, the clock source of the 8-bit counter 501 is set to about "111.8881" KHZ, and the 8-bit counter 501 times out when the clock of about "111.8881" KHZ is input "125" times.
in this case,
125/111.8881 (KHz) = approx. 1.117 ms
Interrupt processing can be executed at this cycle.
After the value is set in the counter setting register 503, the count value of the 8-bit counter 501 starts to be updated (for example, by subtracting "1" or adding "1") based on the clock from the prescaler register 502.
The value of the prescaler register 502 may be stored before the program (instruction) that stores the value of the counter setting register 503 .

After power is turned on, the initial value of the 8-bit counter 501 is "0". Then, when, for example, "125" is written to the counter setting register 503, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 changes from "0" to "125", and updating of the 8-bit counter 501 starts when the value reaches "125". As described above, "1" is subtracted approximately every "111.8881" KHZ. Then, when the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is updated while it is "1", it becomes "125".
Therefore,
"0" (when power is turned on) → "125" → "124" → ... → "2" → "1" → "125" → "124" → ...
And repeat.
In other words, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 becomes "0" when the power is turned on, and otherwise does not become "0" but circulates between values "125" and "1".

Furthermore, the time when the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is updated from "1" to "125" (the time immediately before the update or the time when the update occurs) corresponds to the time when the 8-bit counter 501 times out.
The period required for the value of 8-bit counter 501 to change from "125" to "1" is approximately "1.117" ms as mentioned above, which is the interrupt processing period (interrupt period; "Tc" in FIG. 237 described later).

Also, for example, when the value of 8-bit counter 501 is "n" (n = any value between "1" and "125"), the next time the power is turned on after being turned off, 8-bit counter 501 becomes "0" as described above.
In this way, 8-bit counter 501 cycles between "125" and "1" while power is on, and never goes back to "0." It only goes to "0" when the power is turned off and then turned back on.
On the other hand, even if the power is turned off when the value of 8-bit counter 501 is any value between "125" and "1," the initial value of 8-bit counter 501 will be "0" when the power is next turned on. In this way, the time from when the power is turned on until the 8-bit counter 501 first times out can be made constant, and the time until the first time out can be made longer compared to when the count value of 8-bit counter 501 is stored when the power is turned off.

On the other hand, a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 is provided with a storage area for a timer.
A timer for measuring the minimum time of one game, 4.1 seconds;
A timer for determining an error;
These timer values are backed up when the power is turned off, are maintained even while the power is turned off, and return to the value before the power was turned off when the power is turned on again.
In this way, the timer value provided in the RWM 53 is configured to be able to maintain the value before the power was turned off, whereas the value of the 8-bit counter 501 always becomes "0" when the power is turned on.

Furthermore, even if the main processing or interrupt processing goes out of control or processing takes an unexpected amount of time, the 8-bit counter 501 will not stop, and if the system clock is normal, the 8-bit counter 501 can cycle between "125" and "1."
Furthermore, even during interrupt processing, the 8-bit counter 501 does not stop, and if the system clock is normal, the 8-bit counter 501 can cycle between "125" and "1".
Furthermore, even during an interrupt disabled period, the 8-bit counter 501 does not stop, and if the system clock is normal, the 8-bit counter 501 can circulate between "125" and "1".

During the main process, at least one interrupt inhibition period is provided, for example, between step S296 and step S300 in Fig. 97. Note that the interrupt inhibition here is for the purpose of inhibiting interrupt processing during the ratio setting process in step S298.
Interrupt processing is prohibited while the ratio set processing is being executed because the ratio set processing is a process that uses a program stored outside the usage area, and if an interrupt processing occurs while the main processing is executing a program outside the usage area, the program processing within the usage area and the program processing outside the usage area will be mixed (running simultaneously in parallel), complicating the processing.

Although not shown, examples of other interrupt prohibitions include:
a) When transmitting a control command from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, if the control command is written into the control command buffer or the write pointer of the control command is updated, interrupt processing is prohibited before and after these processes,
b) When the blocker signal is turned on (medal acceptance permitted state) and the blocker state is turned on (insertion display LED is turned on), interrupt processing is prohibited before and after the above.
c) When the blocker signal is turned off (medal acceptance refusal state) and the blocker state is turned off (insertion display LED is turned off), interrupt processing is prohibited before and after the above.
d) When executing a process for setting the number of times the medal bet signal is output, if interrupt processes are prohibited before and after the process,
e) When executing a process for setting the number of times a medal payout signal is output, interrupt processes are prohibited before and after that process.

The above a) is for preventing malfunctions (such as writing to an address different from the normal write address) caused by an interrupt process being executed during the write process of a control command.
The above b) and c) are intended to prevent an inconsistency from occurring when an interrupt occurs between the process of turning the blocker signal on or off and the process of turning the blocker state on or off, resulting in one being on and the other being off, for example, outputting on to the blocker but not outputting on to the on indicator LED (turning it off).
Furthermore, the above d) and e) are intended to prevent an interrupt process from being executed during the setting process of the medal bet signal or medal payout signal, thereby preventing the medal bet signal or medal payout signal from being updated.

The interrupt flag 504 is a flag indicating that the 8-bit counter 501 has timed out.
The interrupt flag 504 is set (turned on) when the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is updated from "1" to "125" (when the 8-bit counter 501 times out). The timing for canceling (turning off) the set interrupt flag 504 is arbitrary. For example, the timing for canceling (turning off) the set interrupt flag 504 is as follows:
a) when executing interrupt processing, or b) when setting predetermined information (hereinafter simply referred to as "information") indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request notification signal (hereinafter simply referred to as an "interrupt request signal") in an interrupt wait monitor register 301 (described later).

The interrupt wait monitor register 301 is one of the MPU's built-in registers that can store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated after the interrupt flag 504 has been set. The interrupt flag 504 is set when the 8-bit counter 501 times out. When the interrupt flag 504 is set, an interrupt request signal is output to the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in a predetermined bit of the interrupt wait monitor register 301.
In the following, "information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred is stored in a specified bit of the interrupt wait monitor register 301" will simply be referred to as "information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301."
Then, an interrupt request signal is output to the main CPU 55 via the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and the interrupt process becomes executable. The information indicating the occurrence of the interrupt request signal is cleared when the main CPU 55 accepts the interrupt request (when the interrupt process is executed).

Here, the "situation in which information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301" is defined as follows:
a) a situation in which an interrupt request exists b) a situation in which a specific flag related to an interrupt request is on ("1") c) a situation in which a specific flag indicating that the 8-bit counter 501 has timed out is on ("1") etc.
Similarly, the situation where "information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is not stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301" is defined as follows:
a) a situation where there is no interrupt request b) a situation where a specific flag related to an interrupt request is off ("0") c) a situation where a specific flag indicating that the 8-bit counter 501 has timed out is off ("0") etc.

When the 8-bit counter 501 times out again while the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, an interrupt request signal based on the 8-bit counter 501 timing out again is output to the interrupt wait monitor register 301, but the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is not resaved based on the interrupt request signal (in this case, the interrupt request signal is ignored).

In a state where the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, interrupt processing is not started during an interrupt inhibition period, but the state where the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is maintained. Even in this state, the circulation of the 8-bit counter 501 continues without interruption. Then, when about "1.117" ms has passed and the 8-bit counter 501 times out again, if the interrupt inhibition period continues, the state where the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated remains. Here, regardless of whether the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, processing for setting the interrupt flag 504 may be executed. Alternatively, when the 8-bit counter 501 times out, it may be determined whether or not information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and if information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, processing to set the interrupt flag 504 may not be executed, and if information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is not stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, processing to set the interrupt flag 504 may be executed.
In the following description, it is assumed that when the 8-bit counter 501 times out, processing is executed to set the interrupt flag 504 regardless of whether or not the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated.

Furthermore, if information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 when the interrupt disabled period ends, interrupt processing is started and the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared. As a result, when interrupt processing is started, the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is not stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301.
Therefore, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times during the period in which information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, the number of interrupt processes executed based on the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated being stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 after the end of the interrupt inhibition period is limited to "1".
The 8-bit counter 501 continues to cycle through the values "m" to "1" even during interrupt processing.

As shown in Fig. 227, the one-chip microprocessor includes an interrupt disable flag 302. The interrupt disable flag 302 in the thirteenth embodiment corresponds to the IFF1 register shown in Fig. 112 (sixth embodiment).
The IFF1 register is a register for determining whether a maskable interrupt is enabled or disabled, and the IFF2 register is a register for restoring the IFF1 register after a non-maskable interrupt is processed, and for restoring the IFF2 register by a RETEX instruction after a CALLEX instruction is executed.

When a (maskable) interrupt process is executed, both the IFF1 and IFF2 registers are set to "0" to switch from an interrupt enabled state to an interrupt disabled state. When the IFF1 register is "0", this indicates that the interrupts are disabled. Then, when the interrupt process ends, an instruction to enable interrupts (EI instruction) is executed just before the end of the interrupt process to switch from the interrupt disabled state to an interrupt enabled state, and both the IFF1 and IFF2 registers are set to "1". When the IFF1 register is "1", this indicates that the interrupts are enabled.

The interrupt disabled period is first set in the main process, for example between step S296 and step S300 in FIG.
Secondly, the interrupt inhibition period is set during execution of an interrupt process. For example, as shown in FIG. 232, which will be described later, when executing an interrupt process, the IFF1 register and the IFF2 register become "0". As described above, this is because overlapping interrupts are inhibited in the interrupt process.

In a situation where information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, if the IFF1 register is "1", when an interrupt request signal is output to the main CPU 55, the main CPU 55 accepts the interrupt request signal. In other words, interrupt processing is executed.
On the other hand, when the IFF1 register is "0" and the interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, the main CPU 55 does not accept the interrupt request signal when the interrupt request signal is output to the main CPU 55. In other words, the interrupt process is not executed. In this case, the interrupt wait monitor register 301 continues to store the information indicating the interrupt request signal, and continues to output the interrupt request signal to the main CPU 55. Then, when the IFF1 register changes from "0" to "1" (when the interrupt permission period begins), the interrupt process is executed based on the interrupt request signal.
When an interrupt process is executed based on the interrupt request signal, the information indicating the occurrence of the interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared. In other words, the output of the interrupt request signal to the main CPU 55 is stopped.

Next, the relationship between the interrupt enabled state, the interrupt disabled state, and the IFF1 register and the IFF2 register will be explained using a simple program.
228 shows an example of a program for explaining interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission. In the figure, (A) and (B) show main processing programs, and (C) shows an interrupt processing program.
In Fig. 228(A), the "DI" instruction is an instruction for disabling interrupts as shown in Fig. 118 (sixth embodiment), and the "EI" instruction is an instruction for enabling interrupts as shown in Fig. 118 (sixth embodiment).
Additionally, "AAAA", "BBBB", and "CCCC" are arbitrary programs (instructions).
When the "DI" instruction is executed, the IFF1 register value and the IFF2 register value both become "0", and interrupts are disabled.

Thereafter, "AAAA" and "BBBB" of the program are executed, and then when the "EI" instruction is executed, the IFF1 register value and the IFF2 register value both become "1", and an interrupt is permitted.
An example of the program "CCCC" after the "EI" instruction is the "RET" instruction. In this case, an interrupt can be executed after the "RET" instruction is executed (i.e., after "CCCC" is executed). Note that the condition is that at least immediately after the "RET" instruction, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301.
As described above, even if the interrupt permission instruction "EI" is executed, by not executing interrupt processing until the next instruction ("CCCC" in this example, e.g., "RET") is executed, the instruction following the interrupt permission instruction "EI" can be executed reliably.

In FIG. 228(B), the "CALLEX" command and the "RETEX" command are the same as those shown in FIG. 115 (sixth embodiment).
That is, when the "CALLEX" instruction is executed, regardless of whether the state is interrupt enabled or disabled at that time, interrupts are disabled and a call is made to the specified address.
Also, when the "RETEX" instruction is executed, the interrupt state is set to the state before the "CALLEX" instruction, and a return ("RET") is performed (returning to the state before "CALLEX", in other words, returning to the instruction next to "CALLEX" (the program at the return address).

Here, when the "CALLEX" instruction is executed, the value of the IFF1 register becomes "0" and the value of the IFF2 register remains unchanged.
Furthermore, when the "RETEX" instruction is executed, the IFF1 register value becomes the IFF2 register value, and the value of the IFF2 register does not change.
Since the "RETEX" instruction includes the "RET" instruction, it becomes possible to execute an interrupt process immediately after the "RETEX" instruction.
For example, if the IFF1 register value is "1" and the IFF2 register value is "1" immediately before the "CALLEX" instruction is executed, the "CALLEX" instruction causes the IFF1 register value to become "0" and the IFF2 register value to become "1." Also, the "RETEX" instruction causes the IFF1 register value to become "1" and the IFF2 register value to become "1." In this way, by having the IFF2 register, it is possible to restore the IFF1 register value and the IFF2 register value to the values before the "CALLEX" instruction was executed.

In Fig. 228(C), when executing interrupt processing (maskable interrupt (INT)), both the IFF1 register value and the IFF2 register value become "0". This results in an interrupt (multiple interrupts) disabled state. Therefore, the "DI" instruction is not required when starting interrupt processing.
When the interrupt process is to be ended, in order to change from the interrupt disabled state to the interrupt enabled state, the "EI" instruction is executed immediately before the end of the interrupt process, i.e., immediately before the "RETI" instruction. This "EI" instruction sets both the IFF1 register value and the IFF2 register value to "1".

When the "RETI" instruction is executed thereafter, the IFF1 register value becomes the IFF2 register value, similar to the "RETEX" instruction, and the value of the IFF2 register does not change.
From the above, the IFF1 register and the IFF2 register are as follows:
When interrupt processing begins: IFF1 = 0, IFF2 = 0
↓
"EI" command: IFF1 = 1, IFF2 = 1
↓
"RETI" command: Changes as follows: IFF1 = IFF2, IFF2 = maintain.
The system is configured so that interrupt processing can be executed after the "RETI" instruction, thereby preventing overlapping interrupt processing, such as an interrupt processing being executed immediately after the "EI" instruction, and then another interrupt processing being executed after the "RETI" instruction.

The data retention/clearing due to power on/off in the interrupt flag 504, the interrupt wait monitor register 301, the interrupt disable flag 302 (IFF1 register and IFF2 register), and the timer storage area of the RWM 53 is as follows.
An example of the timer storage area of the RWM 53 is a "timer storage area for measuring '4.1' seconds, which is the shortest time for one game". However, the timer storage area of the RWM 53 is not limited to the above-mentioned "timer storage area for measuring '4.1' seconds, which is the shortest time for one game", and may be a predetermined timer storage area capable of measuring various predetermined times, such as a "storage area for a standby timer for displaying a game standby state". The predetermined timer storage area may be a 1-byte storage area or a multiple-byte storage area.

a) When the power is turned on without transitioning to the setting change state because the setting change conditions are not satisfied When the power is turned on without transitioning to the setting change state because the setting change conditions are not satisfied, the 8-bit counter 501, the interrupt flag 504, the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and the interrupt disable flag 302 (IFF1 register and IFF2 register) are all cleared (become "0"). In contrast, the specified timer storage area of the RWM 53 is not cleared.
For example, assume that the power is turned off under the condition that the value stored in a predetermined timer storage area of the RWM 53 is "X" and the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is "Y." In this case, if the power is turned on without transitioning to the setting change state because the setting change conditions are not satisfied, the value stored in the timer storage area is "X" and the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is restored to "0."

b) When the power is turned on to transition to a setting change state due to the setting change conditions being met. In this case, not only the 8-bit counter 501, the interrupt flag 504, the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and the interrupt prohibition flag 302 (IFF1 register and IFF2 register), but also a specified timer memory area of the RWM 53 are cleared (become "0").
Therefore, the 8-bit counter 501, the interrupt flag 504, the interrupt waiting monitor register 301, and the interrupt prohibition flag 302 (IFF1 register and IFF2 register) are cleared (become "0") when the power is turned on, regardless of whether or not the setting change condition is met (whether or not the setting change state is entered).
On the other hand, the specified timer memory area is not cleared (does not become "0") when the power is turned on and the setting change state is not entered because the setting change conditions are not satisfied, but is cleared (becomes "0") when the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered because the setting change conditions are satisfied.

As explained in the fifth embodiment, the setting key switch 152 is turned on by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 151 and rotating the setting key 90 degrees clockwise. When the power is turned on in this state, in FIG. 229 described later, it is determined that the door switch signal is on ("Yes" in step S2706) and the setting key switch signal is on ("Yes" in step S2707), and other predetermined conditions are satisfied, so that the process proceeds to initialization processing in step S2863 (FIG. 231 described later). Then, in FIG. 231, the process proceeds to setting change confirmation processing (see FIG. 96; also referred to as setting change confirmation mode, setting change confirmation state, setting change confirmation (processing), etc.) in step S2742.
Satisfying the conditions for transitioning to the setting change confirmation process corresponds to the above-mentioned "power-on when transitioning to the setting change state due to the setting change conditions being satisfied."

The above is an example in which the gaming machine is a slot machine 10. In contrast, in the case where the gaming machine is a pinball gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine), "satisfying the setting change conditions" corresponds to the door switch (frame open switch) signal being on, the setting change key switch signal being on, and the reset switch being on. In a pinball gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine), when it is determined that all three of these conditions are met, the setting change conditions are met and the machine transitions to a setting change state.
In addition, in a pinball game machine (pachinko game machine), when the door switch (frame opening switch) signal is on, the setting change key switch signal is on, and the reset switch is off, the setting confirmation condition is met (although the setting change condition is not met), and the machine transitions to the setting confirmation state.

As described above, when the power is turned off, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is not held (when the power is restored, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is set to "0"). This makes it possible to keep constant the time until the first interrupt process starts after the power is turned on. Also, since the update period of the 8-bit counter 501 ("8.9375" microseconds) is shorter than the update period of the timer value of the RWM 53 (interrupt process period, "1.117" ms), the effect of clearing the 8-bit counter 501 on the gaming machine as a whole is minor.
For this reason,
a) A configuration in which the value of the 8-bit counter 501 when the power is turned off is held, and when the power is turned on, the count of the 8-bit counter 501 is restarted from the value when the power was turned off (the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is backed up);
b) The value of the 8-bit counter 501 is set to "0" when the power is restored (this embodiment).
When compared with the above, the configuration in b) can restore with an error within "1" interrupt. Moreover, the configuration in b) does not require a means for backing up the value of the 8-bit counter 501 when the power is turned off.

Next, the on/off timing of the interrupt disable flag 302 (IFF register) will be described with reference to a flowchart.
Fig. 229 is a flow chart showing program start (M_PRG_START) in the thirteenth embodiment, and corresponds to Fig. 92 in the fifth embodiment. In Fig. 229, the same steps as in Fig. 92 are given the same step numbers, and the explanation is omitted. In Fig. 229, step numbers different from those in Fig. 92 are underlined.
When the program start is executed in step S2701, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is "0", and the IFF1 register and the IFF2 register are "0". Since the IFF1 register is "0", interrupts are disabled until the IFF1 register becomes "1".

In step S2861, the counter setting register 503 is set to an initial value "m".
In the thirteenth embodiment, as examples of setting the initial value "m" in the counter setting register 503, an example of setting the initial value "m" before the execution of the RWM abnormality determination process and an example of setting the initial value "m" after the execution of the RWM abnormality determination process are shown. Note that the "RWM abnormality determination process" here is a process of determining whether or not the data stored in the RWM 53 before the power is turned off, and corresponds to the processes of steps S2708, S2712, and S2715. Step S2861 in FIG. 229 is an example of setting the initial value in the counter setting register 503 before the RWM abnormality determination.
As described above, the initial value "m" is, for example, "125." When the initial value is set in the counter setting register 503, the 8-bit counter 501 starts updating the count value, and continues to update the count value until the power is turned off.
In this manner, when the power is turned on and the program is started, interrupts are initially disabled, and if an initial value is set in the counter setting register 503 before an RWM abnormality is determined, the 8-bit counter 501 starts updating based on that value.

Fig. 230 is a flowchart showing the power recovery process (M_POWER_ON) (step S2862 in Fig. 229) in the thirteenth embodiment, and corresponds to Fig. 93 in the fifth embodiment. In Fig. 230, the same processes as in Fig. 93 are given the same step numbers, and their explanations are omitted. In Fig. 230, step numbers that differ from those in Fig. 93 are underlined.
The power recovery process of FIG. 230 shows an example in which the counter setting register 503 is set after an RWM abnormality is determined.
In this example, after step S2724, the process proceeds to step S2871, where the counter setting register 503 is set to an initial value "m".

When an initial value is set in the counter setting register 503 in step S2861 in Fig. 229 (when the counter setting register 503 is set before an RWM abnormality is determined), the processing of step S2871 in Fig. 230 is not performed. On the other hand, when step S2861 in Fig. 229 is not performed (when the counter setting register 503 is set after an RWM abnormality is determined), if the process does not proceed to the initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in step S2863 in Fig. 229, the initial value "m" is set in the counter setting register 503 in step S2871 in Fig. 230.
After step S2871, the process proceeds to the return address of the interrupt process (FIG. 232 to be described later) that was executed immediately before the power was turned off. The power off process is executed in the interrupt process (step S2771 in FIG. 232), and when the power is turned off, the return address of the interrupt process at that time is stored. After the power recovery process in FIG. 230, the process proceeds to the return address of the interrupt process, and the continuation of the interrupt process is executed. In step S2892 of the interrupt process (FIG. 232), the IFF1 register and the IFF2 register become "1", and the interrupt is permitted.

As described above, when the 8-bit counter 501 is configured to start updating before an RWM abnormality is determined, the 8-bit counter 501 can be timed out earlier (information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated can be stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301) than when updating of the 8-bit counter 501 is started after an RWM abnormality is determined, so that interrupt processing can be executed without delay when an interrupt permission instruction (EI instruction) is executed after an RWM abnormality is determined.
On the other hand, when the 8-bit counter 501 is configured to start updating after the RWM abnormality is determined, even if the IFF1 register becomes "1" due to noise or the like before the RWM abnormality is determined, or a malfunction occurs in which the IFF1 register becomes "1" when the power is turned on (a malfunction resulting in an unintended interrupt enabled state), the 8-bit counter 501 does not time out before the RWM abnormality is determined (information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is not stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301), so interrupt processing is not executed before the RWM abnormality is determined. In other words, it is possible to prevent the RWM data from being changed by interrupt processing before the RWM abnormality is determined, from being different from before the power was turned off. This makes it possible to accurately determine the RWM abnormality.

Fig. 231 is a flowchart showing the initialization process (M_INI_SET) (step S2863 in Fig. 229) in the thirteenth embodiment, and corresponds to Fig. 95 in the fifth embodiment. In Fig. 231, the same processes as in Fig. 95 are given the same step numbers, and their explanations are omitted. Also, step numbers in Fig. 231 that differ from those in Fig. 95 are underlined.
In FIG. 229, when the result of step S2712 is "Yes", or when the result of step S2714 is "Yes", the process proceeds to the initialization process of FIG. 231.
In this initialization process, after the AF register is restored in step S2737, the counter setting register is set in step S2881. This process is an example of executing the counter setting register after the RWM abnormality is determined, and is an example of executing the counter setting register when the process moves to the initialization process (without moving to the power restoration process).

In step S2740, a setting command set process is executed. This process is a process for storing a control command in the control command buffer in order to send a control command to the sub-control board 80 to start the setting change confirmation process (step S2742). As described above, interrupt processes are inhibited before writing the control command to the control command buffer or updating the write pointer of the control command, and are permitted after these processes are completed.
Therefore, in step S2740,
(1) DI (IFF1 = 0, IFF2 = 0)
(2) The actual setting command set (processing for writing control commands to the control command buffer, updating the write pointer of the control commands, etc.)
(3) EI (IFF1=1, IFF2=1)
Each process (instruction) is executed.
As described above, when the program proceeds from the start of the program (FIG. 229) to the initialization process (FIG. 231), the interrupts are permitted by the "EI" command in the set command set in step S2740. In this way, the state is changed from the interrupts prohibited state to the interrupts permitted state by using the process of executing the interrupts disable command (DI) and interrupts enable command (EI) before and after the process.

The setting command set in step S2746 is a process that sends an end command for the setting change confirmation process to the sub-control board 80, and similar to step S2740, executes the "DI" command and the "EI" command at the beginning and end of the process, respectively.

As described above, when a value is written to the counter setting register 503 after an RWM abnormality determination is made, it is possible to prevent an interrupt process from starting due to a malfunction or the like while the RWM abnormality determination is being made. Note that when an interrupt process is started, the RWM data may be updated.

Fig. 232 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process (I_INTR) in the thirteenth embodiment, and corresponds to Fig. 98 in the fifth embodiment. In Fig. 232, the same processes as those in Fig. 98 are given the same step numbers, and the explanation is omitted. In Fig. 232, step numbers different from those in Fig. 98 are underlined.
When an interrupt process is started, the IFF1 register and the IFF2 register become "0." This results in an interrupt disabled state (a state in which multiple interrupts are not allowed).
In step S452 in FIG. 98, an initial process including inhibition of duplicated interrupts is executed, but in the case of the thirteenth embodiment, a register value save process is executed in step S2891.

After the register values are restored in step S469, the "EI" instruction is executed in step S2892, whereby the IFF1 and IFF2 registers become "1" and an interrupt is permitted.
Furthermore, in the final step S2893, the IFF1 register value becomes the IFF2 register value by a "RETI" command, which is equivalent to a return command. Also, the IFF2 register value is maintained.
As described above, the "EI" instruction in step S2892 sets the interrupt permission state, but the interrupt process is configured to become executable after the "RETI" instruction in the next step S2893.
If the interrupt wait monitor register 301 does not store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated after the "RETI" instruction is completed, the program resumes from the main processing program (return address) before the interrupt processing was executed. On the other hand, if the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated after the "RETI" instruction is completed, the interrupt processing is executed again.

Next, the relationship between the 8-bit counter 501 and the interrupt process will be described with reference to a time chart.
Fig. 233 is a time chart showing the relationship between the 8-bit counter 501 and interrupt processing. Fig. 233 shows an example in which there is no interrupt inhibition period in the main processing.
In Fig. 233, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is "0" when the power is turned on, but the counter value "m" is set by the counter setting register set process described above. In the above example, the counter value "m" is "125". Then, as in the above example, the count value of the 8-bit counter 501 is decremented by "1" at a clock of approximately "111.8881" KHZ (every "8.9375" microseconds).

When the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is updated from "1", it returns to "m". The time when it is updated from "1" to "m"("T1" in the figure) is the "timeout" of the 8-bit counter 501, and when the timeout occurs, the interrupt flag 504 is set, an interrupt request signal is output, and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. In the figure, the OFF state of the interrupt wait monitor register 301 indicates that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is not stored, and the ON state of the interrupt wait monitor register 301 indicates that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored (the same applies to the following Figures 234 to 241).
When information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 and the interrupt disable flag 302 is not set (interrupt enabled state), interrupt processing is started.
Note that even at the moment when information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, some processing (instruction) is being executed in the main processing, and the interrupt processing starts when the processing (instruction) ends. In other words, the actual processing in the main processing and the interrupt processing do not run simultaneously in parallel. The example in Fig. 233 shows an example in which, after information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at timing "T1", the interrupt processing starts at timing "T2".

Furthermore, when the interrupt process is started, the interrupt disable flag 302 is set. This corresponds to "IFF1=0, IFF2=0" shown to the right of step S2890 in Fig. 232. Then, when the interrupt process is ended, the interrupt disable flag 302 is released from the set state. This process corresponds to the process in step S2892 in Fig. 232 (IFF1=1, IFF2=1).
In the following description, unless otherwise specified, "the interrupt disable flag 302 is set" refers to at least IFF1 becoming "1" (IFF2 may be "0" or "1"). Also, "the interrupt disable flag 302 is released from the set state" or "the interrupt disable flag 302 is not set" refers to at least IFF1 becoming "0" (is "0") (IFF2 may be "0" or "1").

Fig. 234 is a time chart showing the relationship between the 8-bit counter 501 and interrupt processing. Fig. 234 shows an example in which there is an interrupt disabled period in the main processing.
In Fig. 234, timing "T0" which is the start of the interrupt disabled period corresponds to the "DI" instruction or the "CALLEX" instruction shown in Fig. 228. Also, timing "T3" which is the end of the interrupt disabled period corresponds to the "EI" instruction or the "RETEX" instruction shown in Fig. 228. Similarly, in Fig. 235 and onwards, the start of the interrupt disabled period corresponds to the "DI" instruction or the "CALLEX" instruction, and the end of the interrupt disabled period corresponds to the "EI" instruction or the "RETEX" instruction.
234 shows an example in which an interrupt inhibit period is set in the main process at timing "T0" which is the timing before "T1" when the 8-bit counter 501 times out. Even in this case, information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at timing "T1" when the 8-bit counter 501 times out, which is the same as the example in FIG. 233.
On the other hand, at the time "T1", the interrupt disable period is still in progress and the interrupt disable flag 302 is set, so that the interrupt process is not started. However, even after that, the interrupt wait monitor register 301 continues to store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated.

Thereafter, the interrupt disable period ends at timing "T3". As a result, "information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and the interrupt disable flag 302 is not set", so interrupt processing can be executed. In the example of Fig. 233, an example is shown in which interrupt processing is started at timing "T4".
If timing "T3" corresponds to the "EI" instruction and an interrupt process is started at timing "T4" after execution of one more instruction (for example, a "RET" instruction), a time lag of one instruction occurs between timing "T3" and "T4". In contrast, if a "CALLEX" instruction is executed at timing "T0" and a "RETEX" instruction is executed at timing "T3", interrupt process is started immediately after execution of the "RETEX" instruction without executing one more instruction, so no time lag occurs between timing "T3" and "T4".
When the interrupt process is started, the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared. On the other hand, the interrupt disable flag 302 is set to disable duplicate interrupts.

FIG. 235 is a time chart showing an example (1) of the relationship between the 8-bit counter 501 and interrupt processing, in which the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times.
In this example, after the interrupt inhibition period is started at timing "T0", the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T1", the interrupt flag 504 is set, information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T2". At timing "T2", the interrupt inhibition period has not yet ended. As will be described later in detail, when the interrupt cycle (the timeout cycle of the 8-bit counter 501) is "Tc" and the designed period of the interrupt processing is "Tp", the designed maximum period of the interrupt inhibition period is configured to be less than "Tc-Tp". For this reason, normally, when the interrupt inhibition period is started immediately after the interrupt processing is ended, the next interrupt cycle arrives after the interrupt inhibition period ends.

On the other hand, if the main processing goes out of control or takes longer than necessary to execute during the interrupt disabled period, the 8-bit counter 501 may time out two or more times during the interrupt disabled period, as shown in FIG. 235.
Even in such a case, if the system clock is normal, the 8-bit counter 501 continues to update the count value, and when it times out, it sets the interrupt flag 504. The example in Fig. 235 shows an example in which the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T1", the interrupt flag 504 is set, and information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301.
Thereafter, even if the interrupt inhibition period continues, the 8-bit counter 501 continues to update the count value if it is normal, and when the 8-bit counter 501 times out, an interrupt flag 504 is set, and if information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal has already been stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, that state is maintained.
Next, at timing "T3", the interrupt disable period ends (enters an interrupt enabled state), and interrupt processing becomes executable. Then, at "T4", interrupt processing starts, and the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared. Until the 8-bit counter 501 next times out and the interrupt flag 504 is set, the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is not stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301.

As described above, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times (two or more times) during the interrupt disabled period, the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 only once. In other words, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times (two or more times) during the interrupt disabled period, the number of timeouts is not counted. Then, after the interrupt disabled period ends, the number of interrupts executed based on the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated being stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is one.
In other words, the interrupt process is not executed repeatedly (successively) "n" times based on the 8-bit counter 501 timing out "n" times (n≧2).
Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the main process cannot be executed during the interrupt process being repeated several times in succession after the interrupt disabled period ends.
Whenever the 8-bit counter 501 times out, the interrupt flag 504 is set, and the interrupt flag 504 is released at a predetermined timing thereafter.

FIG. 236 is a time chart showing an example (2) of the relationship between the 8-bit counter 501 and interrupt processing, in which the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times.
In FIG. 236, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at timing "T1", and interrupt processing is started at timing "A1" based on that information. However, for example, an unexpected amount of time may be required for any process during the interrupt processing, or a runaway may occur, and the interrupt processing may not be completed by the time the 8-bit counter 501 next times out (timing "T2").
This example shows an example in which the 8-bit counter 501 times out twice (at timings "T2" and "T3") during interrupt processing that begins at timing "A1". When the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T2" during interrupt processing, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. Furthermore, when the 8-bit counter 501 subsequently times out at timing "T3", the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated that is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 remains stored.

Thereafter, when the interrupt process ends at timing "A2", the next interrupt process is immediately executed because the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at that time. In other words, the interrupt processes are executed continuously without executing the main process. Furthermore, when the interrupt process is executed, the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared (timing "T4").
Next, when the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T5", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. Meanwhile, the interrupt processing started at timing "A2" is completed before timing "T5". As a result, the next interrupt processing is started based on the fact that the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at timing "T5".
As described above, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times during interrupt processing, the interrupt processing is executed only once after the interrupt processing is completed, based on the fact that information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. In other words, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times during interrupt processing, the interrupt processing is not executed multiple times in succession after the interrupt processing is completed. In addition, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times (two or more times) during the execution of interrupt processing, the number of times the timeout occurs is not counted.

Next, the execution timing of the interrupt process will be described.
237 to 241, which will be described below, show interrupt processing 1 to interrupt processing 4 (however, in the example of FIG. 240, interrupt processing 1 to interrupt processing 3), but interrupt processing 1 to interrupt processing 4 are all the same processing (the interrupt processing shown in FIG. 232). To explain more specifically, for example, in the example of FIG. 237, this means that after interrupt processing 1 (the interrupt processing shown in FIG. 232) is started, interrupt processing 2 (the same processing as interrupt processing 1) is started after the lapse of "Tc".
FIG. 237 is a time chart showing the interrupt period etc. when there is no interrupt inhibition period in the main processing.
As described above, when the system clock is set to 16 MHZ, the value of prescaler register 502 is set to 143, and the value of counter setting register 503 is set to 125, the interrupt period "Tc" is the period until the value of 8-bit counter 501 changes from "125" to "125" again, and corresponds to approximately 1.117 ms.

As shown in Fig. 237, if there is no interrupt inhibition period during the period in which interrupt processing is executed four times, the interrupt processing is executed for each interrupt cycle "Tc". In the example of Fig. 237, an example is shown in which interrupt processing is started at the timings of "A1", "A2", "A3", and "A4". The time "Tp" required for one interrupt processing differs depending on the contents of the interrupt processing, but the design value of the interrupt processing time "Tp" is at least a time shorter than the interrupt cycle "Tc"(Tp<Tc).
Also, similarly to the above example, during the interrupt processing, interrupts are disabled and the interrupt disable flag 302 is set.

As is clear from FIG. 237, no matter what value the 8-bit counter 501 has, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 will not return to "m" when an interrupt process is executed, and the value continues to be updated at regular intervals even during the interrupt process.
In addition, in Fig. 237, the period (time) of each interrupt process is illustrated as being constant (Tp), but in reality, the period of the interrupt process is not necessarily constant. For example, the current interrupt process may take longer than the previous interrupt process.

FIG. 238 shows an example in which an interrupt inhibition period in the main process is set between interrupt processing 1 and interrupt processing 2. In this example, interrupt processing 1 is started at timing "A1", and after interrupt processing 1 ends at timing "A1'", the interrupt inhibition period in the main process starts at timing "T1", and ends at timing "T2" (the interrupt is permitted). Here, timing "T2" is before the start timing "A2" of the next interrupt processing 2. As is clear from FIG. 238, if the interrupt inhibition period is "Td", then "Td<Tc-Tp". In this way, when the interrupt inhibition period is within the period from the end of an interrupt processing to the start of the next interrupt processing, even if an interrupt inhibition period is set, the timing of the interrupt processing is not limited by the interrupt inhibition period. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 238, even if an interrupt inhibition period is set after the end of interrupt processing 1 and before the start of interrupt processing 2, interrupt processing 2 can be started when the interrupt period "Tc" arrives after the start of interrupt processing 1.
In particular, in the case where the interrupt inhibition period "Td" that satisfies "Td<Tc-Tp" is the designed maximum period of the interrupt inhibition period, when the interrupt processing ends and the process returns to the main processing, and an interrupt inhibition period is immediately set in the main processing, it is possible to set the start timing of the next interrupt processing to arrive after the end of the interrupt inhibition period.

FIG. 239 is a time chart showing an example (example 1) in which the timing at which an interrupt process is scheduled to be executed is during an interrupt prohibited period.
In this example, an interrupt inhibition period of the main process is set at a timing "T1" before the timing "A2" of the next interrupt process arrives after the end of interrupt process 1. The timing "A2" is after the elapse of an interrupt period "Tc" from the start timing "A1" of interrupt process 1.
During the interrupt inhibition period, the interrupt inhibition flag 302 is set. Therefore, when the timing "A2" arrives, the interrupt inhibition flag 302 is set and interrupt processing cannot be started. In the figure, the two-dot chain line indicates interrupt processing assuming that interrupt processing 2 is started at timing "A2" (it is not actually started).
On the other hand, immediately before the timing "A2" arrives, the 8-bit counter 501 times out, and therefore the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated.

After that, when the interrupt inhibition period ends at timing "T2", the interrupt inhibition flag 302 is released from being set. Also, at timing "T2", the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated remains stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. As a result, at timing "T2", the interrupt is permitted, and the second interrupt processing 2 is started. Figure 239 shows an example where interrupt processing 2 is started at timing "A5". When interrupt processing 2 is executed, the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared. Also, when interrupt processing 2 is executed, the interrupt inhibition flag 302 is set.

Next, at the time "A5'" when the interrupt process 2 ends, the time "A3" when the third interrupt process 3 starts has not yet arrived. Therefore, the interrupt process 3 can be started when the time "A3" arrives.
As described above, interrupt processing 2 cannot be executed at timing "A2", but interrupt processing 2 can be executed at the subsequent timing "A5", and interrupt processing 3 can be executed at timing "A3", so the number of interrupt processing times at this point is the same as when there is no interrupt prohibited period.

In this way, since the interrupt cycle "Tc" is constant regardless of the presence or absence of an interrupt inhibition period, it is possible to prevent the interrupt cycle "Tc" from being disrupted. Furthermore, even if an interrupt cannot be processed due to an interrupt inhibition period, this does not affect the update of the 8-bit counter 501.
Furthermore, when the interrupt disable period ends and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, executing interrupt processing without waiting for the next interrupt period will not affect the updating of the 8-bit counter 501.

FIG. 240 is a time chart showing an example (example 2) in which the timing at which an interrupt process is scheduled to be executed is during an interrupt prohibited period.
In this example, after interrupt processing 1 ends, the interrupt inhibition period of the main processing starts at timing "T1" before timing "A2" of the next interrupt processing 2 arrives. As a result, the interrupt inhibition flag 302 is set.
Therefore, at timing "A2", although the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, the interrupt disable flag 302 is also set, so that the interrupt process cannot be executed.

When the interrupt period "Tc" has elapsed from timing "A2" and timing "A3" has arrived, the interrupt inhibition period is still ongoing. Therefore, at timing "A3", the interrupt wait monitor register 301 continues to store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, but the interrupt inhibition flag 302 is also set, so interrupt processing cannot be executed. Note that at timing "A3", the 8-bit counter 501 times out, but there is no change in the situation in which the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated.
After timing "A3", when the interrupt disable period ends at timing "T2", the set state of the interrupt disable flag 302 is released. At this point, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. Thereafter, at timing "A6", interrupt processing 2 is started. When interrupt processing 2 is started, the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, which is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, is cleared, and the interrupt disable flag 302 is set.

In this example, the timing "A6'" when interrupt processing 2 ends is before timing "A4", i.e., the point when "3 x Tc" has elapsed since timing "A1". Therefore, after interrupt processing 2 ends at timing "A6'", the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T3", and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. This causes interrupt processing 3 to start at the following timing "A4". When interrupt processing 3 starts, the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated that is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared, and the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set.

In this way, interrupt processing cannot be executed when "Tc" has elapsed since timing "A1" (timing "A2"), and when "Tc" has further elapsed since that point (timing "A3"), but interrupt processing 2 is executed immediately after the interrupt inhibition period ends at timing "T2". Then, interrupt processing 3 can be executed at timing "A4" when there is no interrupt inhibition period and interrupt processing 4 would normally be executed. As a result, interrupt processing can be executed three times between timing "A1" and timing "A4", which is only one less than the number of interrupt processing times (four times) when there is no interrupt inhibition period.
Furthermore, at timing A4, the interrupt cycle Tc from timing A1 is not disrupted. Furthermore, the update state of the 8-bit counter 501 is also not disrupted and is constant.

FIG. 241 is a time chart showing an example (example 3) in which the timing at which an interrupt process is scheduled to be executed is during an interrupt prohibited period.
In this example, after interrupt processing 1 ends, the interrupt inhibition period starts at timing "T1" before the timing "A2" of the next interrupt processing arrives, and ends at timing "T2". In other words, during the interrupt inhibition period, timing "A2" arrives, when interrupt processing 2 would normally be executed. At timing "A2", the interrupt inhibition flag 302 is set, so the interrupt processing cannot be executed.
However, since the 8-bit counter 501 times out immediately before the timing "A2" arrives, at the timing "A2" the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated.
Next, at time "T2" when the interrupt disable period ends, the interrupt disable flag 302 is released. At this point, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. Therefore, at the following time "A7", interrupt processing 2 is started.

Meanwhile, during the execution of interrupt processing 2, timing "T3" arrives, the 8-bit counter 501 times out, and information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. However, since interrupt processing 2 is being executed at this point in time, overlapping interrupts are not possible. In other words, interrupt processing 3 cannot be executed at timing "A3", which is the timing when interrupt processing 3 would normally be executed.
When interrupt processing 2 ends at timing "A8", the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is released from being set. At this point, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. Therefore, interrupt processing 3 starts immediately at timing "A8". In other words, no program (instruction) in the main processing is executed between interrupt processing 2 and interrupt processing 3, and interrupt processing 3 starts immediately after interrupt processing 2 ends.
However, when interrupt processing 2 ends, the IFF1 register becomes "1" by the "EI" instruction in step S2892 in Fig. 232, and the set state of the interrupt disable flag 302 is released. Next, when the "RETI" instruction is executed in step S2893, the interrupt processing in step S2890 is started again, and when this interrupt processing starts, the IFF1 register becomes "0", and the interrupt disable flag 302 is set. Therefore, the set state of the interrupt disable flag 302 is released for just an instant between interrupt processing 2 and interrupt processing 3.
When the interrupt process 3 is started, the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared, and the interrupt disable flag 302 is set.
When interrupt processing 3 ends, timing "A4" (when "3 x Tc" has elapsed since timing "A1"), which is the start timing of interrupt processing 4, has not yet arrived.

After interrupt processing 3 is completed, the 8-bit counter 501 times out and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. At this point, the interrupt disable flag 302 is not set, so the interrupt processing can be executed. Therefore, interrupt processing 4 is started at timing "A4". When interrupt processing 4 is started, the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated and stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared, and the interrupt disable flag 302 is set.
In this way, when "3 x Tc" has elapsed from timing "A1", four interrupt processes can be started, and the same number of interrupt processes can be executed as if there was no interrupt inhibition period of the main process.

In this way, if the timing to start interrupt processing is during an interrupt inhibition period, the next interrupt processing is started immediately after the end of the interrupt inhibition period. Furthermore, if an interrupt period arrives while the next interrupt processing is being executed, the next interrupt processing is started immediately after the end of the next interrupt processing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to minimize the reduction in the number of interrupts, while quickly returning to a situation where interrupt processing is started when the original interrupt period arrives.

Although the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment and various modifications are possible as described below.
(1) In the thirteenth embodiment, when the system clock is "16" MHZ, in order to set the interrupt period to about "1" ms, the set value of the prescaler register 502 is "143" and the value of the counter setting register 503 is "125". Therefore, the set values of the prescaler register 502 and the counter setting register 503 vary depending on the setting of the interrupt period, and are not limited to the above values. Note that the system clock is not limited to "16" MHZ, and can be set to various values, such as "12" MHZ, "24" MHZ, etc.
For example, if the value of the counter setting register 503 is set to "250" under the above conditions, the interrupt period is set as follows:
250/(16/143)=2.234 (ms)
It can be said that:
In this case, even if the value of the counter setting register 503 is "250", the value can be within one byte.
On the other hand, the counter setting register 503 may be, for example, a 2-byte storage area instead of a 1-byte storage area. When the counter setting register 503 is a 2-byte storage area, the 8-bit counter 501 may be a 16-bit counter 501.

(2) In Figs. 229, 230, and 231, the counter setting register is set before and after an RWM abnormality is determined, but the timing of the counter setting register is not limited to that shown in Figs. 229, 230, and 231. The counter setting register may be set by the time when the interrupt process is to be started.

(3) When moving to the initialization process (FIG. 231), the process of setting the IFF1 register to "1" (processing to enable interrupts) uses the set command set in step S2740, but is not limited to this and may be, for example, by executing the "EI" command after step S2747. In this way, even if each process during the initialization process is composed only of processes that do not have the "DI" and "EI" commands, as in steps S2740 and S2746, it is possible to enable interrupts to be enabled.
(4) The thirteenth embodiment can be applied not only to slot machines, but also to pinball machines (pachinko machines), mahjong ball machines, casino machines, and the like.
(5) The first to thirteenth embodiments and the various modified examples shown in the first to thirteenth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Additional Notes>
The inventions (original inventions) described in the original specification etc. of the present application can be, for example, the following Original Inventions 1 to 13, and the problems that the original inventions aim to solve, the means for solving the problems related to the original inventions, and the effects of the original inventions are as follows. However, this does not mean that the inventions described in this specification are limited to Original Inventions 1 to 13.

1. Initial invention 1
(a) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 1 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing timer interrupt processing (hereinafter simply referred to as "interrupt processing").
Conventionally, gaming machines that are capable of executing interrupt processing during main processing are known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-089184). It is also known to provide an interrupt prohibition period in the main processing.
However, in the conventional technology, when an interrupt period occurs during an interrupt disabled period, there are cases where the interrupt process is not executed appropriately thereafter.
The problem that the original invention is intended to solve is to enable appropriate execution of interrupt processing even when there is a period during which interrupts are disabled.

(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 1 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (13th embodiment) is as follows:
The interrupt process (FIG. 232) with a period “T” (in FIG. 239, “Tc”) is executable.
When timing A ("A2" in FIG. 239), which is the execution cycle of the interrupt process, is an interrupt disabled period, the interrupt process is enabled at timing B ("A5" in FIG. 239) after the end of the interrupt disabled period.
After executing the interrupt processing at timing B, the timing of the next interrupt processing ("A3" in FIG. 239) is a timing "n (n is a natural number) x T" after timing A.

(c) Effects of the Original Invention 1 According to the original invention, even when there is an interrupt prohibited period, the interrupt period can be made as constant as possible. In addition, it is possible to avoid affecting timer measurements and the like that are updated during interrupt processing.

2. Initial invention 2
(a) The problem that the original invention 2 aims to solve is the same as the original invention 1.
(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 2 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (13th embodiment) is as follows:
The interrupt process (FIG. 232) with a period “T” (in FIG. 241, “Tc”) is executable.
When timing A ("A2" in FIG. 241), which is the execution cycle of the interrupt process, is an interrupt disabled period, the interrupt process is enabled at timing B ("A7" in FIG. 241) after the end of the interrupt disabled period.
After the interrupt process is started at timing B, the next interrupt process timing ("A3" in FIG. 241) is the timing when "n (n is a natural number) x T" has elapsed since timing A.
This method is characterized in that, if an interrupt process started at timing B (interrupt process 2 in FIG. 241) is being executed at a timing ("A3" in FIG. 241) that is "n×T" after timing A, the interrupt process can be executed at timing C (timing "A8" in FIG. 241) after the interrupt process started at timing B is executed.
(c) Effect of the original invention 2: Same as that of the original invention 1.

3. Initial invention 3
(a) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 3 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing timer interrupt processing (hereinafter simply referred to as "interrupt processing").
Conventionally, gaming machines that are capable of executing interrupt processing during main processing are known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-089184). It is also known to provide an interrupt prohibition period in the main processing.
However, in the conventional technology, an interrupt period may occur during an interrupt disabled period, and the interrupt process may not be executed appropriately after that.
The problem that the original invention is intended to solve is to make interrupt processing consistent even when there is a period during which interrupts are disabled.

(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 3 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (13th embodiment) is as follows:
The interrupt process (FIG. 232) with a period “T” (in FIG. 238, “Tc”) is executable.
The main processing has at least one interrupt disabled period,
When the maximum design period of the interrupt disabled period is "S"("Td" in FIG. 232),
T>S (Tc>Td)
The present invention is characterized in that:

(c) Effects of the Original Invention 3 According to the original invention, the designed maximum period "S" of the interrupt inhibition period is shorter than the interrupt cycle "T", so even if the interrupt inhibition period starts after the execution of an interrupt process, the interrupt inhibition period can end before the next interrupt process cycle arrives. This makes it possible to maintain the interrupt cycle "T" and execute the next interrupt process.

4. Initial invention 4
(a) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 4 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing timer interrupt processing (hereinafter simply referred to as "interrupt processing").
Conventionally, gaming machines that are capable of executing interrupt processing during main processing are known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-089184). It is also known to provide an interrupt prohibition period in the main processing.
However, in the conventional technology, there are cases where an interrupt period occurs during an interrupt disabled period, and in such a case, a problem arises as to how to update the counter for measuring the interrupt period.
The problem that the original invention is intended to solve is how to properly update a counter for measuring an interrupt period.

(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 4 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (13th embodiment) is as follows:
The value of a predetermined counter (8-bit counter 501) can be updated.
When the predetermined counter times out (for example, when it reaches "125"), a predetermined register (interrupt wait monitor register 301) is capable of storing predetermined information indicating that an interrupt request has been made;
When the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined register, an interrupt process (FIG. 232) can be executed.
The main process has at least one interrupt disabled period,
Even if the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined register during the interrupt disabled period, the interrupt process is not executed during the interrupt disabled period, and the value of the predetermined counter can be updated (FIG. 239).
It is characterized by:

(c) Effects of the Original Invention 4 According to the original invention, even when there is an interrupt disabled period, it is possible to prevent the interrupt period from being disrupted as much as possible. Also, it is possible to prevent the interrupt disabled period from affecting the update of a predetermined counter.

5. Initial invention 5
(a) The problem that the original invention 5 aims to solve is the same as the original invention 4.
(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 5 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (13th embodiment) is as follows:
The value of a predetermined counter (8-bit counter 501) can be updated.
When the predetermined counter times out (for example, when it reaches "125"), a predetermined register (interrupt wait monitor register 301) is capable of storing predetermined information indicating that an interrupt request has been made;
When the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined register, an interrupt process (FIG. 232) can be executed.
The main process has at least one interrupt disabled period,
If the specified information is stored in the specified register during the interrupt disabled period, the interrupt process is enabled after the next instruction (e.g., the "RET" instruction) is executed based on the interrupt enable instruction ("EI" instruction) (FIG. 228(A)).
It is characterized by:
(c) Effect of the original invention 5: Same as that of the original invention 4.

6. Original invention 6
(a) The problem that the original invention 6 aims to solve is the same as the original invention 4.
(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 6 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (13th embodiment) is as follows:
The value of a predetermined counter (8-bit counter 501) can be updated.
When the predetermined counter times out (for example, when it reaches "125"), a predetermined register (interrupt wait monitor register 301) is capable of storing predetermined information indicating that an interrupt request has been made;
When the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined register, an interrupt process (FIG. 232) can be executed.
The main process has at least one interrupt disabled period,
Even if the predetermined counter times out "n (n>1)" times during an interrupt disabled period, the interrupt process is not executed "n" times in succession based on the "n" times of timeout (FIG. 235).
It is characterized by:

(c) Effects of the Original Invention 6 According to the original invention, even when there is an interrupt disabled period, it is possible to prevent the interrupt period from being disrupted as much as possible. Also, it is possible to prevent the interrupt disabled period from affecting the update of a predetermined counter.
Furthermore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the main process cannot be executed due to interrupt processes being executed multiple times in succession after the end of the interrupt disabled period.

7. Original invention 7
(a) The problem that the original invention 7 aims to solve is the same as the original invention 4.
(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 7 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (13th embodiment) is as follows:
The value of a predetermined counter (8-bit counter 501) can be updated.
When the predetermined counter times out (for example, when it reaches "125"), a predetermined register (interrupt wait monitor register 301) is capable of storing predetermined information indicating that an interrupt request has been made;
When the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined register, an interrupt process (FIG. 232) can be executed.
The main process has at least one interrupt disabled period,
The interrupt disable period is shorter than the period from when the value of the specified counter times out until it times out again (FIG. 238).
It is characterized by:

(c) Effects of the Original Invention 7 According to the original invention, even when there is an interrupt disabled period, it is possible to prevent the interrupt period from being disrupted as much as possible. Also, it is possible to prevent the interrupt disabled period from affecting the update of a predetermined counter.
Furthermore, even if an interrupt process is executed after the end of the interrupt disabled period, the interrupt process can be completed before the arrival of the next interrupt period.

8. Original invention 8
(a) The problem that the original invention 8 aims to solve is the same as the original invention 4.
(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 8 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (13th embodiment) is as follows:
The value of a specific counter (8-bit counter 501) can be updated from the time when a specific value (for example, "125") is written to a specific register (counter setting register 503),
When the predetermined counter times out (for example, when it reaches "125"), a predetermined register (interrupt wait monitor register 301) is capable of storing predetermined information indicating that an interrupt request has been made;
When the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined register, an interrupt process (FIG. 232) can be executed.
After the power is turned on, a specific value is written to the specific register, and then it is possible to determine whether or not there is an RWM abnormality (in FIG. 229, after the processing of step S2861, the RWM abnormality determination processing of steps S2708, S2712, and S2715 is executed).
After determining whether or not there is an RWM abnormality, an interrupt permission command is executed (for example, the "EI" command in step S2740 in FIG. 231), and when the specified information is stored in the specified register, the first interrupt processing since the power is turned on can be executed.

(c) Effects of the Original Invention 8 According to the original invention, even when there is an interrupt disabled period, it is possible to prevent the interrupt period from being disrupted as much as possible. Also, it is possible to prevent the interrupt disabled period from affecting the update of a predetermined counter.
Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the RWM data from being changed from before the power was turned off due to the interrupt process, thereby making it possible to accurately determine an RWM abnormality and to execute the interrupt process as soon as possible after the interrupt permission command is issued.

9. Original invention 9
(a) The problem that the original invention 9 aims to solve is the same as the original invention 4.
(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 9 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (13th embodiment) is as follows:
The value of a specific counter (8-bit counter 501) can be updated from the time when a specific value (for example, "125") is written to a specific register (counter setting register 503),
When the predetermined counter times out (for example, when it reaches "125"), a predetermined register (interrupt wait monitor register 301) is capable of storing predetermined information indicating that an interrupt request has been made;
When the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined register, an interrupt process (FIG. 232) can be executed.
After the power is turned on, the presence or absence of an RWM abnormality can be determined, and after determining the presence or absence of an RWM abnormality, a specific value is written to the specific register (after the RWM abnormality determination processing of steps S2708, S2712, and S2715 in FIG. 229 is executed, the processing of step S2871 in FIG. 230 is executed),
After determining whether or not there is an RWM abnormality, an interrupt permission command is executed, and when the specified information is stored in the specified register, the first interrupt process after the power is turned on can be executed.

(c) Effects of the Original Invention 9 According to the original invention, even when there is an interrupt disabled period, it is possible to prevent the interrupt period from being disrupted as much as possible. Also, it is possible to prevent the interrupt disabled period from affecting the update of a predetermined counter.
Furthermore, it is possible to prevent interrupt processing from being started due to a malfunction while the RWM abnormality determination is being performed, thereby eliminating the risk of the RWM data being updated by the execution of the interrupt processing before the RWM abnormality determination is performed.

10. Original invention 10
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 10 The original invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing timer interrupt processing (hereinafter simply referred to as "interrupt processing").
Conventionally, gaming machines that are capable of executing interrupt processing during main processing are known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-089184). It is also known to provide an interrupt prohibition period in the main processing.
However, in the conventional technology, if the value of a counter for counting the interrupt period is held when the power is turned off, there is a problem that the time until the first interrupt process is executed when the power is turned on varies.
The problem that the original invention was intended to solve was to make uniform the time until the first interrupt process is executed when the power is turned on.

(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 10 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (13th embodiment) is as follows:
The value of a predetermined counter (8-bit counter 501) can be updated.
When the predetermined counter times out (for example, when it reaches "125"), a predetermined register (interrupt wait monitor register 301) is capable of storing predetermined information indicating that an interrupt request has been made;
When the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined register, an interrupt process (FIG. 232) can be executed.
The power supply is turned off when the value of the specified counter is "n" and the specific information stored in the RWM is "t", and when the power supply is subsequently turned on without satisfying the setting change condition, the value of the specified counter is "0" and the specific information stored in the RWM is "t".

(c) Effect of Original Invention 10 According to the original invention, when the power is turned off and then turned on without the setting change condition being satisfied, the value of the specified counter becomes "0." Therefore, the time from when the power is turned on to when the first interrupt processing is executed can be made longer compared to when the value of the specified counter is maintained when the power is turned off.

11. Original invention 11
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 11 The original invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing timer interrupt processing (hereinafter simply referred to as "interrupt processing").
Conventionally, gaming machines that are capable of executing interrupt processing during main processing are known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-089184). It is also known to provide an interrupt prohibition period in the main processing.
However, in the conventional technology, there is a problem in that the interrupt period may be disrupted when an interrupt process is executed.
The problem that the original invention was intended to solve was to prevent the interrupt period from being disrupted when an interrupt process is executed.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 11 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (13th embodiment) is as follows:
The value of a predetermined counter (8-bit counter 501) can be updated.
When the predetermined counter times out (for example, when it reaches "125"), a predetermined register (interrupt wait monitor register 301) is capable of storing predetermined information indicating that an interrupt request has been made;
When the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined register, an interrupt process (FIG. 232) can be executed.
The value of the predetermined counter can be cycled from "m" (for example, "125") to "1",
Even if an interrupt process is executed when the value of the specified counter is not "m", the value of the specified counter does not return to "m" and can be updated even during the execution of the interrupt process.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 11 According to the original invention, the interrupt period can be kept constant regardless of the time required for interrupt processing.

12. Original invention 12
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 12 The original invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing timer interrupt processing (hereinafter simply referred to as "interrupt processing").
Conventionally, gaming machines that are capable of executing interrupt processing during main processing are known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-089184). It is also known to provide an interrupt prohibition period in the main processing.
However, in the conventional technology, when an interrupt process is completed and an interrupt permission instruction and a return instruction are executed, there is a risk that the interrupt process will be executed redundantly.
The problem that the original invention is intended to solve is to prevent the risk of overlapping execution of interrupt processing after completion of interrupt processing.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 12 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (13th embodiment) is as follows:
The value of a predetermined counter (8-bit counter 501) can be updated.
When the predetermined counter times out (for example, when it reaches "125"), a predetermined register (interrupt wait monitor register 301) is capable of storing predetermined information indicating that an interrupt request has been made;
When the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined register, an interrupt process (FIG. 232) can be executed.
Interrupts are prohibited during execution of the interrupt process (step S2890 (IFF1=0, IFF2=0) in FIG. 232).
When the interrupt process is to be terminated, the interrupt permission command is executed (step S2892), and then the return command (step S2893) is made executable.
When the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined register during execution of the interrupt process, the interrupt process can be executed after a return instruction is executed.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 12 According to the original invention, by preventing an interrupt process from being executed immediately after an interrupt permission instruction is issued, it is possible to prevent duplicate execution of interrupt processes.

13. Original invention 13
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 13 The original invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing timer interrupt processing (hereinafter simply referred to as "interrupt processing").
Conventionally, gaming machines that are capable of executing interrupt processing during main processing are known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-089184). It is also known to provide an interrupt prohibition period in the main processing.
However, in the conventional technology, if an interrupt period occurs multiple times during an interrupt disabled period, the interrupt processing is repeated multiple times after the interrupt disabled period ends, which may make it impossible to execute the main processing.
The problem that the original invention is intended to solve is to prevent overlapping execution of interrupt processing after the end of an interrupt disabled period.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 13 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (13th embodiment) is as follows:
The value of a predetermined counter (8-bit counter 501) can be updated.
When the predetermined counter times out (for example, when it reaches "125"), a predetermined register (interrupt wait monitor register 301) is capable of storing predetermined information indicating that an interrupt request has been made;
When the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined register, an interrupt process (FIG. 232) can be executed.
Interrupts are prohibited during execution of the interrupt process (step S2890 (IFF1=0, IFF2=0) in FIG. 232).
Even if the predetermined counter times out "n (n>1)" times during the execution of an interrupt process, the interrupt process is not executed "n" times in succession based on the timeout "n" times (FIG. 236).
It is characterized by:

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 13 According to the original invention, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the main process cannot be executed due to the interrupt process being repeatedly executed multiple times after the end of an interrupt disabled period.

10. Slot machines (gaming machines)
10a Lower panel 11 Power switch 12 Front door 12c Control panel 13 Cabinet 14 Pattern display device 17 Door switch 21 Performance lamp (decorative lamp section)
22 Speaker 23 Image display device 24 (24A, 24B) Operation button 31 Reel 32 Motor 33 Reel sensor 35 Hopper 36 Hopper motor 37a, 37b Payout sensor 40a 1 bet switch 40b 3 bet switch 41 Start switch 42 Stop switch 43 Settlement switch 44a, 44b Insertion sensor 45 Blocker 46 Passage sensor 47 Token insertion slot 50 Main control board (main control means)
51 Input port 52 Output port 53 RWM
54 ROM
55 Main CPU
61 Role selection means 62 Winning flag control means 63 Push order instruction number selection means 64 Performance group number selection means 65 Reel control means 66 Winning determination means 67 Payout means 71 Control command transmission means 73 Setting value display LED
74 Management information display LED (role ratio monitor)
75 Display board 76 Credit number display LED
77 Advantageous period display LED
78 Acquisition number display LED
79 Status indicator LED
79a 1 bet display LED
79b 2 bet display LED
79c 3 bet display LED
79d Game start display LED
79e Input indicator LED
79f Replay display LED
80 Sub-control board (sub-control means)
81 Input port 82 Output port 83 RWM
84 ROM
85 Sub CPU
91: Performance output control means 151: Setting key insertion slot 152: Setting key switch 153: Setting change (reset) switch 200: Hall computer 301: Interrupt waiting monitor register 302: Interrupt prohibition flag (IFF1 register, IFF2 register)
500 Timer circuit 501 (PTC) 8-bit counter 502 (PTC) Prescaler register 503 (PTC) Counter setting register 504 (PTC) Interrupt flag

Claims (1)

A main control means is provided.
A sub-control means is provided,
The main control means is capable of executing a main process and a timer interrupt process;
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed is enabled;
The sub-control means is capable of storing information regarding the number of game media awarded between setting changes for a plurality of times,
The sub-control means is capable of storing information regarding the number of games played between setting changes for a plurality of times,
Even if the setting change mode is executed by satisfying the predetermined conditions, the information on the number of game media awarded between multiple setting changes stored in the sub-control means is not cleared,
This gaming machine is characterized in that , even when a setting change mode is executed by satisfying a predetermined condition, information on the number of games played between multiple setting changes stored in a sub-control means is not cleared .

Images